
Class J^ZZZSl. 
GopyrightN? 

COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT; 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR 
LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 

[PARA EL FOMENTO DE NUESTRAS BUENAS 

RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS 

LATINOAMERICANOS] 

A JOURNEY TO SOUTH AMERICA 

[VIAJE A LA AMERICA DEL SUR] 

PART I 

ENGUSH VERSION 

[Parte I. Version Inglesa] 



Carnegie Endowment for International Peace 

DIVISION OF INTERCOURSE AND EDUCATION 
Second edition of Publications Nos. 7 and 8 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR 
LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 

A JOURNEY TO SOUTH AMERICA 



BY 

ROBERT BACON 



WASHINGTON, D. C. 
1916 



Monograph 



Fzzz.2 
Z/Z( 



Copyright, 1916, by the 
Cabnegee Endowment for International Peace, 
Washington, D. C. 




MAY 22 19/6 



THE EVENING POST JOB PRINTING OFFICE, INC., NEW YORK CITY, 
NEW YORK. 



©CI.A'433112 



Preface 

No small part of the work of the Division of Intercourse and Education of 
the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace is done through the medium 
of international visits by representative men. Experience has already confirmed 
the reasonable assumption that such visits are useful, and in high degree helpful, 
in building up a spirit of international friendship and in developing international 
understanding. A careful reading of Mr. Robert Bacon's Report of the details 
of his trip to South America in the summer and autumn of 19 13 will show 
precisely how such visits as his contribute to the peace and good order of the 
world. National ideals and national policies are carefully and sympathetically 
explained, not only to leading personalities in the countries visited, but also to 
large and representative audiences of teachers, merchants and men of affairs. 
The newspaper press is almost uniformly interested and helpful on occasions 
of this kind, and the visitor of distinction and of public service at home is made 
cordially and warmly welcome. 

It is in high degree important to multiply such visits on the part of representa- 
tive men in the various American republics. The barrier of language will be 
broken down, or surmounted, as a knowledge of English becomes more wide- 
spread in the South American countries, and as the ability to read, to speak and 
to write Spanish increases in the United States. Bonds of a common interest 
in finance and in commerce are already being forged between the peoples of the 
several American republics. These bonds will be followed and strengthened 
by others in due time. There will thus be developed a genuine American public 
opinion and a genuine American understanding and point of view, that will be 
common alike to the people of the United States and to those of the other 
republics to the south. 

The first edition of Mr. Bacon's Report was published in two volumes, one 
in English and the other in Spanish, Portuguese and French. This edition now 
being exhausted, and the demand for the publication continuing, a second edition 
is published, in which the two versions are combined in one volume. 

Nicholas Murray Butler, 

Acting Director. 
April 10, 191 6. 



CONTENTS 

Page 

Preface by Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler v 

Note by Mr. Bacon x 

Introduction : 

President Root's Letter of Instructions i 

Editorial from The American Journal of International Law 5 

Mr. Bacon's Preliminary Report 10 

For Better Relations with our Latin American Neighbors : 

I. Preliminary Observations 13 

II. The Journey to South America 22 

Brazil 23 

Rio de Janeiro 23 

Argentina 27 

Buenos Aires 27 

Uruguay 32 

Montevideo 32 

Chile 35 

Santiago de Chile 35 

Peru 40 

Lima 40 

Panama 46 

Interview in The New York Evening Post 49 

Editorial from The American Journal of International Law 54 

Appendices : 

I. Paris 59 

Luncheon of Mr. Gabriel Hanotaux 59 

II. Rio de Janeiro 61 

Historical Institute of Brazil 61 

Remarks of Dr. de Oliveira Lima 61 

Response of Mr. Bacon 62 

Reception at the American Embassy 63 

Remarks of Dr. de Oliveira Lima 63 

Response of Mr. Bacon 63 

Reception at the National Library 70 

Address of Senator Ruy Barbosa 70 

Response of Mr. Bacon 79 

Letter of Sefior Helio Lobo 90 

III. Buenos Aires 92 

Dinner of Dr. E. S. Zeballos 92 

Remarks of Dr. Zeballos 92 

Response of Mr. Bacon 92 

Reception of the Faculty of Law 95 

Remarks of Dr. Luis M. Drago 95 

Address of Mr. Bacon 95 



contents — Continued Page 

IV. Montevideo "*> 

Luncheon of Mr. Nicolay Grevstad 106 

Remarks of Mr. Grevstad 106 

Response of Mr. Bacon 106 

Reception at the Ateneo 107 

Address of Mr. Bacon 107 

Dinner of Sefior Emilio Barbaroux, Minister of Foreign Affairs. 115 

Remarks of Sefior Barbaroux 115 

Response of Mr. Bacon 115 

V. Santiago de Chile 117 

Reception at the University of Chile 117 

Remarks of Dr. Domingo Amunategui Solar, Rector of the 

University 117 

Address of Dr. Luis Barros Borgofio 117 

Address of Mr. Bacon 122 

Note of the National Society of International Law 130 

VI. Lima 133 

Reception at the University of San Marcos 133 

Address of Dr. Romero 133 

Address of Mr. Bacon 134 

Banquet of Sefior Tudela y Varela, Minister of Foreign Affairs. 144 

Address of Sefior Tudela y Varela 144 

Response of Mr. Bacon 144 

Reception at the Centro Universitario 145 

Remarks of Sefior Luis G. Rivera 145 

Reception of the Bar Association 146 

Address of Dr. Manuel F. Bellido 146 

Address of Dr. Anibal Maurtua 147 

Response of Mr. Bacon 149 

Reception of the Geographical Society 155 

Remarks of Sefior Jose Balta 155 

Response of Mr. Bacon 155 

Banquet of the Faculty of the University of San Marcos 156 

Remarks of Dr. Romero 156 

Response of Mr. Bacon 157 

Letter of Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle 158 

VII. Monographs Printed and Distributed in Latin America: 

1. The Carnegie Endowment for International Peace 159 

Division of Intercourse and Education 163 

Division of Economics and History 165 

Division of International Law , . . . . 170 

2. Associations for International Conciliation 176 

3. Proposed Court of International Justice 181 

4. Proposed Academy of International Law at The Hague. . . . 189 

5. National Committees for the Third Hague Peace Conference. 194 

6. The American Institute of International Law and National 

Societies of International Law 201 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR 
LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 



A JOURNEY TO SOUTH AMERICA 



Note 

In this account of a visit made to South America in the fall of 1913, as the 
representative of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, upon the 
invitation of Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, Director of the Division of Intercourse 
and Education, it has seemed well, for the sake of the record, to begin with the 
letter of instructions addressed to me by the Honorable Elihu Root, President 
of the Endowment, an editorial from the American Journal of International Law, 
commenting on the objects of the mission, and my brief letter to the Trustees 
upon my return, reporting what had been done. These are followed by a more 
detailed narrative account of the visit in each capital, another editorial from the 
American Journal of International Law discussing the results of the mission, and, 
in conclusion, an interview reporting some impressions of what had been seen and 
heard on the journey. In the Appendices will be found copies of addresses, 
letters, and drafts, or disefios, of addresses which were either delivered or pub- 
lished as articles in South American reviews. 

Robert Bacon. 

New York, June, 1914. 



INTRODUCTION 



President Root*s Letter of Instructions 

Washington, D. C, July 20, 1913. 

Hon. Robert Bacon. 

Sir: 

I beg to confirm your appointment, by formal action of the Carnegie Endow- 
ment for International Peace, as the representative of the Endowment to visit 
South America at such time as you shall determine upon during the present year. 
The object of this mission, which you have already gratified us by promising to 
undertake, is to secure the interest and sympathy of the leaders of opinion in 
South America in the various enterprises for the advancement of international 
peace which the Endowment is seeking to promote, and by means of personal 
intercourse and explanation to bring about practical cooperation in that work in 
South America. You are already aware, and will readily make plain to our 
friends in South America, that Mr. Carnegie has placed in the hands of trustees 
the sum of ten million dollars, the income of which is to be devoted by them to 
the promotion of international peace. The trustees, upon consideration of the 
way in which they should seek the end for which the trust was established, for- 
mulated the following statement of specific objects to which the income of the 
trust should be devoted. 

(a) To promote a thorough and scientific investigation and study of 
the causes of war and of the practical methods to prevent and avoid it. 

(b) To aid in the development of international law, and a general 
agreement on the rules thereof, and the acceptance of the same among 
nations. 

(c) To diffuse information, and to educate public opinion regarding 
the causes, nature, and effects of war, and means for its prevention and 
avoidance. 

(d) To establish a better understanding of international rights and du- 
ties and a more perfect sense of international justice among the inhabitants 
of civilized countries. 



2 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

(e) To cultivate friendly feelings between the inhabitants of different 
countries and to increase the knowledge and understanding of each other by 
the several nations. 

(f) To promote a general acceptance of peaceable methods in the set- 
tlement of international disputes. 

(g) To maintain, promote, and assist such establishments, organiza- 
tions, associations, and agencies as shall be deemed necessary or useful in 
the accomplishment of the purposes of the corporation, or any of them. 

To accomplish these objects the work of the trust has been organized in three 
divisions: (i) the Division of Intercourse and Education, of which Dr. Nicholas 
Murray Butler, President of Columbia University, is Acting Director; (2) the 
Division of Economics and History, of which Dr. John Bates Clark is Director; 
(3) the Division of International Law, of which the Secretary of the Endowment, 
Dr. James Brown Scott, is Director. The various objects above enumerated have 
been appropriately assigned to these three divisions. The methods and details of 
activity on the part of each of the divisions you will find indicated in a series of 
monographs, which will be handed to you herewith. From these you will per- 
ceive two things: first, that it is the purpose of the trustees, not that the trust 
organization shall become a missionary seeking to preach the gospel of peace or 
directly to express its own ideas to the world, but rather to promote and advance 
in each country and in all countries the organization and activity of national 
forces in favor of peace. It is not so much to add a new peace organization to 
those already existing in the world as it is to be a means of giving renewed vigor 
to all the activities which really tend in a practical way towards preventing war 
and making peace more secure. Second, that in aid of the work of each of these 
three divisions an extensive and effective organization has been perfected in 
Europe as well as in America, including a great number of the most eminent and 
highly respected statesmen, publicists, and leaders of modern thought. 

The respect and friendship which the trustees of the Endowment entertain 
for the peoples of Latin America and for the many distinguished Latin Americans 
with whom many of the trustees have most agreeable relations of personal friend- 
ship, lead us to desire that the work of the Endowment may have the same active 
and useful cooperation in South America that it has already secured in Europe. 
For this purpose we should be glad to have you make to the gentlemen whom 
you meet in the South American capitals a full and thorough explanation of the 
history and purposes and methods of the Endowment. 

You will observe that one of the means by which the Division of Intercourse 
and Education proposes to advance international good understanding is a series 
of international visits of representative men. Accordingly, under the auspices 
of the Division, directly or indirectly, Baron d'Estournelles de Constant of 
France, the Baroness von Suttner of Austria, and Professor Nitobe of Japan 
have already visited the United States, and President Eliot of Harvard Univer- 
sity has visited India, China, and Japan, and Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie is now 



LETTER OF INSTRUCTIONS o 

in Japan. Your visit to South America comes in this category, but it has a more 
definite and specific purpose than any of the other visits which I have enumerated 
or which are contemplated under the head that I have mentioned; for it is not 
merely to strengthen good understanding by personal intercourse between a rep- 
resentative North American and representative South Americans, but it is also 
to introduce to representative South Americans personally the work and purposes 
and ideals of the Endowment, and to invite our friends in South America to 
cordial and sympathetic union with us in promoting the great work of the trust. 

It is not expedient or desirable in advance of your visit to be too specific 
regarding the scope and method of cooperation which may be possible with our 
South American friends, but you will readily observe in the monographs handed 
to you a number of ways in which such cooperation may be accomplished with but 
little delay. For example : (a) the formation of national societies of international 
law to be affiliated with the American Institute of International Law; (b) the 
presentation to the different governments of the opportunity to participate in the 
proposed Academy of International Law at The Hague by providing for the 
sending on the part of each government of a representative student to that 
academy, if organized. You will notice that the organization of such an academy 
to bring together students from the whole world under the leaders of thought 
in international law each summer depends very largely upon the question whether 
the governments of the world feel the need of such an institution sufficiently to 
give it their formal support by sending a representative student, (c) The ap- 
pointment of national committees for the consideration of contributions to the 
program of the next Hague Conference and making arrangements for the inter- 
communication of such committees among all the American countries, (d) The 
establishment of national societies for international conciliation to be affiliated 
with the parent Association for International Conciliation at Paris, (e) To ar- 
range for systematic furnishing of data for the work of the Division of Eco- 
nomics and History in accordance with the program laid down at Berne by the 
congress of economists in the summer of 191 1. You will observe that Dr. Kin- 
ley, who was appointed a member of the Committee of Research with special 
reference to South America, will follow you in a visit to South America within 
a short period, and will suggest specifically the things that can be done in aid of 
the researches of this division. Your office in this respect should be to prepare 
the way for Dr. Kinley's reception and cooperation with him. 

The trustees of the Endowment are fully aware that progress in the work 
which they have undertaken must necessarily be slow and that its most substan- 
tial results must be far in the future. We are dealing with aptitudes and im- 
pulses firmly established in human nature through the development of thousands 
of years, and the utmost that any one generation can hope to do is to promote 
the gradual change of standards of conduct. All estimates of such a work and 
its results must be in terms not of individual human life, but in terms of the 
long life of nations. Inconspicuous as are the immediate results, however, there 



4 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

can be no nobler object of human effort than to exercise an influence upon the 
tendencies of the race, so that it shall move, however slowly, in the direction of 
civilization and humanity and away from senseless brutality. It is to participate 
with us in this noble, though inconspicuous, work that we ask you to invite our 
friends in South America with the most unreserved and sincere assurances of 
our high consideration and warm regard. 

Very faithfully yours, 

Elihu Root, 

President. 



Editorial from The American Journal of International Law, 

July, 191 3 

Announcement has been made by the Carnegie Endowment for International 
Peace that the Honorable Robert Bacon, formerly Secretary of State and Ameri- 
can Ambassador to France, will make a visit under its auspices to South America 
during the coming fall. The specific objects of Mr. Bacon's visit have not yet 
been made public, but the general object of the mission is stated to be to secure 
the interest and sympathy of the leaders of opinion in South America in the 
various enterprises for the advancement of international peace which the Endow- 
ment is seeking to promote, and by means of personal intercourse and explanation 
to bring about the practical cooperation of South America in that work. 

The aims and purposes of the Carnegie Endowment have already several 
times been commented upon in the columns of this Journal. In the issue of 
January, 191 1, we printed Mr. Carnegie's letter, which accompanied the deed 
transferring the bonds, in which Mr. Carnegie stated his reasons for establishing 
the trust, and in the issue of April, 191 1, the permanent organization effected by 
the Trustees and the specific purposes to which they would devote the income 
from the trust were stated. In the following number we printed an address of 
Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, a member of the Board of Trustees and of the 
Executive Committee of the Endowment, delivered at the opening of the Lake 
Mohonk Conference on May 24, 191 1, in which he explained the division of the 
Endowment's work into three general departments, the Divisions of Intercourse 
and Education, Economics and History, and International Law, and stated what 
the Trustees hoped to accomplish in each division. 

The Year Books issued by the Endowment for 191 1 and 1912 supply the 
details of the work being done in each of these divisions, and some idea may be 
obtained from them of the enterprises which the Endowment might hope to extend 
to South America as the result of Mr. Bacon's visit. 

In the Division of Intercourse and Education there has been appointed a 
corps of correspondents and an advisory council for Europe and Asia composed 
of prominent and influential men in the different countries. No provision for 
such an organization for Latin America seems yet to have been made, and the 
extension of the European organization to those countries would seem to be a 
prime object of Mr. Bacon's visit. There is also reference in the Year Books 
to an educational exchange with Latin America, including not only an exchange 
of professors, but also an exchange of students. It appears from the last Year 
Book that the educational exchange with Japan has already been successfully 
carried out by the visit to the United States during 1911-1912 of the well-known 
Japanese educator, Dr. Inazo Nitobe, and the return visit to Japan during the 



6 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

present year of Dr. Hamilton W. Mabie; but it does not appear to have been 
practicable so far to bring about such an exchange with Latin America, although 
provision for it has been made each year by the officers and Trustees. It was 
planned to put the exchange with Latin America into operation during the year 
1912, and arrangements were begun for the visit to the United States of Dr. Luis 
M. Drago, formerly Minister of Foreign Affairs for the Argentine Republic, but 
the state of Dr. Drago's health was such that the plan could not be consummated. 
Perhaps the presence of Mr. Bacon in South America will be utilized to arrange 
a definite program for carrying out this project. 

Another project reported under this Division is the scheme for international 
visits of representative men. Such visits have already been inaugurated with 
Asia by the recent trip of Dr. Charles W. Eliot, and with Europe by the visit of 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant and several other eminent Europeans to the 
United States. The trip of Mr. Bacon is evidently the first step in such an inter- 
change of visits with Latin America. This Division seems also to be particu- 
larly interested in the extension of branches of the Association for International 
Conciliation, which has its headquarters in Paris and a strong branch in New 
York City. In this connection it is interesting to note that if the recommenda- 
tions of the Acting Director of the Division of Intercourse and Education are 
followed by the Trustees, it is likely that the Endowment will rely more upon 
this form of propaganda in the future, as distinct from the work of peace so- 
cieties which have heretofore been generally the agents of popular propaganda 
in the peace movement. The following extract from the report of the Acting 
Director to the Executive Committee, dated November 16, 1912, shows the clear 
distinction between the two forms of organization and the separate fields of ac- 
tivity of each : 

The Acting Director is entirely clear in the opinion formed as a result 
of two years of study of conditions which prevail both in European countries 
and in the United States, that the work of propaganda in support of the ends 
which the Endowment has been established to serve, can be carried on most 
effectively and economically not through peace organizations alone, but 
through organizations having a broader scope and making a wider appeal. 
Those persons who become members of a society whose name indicates that 
it is devoted to peace, are already converted. In every nation in the world 
there are hosts of right-thinking and well-minded men and women who, 
while wholly unwilling to affiliate themselves with any peace society, are 
ready and anxious to assist in the work of promoting better international 
understandings and closer international relationships from which peace will 
result as a by-product. The function of the peace societies is a distinctive 
and very important one. They may well form a compact and effective body 
of workers in the cause of international peace and arbitration, who consti- 
tute as it were the advance guard of the great army which it is hoped can be 
recruited and brought into active service. In the present state of public 
opinion throughout the world, the best use which the Carnegie Endowment 
can make. of such portion of its funds as can be devoted to the work of 
active propaganda, is to build up and support organizations which give evi- 



AMERICAN JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL LAW 7 

dence of a willingness and a capacity to promote closer international relations, 
to advance the knowledge on the part of each civilized people of its fellows, 
and to multiply the ties of friendship and concord between the great nations 
of the earth. Among these organizations peace societies will of course be 
found, but it would not be judicious to entrust the whole work of propa- 
ganda to them. 

Societies of international conciliation have recently been started in Germany, 
Great Britain and Canada, and steps are being taken to organize an association 
of this kind in Argentina. It may be feasible for Mr. Bacon on his forthcoming 
trip to suggest the establishment of such organizations in the other countries 
which he will visit. 

Perhaps the most far-reaching and important work the Endowment is doing 
is that which is being conducted under the Division of Economics and History. 
A full account of the work of this Division and of the conference of economists 
held under its auspices at Berne in 191 1 for the purpose of devising a plan of 
inquiry and investigation is contained in the editorial columns of this Journal 
for October, 191 1, p. 1037. There is also printed therein the full program 
recommended by that conference. It appears from the reports of the Director 
of this Division that the members of the Conference of Berne have since been 
formed into a permanent Committee of Research to supervise the actual work 
of investigation, which is entrusted to collaborators able to devote a large portion 
of their time to the work and to put the results in form suitable for publication. 
An American economist having unusual familiarity with South American condi- 
tions and large attainments in economic science, both theoretical and practical, 
Professor David Kinley of the University of Illinois, has been added to the Com- 
mittee of Research, and he has planned a line of research having its field in South 
America. Mr. Bacon will probably find the occasion opportune to explain the 
work of this Division and to invite the aid and cooperation of the economists of 
South America in extending to these countries the program of studies outlined 
by the Conference at Berne. 

The Journal has likewise had occasion to comment on the organization and 
projects of the Division of International Law. In the number for October, 19 12, 
an editorial comment explained the relations which had been established between 
the Institute of International Law and the Division of International Law of the 
Endowment, under which the former has accepted the title and performs the 
functions of General Legal Adviser of the Division. In the same issue there was 
a comment upon the organization of the American Institute of International Law, 
and further comment and information concerning this project was given in an 
editorial in the January number for 1913. The field of usefulness of the 
European Institute to the Endowment seems to be limited to the Eastern Hemi- 
sphere, and if it is the intention of the Trustees to secure a similar advisory body 
for Latin America, the proposed American Institute would seem to be an admir- 
ably constituted body to perform these functions, and it has the advantage of 



8 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

being already in existence, and will no doubt be willing to follow the example 
of its distinguished European prototype and enter into similar arrangements 
with the Division of International Law. 

Unlike the European Institute, a feature of the American Institute requires 
the establishment of national societies of international law. Mr. Bacon's visit 
could not only, therefore, be utilized to accelerate the organization of the Institute 
in those countries of South America which may not have progressed so far as 
others in this organization, but also to suggest and aid in the formation of national 
societies of international law to be affiliated with the Institute in accordance with 
the plan already outlined in the previous issues of the Journal above referred to. 

Another project of the Division of International Law in which Mr. Bacon 
could be particularly useful is the proposed Academy of International Law at 
The Hague. This proposal is briefly outlined in a comment in the January, 19 12, 
number of the Journal at p. 205. It appears from the report of the Director of 
the Division of International Law, dated October 26, 1912, that before com- 
mitting itself definitely to the support of such an Academy, the Executive Com- 
mittee of the Endowment wishes to be assured that the Academy is approved 
generally by the countries represented at the Second Hague Conference, and that, 
if established, these countries will aid and assist in securing a student body who, 
after having taken the courses at the Academy, will occupy such positions in 
their country as to make their influence felt in matters pertaining to international 
relations. It is explained that by this is meant students drawn from the different 
branches of the government service, such as the diplomatic and consular services, 
and the military, naval and civil establishments. The successful operation of 
such an arrangement necessarily requires the cordial sympathy and support of the 
South American countries, and Mr. Bacon's former high position in the Govern- 
ment of the United States will doubtless make it possible and proper for him to 
broach this subject to the high officials whom he will meet in the countries visited 
and to secure if possible their assurance of cooperation. 

Mr. Bacon is now in the Philippine Islands, and the details of the itinerary 
which he will follow in South America have not been published. It is expected, 
however, that he will return from the Orient by way of Europe, will sail from 
Lisbon about the middle of September, and will return to New York before 
Christmas. He will visit as many countries on the eastern and western coast of 
South America as his limited time will permit. 

Mr. Bacon will be the first American statesman to visit South America since 
the memorable visit of Senator Elihu Root, then Secretary of State of the United 
States. Mr. Root's trip was such a success in the good results accomplished and in 
the ties of friendship and good will resulting from it, that it is hardly to be ex- 
pected that Mr. Bacon, traveling as he is in a private capacity, will attain such 
marked results. If he succeeds, however, in small measure, in awakening the sen- 
timents which were expressed to Mr. Root on every hand, and if he spreads the 
gospel of good will and friendship, of good understanding and conciliation, of jus- 



AMERICAN JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL LAW 9 

tice and of peace, which it seems to be the desire and purpose of the Carnegie 
Endowment to spread to South America, as it has done, and is doing, in North 
America, Europe and Asia, his mission will have been an unqualified success and 
the Trustees of the Endowment which sent him will have just cause for congratu- 
lations for this enlargement and extension of their field of activity. 



Mr. Bacon's Preliminary Report 



To the; Board of Trustees of the 

Carnegie Endowment eor International Peace. 

Sirs: 

I have the honor to inform you that, in pursuance of the letter of instruc- 
tions of the Honorable Elihu Root, dated July 20, 1913, and delivered to me in 
Paris on September 14th by Dr. James Brown Scott, I have completed a visit to 
South America undertaken as the representative of the Carnegie Endowment for 
International Peace. 

After a week spent in Paris in the preparation of material with the generous 
and invaluable assistance of Dr. Scott and Senor Alejandro Alvarez, I proceeded 
to Lisbon, sailing from that port on September 23rd for Rio de Janeiro, accom- 
panied by my wife and daughter, Judge Otto Schoenrich and Mrs. Schoenrich 
and Mr. William R. Hereford. 

While in South America I visited the capitals of Brazil, Argentina, Uruguay, 
Chile and Peru. The inaccessibility of the capitals of the other Republics and the 
lack of satisfactory steamship and railway connections, made it impossible to ex- 
tend this itinerary in the time at my disposal. 

The universal admiration and respect in South America for the President 
of the Endowment, Mr. Root, the affectionate regard of his many friends in these 
countries, assured for me, as the bearer of his letter of instructions, the most 
cordial reception. In every country which I visited the leaders of opinion testi- 
fied in public addresses and in personal conversations to the high esteem in which 
the President of your Board is held in South America, and expressed their 
earnest desire to cooperate with him and his fellow-trustees in the work of 
the Endowment. 

In the countries mentioned I met the representative men, and by means of 
addresses, interviews and personal intercourse, was able to introduce to them the 
work and purposes and ideals of the Endowment. 

In Rio de Janeiro addresses were delivered at the Public Library, under the 
auspices of the Brazilian Academy and the Institute of the Order of Advocates, 
and at the American Embassy ; in Montevideo, at the Ateneo, under the auspices 
of the University; in Buenos Aires, before the Faculty of Law of the University; 
in Santiago, at the University of Chile; in Lima at the University of San Marcos, 
and before the Colegio de Abogados. 



MR. BACON'S PRELIMINARY REPORT 11 

I shall submit later, in the language in which they were delivered, copies of 
the principal addresses and of remarks made upon other public occasions ; also a 
collection of the principal articles appearing in the press. 

Year Books of the Endowment and printed pamphlets, some of which were 
for publication in newspapers and reviews, were distributed among the represent- 
ative South Americans. Copies of these pamphlets, which were descriptive of 
activities in which the Endowment is directly or indirectly interested, will be 
included in a subsequent report. 

On every side the invitation to our friends in South America to cordial and 
sympathetic union with the Trustees in the various enterprises which the Endow- 
ment is seeking to promote, met with enthusiastic response. 

The proposed exchange of visits of representative men was most heartily 
approved and might be put into execution without delay. The exchange of pro- 
fessors and students met with cordial approval. The time seems ripe to take up 
the question of the exchange of professors, and I feel sure that whenever the 
Trustees are prepared to make a definite proposal regarding the exchange of 
students they will find a willing cooperation in the five Republics which I visited. 

It was my good fortune to be in Lima while the Pan-American Medical 
Congress was in session, and at the opening meeting of that body of scientists, to 
hear one of the speakers, Dr. Cabred, refer with appreciation to the work of 
the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. I was deeply impressed by the 
fact that these men, gathered together from the American republics for a com- 
mon, humanitarian purpose, well represented the "international mind," and I took 
the liberty of suggesting to the President of the Congress, Dr. Odriozola, the 
possibility of selecting from the Congress representatives who might be willing 
to visit the United States in connection with the exchange of visits proposed by 
the Endowment. 

The way has been prepared for the formation of national societies for con- 
ciliation to be affiliated with the Associations for International Conciliation in 
Paris and New York. In Rio de Janeiro, Senhor Helio Lobo ; in Buenos Aires, 
Sehor Benjamin Garcia Victorica; and in Lima, Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle, 
have accepted the position of Honorary Secretary. 

Societies of International Law to be affiliated with the American Institute of 
International Law, have either been actually formed or are in process of forma- 
tion in Rio de Janeiro, Buenos Aires, Montevideo, Santiago and Lima. 

I had the honor of presenting to the Governments of the countries which I 
visited the opportunity to participate in the proposed Academy of International 
Law at The Hague, and of calling their attention to the necessity of appointing 
national committees for the consideration of contributions to the program of the 
next Hague Conference and making arrangements for the intercommunication 
of such committees among all the American countries. 

The representatives of the several Governments with whom I talked were 
receptive without exception. The proposed Academy of International Law at 



12 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The Hague made an immediate appeal to their sympathy and interest and they 
also expressed their appreciation of the importance of the early appointment of 
national committees to discuss contributions to the program of the next Hague 
Peace Conference. 

In all the principal addresses I took the opportunity to describe the work 
of the Division of Economics and History of the Endowment, and to bespeak for 
it the assistance of our friends in South America in arranging for the systematic 
furnishing of data in accordance with the program laid down at Berne. Special 
attention was called to the forthcoming visit to South America of Dr. Kinley 
as the representative of the Division. 

In every capital distinguished men gave their sympathetic, unfailing and in- 
valuable cooperation and assistance. These men devoted their time and thought 
with the utmost willingness. Through their efforts 1 was afforded the necessary 
opportunities to make to the leaders of opinion in South America full and 
thorough explanations of the history and purposes and methods of the 
Endowment. 

Through the courtesy of the Ministers of Foreign Affairs for their respec- 
tive countries I had the privilege of audiences with President Hermes da Fonseca, 
of Brazil; President Batlle y Ordonez, of Uruguay; Vice-President de la Plaza, 
of the Argentine Nation, President Saenz Pefia being absent from the capital 
because of illness; President Barros Luco, of Chile, and President Billinghurst 
of Peru. 

Particular acknowledgment should be made also of the valuable assistance 
and cooperation received from the diplomatic representatives of our own country. 
Mr. Edwin Morgan, our Ambassador in Rio de Janeiro, and the Secretary of 
Embassy, Mr. Butler Wright; Mr. Garrett, the American Minister in Buenos 
Aires, and the Military Attache, Major Shipton; Mr. Grevstad, the American 
Minister in Montevideo; Mr. Harvey, Charge d'Affaires in Santiago, and the 
Military Attache, Captain Biscoe; Mr. Benton McMillin, the American Minister 
in Lima, and Mr. Pennoyer, the Secretary of Legation, all personally devoted a 
great deal of their time and attention to furthering the objects of my visit. I 
cannot express my gratitude for their hospitality and for their advice and assist- 
ance. 

At a later date I shall make a full report of my visit to South America. In 
presenting this brief summary permit me to renew the assurances of my high 
appreciation of the honor conferred upon me by the Trustees in appointing me as 
their representative to visit South America. 

Respectfully submitted, 

Robert Bacon. 
December 24, 1913. 



For Better Relations with Our Latin American Neighbors 



I. PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS 

In a letter to the Trustees of the Carnegie Endowment for International 
Peace I reported very briefly the principal matters of interest in a journey to 
Brazil, Argentina, Uruguay, Chile and Peru, undertaken as the representative of 
the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, in pursuance of an invitation 
received, under date of April I, 1913, from Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, director 
of the Division of Intercourse and Education, and a letter of instructions, dated 
July 20, 1913, from the Honorable Elihu Root, the President of the Endowment. 

In this more detailed account of the journey I have tried to tell in narrative 
form just what was done in each city, for in that way, perhaps, better than in any 
other, it is possible to give an impression of the extreme kindness of the 
reception which was everywhere extended to me, as the representative of the 
Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, and of the cordial sympathy and 
interest manifested on every side in the work and purposes of the Endowment. 
The friendly attitude of the press in all the countries which I visited, the extreme 
courtesy of the various governments, the spontaneous approval of the leaders of 
opinion as expressed in letters and telegrams and personal interviews, and the 
manifest cordiality of the people, afford convincing proof that the Trustees will 
find in South America a valuable and energetic cooperation in the noble work 
upon which they are engaged. 

Reference is made to many persons who were most helpful to me. The record 
is by no means complete, but in another place I have mentioned more fully those 
in official and unofficial life to whom I have been chiefly indebted for aid, advice 
and information, trying to express at the same time something of my deep sense 
of obligation and gratitude toward them. 

By history even more than by nature the countries of the North and South 
American continents are bound closely together. 

At all times since the revolt of the South American colonies from Spain at 
the beginning of the last century, there have been distinguished leaders in public 
affairs in this country who have voiced the friendship of the United States for the 
nations to the south of us. Henry Clay, as early as 1816 (in a speech on the 
Lowndes Bill to reduce the direct taxes imposed during the war of 1812), fore- 
shadowed the possibility of our aiding the Spanish American colonies in their 
struggle for independence. In 1818, in one of his most brilliant arguments, advo- 
cating "that our neutrality be so arranged as to be as advantageous as possible to 
the insurgent colonies," and that "the United States send a Minister to the 'United 



14 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Provinces of Rio de la Plata,' thereby recognizing that revolutionized colony as an 
independent state," Clay pictured with poetic prophecy the wonderful lands to 
which we are joined by the Isthmus of Panama. 

James G. Blaine's part in bringing about closer relations between the Ameri- 
can Republics is well known. Blaine in 1881 convoked the Pan-American Con- 
ference which, owing to circumstances, did not convene until eight years later, 
when Blaine was again the Secretary of State. In extending his original note of 
invitation in 1881, Blaine acted upon the inspiration and initiative of President 
Garfield, who was keenly sensible of the advisability of closer union among the 
republics of this continent and to whose statesmanship may be attributed the 
first of those Pan-American Conferences which are now held regularly. In 1881, 
President Garfield, acting through his Secretary of State, proposed a Conference 
which should have the sole object of discussing methods of preventing war 
between the nations of America. Blaine's statesmanship foresaw the practical 
advantages of reciprocal commercial relations which should more intimately weld 
the American nations together; and this with numerous other topics formed the 
program for the first Pan-American Conference which met in Washington in 
1889. 

In our own day, Elihu Root is the statesman who has most conspicuously 
exemplified our traditional policy of American unity. His friendship for our 
sister republics has manifested itself in repeated public declarations which have 
clearly outlined a rule of conduct for us in our relations with the other nations on 
this continent. His doctrine is the doctrine of sympathy and understanding, of 
kindly consideration and honorable obligation ; and when his views, which combine 
the idealism of Mr. Clay and the utilitarianism of Mr. Blaine, have come to be 
accepted generally as the foreign policy of the United States in this hemisphere, 
the question of how the United States and her sister republics on this continent 
can be drawn into closer relations will have found a complete answer. 

That we have not as a nation aggressively acted upon the advice of these 
leaders, giving to their declarations only tacit assent unsupported by positive 
action, has been largely due to the fact that our country has been intensely occu- 
pied with its own affairs, its own marvelously rapid development and its own 
internal problems. The eminent Dr. Roque Saenz Peiia, in a forceful address 
delivered in Washington in 1889, when he was a delegate to the first Pan-Ameri- 
can Conference, frankly expressed his realization of this fact. 

Dr. Saenz Pena upon that occasion said : 

The truth is that our knowledge of each other is limited. The repub- 
lics of the North of this continent have lived without holding communication 
with those of the South, or the nations of Central America. Absorbed, as 
they have been, like ours, in the development of their institutions, they have 
failed to cultivate with us closer and more intimate relations. 

While I am confident that this true explanation of our mistakes is accepted 
by the discerning statesmen of our sister republics, it has been only natural 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 15 

that the apparent, and often actual neglect of our opportunities to cultivate a 
better understanding of our neighbors, our ignorance of their affairs and our 
seeming national indifference to their progress should have tended to engender on 
their part sentiments of resentment, distrust and suspicion. Mr. Root's 
historic visit to South America in 1906 has been responsible, more than any other 
single factor, for the correction of these impressions of us. Our people at large 
have not even a faint conception of the great service Mr. Root has done them 
by his sympathetic attitude and by his repeated utterances of our national policy, 
but this service is recognized in all parts of South America, where he is regarded 
with the deepest affection and respect. 

The most effective way of carrying out Mr. Root's instructions seemed to be 
by conversations with representative South Americans, addresses delivered under 
the auspices of universities or learned societies, and articles in newspapers and 
reviews. I was afforded every opportunity to employ these various methods. 
Public addresses were delivered in each capital visited, numerous conferences 
were held with leading citizens, and the press gave the widest possible circulation 
to descriptions of the work of the Endowment and the activities in which it is 
interested. 

There is, I believe, no field more fertile for the work of the Endowment 
than South America and no time more opportune than the present to cultivate 
good relations between this country and the republics of the great continent to 
the south of us. 

It is a fact now generally recognized that the people of this country have 
been and still are ignorant of the actual conditions of these great Latin-American 
nations which are advancing in the path of progress as rapidly as we have ad- 
vanced at any period of our history. We have been neglectful of opportunities 
not only to improve our commercial relations with our sister republics, but, what 
is of infinitely greater importance, of opportunities to cultivate intellectual inter- 
course and sentiments of friendly understanding which shall bind us more closely 
to each other in the future. 

It becomes, then, a most urgent duty to overcome our ignorance and repair 
our mistakes. In no better way, I think, can these results be achieved than 
in the way the Trustees of the Endowment have indicated, and it is a matter 
for profound satisfaction that our friends in South America have expressed 
full sympathy with the plans of the Endowment and have promised their ener- 
getic cooperation. 

The plan of the Division of Intercourse and Education for "the visit to 
various countries of representative men of other countries for the purpose of 
making better known the spirit, institutions and ideals of the several nations," 
as outlined in the monograph which formed a part of my general instructions, 
was accepted by the men I met in South America with unanimous approval. 
Such an exchange of visits would be productive of immediate good. Possibly by 
no other method could results be obtained which would be so quickly apparent and, 



16 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

although the work of the Trustees is wisely builded upon a consideration of the 
far future rather than of our own day, it is nevertheless well to bear in mind the 
public desire for some tangible token of progress which would serve as a popular 
incentive and inspiration. It is very gratifying to know that steps have been 
taken to carry into effect the plan to have distinguished South Americans visit 
the United States, and it is to be hoped that nothing will be allowed to retard the 
work in this hemisphere which the Division has already begun so successfully in 
connection with the Far East. 

In regard to the selection of South Americans to come to the United 
States, it has seemed to me that it might be advisable to allow this to be done 
by scientific or educational societies under whose auspices the visits could be 
made. In all of our great sister republics to the south there are men in 
public and private life well qualified for such a mission, men of brilliant 
attainments who speak English and have an excellent knowledge of conditions 
in the United States. Those whom the Endowment might select to visit 
South America from this country, unless they were able to speak in Spanish 
or at least in French, would find their usefulness limited. In Argentina and 
in Chile more English is spoken than elsewhere on the South American continent, 
but even in these countries the knowledge of the language is confined to com- 
paratively few. French is spoken among the cultured classes, but, while a knowl- 
edge of French is much more common with them than it is with us, any 
representative of the Endowment depending only upon French and English 
would often experience the need of Spanish. 

The foregoing remarks might apply with added force to the proposed 
exchange of professors of universities, unless, of course, it were desired that the 
professor visiting the South American universities should give his lectures in 
English. 

The schools and colleges of Brazil; the University de la Plata and the Uni- 
versity of Buenos Aires in the Argentine; the University of Montevideo; the 
University of Chile in Santiago, and the ancient University of San Marcos in 
Lima, are all important seats of learning with distinguished faculties, and a regular 
exchange of professors with them should be instituted as soon as possible. It 
might be well for professors who are sent from the United States to divide their 
time between the principal Latin American universities. The professors to be 
invited to this country might include one from each of the Republics mentioned, 
if that number should not be too large for the purpose of the Endowment, and 
they, also, might alternate at five of our leading universities, which would enable 
a professor to remain about six weeks at each university, the lectures thereby 
covering the entire academic year. 

The practical good done by the Harvard and Columbia exchanges of pro- 
fessors with France and Germany is sufficient indication of the benefits to be 
derived from such exchanges with South America. The condition of a nation can 
be judged very accurately by the conditions existing at its typical colleges. When 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 17 

we know what and how the young men of a country are taught and the attitude 
they assume toward the acquisition of knowledge, we can form a conception of the 
spirit of a people which will not be far from the truth. South American educators 
discussed with great interest the interchange of professors proposed by the En- 
dowment and will lend to it their hearty support. 

In regard to the proposed exchange of students of universities of South 
America and our own universities, I found a general commendation of the idea, 
but it was felt that details of the project would have to be clearly presented 
before all doubts of its entire advisability were allayed. Latin-American 
universities and our own are dissimilar in many respects. The opinion was 
expressed that many parents would hesitate to send their sons to our far-away 
universities where the students are allowed much greater liberty than they are 
accustomed to enjoy in South American schools. It was feared that in the absence 
of family control and family supervision the young men might succumb to tempta- 
tion. Of course this is not unlike the problems which parents in the United States 
must face when they are sending their boys away from home, but the added 
distance contemplated in such an exchange makes it more difficult for fathers 
and mothers to part with their boys, particularly as the parting must be for a 
considerable period of time. 

It seems to me that some scheme might be possible whereby such South 
American students could receive a more personal supervision, but, until a 
definite plan is devised, the proposal looking toward a systematic exchange of 
students is sure to meet with considerable objection on the part of our neighbors. 
The young men, themselves, I am convinced, are enthusiastically in favor of 
it, and several wrote or spoke to me about the possibility of studying in the United 
States. The mutual benefit the republics would derive is so great that every effort 
should be made to devise a practical method for carrying out the project. 

The Division of Intercourse and Education which has jurisdiction over the 
exchange of visits of representative men and the exchange of professors and 
students, has also within its scope the formation of national societies for Inter- 
national Conciliation. I found leaders of thought in South America agreed upon 
the beneficent work these societies can accomplish and they were eager that 
national societies should be organized in Latin America. We have been 
fortunate in obtaining the acceptance of well qualified men to act as honorary 
secretaries for National Societies for Conciliation in Brazil, the Argentine and 
Peru and it is expected that a secretary will soon be found for Chile. 

It might be advisable to have the pamphlets of the Society for Inter- 
national Conciliation, which are intended for distribution in the Argentine, Chile 
and Peru printed in Spanish and those for Brazil printed in Portuguese. They 
would thus obtain a much wider circulation and the work in that way become more 
popular than if printed in French or English. 

In every capital which was visited committees were informally got together 
which should be the basis for organization of permanent National Societies of 



18 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

International Law, to be affiliated with the American Institute of International 
Law, founded in 1912 with Mr. Root as Honorary President and Dr. James 
Brown Scott as President. In this work prominent publicists gave their zealous 
support, approving the plan unanimously and devoting to the cause such energy 
and enthusiasm that the Trustees have every reason to look forward to most en- 
couraging results. It was readily appreciated that such a project as this, essen- 
tially intellectual and scientific, must serve as the lasting foundation for all other 
work of bringing nations into closer relations. The rights of peoples, no less 
than the rights of individuals, must rest on law. 

On several occasions spokesmen of societies of lawyers made responses ex- 
pressing unqualified approval of the plan to popularize by means of these national 
organizations the principles of international law, to the end that enlightened public 
opinion should demand the settlement of questions arising between nations upon 
the principles of law rather than by a resort to force. The intercommunication 
of such organizations, through affiliation with the American Institute, will, in 
itself, be a potent factor in bringing about a better understanding of each other 
by the several countries. 

The eminent authorities on international law in the Southern Republics 
have made long and careful studies of their subject with particular reference 
to American affairs and the support they will give to the American Institute 
will be most valuable. The further work of organization should be done with- 
out delay. As Mr. Root in the final paragraph of his letter of instructions 
points out, the results to be achieved are not to be measured in the terms of 
individual life, but in the long life of nations and this is fully realized by our 
friends in Latin America ; but advantage should be taken of the present enthu- 
siasm to enlist the services of these distinguished men in the cause which the 
American Institute represents. The Trustees, I believe, will find no activity 
which they could support with more fruitful results or which more strongly 
appeals to the leading men of the South American Republics. 

The proposed Academy of International Law at The Hague aroused a 
lively interest. It was felt that such an Academy, where delegated representa- 
tives of the various governments of the world would meet for the study of 
international law under the instruction of eminent masters, must result in a 
greater uniformity of opinion, a "standardizing", if the phrase be permitted, 
of a science which has heretofore been followed only in a manner productive 
of diverse views. No effort was made to obtain the commitment of any 
government to the proposal ; the time was considered unripe for such action. 
My instructions had contemplated nothing more definite than inviting the atten- 
tion of the various Governments to their opportunity to participate in the 
proposed Academy, but I feel quite sure, from the general interest displayed 
in the subject and from the approbation expressed by the Ministers of Foreign 
Affairs, that, when the proposed Academy assumes definite form, the Govern- 
ments of the five South American Republics which I visited will eagerly avail 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 19 

themselves of the opportunity to participate in it and that each one will send to it 
one or more duly delegated representatives. 

In conversations with the Minister of Foreign Affairs of each country, 
in accordance with my instructions, the subject was brought up of the early 
appointment of national committees for the purpose of discussing the programme 
of the next Hague Peace Conference and the advantages to be derived from 
the inter-communication of such national committees in America, in order that 
when the next Peace Conference is convoked delegates may go there in a 
better state of preparation and more united in their views of the objects to 
be accomplished than was the case at the Second Peace Conference at The 
Hague. The nature of such private conversations precludes the idea of giv- 
ing to them any public form, but I may say that the necessity for early action 
is appreciated by the various Governments. 

The work of the Division of Economics and History of the Endowment 
formed a part of the principal address delivered in each city and aroused 
much interest. South American historians who can prove of invaluable service in 
furnishing the Division with data regarding the causes and effects of the many 
wars with which the Southern Republics have been afflicted, and with historic 
information regarding the relations of Latin American nations, heard with 
pleasure of the forthcoming visit to South America of Dr. Kinley as the repre- 
sentative of this Division of the Endowment. Dr. Kinley's well-known achieve- 
ments, his friendship for Latin America and the mission upon which he goes will, 
I am confident, assure him a most cordial reception and the valuable assistance of 
South American economists. 

The fact that we were able to remain only a few days in each country 
renders presumptuous any attempt to describe social or political conditions in 
the South American Republics. Whatever expressions of opinion regarding these 
matters may appear refer to well-known characteristics or to facts that become 
evident in even a very brief stay. 

In speaking or in thinking of the Republics of South America we are 
exceedingly apt to fall into the error of regarding them as a whole. The ten 
separate states are as distinct as the separate countries of Europe; the peoples 
constituting them differ in race, habits, and ideals ; their governments, though 
retaining the same basic form, are really often quite dissimilar. We shall 
never go very far toward improving our relations with the Latin American 
Republics, either in the matter of intellectual intercourse or of commerce until 
we have made ourselves familiar with the separate nations and by study or 
actual contact learned to make the necessary distinctions between them. A true 
understanding of our neighbors can come only with -a knowledge of their sepa- 
rate histories, of their heroes, of the epics of valor and perseverance of each 
Republic and of the races from which they have sprung, native and European. 

The day has gone by when the majority of these countries, laboriously 
building up a governmental structure under tremendous difficulties, were unstable, 



20 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

tottering and likely to fall from one month to another. Now all the more 
important Republics are firmly established and no longer live in the shadow 
of dictatorships or unconstitutional rule. They "have passed", to use the 
words of Mr. Root, "out of the condition of militarism, out of the 
condition of revolution, into the condition of industrialism, into the paths of suc- 
cessful commerce, and are becoming great and powerful nations". With this 
development has come material progress and prosperity attracting the attention 
of the world to South America and assuring its increasing greatness in the 
future. 

Although error springs from regarding the South American nations as 
a whole, certain characteristics are, in greater or less degree, common to all 
of these peoples. They are hospitable, courteous, sensitive, proud and intensely 
patriotic. Whoever goes among them with a disregard of these traits is sure 
to produce a bad impression upon them. We of northern climes are tradi- 
tionally more brusque, and brusqueness is foreign and offensive to these descend- 
ants of the polite races of the Iberian Peninsula. Their sensitiveness causes 
them to resent criticism, although they accept most readily suggestions prompted 
by a sincere friendship; but an attitude of superiority, too often assumed by 
unthinking persons of other nations, can beget only their suspicion, distrust 
and contempt. 

Much has been said of the rivalry existing between the various Republics. 
It is only natural that the rapid progress made by nations lying so close to each 
other should produce a spirit of keen competition in their advance toward the 
common goal of greatness. The same spirit is evident in nearly every country 
in the world. The sentiments which exist between the several nations should be 
respected by all who deal with them, for in that way only can one escape giving 
offense by apparent partiality ; but I incline to the belief that much loose talking 
of persons ignorant of the facts and a good deal of loose writing and loose 
thinking by careless observers have grossly exaggerated the nature of this com- 
petitive spirit. 

Upon the great questions concerning the welfare of the entire continent, 
upon matters relating to the advancement of humanity in general and upon 
the principles of right and progress, the peoples of South America, or, at least, 
those with whom I came in contact, are united. They are believers in high 
ideals and in the work for these ideals they show a solidarity that rises far 
above any feeling of national rivalry. 

In every country which I visited I found sentiments of warmest friendship 
for the United States. The reported occasional public expressions by agitators 
of South American distrust of our purposes and motives are practically negligible 
in comparison with the earnest desire for the friendliest relations between our 
countries which one hears expressed by the real leaders of opinion everywhere. 

It behoovesthe people of this country, however, to conduct themselves toward 
their Latin-American neighbors with such consideration and fairness that no 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 21 

cause for suspicion may arise. It has been decreed by our geographical position 
and historical association that our destinies shall not be separate. Such has 
been the view of our own statesmen from the time of Monroe and such was the 
opinion of those early great leaders of South American independence. I believe 
that this opinion is held by the South American leaders of today, not in any 
sense of political alliance and, certainly, in no degree in a manner to involve the 
sovereignty of any state concerned, but as a matter of policy necessitated by our 
proximity to each other, our isolation from other continents and our common 
ideals of liberty. We must all, I think, admit the force of the argument for our 
interdependence, but each American nation should be scrupulously careful in 
respecting the rights and sentiments of the others. 

For our conduct we cannot do better than to remember and follow the 
sentiments of John Quincy Adams expressed in a special message to the House 
of Representatives, explaining his action in appointing delegates to the Con- 
ference held in Panama : 

The first and paramount principle upon which it was deemed wise and 
just to lay the corner-stone of all our future relations with them (our sister 
American republics) was disinterestedness; the next was cordial good will 
to them ; the third was a claim of fair and equal reciprocity. 

These sentiments which served as the "corner-stone of all our future rela- 
tions," are as applicable today as when they were written, more than eighty 
years ago. 



22 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 



II. THE JOURNEY 

Among the many changes which are rapidly transforming the relations 
of South America with the rest of the world, none, perhaps, is more apparent 
to, or has a more immediate interest for North America, than the improve- 
ment in the means of communication between the two continents. Neighbors 
of the North and South are no longer forced by considerations of comfort or 
expedition to make their visits to each other by way of Europe. 

Good passenger steamships now ply regularly between the United States 
and the principal ports of the east coast of South America, or between the 
ports of this country and the Isthmus of Panama, where connection may be 
made with the steamships of several lines engaged in the coastwise traffic on 
the Pacific side. 

The journey that only a few years ago was looked upon as accompanied 
by hazards and hardships has become a cruise in pleasant and interesting waters 
where the seas are singularly free from storms. 

These favorable conditions, which are too little known to the general 
public, continue to improve yearly, and with the opening of the Panama Canal, 
the improvement must be even more rapid. 

That our own party embarked from Lisbon for Rio de Janeiro was due to 
the circumstance that some of us had come from the Orient and to the fact 
that a meeting had been arranged in Paris with Dr. James Brown Scott, the 
Secretary of the Endowment. 

The week in Paris was given over to the preparation of material. Only 
by the diligence and devotion of Dr. Scott, generously aided by Dr. Alejandro 
Alvarez of Chile, Secretary-General of the American Institute of International 
Law, was it possible in the short time to prepare articles and information essen- 
tial for the journey. 

Drafts of articles were prepared in English and French descriptive of the 
formation, work and purposes of the Carnegie Endowment and of some of 
the activities and movements in which it is interested, such as the American 
Institute of International Law, the Academy of International Law at The Hague, 
the Third Hague Conference, the Permanent Court of Arbitration at The Hague. 

Through the kindness of Dr. Scott we were supplied with many printed 
pamphlets intended for our own information and for distribution among our 
friends in South America. Among these papers were : 

Institut Americain de Droit International ; 

Projet de Statuts, for aid in the formation of national Societies of Inter- 
national Law; 

La Transformation de 1' Arbitrage en Sentence Judiciare, par James Brown 
Scott ; 



FOR BF/TTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 23 

Le Mouvement Pacifique, par James Brown Scott; 

Discotirs d'Ouverture du XX Congres Universel de le Paix, par J. de 
Louter ; 

From Baron d'Estournelles de Constant, who was absent from Paris, we 
received pamphlets descriptive of the work of the Association for International 
Conciliation, together with replicas in bronze of the medal of the Association. 

M. Gabriel Hanotaux, former Minister of Foreign Affairs of France and 
president of the Comite France-Amerique, returned from the country to Paris 
in order to render his invaluable service, and I was his guest at a luncheon 
where he warmly wished me success upon my mission to South America. M. 
Hanotaux further testified his cordial interest by writing articles on the objects 
of my journey, which were published in the Figaro and in the Revue France- 
Amerique. 

From Paris we went to Lisbon, leaving there September 23rd, 191 3, on 
the Royal Mail Packet Steamship Araguaya. Our party consisted of Judge 
Otto Schoenrich, President of the Nicaraguan Mixed Claims Commission, and 
Mrs. Schoenrich, Mr. W. R. Hereford, my wife and daughter and myself. 

Although the voyage to Rio occupies a fortnight, one is never out of sight 
of land for longer than five days consecutively. Frequent stops relieve the 
journey of any possibility of monotony. Our ship put in at Funchal, on the 
picturesque island of Madeira, and at St. Vincent, the chief port of the Cape 
Verde islands, before we reached the coast of Brazil. The first port of call 
in South America was Pernambuco or El Recife, to give it the native name, 
a prosperous commercial city where extensive improvements are under way to 
permit vessels of deeper draft to come into the harbor. Our vessel remained 
at anchor in the roadstead, disembarking passengers by means of a basket 
swung upon a crane, and unloading freight into lighters, tasks rendered diffi- 
cult by the swift tide and heavy swell which are constant at this point. 

We gained our first impression of the activity of modern Brazil at Bahia 
where the members of our party went ashore. In the city, which is the third 
in size in Brazil and a principal mart for sugar and cotton, there were every- 
where evidences of the energy that is transforming these Brazilian capitals into 
modern cities. Streets were torn up; old houses were being demolished; new 
and imposing buildings were taking their places; street-car lines were being 
built or improved. Apparently expense was but little considered in the desire 
for improvement. Bahia is a revelation to travelers from Northern climes who 
are wont to regard the people of the tropics as lacking in energy and too content 
with an easy existence to suffer change. 

In Rio de Janeiro 

Our first view of Rio was such as to stamp it forever on the memories of 
all of us. It is probable that no one can enter that wonderful harbor without 



24 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

receiving impressions which cannot be effaced, but it was our good fortune to 
pass through the narrow entrance just after sunset and to come to anchor in 
the circular bay when the myriad lights of the city were shining, outlining the 
broad arc of the shore and extending from the water's edge to the heights 
behind the city. A full moon revealed the high dark mountains of curious 
shapes which encircled us, with the dome-like rock, the Sugar Loaf, which is 
beloved of every "Fluminense," rising sheer from the deep waters only a few 
hundred yards away. 

Early the next morning we were met on board by Mr. Butler Wright, first 
secretary of the American Embassy, and Senhor Helio Lobo, of the Foreign 
Office, who in the name of the Minister of Foreign Affairs, Dr. Lauro Muller, 
extended an official welcome to us. I had the honor, an hour later, to be received 
by Dr. Lauro Muller, who was most cordial in his expression of interest in 
the Endowment. He had but recently returned from his official visit to the 
United States and spoke feelingly of the reception that had been accorded him 
there and of his desire to lend his support to an undertaking which had in view 
the promotion of friendly relations between our two countries. 

Dr. Muller gave further evidence of his genuine interest in the success of 
my mission by delegating to assist me Senhor de Oliveira Lima, upon whose 
valuable good offices I constantly depended throughout my stay in Rio. It 
would have been difficult if not impossible to have found any one more thoroughly 
qualified than Senhor de Oliveira Lima. His long and distinguished diplomatic 
service in Europe has made him familiar with many of the activities in which 
the Endowment is interested and to this is added a thorough, scientific knowl- 
edge of the relations between Brazil and the United States. His recent valuable 
essay on that subject is familiar to those who receive the pamphlets of the 
Association for International Conciliation. Senhor de Oliveira Lima's many 
friendships in the United States, his well-remembered lectures in this country 
and his command of English and French all helped to fit him peculiarly for 
the invaluable services to the Endowment which he rendered with the utmost 
good-will. 

Calls were made on the day of our arrival upon Senhor Ruy Barbosa, Dr. 
Amaro Cavalcanti and other leaders of public opinion in Brazil. It is impossible 
to exaggerate the sense of encouragement I experienced because of the interest 
manifested by these men who were so thoroughly representative of the states- 
manship of their country. Elsewhere I have spoken of their valuable aid and 
I shall have occasion later to refer to it more particularly. 

During my stay in Rio de Janeiro I was the guest of the American 
Ambassador, Mr. Edwin V. Morgan, who was indefatigable in his efforts to 
afford me opportunities to explain the methods and purposes of the En- 
dowment. 

It was at the American Embassy that the first public address on the objects 
of my visit was made. The Ambassador had invited about a hundred men prom- 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 25 

inent in the intellectual life of Brazil. Just before this meeting a committee of 
the Historical Institute of Brazil, of which Count de Affonso Celso is the dis- 
tinguished president, and which is one of the oldest learned societies in America, 
welcomed me in the name of the Institute. Senhor de Oliveira Lima, who acted as 
the spokesman of the committee made a brief address in English pledging the 
support of the Institute to the cause of international friendship. 

At the larger meeting where I was introduced by Senhor de Oliveira Lima 
in an address of the most cordial sympathy, it was a very great pleasure to explain 
the purposes of the Trustees to men whose influence was so powerful in the 
affairs of Brazil, for the audience was made up of leaders of the Republic in many 
branches of intellectual endeavor. 

The lively interest which, from the start, was manifested in the Endow- 
ment was shown in the gratifying request of the Minister of Foreign Affairs 
and others who were present, that a more detailed address upon the same theme 
be delivered before a larger audience, and, in spite of the short time of our stay 
in Rio, they were able to arrange for the second day following, at the National 
Library, a meeting which was held under the combined auspices of the Brazilian 
Academy and the Institute of the Order of Advocates. I was introduced by 
Senhor Ruy Barbosa. The prominent place occupied in Brazil by Senhor Ruy 
Barbosa, his conspicuous service at the Second Hague Peace Conference % and his 
recognized authority might warrant us in considering him upon this occasion as 
the spokesman of his country. In an address of exceptional brilliance and elo- 
quence, in which he paid high tribute to Mr. Root and Dr. Scott, he expressed 
his appreciation of and deep sympathy with the humanitarian work upon which 
the trustees of the Endowment are engaged. After his sympathetic introduction 
it was a highly esteemed privilege to explain to the distinguished audience which 
filled the large hall of the Public Library, the ideals of the Endowment and the 
practical methods by which it seeks to attain its aims. 

At a tea given for us by the Argentine Minister, Dr. Lucas Ayarragaray, and 
Sefiora Ayarragaray at the Argentine legation and on another afternoon when we 
had tea with Senor Alfredo Irarrazabal, the Chilean Minister, at Pao d'Assucar, 
we had the pleasure of meeting the members of the diplomatic corps and many 
residents of Rio. We dined one evening with Senor and Sefiora de 
Figueiredo, and there had been a dinner with Mr. Percival Farquhar, a luncheon 
with our Consul General, Mr. Lay, and Mrs. Lay, and luncheons, dinners and 
a dance at the Embassy so that, notwithstanding the shortness of our stay, we 
made many delightful acquaintances and saw not a little of the society of the 
Brazilian capital, carrying away with us the lasting impression of its culture and 
charm. 

On the day before the meeting at the Library, Dr. Lauro Muller gave a 
luncheon for me in the Itamaraty Palace where the Foreign Office is installed, 
a palace of exquisite charm and possessing a remarkable library. There were 
a score of guests at the luncheon, principally Brazilian diplomats and jurists. 



26 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

In the afternoon I had the honor of an audience with the President of 
Brazil, Marshal Hermes da Fonseca. 

The intervals between these occasions, when not occupied in the preparation 
of addresses, had been devoted to talks with Senhores Ruy Barbosa, Amaro 
Cavalcanti, president of the Supreme Court, J. C. de Souza Bandeira, Oliveira 
Lima and others, who with unfailing courtesy gave their time and thought to 
the subject of the formation of a national society of international law and, at the 
instance of the Minister of Foreign Affairs, undertook its organization. 

For the society of conciliation, to be affiliated with the parent society in 
Paris and the society in New York, we were extremely fortunate in obtaining 
the consent of Dr. Helio Lobo, of the Foreign Office, to act as Honorary 
Secretary. His acceptance of this position was immediately telegraphed to the 
Director of the Division of Intercourse and Education, Dr. Butler, in order that 
the organization of the branch society in Rio de Janeiro might be begun without 
delay. 

Papers which had been prepared for distribution and as the basis for 
interviews or articles in newspapers and reviews and which we had printed in 
Rio in pamphlet form, were as follows : 

(a) In French, a draft of an address on the objects of the Endowment 
and of the mission. 

(b) In Spanish, a draft of an address on the objects of the mission. 

(c) In Spanish, a draft of an address on the American Institute of 
International Law and National Societies of International Law. 

(d) In Spanish, a draft of an address on the Association for Inter- 
national Conciliation. 

(e) In Spanish, a draft of an address on the proposed Academy of 
International Law at The Hague. 

(f) In Spanish, a draft of an address on National Committees for the 
next Hague Conference. 

(g) In Spanish, a draft of an address on the Division of Economics 
and History and the mission of Professor Kinley. 

(h) In Spanish, a draft of an address on the proposed International 
Court of Justice. 

(i) In Spanish, notes on the organization and objects of the Carnegie 
Endowment for International Peace. 

The newspapers of Rio without exception had evinced the greatest interest 
in the objects of my visit, printing daily long articles with pictures and conspicuous 
headlines, all startlingly reminiscent of the enterprise and ingenuity of our news- 
papers at home, with the difference, however, which I am constrained to point 
out in the interest of general information, that the newspapers throughout South 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 27 

America display a carefulness and accuracy to which we, unfortunately, are not 
always accustomed, and essay to interest their readers in the ideas of men rather 
than in their personalities. Copies of the principal newspaper articles referring 
to our visits in Brazil, the Argentine, Uruguay, Chile and Peru, have been 
collected. 

On the day we left Rio I had the pleasure of meeting again Dr. Rodriguez, 
the distinguished editor of the Jornal do Commercio, who had until that morning 
been absent from the capital. He was most responsive and told me that he in- 
tended to publish in the Commercio articles descriptive of the work of the Endow- 
ment, in which he was much interested. 

Our visit to Rio was limited to four days. It is, of course, unlikely that in 
such a short period opinions worthy of record could be formed of the people or 
of the political or economic conditions of the country, but the first impressions 
of travellers generally have at least the value of sharp definition. 

Of the beauty of the capital there could, of course, be no difference of 
opinion. The wonderful sanitary condition of Rio is most striking. It seems 
impossible that it should once have been a lurking place for deadly fevers. To-day 
the city is scrupulously clean; the streets are so well cared for that a torn-up 
thoroughfare is a rarity. Pestilential disease has disappeared and the mortality 
rate is one of the lowest in the world. So salubrious is Rio that most of the 
residents now remain in the capital during the hot months of December, January 
and February instead of fleeing to the mountains as they used to do. 

The impression we all got and which I think any one must receive in 
even the briefest visit, was of a city and country and people for whom the future 
is big with promise. The vastness of the territory and its inestimable wealth 
stimulate the imagination. 

The people are energetic and patriotic. They are by nature and by tradition 
courteous and hospitable and give expression freely to the sentiments of friend- 
ship they entertain for the United States. Surely the hospitality shown to our 
party could not have been more cordial or delightful. In leaving Rio we parted 
with regret from those acquaintances whom we had learned, in a few days, to 
regard as friends. 

In Argentina 

The journey by sea from Rio de Janeiro to Buenos Aires occupies four 
days. Very recently the railroad to the South has been opened so that it is 
now possible to go as far as Montevideo overland. Our Ambassador, Mr. Mor- 
gan, had just completed this trip and was enthusiastic over the interesting glimpses 
of Southern Brazil to be had from the car windows, but our plans to go to Buenos 
Aires by sea had been made in advance and could not well be changed. 

We travelled on one of the new ships of the Royal Mail Steam Packet 
Company, the Andes, a large and well-equipped vessel of the type which the 



28 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

growing trade and passenger traffic between Europe and South America has 
called into service. 

Our ship did not put into the harbor of Montevideo but stopped in the 
open roadstead off the city long enough to permit passengers to disembark. 
Although it was ten o'clock at night when the Andes came to her dock in Buenos 
Aires, we found awaiting us Major Shipton, the Military Attache from the Lega- 
tion, a representative of the Foreign Office, Sefior Barilari, who extended to us an 
official welcome, and several of our Argentine friends. With the members of 
my family I was driven to the house of Mr. John Work Garrett, the 
American Minister, with whom we stopped during our stay in Buenos Aires. 
Even at night, and despite the rain that was falling, the drive from the river 
to the Minister's house revealed unmistakable evidences of the great size and 
importance of the city of whose wonders we had heard so much. The com- 
parison with Paris is not an effort of imagination nor the hyperbole of local 
pride. It suggests itself so naturally that it becomes unavoidable. We were all 
conscious again and again during our stay of the illusion that we were really 
not in the Argentine but in France. 

The day after our arrival was taken up with conversations with Dr. Ernesto 
Bosch, the Minister of Foreign Affairs, Dr. Luis M. Drago, Dr. E. S. Zeballos 
and other leading Argentinians who very kindly gave me the benefit of 
their advice and lent their active support in furthering the work of the Endow- 
ment. In the afternoon I called on Dr. Bosch, and was presented by him to Dr. 
Victorino de la Plaza, the Vice-president, who has long occupied a prominent place 
in the affairs of the Argentine Nation. Dr. de la Plaza speaks English fluently 
and loses no occasion to express his friendship for the people of the United 
States. Two visits which he made several years ago to this country are still 
fresh in his recollection, and, since then, in his studies, he has so carefully 
followed our progress that he is thoroughly familiar with the development of 
our republic. It is his wish to visit again the United States and the benefit 
that our people would derive from the presence of a statesman so repre- 
sentative of his nation is apparent, but his official duties demand his presence 
in the Argentine for several years to come, so that the prospect of such a visit 
is, unfortunately, remote. 

During the time that we were in Buenos Aires, Dr. Saenz Pena, the dis- 
tinguished President of the Argentine Nation, was detained at his home in 
the country by a regrettable illness, so that I did not have the privilege of 
renewing an acquaintance with him begun in Paris. 

In the afternoon of the day of our arrival, Dr. Ernesto Bosch and Sefiora 
Bosch, whom we had known in France at the time Dr. Bosch was the Argentine 
Minister there, and who were most kind in their hospitality to us throughout 
our stay in the Argentine, gave a reception for Mrs. Bacon and myself, where 
we had the pleasure of meeting many who were prominent in the diplomatic 
and social life of the capital. 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 29 

In the evening I dined with Dr. E. S. Zeballos at his house. He had invited 
a most distinguished company of public men, diplomatists, jurists and educators, 
and they expressed a very lively interest in the work and purposes of the Endow- 
ment. There was a short speech of welcome by Dr. Zeballos to which I responded, 
referring to the declarations of Mr. Root during his memorable visit, as a 
doctrine of sympathy and understanding, of kindly consideration and honorable 
obligation. Mr. Root's visit in 1906 and his public utterances remain vividly 
impressed upon the minds of the leaders in the Argentine in no less degree than 
in Brazil and I was to find as I continued my journey that there existed every- 
where I went the same warm sympathy for him and the same confident 
reliance upon the sincerity and potency of his friendship for our sister Republics 
to the South. 

We had luncheon the next day at the German legation with our old friends, 
Baron and Baroness von dem Bussche. 

Before leaving Rio I had been invited to address the Faculty of Law of 
the University of Buenos Aires, and the meeting was held that afternoon 
in one of the great halls of the University. There Dr. Drago pre- 
sented me to an audience of several hundred men and women who, in spite of the 
somewhat technical nature of the subject, paid the closest attention. The address 
was substantially a combination of the two I had delivered in Rio de Janeiro, for 
it was quickly appreciated that the public preferred to hear a general descrip- 
tion of the work and purposes of the Endowment rather than an address confined 
to any one of the activities which it encourages or supports. 

In the evening at the chancellery of the American Legation, there was an 
informal gathering of alumni of universities in the United States, South Ameri- 
cans and North Americans, who were members of the University Club of Buenos 
Aires, of which our Minister, Mr. Garrett, was president. Toasts were made and 
responded to, expressive of greeting and good-will, as informal as the general 
character of the evening, of which no record was kept except in the memories of 
those who in this land so far south of the Equator, had foregathered fra- 
ternally, each drawn by the tie of an alma mater in a republic so far to the North. 
It gave one a pleasant sensation of optimism and security in the future friendship 
of our countries. One is inclined to underestimate the great good done by such 
social organizations as the University Club of Buenos Aires. They are really 
important factors in the relationship of countries and it is to be hoped when the 
proposed exchanges of professors and students are put into effect under the 
auspices of the Endowment that an effort will be made to organize similar soci- 
eties wherever it may be practicable. 

There will always remain in my memory the impression of visits which we 
made the next day to several of the public schools. While the ladies of our 
party, with Sefiora Rodriguez Larreta, the head of the admirably organized 
charities of Buenos Aires, one of the most efficient organizations of its kind in 
the world, visited hospitals and charitable institutions, obtaining a glimpse of 



30 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

the generosity and devotion of the ladies of Buenos Aires, Mr. Garrett and I 
visited the public schools with Dr. Carlos Ibarguren, Minister of Public Instruc- 
tion, and Dr. Pedro Arata, President of the National Council of Education. 

The public schools of Buenos Aires are models of which any country might 
be proud. They have aroused the admiration of such distinguished observers 
as James Bryce and M. Clemenceau. It has been stated that the Argentine 
spends more money upon the education of her children than any other country 
in the world with the single exception of Australia. One can easily believe that 
this is true if her schools generally have the excellence of those that we had the 
privilege of seeing. It makes a visitor from the United States proud to be 
reminded of the fact that the great Sarmiento, the founder of the Argentine's 
educational system, was a close personal friend of Horace Mann, and received 
his inspiration largely from that friendship. 

Our limited time in Buenos Aires made anything like a thorough study of the 
educational condition of the Republic out of the question and any observations 
that I might make would be, necessarily, not much more than the reflected opinions 
of other travellers who have expressed them better, and of native historians who 
have dealt with the subject fully and authoritatively, but we saw enough to fill us 
with admiration. We found that English was generally taught and it left 
an indelible impression upon us to hear the national anthem of the United 
States sung in English by the pupils of their schools and to be greeted in our 
native tongue faultlessly by the girls and boys whom the others had selected to 
welcome us. Nothing, I think, could have touched us more deeply. 

Sefior Ibarguren was our host later at the imposing Jockey Club at a 
luncheon where we met many men prominent in the affairs of the Republic. In 
the afternoon we visited the Hall of Congress, a marble building just completed 
and reminiscent, in its architectural beauty, of our own capitol at Washington. 

To Sefior Joaquin Anchorena, the Intendente of Buenos Aires, we are 
indebted for many kind attentions, among them a tour of the city the next 
morning, when we saw some of the magnificent new avenues and parks of the 
capital. We inspected the extensive underground railway which was just 
being completed and also went with Sefior Anchorena, who is largely respon- 
sible for many of these great public works, to the model municipal farm, and 
there we had our first drink of mate, or Paraguayan tea, which, though scarcely 
known in Europe or in the United States, is a most important article of con- 
sumption in some of the Southern Republics, Argentina alone importing 43,161 
tons of mate in 1909 from Brazil. 

We had luncheon with the Vice-President, Dr. de la Plaza, at his house 
where he had gathered a score of public men and here, as upon other 
occasions, we found an eager interest in the work of the Endowment. Dr. 
de la Plaza made a short speech in which he expressed officially this interest and 
support, referring particularly to Mr. Root and employing the phrase in Eng- 
lish which I had used at Dr. Zeballos' dinner in speaking of Root's doctrine. 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 31 

The Vice-President's remarks were made without notes and, unfortunately, no 
verbatim record of them was obtainable. 

The afternoon was taken up with many informal visits and in the evening 
we went to the house of Dr. Ezequiel Ramos Mejia, a former member of the 
Cabinet and one of the Argentine's foremost men, who, with his charm- 
ing wife, was giving a reception for us. 

We had luncheon the next day at the races with Sefior Jorge Mitre, owner and 
director of La Nacion, one of the large, active, important Argentine newspapers 
which are the marvels of the journalistic world. The day was an important 
one on the calendar of sport and the Vice-President and nearly all other offi- 
cials of the government attended the races. The spectacle reminded one 
of the great days at Longchamps. Later, with Dr. Bermejo, Dr. 
Ibarguren and Dr. Aldao, I went to a Children's Congress, where hun- 
dreds of splendidly drilled school children engaged in gymnastic exercises. In 
the evening we took the steamer Hleo for Montevideo, Sefior Barilari of the 
Foreign Office, Mr. Garrett, Major Shipton, Lieutenant Whitlock and other 
friends coming to the dock to bid us good-bye. 

Enough has been written in this narrative account of our visit to Buenos 
Aires to indicate the extreme cordiality of our reception. The impression received 
in Brazil of the friendliness of the people of South America toward the United 
States was confirmed and strengthened in the Argentine. Despite the unofficial 
purpose and private character of our mission the newspapers devoted daily great 
space to describing all that we did, reproducing in full the addresses delivered 
and publishing long articles descriptive of the objects of the Endowment. The 
rather scientific nature of these articles, the lack of anything spectacular in the 
subject itself, induces the belief that the newspapers merely reflected the friendly 
interest of the public in the work the Trustees are seeking to accomplish. 

This interest was notable among those with whom I had the opportunity to 
converse. I found a ready cooperation among the leading citizens and a strong 
committee was informally authorized by the Minister of Foreign Affairs for the 
purpose of organizing a national society of international law. This group of men 
included those whose advice had so greatly encouraged me: Dr. Antonio 
Bermejo, President of the Supreme Court, Dr. Eduardo Bidau, of the Faculty of 
Law of the University of Buenos Aires, Dr. Eufemio Uballes, Rector of the 
University of Buenos Aires, Dr. Luis M. Drago, Dr. E. S. Zeballos. 

The organization of a national society for international conciliation was dis- 
cussed and the men with whom I talked were thoroughly in accord with its pur- 
poses. Dr. Benjamin Garcia Victorica accepted the position of Honorary Secre- 
tary and was at once placed in communication with Dr. Butler. The work of or- 
ganization will go on rapidly under Dr. Garcia Victorica's direction and the parent 
association of International Conciliation in Paris and the Association in New York 
will, I believe, find a valuable adjunct in the Society of Buenos Aires. 



32 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

So much has been said of the truly marvelous development of the Argentine 
Republic, that my own testimony can add but little to our realization in the United 
States of Argentina's rapid progress and the important place it occupies among 
nations. Its recent history affords many striking parallels to our own and not a 
few of the problems which arise are the same as those with which we have had to 
deal or with which we are even now dealing. The immense natural resources of 
Argentina, which has an area of more than a million square miles or about one- 
third that of the United States proper, the virility and industry of its people and 
the learning, ability and patriotism of its public men leave no doubt of the future 
greatness of the Republic. 

Signs point unmistakably to the increasing commerce between the Argentine 
and the United States and, what is more important still, to intimate intellectual 
relations. It is essential that a better understanding of each other by our two 
countries be brought about, and it is a happy augury for the future that, in seek- 
ing to do this, the Endowment will have its plans approved and furthered by 
those eminent Argentine leaders who are so largely responsible for the present 
advancement of their country. 

In Uruguay 

The Rio de la Plata at Buenos Aires is really an arm of the sea, so that 
Montevideo, although "just across the. river", from the Argentine city is dis- 
tant no miles and the journey between the two capitals occupies about ten 
hours. 

Awaiting the arrival of our steamer, we found Sehor Fermin Carlos de 
Yerequi, of the Foreign Office of Uruguay, who welcomed us officially, and 
our Minister, Mr. Nicolay Grevstad, who, during the two days we remained in 
Uruguay, was most attentive and helpful. A committee of reception had been 
formed consisting of Dr. Pablo de Maria, President of the Supreme Court, 
Dr. Claudio Williman, Rector of the University of Montevideo and former 
President of Uruguay, Dr. Ildefonso Garcia Lagos, President of the Uruguayan 
Central Committee of the American Peace Association, Dr. Julio Bastos, Presi- 
dent of the Ateneo and Dr. Carlos M. Prando, and through their good offices 
and Mr. Grevstad's, I met the men of Uruguay whom I much desired to meet. 

Montevideo is a much smaller city than Buenos Aires, about one-third or 
one-fourth the size, but it possesses all the dignity of a large and important 
capital, together with the individual charm that smaller cities often retain. 
There are wide, well-paved, well-lighted avenues, lined with attractive buildings 
and many interesting shops. The city is well equipped with modern electric 
street railways. Public squares and parks of exceeding beauty add to the charm 
of the place, which attracts many from Buenos Aires during the hot months. 
Close by are delightful resorts on the sea which are within easy access of the 
city and afford pleasant places for outing for the Montevideans. To the west 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 33 

is the famous Cerro, a large cone-like hill, beloved by the people of the city, 
who often go there for the fine view to be obtained from its summit of the 
river and harbor with its moles and docks. The harbor, already an excellent 
one, though too small for the commerce of the port, is being extensively improved. 

Our first morning was taken up with a visit to the Minister of Foreign 
Affairs, Sefior Emilio Barbaroux, who presented me to several eminent educators 
and publicists, with whom I discussed the objects of my visit, asking for their 
cooperation, which they heartily gave. 

We went to a luncheon given by the American Minister, at which there were 
about twenty distinguished residents of Montevideo. Mr. Grevstad delivered in 
Spanish a short address of welcome, to which I responded. 

The afternoon was spent at the Foreign Office with Sefior Barbaroux and 
several gentlemen he had invited to meet me there. We took up the question of 
a committee to organize a National Society of international law. All the gentle- 
men devoted themselves most earnestly to the discussion and agreed to serve 
on the committee which was then informally constituted and included: 
Sefior Emilio Barbaroux, Minister of Foreign Affairs; Dr. Pablo de 
Maria, President of the Supreme Court; Dr. Ildefonso Garcia Lagos, Presi- 
dent of the Uruguayan Central Committee of the International Peace Asso- 
ciation; Dr. Juan Zorilla de San Martin; Dr. Jose Pedro Varela; Dr. Jose 
Cremonessi and Dr. Daniel Garcia Acevedo. This group, it was intended, should 
form the basis for the organization of a permanent society. 

In the evening before a large and extremely sympathetic audience at the 
Ateneo, Dr. Juan Zorilla de San Martin, an orator of international reputation, 
delivered a brilliant address expressing the approval of Uruguayans of the work 
of the Carnegie Endowment, and entering more particularly into a laudatory 
description of the American Institute of International Law. It is a source of 
deep regret that no exact record of Sefior San Martin's eloquent speech exists, 
as he spoke without notes and no stenographer was present, but in a letter 
just received, Mr. Grevstad, I am happy to say, gives the assurance that 
Sefior San Martin, at my urgent request, will endeavor to write his valuable 
essay, reproducing the speech as nearly as his memory of it will permit. Fol- 
lowing Sefior San Martin's sympathetic introduction, I spoke for some time, 
explaining in detail the methods and purposes of the Endowment as I had 
explained them in Buenos Aires. 

Nearly all of the next morning was spent at the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. 
Sefior Barbaroux showed unflagging interest in the numerous topics mentioned 
in my letter of instructions and I cannot sufficiently express my deep gratitude to 
him. Our time in Montevideo was limited to a few hours. Unfortunately it had 
to be so. We should have greatly wished to stay longer, and the fact that we 
were able to accomplish what we did was due altogether to the aid of Sefior 
Barbaroux and his friends and of Mr. Grevstad and the members of the Com- 
mittee of Reception. 



34 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

In the afternoon I had the honor of being presented to His Excellency, the 
President, Senor Batlle y Ordonez, and was impressed in the necessarily brief 
audience by his force fulness, the familiarity he showed with the subjects I had 
come to discuss and his friendliness toward the objects of my visit. 

President Batlle lives a short distance from the capital and we drove from 
his beautiful estate back to the city and to the Prado, Montevideo's magnificent 
park, where a tea for us was in progress under the hospitable auspices of members 
of the American and English colony in Montevideo. From the tea I went to the 
house of Dr. Ildefonso Garcia Lagos and shall always remember the charming 
half-hour's talk I had with him. Despite age and the infirmity of blindness, Dr. 
Garcia Lagos who, in 1889, was a delegate to the first Pan-American Conference 
held in Washington, has continued to occupy himself with the broad, humanitarian 
international work in which he has for so long held a position of leadership. 
He had not stopped to think of personal convenience when Senor Barbaroux had 
invited him to meet with us at the Foreign Office, but had left his home to be 
present, and had given us the benefit of his experience and valuable advice. 

That night there was a banquet given for us in the Uruguay Club by the 
Minister of Foreign Affairs where we met men and women who were leaders 
in the life of the capital. We heard many expressions of cordial sympathy 
with the objects of our visit and these were voiced officially in a short speech 
of the Minister of Foreign Affairs. 

In order that we might have the opportunity to meet in this delightful 
way those whose acquaintance we so greatly desired to make, the steamship 
that was to take us back to Buenos Aires was delayed in starting for an hour 
or more and it was approaching midnight before we drove away from the 
Uruguay Club. The American Minister, members of the Reception Committee 
and Senor de Yerequi, of the Foreign Office, accompanied us to the steamer 
to take leave of us and to add by this last attention to the already deep sense 
of gratitude our hospitable welcome had inspired. 

It seems to us little short of remarkable that in the two brief hurried days 
we were able to remain in Uruguay, we should have received impressions 
which remain fixed so clearly in our memories, but we can never forget our 
friendly reception nor can we adequately express our appreciation of the cordiality 
and hospitality that marked our visit to Montevideo. It would have been 
impossible for our hosts to do more than they did to testify to their 
interest. 

Uruguay occupies such an honorable and important place among the nations 
of America that it is particularly gratifying to know that the Endowment has 
the approbation and support of its leading citizens in private and public life. 
Some one has well described Montevideo as the American Hague because of 
the many international Congresses and Conferences which are held there. A 
large number of these gatherings have in view the improvement of the present 
conditions of humanity. All that tends to uplift mankind, all that makes for 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 35 

progress in the march of civilization, finds a cordial support in progressive 
Uruguay. More than one historian has pointed out that the majority of leaders 
in the world's advance have come from smaller nations. Uruguay, although the 
smallest in area of the South American republics, occupies a place of honor and 
consequence not dependent upon its size but upon the intelligence, advance- 
ment and patriotism of its people. Although the smallest of the nations of the 
Southern continent, it is as large as all New England with the state of New 
Jersey added and, as has been said, has not an acre of unfertile soil throughout 
its length and breadth. Commercially, materially, it is growing rapidly, sharing 
in the great prosperity and progress that has come in recent years to these 
republics of the South. There is every reason to believe, and it is a cause for 
congratulation, that the work of cooperation with the Endowment already begun 
in Uruguay will be continued with most gratifying results. 

In Chile 

There was another busy day for us in Buenos Aires upon our return, a day 
in which every moment was occupied. There were interviews with the Minister 
of Foreign Affairs, Senor Bosch, and others who had manifested such a cordial 
interest in the objects of the Endowment, a visit under the personal guidance 
of Dr. Adolfo Mugica, Minister of Agriculture, to the Agricultural Museum, 
where we saw striking examples of some of those things which have made the 
Argentine such a great nation and, in the evening, there was a dinner at the 
Legation. 

Early on the following morning we departed on the journey to the other 
side of the Continent, for which purpose the President had placed his private 
railway carriage at our disposal and the government had delegated Senor 
Cortazar of the Railway Service to accompany us. There were many of our 
friends at the station to say good-bye : Mr. Garrett, Major Shipton, the Military 
Attache, Senor and Setiora Bosch, Senor and Sefiora Green, Dr. Joaquin de 
Anchorena, Dr. Larrain, the Chilean Minister, Senor Barilari, of the Foreign 
Office, and many others who had done so much to make our stay in Buenos Aires 
a pleasure that will forever remain in our memories. 

During all that day we travelled in a straight line to the west through a 
prairie land of wonderful richness, over which roamed great herds of cattle and 
horses. Seemingly boundless seas of wheat and alfalfa rolled away from us as far 
as the eye could reach. No one who has taken that journey across the pampas 
needs any further explanation of the prosperity that has so rapidly advanced the 
Argentine Republic to a leading place among the nations of the world. 

We arrived at Mendoza in the foot-hills of the Andes soon after daybreak, 
and there changed to a special train on the narrow gauge road that climbs amid 
impressive mountain scenery to a height of nearly 10,500 feet. During the ascent 
we caught a glimpse of Aconcagua, the highest mountain in the western hemi- 



36 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

sphere. Near the summit of the divide a tunnel has been cut through to the 
western slope, doing away with the mule-back journey of a few years ago. A 
good deal has been written of the hardships of this railway trip across the Andes, 
but none of our party experienced any discomfort. The descent on the Chilean 
side offers panoramas differing from those seen on the eastern side of the 
Cordilleras. The mountains are less barren and for that reason, perhaps, seem 
less rugged, although the descent was more precipitous than the ascent had been. 
The gorges are narrower and seem deeper, and as the train winds its way 
downward there are entrancing views, covering a wide range, and showing a 
country of great fertility. 

A change was made at Los Andes to the broad gauge again and we con- 
tinued our journey in a special car provided by the Chilean government. Mr. 
Harvey, our Charge d' Affaires in Chile, joined the party soon afterward. We 
arrived in Santiago about half-past ten o'clock in the evening, but in spite of the 
lateness of the hour, a large delegation, including representatives of the Govern- 
ment and members of the Committee of Reception, was at the station to wel- 
come us. After a pleasant moment of greeting in the train and on the station 
platform, we were driven to our hotel in state carriages which the President of 
the Republic had placed at our disposal. 

The arrangements for our reception in Santiago had been placed in the 
hands of the following committee: Dr. Domingo Amunategui, Rector of the 
University of Chile, Senator Joaquin Walker Martinez, Director of the Caja 
Hipotecaria, Dr. Luis Barros Borgofio, Dr. Antonio Huneeus, former Minister 
of Foreign Affairs, Sefior Jorge Astaburuaga and Senor Julio Philippi. 

The members of this committee were most attentive during the four days we 
remained in Santiago. They lost no opportunity to show us the many places of 
interest in their beautiful and picturesque city. Through them and through 
the efforts of the American Charge d' Affaires, Mr. Harvey, I met leading citizens 
of Chile and talked over with them the work the Endowment wished to 
accomplish. 

The first morning was devoted to a drive about the city in the company 
of members of the committee. Santiago is entirely distinctive in character. It 
possesses all the charm of an old Spanish city but its progressive, enlightened 
citizens have added to this charm of antiquity the comforts and improvements 
of modern capitals. Its situation is superb. High mountains rise close at hand 
enclosing the city in a frame of imposing proportions and exquisite coloring. In 
the clear atmosphere the mountains seem very near, but they give only the sense 
of protection without any oppressive feeling of restriction, of being shut in, such 
as one so often experiences in cities built near high mountains. The visitor, 
perhaps unconsciously, keeps ever in mind that longitudinal valley of incom- 
parable richness and fertility in which Santiago lies, and which makes of this 
part of Chile a region that experienced travellers have regarded as one of the 
earth's most attractive garden spots. 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 37 

It was an altogether charming and impressive glimpse that we got of the 
Chilean capital on that perfect October morning with the comfortable sun 
shining from a deep blue sky and a gentle but invigorating breeze blowing from 
the mountains. Such days, I am told, are a common experience in Santiago, where 
rarely does it become uncomfortably hot or uncomfortably cold. From the 
historic Cerro Santa Lucia we saw the city in panorama, a metropolis of half 
a million inhabitants with wide, straight avenues, large public buildings of pleasing 
architecture and statues and monuments worthy of the capital of a great and 
powerful nation. 

In the afternoon I called upon the Minister of Foreign Affairs, Sefior 
Enrique Villegas, and through his courtesy I had the honor of being presented 
to the President of Chile, Sefior Barros Luco, who expressed a most sympathetic 
interest in the objects of my visit. 

From the audience with the President we went directly to the University 
of Chile where, before a large gathering of representative men and women and 
many students of the University, I received a diploma, conferring honorary mem- 
bership of the Faculty of Law and Political Science, which is their form of con- 
ferring an honorary degree. The Rector of the University, Dr. Domingo 
Amunategui, made a brief speech of introduction, which was followed by an 
address of welcome delivered by Dr. Luis Barros Borgono, Dean of the Faculty 
of Filosofia y Humanidades. In my reply, I followed closely the lines of the 
address delivered in Buenos Aires and Montevideo descriptive of the work and 
purposes of the Endowment and of the objects of my visit. 

This was the first opportunity there had been on the west coast of South 
America of introducing to the public the work of the Endowment and 
asking cooperation, and I was anxious to compare the interest of the people with 
that which had been shown in the cities of the east coast. It is not possible for 
me to convey the gratification, encouragement and inspiration the manifestations 
of enthusiasm gave me, for it was at once evident that in Chile as in Argentina, 
Uruguay and Brazil, the Trustees would find zealous co-workers. I can never for- 
get the scene as we left the hall with the students cheering as we passed and shout- 
ing their approval. Students at universities are pretty much alike the world over ; 
if they disapprove, no forcing of their good opinion is possible ; if they approve, 
there is no restraining of their expression. I was glad that the work of the 
Endowment had stirred their imagination and won their sympathy. It will mean 
much to the cause in the future, for tomorrow these young men will be the 
leaders to whom the Endowment must look for support. 

The next morning there was another delightful ride about the city with 
Sefior Huneeus and other members of the committee, followed by a luncheon 
at the Legation, and afterward we went to the races where the official and social 
life of the capital had gathered. There can be few more beautiful spots in the 
world than the grassy plain of the Santiago race course with the mountains 
rising just beyond. At a reception later at the house of Dr. Luis Barros Borgono, 



38 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

which the President attended, we had another delightful opportunity of getting to 
know better those whose cordial hospitality had already made us feel so welcome. 

In the evening I went to a most interesting dinner given by the Minister of 
the Treasury, Sefior Alessandri, at the Club de la Union. 

To Sefior and Senora Huneeus, whose hospitality and indefatigable atten- 
tions added so much to our enjoyment, and to Sehor Urrutia and his charming 
wife, whom we had known in Washington, to Sefior Astaburuaga and others 
we owe a debt which we can never repay. Largely through them we met, during 
our short stay in Santiago, many members of the old families, who give to the 
society of the Chilean capital the cosmopolitan culture for which it is noted 
throughout the world. Nothing could have given us more pleasure than to 
meet their friends. At a dinner and reception at the house of Senora Edwards 
and her son, Sefior Augustin Edwards, Chilean Minister to the court of St. 
James, at an afternoon reception given for us by Senora Montt, widow of a 
distinguished president of Chile, and at the houses of other acquaintances, we 
were able to appreciate how thoroughly delightful life must be in this favored 
part of America, where, in beautiful surroundings and with climatic conditions 
as nearly perfect, perhaps, as can be found anywhere, a civilization exists which 
combines old Castilian charm with the progress and virility of the new world. 
Nor should I omit to mention among these very agreeable memories, how par- 
ticularly pleased I was to meet Don Julio Foster, who, for most of his ninety 
years, has been a prominent figure in the life of Santiago. 

The last two days of our stay in Santiago were largely given over to many 
conversations with Sefior Huneeus, Sefior Astaburuaga and other members of the 
committee and Sefior Philippi, Sefior Ricardo Montaner Bello, Dr. Amunategui 
and others representative of the University, all of whom had so greatly aided me 
with their advice. 

The formation of a committee was undertaken for the organization of a 
national society of international law. We were particularly fortunate in having 
the cooperation of prominent Chileans whose support left no room for doubt 
of the success of the undertaking: Sefior Antonio Huneeus, former Minister 
of Foreign Affairs; Dr. Luis Barros Borgofio, Dean of the Law Faculty of the 
University of Chile; Dr. Amunategui Solar, Rector of the University of Chile; 
Sefior Ricardo Montaner Bello. Since my return to the United States I have 
had the pleasure of receiving an evidence of the activity of these eminent gentle- 
men in the form of a circular announcing the permanent organization of the 
national society. 

All these experiences had been extremely gratifying, for those with whom 
I talked seized every occasion to express their entire approval of the Endowment's 
program and had demonstrated in a practical way their willingness to work 
together with the Trustees. 

In the meantime the officials of the government had continued their kind 
attentions. There had been an interesting visit to the Military School, where 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 39 

I had luncheon with the Minister of War, Sefior Jorge Matte Gomaz, and met 
the chiefs of the army who are largely responsible for the efficiency of the 
Chilean soldiers, which has called forth the praise of authorities from many 
countries. We were fortunate in seeing a very fine drill. On the evening 
following we had the pleasure of attending a large dinner given by the Minister 
of Foreign Affairs, Sefior Enrique Villegas, and followed by a ball at the 
Club Hipico. 

We left Santiago for Valparaiso early in the morning on October 29th, in a 
special car which the Government had placed at our disposal. Mr. Harvey, Sefior 
Huneeus, Senor Lynch, representing the Foreign Office, and others were at the 
station to bid us farewell. 

It had been our wish to remain long enough in Valparaiso to gain acquaint- 
ance with its leading citizens, but the limited time we could spend on the entire 
South American trip made this impossible. I did, however, find time to call 
upon the Municipal Intendente who had kindly sent his launch to take us out 
to the steamer. 

We were met at the station by Captain Johnson, the American Naval 
Attache, and Consul General Winslow, and had luncheon with them at the 
English Club, afterward driving to the heights overlooking the city. It is a tribute 
to the people of Valparaiso and to the Chilean character that their principal 
seaport which was almost destroyed by an earthquake in 1906 should have been 
built up again so quickly and better and more beautiful than it was before. 

We left Valparaiso at four o'clock in the afternoon on the steamship Oronsa 
of the Pacific Steam Navigation Company, quite loth to depart from shores that 
had been so hospitable to us. 

The Republic of Chile is keeping pace with the progress made by the great 
Republics of the east coast of South America. She has contended against dif- 
ficulties considerably greater than those which have confronted her eastern sisters, 
for their closer proximity to Europe brought to them an earlier solution of the 
great South American problem of rail-and-water communication upon which the 
progress of every nation must largely depend. Traffic by sea between Chile and 
the countries of Europe has necessitated the long and arduous passage through 
the Magellan Straits or the difficult voyage around the Horn. Railway com- 
munication with the outside world has been confined until recently to that obtained 
by the passage of the Andes on mule-back, a journey impossible during several 
months in the year. The tunnel joining the Chilean and Argentine ends of the 
Trans-Andean railway, uniting a great trans-continental system of transportation, 
solved the land problem, and other trans-Andean railways are in contemplation 
or in actual course of construction, which will greatly increase these facilities. 
The problem of communication by water will be solved by the Panama Canal. 

Even a brief visit to Chile is sufficient to impress one with the belief that 
the present prosperity it enjoys must rapidly increase. The natural conditions 
point convincingly to such a conclusion and the Chileans themselves are such a 



40 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

virile, determined people, united in their love for their beautiful country and the 
desire to promote its development, that the future of Chile seems very bright. 
Surely we of the United States have every reason to hope that it will be so. 

Ever since the birth of the Republic the welcome extended to foreigners 
has been in keeping with the hospitality for which the Spanish race is famed 
and this has resulted in a broad, cosmopolitan spirit, but, though the Chileans 
make the stranger welcome, no more sensitive or prouder people exists. They 
are not arrogant, but they have a proper patriotic pride in the achievements of 
their illustrious men and they are correspondingly quick to resent any action or 
attitude which is not in keeping with their high sense of personal and national 
dignity. 

In the more intimate relations between the people of Chile and the people 
of this country which are sure to be brought about by the opening of the Panama 
Canal, it is well for us to remember these things, in order that we may not 
through thoughtlessness or ignorance give offense, but try in every way to 
cement the present bonds of friendship which bind us to our sister republic. 

In Peru 

From Valparaiso to Callao and from Callao on northward until the Guaya- 
quil River is reached, the steamer is never out of sight of land. The course 
follows the straight line of the shore, generally hugging it so closely that the 
surf can be seen breaking at the foot of the arid mountains. The higher sum- 
mits to the eastward have robbed the winds of their moisture by the time they 
reach the coast, so that from the deck of the steamer the traveller looks upon a 
region as bleak and often as weirdly fantastic in contour as the landscapes Dore 
painted to illustrate Dante's verse. League upon league of land, destitute of all 
vegetation, is passed, but, despite its barrenness, the prospect is made interesting 
by the vividness of the coloring. In the changing lights of morning, noon and 
evening, one may see displayed upon the peaks and in the valleys all the colors of 
the spectrum, from red to violet, with the striking exception of green, which lack 
the tossing sea in the foreground supplies. For two thousand miles or more 
the ship sails under the lee of these hot, desert mountains which need only the 
touch of water to convert them into hanging gardens of tropical luxuriance. 

We were told that storms along the coast were rare; almost unknown, the 
captain of our steamship informed us ; so that the ships may with impunity hug 
the shore, for deep water is to be found within a few yards of the narrow stretch 
of beach which generally runs like a yellow ribbon at the foot of the mountains. 
A heavy swell is constant and at times causes the ship to roll uncomfortably, 
particularly when the vessel is at anchor, but, for the most part, the voyage 
along the western coast of South America resembles a yachting cruise more than 
the ocean trip to which Atlantic travellers are accustomed. The Humboldt 
current, sweeping up from the Antarctic, keeps the journey toward the Equator 
from becoming uncomfortably hot. 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 41 

Sea-birds, flying-fishes and the larger inhabitants of the ocean, porpoises and 
whales, are companions of the voyage in sufficient numbers to divert the attention 
from the seemingly endless panorama of reddish mountain land. At times thou- 
sands of birds are to be seen in the air at once and occasionally a guano island is 
passed, literally covered with birds. 

The Oronsa called at six ports between Valparaiso and Callao, anchoring in 
the open roadstead, for harbors are practically non-existent, while cargo or 
passengers were unloaded or taken on. 

Coquimbo was our first stopping place, a small but important shipping port 
with good anchorage, a day's journey from Valparaiso. The next day we put 
in at Antofagasta which lies on the Tropic of Capricorn. Is is the port of entry 
for Bolivia. To all of us it had been a source of deep regret that we did not 
have time to go to La Paz, but the distance of the Bolivian capital from the 
seaboard and the inability to arrange satisfactory steamship connection ren- 
dered a visit to La Paz impossible. From Antofagasta, a telegram was sent 
to our Minister in Bolivia, expressing the regret we felt in being at the port of 
La Paz, but unable to undertake the two days' journey over the mountains to 
the inland Republic, whose bright future must be the hope and expectation of 
all who are familiar with the difficulties she has already successfully overcome 
in her rapid recent development. 

At Antofagasta a representative of the Intendente came aboard to give us 
an official welcome, and we received a visit from the United States Consular 
Agent. Our ship stopped also at Iquique, Arica, Arequipa and Mollendo, and we 
sent from Arequipa a message of greeting to those who have charge of Harvard 
University's observatory on El Misti. 

The sun was setting when we arrived at Callao on November 3rd. It is an 
excellent harbor, by far the largest and best we had seen on the west coast, but 
as yet the ships do not come alongside the piers. A launch had been sent out 
for our party and we started ashore in it before the Oronsa had reached her 
regular anchorage. In the confusion incident upon this we failed to meet Mr. 
Pennoyer, our Secretary of Legation, Sefior German Cisneros y Raygada, of 
the Foreign Office, who had come out to welcome us officially, and others 
who did not come aboard before we left; but we had the pleasure of seeing 
them soon after at the hotel in Lima and many other times subsequently, for 
they were untiring in their constant and valuable assistance during our stay 
in Peru. Though we missed Sefior Cisneros and Mr. Pennoyer at the steam- 
ship, we had the pleasure of meeting Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle and other 
members of a committee who greeted us in the name of the Faculty of Law 
of the University of San Marcos. Great indeed, too, was our delight to meet 
again Sefior Felipe Pardo, whom I had known in Washington when he was the 
Peruvian Minister there. 

Lima is seven miles from Callao and we went there in one of the electric 
cars which run at frequent intervals between the port and the capital. The car 



42 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

had been placed at our disposal, another mark of attention from the Government, 
whose friendliness was constantly manifested. The President, Senor Billing- 
hurst, placed his own automobile under my orders during our entire stay in Lima. 

It was dark when we arrived in the city, but our glimpses as we drove to the 
Hotel Maury from the station produced a most agreeable impression and this was 
subsequently confirmed and strengthened. The antiquity of Lima, the individual 
and picturesque character which it has so charmingly preserved, the romantic and 
brilliant part it has played in American history, all serve to attract the visitor, 
but, in addition, there are striking evidences of the modern spirit of progress 
which Lima shares with other South American capitals, and which render a 
visit to the Peruvian capital essential to any one who seeks a comprehensive 
acquaintance with the present conditions of our Southern neighbors. Wide 
streets, beautiful squares, crowded business thoroughfares, attractive residential 
districts, all testify to the social and commercial importance of the city. 

Peru has had to contend against great difficulties. Her remoteness from 
Europe and from the United States has served to isolate her, but that day has 
passed or is rapidly passing. In the extent and variety of her natural resources few 
nations of the world are so rich and the time must soon come when these riches 
will bring to her people a new era of prosperity greater than any they have enjoyed 
in the past. To one whose acquaintance with the Republic is confined to a 
brief visit and much reading, this development would seem to be inevitable. 

On the day following our arrival in Lima, I called upon the American 
Minister, Mr. Benton McMillin, in the morning and in the afternoon upon the 
Minister of Foreign Affairs, Senor Tudela y Varela, through whose courtesy I 
was presented to the President, Senor Billinghurst. The President's reception 
was extremely cordial. He spoke English perfectly, and showed a deep knowledge 
of the affairs of the United States. In the objects of my visit and the work of 
the Endowment he manifested a most friendly interest. 

Upon returning to the hotel I found that many persons had called and the 
visits continued after my arrival. Dr. Lizardo Alzamora, Rector of the Univer- 
sity of San Marcos and Dr. Eleodoro Romero, Dean of the Faculty of Law, 
were among those who took this early opportunity to promise their cooperation 
in the objects for the accomplishment of which the Endowment had instructed 
me to visit Peru. 

The next day was taken up entirely with visits. I found the most friendly 
interest everywhere and the warm hospitality of every one, the sincere desire to 
be of service, made us all quickly feel that in heart at least, we were not strangers. 
The leading men gave me freely the benefit of their invaluable advice, devoting 
their time with the utmost willingness. I can never sufficiently thank them. Were 
I merely to mention the names of those to whom I am indebted, the list would 
fill several pages and even then be incomplete, but elsewhere I have taken 
occasion to express my gratitude to a few of those whose services so con- 
spicuously helped me. 



EOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 43 

In the evening we met new acquaintances and renewed others at a dinner 
and reception which Senor and Senora Felipe Pardo gave for Mrs. Bacon and 
myself. 

I had an opportunity the next afternoon to explain to a distinguished gather- 
ing the methods and purposes of the Endowment. The University of San 
Marcos conferred upon me honorary membership in the Faculty of Juris- 
prudence, and the ceremony was made the occasion for an address by Dr. 
Eleodoro Romero, Dean of the Faculty, who presented me with a diploma and 
the medal of the corporation. In my response I described in detail, as requested 
by members of the Faculty, the work of the Endowment, following the lines of 
previous addresses. I cannot leave this subject without expressing the gratifica- 
tion it gave me to receive this honor and to have the privilege of speaking at the 
oldest seat of learning on the American Continent. It must fill any American 
with pride and reverence to enter the beautiful patio of the University, climb the 
ancient stone stairway to the wide verandas and visit the great halls with the 
portraits of rectors of the University from the time of its foundation in 1551, 
looking down from the walls. Through centuries of great stress, through war 
and revolution and untold hardships, earnest teachers and students of San 
Marcos have kept brightly burning the first lamp of learning lighted in the new 
world. 

From the University we went to the American Legation, where the Minister 
and Mrs. McMillin were giving us a charming garden party. 

There were further interviews the day following with Dr. Manuel M. 
Mensones, Dr. Manzanilla, Dr. Maiirtua, Dr. J. A. de Lavalle of the Supreme 
Court and his son, Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle and with others, interspersed 
by visits from Senor Pardo, Professor Wiesse, who had met us at the steamer, 
Dr. Julio Tello, a Peruvian who graduated from Harvard in 1909 and who is 
now Curator of the National Museum, Senor Cisneros, Mr. Pennoyer and a 
host of others, who had seized every opportunity to render their valuable services. 
I had a most enjoyable talk with Dr. Ramon Ribeyro, one of the finest of the 
elder statesmen of Peru, who has long been prominent in the intellectual life 
of the Republic, and who readily gave me the benefit of his advice and great 
experience. 

In the afternoon the University Club gave me a reception at which brief 
speeches were made by the President, Senor Luis G. Rivera, and others. In the 
evening there was a large banquet given by the Minister of Foreign Affairs and 
Senora Tudela y Varela. The Minister proposed a very gracious toast to which 
I responded. 

The following morning we made an interesting visit to the Senate upon 
the invitation of General Elespuru, President of the Senate. In the afternoon 
the Colegio de Abogados, or Bar Association, conferred upon me the honor 
of honorary membership, presenting me with a medal. I was introduced by the 
Acting Dean, Dr. Manuel F. Bellido, and in reply spoke on the subject of the 



44 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

American Institute of International Law and the national Societies of Inter- 
national Law. Dr. Anibal Maurtua followed with a discourse, after which there 
was the "copa de champana," and many exchanges of friendly sentiments. 

The Geographic Society also conferred honorary membership upon me and 
there was a short speech of presentation of the diploma by Sefior Jose Balta, 
the President of the Society. 

With extreme pleasure I look back upon the banquet offered in my honor 
by the University of San Marcos in the great hall of which I have already spoken. 
It was, as far as public entertainments were concerned, the occasion of our 
leave-taking of South America, and surely I could not have imagined any form 
of farewell which would have left in our minds more appreciative recollection. 
The informality, the cordiality, the good-humor and the good friendship of the 
occasion all served to make it memorable. Dr. Romero and Dr. Javier Prado y 
Ugarteche made delightful informal speeches, in reply to which I found it 
difficult to express the gratitude I felt. 

The two days before our departure on November I ith, were devoted to visits 
and to organizing the work that was to be done. A very strong committee was 
got together as a basis for the permanent organization of a national Society of 
International Law. Its membership included : 

Dr. Francisco Tudela y Varela, Minister of Foreign Affairs; 

Dr. Lizardo Alzamora, Rector of the University of San Marcos; 

Dr. Ramon Ribeyro; 

Dr. Javier Prado y Ugarteche, Senator, member of the Faculty of the 

University ; 
Dr Eleodoro Romero, Dean of the Faculty of Law; 
Dr. Jose Matias Manzanilla, member of the Faculty of the University; 
Dr. Adolf o Villagarcia; 

Dr. Antonio Miro Quesada, editor of El Comercio; 
Dr. Alberto Ulloa, editor of La Prensa; 
Dr. Anibal Maurtua, member of the Faculty of Law ; 
Dr Victor Andres Belaunde, Professor of International Law ; 
Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle, member of the Faculty of Law. 

For the position of Honorary Secretary of a national Society for Inter- 
national Conciliation we were fortunate in obtaining the acceptance of Dr. Juan 
Bautista de Lavalle, member of the Faculty of Law of the University of San 
Marcos. 

I had the privilege of attending on the last day of our stay in Lima, 
the opening session of the Latin-American and Pan-American Medical 
Congress. Many of the delegates to this Congress had been in Lima through- 
out the period of our visit, some having come from the South with us on the 
Oronsa, and I had had many interesting conversations with Dr. Odriozola, the 
President of the Congress, Dr. Domingo Cabred, of the Argentine delegation, 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 45 

Dr. Gregorio Amunategui Solar, of Chile, Dr. Nascimento Gurgel and Dr. 
Placido Barbosa, of Brazil, and others. 

It would have been difficult if not impossible to find a body of men more 
thoroughly representative of Latin-American thought and culture than this body 
of scientists, who, in a practical manner, were devoting their lives to a humani- 
tarian purpose and by international gatherings, such as that which, before a dis- 
tinguished audience including President Billinghurst, was convened in Lima on 
November ioth, were contributing so effectively to the better understanding 
between nations. 

So greatly impressed had I been with the fact that these eminent leaders in 
their profession were achieving in their work some of the objects for which the 
Endowment was founded, that I took the liberty of suggesting to some of their 
members the possibility of sending delegates from the Congress to visit the 
United States under the auspices of the Endowment. The suggestion met with 
ready approval and it is a source of deep gratification to me that the Trustees 
have also acted favorably upon the proposal. It is not necessary to dwell upon the 
importance of such visits and the great good that must surely result from 
them. 

Our visit to Lima had been of longer duration than any other visit we 
had made in South America, and this fact afforded to some of our party the 
opportunity for sight-seeing. One day had been devoted to an inspection of 
Inca mounds near the city, a highly interesting excursion, taken under the per- 
sonal guidance of Professor Carlos Wiesse, who had been most attentive. On 
another day some of us had taken an excursion over the Central Railway into 
the mountains on the way to Cerro de Pasco, and were afforded an excellent 
opportunity of inspecting this truly wonderful example of mountain railway 
engineering which had sprung a half a century ago from the brain of an engineer 
from the United States, Henry Meiggs. 

The nine days we were in the Peruvian capital are crowded with sou- 
venirs of the kindness of its charming people. There were frequent visits to 
the houses of members of the old society, the oldest, I believe, on the American 
continent, where Spanish traditions of hospitality were first transplanted in 
the new world. To Senor and Sefiora de Barreda, the parents of Sefiora Felipe 
Pardo, who, with her husband, did so much for us while we were in Lima, we 
shall always be deeply indebted and there are memories of other delightful 
visits; of an afternoon at the historic Casa de Torre-Tagle, one of the finest 
examples of the ancient Spanish architecture in South America, where we 
had tea with members of the Ortiz de Zevallos family; of a tea at the house 
of Dr. Prado y Ugarteche, a luncheon with Senor Alvarez Calderon and Sefiora 
Alvarez Calderon de East and of other informal meetings with Peruvian acquaint- 
ances whom we quickly came to regard as friends. 

When we left Lima for Callao a great number of our friends were at the 
station to bid us good-bye. Among them were the Minister of Foreign Affairs, 



46 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Sefior Tudela y Varela; the Military representative of the President; Sefior 
Cisneros; Mr. and Mrs. McMillin; Sefior and Senora Felipe Pardo; Sefior 
Alvarez Calderon ; Dr. Alzamora ; Dr. Romero ; Dr. de Lavalle ; Professor Carlos 
Wiesse ; Mr. Pennoyer and a great many others who had done so much to make 
our visit enjoyable. 

We left Peru with a feeling of deepest gratitude for all the evidences of 
friendship we had seen and with a lively sense of regret that our enjoyable visit 
could not be prolonged. The cordiality, the real friendship which the countries 
we visited had expressed and shown for the United States was nowhere more 
marked than it had been in Lima, and the Trustees of the Endowment will have 
there a most effective support. 

With the increased immigration which must, it would seem, naturally 
follow upon the opening of the Panama Canal, Peru will assume a 
more important place in American affairs. It is in this looking toward 
the future that one finds the greatest encouragement in the present 
fraternal attitude of its leaders of public opinion. Our intercourse must 
become daily more frequent and with it the clearer realization that here, close 
to the south of us, is a nation with ideals similar to our own, which, in spite 
of obstacles, is pushing steadily forward in the path of progress, and which 
never loses an opportunity of manifesting its friendliness toward the United 
States. 

In Panama 

The Peruvian steamship, Mantaro, on which we journeyed northward, was 
a very comfortable ship, kept scrupulously clean. We put in at Salaverry, Pacas- 
mayo, Eten and Payta, seeing on our way many evidences of the recent develop- 
ment of the mineral and oil lands near the coast. 

We arrived in the Bay of Panama, a beautiful bay, flanked with wooded 
islands, on November 18th, and remained on board until the next day, when 
the quarantine period expired. The very sight of the city of Panama must 
inspire varied emotions in an American. Near here began, under the indomitable 
Pizarro, the conquest of the great countries we had just left. It was to this 
coast that he came with Balboa in that first journey across the isthmus, and it 
was here that he returned after defeat, which made him all the more determined 
to push on into the unknown lands to the south, the "ultimate dim Thule" of 
adventurous explorers. And now the city is the southern portal of that "bridge 
of water" which has been built by heroes of to-day not less indomitable than 
were Pizarro and his band of conquistadores. Once the starting place of expedi- 
tions which transformed a continent, Panama is now the scene of what has 
been called the last great transformation of the earth's arrangement left for 
man to undertake. 



FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR EATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS 47 

Colonel Goethals had sent out a launch for us with an aide who gave us 
our first real view of the canal, taking us as far as the Miraflores locks. 
Returning, we put ashore at Balboa, and went thence by train to Panama. 
This interesting excursion had been the cause of our missing the American 
Minister, Mr. William Jennings Price, the Secretary of the Legation, Mr. Wicker, 
and Serior Lefevre, Minister of Foreign Affairs, and other officials of the Pana- 
manian Government, who had been to the landing stage at Panama to give us 
an official welcome. We had the pleasure of seeing them later at the hotel, and 
the next day with Mr. Price I paid a visit to Serior Lefevre, through whose 
courtesy, I had an audience with the President. We were in Panama only that 
day and a part of the next. I took the occasion, however, to talk with repre- 
sentative men and from them I learned that the Republic of Panama offers an 
excellent prospective field for some of the activities in which the Endowment 
is interested, but the immediate present was considered an inauspicious time in 
which to undertake the work. The approaching opening of the canal, the com- 
parative newness of the Republic, and the many questions of internal organi- 
zation and development all serve to occupy the public interest and it was con- 
sidered advisable to postpone for the moment the discussion of other matters. 

Serior Lefevre and Serior Estripeant, aide-de-camp of the President, were 
most attentive and I cannot sufficiently thank them or our Minister, Mr. Price, 
for their kindness. 

After a final morning of sight-seeing and a luncheon at the home of Colonel 
Judson, who had taken us on a most interesting tour of inspection of the Gatun 
Locks, we sailed from Colon for New Orleans on November 20th, arriving there 
five days later. 

It had been our desire to visit Venezuela and our itinerary had originally 
included Caracas, but we found, upon arrival at Panama, that the steamship con- 
nections with La Guayra were such that we would be unable to make the journey 
in the limited time at our disposal. 

We expressed our regret in a letter to the American Minister at Caracas, 
and took the liberty of sending to him copies of the pamphlets we had distributed 
among representative South Americans, for the purpose of distribution among 
the leading men in Venezuela. 

We arrived in New York on Thanksgiving day, November 27, 1913, just 
two months and four days after our departure from Lisbon. This mention of 
the time occupied by our long journey may be helpful in correcting the general 
impression in the United States that a visit to South America requires more time 
than is usually allotted to a summer's tour of Europe or a winter sojourn on 
the Mediterranean. It is difficult to imagine a tour of ten weeks more varied or 
more filled with interest. From a scenic standpoint the journey is of almost 
incomparable beauty, but the thought that must chiefly hold and thrill the visitor 
is that he is observing new races and new countries in the most interesting stages 



48 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

of their evolution. These nations are destined to play a great part in the 
future, and it requires no strain upon the imagination to picture the vast 
unoccupied lands in the South American continent as the theatre of a new world 
development. 

It is a duty we owe to ourselves, and one which the Endowment may well 
help our people to fulfill, to get into closer contact with our friends in South 
America. Almost surely, I believe, the travel between our countries will increase, 
and with this better knowledge of each other will come truer and more enduring 
friendships. 

Respectfully Submitted, 

Robert Bacon. 
March 15, 1914. 



Interview in The New York Evening Post, 

December 13, 1913 

As the representative of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, 
Robert Bacon, ex-Secretary of State and ex-Ambassador to France, has just 
returned from a tour of Brazil, Argentina, Uruguay, Chile, and Peru. The jour- 
ney was made for purposes connected with various activities in which the Endow- 
ment is interested. These include the formation of societies of international law 
which are to be affiliated with the American Institute of International Law, 
founded in 1912, and of which Elihu Root is the honorary president. Mr. Bacon's 
visit had also the object of organizing Associations of Conciliation and arranging 
for the interchange of visits of representative men between this country and South 
America and the exchange of professors and students of universities. By these 
means the Endowment hopes to establish closer relations between the nations of 
the Western Hemisphere. 

"It is difficult to exaggerate," said Mr. Bacon to-day, "the manifestations of 
friendliness for the United States which were exhibited in every country. In 
spite of misrepresentations and misunderstandings, caused nearly always by our 
ignorance of the real conditions in South America, we have no truer friends any- 
where in the world than in these sister republics of the same continent. They 
welcome every opportunity to testify their regard for us." 

From this city Mr. Bacon went first to the Philippines by way of San Fran- 
cisco and continued his journey westward through Japan, China, and Siberia, to 
Europe, sailing from Lisbon for Rio de Janeiro on September 23. 

After visiting Brazil, Argentina, Uruguay, Chile, and Peru, he went from 
Lima to Panama, and returned to New York by way of New Orleans. In all he 
travelled about 35,000 miles. On his journey around the world he was accom- 
panied by Mrs. Bacon and Miss Bacon. Otto Schoenrich, president of the 
Nicaraguan Mixed Claims Commission, and Mrs. Schoenrich, and W. R. Here- 
ford joined the party in Paris for the South American tour. 

Across the Andes by Rail 

In describing the purposes of his visit Mr. Bacon said : 

"I went to South America with instructions from the President of the Endow- 
ment, Senator Elihu Root, regarding specific objects in connection with activities 
in which the Endowment is interested. From Rio de Janeiro we went next to 
Buenos Aires, crossing the Plata River to Montevideo ; then returning to Buenos 
Aires, and proceeding to Santiago de Chile by the wonderful Trans-Andean Rail- 
way, a narrow-gauge road, which ascends to a height of 10,500 feet, passing near 



50 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

some of the loftiest mountains of this hemisphere. From Santiago we went by 
steamer to Callao, the port for Lima, and thence by a comfortable Peruvian 
steamer to Panama." 

Mr. Bacon thus explained the friendly reception he met with : 

"The visit to South America made by Mr. Root in 1906, when he was Secre- 
tary of State, has had an enduring effect in bringing about a better understanding 
between the Latin republics and the United States. That visit is vividly remem- 
bered and constantly referred to in the speeches and writings of the brilliant repre- 
sentatives of public opinion throughout South America. To it, perhaps, more 
than to any other single circumstance is to be attributed the present attitude toward 
us ; for Mr. Root, as will be remembered, by his doctrine of sympathy and under- 
standing, of kindly consideration and honorable obligation, was able to allay or 
eradicate the suspicion and distrust of our motives that had been slowly engen- 
dered. 

"It is the belief of Mr. Root and his fellow trustees of the Carnegie Endow- 
ment that a great part of the misunderstandings between nations arises from a 
lack of knowledge of each other, a lack of knowledge of conditions and senti- 
ments. The Endowment seeks by practical means to overcome this ignorance. 

Objects of the Visit 

"The objects of my visit to South America included the formation of national 
societies of international law ; the organization of associations to be affiliated with 
the Association of International Conciliation in Paris, of which Baron d'Estour- 
nelles de Constant is the president and founder ; the arrangement for an exchange 
of visits of representative men from the Latin republics to the United States and 
from this country to South America, and for a similar exchange between the 
professors and students of their universities and our own. 

"The Institute of International Law, founded in 1873, is composed of the 
most eminent jurisconsults of Europe and America. The American Institute 
was founded a little more than a year ago with Senator Root as the honorary 
president and Dr. James Brown Scott as president. The aims and objects of 
each Institute are largely identical, but, as was asserted by the founders in the 
formal statement of the aims and objects of the American Institute, 'the part that 
treats of war is of secondary importance, as the proposers believe that the principles 
of international law are generally applicable and should be studied and developed 
so as to maintain the status of peace, which so fortunately exists between the 
American republics.' 

"By the formation of these national societies, it is hoped to popularize the 
principles of law governing the relations of nations so that, in course of time, 
governments will be obliged by popular opinion to conduct themselves with due 
regard to such principles. 



INTERVIEW IN THE NEW YORK EVENING POST 51 

"Through this initiative of the Endowment national societies of international 
law have now been either actually formed or are in process of formation in Rio 
de Janeiro, Buenos Aires, Montevideo, Santiago de Chile, and Lima. They will 
be affiliated with the American Institute and their intercommunication through the 
Institute will afford a new and valuable means for the exchange of ideas between 
the leaders of opinion in North and South America. 

"I also had the honor of explaining and inviting participation in the proposed 
Academy of International Law at The Hague, and of suggesting the necessity of 
the appointment of national committees for the discussion of contributions to the 
programme of the next Hague Peace Conference. The work of the Division of 
Economics and History of the Endowment was also explained. 

"In no better way, perhaps, can an understanding of each other by the 
republics of America be accomplished than by an exchange of visits of represen- 
tative men and an exchange of professors and students of universities. 

"In scientific and professional life there is now such an international exchange 
constantly going on. Congresses of representative men from all over the world 
meet and reap immeasurable benefit from the exchange of ideas, and by these 
exchanges the nations, through their representative men, are drawn into a closer 
communion with each other, with a resultant better international understanding. 

"Under the auspices of the Division of Intercourse and Education of the 
Endowment, of which Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler is the Director, Baron 
d'Estournelles de Constant, of France, the Baroness von Suttner, of Austria, 
and Professor Nitobe, of Japan, have already visited the United States, and 
President Eliot, of Harvard University, has visited India, China, and Japan, 
and Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie has visited Japan. 

"It is hoped in the near future to have visits from representative South 
Americans to the United States, and it is the purpose of the trustees of the En- 
dowment to continue the exchange of visits thus begun. 

"It is expected, also, to inaugurate an exchange of professors between South 
American universities and the universities of this country, and to arrange the 
details of an exchange that will include the students of universities." 

Mr. Bacon spoke frankly of how the Endowment expected to achieve its ends 
and of the aid which will be accorded it by influential South Americans. 

"Through these practical methods the Endowment is endeavoring to estab- 
lish closer relations between nations," he explained. "It is not to be hoped that 
the results achieved will be immediately apparent. The very fact that persons 
impatiently expect visible evidences of the progress made has led to much of the 
pessimism and skepticism one encounters when discussing these subjects. 

"As Mr. Root has pointed out: 'The trustees of the Endowment are fully 
aware that progress in the work which they have undertaken must necessarily 
be slow, and that its most substantial results must be far in the future. We are 
dealing with aptitudes and impulses firmly established in human nature through 
the development of thousands of years, and the utmost that any one generation 



52 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

can hope to do is to promote the gradual change of standards of conduct. All 
estimates of such a work, and its results, must be in terms not of individual 
human life, but in terms of the long life of nations. Inconspicuous as are the 
immediate results, however, there can be no nobler object of human effort than to 
exercise an influence upon the tendencies of the race, so that it shall grow, how- 
ever slowly, in the direction of civilization and humanity, and away from sense- 
less brutality.' 

"The leading men of South America are very far advanced in their under- 
standing and appreciation of the good that must follow these international ex- 
changes. The rapid, material development of their wonderful countries has in 
no way blunted their lofty idealism, and nowhere can there be found men more 
willing or more able to work together for a common, humanitarian purpose. 
All that is suggestive of social progress makes an immediate appeal to their 
sympathies." 

Mr. Bacon had enthusiastic accounts of the condition of the countries which 
he visited, and the impression made upon him by their inexhaustible resources. 
He regarded immigration as a principal factor in their future. 

The Country of the Future 

"In regard to the development which I observed, I cannot sufficiently impress 
its significance upon our own country," said Mr. Bacon. "Some of these re- 
publics are advancing so rapidly that each succeeding year will mark an impor- 
tant change. The people have been beset by obstacles greater than those that con- 
fronted our forefathers, and but little understood by us here, but, in spite of 
them, they have forged ahead until the civilization of their larger centres compares 
favorably with the older civilization of Europe. 

"It must strike any one who visits South America that it is the country of the 
future. The natural resources are so vast that they may be said to be almost 
inexhaustible. Although so much has been written and spoken about this wealth, 
we have only the vaguest conception of it, and the part it must play in the history 
of civilization in the near future. 

"The people come of sturdy stock. In this country, our people, because of 
their lack of knowledge, are apt to class Latin-America as a whole, but the racial 
and other differences between the peoples of the various republics are as great as 
the differences between the peoples of the various countries of Europe. 

"As yet the countries of South America, even the larger countries like Brazil 
and the Argentine, are sparsely settled. Immigration has been checked by dis- 
tance and the difficulties of travel, but these conditions are disappearing. The 
improved means of communication are bringing more and more people to their 
shores. German, English, French, Italians, and Japanese have been quick to 
realize the opportunities that await them there." 

Travellers who contemplate visiting South America, Mr. Bacon says, will 
find adequate railway and steamship facilities, "There is," he said, "great and sub- 



INTERVIEW IN THE NEW YORK EVENING POST 53 

stantial benefit to be derived from an acquaintance with our South American 
neighbors, of whom too many of us are, unfortunately, profoundly ignorant. 
The representative men and women of these countries have all the charm and 
grace and intellectual culture for which the Latin races are famous. Their warm- 
hearted hospitality is proverbial. Personally, I shall never forget, nor can I ade- 
quately express my appreciation of, the kindness and courtesy of their welcome." 



Editorial from The American Journal of International Law, 

January, 1914 

Last fall the Honorable Robert Bacon, formerly Secretary of State and 
Ambassador to France, undertook a journey to South America on a mission for 
the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, "to secure the interest and sym- 
pathy of the leaders of opinion in the principal Latin-American Republics, in 
the various enterprises for the advancement of international peace which the 
Endowment is seeking to promote; and by means of personal intercourse and 
explanation to bring about practical cooperation" in these undertakings. With 
the exception of Mr. Root's official visit, as Secretary of State in 1906, no 
journey by a citizen of the United States has done quite so much to encourage 
and stimulate the development of cordial and helpful international relations 
between the republics of North and South America, as this memorable trip of 
Mr. Bacon. He visited Brazil, Argentina, Uruguay, Chile and Peru, being pre- 
vented by difficulties in arranging steamship and railroad connections from visiting 
the other countries as planned in his itinerary. In each country visited, Mr. 
Bacon was received with the utmost cordiality by the government, and officially 
entertained. The diplomatic representatives of the United States did everything 
in their power to render his stay in the capital cities effective of results; and 
prominent citizens representing all elements of the business, professional and 
social life vied with each other in imparting to his mission the dignity and 
significance which its importance bespoke. The University of Santiago gave him 
an honorary degree, as did also the University of Lima; and various scientific 
and legal societies elected him to honorary membership. His mission was every- 
where welcomed sympathetically in the newspaper press, which fully reported his 
public addresses. The success of his mission was greatly promoted by his ability 
to address his audiences in the Spanish, Portuguese and French languages. 

Mr. Bacon's more important addresses were delivered in Rio de Janeiro, 
under the auspices of the Brazilian Academy, the Institute of the Order of 
Advocates, and also at the American Embassy; in Montevideo at the Ateneo, 
under the auspices of the University; in Buenos Aires, before the Faculty of 
Law of the University; in Santiago, at the University of Chile; and in Lima, 
at the University of San Marcos and before the Colegio de Abogados. 

In each of these addresses and in his numerous conferences with the govern- 
ment officials, with educators and distinguished citizens, Mr. Bacon directed 
attention to certain of the specific plans of the Endowment, one of the most 
important of these being the formation of national societies to be affiliated with 
the American Institute of International Law. In each country visited, com- 



AMERICAN JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL LAW 55 

mittees were at once appointed to organize such societies, and in several of them 
the organization has already been effected. This feature of Mr. Bacon's work 
is of especial interest to the readers of this Journal; and we may safely predict 
that as a result of it this promising institution will soon become an actual reality, 
establishing a new point of contact and a new bond of sympathy between the 
jurists and the statesmen of the northern and southern hemispheres. Both 
political circumstances and geographic situation have created new and special 
conditions, making possible understandings which, while not inconsistent with 
or antagonistic to the principles of European international law, permit agree- 
ments upon matters regarding which the rest of the world cannot yet agree. 
A distinguished professor of law at Padua stated the case concisely and com- 
pletely, when he said that "the probable cooperation of two autonomous institutes 
is preferable to the practically impossible collaboration between dissimilar 
elements of the same association." 

Mr. Bacon suggested the active participation of the several governments 
in the proposed Academy of International Law at The Hague, and we ma) 
anticipate the cordial acceptance by each of the formal invitation to this end. 
His suggestion that the Latin-American states appoint committees for the con- 
sideration of contributions to the program of the Third Hague Conference and 
the intercommunication of such committees among all the American countries, 
excited unusual interest, especially in Brazil, where it is expected that steps to 
this end will be taken at once. He was also most fortunate in his appeal for the 
organization of national branches of the Society for International Conciliation, 
to be affiliated with those in Paris and New York. In four of the countries 
visited competent and energetic organizing secretaries have already been 
appointed and are at work. While the South Americans have not taken kindly 
to peace societies, of the ordinary pacifist kind, they quickly respond to the 
principle upon which the Conciliation was founded, which looks to the friendly 
adjustment of international quarrels through arbitration and other similar 
methods. 

Mr. Bacon discussed fully the plans of the Endowment for the exchange 
of visits of representative men between the two continents, and also the proposed 
exchange of professors and students. Each of these projects met with sympathetic 
response, and Mr. Bacon reports that the time is already ripe for the inaugura- 
tion of the exchange of professors. One difficulty presents itself in the limited 
number of Latin-Americans who have a speaking knowledge of English, and on 
the other hand the equally limited number of North Americans who are familiar 
with Spanish. This difficulty in the way of closer intercourse between the two 
continents we are at length beginning to realize; it is a great mission of our 
higher educational institutions to gradually overcome it. 

It thus appears that Mr. Bacon's mission to South America was most suc- 
cessful, in the sense that it is to bear immediate fruit. It was apparent to his 



56 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

hosts that he came with no selfish purposes, — not to seek concessions, not to 
solicit business advantages, but upon an errand purely altruistic in the highest 
significance of the word. He carried a message of friendship and cooperation in 
a work which is not for the benefit of one country, but of all the Americas and 
all the world. He sowed the seeds of a new and finer international relationship, 
and the results of his trip can hardly fail to be the establishment of intellectual 
currents of sympathy, leading to a higher and nobler civilization. 



APPENDICES 



APPENDIX I 
Paris 



Luncheon of Mr. Gabriel Hanotaux, 

Paris, September 19, 19 13 

[Translation from The Figaro] 



The staff of the Comite France-Amerique yesterday gave a luncheon to the 
president of the Comite France-Amerique, of New York, Mr. Robert Bacon, 
former Ambassador of the United States at Paris, and to Mr. Dandurand, Sen- 
ator and president of the Comite France-Amerique in Canada, and Mrs. 
Dandurand. 

Among those present were Mr. Gabriel Hanotaux, Mr. and Mrs. Boutroux, 
Mr. Klexzkowski, Minister of France, etc. 

Mr. Robert Bacon is passing through Paris on his way to South America, 
where he goes, as has been stated, on a mission for certain American international 
organizations, headed by Messrs. EHhu Root, Butler, Scott, etc. 

Mr. Hanotaux addressed his guests in these words : 

"It is a great pleasure for the Comite France-Amerique to welcome on the 
same occasion the two presidents of the Comite in North America; the activity 
shown in the United States and Canada by these two branches of the French 
Comite has produced important results this year ; we can only say that the credit 
belongs to the two presidents who honor us with their presence. 

"Mr. Robert Bacon goes to South America in the name of persons who are 
held in the highest esteem in the great republic of the United States, to lay the 
foundations for united efforts in the interest of international law, efforts that 
should be encouraged to the utmost for the benefit of mankind. This mission has 
an entirely practical character; it contemplates the establishment of enduring 
institutions by which the principles of harmonious and thoughtful understanding 
between peoples will be developed. 

"Mr. Robert Bacon has not forgotten that only a little while ago he was 
the Ambassador of the United States at Paris, and it seemed to him that the 
intellectual relations between the South American republics and France are such 
that a preliminary visit to Paris would be of great service in bringing about the 
success of his undertaking. 

"The disseminating power of the French language and of French thought, 
as he himself has said to me, is such that to seek inspiration from French institu- 
tions and French works appeared to be one of the first duties of his mission. 



60 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

That is why he is with us today. We thank him for this faith which honors our 
country and which, we may hope, will facilitate his work among our friends 
in South America. 

"In the hands of the eminent diplomat whose good will, intelligence and devo- 
tion have been esteemed by all Paris, and whose generosity has been felt by the 
Comite France-Amerique in particular, such a noble undertaking can not fail to 
succeed. 

"Gentlemen, I raise my glass to our two colleagues and presidents and to the 
success of the journey of our excellent and distinguished friend, Mr. Robert 
Bacon." 

Mr. Bacon replied in these words : 

"My dear Mr. President: 

"You have expressed my thought and explained the objects of my mission 
in phrases for which I can only thank you from the bottom of my heart. Yes, I 
wished to secure a hold on French thought before seeking to enter into the 
thought of South America. Your high praises and your encouragement belong 
to those who have prepared and directed my mission. This hour in particular, 
and so many other pleasant hours that I have had the good fortune to spend in 
Paris, I shall never forget during my journey. 

"I drink to the prosperity of the work which you have founded, a work of 
such broad international scope: to the prosperity of the Comite France- 
Amerique." 



APPENDIX II 
Brazil 



Address of Dr. de Oliveira Lima, 

Before the Members of the Historical Institute of Brazil, at the American Embassy, 

Rio de Janeiro, October 8, 19 13 

Excellency: 

The president of the Historical Institute, Count Affonso Celso, who suc- 
ceeded Baron de Rio Branco in the post, appointed at our last meeting a com- 
mittee of ten members to welcome you in this country in the name of that asso- 
ciation, the oldest intellectual association of Brazil and possibly of South America. 

We boast, indeed, of our three-quarters of century of existence, as we boast 
of the invaluable services rendered by several generations already of historians 
and searchers of documents, to the study of our past. The late Emperor of 
Brazil, Dom Pedro II., whose memory is as respected in the United States as it 
is cherished here, used to preside over our meetings and to guide our work. 

You see that through the nature of our studies, as well as under the influence 
of such names as I have mentioned, the Historical Institute is a society of peace, 
just as much as the foundation which you are representing in our Southern con- 
tinent. You are certainly peace in action, peace in movement, peace resting on 
the conscience of national responsibilities and international rights and duties. 
We are peace in theory, peace in feeling, peace in tradition, I dare even say, 
because the wars in America, especially in independent America, have been more 
wars for freedom than wars for ambition. 

I do not say they have been exclusively so, as every portion of humanity 
carries with it faults and crimes, and this is why so much is being done to spread 
international respect and amity ; but the fact is that we all have won our liberties 
through our will and are all trying to uphold them. Brazil under the Empire 
had two foreign wars, but both were made against foreign tyrannies and not 
against foreign peoples or nationalities. 

By every reason, then, your mission appeals to our deepest sympathy and 
you may be sure to find in this country a congenial environment. The work 
of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace is not yet well known by 
us here, but we shall soon be in heart with its purposes. The section of Latin 
America that we constitute strives for its development without hurting any 
legitimate aspirations of others. 



62 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Personally your name is familiar to us as a successful ambassador and Sec- 
retary of State; also as the friend and collaborator of Mr. Root, which means 
that you both have about politics and diplomacy a conception far above the com- 
mon one. Politics must not be divorced from intellectualism ; diplomacy is not 
to be simply materialistic, but a fight for noble ideals of juridical understanding, 
international friendship, and moral solidarity. 

You will meet everywhere the sympathy due to your personality as you will 
feel that the United States are truly esteemed in Brazil. We trust your efforts 
for international conciliation and we are ready to help them as much as we admire 
and try to follow your lessons of untiring industry and civic education. 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the French] 

Excellency, Gentlemen of the Historical Institute: 

I find no words in which to thank you from the bottom of my heart for 
your charming welcome and your kind expressions which have profoundly 
touched me. 

I have come on behalf of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace 
and I bring to you the affectionate greetings of its eminent President and your 
devoted friend, the Honorable Elihu Root, whom I love and whom you also love, 
I am sure. It is strikingly recalled to my mind that since his memorable visit to 
your country in 1906 and since the Hague Conference in 1907 there has been a 
great change, a wonderful progress in the development of international law, of 
the Law of Nations, in which the celebrated publicists of your country, the 
jurisconsults of all Latin America, have taken an important part. 

In the words of Dr. de Louter of the University of Utrecht, the noted 
publicist of Holland : "Latin America, which by its talent and the eloquence of 
its delegates somewhat surprised the diplomats of Europe at the Second Peace 
Conference, has since then shown an energy and resourcefulness at once 
humiliating and encouraging to those who have shown them the way. All who 
believe in peace founded on law can only applaud the vigorous workers on the 
other side of the ocean who are engaged in building the solid foundations of a 
structure of law instead of pursuing the ephemeral phantasies of fruitless good 
intentions." 

Now, Mr. Root, who wishes soon to quit the life of active politics and devote 
his efforts chiefly to this cause, to the expansion of this structure, has very close 
to heart the promotion of certain definite activities of the Endowment. 

I beg you to give these practical projects your serious consideration not only 
to strengthen the ties of friendship and solidarity between our two beloved 
countries, but for the sake of humanity and to advance and promote liberty and 
justice among the nations of the world. 



APPENDIX II 63 



Remarks of Dr. de Oliveira Lima, 

At the Reception at the American Embassy, 
Rio de Janeiro, October 8, 1913 

[Translation from the Portuguese'] 

The Ambassador of the United States of America has entrusted to me the 
very honorable duty of introducing to this Assembly of Brazilians, eminent 
for their knowledge and social position, our illustrious guest, Mr. Robert Bacon, 
former Secretary of State and lately Ambassador from his country to the French 
Republic, who is now devoting his energy, talent and experience to that most 
noble crusade, the Crusade of Peace. 

You must not, however, expect a man of his attainments, his accomplish- 
ments and his breadth of mind, to confine himself to Utopian ideas or flattering 
illusions. Mr. Bacon desires to see a triumphant peace accomplished rather 
through reason than through sentiment, that is, through the universal conscience, 
through the propagation of, and respect for, the principles of international law. 

He will explain to you, with the conciseness and lucidity which have 
distinguished his political and social work, the aims (as varied as 
they are practicable) of his mission, — a mission which is most inter- 
esting and of great scope and which the Carnegie Endowment, in the interest 
of universal peace, has entrusted to his care and to his devotion with the con- 
viction that throughout Latin America he will be listened to with respect and 
sympathy as voicing the sentiments of our friend and collaborator, Mr. EHhu 
Root, that distinguished statesman who has given us such sincere proof, during 
the tenure of his office as Secretary of State of the great Union, of his respect 
for the rights of other peoples and for the legal personality of other nationalities, 
whose noble aim it is to link the entire New World into one unfettered and impos- 
ing Union of culture. 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Portuguese"] 

I am sure, Gentlemen, that you will pardon me if, instead of speaking in my 
own language in acknowledgment of your kind expressions of welcome, which 
have moved me profoundly, I say a few words of thanks in your beautiful 
tongue, with the assurance that though these words may be poorly expressed, 
they come from my heart. 

I know it must appear presumptuous for me to address you in Portuguese, 
but I must ask your kind indulgence for two reasons. First of all I must refer 
to the very high esteem I have always cherished for the noble Portuguese tradi- 
tions, which but recently have been refreshed in my mind by my stay in Lisbon, 
whence I have just arrived. There, at the foot of the statue of the great Camoes, 
I recalled the memory of that distinguished Brazilian, whose eloquent words 



64 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

and writings first developed my sense of appreciation for the beauties of the 
"Lusiads" and the charm of the "Rimas." I refer to my illustrious and gentle 
friend, Joaquim Nabuco, sage, poet and statesman, whom I learned to know 
and love during an intimacy of four years in Washington and whom I was proud 
to call a friend. 

Another reason that I offer as the inspiration for my addressing you in 
your beautiful language is that on the eve of my departure from the United 
States, at the banquet where I was able to greet my esteemed friend, your 
Ambassador, Mr. Domicio da Gama, I had the great pleasure to find myself 
seated at the side of your illustrious Minister of Foreign Affairs, His Excel- 
lency, Mr. Lauro Muller, who, with that gentleness and charm of manner so 
natural to your race and country, spoke to us in very good English. My 
compatriots will never forget the pleasure that the presence of Dr. Muller pro- 
duced, nor the distinguished honor conferred upon us by your country when it 
appointed him to return the visit of our esteemed friend, Elihu Root. For us 
of the University of Harvard, it was especially gratifying to have him accept our 
diploma and thus become a member of our Harvard family. 

I have the honor of having been sent to Brazil by the Carnegie 
Endowment for International Peace, of which Mr. Root is the heart and 
soul. The message that I bring from him is a message of good-will, which, as 
expressed by that eminent author and jurist, Dr. Ruy Barbosa, truly meets with 
the "sanction of American opinion," but it is particularly a message of regard 
and esteem from Elihu Root for his good friends here. This mission affords 
me greater pride and pleasure than any other entrusted to me during my entire 
life. 

And how can I begin to express my feelings at the first sight of this wonder- 
ful city, the magic city of Rio de Janeiro? For, in spite of all that has been 
said or written about its beauty and its bewitching grandeur, it surpasses my 
most extravagant dreams. It is incomparable and I envy you the continual 
pleasure and inspiration, the force and courage that you must derive from it. 

Again, Gentlemen, I assure you of my most profound gratitude for the 
cordial reception and the distinguished honor that you have accorded me. 

[Translation from the French'} 

It is a very great pleasure to me to be permitted to visit, if only for a few 
days, far too short, some of the peoples and countries of South America, for it 
has been one of my most cherished dreams, which I have been able only partially 
to realize as yet, to see with my own eyes your wonderful countries, the marvels 
of your civilization, to meet again friends whom I have known and loved in 
other parts of the world, — to make other friendships which will add a new 
joy to life and fill me with memories which neither time nor distance can dim 
or efface. I come charged with a message of good-will from your devoted 



APPENDIX II 65 

friend and great admirer, Mr. Elihu Root, at whose request, anticipated by 
my own desire, I have the honor to appear before you. I wish I could say to 
you all that he would say were he here in person to address you and to greet you 
as an old friend. The expressions might differ, perhaps, but I assure you the 
spirit behind them would be one and the same. 

The visit which you recently made to the United States, Mr. Minister, 
will have a lasting influence for good. We tried to show you the real feeling 
of welcome which was in our hearts. We have much to learn in the matter of 
courtesy and hospitality for which you Brazilians are so justly celebrated ; but, 
as Senator Root has well said, the real feeling of welcome in the hearts of the 
people of the United States was worth much more than any demonstration the 
government of the United States could possibly make. 

My mission for the Endowment has been referred to as a mission of friend- 
ship and good-will. That is very true and I am proud of it, but since ties of 
friendship already bind us, may we not go further than that? 

For my part I should like it to be regarded as a mission of co-operation and 
mutual help among old friends with the object of discussing, studying and planning 
practical means whereby we can work together and march forward toward 
progress, toward the ideal of humanity, toward greater enlightenment, for the 
triumph of Right in the world, replacing resort to force by resort to justice ; 
toward an international opinion which will have the true sanction of international 
law. 

The people of our two Republics are idealists. Monsieur Hanotaux, former 
Minister of Foreign Affairs of France, said in a recent article: "At the Hague 
Conference it was the delegates of the South American Republics, notably those 
of Brazil, who advanced the strongest and most original ideas. They were 
absolutely in the forefront of human thought, a fact which merits considera- 
tion." 

The noble words spoken by Mr. Root in 1906 at the Pan-American Con- 
ference represent the sentiments and the ideals of the people of the United 
States as truthfully and as forcefully today as when they were spoken seven 
years ago, for governments may change, but the sentiments of the people remain 
the same. I like to think of this memorable declaration as the "Root Doctrine" — 
the doctrine of sympathy and understanding, of kindly consideration and honor- 
able obligation — and I am proud to be considered worthy to speak of it as a 
humble apostle. 

I would like to have you look upon me as inaugurating a series of inter- 
national visits which will follow each other without break and be mutually 
advantageous by bringing together accredited representatives of the life and 
thought of the Southland as well as of the North ; and inviting you to co-operate 
in the establishment of international institutions which will, we hope, become 
centers of good-will, develop and popularize just and progressive principles of 
international law upon which international good relations must depend, and in 



66 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

various ways, directly and indirectly, by an exchange of thought, an exchange 
of views and a happy combination of effort, result in strengthening the bonds of 
friendship which a common past, common institutions and a common goal urge 
and demand. 

History and Nature have inspired and increased a deep feeling of solidarity, 
not only between the countries of Latin America, but also between the Republics 
of the South and the United States. It behooves us to maintain and strengthen 
this solidarity which, by reason of its two-fold origin, unites inseparably the 
nations of the new continent, in the past, in the present and in the future. 

One need only glance at the political history of the New World to see the 
constant interest the United States has taken in the struggle of the Latin American 
nations, first to free themselves from the mother country and then to defend 
the independence they had won against all attempts at conquest on the part of 
European powers. Moreover we might briefly recall that, after the emancipation, 
the United States furnished the Latin states with the forms and basic principles 
of their political institutions, particularly of their republican and democratic 
government, precisely at a time when the ancient political institutions of Europe 
were far from responding to the ideas of liberty and to the social conditions of 
the two Americas. 

All this glorious past in the history of the New World should strengthen 
day by day the indissoluble bonds which have united the American nations since 
the beginning of their political life. 

Nature has added to the work of History. The geographical situation of the 
nations of the New World has brought into being a series of problems common 
to all the states of the continent, thereby creating among them new ties of solid- 
arity. Thanks to the progress of civilization and the perfection of means of 
communication, we in America have come to see the imperious necessity of 
solving in a uniform manner problems arising out of situations and conditions 
peculiar to the New Continent. 

Anticipating Europe in a way, whose great powers meet in conference only 
at the conclusion of wars to determine the conditions of peace, all the American 
states have met together in pacific conferences in order to discuss questions 
common to their continent — whence the name and origin of the Pan-American 
Conferences. These conferences have borne abundant fruit — a number of 
problems of interest to America have been studied ; important treaties have 
been signed with a view to developing the social and intellectual life of the 
New World ; and, finally, the representatives of the several American states have 
learned to know each other better and have come to appreciate how many and 
how strong are the ties which bind the American nations together. 

The sentiments of solidarity and fraternity which unite the countries of the 
New World in a community of interests should create a work of union and con- 
cord. The way is already open ; numerous and fruitful results have been ob- 
tained ; the time has come, therefore, to establish, in ever increasing measure, good 



APPENDIX II 67 

understanding and harmony. Above all, it is necessary to correct the misun- 
derstanding in the South of the political purposes of the United States. As Mr. 
Root solemnly declared when he was among you, the United States desires above 
all that peace and prosperity reign in Latin America, in order to strengthen and 
to tighten the bonds of friendship and of brotherhood which should unite all 
the American people. 

I have the honor to address you not merely on my own account but on 
behalf of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, of which Senator 
Root is President, and to invite you in his name and on behalf of its Trustees to 
cooperate with it in such ways as you may deem possible and advisable. 

In other words, the wish of Mr. Root is to enlist as fully as possible the 
sympathetic interest of the leaders of thought in South America in the various 
enterprises of the Endowment for the improvement of international relations, 
and to bring about their practical co-operation in that work. You are no doubt 
aware that there is in the hands of the Trustees of the Endowment a large fund, 
the income of which is to be devoted to these objects. The Trustees after 
consideration of the manner in which they should accomplish the purposes for 
which the Trust was established, drew up the following statement of specific 
objects to which the income of the Trust was to be devoted: 

(a) To promote a thorough and scientific investigation and study of 
the causes of war and of the practical method to prevent and avoid it; 

(b) To aid in the development of international law, and a general 
agreement on the rules thereof, and the acceptance of the same among 
nations ; 

(c) To diffuse information and to educate public opinion regarding the 
causes, nature and effect of war, and means for its prevention and avoidance ; 

(d) To establish a better understanding of international rights and 
duties, and a more perfect sense of international justice among the inhabi- 
tants of civilized countries; 

(e) To cultivate friendly feelings between the inhabitants of different 
countries and to increase the knowledge and understanding of each other by 
the several nations; 

(f) To promote a general acceptance of peaceable methods in the settle- 
ment of international disputes ; 

(g) To maintain, promote and assist such establishments, organizations, 
associations and agencies as shall be deemed necessary or useful in the 
accomplishment of the purposes of the corporation or any of them. 

In order to carry out these objects the work of the Endowment has been 
apportioned among three Divisions : 

The Division of Intercourse and Education, of which Dr. Nicholas 
Murray Butler, President of Columbia University, is Acting Director; 

The Division of Economics and History, of which Dr. John Bates Clark 
is Director; 



68 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The Division of International Law, of which Dr. James Brown Scott, 
Secretary of the Endowment, is Director. 

The different objects set forth above are appropriately assigned to these three 
Divisions. 

It is the purpose of the Trustees not that the trust organization shall become 
itself a missionary seeking to preach the gospel of peace or directly to express 
its own ideas to the world, but rather to promote and advance in each country 
and in all countries, the organization and activity of national forces in favor of 
peace. It is not so much to add a new peace organization to those already exist- 
ing in the world as it is to be a means of giving renewed vigor to all the activities 
which really tend in a practical way towards making peace more secure. 

To aid each of the three divisions in its work an extensive and effective 
organization has been perfected in Europe as well as in the United States, includ- 
ing a great number of the most eminent and highly respected statesmen, publicists 
and leaders of modern thought. 

The respect and friendship which the Trustees of the Endowment entertain 
for the peoples of Latin America and for the many distinguished Latin Americans 
with whom many of the Trustees have most agreeable relations of personal friend- 
ship, lead us to desire that the work of the Endowment may have the same active 
and useful co-operation in South America that it has already secured in Europe. 

Let me quote verbatim a passage from the instructions given me by Mr. 
Root, instead of paraphrasing them as I have done more than once. "You will 
observe," he says, "that one of the means by which the Division of Intercourse 
and Education proposes to advance international good understanding is a series 
of international visits of representative men. Accordingly, under the auspices of 
the Division, directly or indirectly, Baron d'Estournelles de Constant of France, 
the Baroness von Suttner of Austria, and Professor Nitobe of Japan have already 
visited the United States, and President Eliot, of Harvard University, has visited 
India, China and Japan, and Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie is now in Japan. Your 
visit to South America comes in this category, but it has a more definite and 
specific purpose than any of the other visits which I have enumerated or which 
are contemplated under the head I have mentioned, for it is not merely to 
strengthen good understanding by personal intercourse between a representative 
North American, and representative South Americans, but also to introduce to 
the representative South Americans personally the work and purposes and ideals 
of the Endowment, and to invite our friends in South America to cordial and 
sympathetic union with us in promoting the great work of the trust." 

This is the spirit of good feeling and kindly sympathy which has inspired 
the mission, and I hardly need to assure you that it is the spirit in which I shall 
endeavor to carry it out. 

The subjects which I am directed to lay before you — other than the general 
aims and purposes of the Endowment and the methods by which the Trustees 
are endeavoring to put them into effect — are : 



APPENDIX II 69 

1. The formation of National Societies of International Law to be 
affiliated with the American Institute of International Law ; 

2. The presentation to the different Governments of the countries which 
I have the honor to visit, of the opportunity to participate in the proposed 
Academy of International Law at The Hague by providing for the sending 
on the part of each Government of one or more representative students to 
that Academy, if organized; 

3. The appointment of National Committees for the consideration of 
contributions to the program of the next Hague Conference, and for making 
arrangements for the inter-communication of such Committees among all 
American countries; 

4. The establishment of National Societies for International Conciliation 
to be affiliated with the parent Association for International Conciliation at 
Paris ; 

5. To arrange for a systematic furnishing of data for the work of the 
Division of Economics and History in accordance with the program laid 
down at Berne by the Congress of Economists in the summer of 191 1. In 
connection with this last subject I beg to remind you that Dr. Kinley, who 
has been appointed a member of the Committee of Research with special 
reference to South America, will shortly make a visit to this country to 
suggest specifically the things that can be done in aid of the researches of 
this Division, to ask the advice and counsel of leaders of opinion in South 
America, and to invite especially the economists and historians of these 
countries to co-operate, as far as they may deem it possible or advisable, in 
the execution of such projects concerning South America as they may recom- 
mend as proper for investigation and study. 

Allow me to make a final quotation from Mr. Root: 

"The trustees of the Endowment are fully aware that progress in the work 
which they have undertaken must necessarily be slow and that its most substan- 
tial results must be far in the future. We are dealing with aptitudes and impulses 
firmly established in human nature through the development of thousands of 
years, and the utmost that any one generation can hope to do is to promote the 
gradual change of standards of conduct. All estimates of such a work and its 
results must be in terms not of individual human life, but in terms of the long life 
of nations. Inconspicuous as are the immediate results, however, there can be no 
nobler object of human effort than to exercise an influence upon the tendencies 
of the race, so that it shall move, however slowly, in the direction of civilization 
and humanity and away from senseless brutality. It is to participate with us in 
this noble, though inconspicuous, work that we ask you to invite our friends in 
South America with the most unreserved and sincere assurances of our high 
consideration and warm regard." 

The scientific development of international law which has always been one of 
Mr. Root's chief labors and to which he has devoted much of his genius, has shown 
remarkable progress. The second Conference at The Hague, as has been said, 
marked the greatest single step toward the just and peaceable regulation of inter- 



70 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

national relations ever taken, with the possible exception of the step taken at 
the first Hague Conference. 

The dreams of yesterday are the realities of today; the dreams of today 
become the realities of tomorrow. The dreams of Rolin-Jacquemyns, Lieber, 
Calvo, Rio Branco, Nabuco, and other inspired leaders are accomplished facts 
today ; the spirit of their doctrines has now become a principle. 

The Trustees of the Carnegie Endowment believe that this progress can be 
hastened by practical methods. They are convinced that the ideals of the great 
thinkers can be advanced more quickly to the benefit of the world, by concerted 
efforts in certain well-defined, practical directions. That is why I have come to 
solicit your invaluable support and co-operation. 

I thank you again for your kind welcome. 

Address of Senator Ruy Barbosa, 

At the Reception at the National Library, 
Rio de Janeiro. October io, 1913 

[.Translation from the Portuguese] 

Gentlemen: 

It is not my aim at this time to introduce our illustrious guest to you, for 
Mr. Robert Bacon has spent the past four days with us, and this has been ample 
to make us feel as if he were an old friend. In this worthy successor of Mr. Elihu 
Root will be at once recognized reflected, an image, dear to the hearts of 
Brazilians, of his master and predecessor in the office of Secretary of State, 
that eminent American whose policies were characterized by the advantages that 
have accrued both to this Continent and to his own. Whoever came in contact 
with him at once experienced that recognition of merit that is revealed by the 
light, the irradiating and penetrating light, which he calmly and without any effort 
diffuses around him. 

The very first time we heard him, the day before yesterday, at the American 
Embassy, through the delightful hospitality of Mr. Morgan, the distinguished 
diplomat whose charm is irresistible, he surprised us with an address, the intro- 
duction to which was delivered in our own language fluently and correctly, with 
but slight trace of a foreign accent, as if he had long been accustomed to express 
himself in our tongue. With exquisite grace and without effort, inspired only by 
natural earnestness, he revealed to us those miracles of which courtesy and 
benevolence are capable in the mind of a son of that race of the United States, 
that in its type combines the virtues, aptitudes and talents of all others. 

It is easy to see that a more fortunate selection could not have been made 
for the purpose of conveying to us from Mr. Root, Mr. James Brown Scott 
and all other friends of peace in North America, a message which our natures 
and our training cause us to receive with joy. To each one of these gentle- 
men I now respond, even though, of all those assembled here, I may be the least 
worthy. Existing circumstances confer upon me this privilege, requiring me as 



APPENDIX II 71 

the president of the Brazilian Academy and a member of the Bar Association, 
to reply in the name of those, who throughout the land are reading, thinking", 
writing and talking about this visit. 

In the address, which you are about to hear, our generous friend is going 
to define the first fruits of one of the subjects that appeal more especially to 
our interests, and he will also discuss, to a limited extent, the preliminary work 
of the Third Peace Conference. This select assembly, meeting as it does in this 
center of public education, will doubtless listen with great eagerness to the 
results of the meditation and experience of the distinguished orator, regarding 
the preliminary work of an undertaking, the realization of which, we flatter 
ourselves, will prove one of the noblest accomplishments of our time. 

Never has Brazilian sentiment interested itself so passionately in an interna- 
tional subject of a specific character as in that congress which, six years ago, 
convened in the ancient Hall of the Knights at The Hague, where delegates from 
every civilized nation of the world met and pledged themselves to weaken 
the dominion of war throughout the world. Not that we should boast of 
our humble part in the scenes enacted upon an arena having as its amphitheatre 
the entire world; but because the campaign that was waged there and which 
was of paramount importance, was conducted in the interest of right, with no 
other arms than those of intelligence, awakening in our conscience impulses 
which had not been accustomed to thrill us, and revealing, under that new influ- 
ence, a sure response, of which there had been no indications in the moral 
instincts of our nation, as is true of all parts of Latin America, and we should 
be proud of the ideal that presided there in ancient Holland, as in the heart of 
justice, under the protection of her ancient traditions of independence and liberty 
over this second ecumenical council of peace. 

Permit me to use this religious appellation that surges to my lips free of 
any flowery pretensions, as a natural expression of reverence, prompted by the 
character of the subject itself, a subject that is almost sacred and divine; a 
tribute to those aspirations that in themselves combine sufficient power to assem- 
ble the most distant and divergent members of the human family from all parts 
of the world to form a congress. It did not represent a church which claimed, 
with more or less justice, a universalism wherein the powers in general celebrated 
their catholicity, but rather the union of all churches, all confessions, all creeds, 
at a common altar of that supreme order of charity which, translated, signifies 
the abolition of armed conflict between the nations. 

The spectacle presented of kings descending from their thrones to follow 
the wake of a star in search of the birthplace of Christ, was about to be repeated 
with a grandeur exceeding that event in a movement that joined the heads of 
armies with the arbiters of war in the interests of a humanitarian ideal of man- 
kind, of brotherly love, making us feel that Heaven had sent us from Calvary 
a smiling future stretching from twenty centuries to incalculable ages to come. 
The emblem of Christianity that introduced its apostleship upon the battlefields 



72 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

as the insignia of the "Red Cross" disclosed to the minds of the fratricides of 
war, a fraternal epoch that began to appear upon the horizon but which up to 
that time had been but an hallucination in the minds of dreamers, an age when 
all divers beliefs and sects should be merged into one body, united in a universal 
effort to realize the brotherhood of mankind. 

When that idea first took form in the initial conference of 1899, the bril- 
liancy of which was duplicated in 1907, a fact of high importance was not taken 
into consideration by Brazilian politics. In spite of the fact that our Govern- 
ment (and I do not believe that I am mistaken) was signally honored, as the 
only Government in all South America, with an invitation from the Chancellor 
at St. Petersburg, Brazil did not respond to the call that offered her a most 
enviable distinction. In his Autobiography, Mr. Andrew D. White alludes to the 
surprise occasioned at The Hague by the indifference of our attitude, imputing 
that error to the carelessness of the new regime, adding that it was believed at 
that time that such an error would not have been committed by the Imperial 
Government. 

We could not have repeated such an act of thoughtlessness in 1907, 
because, in so far as the conference was open to all constituted governments, 
it would not be reasonable to assume that we should have proved the 
exception by our absence. Furthermore, at that time there was one at the head of 
the Foreign Department of our government, whose vigilant eye watched untir- 
ingly over our interests, in so far as they concerned our reputation abroad ; one 
who had been trained in all important questions of international relations. But 
what palliates the error committed by us eight years before, is the fervor and 
interest manifested by public opinion among us over every echo coming from 
the second session, revealing the same degree of enthusiasm that animated their 
chosen representatives, consecrated to a mission so replete with mishaps, trials 
and regrets. 

No nation watched those sessions more assiduously or witnessed with 
more sincere emotion or greater enthusiasm the incidents that took place at those 
sessions, at which the representatives of the civilized nations of the east and 
west fraternized. None showed greater appreciation of the importance of each 
discussion that arose. None sympathized more deeply with the labor that there 
was being developed. None felt more keenly its unity with the contest to be 
fought between the most divergent traditions, contrary temperaments and con- 
flicting interests upon an unprecedented plane. 

It is not with vanity that I recall the feelings prevalent in those days when 
the flame of a new life heated the blood in our veins; but, on the contrary, it 
is rather to emphasize the magic of the current that crossed the Atlantic to 
a people of lesser activity and lesser civic energy, surcharging the air and 
animating the lethargic multitude. Skeptics declare that these moral influences 
are condemned to remain abstract idealism, forgetting that the most powerful 
force or current in our cosmic life appears to be lodged in the clouds, and that 



APPENDIX II 73 

when it descends from those heights, cleaving the atmosphere, there are no 
obstacles which can resist it, and it penetrates with astral fire, into the depths of 
the earth. 

There was a tendency to calculate the results of truth and justice by evidence 
that can be counted, weighed and measured among the everyday onlookers of 
the Congress of 1907. A chorus of detractions, scoifings and epigrams were 
voiced against the work, which they judged most ungratefully. Why? Because 
the second Conference accomplished nothing in the matter of disarmament? 
Because owing to the great number of demands made upon it, it was compelled 
to confine itself to important proposals made through the medium of votes, 
suggestions, and advice? 

However, the 1907 Conference realized, in a measure, the promise of its 
predecessor. The project of organizing a court of arbitral justice did not become 
a consummated fact. This was only because the weaker Powers were not 
willing to agree with the greater Powers in regard to the system to be adopted 
for nominating the members of that tribunal. Will such an agreement be 
impossible in the future ? I do not think so. Time knows no difficulties which it 
cannot overcome with the aid of experience, no knots it does not eventually untie, 
no problems which it does not solve. It was a great truth that inspired the pen 
of my noble friend Mr. James Brown Scott, who, in his important work dealing 
with the Conferences of 1899 ana " I 9°7» wrote : "The independence of the state 
is the very postulate of international law ; but the solidarity of interest has made 
itself felt to such a degree that nations have yielded and must in the future 
yield something of their absolute liberty and independence, just as a citizen 
yields his absolute freedom for the benefit of society, of which he is a part." 

Once this question is defined, however, that obstacle being resolved into a 
formula whereby in each transaction the rights of one class will be harmonized 
with the pretensions of the other, all other obstacles become secondary ; therefore, 
except in regard to the prerequisite, the second Conference agreed upon a consti- 
tutional body ready to enter upon the work conceived by the institution, to 
exercise over the universal society of nations powers analogous to those of the 
federal Supreme Court in the United States. 

But this was not the only result arrived at by the second Conference. Its 
efforts to conclude a universal arbitration treaty were frustrated. All the na- 
tions, however, were signatories there to the most solemn of acts, declaring 
themselves unanimous in recognizing the principle of obligatory arbitration, 
realizing that certain differences, more especially those relating to the inter- 
pretation and application of international conventions, are subject to the rule of 
obligatory arbitration without any restrictions whatsoever. Now there is not a 
single person living who will not feel that at the 1899 Conference it would have 
been impossible to obtain the consent of the Powers represented at The Hague 
to this ruling on the two declarations whereby the sovereign Powers, in the 
interests of justice, yield such an important point. 



74 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Eight years was the length of time required to achieve this incalculable 
advance in the path of the reconcilement of Powers by means of laws. It 
is solely due to the diplomatic manner in which the conquest was achieved, that 
the revolution that was effected in the law of the rights of the people, and the 
sentiments of the most powerful nationalities, was not perceived. 

The critics, who at the close of this glorious Congress amused themselves 
with minimizing the importance of its accomplishments with caustic expressions 
of contempt, took the trouble to estimate the cash cost to the various govern- 
ments, as also to the press, entailed by this second Peace Congress, and their 
estimate, which was more or less arbitrary and covered all expenditures, amounted 
from four thousand five hundred to nine thousand contos, an amount which, in 
the opinion of these same judges, had thus far hardly been spent profitably. But 
an American diplomat of recognized repute, whom I knew at The Hague, and 
who at the time was rendering valuable services to the Chinese delegation to 
which he was attached, Mr. John W. Foster, in his Memoirs, which were published 
three years ago, scouted this idea of futility, saying that even if the estimate 
were admitted to be more or less correct the amount was barely one-third of 
what an armed battleship would cost. 

Moreover, any Power even among those whose financial resources are most 
limited will without hesitation willingly indulge in the luxury of increasing 
expenditures three-fold or six-fold in order to have as a preventive (even though 
there may be no probable danger of war) one or two of those machines whose 
powers to-day are questioned when the multiplicity of submarine and aerial 
weapons that science has created for the extermination of entire fleets and 
armies, is taken into consideration. 

Let us see now what are really the fruits, the practical results and actual 
benefits that have accrued from the last meeting of the nations at The Hague. 
They were the convention of October 18, dealing with the pacific settlement 
of international disputes, the establishment of the new regime for the appointment 
of the Commission of Investigation, the establishment of an International Prize 
Court, the adoption of new laws relative to the usages of war on land and on 
sea, the protection of neutral commerce in time of war, the establishment of a 
permanent Court of Arbitration. All this in barely four months' time, quite 
apart from the complexity and multiplicity of incidental matters, represent a 
complete circuit of international questions. 

Would it be reasonable to demand that its activity should have been greater, 
that it should have discovered a means of compelling the powers to refrain from 
further military armaments and definitively to substitute Arbitration for War? 
No one with common sense would so declare. In judging the merits of a human 
remedy, we must not only note the benefits it affords, but the possible dangers 
that it prevents. 

The First Peace Conference did not prevent Russia, who took the initiative, 
from being involved in a most disastrous war with Japan in 1904-1905. The 



APPENDIX II 75 

Second Peace Conference did not prevent the war between Italy and Turkey, nor 
yet the war between Turkey and Greece and the Balkan States. But still, side 
by side with these occurrences, which must be discounted as something still 
inherent in human nature, we should, in all justice, give full and due credit, 
commensurate with the difficulties opposed, to those relations of solidarity, both 
in a moral and material sense, in the development of which the two Conferences, 
1899-1907, have contributed more than any other influence in the history of 
nations. 

In this connection, the President of the Second Conference said in his address 
at the close of the work: "This Conference has made the greatest progress that 
has ever been witnessed by a human being." The same testimony was given a 
little later by an authority that is practically unrivalled, Mr. Elihu Root: "The 
work of the Second Hague Conference presents the greatest advance ever made 
at any single time toward the reasonable and peaceful regulation of international 
conduct, unless it be the advance made at The Hague Conference of 1899. l ne 
achievements of the two Conferences justify the belief that the world has 
entered upon an orderly process through which, step by step, in successive 
Conferences, each taking the work of its predecessor as its point of departure, 
there may be continual progress toward making the practice of civilized nations 
conform to their peaceful professions." 

It cannot be understood how the impression should have crept into the 
minds of the most enlightened that the Second Peace Conference should have 
vindicated itself ere terminating its deliberations by promulgating a general 
disarmament and the abolition of war. It was more or less in line with this 
test that the adverse critics of that Congress of sovereign Powers framed 
their views, forgetting how at variance these are when considering the question 
of the value of Legislative Assemblies. In every country, year after year, large 
bodies meet in deliberation, which deliberations are governed by universally 
recognized parliamentary rules and prescribe the form for satisfying public 
demand by means of arbitrary resolutions, remedying all existing evils in general. 
Notwithstanding the fact that these collective bodies exercise full control over 
their proceedings, which are facilitated by well defined principles, and which 
provide for the closing of a question by a vote of the majority, nevertheless, 
year after year, the work of the legislature is renewed without its having either 
cured the prevailing social ills or having satisfied the demands of the public; — 
yet, withal, no one contests the attitude of the legislature or its usefulness, or 
deems it unnecessary to the government of States. 

In this respect constituent assemblies are the same as parliaments. No one 
has as yet discovered a system whereby every problem related to liberty and 
good government in every nation can be solved. It is only at intervals of 
generations or centuries that great changes in the fundamental laws of States 
take place. According to Ames, whose work is dated 1897, the number of 
amendments offered up to that time to the constitution of the United States 



76 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

reached one thousand seven hundred and thirty-six, whereas only fifteen of these 
had been adopted. In Brazil it took ninety-seven years to bring about the triumph 
of the Republic in 1889 for which the unfaithful of Minas conspired in 1792 
and lost their lives. 

So that, in considering the internal life of States, we see that the efficiency 
of the legislator only makes itself felt by tact, postponements and compromises, 
and with fragmentary, slow and uncertain results. Why, then, should we be impa- 
tient because in only eight years time, the period that elapsed from 1899 to 1907, 
a council of independent and sovereign nations, unrestrained by the law of 
majorities, did not reach a definite agreement as to the means for ending or resolv- 
ing conflicts without the rule of war, a rule, which since man became a rational 
being has been the rule of rules of this world? 

In the inestimable work of Mr. James Brown Scott, to which we have already 
referred, there are three or four pages of admirable reasoning setting forth 
clearly and convincingly the similarity between the organic process of development 
in the common law of England and that which can be observed in the common 
law of nations. Now that, for the first time, the attempt is being made to 
codify this law, legislative efforts, according to the general opinion, will be 
based upon great legal principles that have been elaborated by a process of 
long development and upon which we may well rely for the requisite foundation 
for the international justice of the future. But though we may not have reached 
that stage as yet, and may still have to cover considerable ground to reach the 
point when civilization will not resort to warfare, nevertheless, that which has 
already been accomplished during the past fourteen years, through the medium 
of The Hague Tribunal and the development of arbitration, is a prodigious and 
fortunate advance, considering the means employed and the advantages derived. 

If, as Mr. Elihu Root, with his accurate judgment and clearsightedness, 
remarks, "the most valuable result of the Conference of 1899 was tna ^ it made 
the work of the Conference of 1907 possible," we may likewise maintain to-day 
that one of the greatest blessings resulting from the 1907 Conference lies in 
our having created for the modern world the necessity, which can no longer 
be ignored, of availing ourselves of the inspiring sentiments of international 
solidarity which have been created by these two Conferences. A third result 
was to approve the purpose of the last two Conferences by convoking another, 
in accordance with the provisions of the second Conference ; and as the celebration 
of a third Conference will demand certain preparatory work which, according to 
the provisions of its forerunner should begin two years in advance of the actual 
meeting of the third Conference, the present time would appear most opportune to 
arouse the skeptical and forgetful, and to inspire the initiative of those who can 
give to the matter the intricate study which should precede this great event. 

As far as I can judge, such an appeal would meet with unanimous approval 
from us, and this would be true, I presume, of the other countries in every sec- 
tion of our continent to whom President Nelidow, in recapitulating the work 



APPENDIX II 77 

accomplished by the Conference in his closing address, paid the following hom- 
age : "The association with representatives from Latin America in our sessions 
has unquestionably added new elements of great value to the fund of inter- 
national political science, — elements, the value of which, up to this time, we 
have failed to appreciate, except to a very imperfect extent." 

To the Government of the United States, above all others, is no doubt 
due the convocation of the Second Peace Conference. It was President 
Roosevelt, who, with his peculiar characteristic constructive activity, influenced 
successively by the great foresight and the political capacity of his two 
Secretaries of State, Mr. John Hay in 1904 and, more particularly, Mr. Elihu 
Root in 1905, was the first Chief of State to grasp the idea and under his leader- 
ship, to have it carried into effect, putting an end to the Russo-Japanese 
war by the interposition of his good offices and the Treaty of Portsmouth. It 
was through his master stroke alone, as revealed in the memorandum addressed 
by Mr. Root to the Russian Ambassador under date of October 12, 1905, that 
this glorious initiative was suggested to the chief of the Empire which had been 
vanquished in the disastrous struggle. 

To-day we find at the head of the Government of the United States a 
representative of the very highest type of American culture, of its intelligence, 
its democracy, its well-understood and well-defined liberality, of its solidarity 
with the interests of the whole civilized world. Brazilian thought has already 
become familiar with the name of Woodrow Wilson, in whom we jurists here and 
our men of letters have long since admired the historian, the constitutionalist, the 
political writer of rare endowment, whose works have so greatly enlightened us. 
We need no further guaranty to believe that, under his generous and able guidance, 
the glorious precedent of ancient tradition which so greatly honors the colossus 
of North America will again shine forth. 

I am not quite sure, gentlemen, whether I am treading on safe ground, but 
as my words are absolutely devoid of official significance, as are those of our 
distinguished visitor, Mr. Robert Bacon, I am bold to say what I feel with 
my own natural frankness as a mere Brazilian citizen, a member of the human 
family, a friend of philosophy, whose taste of political life has not harmed him. 

I did not wish to detain you so long in traveling over a path which has such 
seductive byways. It was my intention, when accepting the invitation to address 
you to-day, to confine myself merely to our illustrious emissary of American civil- 
ization and assure him of our cordiality and friendship, and after opening the ses- 
sion with a few appropriate words to leave him in entire control. But a certain 
mandate that I could not ignore compelled me to forego my intended restraint 
and brevity. Reminiscences of The Hague have diverted me from my course. 
At the outset it was my intention to recount these by narrating them as they 
referred to the various phases of the mission of good tidings of which Mr. Robert 
Bacon is the bearer; but from last night almost until dawn I could not restrain 
my pen. 



78 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Thus there remained no time for me to tell you all that I should relative to 
the great institution of wonderful, universal good, its program, its organi- 
zation and work, all of which was so vividly described the other day in the 
address of the illustrious representative of the Carnegie Endowment. 

Thanks to the conception of that singular philanthropist who has devoted 
his fortune to the benefit of his neighbor, there will not be wanting during the 
intervals between the Peace Conferences, the stimulus which keeps alive the flame 
of the sacred fire. Now, the stimulus and the impulse radiate from a permanent 
focus filling the intervals between successive congresses of universal peace with 
a continuous effort of the workers in the cause of justice, organized into an 
association of intellectual attainments, whose arms will, within a short time, 
encircle the civilized world. 

Mr. Robert Bacon, who has been sent to Brazil as a representative of the Car- 
negie Endowment, "of which Mr. Root is the heart and soul," may rest assured 
that the "message of good will," which mission at this most auspicious hour has 
brought him to the hearth of the Brazilian family, enters our heart as the much 
needed dew for the seed of ideas, and will find there the warmth that is necessary 
to germinate the seed. 

T do not know up to what point it will be proper, without presumption, for 
me to speak for my fellow citizens, who have all been breathing unconsciously the 
same air as I from infancy. But if I have not as yet lost that contact with the 
conscience of my compatriots, I can assure you that we are with you in the 
communion of international peace, and we shall consider ourselves fortunate 
whenever an occasion shall call upon us to place ourselves at your side in line 
with the latest workers for the cause to which you have consecrated yourself. 

You opened your address the other day with a description of resplendent 
eloquence and poetry of the marvelous picture that presented itself to your mind 
upon arrival here and entranced you as you beheld the city under a blue, 
star-lit sky, and the smiling morn disclosed to you the green waters. You felt 
that from out all this, there must pass to those who dwell amid the gardens 
and the hills, between the heavens and the waters a continual stream of inspira- 
tion of never ceasing courage and energy. 

Would to God, that we, in this Eden, may be permitted with dignity and 
harmony between man and nature to impress upon this terrestrial city the image 
of the ideal city, the city of virtue and truth, the city of God, and see it spread 
out and receive from the North those breezes, heavy with the pollen of that free- 
dom which was sown on the shores of New England, almost three hundred years 
ago by the exiles of the Mayflower, and which, thus far, has never failed to 
reproduce new blooms, each more productive than the last, in the shape of institu- 
tions, men, ideas, permeated with that love of justice which converts the Roots, 
the Bacons and the Scotts into apostles and missionaries in the cause of the gospel 
of humanity and sends them forth to teach the world the Doctrine of Peace, 



APPENDIX II 79 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

{.Translation from the French] 

Monsignor, Excellencies, Ladies, Gentlemen: 

I can not tell you how sensible I am of the great honor done me to-day by 
the Brazilian Academy and the Institute of Lawyers. I am, I assure you, deeply 
touched by this new mark of courtesy that you have shown by inviting me to be 
present at this meeting, held under the auspices of your famous intellectual 
leaders. 

I thank you from the bottom of my heart for the flattering words — so little 
deserved — that you have addressed to my humble self. I wish that I could express 
to Your Excellency my gratitude for the sentiments of friendship which you have 
just expressed for my country and my friends. 

Two days ago I tried to tell you in a few words something of the spirit, the 
inspiration, the hope with which Mr. Root granted me the privilege of coming 
to speak to you in his name of the work, the convictions and the hopes which he 
holds most dear. A hesitancy, a fear, indeed, that I should not prove worthy 
of his confidence, has given way to joyful gratitude for the gentle sympathy, the 
kindly good will of your welcome and your responsive reception which I appre- 
ciate most deeply and which will always be one of my most precious memories. 
I shall never forget your charming hospitality. 

I regret that to-day I find myself confined to details that are somewhat dry 
and, I fear, rather uninteresting, at a moment when, under the charm and 
inspiration of your eloquent words, I would prefer to dwell upon our ideals, our 
hopes. For I am proud to share your optimism, sir, and I have an abiding con- 
viction that, despite the clouds gathered by mistrust and unbelief, we are at the 
beginning of a great progressive movement in the liberalizing evolution of the 
world and that from afar we may see the dawning of a brighter, purer day. 

The principles, the philosophy of the last century are no longer sufficient 
to our needs. We must have new rules of political economy, new principles of 
international law. 

The gentlemen whom I had the privilege of addressing two days ago, did me 
the honor of asking for fuller details concerning certain objects of the Endowment. 

To accomplish the objects of the Endowment the work has been organized 
in three divisions : 

The Division of Intercourse and Education; 

The Division of Economics and History; 

The Division of International Law. 

In regard to the Division of Intercourse and Education it was evident that 
the work of this Division would necessarily affect foreign countries and it was 
essential to the success of the work that it be done in foreign countries by local 
agents rather than by branches of the Endowment. As it was impossible to 
determine at long range what should be undertaken, as well as the method of its 



80 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

execution, without the advice of competent and experienced leaders of thought 
of the different countries, Dr. Butler, Director of the Division, created an 
Advisory Council of representative European statesmen and publicists, and a 
body of correspondents upon whose advice and sympathetic co-operation he can 
always safely rely. 

From this large Council, composed of approximately forty members, a 
small Executive Committee has been formed (both Council and Committee being 
under the presidency of Baron d'Estournelles de Constant) and a European 
bureau has been established at Paris. 

We have wondered whether it would not be agreeable to leaders of thought 
in Latin America to create an organization somewhat similar to the General 
Advisory Council which has already been formed in Europe, and to co-operate with 
their fellow countrymen in carrying out the plans and undertakings which they 
may consider advisable or useful in their various countries. 

The Division has adopted the rule not to undertake work in any European 
country without consulting the Council or without the approval of the members 
of the Council representing that particular country. 

There is no need of more than a brief mention of the projects which the 
Division has undertaken. In the first place, in order to educate public opinion, 
the Division has taken measures to enlarge the contents and to increase the circu- 
lation of a selected list of European periodicals devoted to international peace, to 
cultivate friendly feelings between nations and to increase their knowledge and 
understanding of one another. 

The Division has inaugurated an exchange of visits of representative men 
and an educational exchange with Japan, and the Director of the Division hopes 
to make arrangements for an educational exchange between the United States 
and Latin America that shall comprise professors as well as students. I have 
the honor to inaugurate the first of the series of international visits with our 
sister republics, and I hope to be able to obtain information and advice from 
leaders of thought in South America which will enable us to begin in the very 
near future a mutual exchange of professors and students. 

I am instructed to suggest that the exchange begin by the annual visit of 
two eminent South American scholars or publicists to the United States and 
two North Americans to South America. Each of these men would divide his 
time between two universities in the country he would visit. I would like very 
much to have your opinion regarding the choice of professors and also the 
choice of universities to which they should go. 

The Endowment will provide for the expenses incident to this exchange 
of professors. 

It is unnecessary to dwell upon the wisdom and timeliness of these projects, 
for it is common knowledge that many of the misunderstandings existing be- 
tween nations are the result of ignorance of local conditions, traditions and 
ideals. Personal intercourse reveals that at bottom all men are strangely alike. 



APPENDIX II 81 

and personal contact, discussion and exchange of views lay the indispensable 
foundations for friendship and good understanding. 

One of the activities to which the Endowment attaches much importance 
is the organization throughout the world of Associations for International Con- 
ciliation. 

Experience has shown that many people genuinely interested in bringing 
about good understanding with foreign countries nevertheless hesitate for a 
variety' of reasons to ally themselves with Peace Societies. Associations for In- 
ternational Conciliation appeal to these classes, and it is the policy of the En- 
dowment through the Division of Intercourse and Education to strengthen 
these Associations where they exist, and to co-operate so far as may seem de- 
sirable in their creation where they do not exist. 

The parent Association was formed by Baron d'Estournelles de Constant 
in Paris some years ago. The branch in the United States, of which Dr. Butler 
is President, was organized in 1906; the German and English Associations were 
organized in 19 12, and I am directed by my instructions to invite the co-opera- 
tion of interested persons in the countries which I have the honor of visiting 
to organize branches of international conciliation to be connected with the parent 
Society at Paris. These Associations, while local in origin, have nevertheless 
an international mission and tend to create by their meetings and the excellent 
pamphlets which they regularly issue, a friendly feeling towards the peoples 
of foreign countries. 

Allow me to explain the purposes of the Societies for International Con- 
ciliation in the language of the founder of the parent society in Paris. In an 
article which he has had the kindness to prepare on this subject, Baron d'Estour- 
nelles de Constant says: 

The Association for International Conciliation is not a sentimental, 
humanitarian organization. It is a practical, patriotic advance, in the national 
interest of each country, particularly of young countries which must con- 
secrate all their forces and resources to their own development. Its object 
is to ensure security for the morrow to the business and the working world 
— to the farmer, the manufacturer, the merchant, as well as to the artist 
and the scientist — and to make it possible to undertake works looking to 
the future. 

Conciliation is today the indispensable complement of economic effort 
in every civilized country. To increase national prosperity by the promotion 
of good international relations; such is our object, summed up in our motto: 
Pro Patria Per Orbis Concordiam. 

Wars of conquest are no longer profitable. They engender only hatreds, 
reprisals, the burdens of an armed peace that grow more crushing every 
day; and these burdens have become among the masses the strongest of 
arguments in favor of socialism and revolution. 

Wars of independence alone are honorable, but no one threatens the 
independence of the American States. They will become more powerful 
by understanding each other than by arming themselves against each other. 



82 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Arbitration, on the contrary, has demonstrated its value in the Ala- 
bama, Hull, Casablanca, Behring Sea, Newfoundland fisheries, and other 
cases. 

Undertake arbitration rather than war, but always prefer conciliation 
to arbitration. 

Such is our idea, our rule of life. 

I would sum it up as follows : 

War rather than slavery. 

Arbitration rather than war. 

Conciliation rather than arbitration. 

Arbitration cures ; conciliation prevents. Conciliation substitutes fruitful 
co-operation for sterile antagonism. 

How should conciliation be organized? 

Little by little. Maternally; by the co-operation of the few men who 
know the world and life, former diplomats, former Ministers of State, retired 
manufacturers, savants, artists, philanthropists ; men of proved good will. 

A more or less numerous elite of such exceptional men exists in every 
country. Seek out these chosen few, explain to them the benefit, the necessity 
of conciliation, and, that done, put them in touch with similar groups in 
other countries. These groups brought together will undertake the education 
of the masses. 

Our methods of procedure are : 

i. Personal visits, intercourse and correspondence between men, between 
countries, between peoples, between parliaments, between organizations. 

These methods have produced results ; by means of them we have 
brought together enemies supposed to be irreconcilable. 

2. Publications, lectures. We publish bulletins ; we recommend or sug- 
gest literary works ; we travel and we exchange our experiences ; we spread 
our ideas in spite of obstacles or unfavorable circumstances. We do every- 
thing in our power to remove prejudices, preconceived opinions, ignorance, 
and to supplant them gradually (with the same benefit that would follow in 
trade) by mutual confidence, credit and, finally, international friendship. 

To express in a single phrase the difference between Pacifist Societies and 
Societies for Conciliation it might be said that Pacifist Societies are composed 
of pacifistes — whatever meaning we attach to this word — while the Societies 
for Conciliation are composed of pacifiques, which is a broader and, apparently, 
much more acceptable term. 

I should, indeed, be happy if I were able to persuade some of the elite in 
the different countries I have the honor to visit, to form national societies for 
International Conciliation to be affiliated with the parent society. Of course, it 
is understood, that this is a moral not a legal, affiliation, and that each society 
is independent. .And I take pleasure in informing you that in this as in other 
cases, the Endowment will undertake to pay the expenses incurred in the 



APPENDIX II 83 

organization of these societies and to supply the funds necessary to obtain the 
services of capable, energetic, devoted and persevering secretaries upon whom 
the usefulness of the societies will depend. 

Let me now describe the work of the second Division, that of Economics and 
History. 

The work of this division is "to promote a thorough and scientific investigation 
and study of the causes of war and of the practical methods to prevent and 
avoid it" — that is to say, the study not only of the apparent causes which are 
often only pretexts serving ambitious and unscrupulous heads of states, but also 
of the real, and often hidden causes which one finds in race antagonisms and 
in interests of an economic nature. It is necessary, moreover, to study the causes 
and the economic effects, not merely upon belligerents but upon neutrals as well. 

The Trustees felt it to be well nigh impossible to formulate by themselves 
plans calculated to promote a thorough and scientific investigation. A conference 
was arranged at Berne, Switzerland, in August, 191 1, to which distinguished 
economists and publicists, drawn largely from Europe, were invited, to consider 
what subjects could properly and profitably be studied and to draft a tentative 
program for the Division. 

Eighteen economists and publicists attended the Conference and their advice 
and co-operation were considered so important, indeed indispensable, to the success 
of the Division that they have been formed into a permanent Committee of 
Research, to advise the Director and to act as the agents of the Division in 
carrying out the projects recommended by the Conference and embodied in its 
elaborate program, which deals with questions concerning the economic and 
historical causes and effects of wars, armaments in time of peace, military and 
naval establishments, the theory, practice and history of modern armaments and, 
finally, the unifying influences of international life. 

A large number of topics have already been assigned to specialists selected 
from the countries to which their work relates, some of the studies have been 
completed, and, in the course of a few years, the Endowment will have published 
a series of remarkable monographs, covering all phases of the elaborate pro- 
gram, which will, it is believed — to quote the language of Mr. Root — "be useful 
to mankind." 

Professor Kinley, an old and sincere friend of Latin America, who 
represented the United States at the Fourth Pan-American Conference held in 
Buenos Aires, has been appointed a member of the Committee of Research, 
and will devote himself more especially to the problems in which Latin America 
is interested. In the course of the coming year, he will visit Latin America to 
confer with the leaders of opinion, to obtain their advice and, if possible, to 
secure their co-operation, both in suggesting projects and in executing those 
which they may recommend. 

The third Division of the Endowment is the Division of International Law. 

This Division, like the others, found it necessary to create a special 



84 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

organization and to secure a body of legal advisors, in whose conclusions in the 
sphere of law the Trustees can place implicit confidence. 

The Institute of International Law is composed, it is hardly necessary to 
state, of the leading jurists of all nations, and the Endowment requested the 
Institute, either as a body or by means of a Committee, specially chosen for 
the purpose, to act as advisor to the Division of International Law. The 
Institute accepted the invitation and selected a Committee of eleven members, 
at its meeting in Christiania in 19 12, who have acted during the present year 
as advisors to the Director, and this Committee, technically known as the Con- 
sultative Committee for the Carnegie Endowment, drew up a regulation, which 
has been accepted by the Institute, by means of which the relations established 
between the Institute on the one hand, through its Consultative Committee, and 
the Endowment on the other, through its Division of International Law, are 
to be permanent. 

The committee consists of eleven members. The President and the Secretary 
General of the Institute are members ex officio, and the others are elected to serve 
for a term of years. It is to be noted that the members of this Committee are 
men of great experience and high authority in all questions of international law : 
Messrs. Fusinato of Italy, Gram and Hagerup of Norway ; Holland of England ; 
Lammasch of Austria; Lardy of Switzerland; Renault of France; Rolin of 
Belgium, and Vesnitch of Servia. The importance of this Committee of juris- 
consults and the value of the advice which they can render cannot be over- 
estimated. 

As tending to establish a better understanding of international rights and 
duties, the Division of International Law grants material assistance to journals 
of international law in order to increase their circulation and to extend their 
influence, because, by this means, international law is popularised and the public 
is shown by concrete example how the principles of international law determine 
questions of international rights. In the same way, it is the intention of the 
Division, upon the recommendation of the Consultative Committee of the Insti- 
tute, to aid in the distribution of important works of international law and, 
especially, to have translated into better known languages works which are of 
very great importance and usefulness but which are published in languages not 
widely read or understood. 

To promote the general acceptance of peaceable methods of settling interna- 
tional disputes, the Division has under way several works ; the first is the collection 
and publication of all general and special treaties of arbitration. In regard to 
the treaties of the nineteenth century especially, the Endowment would be very 
grateful to the publicists of Latin America if they would supply information 
concerning any such conventions of which they have knowledge — the only knowl- 
edge perhaps ; — and the Trustees would regard it as a very great favor if the 
governments of Latin America would supply copies of such treaties, as it is very 
difficult at times to secure texts which are thoroughly accurate and reliable. 



APPENDIX II 85 

This collection will enable publicists to see to what extent nations have been 
willing to bind themselves to arbitration, and the various forms of existing 
treaties will be placed at their disposal. For a like reason all known instances of 
international arbitration are to be collected and published in the form of judicial 
reports and the series will be continued indefinitely. The well-known authority 
on International Law and Arbitration, Professor John Bassett Moore, lately of 
Columbia University, and now Counselor for the Department of State of the 
United States, has undertaken this monumental work and is actively engaged 
upon it. 

The Institute of International Law which now acts as adviser to the 
Division of International Law was founded in Europe in 1873, but, although the 
Institute represents "the universal juridical conscience," many jurisconsults have 
felt the need of an institution which should represent the juridical conscience of 
America, study the problems which concern particularly the New World and 
examine from an American point of view general matters relating to the law of 
nations. 

As you are well aware an American Institute of International Law was 
founded in 1912 by Sefior Alejandro Alvarez of Chile and Dr. James Brown 
Scott, director of the Division of International Law of the Endowment. This 
Institute contemplates the formation of National Societies of International Law 
in all American countries to be affiliated with it and to work in harmony with 
it for the study of American problems. 

The American Institute of International Law is to be composed of five pub- 
licists from each of the American Republics chosen from the members of the 
National Societies and each member of the National Society is, by virtue of such 
membership, entitled to enroll himself as an Associate Member of the Institute 
and to participate in its labors, upon payment of the modest dues which mem- 
bership in the Institute entails. It is to be hoped and we believe that in this way 
the International Society will be kept in close and intimate contact with the Na- 
tional Societies, that the American Journal of International Law will be modified 
in such a way as to become the organ of the Institute and of the publicists of the 
Americas, and that the Bulletins which it is contemplated that each of the local 
Societies will issue, will keep the Institute itself in touch with the work of the 
National Societies, and that by the distribution of the Bulletins among the dif- 
ferent societies, each will keep in touch with all the others. 

It is unnecessary for me to dwell upon the importance of the Institute and 
of the National Societies, because to all those who believe that international peace 
is only possible through international law and its application to the foreign rela- 
tions of nations, it is evident that Agencies, created to develop and render this 
system of law adequate to meet the needs of nations and to disseminate its princi- 
ples so that an enlightened public opinion may be formed which will insist upon 
the application of those principles to the relations of nations and to the settle- 
ment of their disputes, will render great and inestimable services, for the future 



86 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

of international peace is wrapped up with international law, its development, 
its dissemination. 

Supposing that the American Institute is fully established and justifies its 
existence, and that the national societies of International Law are created and 
affiliated with it, we cannot help asking ourselves whether the American Institute 
would not be willing to enter into advisory relations with the Endowment and its 
Division of International Law in all matters concerning American questions and 
problems similar to the relations which so happily exist with the older Institute. 

Lest I should seem to state in exaggerated language the aims and purposes 
of the American Institute of International Law, of which Mr. Elihu Root is 
Honorary President, let me quote a passage from a distinguished Dutch scholar 
and professor of international law, who may be supposed to treat the subject 
with more detachment. 

After having spoken of the great example America has given to the world in 
undertaking the codification of international law, he says : 

"The second example is given to us by an Institute essentially scientific but 
scarcely inferior in moral value. The gradual drawing together of the North 
and South has created a new instrument of progress. The projects for a 
Pan-American Union, started long ago without ever yielding results, have at 
last borne fruit in the peaceful field of study, thanks to the talent and perseverance 
of two illustrious men, one from the northern, the other from the southern half 
of the Western Hemisphere. During the past year Mr. James Brown Scott, the 
noted jurisconsult of the United States, and Senor Alejandro Alvarez, former 
professor and Counselor in the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Chile, who in June, 
19 12, at Rio, exercised a most beneficial influence upon the great plan for codi- 
fication, met at Washington, and founded in October, 1912, the American Institute 
of International Law. This Institute has for its objects: 1. To aid in the 
development of international law; 2. To strengthen the common sentiment of 
international justice; 3. To procure a general acceptance of peaceful procedure 
in the settlement of international disputes between the American States. 

"This enlightened idea sprang from the conviction that it is better to spread 
conceptions of right and justice by a slow but constant appeal to the minds and 
hearts of people than by diplomatic negotiations which are not based on a general 
popular sentiment. 

"If we take into consideration the fact that the peace movement in America 
is much more general than elsewhere and that it rests on a religious foundation 
or on a community of interests and of tendencies that we well may envy, we 
can appreciate this new proof of a virile progress which is brought to us from 
the other side of the ocean ; it gives new life to our hopes and redoubles 
our efforts." 

Mr. Root and his associates attach the highest importance to the establish- 
ment and successful operation of the American Institute of International Law 
and of its affiliated societies in each of the American countries. 



APPENDIX II 87 

The Endowment now grants a subvention to the older Institute, founded in 
Europe. This subvention is designed to cover the traveling expenses of members 
of the Institute, the expenditures of the commissions and the publication of their 
works. The new Institute can count upon receiving financial aid from the Endow- 
ment as soon as the National Societies are thoroughly organized and it will be 
upon an equal footing with the older Institute in this respect. 

The American Journal of International Law, which, with some slight modi- 
fications, might become the organ of the American Institute, receives now an 
annual subvention from the Endowment. 

Another institution in which the Division of International Law is greatly 
interested and which it will subvention and maintain with much pleasure is the 
Academy of International Law which it is proposed to establish at The Hague. 

A proposal was made at the Second Hague Peace Conference to create an 
academy of international law, and it was commended by the president of the Con- 
ference. No action was then taken, but the idea has commended itself to pub- 
licists of many nationalities. A committee of Dutch publicists, under the presi- 
dency of Mr. Asser, whose recent death we all deplore, suggested that such an 
academy be created and installed in the Peace Palace at The Hague. 

The Permanent Court of Arbitration would apply the law which had been 
systematically expounded in the academy, and the magnificent building which was 
officially opened last August, would indeed become a temple of peace, a Home of 
International Law. 

Mr. Asser's proposal contemplates systematic instruction, during the summer 
months, in international law and cognate subjects by a specially constituted and 
changing faculty, to be chosen from publicists of different countries. Courses of 
lectures on important and timely subjects would be given by publicists who, in 
addition to long theoretical training, have had large experience in the practice 
of international law. Seminars, under the direction of the regular professors, 
would be created for the detailed and exhaustive study of certain phases of inter- 
national law and international relations. The courses would be open to students 
of all countries who possess the necessary qualifications, and who would be able 
to attend and to profit by the instruction given, as it would be, during the academic 
vacation. 

It is also proposed that the governments should be interested in the academy 
and invited through diplomatic channels to designate appropriate officials of 
various branches of the governmental service to attend its courses. 

The Institution would be unique in its summer sessions, unique in its small 
and changing faculty, and unique in its student body, drawn from foreign coun- 
tries and from official classes. The lectures, published as monographs, would en- 
rich the literature of international law ; the law itself would be treated from vari- 
ous points of view and by competent teachers, of whom but one at a time would be 
selected from any country. The student body would be drawn from various 
countries and in the course of time would exercise influence in their home coun- 



88 MR. BACON S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

tries, so that the Academy would be eminently helpful to establish a better under- 
standing of international rights and duties and to disseminate the principles of 
justice. 

The Academy would, if organized, be a separate and independent institution, 
under the control of a specially appointed committee or curatorium, composed in 
the first instance of past presidents of the Institute of International Law. Thus 
organized and operated, it would advance the work which the Endowment is 
created to further, but it would not be a direct agency of the Endowment or under 
its control. 

It would not seem necessary to go more fully into the advantages of such an 
Academy which appealed to the President and members of the Conference, which 
has been approved by the International Law Association — a more popular body 
than the Institute of International Law — by the Institute of International Law 
itself, by an overwhelming, indeed well-nigh unanimous, vote, and which has 
elicited the warmest commendations from statesmen, publicists and professors of 
International Law in all parts of the world. 

Mr. Root directed me to submit to your consideration the project for this 
Academy and to ask the support of all the Latin American republics, that they may 
designate one or more of their citizens to attend the lectures and follow the 
course of instruction at the Academy when it is established. 

Every one remembers, Mr. President, the notable part you took at the Second 
Hague Conference, the splendid results of which interest in the highest degree the 
Division of International Law as well as all friends of civilization and humanity. 
Your brilliant work is now history ; it will never be forgotten. Your eloquence 
and your success at The Hague, Sir, attracted the attention of the civilized world. 
Not only the two Americas, our twenty-one sister republics, but the entire world 
will profit for all time from your noble efforts. 

The Division of International Law, in order that the work of preparation 
for the Third Conference may soon begin, wishes to call attention to the for- 
mation of National Committees. 

It is common knowledge that the Second Hague Peace Conference of 1907 
recommended the meeting of the Third Conference at a period approximately 
equal to that which had elapsed between the First and Second Conferences, that 
is to say, eight years, so that, if the recommendation is carried out, we may expect 
the Third Conference to meet approximately in 1915. 

It was further provided in the recommendation referred to that about two 
years before the probable meeting of the Conference an international preparatory 
committee should be constituted by common accord among the Powers to collect 
the proposals to be submitted to the Conference, to ascertain what subjects are 
ripe for embodiment in an International Agreement, and to prepare a programme 
to be submitted to the Governments invited to participate in the Conference suffi- 
ciently in advance of the meeting to enable them to be examined carefully and, 



APPENDIX II 89 

finally, to propose a system of organization for the procedure of the Conference 
itself. 

It is evident that the different countries which will be invited to The Hague — 
every country of America was invited to the Second and will doubtless be 
invited to the Third Conference, — should consider all these important matters 
before the constitution of the International Preparatory Committee, and it seems 
advisable, indeed necessary, that each Government should appoint a Committee 
to consider these matters in detail in order that the Governments should be able 
to make their recommendations in the fullness of knowledge. 

As the American Republics will attend as of right the Conference, it would 
seem to be their duty to prepare themselves in advance for active participation 
in its proceedings. They will not perform their full duty if their Delegates merely 
listen to the discussions and occasionally take part in them. The American States 
should do more than this. They should seek to increase the usefulness of each 
successive Conference by making contributions of value, and this can only be done 
if they prepare carefully in advance of the meeting. 

It is not expected that the American States should present a series of joint 
projects to the Conference, or joint recommendations, but it would greatly 
facilitate matters if the different Governments should communicate their views 
so as to reach an agreement upon the subjects which in their opinion should be 
presented and which might form the subject of international agreements. 

Our American States would neglect a great opportunity of usefulness if 
they did not appoint National Committees of their own to study the questions 
which should properly be discussed by the Conferences and prepare projects 
dealing with them which, if not adopted by the Conference will, at least, form 
the basis of discussion. 

These National Committees might be formed as soon as possible in order 
that no time should be lost. I cannot commend too highly this matter to your 
careful thought and consideration. 

The eminent French publicist, Professor A. de Lapradelle referred in the 
following terms to the support of the American republics in the preparation 
of questions for discussion at The Hague: "The Second Peace Conference, in 
calling to The Hague all the American States, made it possible to detect, between 
them, lack of harmony on certain points. They have not all the same concep- 
tion, either of the law of peace or of the law of war. How is it possible to convince 
Europe of the correctness of the American point of view if America itself has 
not first been convinced ? And, besides, with what authority will not the American 
proposals be vested when they come not from this or that State but from all the 
American States, which, having studied them in the American Institute of Inter- 
national Law, will have agreed upon them in the Pan-American Conferences?" 

The study, the development and the popularization of international law 
deserve our best efforts. One of the most distinguished statesmen of Europe 
very recently said: "Neither the pure and simple abolition of war, nor the 



90 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

institution of a supra-national State, nor a change of government or social 
organization can make smooth the road to peace and put an end to warlike 
instincts. There is only one road to follow, slow if you will, but sure: the road 
of law, not theoretical and imaginary law, but law that is positive and real. 
A peace which does not come from law, which does not find in law its foundation 
and its guarantee, is valueless; it is not worthy of your sympathies or your 
efforts. It rests upon a weak and trembling foundation; it depends upon pre- 
carious happenings and is likely at any moment to crumble and fall. It sac- 
rifices that which is of first importance to a condition which is of only secondary 
importance and which has a moral value only in so far as it is the result of a 
reign of law." 

Monsignor, Excellencies, Ladies, Gentlemen: Before concluding I wish to 
express again to you my most sincere thanks for the great honor which has 
been done me by the Brazilian Academy and the Institute of Lawyers as well 
as my profound gratitude for your kind and sympathetic reception. In leaving 
your city, with more regret than I am able to tell you, a city which will always be 
for me one of the wonders of the world, I shall carry away with me sentiments — 
if you will allow me to say so — of very dear personal friendship. I shall therefore 
say not goodby but — until we meet again. 

Letter of Sefior Helio Lobo, 

Accepting the Position of Honorary Secretary for Brazil, of the National Society 

of International Conciliation, 
Rio de Janeiro, October g, 1913 

[Translation from the Portuguese] 

His Excellency 

Robert Bacon, Ambassador. 

Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. 

Sir: — 

Your Excellency deigned yesterday at the American Embassy to invite me 
in the name of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, of which 
you are the eminent representative on a special mission, to act as Secretary of the 
"International Conciliation" in Brazil for this worthy Association which is presided 
over in Paris by Baron d'Estournelles de Constant. 

Having thanked your Excellency, at the time, for the distinguished honor 
conferred upon me, and having assured you how greatly I appreciate it, I beg 
leave now to reiterate what I then stated, and add how sensible I am of the 
marked kindness your Excellency has shown to me. 

It will be for me a means of particular gratification to co-operate with my 
best efforts in- this way in a work, the importance of which no one appreciates 
more fully than yourself. 



APPENDIX II 91 

I shall consider myself fortunate indeed, if in my effort to respond to the 
distinguished trust you have reposed in me, I am able to fulfil the commands 
with which your Excellency and the Association may see fit to honor me. 

Assuring you of my warmest sentiments of highest appreciation and esteem, 

I remain 

Your obedient servant, 

Heijo Lobo. 



APPENDIX III 
Argentina 



Remarks of Dr. E. S. Zeballos, 

At a Dinner Given by Him for Mr. Bacon, 
Buenos Aires, October 15, 1915 

[.Translation from the Spanish] 

Gentlemen: 

Mr. Bacon belongs to the select group of Americans who, under the distin- 
guished leadership of Mr. Root, cultivate the diplomacy of enlightenment in 
America and in the world. 

They seek in the esteem held by the world's representative men for one 
another, the natural and American tendency toward respect and conciliation 
between nations. 

We welcome this noble mission to our land. Warm, too, is our greeting 
to its brilliant exponent whose learning and culture will ever live with us. 

Gentlemen: To the United States of America where this intellectual move- 
ment is fostered. 

To the venerable Carnegie, who is showing the world how private fortunes 
should not be confined to satisfying individual pleasures but to promoting the 
welfare of mankind. 

To the illustrious Root, who leads this glorious movement. 

To Mr. Bacon, chivalrous spirit and vigorous mind, who in unofficial capacity 
but with credentials from humanity and science, is realizing in South America 
the noblest and most fruitful mission of the United States. 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Gentlemen: 

First of all, I ask you to pardon my boldness in addressing you in the sonorous 
Castilian tongue, so rich and so harmonious, but which, to my deep regret, I speak 
haltingly. Your proverbial kindness assures me that I can count upon your 
indulgence. 

I thank you most heartily, Sir, for the honor you have done me in affording 
me the pleasure of meeting the most distinguished personages of the intellectual 
world of Buenos Aires. I appreciate the flattering words addressed to my humble 
self and the praise bestowed on my country. I assure you that your gracious 
courtesy has touched me deeply. 



APPENDIX III 93 

In addressing you I feel profoundly moved. The warm welcome given me 
and the admiration I have for this beautiful land, make it difficult for me to 
express the sentiments which have filled my soul from the moment I set foot 
on your hospitable shore. 

The eyes of the civilized world are to-day turned toward the Argentine 
Republic. It admires her wonderful progress and everywhere are heard en- 
thusiastic words of praise and predictions of the bright future in store for her. I 
am completing a trip around the world and I have heard recounted in many places 
the wonders of this privileged land. Buenos Aires, superb Sultana of the Rio de la 
Plata, has made an impression on my memory which will never be effaced. I see 
in her not only a large and beautiful metropolis, modeled after the great cities of 
Europe, with the bustling life of her splendid harbor, with the ceaseless stir of 
her stately avenues and the singular attractiveness of her charming people, all 
of which proves the truth of what I have been told, but my eyes, striving to 
penetrate the veil of the future, behold in ecstasy the glorious vision of the 
American Paris, raised through the energy of her people to heights surpassing the 
fondest dreams of the present generation. 

I am happy in having the opportunity to visit your country. I have always 
felt a keen interest in the Argentine Republic ; her struggles for freedom, her ex- 
traordinary development, and her splendid future have always held my attention. 
I am delighted to visit the native land of the genius Sarmiento, whose name is a 
familiar one in the United States, from which he took the scheme of the educa- 
tional system which this country has used to such good advantage; the land of 
the brave Belgrano, illustrious and intrepid leader, and of the stern patriot San 
Martin, whose wonderful military talent and heroic disinterestedness associate 
him in our minds with our own beloved Washington. 

As the representative of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, 
I bring you the affectionate greetings of its eminent President and your true 
friend, Honorable Elihu Root, my honored chief, whom I love and whom you, 
gentlemen, I know, also esteem. 

My mission for the Endowment has been referred to as a mission of friend- 
ship and good-will. That is very true and I am proud of it, but since ties of 
friendship already bind us, may we not go further than that ? 

For my part I should like it to be regarded as a mission of co-operation and 
mutual help among old friends with the object of discussing, studying, planning 
practical means whereby we can work together and march forward toward 
progress, toward the ideal of humanity, toward greater enlightenment, for the 
triumph of Right in the world, replacing resort to force by resort to justice; 
toward an international opinion which will be the true sanction of international 
law. 

The noble words spoken by Mr. Root in 1906 at the Pan-American Conference 
represent the sentiment and the ideals of the people of the United States as 
truthfully and as forcefully today as when they were spoken seven years ago, for 



94 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

governments may change, but the sentiments of the people remain the same. I 
like to think of this memorable declaration as the "Root Doctrine" — the doctrine 
of sympathy and understanding, of kindly consideration and honorable obliga- 
tion — and I am proud to be considered worthy to speak of it as a humble 
apostle. 

Since the visit of Mr. Root to your beautiful country in 1906, there have 
been great changes; marvelous progress has been made in the development of 
international law, of the law of peoples, and in this development the learned 
publicists and jurisconsults of Latin America have played a very important part. 

The scientific development of international law, towards which Mr. Root 
has unsparingly devoted his great gifts, is making rapid strides. It has been 
said that the Second Hague Conference presented the greatest advance ever 
made at any single time toward the reasonable and peaceful regulation of inter- 
national conduct, unless it be the advance made at the First Hague Conference. 

It has been said, too, that the dreams and Utopias of today are the facts 
of tomorrow. The dreams of yesterday are the realities of today. The dreams 
of Rolin-Jaequemyns, Lieber, Calvo, Alcorta and other inspired leaders are 
accomplished facts today; the spirit of their doctrines has become principles of 
our present conduct. 

The Trustees of the Carnegie Endowment believe that this progress can be 
hastened by practical methods. They are convinced that the ideas of the great 
thinkers can be advanced more quickly to the benefit of the world, by uniting 
their efforts in certain well-defined, practical activities. The object of my visit 
is to ask your invaluable support and co-operation. 

Mr. Root, who would leave the absorbing cares of political life to devote 
the greater part of his energies to this cause, feels special interest in certain 
plans of the Endowment which are of greater moment, and he has urged me to 
solicit your co-operation in this task : 

To place the new American Institute of International Law on a sure and 
more permanent basis, by creating in each State of America national societies, 
affiliated with the American Society and forming an integral part of the same; 

The creation of an Academy of International Law at The Hague, each gov- 
ernment to send one or more representatives; 

The organization in each country of national branches of the Society for 
International Conciliation, established at Paris and of which Baron d'Estournelles 
de Constant is President; 

The creation of new intellectual ties by means of an exchange of professors 
and students between the universities of South America and of the United 
States, as well as through the visits of representative men. 

I hope you will pardon my having kept you so long. On another occasion 
I hope to enter into further details regarding the ideas and desires of Mr. Root. In 
closing I invite you to bestow upon these practical projects your earnest considera- 



APPENDIX III 95 

tion, not only that the bonds of friendship and solidarity between our beloved 
countries may be strengthened, nor merely that there be created an intellectual 
union among the American Republics, but that humanity may be benefited and 
the ends of liberty and justice furthered among the nations of the world. 

Remarks of Dr. Luis M. Drago, 

Introducing Mr. Bacon at the Reception of the Faculty of Law, 
Buenos Aires, October 16, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

I have the honor of welcoming and of introducing to the select audience 
gathered to hear him, Mr. Robert Bacon, one of the leaders of thought of the 
United States of America, who has come to Buenos Aires on a mission of 
continental brotherhood. 

Mr. Bacon, formerly Secretary of State of the United States, and her 
Ambassador to France, is to-day a Trustee of the University of Harvard; and 
to the prestige of his clear mind and to his high personal attainments he now 
adds the credentials of special envoy of the renowned Carnegie Endowment for 
International Peace, constituted in the United States for the promotion of peace 
and friendship among the nations of the world. Mr. Bacon, statesman, scholar 
and noted educator, represents the very best of the high intellectual order to 
which he belongs, and is in every way worthy to continue the work of Mr. Root, 
that leader among orators and statesmen of the Western World who accom- 
plished so much in his memorable voyage to Latin America toward promoting 
a better understanding among the peoples of America, pointing out to them the 
vast moral and intellectual heights to be attained through collective effort. 

Mr. Bacon who, in his desire to bring to the South American nations the 
message of friendship sent by the Carnegie Endowment, did not object to a long 
and trying voyage, thus becomes the apostle of the old humanitarian ideal and 
of the spirit of solidarity, justice, respectful consideration and kindly feeling 
which has ever been the inspiring motive of the foreign policy of the Argentine 
Republic. 

On behalf of the Faculty of Law, I take pleasure in welcoming our illus- 
trious guest, and asking him to honor us with an address. 

Address of Mr. Bacon 

[.Translation from the French] 

Excellencies, Ladies, and Gentlemen: 

I cannot find words to express my high appreciation of the very great honor 
done me today by the Faculty of Law. 

Believe me when I say that I am deeply touched by the courtesy you have 
shown me in inviting me to attend this meeting, held under the auspices of your 
leaders of thought, and to address you on the subject of my mission. 



96 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

I thank you, Sir, from the bottom of my heart for the all too kind words in 
which you have referred to me and which I so little deserve. 

It is a great pleasure to me to be able to visit, though only for a few days, 
far too short indeed, a few of the nations and countries of South America, for it 
has always been one of my fondest wishes, which as yet I have been able only 
partially to realize, to see with my own eyes your wonderful countries, the marvels 
of your civilization, to meet again the friends whom I have known and loved in 
other parts of the world, and to form new friendships, which will add another 
charm to life, which neither time nor distance can ever obliterate or cloud. I come, 
bearing a message of good will from your devoted friend and great admirer, 
Mr. EHhu Root. It is at his request, anticipated by my own desire, that I have 
the honor to stand before you. I would that I could say to you all that he 
himself would say, if he were present and could greet you with his old friendship. 
Our words would differ perhaps, but the spirit behind them would be the 
same. 

I should like to have you think of me as inaugurating a series of international 
visits, which will follow each other without interruption and turn to our mutual 
advantage, by bringing together authoritative representatives of the social and 
intellectual circles of the North and of the South; and inviting you to cooperate 
in the establishment of international institutions, which will, we hope, become 
centers of good will, and spread and popularize correct and progressive principles 
of international law, on which may depend peaceful international relations, and 
which, in different ways, directly and indirectly, by means of an exchange of 
thought, an exchange of views, and a happy combination of efforts, will succeed 
in strengthening the bonds of friendship, which a common past, common institu- 
tions, and a common goal demand. 

History and nature have created and developed a deep feeling of solidarity, 
not only between the States of Latin America, but also between the Republics of 
the South and the United States. We must endeavor to maintain and strengthen 
this solidarity which, because of its double origin, indissolubly unites the nations 
of the new continent in the past, in the present, and in the future. 

It suffices to glance at the political history of the New World to see the 
constant interest of the United States in the struggle of the States of Latin 
America, first to free themselves from the mother country, and then to defend 
the independence they had won against all attempts at conquest on the part of 
European powers. It suffices briefly to recall that after their emancipation, the 
United States furnished the Latin States with the forms and bases of their political 
institutions, especially of their republican and democratic government, at a time 
when the old political institutions of Europe were far from satisfying the ideals 
of liberty and the social conditions of the two Americas. 

All this glorious past in the history of the New World should strengthen the 
indestructible bonds of solidarity which have united the American nations since 
the beginning of their political life. 



APPENDIX III 97 

Nature fortifies the work of history. The geographical situation of the 
States of the New World has brought into being a series of problems common to 
the States of this Continent, thus creating among them new bonds of solidarity. 
Thanks to the progress of civilization and the improvement in the means of 
communication, America has come today to understand the imperative necessity 
of solving in a uniform manner problems arising from situations and conditions 
peculiar to the New Continent. 

Outstripping Europe, where the great powers meet in conference only at the 
end of war, in order to determine the conditions of peace, all the States of America 
have met in pacific conferences, for the purpose of considering questions common 
to their continent; whence the name and the origin of the Pan-American 
Conferences. These conferences have been most fruitful in their results. A 
number of problems of interest to America have been studied ; important conven- 
tions have been signed, with a view to the development of the social and the 
intellectual life of the New World. Finally, the representatives of the various 
American States have learned to know each other better, and have become aware 
of the many powerful bonds that unite all the American States. 

The sentiments of solidarity and of fraternity, which group the States of the 
New World in a community of interests, must bring forth union and concord. The 
way is already open ; many fruitful results have been obtained. We must therefore 
endeavor to achieve, in an ever increasing degree, good understanding and 
harmony. We must remove especially the misunderstanding on the part of the 
South American States of the policy of the United States. As Mr. Root has 
solemnly declared, the latter country desires more than all else that peace and 
prosperity may reign in Latin America, in order to strengthen and tighten the 
bonds of friendship and fraternity which should unite all the American nations. 

I have the honor to address you, not merely on my own account, but in the 
name of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, of which Senator 
Root is the President, and to invite you, in the name of and on behalf of the 
Trustees of the Endowment, to cooperate with us in every way that you possibly 
and properly can. 

In other words, Mr. Root's desire is to awaken, so far as possible, the 
interest and the sympathetic collaboration of the leaders of thought in South 
America and to enlist their aid in the various undertakings that the Endowment 
is seeking to promote, in the interest of better international relations, so that 
they may cooperate in a practical way in the work. 

The esteem and friendship of the Trustees of the Endowment for the peoples 
of Latin America and for the many distinguished Latin Americans with whom 
they have most agreeable relations of personal friendship lead them to hope that 
the work of the Endowment may find in South America collaborators as active 
and as useful as those it has "found in Europe. 

Let me quote to you verbatim a passage from the instructions given me by 
Mr. Root, instead of paraphrasing them, as I have done on several former 



98 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

occasions. "You will observe," said he, "that one of the means by which the 
Division of Intercourse and Education proposes to advance international good 
understanding is a series of international visits of representative men. Accord- 
ingly, under the auspices of the Division, directly or indirectly, Baron 
d'Estournelles de Constant of France, the Baroness von Suttner of Austria, 
and Professor Nitobe of Japan have already visited the United States, and 
President Eliot of Harvard University has visited India, China, and Japan, and 
Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie is now in Japan. Your visit to South America 
comes in this category, but it has a more definite and specific purpose than any 
of the other visits which I have enumerated or which are contemplated under 
the head that I have mentioned, for it is not merely to strengthen good 
understanding by personal intercourse between a representative North American 
and representative South Americans, but it is also to introduce to representative 
South Americans personally the work and purposes and ideals of the Endowment, 
and to invite our friends in South America to cordial and sympathetic union with 
us in promoting the great work of the trust." 

Such is the spirit of kindly feeling and genuine sympathy that has inspired 
my mission. I do not need to tell you that I am endeavoring to fulfil it in the 
same spirit. 

I regret that I find myself today forced to confine my remarks to details 
that are somewhat dry and uninteresting, at a time when under the spell and the 
inspiration of your gracious welcome and of your charming hospitality, I would 
like to speak again and again of our ideals, of our hopes. For I am proud, Sir, 
to share your optimism, and I have an inner conviction that, in spite of the 
clouds gathered through mistrust and skepticism, we are on the eve of a great 
progressive and liberalizing movement, and can perceive afar the dawn of a 
brighter day. 

The principles and the philosophy of life of the past century will not 
suffice. We shall need new laws, a new political economy, new principles of 
international law. 

You have done me the honor to ask me for further details about certain 
projects of the Endowment. 

The work of the Endowment has been apportioned among three Divisions : 

1. The Division of Intercourse and Education, of which Dr. Nicholas 
Murray Butler, President of Columbia University, is Director. 

2. The Division of Economics and History, of which Dr. John Bates 
Clark is Director. 

3. The Division of International Law, of which the Secretary of the 
Endowment, Dr. James Brown Scott, is Director. 

As regards the Division of Intercourse and Education, it was evident that 
its activities would necessarily apply to foreign countries and that it was 
essential for the success of its undertakings that its work in foreign countries 



APPENDIX III 99 

should be performed by local agents rather than by officers of the Endowment. 
As it was impossible to determine far ahead what should be undertaken and 
what methods should be applied, without advice from competent and 
experienced leaders of thought in the various countries, Dr. Butler, Director of 
the Division, formed a Consultative Committee of European statesmen and 
publicists, and a corps of correspondents, upon whose opinion and sympathetic 
cooperation he can always count. 

We have wondered whether it would be agreeable to the leaders of thought 
in Latin America to create an organization somewhat similar to the General 
Consultative Committee already formed in Europe. 

The Division has inaugurated visits of eminent men and an educational 
exchange with Japan. I hope to be able to obtain advice and information in 
South America which will enable us to begin in the near future a mutual exchange 
of professors and students with Latin America. 

The Endowment is anxious to have the exchange begin at once by the sending 
of two eminent savants or publicists of South America to the United States, 
and two North Americans to South America. Each of these gentlemen would 
devote his time to two institutions in the continent that he visits. 

It is useless to dwell upon the wisdom and the timeliness of these projects, 
for it is common knowledge that many of the misunderstandings that exist 
between nations are the result of ignorance of local conditions, traditions and 
ideas. Personal contact proves that all men are at bottom strangely alike, and 
that personal contact, discussion, and an exchange of ideas lay the foundations 
that are indispensable for friendship and good understanding. 

One of the activities to which this Division attaches great importance is the 
establishment of Associations for Conciliation throughout the world. 

A few years ago the parent association was organized at Paris by Baron 
d'Estournelles de Constant. The branch in the United States, of which Dr. 
Butler is President, was created in 1906. The German Association and the 
English Association were organized in 1912, and I am charged to appeal to 
interested persons in the countries that I have the honor to visit, to cooperate 
by organizing branch societies of International Conciliation to be connected 
with the parent society in Paris. These associations, although local in origin, 
have nevertheless an international mission and seek to create, by their meetings 
and the useful pamphlets that they regularly publish, friendly feelings towards 
the peoples of foreign countries. 

Permit me to lay before you the aims and purposes of societies for 
International Conciliation in the words of the founder of the parent society at 
Paris. In a memorandum which he was good enough to prepare on this subject, 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant says: 

Conciliation is not a sentimental or humanitarian organization; it is a 
practical and patriotic step forward in the national interest of each country, 
particularly of young countries, which need to devote all their strength and 



100 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

resources to their development. Its aim is to insure a safe tomorrow for the 
world of business and of labor — for the farmer, the manufacturer, the 
merchant, as well as for the artist and the savant ; — to make it possible for 
them to plan and undertake work for the future. 

Conciliation is the modern indispensable complement of the economic 
efforts of every civilized country. To develop national prosperity with the 
aid of peaceful international relations, such is our effort, summed up in 
our motto : Pro p atria per orbis concordiam. 

Wars of conquest no longer pay; they engender only hatred, reprisals, 
the ever increasing burdens of an armed peace. These burdens have become, 
among the masses, one of the most powerful arguments in favor of socialism 
and revolution. 

The only worthy wars are wars of independence ; but no one is threatening 
the independence of the American States. They will become stronger by 
learning to know each other better, than by arming themselves against one 
another. 

Arbitration, on the contrary, has stood its test — witness the Alabama, the 
Hull, the Casablanca, the Bering and Newfoundland fisheries cases, etc. 

Organize arbitration rather than war, but always prefer conciliation to 
arbitration. 

Such is our conception, our rule of life. 

I sum it up thus : 

War rather than slavery ; 
Arbitration rather than war; 
Conciliation rather than arbitration. 

Arbitration mends, conciliation prevents. Conciliation substitutes the 
spirit of fruitful cooperation for the barren routine of antagonism. 

The Endowment is disposed to assume the expenses incurred in the organiza- 
tion of these societies and to supply the necessary funds to secure the services 
of secretaries capable of energy, devotion, perseverance, and intelligence, upon 
whom depends the usefulness of these societies. 

I shall now take up the work of the Division of Economics and History. 

The function of this Division is "To promote a thorough and scientific 
investigation and study of the causes of war and of the practical methods to 
prevent and avoid it." 

A conference was held at Berne, Switzerland, in August, 191 1, to which 
distinguished economists and publicists from all Europe were invited, to examine 
questions which could be properly and practically studied, and to draw up a 
tentative program for the Division. 

A great number of subjects have already been assigned to specialists chosen 
in the countries to which their work applies. Some of these studies are already 
completed and within a few years the Endowment will have published a series of 
noteworthy volumes, covering all the phases of the program, which will be, — in 
the language of Mr. Root, — "useful to mankind." 

Professor Kinley, an old and sincere friend of Latin America, who represented 
the United States in the Fourth Pan-American Congress held at Buenos Aires, 
has been appointed a member of the Committee of Research, and he will devote 



APPENDIX III 101 

himself more particularly to the problems in which Latin America is interested. 
He will visit Latin America, certainly during the course of next year, in order to 
confer with its leaders of opinion, with a view to obtaining their advice, and if 
possible, their cooperation in the execution of the projects that they may 
recommend. 

The third Division of the Endowment is the Division of International Law. 

This Division, like the others, has found it necessary to create a special 
organization and to secure the services of a corps of jurists, in the correctness 
of whose opinions in legal matters the Trustees can have full confidence. 

The Institute of International Law is composed, — it is hardly necessary to 
say, — of the most eminent jurists of all nations, and the Endowment has asked 
the Institute to act either as a body or through a committee specially appointed 
for this purpose, as adviser to the Division of International Law. The Institute 
has accepted this task, and appointed a committee of eleven at its Christiania 
meeting in 1912, called the Consultative Committee for the Carnegie Endowment. 
This Committee has acted during the present year as adviser to the Director and 
has drawn up regulations, which have been accepted by the Institute, and by 
means of which the relations established between the Institute, on the one hand, 
through its Consultative Committee, and the Endowment, on the other, through 
its Division of International Law, should become permanent. 

The Committee is composed of eleven members, of which the President and 
the Secretary General of the Institute are members ex officio. The other members 
are elected for a fixed term of years. It should be stated that the members of 
this Committee are men of great experience and of high authority in all questions 
pertaining to international law : They are Messrs. Fusinato of Italy ; Gram and 
Hagerup of Norway; Holland of England; Lammasch of Austria; Lardy of 
Switzerland; Renault of France; Rolin of Belgium; and Vesnitch of Serbia. 

The Division has several works in preparation. The first is a collection of all 
general and special treaties of arbitration; and with regard to the treaties of 
the nineteenth century, the Endowment would be very grateful to the publicists 
of Latin America if they would kindly furnish information about certain questions, 
on which they have the best, perhaps the only knowledge, and the Trustees of 
the Endowment would appreciate as a great favor on the part of the Governments 
of Latin America, if they would kindly furnish copies of these treaties, inasmuch 
as it is very difficult always to procure texts that are absolutely accurate and 
trustworthy. All known cases of international arbitration are to be collected 
and published in the form of legal reports, and the series will be continued 
indefinitely. Professor John Bassett Moore, the well known authority in matters 
of international law and arbitration, recently professor at Columbia University 
and at present Counselor for the Department of State of the United States, is in 
charge of this monumental work and is actively engaged upon it. 

The Institute of International Law, which acts as adviser to the Division of 
International Law, was created in Europe in 1873 ; but, although this Institute 



102 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

represents the "universal legal conscience", many jurists have felt the need of an 
institution to represent the legal conscience of America, to study the problems 
that interest the New World in particular, and to consider, from the American 
point of view, general questions in the law of nations. 

As you know, an American Institute of International Law was founded in 
1912 by Mr. Alejandro Alvarez of Chile and Dr. James Brown Scott, the Director 
of the Division of International Law of the Endowment. This Institute contem- 
plates the formation of National Societies of International Law in every American 
country, to be affiliated with it and to work in harmony with it in studving 
American problems, with the view of developing international law, of making 
known its principles in all countries, and of contributing to the peaceful relations 
of nations, because these relations, if enlightened public opinion so demands, will 
be based upon the principles of an equitable and highly developed system of 
international law. 

The American Institute of International Law will be composed of five 
publicists from each of the American Republics, selected by the charter members 
of the Institute from among the members of the National Societies, and every 
member of a National Society has, by virtue of such membership, the right to be 
enrolled as an associate member of the Institute and to participate in its labors. 

Lest I appear to be describing in exaggerated terms the aims and purposes of 
the American Institute of International Law, of which Mr. Elihu Root is the 
Honorary President, let me quote a passage from a learned Dutchman, a 
professor of international law, who may be supposed to treat this matter more 
disinterestedly. After speaking of the great example that America has set the 
world by undertaking the codification of international law, he says : 

The second example is furnished us by an Institute essentially scientific, 
whose moral influence is almost as great. The gradual drawing together of 
the North and South has created a new instrumentality of progress. The 
projects of a Pan-American Union, which were launched long since, but have 
never succeeded, have at last brought forth a favorable result in the field of 
peaceful studies, thanks to the talent and the perseverance of two illustrious 
men, one in the northern, the other in the southern half of the Western 
Hemisphere. In the course of the past year Mr. James Brown Scott, the 
noted jurist of the United States and Mr. Alejandro Alvarez, formerly 
professor and Counselor to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Chile, who in 
June 1912 at Rio exerted a most salutary influence on the great project of 
codification, met at Washington and founded, in October 191 2 the American 
Institute of International Law. This Institute has for its object: (1) To 
contribute to the development of international law; (2) to strengthen the 
common sentiment of international justice; (3) to bring about universal 
acceptance of peaceable methods of settling international disputes between 
the American States. 

This brilliant idea sprang from the conviction that it is better to spread 
conceptions of law and justice by a slow but constant infusion into the heads 
and hearts of nations than by diplomatic negotiations, which do not rest on 
popular sentiment. 



APPENDIX III 103 

If we take into consideration the fact that the peace movement is far 
more widespread in America than elsewhere, that it rests either upon a 
religious basis, or upon a community of interests and of tendencies that may 
well be envied, we can appreciate at its true value this further proof of 
vigorous progress which has come to us from the other side of the ocean. 
It revives our hope and impels us to increase our efforts. 

Mr. Root and his colleagues attach the greatest importance to the establish- 
ment and the satisfactory operation of the American Institute of International 
Law and its affiliated societies in each of the American countries. 

The Endowment grants at present a subvention to the older Institute, founded 
in Europe. This subvention is to cover the traveling expenses of the members 
of the Institute, expenses incurred by its commissions and the publication of 
their proceedings and reports. The new Institute can count on receiving financial 
aid from the Endowment as soon as the national societies are definitely formed, 
and upon being placed on the same footing as the older Institute. 

The American Journal of International Law, which, with a few slight 
changes, could be made the organ of the American Institute, already receives 
an annual subvention from the Endowment. 

Another institution in which the Division of International Law takes great 
interest, and which it will maintain with a subvention, is the Academy of Inter- 
national Law, which it is proposed to establish at The Hague. 

A proposal was made at the Second Peace Conference at The Hague 
for the creation of an Academy of International Law, and the plan was 
developed by the President of the Conference. No resolution was passed at 
the time, but the idea impressed itself upon the publicists of every nationality. 
A committee of Dutch publicists, under the presidency of Mr. Asser, whose 
recent death we all deplore, has taken the initiative in the creation and installa- 
tion of such an Academy in the Peace Palace at The Hague. 

The Court of Arbitration would apply the law, which would be systematically 
taught in the Academy, and the marvelous palace, which was officially opened in 
the month of August last, would become indeed a Temple of Peace, the home 
of International Law. 

Mr. Asser's proposition contemplates systematic instruction, during the 
summer months, in international law and subjects pertaining thereto, by a 
specially constituted and changing faculty, in that the professors would be chosen 
from among the publicists of different countries. Courses of lectures would be 
given on important and timely subjects by publicists, who, in addition to long 
theoretical training, had acquired great experience in the practice of international 
law. 

It is also proposed that the Governments should become interested in the 
Academy and that they be invited, through diplomatic channels, to designate 
appropriate officials in their various departments, to take the courses of the 
Academy. 



104 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The Institution would be unique in its summer sessions, unique in its small 
and changing faculty, and unique in its student body gathered from various 
foreign countries and from official circles. The lectures, published in the form 
of pamphlets, would enrich the literature of international law. The law itself 
would be treated from different viewpoints by competent professors, no two 
of whom would be from any one country. The student body would be recruited 
from different countries, and little by little they would exert an influence in 
their respective countries, so that the Academy would greatly aid in bringing 
about a better understanding of international rights and duties and in dissemina- 
ting the principles of justice. 

When constituted, the Academy will form a separate and independent 
institution under the control of a committee or curatorium specially appointed, 
composed principally of former Presidents of the Institute of International Law. 
Thus organized and operated, it would promote the object for which the Endow- 
ment was created, but it would not be a direct agency of the Endowment, nor 
under its control. 

Mr. Root has charged me to submit to you the plan of this Academy and 
to request the cooperation of all the Republics of Latin America, with the view 
of designating one or more of their citizens to attend the lectures and courses 
of instruction which will be given at the Academy when established. 

Another matter which I have been charged to bring to your attention is 
the formation of National Committees to examine questions which might properly 
appear in and form a part of the program of the next Hague Conference, 
which committees will put themselves in communication with similar committees 
formed in all the American countries. 

It is general knowledge that the Second Peace Conference at The Hague 
in 1907 proposed the meeting of the Third Conference at a time approximately 
equal to that which elapsed between the First and the Second Conferences ; that 
is to say, eight years, so that, if the proposal is put into effect, we can expect 
the meeting of the Third Conference approximately in 191 5. 

It was also stipulated in the above mentioned proposal that some two years 
before the probable meeting of the Conference, an international preparatory 
committee be constituted by common agreement among the Powers. 

It is evident that the various countries that will be invited to The Hague 
should examine these important questions before the constitution of the Inter- 
national Preparatory Committee, and it appears advisable, if not necessary, that 
each Government should name a committee to examine these questions in detail, 
so that the Governments may be in a position to formulate their propositions 
in the fulness of knowledge. 

As the American Republics will consider it their right to attend the Con- 
ference, it is their duty to prepare themselves in advance for an active partici- 
pation in its proceedings. They should seek to increase the usefulness of each 



APPENDIX III 105 

successive Conference by making important contributions to them, and that can 
be accomplished only if they carefully prepare in advance for the meeting. 

It is not expected that the American States will present a series of projects 
in common to the Conference, nor that they will submit propositions in common, 
but, if the various Governments exchange views, so as to reach an agreement 
on the questions that, in their opinion, should be presented and that might enter 
into international treaties, it would considerably facilitate matters. 

The eminent French publicist, Professor A. de Lapradelle, refers in the 
following words to the cooperation of the American Republics in preparing 
questions for discussion at The Hague: 

The Second Peace Conference, by calling to The Hague all the Amer- 
ican States, brought to light disagreements among them on certain points. 
All of them have not the same conception of the law of peace nor of the 
law of war. How then can Europe be convinced of the correctness of 
American views, if America herself is not already so convinced? And 
again, how much more weight American propositions will carry when they 
proceed, not from this or that State, but from America as a whole, whose 
publicists having studied them in the American Institute of International 
Law, have adopted them in the Pan-American Conferences !" 

Permit me to make a final quotation from Mr. Root : 

The Trustees of the Endowment are fully aware that progress in the 
work which they have undertaken must necessarily be slow and that its 
most substantial results must be far in the future. We are dealing with 
aptitudes and impulses firmly established in human nature through the 
development of thousands of years, and the utmost that any one generation 
can hope to do is to promote the gradual change of standards of conduct. 
All estimates of such work and its results must be in terms not of individual 
human life, but in terms of the long life of nations. Inconspicuous as are 
the immediate results, however, there can be no nobler object of human 
effort than to exercise an influence upon the tendencies of the race, so that 
it shall move, however slowly, in the direction of civilization and humanity 
and away from senseless brutality. It is to participate with us in this noble, 
though inconspicuous, work that we ask you to invite our friends in South 
America with the most unreserved and sincere assurances of our high 
consideration and warm regard. 

Excellencies, Ladies and Gentlemen, let me in closing again express my 
most sincere thanks for the great honor done me by the Faculty of Law, as 
well as my deep gratitude for your kindly and sympathetic welcome. 



APPENDIX IV 
Uruguay 



Remarks of the American Minister, Hon. Nicolay Grevstad, 

At a Luncheon Given by Him for Mr. Bacon at the Uruguay Club, 
Montevideo, October 20, 191 3 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Excellencies, Ladies and Gentlemen: 

Our warmest welcome to our distinguished guests, heralds of peace and 
brotherhood ! 

We all know that Mr. Bacon is amongst us to-day as the representative of 
the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. We know, too, that never 
more than to-day is it everywhere necessary to wage the war of reason against 
the war of violence. It is a very happy sign that so illustrious a man as our 
guest should have consecrated his energies to the cause of international peace. 
We can assure him that Uruguay stands ready to heed his good words. We can 
assure him, too, that Uruguay, rich in its fertile lands, in its strong, intelligent 
and progressive people, in its financial and commercial honor — as pure as the 
gold which has ever been the basis of its monetary system — that Uruguay, I 
repeat, will heartily welcome Mr. Bacon, his charming wife and daughter and 
the friends who accompany him. We extend our heartiest greetings to all! 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

I am most grateful, Mr. Minister, for your words of welcome, as well as 
for the opportunity afforded me of meeting our countrymen fraternizing with 
this distinguished group of Uruguay's citizens. Please accept, Excellencies, my 
sincere thanks for your kind reception and for the many courtesies showered 
upon me and my family. 

The people of the United States are well aware that all that the Minister 
has just said in praise of Uruguay is true. As the representative of the Carnegie 
Endowment for International Peace, I am charged with a message of affectionate 
greeting from its eminent President and your cordial friend, Hon. Elihu Root, 
my honored chief, whom I love and whom you, gentlemen, I know, also esteem. 

My mission for the Endowment has been referred to as a mission of friend- 
ship and goodwill. That is very true and I am proud of it, but since ties of 
friendship already bind us, may we not go further than that? For my part 



APPENDIX IV 107 

I should like it to be regarded as a mission of cooperation and mutual help 
among old friends, with the object of planning practical means whereby we 
can work together and march forward toward progress, toward the ideal of 
humanity, toward greater enlightenment for the triumph of right in the world, 
replacing resort to force by resort to justice; toward an international opinion 
which will be the true sanction of international law. We believe that there 
are several practical ways whereby this cooperation can be obtained with but 
little delay, and I expect to explain these to you tonight. The purpose of my 
mission is to lay these plans before you and to solicit your invaluable coopera- 
tion. I am delighted to see side by side in this room the colors of our two flags, 
those of Uruguay and of the United States, and I pray that just as our two flags 
are here entwined so may the hearts of our two peoples be ever united in lasting 
friendship. 

To the Republic of Uruguay, to its continued friendship with our country 
and to the ladies who have honored us with their presence. 

Address of Mr. Bacon 

At a Reception at the Ateneo, 
Montevideo, October 20, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish} 

Ladies and Gentlemen: 

You will pardon me, I know, if I venture to address you in your beautiful 
language, whose rhythm attracts me irresistibly, but which, to my very great 
regret, I speak haltingly. 

I am profoundly touched by this new evidence of kindness shown me by 
inviting me to be present at this meeting, held in this Temple of Science and Let- 
ters under the auspices of your famous intellectual leaders. 

Words fail me with which to express the sentiments of my deep apprecia- 
tion for the eloquent remarks of your eminent orator, scholar, poet and statesman. 

In my own name and on behalf of the distinguished statesman whose mission 
I bear, Senator Elihu Root, I thank you with all my heart for your kind words of 
welcome, for this cordial reception and for the flattering words addressed to my 
humble self and so little deserved. 

It is a very great pleasure for me to be permitted to visit, if only for a few 
days, far too short, some of the peoples and countries of South America; for 
it has been one of my most cherished dreams, which I have been able only 
partially to realize as yet, to see with my own eyes your wonderful countries, 
the marvels of your civilization, to meet again friends whom I have known 
and loved in other parts of the world, to make other friendships which will 
add a new joy to life, and fill me with memories which neither time nor 
distance can dim or efface. I come charged with a message of good will from 
your devoted friend and great admirer, Mr. Elihu Root, at whose request, 



108 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

anticipated by my own desire, I have the honor to appear before you. I wish 
I could say to you all that he would say, were he here in person to address 
you and to greet you as an old friend. The expressions might differ, perhaps, 
but I assure you the spirit behind them would be one and the same. 

I would like to have you look upon me as inaugurating a series of interna- 
tional visits which will follow each other without break and be mutually ad- 
vantageous by bringing together accredited representatives of life and thought 
of the Southland as well as of the North ; and inviting you to cooperate in 
the establishment of international institutions which will, we hope, become 
centers of good will, develop and popularize just and progressive principles of 
international law upon which good relations must depend, and in various ways, 
directly and indirectly, by an exchange of thought, an exchange of views and 
a happy combination of effort, result in strengthening the bonds of friendship 
which a common past, common institutions and a common goal urge and demand. 

History and Nature have inspired and increased a deep feeling of solidarity, 
not only between the countries of Latin America, but also between the Re- 
publics of the South and the United States. It behooves us to maintain and 
strengthen this solidarity which, by reason of its two- fold origin, unites insep- 
arably the nations of the new continent in the past, in the present and in the 
future. 

One need only glance at the political history of the New World to see 
the constant interest the United States has taken in the struggles of the Latin 
American nations, first to free themselves from the mother country and then 
to defend the independence they had won against all attempts at conquest on 
the part of European nations. Moreover we might briefly recall that, after 
the emancipation, the United States furnished the Latin States with the forms 
and basic principles of their political institutions, particularly of their republican 
and democratic government, exactly at a time when the ancient political institu- 
tions of Europe were far from responding to the ideas of liberty and to the social 
conditions of the two Americas. 

All this glorious past in the history of the New World should strengthen 
day by day the indissoluble bonds of solidarity which have united the American 
nations since the beginning of their political life. 

Nature has added to the work of History. The geographical situation of the 
States of the New World has brought into being a series of problems common 
to all the States of the Continent, thereby creating among them new 
ties of union. Thanks to the progress of civilization and the perfection of 
means of communication, we in America have come to see the imperious neces- 
sity of solving in a uniform manner, the problems arising out of situations 
and conditions peculiar to the New Continent. 

Anticipating Europe in a way, whose great Powers meet in conference 
only at the conclusion of wars to determine the conditions of peace, all the 
American States have met together in pacific conferences in order to discuss 



APPENDIX IV 109 

questions common to their Continent — hence the name and origin of the Pan- 
American Conferences. These conferences have borne abundant fruit — a num- 
ber of problems of interest to America have been studied; important treaties 
have been signed with a view to developing the social and intellectual life of the 
New World; and, finally, the representatives of the several American States 
have learned to know each other better and have come to appreciate how many 
and how strong are the ties which bind the American nations together. 

The sentiments of solidarity and fraternity which unite the countries of the 
New World in a community of interests should create a work of union and con- 
cord. The way is already open; numerous and fruitful results have been ob- 
tained; the time has come, therefore, to establish in ever increasing measure, 
good understanding and harmony. Above all, it is necessary to correct a mis- 
understanding by the South of the political purposes of the United States. 
As Mr. Root solemnly declared when he was among you, the United States 
desires above all that peace and prosperity reign in Latin America in order 
to strengthen and to tighten the bonds of friendship and of brotherhood, which 
should unite all the American peoples. 

I have the honor to address you not merely on my own account, but on behalf 
of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, of which Senator Root is 
President, and to invite you in his name and on behalf of its Trustees to cooperate 
with it in such ways as you may consider possible and advisable. 

In other words, the wish of Mr. Root is to enlist as fully as possible the 
sympathetic interest of the leaders of thought in South America in the various 
enterprises for the improvement of international relations and to bring about 
their practical cooperation in that work. 

The respect and friendship which the Trustees of the Endowment entertain 
for the peoples of Latin America and for the many distinguished Latin Ameri- 
cans with whom many of the Trustees have most agreeable relations of personal 
friendship, lead us to desire that the work of the Endowment may have such 
active and useful cooperation in South America as it has already secured in 
Europe. 

Permit me to explain briefly the work of the Endowment, and to outline 
certain practical projects in which Mr. Root and his associates desire your hearty 
cooperation. 

I regret that today I find myself confined to details somewhat dry and, I fear, 
rather uninteresting at a moment when under the charm of your warm welcome 
and your generous hospitality — in this atmosphere of freedom, consecrated by so 
many struggles and by so many heroes — I would prefer to dwell upon our ideals, 
our hopes of the visions dreamed of by your Artigas and by our Washington. 
For I am proud to share your optimism, sir, and I have an abiding conviction 
that, despite the clouds gathered by opposition and unbelief, we are at the begin- 
ning of a great movement of progress in the evolution of the freedom of the 
world and that from afar we may see the dawning of a brighter, purer day. 



110 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The principles, the philosophy of the last century are no longer sufficient to 
our needs. We must have new rules of political economy, new principles of 
international law. 

To carry out the work of the Endowment it has been organized into three 
divisions : 

The Division of Intercourse and Education; 

The Division of Economics and History; 

The Division of International Law. 

To aid in the work of the first Division, Dr. Butler, its Director, has created 
an Advisory Council of representative European statesmen and publicists, to 
which has been associated a body of correspondents. 

We have asked ourselves whether it would be agreeable to leaders of thought 
in Latin America to create an organization somewhat similar to the General 
Council which has already been formed in Europe. 

The Division has inaugurated an exchange of visits of representative men 
and an educational exchange with Japan, and I hope to be able to obtain informa- 
tion and advice in South America which will enable us to begin in the very near 
future a mutual exchange of professors and students from Latin America. 

I am instructed to suggest that the exchange begin at once by the annual visit 
of two eminent South American scholars or publicists to the United States and 
two North Americans to South America. Each of these men would divide his 
time between two universities in the country which he would visit. 

One of the activities to which this Division attaches much importance has to 
do with the organization of Associations for International Conciliation through- 
out the world. 

The parent Association was formed by Baron d'Estournelles de Constant 
m Paris some years ago. Branches have been established already in the United 
States, Germany and England, and others are in the course of formation. 

I am directed by my instructions to invite the cooperation of interested 
persons in the countries which I have the honor of visiting, to organize branches 
of International Conciliation to be affiliated with the parent branch at Paris. 
These associations, while local in origin, have nevertheless an international 
mission and tend to create by their meetings and excellent pamphlets which they 
regularly issue, a friendly feeling towards the peoples of foreign countries. 

"The Association for International Conciliation", says Baron d'Estournelles 
de Constant, "is not a sentimental, humanitarian organization. It is a practical, 
patriotic advance followed in the national interest of each country particularly 
in young countries which must consecrate all their forces and resources to their 
own development. 

"Conciliation is the modern, indispensable complement of economic effort in 
every civilized country. To develop the national prosperity by the promotion of 
good international relations; such is our object summed up in our motto: Pro 
Patria Per Orbis Concordiam. 



APPENDIX IV 111 

"Undertake arbitration rather than war, but prefer always conciliation to 
arbitration. Our idea, our rule of life is this : 
"War rather than slavery. 
"Arbitration rather than war. 
"Conciliation rather than arbitration. 
"Arbitration cures; conciliation prevents. 
"Conciliation substitutes fruitful cooperation for sterile antagonism." 

The Endowment will provide for the expenses incident to the organization 
of these associations. 

Let me now describe the work of the Division of Economics and History. 

The work of this Division is "to promote researches into and a profound, 
scientific study of the causes of war and of the practical method to prevent and 
avoid it." 

A conference was arranged at Berne in Switzerland two years ago, to which 
distinguished economists and publicists, drawn largely from Europe, were invited, 
to consider the subjects that could properly and profitably be studied and to draft 
the tentative programme for the Division. 

A large number of topics have already been assigned to specialists selected 
from the countries to which their work relates; some of the studies have been 
completed, and, in the course of a few years, the Endowment will have published 
a series of remarkable monographs, covering all phases of the elaborate pro- 
gramme, which will, it is believed, — to quote the language of Mr. Root — "be 
useful to mankind." 

Professor Kinley, an old and sincere friend of Latin America, who repre- 
sented the United States at the Fourth Pan-American Conference held in Buenos 
Aires, has been appointed a member of the Committee of Research, and he will 
devote himself more especially to the problems in which Latin America is inter- 
ested, and, in the course of the coming year, he will visit Latin America to confer 
with the leaders of opinion to obtain their advice and, if possible, to gain their co- 
operation, both in suggesting and in executing those projects which they may 
recommend. 

The Third Division of the Endowment is the Division of International Law. 

This Division, like the other Divisions, found it necessary to create a special 
organization and to have a body of advisers. 

The Institute of International Law consists, it is hardly necessary to state, 
of the leading authorities of all nations, and the Endowment requested the In- 
stitute to act as advisor to the Division of International Law. 

The Institute accepted the invitation and selected a committee which has 
acted as advisor to the Director. 

The Division has under way several works. The first is a collection and 
publication of all general and special treaties of arbitration, and, in regard to the 
treaties of the nineteenth century specially, the Endowment would be very grate- 
ful to the publicists of Latin America if they would supply information on certain 



112 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

questions of this nature, which is best known to them and which may perhaps be 
known only to them ; and the Trustees would regard it as a very great favor if 
the governments of Latin America would supply copies of such treaties, as it is 
very difficult to obtain at all times accurate and reliable texts. All known 
instances of international arbitration will be collected and published with 
notes. 

The Institute of International Law which now acts as Counsellor for the 
Division of International Law was founded in Europe in 1873, but, although 
the Institute represents "the universal juridical conscience," many jurisconsults 
have felt the need of an institution which should represent the juridical con- 
science of America, study the problems which concern particularly the New 
World and examine from the American point of view general matters relating 
to the Law of Nations. 

As you are well aware an American Institute of International Law was 
founded in 1912 by Sefior Alejandro Alvarez of Chile and Doctor James Brown 
Scott, Director of the Division of International Law of the Endowment. This 
Institute contemplates the formation of National Societies of International Law 
in all American countries, to be affiliated with it, and work in studying American 
problems, in making known their principles and in contributing to a better 
understanding among nations. 

Lest I should seem to state in exaggerated language the aims and purposes 
of the American Institute of International Law, of which Mr. Elihu Root is 
Honorary President, let me quote a passage from a distinguished Dutch scholar 
and professor of international law, who may be supposed to treat the subject 
with more detachment. 

After having spoken of the great example America has given to the world 
in undertaking the codification of international law, he says: 

"The second example is given us by an Institute essentially scientific but 
scarcely inferior in moral value. This Institute has for its objects: (1) To 
aid in the development of international law; (2) to unite the common sentiment 
for international justice; (3) to procure a general acceptation of peaceful pro- 
cedure in the settlement of international disputes among the American 
States. 

"This luminous idea sprung from the conviction that it is better to spread 
conceptions of right and justice by a slow but constant appeal to the minds and 
hearts of peoples than by diplomatic negotiations which are not based on a gen- 
eral popular sentiment. 

"If one considers that the peace movement in America is much more gen- 
eral than elsewhere and that it rests on a religious foundation or on a community 
of interests and enviable characteristics, one can appreciate this new proof of a 
virile progress which is brought to us from the other side of the ocean; it gives 
new life to our hopes and redoubles our efforts." 



APPENDIX IV 113 

Mr. Root and his associates attach the highest importance to the establish- 
ment and successful operation of the American Institute of International Law 
and of its affiliated societies in each of the American countries. 

The Endowment now grants a subvention to the older Institute founded 
in Europe. This subvention is designed to cover the traveling expenses of the 
members of the Institute, the expenditures of the commission and the pub- 
lication of their work. The new Institute can count upon receiving financial 
aid from the Endowment, as soon as the National Societies are thoroughly or- 
ganized, and upon being placed on an equality in this regard with the older 
Institute. 

The American Journal of International Law which, with some slight modi- 
fication, might become the organ of the American Institute, receives now an 
annual subvention from the Endowment. 

Another institution in which the Division of International Law is greatly 
interested and which it will subvention and maintain with much pleasure is the 
Academy of International Law which it is proposed to establish at The Hague. 

The proposal was made at the second Hague Peace Conference to create 
an Academy of International Law. No action was then taken, but the idea has 
commended itself to publicists of many nationalities. A committee of Dutch 
publicists, under the presidency of Mr. Asser, whose recent death we all deplore, 
suggested that such an academy be created and installed in the Peace Palace at 
The Hague. 

Mr. Asser's proposal contemplates systematic instruction during the sum- 
mer months in international law and cognate subjects by a specially constituted 
and changing faculty, to be chosen from publicists of different countries. 
Courses of lectures on important and timely subjects would be given by pub- 
licists who, in addition to long theoretical training, have had large experience 
in the practice of international law. 

Mr. Asser also proposed that the governments should be interested in the 
Academy and invited through diplomatic channels to designate appropriate 
officials of various branches of the governmental service to attend the Academy. 

The Institution would be unique in its summer sessions, unique in its small 
and changing faculty, and unique in its student body, drawn from every country. 

The Academy would thus advance the work of the Endowment, but it 
would not be a direct agency of the Endowment nor under its control. 

Mr. Root directed me to submit to your consideration the project of this 
Academy and ask the support of all the Latin American republics that they 
may designate one or more of their citizens to attend the lectures and follow the 
course of instruction at the Academy. 

A matter to which I desire to call your present attention is the establish- 
ment of national committees to determine what subjects are to be embodied in 
the programme of the next Peace Conference at The Hague ; it will be the duty 



114 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

of these national committees to get into touch with the national committees 
organized in the various other American countries. 

It is common knowledge that the second Peace Conference of 1907 recom- 
mended the meeting of the third Conference to be held at a period approxi- 
mately equal to that which had elapsed between the first and second Con- 
ferences, that is to say, eight years, so that, if the recommendation is carried 
out, we may expect the third Conference to meet approximately in 191 5. It 
was further provided in the recommendation that about two years before the 
probable meeting of the Conference an international preparatory committee 
should be constituted by common accord among the powers. 

It is evident that the different countries which will be invited to The Hague 
should consider all these important matters before the constitution of the inter- 
national preparatory committee, and it seems advisable — indeed necessary — 
that each government should appoint a committee to consider these matters in 
detail in order that the governments should be able to make their recommenda- 
tions in the fulness of knowledge. 

It is not expected that the American States should present a series of 
joint projects to the Conference, or joint recommendations, but it would greatly 
facilitate matters if the different governments should communicate their views 
so as to reach an agreement upon the subjects which in their opinion should be 
presented and which'might form the subject of international agreements. 

The five subjects which I am directed to lay before you and to solicit your 
cooperation therein are therefore, as follows : 

The formation in each country of a National Society of International Law 
to be affiliated with the American Institute of International Law; 

The establishment in each country of a National Society for International 
Conciliation to be affiliated with the parent Association for International Con- 
ciliation at Paris; 

The appointment of National Committees for the consideration of con- 
tributions to the programme of the next Hague Conference, and for making 
arrangements for the inter-communication of such Committees among all Ameri- 
can countries; 

An educational exchange between the South American Universities and 
those of the United States, and international visits of representative men; 

The participation of the American governments in the proposed Academy 
of International Law at The Hague, by providing for the sending on the part 
of each government of one or more representative students to that Academy. 

Allow me to employ a final quotation from Mr. Root's instructions to me: 

"The Trustees of the Endowment are fully aware that progress in the work 
which they have undertaken must necessarily be slow and that its most substantial 
results must be far in the future. We are dealing with aptitudes and impulses 
firmly established in human nature through the development of thousands of 



APPENDIX IV 115 

years, and the utmost that any one generation can hope to do is to promote the 
gradual change of standards of conduct. All estimates of such a work and its 
results must be in terms not of individual human life, but in terms of the long 
life of nations. Inconspicuous as are the immediate results, however, there can 
be no nobler object of human effort than to exercise an influence upon the ten- 
dencies of the race, so that it shall move, however slowly, in the direction of 
civilization and humanity and away from senseless brutality. It is to participate 
with us in this noble, though inconspicuous, work that we ask you to invite our 
friends in South America with the most unreserved and sincere assurances of 
our high consideration and warm regard." 

Excellencies, Ladies and Gentlemen: Before concluding I wish to express 
again to you my most sincere thanks for the great honor which has been done me, 
and to testify my profound gratitude for your warm and sympathetic welcome. 

Remarks of Sefior Emilio Barbaroux, Minister of Foreign Affairs, 

At a Dinner Given by Him for Mr. Bacon, at the Uruguay Ceub, 
Montevideo, October si, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Mr. Bacon: 

In your address last night you summarized the purposes of your mission, 
telling us that where there is a nation there is also a law of nations, and that 
in all cases of misunderstanding between nations, conciliation should be preferred 
to arbitration, and arbitration to war. 

Although facts from their very nature show that the thought of suppressing 
appeals to arms is as yet in the realm of idealism, nevertheless, every earnest 
effort directed to this end should deserve our approval and our sympathy; and 
they have already been accorded you by the representative men of our intellectual 
world. In tendering you, then, tonight, on behalf of the Government, this fare- 
well dinner, as a token of friendship, my earnest prayer is that the mission en- 
trusted to you by the eminent Mr. Root may in the near future bear the fruit 
which this great movement of international brotherhood merits. 

I beg you, ladies and gentlemen, to join me in this prayer, and to express at 
the same time our heartiest wishes for the happiness of Mr. Bacon, of his 
charming family and of the friends who accompany him. 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Excellencies, Ladies, Gentlemen, Mr. Minister: 

I thank you most cordially for your very kind words addressed to my humble 
self, for those touching my beloved land and for the honor of this brilliant 
gathering. I desire also to repeat my profound thanks for the very hearty wel- 
come given me by you, Mr. Minister, and by your fellow-citizens, extended with 



116 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

the proverbial affability and hospitality of the courtly Spanish race, which has 
been preserved so pure in this lovely Uruguayan land. 

We Americans of the North are proud of our progressive sisters of the 
South. Among these the noble and charming Republic of Uruguay takes a promi- 
nent place, due not only to the culture of her people, the virility and strength of 
the race, but also to the progress she has achieved. We entertain the very best 
wishes for your prosperity. Profoundly grateful that the relations of the past 
redound to the credit of our common continent and that our present relations are 
harmonious, may we not hope that these good relations will not only be per- 
petuated, but strengthened in the future, and that with each added year our rela- 
tions will become more intimate, more confidential, in a word, more fraternal. 

The noble words spoken by Mr. Root in 1906 at the Pan-American Con- 
ference represent the sentiments and the ideals of the people of the United 
States as truthfully and as forcefully today as when they were spoken seven 
years ago. I like to think of this memorable declaration as the "Root Doc- 
trine" — and I am proud to be considered worthy to speak of it as a humble 
apostle. 

The Trustees of the Carnegie Endowment believe that the ideals of the great 
thinkers can be advanced more quickly to the benefit of the world by uniting their 
efforts in certain well-defined, practical activities. 

If you join us in this work of intellectual union and concord, if the Latin 
American countries and the United States unite in a constant effort for the im- 
provement of the relations between peoples, if all the countries of this hemi- 
sphere work in unison toward a common ideal, there will then be created a power- 
ful instrument for good which can not fail to benefit our continent, the world, 
and humanity. 

Once again, Excellency, I thank you from my heart. Although much to my 
regret my stay among you must be short, yet the progress of your country and 
the warmth of your welcome have made an impression that will never be effaced. 
Before leaving this beautiful city, permit me to say that I take with me feelings 
of personal affection for you and that I should like my farewell to be not "good- 
bye," but "till we meet again." 

I drink to the health of the President of the Republic of Uruguay. 



APPENDIX V 
Chile 



Reception at the University of Chile 

Remarks of the Rector of the University, Dr. Domingo Amunategui Solar in 

Conferring a Diploma upon Mr. Bacon, 

Santiago, October 25, 191 3 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

The University of Chile is gratified to greet the Hon. Mr. Bacon and to 
welcome him as an honorary member of its Faculty of Law and Political Science. 

I present you, Sir, this diploma with the hope that it will serve as a link of 
friendship with the university to which you belong, be a token of recognition for 
your personal attainments, and attest our great respect for the Carnegie Endow- 
ment you so worthily represent. 

Address of Dr. Luis Barros Borgono, Dean of the Faculty of Filosofia y 1 
Humanidades, University of Chile, 

Santiago, October 25, 191 3 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Ladies and Gentlemen: 

It is a pleasure to me to perform the task assigned me by the Board of Public 
Instruction of welcoming, on behalf of the University of Chile, the illustrious 
American statesman, Mr. Robert Bacon, formerly Secretary of State of the great 
Republic of the North and its Ambassador to France, and now a prominent mem- 
ber of the University of Harvard, distinguished emissary of the policy of inter- 
national conciliation, apostle of peace and powerful promoter of the happiness 
and welfare of mankind. 

I am convinced that of all his honors — and they are many — and of all the 
high offices he has held, none is more highly prized by the clear and forceful 
mind of Mr. Bacon, and none will contribute to shed greater glory on his brilliant 
personality than the mission which he is now undertaking on behalf of the insti- 
tution which is destined to dispense still greater benefits among civilized peoples, 
and to which the land of Carnegie can point with legitimate pride as the greatest 
work conceived in any age to the greater glory of civilization. 

The ideal of international solidarity, the dream of philosophers and poets is 
today receiving devout attention from the statesmen of the greatest nations. 

The idea of the foundation of peace societies, advocated for the first time in 
1814 through the religious spirit of the Quakers of America, finds fertile 
soil in that great centre of the agitation of ideas, France, in 1848. 



118 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

In the midst of that romantic wave of universal regeneration, in the midst of 
all those economic and social systems convulsed by the new spirit, Paris, with 
faith in the principles of general solidarity, gives the world the first real inter- 
national peace congress. 

It is the age when Cobden, apostle of commercial freedom, is shaking the 
whole economic system of England with his powerful genius, harmonizing the 
interests of his country with the great interests of humanity. 

It is the time when the prophetic spirit of Victor Hugo foresees a humanity 
governed only by the laws of equity and justice. 

The poet foretells, as it were in a vision, the task to which Mr. Carnegie, 
this great toiler for humanity, consecrates today his titantic efforts. 

"The day will come," said Victor Hugo in one of his most inspired passages, 
"when there will be no other field of battle than the markets open to commerce, 
to intelligence and to ideas. The day will come when the august arbitration of 
a great sovereign senate will be to Europe what Parliament is to England, the 
Diet to Germany, and the Legislative Assembly to France." 

The second half of the nineteenth century is marked by the Peace Leagues 
of Paris and Geneva. These have in turn by their propaganda brought into being 
hundreds of general and local societies through the work of the International 
Bureau of Berne, the Institute of International Law and the numerous peace 
associations which under the glorious standards of Lemonier, Passy, Simon and 
d'Estournelles de Constant today march triumphant toward the goal set up by 
their heroic efforts. 

The great capitals of the world resound year by year with the voices of the 
most representative men of all nations who step by step are hastening the day of 
true and lasting understanding among nations. 

Under the chairmanship of Jules Simon there met for the first time in Paris 
in 1889 members of the English, Spanish, Belgian, German, French, Italian, 
Danish, Greek and Hungarian Parliaments. 

This was not, as in the peace congresses, an assembly of men inspired with 
the lofty ideal of universal peace, but devoid of all authority; rather was it the 
union of statesmen, of active parliamentarians, solemnly binding themselves to 
labor in their respective congresses for the realization of the programme of peace 
and arbitration. 

Year after year this Conference has assembled, with growing success in 
Paris, London, Rome, Berne, at The Hague, in Budapest, Brussels, Milan, Mon- 
aco and Lucerne; and by the end of the last century this interparliamentary 
union had on its roll fifteen hundred members, committed to the triumph of the 
noblest cause under which men may range themselves : "Justitia e Pace" — by 
Justice and by Peace. 

The visit of the Scandinavian members of Parliament to France and the 
return visit of the French statesmen mark a period of real understanding between 
these nations. 



APPENDIX V 119 

The cause of peace later received its greatest impetus on the occasion of the 
visit of the French parliamentarians to London and the return of this visit by 
the English statesmen, thus bringing about an agreement of great significance 
between these two nations which has made possible the entente cordiale on which 
rests today the peace of the world. 

The visit of Mr. Root, still fresh in the memory of the American nation 
and of our own people, marked for us a definite era in our international relations ; 
it opened the furrow, the seed was sown, whence has sprung the grain to nourish 
the life of mutual understanding and international solidarity between the great 
Republic of the North and the different States of Latin America. 

The crowning effort, however, of the present age in the cause of peace is 
The Hague Conference. 

The advent of this peaceful revolution has left to the coming century the 
fruitful task of maintaining peace as the aim of the foreign policy of every 
civilized nation. 

Two moral results of transcendental importance to the western nations have 
been derived from that august assembly. 

The first consists in the express manifestation of the world longing for 
peace among all civilized peoples. 

The second is the material and moral possibility, every day becoming 
greater, of resorting to arbitration in every difference. If it has not been possible 
to suppress warfare entirely, it has at least been possible to lessen the possibilities 
thereof, while its horrors have been in part mitigated. 

The work achieved unquestionably constitutes a great victory for the cause 
of right; it proves that the love for justice pervades the atmosphere of interna- 
tional relations, and justifies the belief that the day of caprice and of violation 
is over, and that law, equity and the interests of humanity and civilization are 
every day more and more respected throughout the world. 

The Conference was unable to give form to the fundamental idea proposed of 
limiting armaments ; but it did succeed in creating a juridical court of arbitration. 

The Institution was born ; to-day it has its president, its members, its palace, 
its journal and its own budget. 

The corporation is officially recognized as a tribunal by every civilized state. 

The new law is solemnly recognized and established, and the substitution 
of judicial settlement for appeals to force is likewise acknowledged. 

Through the generosity of Mr. Carnegie this Tribunal has been housed in 
a palace worthy of its lofty mission. 

"In this place," has said Mr. Carnegie, "will meet the most sacred conclave 
that has ever honored humanity in any epoch of history." 

The temple, as its founder has called it, has just been solemnly inaugurated, 
the ceremony having taken place on the 28th of August, 1913, in the presence 
of the Queen of Holland, all the members of the Government and the envoys 
of all the powers represented at The Hague Conference. 



120 MR. BACON S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

This imposing ceremony, unique of its kind, had distinctive characteristics. 
It was simple, austere, shorn of all military display; only the chimes from the 
Palace of Peace proclaimed to the world that the clock had started on that journey 
which should end only when the hour of eternal peace has struck. In these 
words did the Minister of Foreign Affairs of Holland express himself, not, 
however, without adding his fear that that day was still distant. 

The other address of that memorable occasion was delivered by Mr. van 
Karnebeek, President of the Board of Directors of the Carnegie Foundation 
for the Peace Palace. 

The work entrusted to The Hague Conference although of very great 
significance, does not meet the requirements of the Carnegie Endowment pro- 
gram, which embraces vaster and more diversified projects. 

As a cardinal principle, the Endowment undertakes to sustain various 
societies whose purpose is to effect in concrete form a better understanding 
between nations, to make the mutual knowledge of friendly peoples more real 
and to multiply the ties of friendship and concord between the great countries 
of the world. 

In the furtherance of these ends, it has a Division of Intercourse and Educa- 
tion comprising the exchange of professors, students and literary works; it 
maintains a Division of Economics and History, and devotes particular attention 
to its Division of International Law and the special Academy of this branch of 
human knowledge established at The Hague under the auspices of the powers 
signatory to the Conference. 

These various activities of the beautiful and comprehensive program of 
the Carnegie Endowment are of the greatest importance to all civilized nations, 
and yet they remain unknown and untouched by the Latin American countries, 
notwithstanding the benefits that would accrue to them therefrom. 

To make known this praiseworthy work, to stimulate public opinion in 
these countries and to secure the cooperation of their public men in favor of 
this noble crusade, is the purpose of this visit to us which the people of Chile 
regard as an event of far-reaching importance. 

But if certain of the objects of the Carnegie Endowment call for the sympa- 
thetic support of governments, there are, on the other hand, many others which 
demand the special cooperation of men of science, of professors and specialists 
in international law and of teachers of history and economics. 

It is for this reason that our University has associated the whole of its 
personnel with this undertaking, and it is convinced that so soon as the members 
realize the different aims of the mission they will earnestly cooperate to the 
fulfilment of these purposes, each collaborating in his own particular sphere. 
And in doing so they will bring the work within the scope of international poli- 
tics, the study of which has been traditional in this Republic. 

Chile has the honor of occupying the fourth place among the countries that 
have resorted to arbitration during the nineteenth century. Statistics show that 



APPENDIX V 121 

Great Britain is first with 86 arbitration treaties, the United States of America 
second with 66, France third with 38, and, then, Chile with 28 to her credit. 

But the greatest work in this direction is that accomplished by Chile and 
the Argentine Republic in signing the treaty of May 28, 1902, whereby they 
limited their armaments, a purpose that so far The Hague Conference has striven 
in vain to effect. 

And this fact has not passed unperceived. In his notable address in favor 
of arbitration to the students of the University of Saint Andrews, Mr. Carnegie 
pointed to this treaty as one of the most advanced in realizing the principles of 
the Endowment's program. 

"The greatest step taken in this direction," says Mr. Carnegie, "is to be 
found in the treaties celebrated between Denmark and Holland, and between 
Chile and the Argentine Republic whereby these countries agreed to submit all 
differences of any nature whatsoever to arbitration." 

It has been held that to America belonged, in the nineteenth century, the 
initiative of arbitration, and that the nations of this continent have maintained 
and widened the scope of this judicial proceeding, even though they have not 
yet formulated a general definite program. 

And it is not, indeed, a difficult matter to prove that none of these nations 
has more frequently appealed to and used this peaceful means of adjusting 
differences with other nations than has Chile. In one of her oldest treaties, cele- 
brated sixty years ago, the Government of Chile expressly declared that it set 
forth "with pleasure the idea of arbitration, which it has always regarded as the 
only just, legal and logical means of settling every international difference." 

The mission of peace and judicial settlement will accordingly find a fruitful 
field in our country; and if it has occasionally been found necessary to resort to 
the stern necessity of war in defense of what the country has deemed its rights, 
this step has only been taken after every recourse to conciliation and arbitration 
had been exhausted. 

The arduousness of earning a livelihood which the peculiar topographical 
conditions have imposed upon the Chilian people, the habits of order and the 
exercise of free democratic institutions which has characterized her national life, 
her social organization and the prosperity of her agriculture and commerce, in 
a word everything which calls for the great blessings of peace, has led the people 
of Chile to rest their prosperity, their development and their welfare solely on 
peace. 

This Republic must then be an enthusiastic and active cooperator in the 
work of general conciliation and political solidarity espoused by the Carnegie 
Endowment. 

From the Temple of Peace there peals forth the clear and triumphal note of 
the new law when judicial proceedings will supplant appeals to arms and violence. 

What has already been done augurs well for the not distant triumph of these 
principles of justice and universal peace. 



122 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The word of Mr. Bacon, now our guest, is doubly significant, first by virtue 
of his great learning and acknowledged mastery of public affairs, coupled with 
long experience, and, secondly, by reason of the exalted and distinguished repre- 
sentation with which he is invested. His eloquence will paint for us the picture 
of the noble and beneficent work he has done so far, it will tell us of his hopes and 
aims for the future, and so better fit us for the task of associating the different 
elements that will be needed to place the work of the Carnegie Endowment on a 
firm foundation in our country. 

Address of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Excellencies, Mr. Rector, Mr. Dean, Ladies, Gentlemen: 

Pray pardon me if I make bold to address you in your beautiful language 
whose rhythm attracts me irresistibly but which, to my deep regret, I speak but 
haltingly. 

I am profoundly touched by the thought of being present in this room, a 
veritable temple of science and letters, under the auspices of your most dis- 
tinguished intellectual leaders. 

Among the many duties which - have left pleasant memories from the moment 
I first set foot in this hospitable and beautiful land, one of the highest and 
pleasantest is to thank the University of Chile for the great honor done me in 
admitting me to honorary membership in its Faculty of Law and Political 
Science. 

I well know the glorious traditions which, in the intellectual order, since 
the middle of the last century, have made the University of Chile one of the 
greatest centres of learning of South America. On this occasion I shall confine 
myself, however, to referring to only two of its many illustrious rectors whose 
names the world has inscribed on its roll of eminent scholars : Bello, inter- 
nationalist, codifier, and litterateur, and Domeyko, naturalist. 

I can fully appreciate, therefore, the distinction done me by the University 
of Chile and by its Rector, and I shall prize it as long as I live. 

In my own name, and in that of the eminent statesman whose mission I 
bear, Senator Elihu Root, I thank you with all my heart for your welcome and 
for the flattering words addressed to my humble self and so little deserved. 

I also want to testify my gratitude for the reception which has been 
accorded me with the affability and generous hospitality so proverbial of the 
courtly Spanish race. 

My visit to these fascinating South American countries has been most gratify- 
ing. There have filed past before my wondering eyes divine panoramas of 
this marvelous continent, fertile valleys, mighty rivers, majestic forests, fantastic 
cordilleras, placid lakes of crystal waters, rushing torrents which keep babbling 
the glorious hymn of liberty. All this has increased my respect and admiration 



APPENDIX V 123 

for the new people and the new races which will mark fresh eras for the 
human race in the great future in store for America. 

The impression I received when I arrived yesterday in your country will 
never be effaced from my memory. The hearts of the people of Chile should 
swell with legitimate pride when they think of their glorious country. The 
fascination of your mountains whose glow, whose balm and harmonies are the 
soul of this land, would bewilder any spectator. The poet Wordsworth has 
said that the voice of freedom is best heard in the mountains and in the sea. 
If this is so, then Chile is the land where the sweet voice of freedom will ring 
in clearest tones. 

I come charged with a message of good-will from your devoted friend, Mr. 
Elihu Root, at whose request, added to my own desire, I have the honor to appear 
before you. I wish I could say to you all that he would say were he here in 
person to address you and to greet you as an old friend. The expressions may 
differ, perhaps, but I assure you the spirit which animates them is entirely the 
same. 

I invite you then, gentlemen, to co-operate in the establishment of interna- 
tional institutions which will be, we hope, centres of good-will which will 
develop and popularize just and progressive principles of international law and 
which will in various ways, directly and indirectly, by an exchange of thought 
and exchange of views and the happy combination of effort, result in strengthen- 
ing the bonds of friendship which a common past, common institutions and a 
common goal suggest and require. 

History and nature have inspired and increased a deep feeling of solidarity, 
not only between the countries of Latin-America, but also between the republics 
of the South and the United States. It behooves us to maintain and strengthen 
this solidarity which, by reason of its twofold origin, unites inseparably the 
nations of the new continent in the past, in the present and in the future. 

One need only glance at the political history of the new world to see the 
constant interest the United States has taken in the struggles of the Latin- 
American nations, first to free themselves from the mother country, and then 
to defend the independence they had won against all attempts at conquest on 
the part of European nations. Moreover, we might briefly recall that after the 
emancipation, the United States furnished the Latin states with the forms and 
basic principles of their political institutions, particularly of their republican and 
democratic government, at a time when the ancient political institutions of 
Europe were far from responding to the ideas of liberty and to the social con- 
ditions of the two Americas. 

All this glorious past in the history of the new world should strengthen, 
day by day, the bonds of solidarity which have united the American nations 
since the beginning of their political life. 

Nature has added to the work of history. The geographical situation of the 
states of the new world has brought into being a series of problems common 



124 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

to all the states of the continent, thereby creating among them new ties of 
union ! Thanks to the progress of civilization and the perfection of means of 
communication, we in America have come to see the imperious necessity of 
solving in a uniform manner, the problems arising out of situations and con- 
ditions peculiar to the new continent. 

Anticipating Europe in a way, whose great powers meet in conference only 
at the conclusion of wars, to determine the conditions of peace, all the American 
states have met together in pacific conferences in order to discuss questions 
common to their continent — hence the name and origin of the Pan-American 
Conferences. These conferences have borne abundant fruit — a number of prob- 
lems of interest to America have been studied ; important treaties have been 
signed with a view of developing the social and intellectual life of the new 
world ; and, finally, the representatives of the several American states have 
learned to know each other better and have come to appreciate how many and 
how strong are the ties which bind the American nations together. 

The sentiments of solidarity and fraternity which unite the countries of the 
new world in a community of interests should create a work of union and 
concord. The way is already open; numerous and fruitful results have been 
obtained ; the time has come, therefore, to establish in ever increasing measure, 
good understanding and harmony. Above all, it is necessary to correct a 
misunderstanding by the people of the South of the political purposes of the 
United States. As Mr. Root solemnly declared when he was among you, the 
United States desires above all that peace and prosperity reign in Latin-America, 
in order to strengthen and tighten the bonds of friendship and of brotherhood, 
which should unite all the American peoples. 

I have the honor to address you, not merely on my own account, but on 
behalf of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, of which Senator 
Root is the President, and to invite you in his name and on behalf of its Trustees, 
to cooperate with it in such ways as you may consider possible and advisable. 

In other words, the wish of Mr. Root is to enlist as fully as possible the 
sympathetic interest of the leaders of thought in South America in the various 
enterprises for the improvement of international relations, and to bring about a 
practical cooperation in that work. 

The respect and friendship which the Trustees of the Endowment entertain 
for the peoples of Latin-America and for the distinguished Latin-Americans with 
whom many of the Trustees have most agreeable relations of personal friend- 
ship, lead us to hope that the work of the Endowment may have such active 
and useful cooperation in South America as it has already secured in Europe. 

Responding to the kind invitation of the Honorable Dean of the Faculty, 
permit me to explain briefly the work of the Endowment, and to outline certain 
practical projects in which Mr. Root and his associates desire your hearty 
cooperation. 



APPENDIX V 125 

I regret that to-day I find myself confined to details somewhat dry, and, I 
fear, rather uninteresting, at a moment when, under the charm, and inspiration 
of your eloquent phrases and of your warm welcome, in this atmosphere of 
freedom, in this land of heroes, I would prefer to dwell upon our ideals, our 
hopes and the visions dreamed by the great men of our countries. For I am 
proud to share your optimism, sir, and I have an abiding conviction that, despite 
the clouds gathered by opposition and unbelief, we are at the beginning of a 
great movement of progress in the evolution of the freedom of the world, and 
that from afar we may see the dawning of a brighter, purer day. 

The principles, the philosophy of the last century are no longer sufficient 
to our needs. We must have new rules of political economy, new principles of 
international law. 

To carry forward the work of the Endowment it has been organized into 
three divisions : 

The Division of Intercourse and Education; 

The Division of Economics and History; 

The Division of International Law. 

To aid in the work of the first division, Dr. Butler, its director, has created 
an Advisory Council of representative European statesmen and publicists, with 
which has been associated a body of correspondents. 

We have asked ourselves whether it would be agreeable to leaders of thought 
in Latin-America to create an organization somewhat similar to the General 
Advisory Council which has already been formed in Europe. 

The Division has inaugurated an exchange of visits of representative men 
and an educational exchange with Japan, and I hope to be able to obtain informa- 
tion and advice in South America which will enable us to begin in the very 
near future a mutual exchange of professors and students from Latin- America. 

I am instructed to suggest that the exchange begin at once by the annual 
visit of two eminent South American scholars or publicists to the United States 
and two North Americans to South America. Each of these men would divide 
his time between two universities in the country visited. 

One of the activities to which this division attaches much importance has 
to do with the organization of Associations for International Conciliation through- 
out the world. 

The parent association was formed by Baron d'Estournelles de Constant 
in Paris some years ago. Branches have been established already in the United 
States, Germany and England, and others are in the course of formation. 

I am directed to invite the cooperation of interested persons in the countries 
which I have the honor of visiting, in the organization of branches of International 
Conciliation to be affiliated with the parent branch at Paris. These associations, 
while local in origin, have nevertheless an international mission, and tend to 
create by their meetings and the excellent pamphlets which they regularly issue, 
a friendly feeling towards the peoples of foreign countries. 



126 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

"The Association for International Conciliation," says Baron d'Estournelles 
de Constant, "is not a sentimental, humanitarian organization. It is a practical, 
patriotic advance formed in the national interest of each country, particularly in 
young countries which must consecrate all their forces and resources to their 
own development. 

"Conciliation is the modern, indispensable complement of economic effort in 
every civilized country. To develop the national prosperity by the promotion of 
good international relations; such is our object summed up in our motto: 
Pro Patria Per Orbis Concordiam." 

Undertake arbitration rather than war ; but prefer always conciliation to 
arbitration. Our idea, our rule of life is this : 

"War rather than slavery. 

"Arbitration rather than war. 

"Conciliation rather than arbitration. 

"Arbitration cures ; conciliation prevents. 

"Conciliation substitutes fruitful cooperation for sterile antagonism." 

The Endowment will provide for the expenses incident to the organization 
of these associations. 

Let me now describe the work of the Division of Economics and History. 

The work of this division is "to promote researches into and a profound, 
scientific study of the causes of war, and of the practical methods to prevent 
and avoid it." 

A conference was arranged at Berne in Switzerland two years ago, to which 
distinguished economists and publicists, drawn largely from Europe, were 
invited to consider the subjects that could properly and profitably be studied, and 
to draft the tentative program for the division. 

A large number of topics have already been assigned to specialists selected 
from the countries to which their work relates; some of the studies have been 
completed, and, in the course of a few years, the Endowment will have published 
a series of remarkable monographs, covering all phases of the elaborate program, 
which will, it is believed — to quote the language of Mr. Root — "be useful to 
mankind." 

Professor Kinley, an old and sincere friend of Latin America, who repre- 
sented the United States at the Fourth Pan-American Conference held in Buenos 
Aires, has been appointed a member of the Committee of Research, and he will 
devote himself more especially to the problems in which Latin America is inter- 
ested ; and, in the course of the coming year, he will visit Latin America to confer 
with leaders of opinion to obtain their advice; and, if possible, to gain their 
cooperation, both in suggesting and in executing the projects which they may 
recommend. 

The third division of the Endowment is the Division of International Law. 

This division, like the other divisions, found it necessary to create a special 
organization and to have a body of advisers. 



APPENDIX V 127 

The Institute of International Law consists, it is hardly necessary to state, 
of the leading authorities of all nations, and the Endowment requested the Insti- 
tute to act as advisor to the Division of International Law. 

The Institute accepted the invitation and selected a committee which has 
acted as advisor to the Director. 

The Division has under way several important works. The first is a collec- 
tion and publication of all general and special treaties of arbitration, and, in 
regard to the treaties of the nineteenth century especially, the Endowment would 
be very grateful to the publicists of Latin America if they would supply informa- 
tion on certain questions of this nature, which may perhaps be known only to 
them ; and the Trustees would regard it as a very great favor if the governments 
of Latin America would supply copies of such treaties, as it is very difficult to 
obtain at all times accurate and reliable texts. All known instances of interna- 
tional arbitration will be collected and published with notes. 

The Institute of International Law, which now acts as advisor for the Divi- 
sion of International Law, was founded in Europe in 1873; but, although the 
Institute represents "the universal juridical conscience", many jurisconsults 
have felt the need of an institution which should represent the juridical con- 
science of America, study the problems which concern particularly the New 
World, and examine from the American point of view general matters relating 
to the Law of Nations. 

As you are well aware, an American Institute of International Law was 
founded a year ago by your distinguished publicist and internationalist, Dr. 
Alejandro Alvarez, and by Dr. James Brown Scott, Director of the Division of 
International Law of the Endowment. This Institute contemplates the formation 
of National Societies of International Law in all American countries, to be 
affiliated with it, and work in studying American problems, in making known 
their principles and in contributing to a better understanding among nations. 

Lest I should seem to state in exaggerated language the aims and purposes 
of the American Institute of International Law, of which Mr. Elihu Root is 
Honorary President, let me quote a passage from a distinguished Dutch scholar 
and professor of international law, who may be supposed to treat the subject 
with more detachment. 

After having spoken of the great example America has given to the world 
in undertaking the codification of international law, he says : 

"The second example is given to us by an institute essentially scientific but 
scarcely inferior in moral value. The gradual drawing together of the North 
and South has created a new instrument of progress. The projects for a Pan- 
American union, started long ago without ever yielding results, have at last 
borne fruit in the peaceful field of study, thanks to the talent and perseverance 
of two illustrious men, one from the northern, the other from the southern half 
of the hemisphere. During the past year Mr. James Brown Scott, the noted 
jurisconsult of the United States, and Senor Alejandro Alvarez, former pro- 



128 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

fessor and Counselor in the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Chile, who in 1912, 
at Rio, exercised a most beneficial influence upon the great plan for codification, 
met at Washington, and founded in October, 1912, the American Institute of 
International Law. This Institute has for its objects: 

( 1 ) To aid in the development of international law ; 

(2) To strengthen the common sentiment of international justice ; 

(3) To procure a general acceptance of peaceful procedure in the settlement 
of international disputes between the American States. This luminous idea 
sprung from the conviction that it is better to spread conceptions of right and 
justice by a slow but constant appeal to the minds and hearts of peoples, than 
by diplomatic negotiations which are not based on a general popular sentiment." 

Mr. Root and his associates attach the highest importance to the establish- 
ment and successful operation of the American Institute of International Law, 
and of its affiliated societies in each of the American countries. 

The Endowment now grants a subvention to the older Institute, founded in 
Europe. This subvention is designed to cover the traveling expenses of the 
members of the Institute, the expenditures of the commission and the publication 
of their works. The new Institute can count upon receiving financial aid from 
the Endowment, as soon as the National Societies are thoroughly organized, and 
upon being placed on an equality in this regard with the older Institute. 

The American Journal of International Law which, with some slight modi- 
fication, might become the organ of the American Institute, receives now an 
annual subvention from the Endowment. 

Another institution in which the Division of International Law is greatly 
interested and which it will subvention and maintain with much pleasure, is the 
Academy of International Law which it is proposed to establish at The Hague. 

The proposal to create an Academy of International Law was made at the 
second Hague Peace Conference. No action was then taken, but the idea was 
commended itself to publicists of many nationalities. A committee of Dutch 
publicists, under the presidency of Mr. Asser, whose recent death we all deplore, 
suggested that such an academy be created and installed in the Peace Palace at 
The Hague. 

Mr. Asser's proposal contemplates systematic instruction during the summer 
months in international law and cognate subjects, by a specially constituted and 
changing faculty, to be chosen from publicists of different countries. Courses 
of lectures on important and timely subjects would be given by publicists who, in 
addition to long theoretical training, have had large experience in the practice 
of international law. 

Mr. Asser also proposed that the governments should be interested in the 
Academy, and invited through diplomatic channels to designate appropriate 
officials of various branches of the governmental service to attend the Academy. 

The Institute would be unique in its summer sessions, unique in its small 
and changing faculty, and unique in its student body, drawn from every country. 



APPENDIX V 129 

The Endowment will pay the expenses of the Academy, but it will not be a 
direct agency of the Endowment nor under its control. 

Mr. Root directed me to submit to your consideration the project of this 
Academy, and ask the support of all the Latin- American republics ; that they 
designate one or more of their citizens to attend the lectures and follow the 
course of instruction at the Academy. 

You will observe that Mr. Root and the Carnegie Endowment attach great 
importance to the scientific development of international law, and they would be 
greatly pleased to see the establishment of an international court of justice which 
is not temporary for isolated cases, but permanent for all cases. You are well 
acquainted with the maxim "inter arma silent leges", but the contrary assertion is 
also true: "inter leges silent arma". History shows us that this is true with 
reference to individuals, and it may be observed that it is also applicable to 
nations. 

Another matter to which I desire to call your present attention is the estab- 
lishment of national committees to determine what subjects are to be embodied 
in the program of the next Peace Conference at The Hague ; it will be the duty 
of these national committees to get into touch with the national committees 
organized in the various other American countries. 

It is common knowledge that the second Peace Conference of 1907 recom- 
mended the meeting of a third Conference, to be held at a period approximately 
equal to that which elapsed between the first and second Conferences, that is to 
say, eight years, so that, if the recommendation is carried out, we may expect 
the third Conference to meet approximately in 1915. It was further provided 
in the recommendation that about two years before the probable meeting of the 
Conference an international preparatory committee should be constituted by com- 
mon accord among the powers. 

It is evident that the different countries which will be invited to The Hague 
should consider all these important matters before the constitution of the inter- 
national preparatory committee ; and it seems advisable — indeed, necessary — that 
each government should appoint a committee to consider these matters in detail 
in order that the governments shall be able to make their recommendations in 
the fullness of knowledge. 

It is not expected that the American states shall present a series of joint 
projects to the Conference, or joint recommendations; but it would greatly 
facilitate matters if the different governments should communicate their views 
so as to reach an agreement upon the subjects which in their opinion should be 
presented, and which might form the subject of international agreements. 

The five subjects which I am directed to lay before you and to solicit the 
cooperation therein which you, Mr. Dean, so generously have offered to us, are 
thus, as follows : 

The formation in each country of a National Society of International Law, 
to be affiliated with the American Institute of International Law; 



130 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The establishment in each country of a National Society for International 
Conciliation to be affiliated with the parent Association for International Con- 
ciliation at Paris ; 

The appointment of National Committees for the consideration of contribu- 
tions to the program of the next Hague Conference, and for making arrange- 
ments for the inter-communication of such Committees among all American 
countries ; 

An educational exchange between the South American Universities and 
those of the United States, and international visits of representative men ; 

The participation of the American governments in the proposed Academy 
of International Law at The Hague, by providing for the sending by each gov- 
ernment of one or more representative students to that Academy. 

Allow me to quote the final words of Mr. Root's instructions to me : 
"The Trustees of the Endowment are fully aware that progress in the work 
which they have undertaken must necessarily be slow, and that its most substan- 
tial results must be far in the future. We are dealing with aptitudes and impulses 
firmly established in human nature through the development of thousands of 
years, and the utmost that any one generation can hope to do is to promote the 
gradual change of standards of conduct. All estimates of such a work and its 
results must be in terms not of individual human life, but in terms of the long 
life of nations. Inconspicuous as are the immediate results, however, there can 
be no nobler object of human effort than to exercise an influence upon the tenden- 
cies of the race, so that it shall move, however slowly, in the direction of 
civilization and humanity and away from senseless brutality. It is to participate 
with us in this noble, though inconspicuous work, that we ask you to invite our 
friends in South America, with the most unreserved and sincere assurances of 
our high consideration and warm regards." 

Excellencies, Ladies and Gentlemen : Before concluding, I wish to express 
again to you my most sincere thanks for the great honor which has been done 
me, and to testify my profound gratitude for your warm and sympathetic welcome. 

Circular Note 

Oe the National Society oe International Law, 
Santiago de Chile, January, 1914 

[Translation from the Spanish'] 

Sir: 

The civilized world is aware of the noble and strong impetus given by Mr. 
Andrew Carnegie to the common effort for universal concord. 

The study and diffusion of international law has been, and still is, one of 
the most efficient means of strengthening the principles of conciliation, the 
peaceful settlement of differences between foreign nations and the ever increasing 
hope of peace among the states admitted by international law. 



APPENDIX V 131 

Eminent publicists from every country have enthusiastically welcomed the 
formation of an American Institute devoted to the study of international law, 
and of National Societies in different countries to collaborate with the parent 
institution. 

During the recent visit paid us by Mr. Robert Bacon, on the initiative of 
Mr. Root, an invitation was extended to us to establish in Chile a filial institution 
similar to that constituted in Washington, presided over by Mr. Root, and whose 
Secretary is our distinguished fellow-citizen, Don Alejandro Alvarez. 

The main purpose of the American Institute and of the national societies 
affiliated thereto is purely scientific. 

All political discussion or any idea which is susceptible of influencing 
directly or indirectly the political life of the different nations is excluded from 
the deliberations. 

The regular subject of the programme will be discussed by the Society 
solely from the viewpoint of the doctrine of law involved and of its application. 

The American republics, united by so many common bonds and by the 
democratic character of their institutions, will find to an even greater degree 
than the other nations forming part of the American Institute of International 
Law, a semi-official organ in which to advance their ideas on terms of absolute 
equality, while at the same time becoming acquainted with the ideas prevailing 
in the other republics. They will thus secure a moral guarantee for the conduct 
of their relations, from which will result a closer union within the principles of 
right and justice. 

" The nations of this continent need to know one another better. The exchange 
of ideas brings in its train a union of sentiment and the intimate association of 
men and the exchange of principles between the different nations of the New 
World will do much to bring the states into closer harmony. The Society of 
International Law will realize in the vast realm of the mind and culture perhaps 
as much as is accomplished by the Pan-American Conferences in their official 
sphere of action. 

The purposes of the National Society of International Law, of which we 
have the honor to invite you to become a charter member, are the same as those 
of the American Institute of International Law, with the slight differences 
inherent to our national life. 

The National Society of International Law accordingly purposes: 

i. — To contribute" to the development of international law, and to compel 
the acceptance of its general principles among nations, and especially 
among those of the American Continent. 

2. — To contribute to the study of the problems of international law, paying 
particular attention to such as are peculiarly American in character, 
and to solve them in accordance with the already generally accepted 
principles, without abandoning, however, the doctrines which Chile 
has always sustained. 



132 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

3. — To work toward the codification of international law, in accordance 
with the traditions and doctrines of humanity and of our national 
history. 

4. — To diffuse knowledge of the peaceful means of settling international 
disputes. 

The Society will have three classes of members: charter members being 
such as accept the present invitation, regular members such as may join at a 
later date, and honorary members, not to exceed five in number, such as this 
National Society may propose to the American Institute. 

The Society purposes to draft and discuss at general meetings proposals, 
resolutions and decisions relative to any or all of the subjects, comprised within 
the purposes above enumerated. 

Its resolutions will be forwarded to the American Institute, which shall 
take them into consideration at the sessions to be held at least once every two 
years, and to which all honorary members of the Society shall be invited. 

The Society shall have a Board of Governors for the management of 
its affairs. 

The fees shall be twenty-five pesos per annum. 

If you should be of opinion that this invitation is worthy of your acceptance, 
we should be obliged to you if you would return the enclosed form duly signed. 

We have the honor to be, etc. 

Luis Barros Borgono, Domingo Amunategui S., 

Antonio Huneeus, Ricardo Montaner Beeu>. 



APPENDIX VI 
Peru 



Address of Dr. Romero, 

Dean oe the Faculty oe Jurisprudence of the University oe San Marcos, 

Lima, November 6, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Gentlemen: 

The Carnegie Endowment for International Peace which aims to promote 
and further this idea, has named the Honorable Robert Bacon, formerly Secretary 
of State and Ambassador of the United States to France, as its delegate on this 
mission of peace and brotherhood. 

In 1910 Mr. Andrew Carnegie donated the sum of ten million dollars in 
order that the Trustees named by him should apply them to the purposes of the 
Endowment. These purposes have been expressed by the Trustees as follows: 

The scientific investigation of the causes of war and the practical methods 
to prevent or avoid it; to train public opinion regarding the causes, nature and 
effects of war; to establish a keener appreciation of international rights and 
obligations, and to quicken the sense of justice among the inhabitants of 
civilized countries ; to promote a general acceptance of peaceful means for the 
settlement of international disputes; to promote sentiments of friendship among 
the peoples of different countries and to increase the knowledge and common 
understanding among nations; to aid in the development of international law 
toward a universal agreement as to its laws; to aid such organizations or 
societies as may be needed in the advancement of the objects of the Endowment. 

The great philanthropist, Carnegie, not only conceived this beautiful idea, 
but furnished the means to realize it by donating a sum hitherto unheard of for 
such purposes and perhaps not even imagined in the wildest fancy. By this 
means he made that generous purpose a practical one and contributed most 
efficiently towards stopping war or at least mitigating its horrors. 

The idea is indeed a lofty one, worthy of American genius, the creator of so 
many colossal enterprises, that genius which has made the United States of 
America great in its power, in its wealth, in its territorial expansion, and in 
the eminent men whose rapid rise in science, in the arts and in statecraft has 
been the wonder of the age. 

If the Americans have been the first in peace and the first in war, they are 
now, through the generosity of a multi-millionaire, setting on foot a movement 
which will lead them to be the first in the hearts of those countless victims whom 
they will save from one of the worst scourges that has so often been visited 
upon the world. 



134 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

As apostle of this mission of harmony and brotherhood, as messenger of 
this Christian and civilizing purpose and as leader of this idea which quickens 
every heart, there is with us to-day a great statesman, a man pre-eminent for 
his learning, contact with whom reveals the power of his mind and the bigness 
of his heart. 

I present him to you, Mr. Rector, and my esteemed colleagues. 

He is not unknown to you. A graduate of Harvard, he is to-day one of 
her Trustees and a Fellow of that institution. It is not, then, merely in obedience 
to the mandates of courtesy that he is among us to-day. He is here by virtue 
of his academic titles and of his position in shaping the destinies of a great 
centre of learning, of far greater renown than our own. 

It was only a short time ago that he directed with rare skill the foreign 
affairs of the greatest of republics ; yesterday he was Ambassador to one of the 
European nations, and to-day, coming as ambassador of the most noble mission 
known to me of goodwill, he stops for a little while in the oldest university of 
this continent, in the ancient institution founded by Charles V in 1551, which 
is pleased to welcome, even though it be for a brief moment, one of the favored 
sons of the greatest of our sister institutions. 

But apart from this motive for satisfaction, our University wishes to have 
the honor of counting him among her own members, and that his words be 
engraved on these walls, which still resound with the echo of the words of our 
most learned educators and greatest public men. 

Mr. Bacon is going to do us the honor of explaining personally the object 
of his mission, so that we may have the benefit of hearing from his own lips 
the important message he bears. He has also consented to pay the Faculty of 
Jurisprudence of this University the very high honor of becoming an honorary 
member. 

Distinguished Sir: Welcome to our University, and, as herald of the noble 
idea of peace and brotherhood, take back to your mighty nation our message 
of sympathy and admiration for the work of the great Carnegie, which is being 
so ably carried out through the wise direction of its Trustees, and of our 
abiding faith in its final success through the vigorous impulse of such eminent 
men as Mr. Root and Dr. Scott, and your own undaunted efforts. 

Address of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Mr. Rector, Gentlemen: 

You will pardon me, I know, if on this historic spot before such a distin- 
guished gathering of leaders of thought and men of letters, I make bold to 
address you in the beautiful Castilian tongue, so sweet, so rich and so sonorous. 
Would that I . could command it in order to make you feel my own thoughts : 
the intense sentiment of sympathy that fills me on appearing before such a 



APPENDIX VI 135 

distinguished body, no less than my deep gratitude for the signal honor done me 
by the University ot San Marcos, this pioneer institution of the New World, 
in conferring upon me the diploma of honorary member of its Faculty of 
Jurisprudence. 

I value this great honor done me by the University and by its distinguished 
Rector with all my heart and in all its worth, and I shall prize it as long as I 
live. The fame of your institution in the world of science and letters is 
both well merited and glorious, and I am proud to belong to such a high and 
distinguished centre of culture. 

In my own name and in that of the great statesman whose mission I bear, 
Senator Elihu Root, I thank you, Sir, most heartily for your kind words. The 
hospitable reception given me by the people of Peru, gracious queen of the 
Andes, land of the Incas, has filled me with joy. 

Those august emperors represent the inspiring past, brimming with mystery 
and splendor, and the vast resources of your beautiful land and its chivalrous 
race presage a future no less glorious and brilliant. 

The condor, symbol of liberty, soaring in dizzy heights, delights his piercing 
gaze by contemplating this free and prosperous country progressing toward the 
ideal of all peoples — peace and prosperity. 

On arriving in this land of sunshine, I am moved with admiration; I feel 
happy when I breathe the balmy air of your mountains, when I contemplate 
your majestic Andes as they encircle this beautiful Peru in loving embrace. It 
is a real pleasure to me to visit if even for a few days, fewer than I would 
wish, this noble country whose history has always attracted me from my early 
youth. 

I come charged with a message of goodwill from your devoted friend and 
great admirer, Mr. Elihu Root, at whose request, added to my own desire, I have 
the honor to appear before you. I wish I could say to you all that he would say 
were he here in person to address you and to greet you as an old friend. The 
expressions may differ, perhaps, but I assure you the spirit which animates them 
is entirely the same. 

On his behalf I invite you to cooperate in the establishment of international 
institutions which will be, we hope, centres of goodwill which will develop and 
popularize just and progressive principles of international law, and which will 
in various ways, directly and indirectly, by an exchange of thought and exchange 
of views and the happy combination of effort, result in strengthening the bonds 
of friendship which a common past, common institutions and a common goal 
suggest and require. 

History and Nature have inspired and increased a deep feeling of solidarity, 
not only between the countries of Latin America, but also between the Republics 
of the South and the United States. It behooves us to maintain and strengthen 
this solidarity which, by reason of its two-fold origin, unites inseparably the 
nations of the new continent in the past, in the present and in the future. 



136 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

One need only glance at the political history of the New World to see the 
constant interest the United States has taken in the struggles of the Latin Ameri- 
can nations, first to free themselves from the mother country and then to defend 
the independence they had won against all attempts at conquest on the part of 
European nations. Moreover we might briefly recall that, after the emancipa- 
tion, the United States furnished the Latin States with the forms and basic prin- 
ciples of their political institutions, particularly of their republican and democratic 
government, exactly at a time when the ancient political institutions of Europe 
were far from responding to the ideas of liberty and to the social conditions of 
the two Americas. 

All this glorious past in the history of the New World should strengthen day 
by day the indissoluble bonds of solidarity which have united the American nations 
since the beginning of their political life. 

Nature has added to the work of History. The geographical situation of the 
States of the New World has brought into being a series of problems common to 
all the States of the Continent, thereby creating among them new ties of union. 
Thanks to the progress of civilization and the perfection of means of communica- 
tion, we in America have come to see the imperious necessity of solving in a 
uniform manner, the problems arising out of situations and conditions peculiar 
to the New Continent. 

Anticipating Europe in a way, whose great Powers meet in conference only 
at the conclusion of wars to determine the conditions of peace, all the American 
States have met together in pacific conferences in order to discuss questions com- 
mon to their Continent — hence the name and origin of the Pan-American Con- 
ferences. These conferences have borne abundant fruit — a number of problems 
of interest to America have been studied ; important treaties have been signed 
with a view of developing the social and intellectual life of the New World; and, 
finally, the representatives of the several American States have learned to know 
each other better and have come to appreciate how many and how strong are the 
ties which bind the American nations together. 

The sentiments of solidarity and fraternity which united the countries of 
the New World in a community of interests should create a work of union and 
concord. The way is already open ; numerous and fruitful results have been 
obtained; the time has come, therefore, to establish in ever increasing measure 
good understanding and harmony. Above all, it is necessary to correct the mis- 
understanding of the South of the political purposes of the United States. You 
will recall the solemn declaration of my eminent chief, Mr. Root, at the Third 
Pan-American Conference held at Rio de Janeiro: 

"We wish for no victories but those of peace; for no territory except our 
own; for no sovereignty except the sovereignty over ourselves. We deem the 
independence and equal rights of the smallest and weakest member of the family 
of nations entitled to as much respect as those of the greatest empire, and we 
deem the observance of that respect the chief guaranty of the weak against the 



APPENDIX VI 137 

oppression of the strong. We neither claim nor desire any rights, or privileges, 
or powers that we do not freely concede to every American republic. We 
wish to increase our prosperity, to expand our trade, to grow in wealth, in 
wisdom, and in spirit, but our conception of the true way to accomplish this is 
not to pull down others and profit by their ruin, but to help all friends to a 
common prosperity and a common growth, that we may all become greater and 
stronger together." 

President Roosevelt, in his message to Congress in December 1906, stamped 
these memorable words of his Secretary of State with his approval, and declared 
that they faithfully represented the sentiments of the American people. These 
same words still represent the sentiments, the ideals of the people of the United 
States with the same truth, the same force as when they were spoken seven 
years ago. I like to think of this memorable declaration as the "Root Doctrine" — 
a doctrine of sympathy and understanding, of kindly consideration and honorable 
obligation — and I am proud to be considered worthy to speak of it as an humble 
apostle. Our country desires above all that peace and prosperity should reign 
in Latin America. 

I have the honor to address you not merely on my own account, but on behalf 
of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, of which Senator Root is 
the President, and to invite you in his name and on behalf of its Trustees to 
cooperate with it in such ways as you may consider possible and advisable. 

In other words, the wish is to enlist as fully as possible the sympathetic 
interest of the leaders of thought in South America in the various enterprises for 
the improvement of international relations which the Endowment is trying to 
promote, so as to bring about their practical cooperation in that work. 

The respect and friendship which the Trustees of the Endowment entertain 
for the peoples of Latin America and for the distinguished Latin Americans with 
whom many of the Trustees have most agreeable relations of personal friendship, 
lead us to desire that the work of the Endowment may have such active and use- 
ful cooperation in South America as it has already secured in Europe. 

Permit me to explain briefly the work of the Endowment, and to outline 
certain practical projects in which Mr. Root and his associates desire your hearty 
cooperation. 

I regret that today I find myself confined to details somewhat dry and, I fear, 
rather uninteresting at a moment when, under the inspiration of your eloquent 
phrases and under the charm of this intellectual atmosphere, I would prefer to 
dwell upon our ideals, our hopes, upon the visions dreamed by the great men of 
our respective countries. For I am proud to share your optimism, sir, and I have 
an abiding conviction that despite the clouds gathered by opposition and unbelief, 
we are at the beginning of a great movement of progress in the evolution of the 
freedom of the world and that from afar we may see the dawning of a brighter, 
purer day. 



138 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The principles, the philosophy of the last century are no longer sufficient to 
our needs. We must have new rules of political economy, new principles of inter- 
national law. 

The name of the institution I have the honor to represent, the Carnegie 
Endowment for International Peace, at times creates an erroneous impression 
as to the cardinal purposes of the Endowment, as also to the means used in 
attaining it. The Endowment might well be called an Endowment for Inter- 
national Friendship for where friendship and good understanding between 
nations exist peace is the natural consequence. The specific ends which the 
Endowment pursues may then be summarized as follows: 

To foster the ties of friendly relationship between nations, and the develop- 
ment of international law. These two purposes are closely interwoven: each 
is the cause and effect of the other. 

In working along these lines the Endowment does not hold itself out as a 
missionary of peace, nor does it try to preach its own ideas in the world, but 
it strives to encourage in each country those national activities which tend toward 
the attainment of international friendship and the development of international 
law. The means it employs and proposes are practical means. 

These purposes and objects fall naturally into three groups: One which 
treats of the creation of public opinion in favor of the peaceful settlement of 
international differences; another of the investigation and study of the causes 
of war; and the third of the principles of right and justice which would settle 
and prevent the controversies that have embittered the relations between countries 
in the past. 

To carry out its work the Endowment has been organized into three divisions : 
The Division of Intercourse and Education ; 
The Division of Economics and History; 
The Division of International Law. 

To aid in the work of the first Division, Dr. Butler, its Director, President 
of Columbia University, has created an Advisory Council of representative 
European statesmen and publicists, to which has been associated a body of corre- 
spondents. 

We have asked ourselves whether it would be agreeable to leaders of thought 
in Latin America to create an organization somewhat similar to the General Coun- 
cil already formed in Europe. 

The Division has inaugurated an exchange of visits of representative men 
and an educational exchange with Japan, and I hope to be able to obtain informa- 
tion and advice in South America which will enable us to begin in the very near 
future a mutual exchange of professors and students from Latin America. 

I am instructed to suggest that the exchange begin at once by the annual visit 
of two eminent South American scholars or publicists to the United States and 



APPENDIX VI 



139 



two North Americans to South America. Each of these men would divide his 
time between two universities in the country which he would visit. 

One of the activities to which this Division attaches much importance has to 
do with the organization of Associations for International Conciliation throughout 
the world. 

The parent association was formed by Baron d'Estournelles de Constant in 
Paris some years ago. Branches have been established already in the United 
States, Germany and England, and others are in the course of formation. 

I am directed by my instructions to invite the cooperation of interested per- 
sons in the countries which I have the honor of visiting, to organize branches of 
International Conciliation to be affiliated with the parent branch at Paris. These 
associations, while local in origin, have nevertheless an international mission and 
tend to create by their meetings and the excellent pamphlets they regularly issue, 
a friendly feeling towards the peoples of foreign countries. 

"The Association for International Conciliation," says Baron d'Estournelles 
de Constant, "is not a sentimental, humanitarian organization. It is a practical 
patriotic advance organized in the national interest of each country, particularly 
in young countries which must consecrate all their forces and resources to their 
own development. 

"Conciliation is the modern, indispensable complement of economic effort in 
every civilized country. To develop the national prosperity by the promotion of 
good international relations; such is our object summed up in our motto: Pro 
Patria Per Orbis Concordiam. 

"Undertake arbitration rather than war, but prefer always conciliation to 
arbitration. Our idea, our rule of life is this : 

"War rather than slavery ; 

"Arbitration rather than war ; 

"Conciliation rather than arbitration ; 

"Arbitration cures ; conciliation prevents. 

"Conciliation substitutes fruitful cooperation for sterile antagonism." 

The Endowment will provide for the expenses incident to the organization of 
these associations, and supply the necessary means to secure the services of com- 
petent secretaries. 

Let me now describe the work of the Division of Economics and History. 

The work of this Division is "to promote researches into and a profound 
scientific study of the causes of war and of the practical methods to prevent and 
avoid it." 

A conference was arranged at Berne in Switzerland two years ago, to which 
distinguished economists and publicists, drawn largely from Europe, were invited, 
to consider the subjects that could properly and profitably be studied and to draft 
the tentative program for the Division. 

A large number of topics have already been assigned to specialists selected 
from the countries to which their work relates; some of the studies have been 



140 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

completed, and, in the course of a few years, the Endowment will have published 
a series of remarkable monographs, covering all phases of the elaborate pro- 
gram, which will, it is believed, — to quote the language of Mr. Root — "be useful 
to mankind". 

Professor Kinley, an old and sincere friend of Latin America, who repre- 
sented the United States at the Fourth Pan-American Conference held in Buenos 
Aires, has been appointed a member of the Committee of Research, and he will 
devote himself more especially to the problems in which Latin America is 
interested ; and, in the course of the coming year, he will visit Latin America to 
confer with the leaders of opinion, to obtain their advice, and if possible to gain 
their cooperation, both in suggesting and in executing those projects which they 
may recommend. 

The third division of the Endowment is the Division of International Law. 

This division, like the other divisions, found it necessary to create a special 
organization and to have a body of advisors. 

The Institute of International Law consists, it is hardly necessary to state, of 
the leading authorities of all nations, and the Endowment requested the Institute 
to act as advisor to the Division of International Law. The Institute accepted 
the invitation and selected a committee which has acted as advisor to the Director. 
The Commission is composed of men of recognized authority on questions of 
international law. They are Messrs. Fusinato, of Italy; Gram and Hagerup, of 
Norway ; Holland, of England ; Lammasch, of Austria ; Lardy, of Switzerland ; 
Renault, of France ; Rolin, of Belgium ; and Vesnitch, of Servia. 

The Division has under way several works. The first is a collection and 
publication of all general and special treaties of arbitration, and, in regard to the 
treaties of the nineteenth century especially, the Endowment would be grateful 
to the publicists of Latin America if they would supply information on certain 
questions of this nature, which is best known to them and which may perhaps be 
known only to them; and the Trustees would regard it as a very great favor if 
the governments of Latin America would supply copies of such treaties, as it is 
very difficult to obtain accurate and reliable texts. All known instances of inter- 
national arbitration will be collected and published, with notes. Professor John 
Bassett Moore, the well known authority in matters of international law, and at 
present Counselor for the Department of State, of the United States, is in charge 
of this monumental work. 

The Institute of International Law, which now acts as Counselor for the 
Division of International Law, was founded in Europe in 1873, but although the 
Institute represents "the universal juridical conscience", many jurisconsults 
have felt the need of an institution which should represent the juridical con- 
science of America, study the problems which concern particularly the New World, 
and examine from the American point of view general matters relating to the Law 
of Nations. 



APPENDIX VI 141 

As you are well aware, an American Institute of International Law was 
founded by statesmen and publicists of the several American Republics, under 
the honorary presidency of Mr. Root. This Institute contemplates the formation 
of National Societies of International Law in all American countries, to be affili- 
ated with it, and work in studying American problems, in making known their 
principles and in contributing to a better understanding among nations. 

Lest I should seem to state in exaggerated language the aims and purposes 
of the American Institute of International Law, let me quote a passage from a 
distinguished Dutch scholar and professor of international law, who may be sup- 
posed to treat the subject with more detachment. 

After having spoken of the great example America has given to the world 
in undertaking the codification of international law, he says : 

"The second example is given us by an Institute essentially scientific but 
scarcely inferior in moral value. . . . This Institute has for its objects: 

(i) To aid in the development of international law; 

(2) to unite the common sentiment for international justice; 

(3) to procure a general acceptance of peaceful procedure in the settlement 
of international disputes among the American States. 

"This luminous idea sprang from the conviction that it is better to spread con- 
ceptions of right and justice by a slow but constant appeal to the minds and hearts 
of peoples, than by diplomatic negotiations which are not based on a general pop- 
ular sentiment. . . . This new proof of a virile progress which is brought 
to us from the other side of the ocean, gives new life to our hopes and redoubles 
our efforts." 

Mr. Root and his associates attach the highest importance to the establish- 
ment and successful operation of the American Institute of International Law, 
and of its affiliated societies in each of the American countries. 

The Endowment now grants a subvention to the older Institute founded in 
Europe. This subvention is designed to cover the traveling expenses of the mem- 
bers of the Institute, the expenditures of the commission and the publication of 
their work. The new Institute can count upon receiving financial aid from the 
Endowment, as soon as the National Societies are thoroughly organized, and upon 
being placed on an equality in this regard with the older Institute. 

The American Journal of International Law which, with some slight modifica- 
tion, might become the organ of the American Institute, receives now an annual 
subvention from the Endowment. 

Another institution in which the Division of International Law is greatly 
interested and which it will subvention and maintain with much pleasure is the 
Academy of International Law, which it is proposed to establish at The Hague. 
A proposal was made at the Second Peace Conference at The Hague for the 
creation of an Academy of International Law. No resolution was passed at the 
time, but the idea impressed itself upon the publicists of every nationality. The 



142 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Government of Holland has taken especial interest in the matter, and a committee 
of Dutch publicists, under the Presidency of Mr. Asser, has taken the initiative in 
the creation and instillation of such an Academy in the Peace Palace at The 
Hague. This magnificent building would become not only the meeting place for 
international conferences and the home for international courts, but a focus, a 
live force, to spread the principles of international law among all the nations of 
the world. 

The project contemplates systematic instruction during the summer months, 
in international law and subjects pertaining thereto, by a specially constituted and 
changing faculty, in that the professors would be chosen from among the pub- 
licists of different countries. Courses of lectures would be given on important 
and timely subjects by publicists who, in addition to long theoretical training, had 
acquired great experience in the practice of international law. 

It was also proposed that the Governments should be interested in the Acad- 
emy, and that they be invited to designate appropriate officials of the various 
branches of the governmental service to take the courses of the Academy. 

The institution would be unique in its summer sessions, unique in its small 
and changing faculty, unique in its student body, drawn from every country, and 
unique in its special classes. 

The Endowment would pay all the expenses of the Academy, and ask the 
governments merely to designate the persons who would take the courses of the 
Academy ; but the Academy would not be a direct agency of the Endowment nor 
under its control. 

I am directed to submit to your consideration the project of this Academy, 
and ask all the Latin American republics that they will designate one or more of 
their citizens to attend the lectures and follow the courses of instruction at the 
Academy. 

You will notice that Mr. Root and the Carnegie Endowment attach great 
importance to the scientific development of international law, and they would 
be greatly pleased to see the establishment of an international court of justice 
which is not temporary for isolated cases, but permanent for all cases. You are 
well acquainted with the maxim inter arma silent leges, but the contrary assertion 
is also true : inter leges silent arma. History shows us that this is true with refer- 
ence to individuals and it may be observed that it is also applicable to nations. 

Another matter to which I desire to call your present attention is the estab- 
lishment of national committees to determine what subjects are to be embodied in 
the program of the next Peace Conference at The Hague ; it will be the duty of 
these national committees to get into touch with the national committees organized 
in the various other American countries. 

It is common knowledge that the second Peace Conference of 1907 recom- 
mended the call of a third Conference to be held at a period approximately equal 
to that which had elapsed between the first and second Conferences, that is to say, 



APPENDIX VI 143 

eight years, so that, if the recommendation is carried out, we may expect the 
third Conference to meet approximately in 1915. It was further provided in the 
recommendation that about two years before the probable meeting of the Con- 
ference an international preparatory committee should be constituted by common 
accord among the powers. 

It is evident that the different countries which will be invited to the Third 
Hague Conference should consider all these important matters before the constitu- 
tion of the international preparatory committee, and it seems advisable — indeed 
necessary — that each government should appoint a committee to consider these 
matters in detail in order that the governments shall be able to make their 
recommendations in the fulness of knowledge. 

The five subjects which I am directed to lay before you and to solicit your 
cooperation therein are therefore, as follows : 

The formation in each country of a National Society of International Law, 
to be affiliated with the American Institute of International Law; 

The establishment in each country of a National Society for International 
Conciliation to be affiliated with the parent Association for International Con- 
ciliation at Paris : 

The appointment of National Committees for the consideration of contri- 
butions to the program of the next Hague Conference and for making arrange- 
ments for the inter-communication of such Committees among all American 
Countries ; 

An educational exchange between the South American Universities and those 
of the United States and international visits of representative men; 

The participation of the American governments in the proposed Academy of 
International Law at The Hague, by providing for the sending on the part of each 
government of one or more representative students to that Academy. 

Allow me to employ a final quotation from Mr. Root's instructions to me : 

"The Trustees of the Endowment are fully aware that progress in the work 
which they have undertaken must necessarily be slow and that its most substantial 
results must be far in the future. We are dealing with aptitudes and impulses 
firmly established in human nature through the development of thousands of 
years, and the utmost that any one generation can hope to do is to promote the 
gradual change of standards of conduct. All estimates of such a work and its 
results must me in terms not of individual human life, but in terms of the long 
life of nations. Inconspicuous as are the immediate results, however, there can 
be no nobler object of human effort than to exercise an influence upon the tend- 
encies of the race, so that it shall move, however slowly, in the direction of civiliza- 
tion and humanity and away from senseless brutality. It is to participate with us 
in this noble, though inconspicuous, work that we ask you to invite our friends 
in South America with the most unreserved and sincere assurances of our high 
consideration and warm regards." 



144 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Excellencies, Ladies and Gentlemen : Before concluding I wish to express 
again to you my most sincere thanks for the great honor which has been done me, 
and to testify my profound gratitude for your warm and sympathetic welcome. 

Address of Sefior Tudela y Varela, Minister of Foreign Affairs, 

At a Banquet Given by Him for Mr. Bacon, 
Lima, November 7, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Mr. Bacon: 

It is with very great pleasure that I tender you this banquet on behalf of 
the Government of Peru, which fully appreciates the high purpose of your visit. 

Skilled diplomat, formerly Secretary of State and Ambassador to France, 
distinguished member of the Board of Trustees of Harvard University, advocate 
of right, you represent the highest order of thought in your country. 

The success of your civilizing and humanitarian mission will undoubtedly 
be in keeping with these exalted titles, not only on account of the renown they 
represent in themselves, but because our Western World has always been eager 
to encourage every noble and generous effort. 

You may rest assured, Mr. Bacon, that the ideals of the American Institute 
of International Law will find here the warmest of welcomes. Peru may proudly 
boast that she has proclaimed these ideas at every moment of her history, and 
she entertains the hope that they will some day effectually prevail, overcoming 
the inevitable obstacles with which human frailty has blocked the path of the 
complete triumph of right. 

I beg that the ladies and gentlemen will now join me in my wishes for the 
happiness of our distinguished guest, that of his charming family and for the 
prosperity of his great country. 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Ladies, Gentlemen, Mr. Minister: 

I thank you with all my heart for the flattering words in which you have 
referred to my humble self, for the courteous expressions touching my country 
and for this charming dinner offered me by your Government. I likewise wish 
to repeat my profound thanks for the cordial welcome I have received from you, 
Mr. Minister, and from your fellow-citizens, with the generous hospitality so 
characteristic of your gallant Spanish race. 

The sympathy you have shown for my mission and your cordial promise 
of support fill me with gratitude, with joy and with hope for the future. I 
assure you that your friendship, your goodwill and your support are invaluable 
to us ; if I may be permitted to borrow your expression, "they are worth a Peru 
to us." 



APPENDIX VI 145 

We Americans of the North are proud of our progressive sisters of the 
South. Among these the noble and charming Republic of Peru takes a 
prominent place, both on account of the culture of its people, the virility of its 
race, the purity of its language, the progress of its present civilization, its 
marvelous history and the mysteries of its past civilization. 

We know that this country is, in the language of the poet, "chest of early 
treasures, precious storehouse of the royal earth." The Andes and the Pacific 
encircle it in loving embrace, and the brave, noble and enterprising character 
of the Peruvian people derives its nobility from the majestic ocean and the 
towering mountains that surround this land. 

When the Panama Canal has been completed, Peru will begin a new chapter 
in her history. Through this canal, the marvel of modern engineering, the ships 
of commerce will pass and scatter, like soldiers, to invade your ports ; immigration 
will follow, and the European races will contribute to the development and 
growth of the agriculture, industry and commerce of this beautiful land of 
Peru, and to the opening up of its untold resources. 

We entertain the very best wishes for your prosperity. We are happy in 
the thought that the relations of the past redound to the credit of our common 
continent; we are proud of the traditional friendship of Peru and the United 
States and we hope that these good relations will not only be perpetuated but 
strengthened in the future, and that with each added year our relations will 
become more intimate, more confidential, in a word, more fraternal. And this is 
to be expected from the members of one great family, inhabiting the same con- 
tinent, having the same ideals and with the same destiny. 

We hope that this beautiful land of the Incas will continue along the path 
of welfare and progress, and that its future may grow every day happier and 
brighter. 

Gentlemen: To the Republic of Peru, to our illustrious host and to the 
distinguished ladies who have honored us with their presence. 



Remarks of Sr. Luis G. Rivera, 

At a Reception at the Centeo Universitario, 
Lima, November 7, 1013 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Mr. Bacon: 

The Centro Universitario, representing the university students of Peru, 
is highly honored to receive you in its modest quarters. The student body, 
which knows what you have accomplished, which has followed your progress 
and which admires the energy and greatness of your people, begs you before you 
leave this capital to stamp in this humble house, inhabited by students who profess 
the same cult as you do, a mark of your friendship, to speak a few words of 
hope and encouragement to the youth of Peru who love truth, respect justice 



146 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

and ardently desire that the supreme blessing of peace may triumph over petty 
interests and momentary differences. 

Mr. Bacon, when you return to your great university, take with you our 
affectionate greetings to the students of North America; tell them that here in 
the land of the Incas they have many comrades and friends with the same ideals, 
the same enthusiasm; and you, eminent master, be assured that as you toil in 
the fulfilment of your task you will have our steadfast cooperation ; bear in 
mind that the youth of Peru stand ready to share your noble labors and to sustain 
unflinchingly the doctrine of peace, white as the snow-capped crests of the Andes. 

Address of Dr. Manuel F. Bellido, 

At a Reception of the Bar Association, 
Lima, November 8, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Gentlemen: 

The Colegio de Abogados of Lima is honored in extending an honorary 
membership in its body to Mr. Robert Bacon who comes to us preceded by the 
fame of his high attainments. This fame has already reached you, and so you 
are aware that the present Trustee of the University of Harvard, former 
Secretary of State and Ambassador to France is now fulfilling a most important 
mission in the service of the noblest of causes : peace among civilized nations. 

The beautiful ideal conceived by the great philanthropist, Mr. Andrew 
Carnegie, has led him to make an endowment of ten million dollars to further 
its realization. This great purpose may or may not be attained in a more or 
less remote future, but Mr. Carnegie has by his noble deed already earned the 
applause of all men of goodwill. 

The Trustees in charge of administering this generous gift, organized a 
corporation whose purposes are as follows : 

(a) To promote a thorough and scientific investigation and study of the 
causes of war and of the practical methods to prevent and avoid it. 

(&) To aid in the development of international law, and a general agreement 
on the rules thereof, and the acceptance of the same among nations. 

(c) To diffuse information, and to educate public opinion regarding the 

causes, nature, and effects of war, and means for its prevention and 
avoidance. 

(d) To establish a better understanding of international rights and duties 

and a more perfect sense of international justice among the inhabitants 
of civilized countries. 

(e) To cultivate friendly feelings between the inhabitants of different 

countries, and to increase the knowledge and understanding of each 
other by the several nations. 



APPENDIX VI 147 

(/) To promote a general acceptance of peaceable methods in the settlement 
of international disputes. 

(g) To maintain, promote, and assist such establishments, organizations, 
associations, and agencies as shall be deemed necessary or useful in 
the accomplishment of the purposes of the corporation, or any of them. 

The illustrious Mr. Bacon has been commissioned by the Carnegie 
Endowment to further the realization of this attractive program. 

There are many who believe the abolition of warfare among civilized nations 
to be a Utopian dream, but even to these the purposes of the Endowment must 
command not only their sympathy but their cooperation as well, since, as Mr. 
Bacon said yesterday at the University of San Marcos, we may call the Carnegie 
Endowment an endowment for international friendship. Let us all cooperate 
toward that friendship, and peace must necessarily result. 

And if this result is only a Utopian dream, let us at least hold on to it as 
one of the ideals of humanity, so that it may be a comfort to us on Our pilgrimage, 
and may support our faith in the efficacy of our labors. If, on the other hand, 
peace among civilized nations becomes a splendid reality, let us not stop to 
determine the date of the triumph; this will be the work not of individuals but 
of nations ; the men of the present generation will not see it, but their posterity 
will enjoy its blessings. Let us not lose heart; rather let us toil as he who sows 
the acorn, not for ourselves but for those who come after : let us do our part for 
the benefit of future generations. 

Mr. Bacon, one of the objects of your mission is that of "aiding in the 
development of international law and a general agreement in the rules thereof, 
and the acceptance of the same among nations". The members of this association, 
by reason of their profession, are bound to work toward the advancement of 
this division of the science of law, and it is my hope that they will give it due 
consideration. 

We have been pleased to confer on you, who have made a special study 
of this branch of the law, the title of honorary member of our association, and 
your acceptance honors us. Your name will take its place with other illustrious 
men, such as that of the eminent Elihu Root, and be an ornament to this 
institution. 

Mr. Bacon, I confer upon you an honorary membership in the Bar Asso- 
ciation of Lima. 

Address of Dr. Anibal Maurtua 

[Translation from the Spanish'] 

Gentlemen: 

This respected Bar Association of Lima has just performed an act 
of appreciation by extending an honorary membership to Mr. Robert Bacon, the 
eminent North American statesman, who, in fulfilment of the mission entrusted 



148 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

to him by the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, has done us the 
honor of a visit. 

The day before yesterday in the course of a notable address which Mr. 
Bacon delivered on the occasion of being admitted as an honorary member of 
the Faculty of the University of San Marcos, he set forth in detail the purposes 
and aims of the Endowment. 

The Carnegie Endowment is not a society devoted merely to peace 
propaganda; it is a scientific institution which, to quote from the words of 
the Honorable Elihu Root at the first meeting of the Trustees on December 
14, 1910, will seek to obtain a clear perception of the social diseases of humanity, 
"one of which is war." One of its chief aims is the investigation of the causes 
of war and its effects on both neutrals and belligerents in order that it may 
be always in a position to recommend what measures should be adopted to prevent, 
as far as possible, appeals to force. The Carnegie Endowment, in a word, 
is a highly civilizing institution entitled to universal respect. 

Mr. Bacon, you may take with you to the founder and to the Trustees 
of the Endowment the assurance that here in Peru we shall earnestly second 
the humanitarian aims of your institution. This duty is imposed upon us, 
not only because of the high purposes of human harmony and brotherhood which 
it pursues, but by reason of the great strides which will be made in our rela- 
tions with the United States of America, Europe and Asia, so soon as the 
Isthmus of Panama is opened to the traffic of the world in 1915. 

Gentlemen, we should not be unmindful of the influence that has been 
exercised by two notable American events in the social, economic and political 
life of the other nations of the world. In the first place, the discovery of 
the New World changed the trade-routes and the political power of Europe, 
Africa, and Asia; they were shifted from the East to the West. Secondly, 
the independence of America made a deep impression on the destinies of 
humanity. Independent America introduced religious freedom, which the Old 
World has since followed. Free America, furthermore, created democratic 
institutions which are to-day being copied by the monarchies of Europe. With 
its political freedom won, America then began assimilating immigration and 
formed the sub-races of the Yankee in the North and the Creole in the South, 
granting them the fullest measure of civil and political rights, to a degree not 
yet obtained by certain human races. America affords the opportunity for 
the enterprising, without regard to station or caste, to amass huge fortunes 
which have broadened the vision of their owners to undertake tasks similar 
to that begun by Mr. Andrew Carnegie, the Scottish philanthropist and millionaire, 
who came to the United States in 1848. Lastly, this continent has been the 
place where the principle of arbitration, as the means of preventing war, has 
always been proclaimed and enforced. 



APPENDIX VI 149 

The opening of the Panama Canal, which will constitute the third great 
American event, will undoubtedly exercise even greater influence in the de- 
velopment of the commercial and political relations of Europe and Asia. 

In the relations between the two portions of this continent, the Canal 
will be a powerful instrument for education, for the sentiment of Pan-American- 
ism, and for the political conscience of Latin America. In North America 
education is free; it has reached a marvelous degree of development and has 
raised the moral and intellectual level of the working and producing classes. 
There education is the greatest factor in earning a livelihood. In South Amer- 
ica, our line of thought is in some respects still European, which works to 
the detriment of the people's welfare. 

Again the Pan-American spirit has not been developed in all the States 
of this continent, notwithstanding the fact that the Monroe Doctrine and the 
leadership of the United States have opened the way to the development of 
these nationalities. 

Lastly, our aspirations and our thoughts are not wholly American, nor 
have we any idea of the role we should play in the world balance of power. 

The Carnegie Endowment with its complete educational, economic and 
political program, looking forward to the events of the future, presents a 
full picture of Pan-Americanism in its general outline. For the future guid- 
ance of these nations and for the political balance of power between Europe 
and America it has two qualities to commend it: The assurance of the national 
sovereignty of each of the States of this continent and the progress of com- 
merce and intellectual intercourse which, as every American earnestly hopes, 
will put an end to warfare. 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Gentlemen: 

The many marks of attention which I have received at the hands of the 
cultured society of Lima, together with those offered me by the Government 
and the honorable associations of your intellectual world, fill me with sincere 
and lasting gratitude. 

I feel honored that the sympathy which my mission and my university 
have awakened in you should have led your famous Bar Association to confer 
on me the very precious title of honorary member. I assure you that I prize this 
distinction in all its worth. I feel very highly honored, members of the 
Peruvian Bar, to be able to call myself your fellow-member. 

The day before yesterday I set forth briefly the main purposes of my 
visit here. In compliance with the gracious invitation given me, I shall now 
speak at greater length of one of them, perhaps that which will be the 
greatest force in promoting the work of Pan-American intellectual union. 



150 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

I refer to the support to be given to the American Institute of International 
Law and the formation of National Societies of International Law. 

"Ubi societas, ibi jus" — Where there is a society of nations there is a 
law of nations. As the society grows or changes, the law is developed or 
modified to meet the new or different needs of the society. A nation cannot 
exist and fulfil its mission separate and apart from the society any more than 
man can live in isolation. This has been so in all ages of which history has 
furnished us a record; it is so evident, indeed, that Aristotle felt justified in 
saying that man was a political animal, for men tend to form a society, 
however large or small, and organize themselves on a large or small scale 
for a political purpose. 

As with the man, so with the nation. It cannot exist of and for itself ; it is 
a political unit, a body politic, or a moral person. It is either a member of 
the society of nations which has naturally resulted from the mere existence of 
nations, the needs of mutual intercourse, or the nation is admitted into 
membership of the society of nations, as is the case with every country of 
the American continent, upon its application or its recognition as a member 
by the international society. By such membership each and every nation 
acquires the rights which each nation possesses in an equal degree. Each 
nation is equal in and under the law, and at one and the same time becomes 
subject to the duties imposed by the law, for rights and duties are correlative 
terms. The right of one is the right of both; the duty of each is to respect 
the right of each and of all. But independence does not and should not mean 
the right and the power to act without reference to the other members of the 
society; for a failure to respect the rights of others is the violation of a 
duty; if unchecked, it results in anarchy which is incompatible, not merely with 
the progress and well-being of the members of the society, but with the con- 
tinued existence of the members. Such a state of things is impossible among 
men; it is equally impossible among nations. We are far removed from the 
condition of things which Hobbes could define as a "bellum omnium contra 
omnes," even although the law of nations is neither so developed nor so ade- 
quate as the internal or municipal law of each and every member of the 
society of nations. 

While we can accept the principle of equality without qualification, we must 
understand independence in the sense that a nation is not and cannot be free 
to act in violation of the rights of other nations, just as individual men and 
women renounce absolute and unrestrained freedom of action in order that 
their rights shall be observed and protected as well as the rights of others. Inde- 
pendence thus shades, necessarily, naturally and imperceptibly into interde- 
pendence, without, however, questioning the equality of each nation and its 
freedom from intervention on the part of others. 

What is this law of the society of nations which every nation acknowl- 
edges and applies or should apply in its relations with other members of the 



APPENDIX VI 151 

society of nations ? Without attempting to define this law— for my present pur- 
pose is to state its existence and the necessity of its existence — it may be said 
that the law referred to is international law, which has come into being to 
meet the needs of nations. Once the possession of the few— the canonists and 
philosophers, the jurists and the statesmen— it has become the possession of 
the many. It is no longer to be gathered exclusively from the usages and 
customs of nations to be found in the archives of foreign relations, but it 
exists in systematic form, in the works of Wheaton, to cite an authority of 
the United States, and in the elaborate and authoritative treatise of the South 
American author, Calvo, and in the works of other leading authorities. 

In former times, when a special class of the chosen few governed the 
nation and directed its foreign relations, it was, perhaps, not necessary that the 
law of nations should have been studied and its principles mastered by the many. 
But a change has come over the world in the last hundred years and more. To-day 
in the case of every empire, kingdom or republic, the ruler is responsible to 
the people for whose benefit government is and must henceforth be administered. 
The people of each and every country have become masters of the situation, 
and we must educate our masters, not merely as to their rights as to which 
they are tolerably well informed, but as to their duties, as to which we all 
need enlightenment. The people at large possess the power and the duty 
to influence foreign relations, and as the people are in the end responsible 
for the correct and enlightened conduct of foreign affairs, and as they suffer 
the consequences of the mistakes of government, it follows necessarily and 
fatally that they must fit themselves for the responsibility which they cannot 
avoid, by a broad and extended acquaintance with the principles of international 
law. 

It cannot be expected that every voter will become an international lawyer, 
and it is not necessary that every voter should. It is, however, vital that large 
classes of the people should take an interest in the law which controls inter- 
national intercourse and by which the rights and duties of nations are to be 
tested. It is only through a knowledge of international law that a just public 
opinion can be formed on questions of foreign policy, and, as public opinion 
fashions foreign policy, it needs no argument that a knowledge of the prin- 
ciples of international law should be sufficiently disseminated in order to form 
public opinion, on enlightened lines, in each and every nation belonging to 
the "Society of Nations." 

The expression "Society of Nations" has been used as more accurate and 
significant than the "Family of Nations," but in a large and generous sense, 
the idea of a family applies with peculiar force and suggestiveness to the 
twenty-one republics of the Western world, alike in their origin, having similar 
forms of government and identical in their hopes and aspirations. 

Confining ourselves to what may be called the American problem, how 
can we develop international law in such a way as to make it meet the growing 



152 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

needs of the twenty-one American republics ; how can we formulate the rules 
of law which are necessary to decide our problems; how can we conduct our 
mutual relations in such a way as not to disturb the harmony that should exist 
among the members of one and the same continent, and how can we bring a 
knowledge of these matters home to the classes that form public opinion in 
each and every one of the twenty-one American republics? 

The Pan-American conferences may be trusted to continue; the regular 
and periodic exchange of professors and students may be, and we hope, 
will be inaugurated, the knowledge of the institutions and of the contributions 
of each nation to the common good may become general; the visit of repre- 
sentative men may and will tend to create and promote social intercourse, but 
the relations of nations, considered as such, depend upon an understanding 
and dissemination of just principles of law and their application to disputes 
which are bound to arise among members of one and the same family. 

How can this law be developed? How can these principles, when found 
and formulated, be best disseminated? These are questions which must be 
answered and upon the correct answer depends in large part the future rela- 
tions of the American nations. 

It needs no argument that a law to affect all must be made by all, that is 
to say, it must be the result of cooperation. The law of nations is not the 
law of any one nation ; it is not made by any one nation. It is not imposed by 
any one nation, it cannot be changed by any one nation. 

The law may be codified where it exists, and created where it does not 
exist by the action of governments, just as the American States have pro- 
posed to do, and have actually begun the work in a meeting of American 
jurists held at Rio de Janeiro in June of last year. But governments move 
slowly, and when they move too rapidly and in advance of public opinion 
their work does not last. Is there not a place for private, that is to say, for 
scientific cooperation among the publicists of America? A private body of 
Europe, the Institute of International Law, founded in 1873 on the suggestion 
of the distinguished North American, Francis Lieber, and of which Institute 
the distinguished South American, Calvo, was a founder and an ornament, 
has done more than any single agency to develop international law. Its 
drafts in various phases of international law, its resolutions, its statement of 
old as well as of new law have been accepted by specialists and its various 
projects have been adopted by governments because of their value and prac- 
tical worth. Slowly and tentatively, scientifically and unerringly it has solved 
problem after problem and produced model after model of correct codification. 
Much of its work has been adopted by The Hague conferences, notably the 
code of arbitral procedure, the code of land warfare, the suggestion of a court 
of prize, and it is not too much to say that it made possible the work of The 
Hague. It prepared the way and furnished model drafts which could be 
accepted with only slight modifications by the conferences. The patient labor 



APPENDIX VI 153 

of an unofficial society, composed of publicists representing science, not gov- 
ernments, furnished not merely the form but the substance for the official 
conference. It is hardly open to question that an official codification of inter- 
national law must be preceded by the careful, patient, inconspicuous labor and 
devotion of scientists, if the codification is to state just principles of law which 
the "Society of Nations" can adopt instead of a compromise of conflicting in- 
terests and views of the governments. 

Is there not room for an American Institute of International Law, com- 
posed of an equal number of publicists from each of the American countries, 
which can do for our continent what the older Institute has done for the 
world in the last forty years? Could not this American Institute work in 
friendly cooperation with National Societies of International Law in every 
American capital? Could not these National societies bring together all per- 
sons interested in international law, create this interest where it does not 
exist, and form a center in each country for the study and popularization of 
international law? 

The American publicists thought so, and they have established the Amer- 
ican Institute of International Law, after conference with and upon approval 
of leading publicists of the Continent. The members of the older institute 
thought so, as is evidenced by their warm and unsparing praise of the pro- 
posal; and such is the opinion of the distinguished North American states- 
man, Elihu Root, who has accepted the honorary presidency of the Institute. 

In an address at the opening of the Twentieth Peace Congress in The Hague 
during the month of August, the distinguished Dutch publicist, Professor de 
Louter, referred to the three hopeful and encouraging events of recent date, 
all three of which are of American origin. The first was the codification of 
international law proposed by the Pan-American Conferences and actually begun 
by the Congress of American jurists which met in Rio de Janeiro in June, 1912; 
the second was the formation of the American Institute of International Law, 
proposed and founded by the happy cooperation of South and North Amer- 
ican publicists ; the third was the creation and proposed activity of the Carnegie 
Endowment for International Peace. 

Let me dwell for a few moments on the question of National Societies, 
which are to be formed and affiliated with the Institute, whose members are 
chosen from the members of the National Societies. The older Institute con- 
templated National Societies but none was formed until after the founding of 
the American Institute. 

In February of the present year the French Society of International Law 
was founded. 

If a National Society is needed in France and can perform useful work, it 
is fair to presume that such a National Society may be formed in each of the 
American Republics and that it can justify its existence by useful and construe- 



154 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

tive work in the country of its origin. The French Society issues a modest 
bulletin. This could be done by each American Society and the interchange of 
the different bulletins would keep all of the National Societies informed of the 
work done by the others. A large and comprehensive Review of International 
Law would not need to be founded or supported by the American Institute, as 
the American Journal of International Law, now issued in a Spanish transla- 
tion by the American Society, could be modified so as to fit it to be and to 
make it the organ of the Institute without additional expense and without any 
cost to the Institute. It could be distributed to the members of the Institute 
and to the members of the National Societies so that the International Society 
would thus have an international journal and each National Society a national 
bulletin. All workers in the field of international relations would be brought 
into close and intimate relations, and instead of isolated activity, all would 
press forward together towards a common goal, and international law would 
be developed, expounded and popularized by the nations of a continent. 

Let me indicate, in closing, how the American Institute can help the Car- 
negie Endowment in its great and peaceful mission. The older Institute was 
requested to act as advisor to the Endowment's Division of International Law. 
It accepted the invitation and appointed a committee composed of the most 
experienced and illustrious of European publicists, so that the Division has 
the advantage of the best advice that Europe can furnish as to what it should 
undertake and as to the method of execution. 

As the Institute has performed, and performs, incalculable services, the 
Endowment makes a generous subvention to the Institute which is employed 
in part in meeting the travelling expenses of the members of the Institute, which 
does not meet in any fixed place but holds its meetings from year to year in the 
different countries of Europe, and also in part in paying the expenses of its 
commissions, and in the preparation and publication of its valuable reports. 

If the American Institute is firmly established, with the national and 
affiliated societies, cannot the American Institute be asked to act as advisor 
to the Endowment's Division of International Law on all problems of an Ameri- 
can nature and all undertakings affecting America, and may not the Institute 
justify such financial support as may be needed to be expended in the same way 
as the subvention to the European Institute? 

I am specially instructed by Mr. Root, Honorary President of the American 
Institute of International Law, and President of the North American Society 
of International Law, to urge you to help the American Institute to perform the 
mission for America and for the world that the European Institute performs 
for Europe and the world, and to urge you to form a National Society of Inter- 
national Law, affiliated with the American Institute. 

If you join us in this work of intellectual union, if the Latin American 
countries and- the United States unite in a constant effort for the improvement 
of the relations between nations, if all the countries of this hemisphere work 



APPENDIX VI 155 

in unison toward a common ideal, there will then be created a powerful force 
for good, which cannot fail to benefit our continent, the world and humanity. 

In conclusion, I wish to express the most loyal sentiment of high regard 
which I have for this illustrious Association, a worthy representative of the 
Peruvian Bar, and to voice my hope that justice and right may ever prevail in 
this land as the safeguard to the rights of its citizens. 

Remarks of Sr. Jose Balta, 

At a Reception of the Geographical Society, 
Lima, November 8, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish'] 

Mr. Bacon: 

It is a source of great satisfaction to me to present to you this diploma 
accrediting you as honorary member of our Geographical Society. 

The motto of the institution you represent applies to every association of 
men of science, who, without forsaking their countries, work on behalf of 
humanity; it is, moreover, particularly fitting to geographical societies that 
consider the Earth merely as an organism in constant evolution through the 
ages, and the human race as a group of like beings which neither the color of 
the skin, not the configuration of features suffices to divide into radically differ- 
ent, and, much less, hostile, groups. 

In the conception of the fatherland by the world of science it is possible 
to have all boundary lines and all race prejudices blotted out and so bring about 
sincere friendship between nations. 

Welcome to our modest institution which I wish might bear the motto of 
the Smithsonian Institute, that other grand North American creation: "The 
increase and diffusion of knowledge among men," side by side with the words 
that embody the programme of the Carnegie Endowment : Pro patria per orbis 
concordiam. 

Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Permit me, gentlemen, to express my sincere thanks for your cordial 
words regarding my mission and myself, and for the special distinction you 
have done me in conferring upon me an honorary membership in your Society. 
I am deeply touched, by this evidence of friendship, which, I assue you, I highly 
appreciate. 

The objects of your Society are peculiarly attractive to me. The investi- 
gation of problems and geographical mysteries is not only a fascinating and 
invaluable study in itself, but the diffusion of geographical knowledge has 
knit nations together in closer bonds and has contributed to the spread of civili- 
zation, and, hence, of international friendship and international sentiment. 



156 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

It is fitting, it is necessary that nations should grow together, should work 
to help to spread civilization. No nation, no human being for that matter, can live 
for and to itself, and the co-operation of nations is as essential to the progress 
of the world as the co-operation of individuals is to the progress of society. 

Geographically, America is a unit; industrially, its members live in closer 
contact every day; and, intellectually, each member should contribute to the 
knowledge and to the progress of all. 

Again I thank you, gentlemen, for your courteous welcome and the honor 
done me. 

Remarks of Dr. Romero, 

At a Banquet oe the Faculty oe the University oe San Marcos, 
Lima, November 9, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish'] 

Gentlemen: 

I have no set speech worthy of the distinguished personage we are honoring 
and of the importance of the mission he bears ; and I have not prepared a speech, 
because, sharing the opinion of my colleagues, I thought that a set speech was 
out of place when honoring one of our own. And, so, it is, in truth, gentlemen : 
we are tendering this banquet to Mr. Bacon because he has done us the honor 
of accepting an honorary membership in our Faculty: we are celebrating an 
occasion of great significance to us. 

It is an ancient custom to celebrate momentous events and occasions of 
special importance with banquets. It was intended thereby to furnish moments 
for closer intimacy, to realize materially what already existed through the com- 
munion symbolized by the fraternity of souls having the same ideals and aspiring 
to. identical ends in everything which is great or good. 

With this banquet we celebrate the high honor done us by Mr. Bacon; we 
seek to express our happiness at his becoming a member of our Faculty; and 
seated at the same table, free from an exacting ceremonial whose bounds we 
could not pass, tell him how great is our regard for him, how happy we are at 
the thought that the distinguished member of a great University of the United 
States has seen fit to visit our country and to set forth in lucid speech the pur- 
poses of his high mission. If it was out of place, therefore, to deliver a set speech 
because one of our own members had sat down at his own table ; if his arrival is 
the occasion for spontaneous welcome to be shown by manifestations of sincere 
affection, then it is proper that we should give this outward proof of our joy, 
and so I confine myself to begging you, gentlemen, to join me in drinking to the 
health of Mr. Bacon, and of his charming family, voicing at the same time the 
hope that he may carry with him the satisfaction of having achieved complete 
success in the realization of the aims of that great Institution, which, apart 
from its high - deserts, has afforded us the honor and pleasure of having Mr. 
Bacon with us to-day. 



APPENDIX VI 157 



Response of Mr. Bacon 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

Mr. Rector; Gentlemen: 

Once again I am pleased to express my sincere thanks and my warm appre- 
ciation for the honors and distinction conferred upon me by you, Mr. Rector, 
and by the esteemed members of the Faculty of this University. 

I assure you, gentlemen, I am deeply touched by your charming courtesy 
and kind hospitality, no less than by your spontaneous offers of help in the work 
of intellectual union. The recollection of your kindness will make the impres- 
sion produced by your wonderful country, your historic capital and your charm- 
ing people more delightful and more lasting. 

It has sometimes been thought that those who speak of international friend- 
ship, of the sentiment that controls everything else in this world, are mere idle 
dreamers. But it is no dream to say that the world is evolving through the 
ages from the material to the spiritual, to the moral, to the intellectual life. 
We can not appreciate this in a single day, just as we cannot perceive the move- 
ment of the tide. We see the waves, but the tide ebbs and flows imperceptibly. 
Progress, the continual irresistible progress of civilization, never halts. 

The facilities of communication are not only making trade and industry 
easier but they are drawing the different nationalities into closer social and intel- 
lectual union. Travel, personal intercourse and the knowledge of different coun- 
tries and institutions, tend to remove the causes of suspicion which unfortunately 
exist among nations and peoples that are not brought into intimate touch with 
one another. International conferences contribute greatly to create a better 
understanding among peoples, and the influence of the Pan-American and Latin 
American Conferences has been marked. It is a matter of great satisfaction to 
see congresses, such as the Medical Congress which has just been held in this 
city, attended by distinguished physicians from the whole of America. The 
valuable results to be obtained from these conferences are not confined solely 
to the world of science; they also serve the purpose of drawing the bonds of 
friendship between different countries closer. The medical profession of Latin 
America deserves the warmest praise and congratulation; its members, meeting 
in international congresses, have contributed to the welfare of the world and to 
the development of sentiments of friendship and brotherhood among nations. 
Through you, Mr. Rector, I desire to express my cordial greetings and good 
wishes to the Dean of the Faculty of Medicine and to the members of the 
Medical Congress. 

Once more I thank you for your hospitality. Although my stay in this 
beautiful land of Peru has been a brief one, I shall not, however, forget the 
pleasing impression I experienced the first moment I set foot on your soil. The 
wonderful history of Peru had seized my interest. The cordiality and affable 
disposition of the people have held my affection; and after contemplating the 



158 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

great progress to be seen everywhere, in the intellectual order as well as in the 
material, there has now been added to my interest and my affection my unbounded 
admiration. On leaving this charming City of Kings, I take with me personal 
feelings of goodwill, real friendships for the future, and I wish to say to my 
friends of Peru not "good-bye" but "till we meet again." 

I raise my glass, gentlemen, to the University of San Marcos, its distin- 
guished Rector and to its illustrious Faculty. 

Letter from Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle, 

Accepting the Secretaryship of the Conciliation Internationale for Peru, 

Lima, November 8, 1913 

[Translation from the Spanish] 

To the Honorable Robert Bacon, 
My dear Sir: 

It is a very great pleasure to me to accept the Secretaryship which you 
have seen fit to offer me of the Society for International Conciliation which has 
already been formed in Peru, thus realizing one of the objects of your noble 
mission. This Society will cooperate with the parent institution founded in 
Washington by the eminent President of the University of Columbia, Dr. Nicholas 
Murray Butler, with that created in Paris by Baron d'Estournelles de Constant, 
and with the societies recently established in the other Latin American countries 
you have been visiting. 

No cultured mind can remain indifferent to the appropriate motto, to the 
elaborate programme and to the high mission of the Society for International 
Conciliation whose purposes have been so clearly set forth by Baron d'Estour- 
nelles de Constant, by the great Elihu Root and by yourself in these words: 
"True patriotism consists in serving one's country. It is not enough to be ever 
ready to defend it; it is necessary to save it difficulties and needless dangers, 
and to develop by means of peace its resources, its wealth and its commerce." 
"The object of the Society for International Conciliation is to develop national 
prosperity under the auspices of happy international relations and to organize 
these good relations upon permanent and lasting bases." "We should do the 
work at hand, with the hope that every effort will produce some result, even 
though it be not given to us to see it." 

I beg to thank you also for the splendid gift of the medal of the Institu- 
tion bearing the beautiful design of Eugene Carriere and the suggestive motto 
"Pro patria per orbis concordiam." 

With the assurances, etc. 

(Signed) Juan Bautista de LavaeeE. 



APPENDIX VII 
Monographs Printed and Distributed in Latin America 

[Translation from the Spanish and French] 



1. The Carnegie Endowment for International Peace 

On December 14, 1910, Mr. Andrew Carnegie placed in the hands of twenty- 
eight Trustees the sum of ten million dollars, the annual income of which 
($500,000) was to be administered "to hasten the abolition of international war," 
which he declared to be the "foulest blot upon our civilization." "The nation is 
criminal," he further said in the letter accompanying the bequest, "which refuses 
to arbitrate and drives its adversary to a tribunal which knows nothing of 
righteous judgment." 

At their first meeting the Trustees organized by electing Elihu Root Presi- 
dent, Joseph H. Choate Vice-President, and James Brown Scott Secretary. 
Subsequently, Honorable Charlemagne Tower was elected Treasurer. 

Mr. Carnegie wisely left the Trustees full liberty to create the organization 
and the agencies to give effect to the fundamental purpose for which the fund 
was created. Thus, in the letter accompanying the gift he said: "Lines of 
future action cannot be wisely laid down. Many may have to be tried, and 
having full confidence in my trustees I leave to them the widest discretion as to 
the measures and policy they shall from time to time adopt, only premising 
that the one end they shall keep unceasingly in view until it is attained is the 
speedy abolition of international war between so-called civilized nations." 

The Trustees decided that the institution should be called the "Carnegie 
Endowment for International Peace," and a special committee was appointed to 
formulate the aims and purposes of the Endowment. This was a difficult task, 
for Mr. Carnegie's views were expressed in general terms. After much thought 
and deliberation, the Trustees adopted the following statement on March 9, 191 1 : 

That the objects of the corporation shall be to advance the cause of 
peace among nations, to hasten the abolition of international war, and to 
encourage and promote a peaceful settlement of international differences, 
and in particular — 

(a) To promote a thorough and scientific investigation and study of 
the causes of war and of the practical methods to prevent and avoid it. 

(b) To aid in the development of international law, and a general 
agreement on the rules thereof, and the acceptance of the same among 
nations. 

(c) To diffuse information, and to educate public opinion regarding 
the causes, nature, and effects of war, and means for its prevention and 
avoidance. 



160 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

(d) To establish a better understanding of international rights and 
duties and a more perfect sense of international justice among the inhab- 
itants of civilized countries. 

(e) To cultivate friendly feelings between the inhabitants of different 
countries, and to increase the knowledge and understanding of each other 
by the several nations. 

(f) To promote a general acceptance of peaceable methods in the 
settlement of international disputes. 

(g) To maintain, promote, and assist such establishments, organiza- 
tions, associations, and agencies as shall be deemed necessary or useful 
in the accomplishment of the purposes of the corporation, or any of them. 

Pending incorporation, the business of the trust is conducted by the Trustees 
as an unincorporated association. The principal office of the Endowment was 
located in the city of Washington, District of Columbia, and provision was made 
for offices elsewhere. An executive committee of seven members, including the 
President and Secretary, was appointed to direct and supervise the business and 
conduct the affairs of the Endowment, subject to the approval of the Trustees. 
The Secretary was made the chief administrative officer of the Endowment, and, 
subject to the authority of the Board and the Executive Committee, he was 
given immediate charge of the administration of its affairs and of the work under- 
taken by it or with its funds. The By-Laws require that he shall be a member 
of the Board of Trustees, and shall hold office during its pleasure. 

The officers elected at the first meeting on December 14, 1910, were formally 
re-elected on March 9, 191 1, at which meeting the aims and purposes of the 
Endowment were formulated, and a series of By-Laws were adopted. 

The statement of aims and purposes above quoted shows that the Endow- 
ment is largely a scientific institution and that it will carefully investigate the 
origin and causes of war, as well as its economic effects on neutrals and belliger- 
ents, in order to be in a position to recommend measures to remove as far as 
possible the causes of war. Wise action can be taken only in the fulness of 
knowledge and only after a thorough study of the problems, a careful weighing 
of the difficulties to be overcome, the methods to be employed, — which must nec- 
essarily change with changed conditions, — and above all, by the exercise of a 
sound and enlightened judgment as to what is reasonably possible, given the 
experience of history and a firm grasp of conditions actually existing in the 
countries which make up the society of nations. That the Endowment would be 
largely an institution of scientific research, was made evident by President Root's 
remarks at the first meeting of the Trustees on December 14, 1910: 

I think the field of general observation upon the subject of war and 
peace, general exposition of the wrongfulness of war, and the desirableness 
of peace, is already pretty well covered. I think this Endowment will be 
of little use unless it does something further than that. We must do what 
the scientific men do, we must strive to reach some deeper insight into the 



APPENDIX VII 161 

cause of the diseases, of which war is a symptom, than can be obtained by 
casual and occasional consideration. That deeper insight can be attained 
only by long and faithful and continuous study and investigation. 

The aims and purposes of the Endowment as formulated by the Trustees 
fall naturally into three groups : one dealing with the creation of a public opinion 
in favor of the peaceful settlement of international disputes; another with the 
investigation and study of the causes of war; and the third with the principles 
of law and justice which, if accepted and applied by nations in their mutual 
intercourse, will enable them to settle many, if not all, of the controversies 
which have either provoked war or embittered international relations in the past. 
The Executive Committee therefore established three divisions: the first, to be 
called the Division of Intercourse and Education, whose chief purposes are 
(i) to diffuse information, and to educate public opinion regarding the causes, 
nature and effects of war, and means for its prevention and avoidance; (2) to 
cultivate friendly feelings between the inhabitants of different countries, and to 
increase the knowledge and understanding of each other by the several nations ; 
(3) to maintain, promote, and assist such establishments, organizations, associa- 
tions, and agencies as shall be deemed necessary or useful in the accomplishment 
of the purposes of the association, or any of them; the second, to be called the 
Division of Economics and History, to promote a thorough and scientific investi- 
gation and study of the causes of war and of the practical methods to prevent 
and avoid it; the third, to be called the Division of International Law, in 
order (1) to aid in the development of international law, and a general agree- 
ment on the rules thereof, and the acceptance of the same among nations; (2) 
to establish a better understanding of international rights and duties and a more 
perfect sense of international justice among the inhabitants of civilized coun- 
tries; (3) to promote a general acceptance of peaceable methods in the settlement 
of international disputes. 

Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, president of Columbia University, was 
appointed Acting Director of the Division of Intercourse and Education; Dr. 
John Bates Clark, professor of economics in Columbia University, was appointed 
Director of the Division of Economics and History; and the Secretary of the 
Endowment, Dr. James Brown Scott, was appointed Director of the Division 
of International Law. 

Having thus determined the objects of the Endowment and created the 
organization to carry them into effect, the Executive Committee turned its atten- 
tion to the methods to be pursued by the Endowment and by each of the Divi- 
sions to advance the cause for which the Endowment was created. It was felt 
that the methods were of the utmost importance, for it is a commonplace that 
mistaken methods not only jeopardize but discredit an ideal. Success depends 
in this, as in other important undertakings, upon the proper adjustment of the 
means to the end. After a painstaking survey of the field of past effort and 
existing agencies throughout the world in the interest of international peace, 



162 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

the Executive Committee formulated the following conclusions, which were 
approved by the Trustees at the annual meeting of December 14, 191 1 : 

(1) That it will not be wise for the Endowment to enter into com- 
petition with existing agencies or to seek to supplant them by its own 
direct action or by the creation of new organizations to cover the same 
field, but rather 

(a) to give greater strength and activity to the existing organizations 
and agencies which are found to be capable of doing good work; 

(b) to produce better organization by bringing about union in system- 
atic relations of scattered organizations and eliminating duplication of effort 
and conflict of interest; and, 

(c) to cause the creation of new organizations only in those parts of 
the field which are not now effectively covered. 

The successful conduct of work of this kind requires the voluntary 
co-operation of great numbers of people who are moved by their interest 
in the cause of peace. Such co-operation cannot be bought with money, and 
it cannot be controlled by money. It can be greatly aided and made more 
effective by the judicious use of money. It would be impossible to duplicate 
the personnel now engaged in peace work in many directions. The con- 
tinued activity of the workers depends upon the continuance of their interest, 
and that is largely enlisted in the organizations which they have built up, 
often with much labor and sacrifice. It would be an enormous waste of 
power to attempt to substitute new and different organizations. 

(2) That a considerable part of the work of the Endowment must be 
prosecuted in countries other than the United States. There are many 
countries in which the problem presented by the proposal to substitute 
peace for war as the normal condition of mankind is much more complicated 
and difficult than it is with us at home, and there are many countries in 
which the ideas that we have come to regard as fundamental and indis- 
putable have made but little progress. All true advance towards a stable 
condition of peace in the world must be a general advance. The chief bar- 
rier to warlike aggression is the general adverse opinion of mankind and 
the reluctance of nations to incur the condemnation of the civilized world 
by conduct which, in that opinion, is discreditable. 

To render our work most effective it must accordingly be carried on in 
many different countries. 

(3) That in carrying on our work in other countries, and especially 
in those countries of Europe with which questions of peace and war are 
much more pressing and difficult than with us, it is of vital importance 
that we should not present ourselves as American missionaries undertaking 
to teach the people of other countries how they should conduct their affairs, 
but that we should rather aid the citizens of those other countries who are 
interested in the work which tends to promote peace to carry on that work 
among their own countrymen, and that to all such work the first conclusion 
above stated applies with special force. 

(4) That one direction in which work for general peace especially 
needs strengthening is along the line where the sentiment for peace comes 
into immediate contact with the difficulties and exigencies of practical inter- 



APPENDIX VII 163 

national affairs. The reconciliation of the two requires knowledge of the 
practical side, not so much of specific international difficulties as of the 
underlying forces which move nations, the development of their methods 
and motives of action and the historical development of their relations. 
To make progress in this it is necessary to enlist the services of men com- 
petent to carry on thorough, scientific inquiry and to produce definite, cer- 
tain, and authoritative conclusions which may be made the competent basis 
of education and argument, appealing to practical men conducting affairs. 

It may be profitable to sketch the progress made by each of the Divisions to 
give effect to the fundamental purposes for which the Endowment was created. 

i. Division of Intercourse and Education 

Dr. Butler established his headquarters at New York, so that he could be in 
close touch with the work of his Division and personally direct its activities. 

As a large part of the work of the Division would necessarily affect foreign 
countries and as it was essential to its success that the work in foreign countries 
should be done by local agencies, not by branches of the Endowment, Dr. Butler 
created an advisory council of representative European statesmen and publicists 
and a body of correspondents, so that he might be accurately informed of local 
conditions, and to insure that no project be undertaken in any European country 
of a kind calculated to run counter to national institutions, traditions and ideals. 
An executive committee was formed of leading members of this council, 
and a Bureau established at Paris to carry into effect the projects proposed by 
the council and its executive committee and approved by the Endowment. Dr. 
Butler has been fortunate enough to secure the services of Baron d'Estournelles 
de Constant as president of the advisory council and of the executive committee, 
and of Mr. Prudhommeaux, the accomplished editor of La Paix par le Droit, 
as secretary general of the European Bureau at Paris. 

To diffuse information and to educate public opinion regarding the causes, 
nature and effects of war, the Endowment, upon Dr. Butler's recommendation, 
has taken measures to enlarge the contents of a select list of European period- 
icals devoted to the peace movement, in order that they may reach a larger 
circle of readers and create a public opinion in behalf of the peace movement. 

To cultivate friendly feelings between the inhabitants of different countries 
and to increase their knowledge and understanding of one another, the Endow- 
ment has approved the three following proposals of Dr. Butler: (i) an educa- 
tional exchange with Latin America; (2) an educational exchange with Japan; 
(3) international visits of representative men. It is unnecessary to dwell upon 
the wisdom and timeliness of these projects, for it is common knowledge that 
many of the misunderstandings existing between nations are the result of 
ignorance of local conditions, traditions and ideals. Personal intercourse reveals 
that at bottom all men are strangely alike, and personal intercourse, discussion 
and exchange of views lay the foundation for friendship and good understanding. 



164 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

The educational exchange with Latin America has not yet been carried into 
effect, although progress has been made toward it. 

A distinguished Japanese educator, Dr. Nitobe, spent several months in the 
United States as the representative of Japan, and the distinguished American 
author, Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie, is at present in Japan. 

In 1912 three distinguished foreigners were welcomed to the United States 
by the Endowment, namely, Baron d'Estournelles de Constant, Count Apponyi, 
and Mr. Christian L. Lange, and the Baroness von Suttner has but recently left 
our shores. The distinguished American educator, Dr. Charles W. Eliot, Presi- 
dent Emeritus of Harvard University, last year visited many countries, especially 
China and Japan, as the representative of the Endowment. 

Passing now to the agencies "deemed necessary or useful in the accom- 
plishment of the purposes" of the Endowment, the following societies have, upon 
recommendation of Dr. Butler, received financial assistance to enable them to 
carry on the work they have undertaken and to enlarge their sphere of influence : 
(1) L' Office Central des Associations Internationales, organized by the distin- 
guished Belgian publicist, Senator La Fontaine, and located at Brussels; (2) the 
Bureau International Permanent de la Paix, at Berne, as the recognized head- 
quarters of the various peace societies; (3) the American Peace Society, reor- 
ganized in such a way as to be the efficient representative of the peace societies 
in America. 

It was felt that the Office Central is so international in its nature and scope 
that it should receive direct assistance from the Endowment; that the Bureau 
International Permanent de la Paix as the organ of the peace societies should be 
strengthened in order to perform its work more efficiently, and that, with the same 
general end, the American Peace Society, reorganized and strengthened, should 
not only act as the medium of communication between the Endowment and the 
various societies in the United States, but serve as the agent of the Endowment 
in assisting the local societies. 

The Executive Committee, as the result of the experience and recommen- 
dations of the Acting Director of this Division, has laid down the general prin- 
ciple that assistance shall be granted the national agencies in the Eastern Hemi- 
sphere only upon the recommendation of the Advisory Council, concurred in by 
the representatives of each particular country in the Advisory Council. It is 
believed that this principle is admirably calculated to aid the citizens of foreign 
countries in carrying on the work in their countries, and that it tends to bring 
peace workers into contact and cooperation with each other and with the prac- 
tical men of affairs who mould or control international policies. 

Experience has shown that many people genuinely interested in bringing 
about good understanding with foreign countries, nevertheless hesitate for a 
variety of reasons to ally themselves with peace societies. Associations for 
International Conciliation appeal to these classes. Therefore Dr. Butler's policy 
has been to strengthen these associations where they exist and to create them 



APPENDIX VII 165 

where they do not. The parent association was formed by Baron d'Estournelles 
de Constant in 1906. An American branch, of which Dr. Butler is president, 
was organized in the same year ; German and English associations were organized 
in 1912, and arrangements are in progress to create branches in South America, 
Canada, and other quarters of the globe. These associations, while local in 
origin, have nevertheless an international mission and tend to create, by their 
meetings and the excellent pamphlets they regularly issue, a friendly feeling 
toward the peoples of foreign countries. 

It is expected that the Division of Intercourse and Education will popularize 
the scientific results of the other Divisions, and will from time to time circulate 
books, articles and addresses, either in the original or in translated form. 

2. Division of Economics and History 

It was felt by the Trustees that nothing would be more productive of results 
than the careful, thoughtful and scientific investigation and study of the economic 
causes and effects of war; because, if we know the elements which have entered 
into and produced war, we are then in a position to consider the means and 
methods calculated to remove the causes and thus prevent recourse to arms. 
It was believed that an impartial and scientific study of the effects of war in all 
its phases, not merely upon the actual belligerents, but upon neutral nations, 
would supply information hitherto lacking, and tend to incline responsible men 
of affairs to the peaceful settlement of international disputes. A conference of 
distinguished economists and publicists was therefore called to meet at Berne, 
Switzerland, in August, 191 1, to consider what subjects could properly and 
profitably be studied, and to draft the program of the Division of Economics 
and History. In extending the invitation to this conference, the President of 
the Endowment stated that "the wish of the Trustees is to utilize the second 
division for the purpose of a thorough, systematic, and scientific inquiry into 
the economic and historic aspects of war, confident that the lessons to be 
derived from such study will be useful to mankind. They feel that such an 
inquiry should be prosecuted upon the broadest international basis, and that the 
organization thereof is a proper subject for the wisdom of the most able and 
eminent economists of all the civilized nations." 

The conference was attended by eighteen leading specialists, including the 
Director of the Division, and formulated a program dealing with (1) the 
economic and historical causes and effects of wars; (2) armaments in time of 
peace, military and naval establishments, the theory, practice and history of 
modern armaments; (3) the unifying influences of international life. As it 
seemed advisable to associate the members of the conference with the apportion- 
ment of the work outlined and with its actual execution, those attending the 
conference were appointed members of a permanent committee of research, to 
act as the agents of the Endowment in selecting competent experts to undertake 



166 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

and carry to completion the investigation of the various topics into which the 
program is divided, to supervise the investigations undertaken and to edit the 
results. A large number of topics have already been assigned to specialists, 
some of the studies have been completed, and in the course of a few years the 
Endowment will have published a series of remarkable monographs dealing with 
all phases of the elabofate program, which will, in the language of its President, 
"be useful to mankind." The headquarters of the Division are temporarily at 
New York, and the Committee of Research, in addition to being the agents of the 
Endowment for the purposes specified, act collectively and individually as 
advisers to the Director of the Division in prosecuting the important projects it 
has undertaken. 

Professor Kinley, who is a member of the Committee on Research of the 
Division of Economics and History of the Carnegie Endowment, and who takes 
a specially keen and personal interest in Latin America — due not only to his 
knowledge of its wonderful progress despite adverse and perplexing conditions, 
but due also to his personal observation, for he was Delegate of the United States 
to the Fourth Pan-American Conference — will visit South America in the very 
near future. His purpose will be to make the acquaintance of the leaders of 
thought in the domain of economics and of history ; to explain to them the origin 
and purpose of the Division ; to unfold the projects which the Division hopes to 
undertake, and, if possible, to secure the co-operation of our friends in South 
America in their execution, without which cooperation the work of the Division 
would be faulty and incomplete and fail generally in its beneficent purpose. I 
bespeak for him a warm reception and I would ask you to pledge in advance of 
his coming, your generous and invaluable cooperation. 

With respect to this Division, my modest mission is to prepare the way 
for Professor Kinley. In view of these circumstances, it would be best that I 
explain to you in general, the aims and purposes of the Division of Economics 
and History, in order that you may yourselves determine in what manner and 
to what extent you may cooperate with and aid Professor Kinley, leaving to 
him the privilege of stating in detail the projects which the Division contem- 
plates, and the large and generous part which we hope that Latin American 
publicists, economists and historians will be willing to take. I cannot better 
indicate the nature of the work which the Division is undertaking than by 
quoting from the remarks made by Mr. Root at the first meeting of the Trustees 
of the Endowment. "I think," he said — "the field of general observation upon 
the subject of war and peace, a general exposition of the wrongfulness of war 
and the desirableness of peace, is already pretty well covered. I think this 
Endowment will be of little use unless it does something further than that: 
we must do what the scientific men do, — we must try to reach some deeper 
insight into the cause of the diseases of which war is a symptom than can be 
obtained by casual and occasional consideration. That deeper insight can be 
attained only by long, and painful and continuous study and investigation." 



APPENDIX VII 167 

These words of ripe wisdom, based upon experience, thought and reflec- 
tion, apply with peculiar force to the task set to the Division of Economics and 
History, for to it is assigned the specific duty "to promote thorough and scientific 
investigation and study of the causes of war and of the practical methods to 
prevent and avoid it". That is to say, the study not merely of the alleged 
causes which have been but the pretext to ambitious and unscrupulous rulers 
and statesmen, but the study of the real cause, often hidden from view, to be 
found in the antagonisms of peoples, and in the desire for economic advantages 
which they do not possess and which they covet. But this study, however 
interesting, would be of but moderate value, even though through it the real 
motives were laid bare. The economic causes, and the economic effects, not 
merely upon the nations at war but upon neutral nations and peoples, the effects, 
indirect as well as direct, must be studied and made known, otherwise we 
cannot strike the balance between war and its cost, estimated not merely in 
loss of life, and in the waste of resources, but in the loss of opportunities, and 
the advantages of peaceful, normal and unobstructed development. 

Thus expressed, the problem is not of any one country or of any one 
time, and Mr. Root was certainly well advised when he stated, "that the lessons 
to be derived from such study will be useful," and that the inquiry itself "should 
be prosecuted upon the broadest international basis, and that the organizing 
thereof is a proper subject for the wisdom of the most able and eminent 
economists of all the civilized nations." 

Professor John Bates Clark, a distinguished economist of the United States, 
is in charge of the Division of Economics and History. While Professor Clark 
was in Europe, the Endowment took advantage of his presence there to invite 
a number of economists, publicists, and historians, mostly European, to meet 
at Berne in order to recommend an organization for the Division, and to pre- 
pare an outline of the work which it could most profitably undertake. 

In the next place, the members of the Berne Conference have been organized 
into a permanent committee called the "Committee of Research", which com- 
mittee will act, not merely as the responsible adviser of the Division, but as 
its agents in the execution of the programme of the work to be undertaken 
in all parts of the world, other than Latin America. Professor David Kinley, 
an ardent friend and admirer of Latin America, has been added to the com- 
mittee in order that he might, through personal conference and intercourse 
with the leading publicists, economists and historians of Latin America, determine 
what form of organization would best meet the desires and assure us of the 
co-operation of our Latin American friends without whose sympathy and effective 
participation the work of the Division — so far as it relates to Latin America — 
could not be outlined, much less carried into execution. I may say that the 
organization of a committee of research for Latin America, such as has resulted 
from the Berne Conference, would be very acceptable to the Endowment, and 
to the Division. 



168 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Let me now state very briefly the program outlined by the Berne Con- 
ference, which the Division, with the constant aid and advice of the Committee 
of Research, is endeavoring to carry out by means of investigations of causes 
and conditions in the different countries, conducted by distinguished scholars 
and investigators of their respective countries. 

At the Conference held in Berne in August, 191 1, the members were divided 
into three principal divisions, the first dealing with the economic and the his- 
torical causes and effects of wars; the second with the question of armaments 
in time of peace, military and naval establishments and the theory, practice and 
history of modern armaments; the third with unifying influences in inter- 
national life. It would require more time than I have at my disposal merely 
to enumerate different investigations recommended by the reports of the Divi- 
sions, which, taken together, form at present the programme of the Division's 
activity. Lest I deal too much in generalities, I shall mention some of the prin- 
cipal headings of each report. In considering the economic and 'historical causes 
and effects of war, the commission recommended the following researches : — 

1. Historical presentation of the causes of war in modern times, especially 
the influence exercised by the striving for greater political power, by the growth 
of the national idea, by the political aspirations of races, and by economic 
interests. 

2. The conflict of economic interests in the present age. 

3. The anti-militarism movement considered in its religious and political 
manifestations. 

4. The position of organized labor and the Socialists in the various states 
on the question of war and armaments. 

5. The economic effects of the right of capture, and its influence in the 
development of naval power. 

6. War loans provided by neutral countries, — their extent and influence on 
recent warfare. 

7. The effects of war considered in its economic aspect. 

8. The loss of human life in war, and the result of war, with its influence 
on population. 

9. The influence of annexation upon the economic life of the annexing state 
and upon the state whose territory has been annexed. 

10. The progressive exemption of commerce and industrial activities from 
losses and interference from war. 

Among the topics dealing with armaments, the following questions may be 
mentioned : — 

1. Cause of armaments. 

2. Rivalry and competition in armaments. 



APPENDIX VII 169 

3. Modern history of armaments, with special details from 1872. 

4. Military budgets from 1872. 

5. Burden of armaments in recent times. 

6. Effects of preparation for war upon the economic and social life of a 
nation. 

7. Economic effects of withdrawing young men from industrial pursuits. 

8. Loans for armaments. 

9. The industries of war, and a study of the munitions of war. 

I fear that I cannot try even to mention the topics to be investigated, dealing 
with the unifying influences in international life, as these are so many, so varied, 
and yet so closely related that I could not hope to satisfy your curiosity without 
overtaxing your patience. Suffice it to say under this heading, that the effects 
of international production, distribution and exchange, means of communica- 
tion and their result on the life, thought and development of the peoples and 
of the nations, will be studied. 

Many of these topics are being investigated, not a few of the studies are 
ready for publication, and, in the course of the next few months, the selected 
and well-informed public to which only this kind of work can hope to appeal 
will be in a position to judge the Division, not merely by its good intentions, but 
by its skillful and, as we believe, valuable, although partial , realization. 

We do not disguise from ourselves that the present effect of these studies 
and investigations will be slight in proportion to the effort and time lavished 
upon them; the problem is a large one and the path we must tread must be 
blazed, as it were, through a hitherto trackless wilderness ; but, in the language 
of Professor Clark, Director of the Division, — "It may be appropriate to say that 
we are dealing now not with a small issue for a part of the world, but with 
a vast issue for the whole world, and whatever affects the outcome of all is of 
enormous importance. It is a greater thing to move the entire earth a micro- 
scopic fraction of an inch than to carry a shipload of soil across the wildest sea. 
It will be strange if, as the outcome of what is now initiated, there should not 
result some perceptible deflection of the movements of human force. Whatever 
change there is will be in the direction of peace". 

What is to be the role of Latin America in these investigations? I cannot 
believe that the Latin-American publicists, economists and historians will show 
themselves less zealous, less sympathetic, less helpful than their colleagues of 
the other world across the water. I would venture to predict that they will throw 
themselves with abandon into the breach, if I may use a military expression in 
discussing the ways of peace, or that, to vary the phrase, as co-workers in the 
field of peaceful endeavor, they will participate in its victories; for, as a noble 
English poet has aptly and truly said : "Peace hath her victories no less renowned 
than War". 



170 mr. bacon's visit to south america 

3. Division op International Law 

The problems which confront this Division are exceedingly important, 
because to it is referred the specific duty to aid in the development of inter- 
national law, to establish a better understanding of international rights and 
duties, and to promote the general acceptance of peaceful methods in the 
settlement of international disputes. It appears to the Director and to the 
Executive Committee that too great care could not be exercised in determining 
the projects to be undertaken and the methods to be employed. If the relations 
of nations are to be conducted in accordance with principles of law, and if 
controversies which may exist or arise among them are to be decided in accord- 
ance with those principles, it is essential that international law as a system be 
developed slowly and cautiously by the cooperation of publicists in all parts of 
the world, in order that proposals may represent enlightened international opin- 
ion, be reasonable in themselves, and appeal to the mature judgment not only 
of theorists, but of the practical men of affairs into whose hands are committed 
the conduct of the international affairs. Therefore, before proceeding to the or- 
ganization of the Division, the Director, with the approval of the Executive Com- 
mittee, entered into correspondence with professors of international law in all 
parts of the world, with members of the Institute of International Law, with 
members of the Permanent Court of Arbitration of The Hague, and with 
selected jurists who, although not falling within any of these categories, never- 
theless possessed peculiar qualifications by study or experience to pass upon 
delicate and difficult questions of international law. 

After careful consideration of the replies received, the Endowment deter- 
mined, upon the recommendation of the Director, to ask the Institute of Inter- 
national Law to act as general adviser to the Division, either as a body or by 
committee. As the result of negotiations, the Institute of International Law at 
its Christiania session in 1912 accepted the title and functions of general adviser 
to the Division, and elected eleven of its members, including its secretary general 
ex officio, as a consultative committee of the Institute for the Division of Inter- 
national Law. It is expected that this committee will render the greatest 
service to the Director by passing upon the various projects which he may lay 
before them and by suggesting projects which should be undertaken and carried 
out by the Division. It is impossible to overestimate the value of this relation- 
ship, because the members of the committee, possessing as they must, the con- 
fidence of the Institute, will neither approve nor suggest projects unless they 
are reasonable in themselves, calculated to further the development of inter- 
national law, and of a nature to be accepted by the nations. Such a relationship 
is a guarantee that the Endowment through its Division of International Law 
will not undertake projects which may be considered Utopian. The approval 
of the consultative committee will of necessity be accepted as evidence that the 
projects are worthy of consideration by publicists and statesmen and possible 



APPENDIX VII 171 

of execution. It is hoped that the relationship may prove no less agreeable 
and valuable to the Institute, for it will permit the execution of projects which 
the Institute may consider highly desirable, but which for lack of material 
resources might not be undertaken. The decision of the Institute to act as 
adviser completed the organization of the Division, just as the establishment of 
the Committee of Research organized the Division of Economics and History. 

The Institute of International Law, founded in the year 1873, has shown 
itself to be the most potent unofficial agency ever created for the development 
of international law; and the Endowment decided that it could not make a 
wiser expenditure of a portion of its income than by granting the Institute a 
subvention, in the belief that a part of the sum could be profitably used, if it 
were the desire of the Institute, in meeting the traveling expenses of its members, 
in enabling its reporters to receive some compensation for services hitherto un- 
remunerated, in printing the reports themselves in a manner which will make 
them more widely useful to teachers, students, the profession, and the reading 
public, and in permitting the execution, under the supervision of the Institute, 
of projects which it might desire to undertake. The subvention, however, is 
without conditions, as the Institute is best qualified to determine the most profit- 
able use to which the subvention could be put. 

The American Institute of International Law, founded in October, 1912, 
will, it is hoped, render useful service in the development and popularization of 
international law in the Western Hemisphere, even though less conspicuous than 
that which the Institute of International Law has rendered to the world at large. 
As the policy of the Endowment is not to create agencies of its own but to 
assist existing instrumentalities, no financial aid of any kind has been asked or 
received by Mr. Alvarez and the Director of the Division, through whose initia- 
tive the American Institute was founded. It is mentioned in this connection 
because it is an agency calculated "to aid in the development of international 
law," and for the further reason that the president of the Endowment has 
accepted the honorary presidency of the American Institute, and the Director 
was one of its founders. 

There are many ways to establish a better understanding of international 
rights and duties and a more perfect sense of international justice among the 
inhabitants of civilized countries. A beginning has been made, modestly and 
cautiously; and only such projects can be undertaken in the first instance as 
unmistakably fall within this requirement of the Division and are calculated 
directly to accomplish the immediate purpose. The Institute of International 
Law seeks to develop the law of nations by discussing important questions and 
giving them the form of treaty or statute. That this is an eminently practical 
method is shown by the fact that the opinions and resolutions of the Institute 
have appealed to men of affairs and many of them are already firmly imbedded 
in the actual law of nations. It did seem possible, however, to consider the 



172 - MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

rights and duties of nations from a more systematic, theoretical, and at the same 
time broader point of view. 

A proposal was made at the Second Hague Peace Conference to create an 
academy of international law, and it was commended by the President of the 
Conference. No action was then taken, but the idea has commended itself to 
publicists of many nationalities. A committee of Dutch publicists, under the 
presidency of Mr. Asser, suggested that such an academy be created and 
installed in the Peace Palace at The Hague. The Permanent Court of 
Arbitration would apply the law which had been systematically expounded 
in the academy, and the magnificent building would indeed become a temple 
of peace. Mr. Asser's proposal contemplates systematic instruction, during 
the summer months, in international law and cognate subjects by a specially 
constituted and changing faculty, to be chosen from publicists of different 
countries. Formal courses of lectures on important and timely subjects would 
be given by publicists who, in addition to theoretical training, have had large 
experience in the practice of international law. Seminars, under the direction 
of the regular professors, would be created for the detailed and exhaustive study 
of certain phases of international law and international relations. The courses 
would be open to students of all countries who possess the necessary qualifica- 
tions, and who would be able to attend and to profit by the instruction given, 
as it would be during the academic vacation. It is also proposed that the gov- 
ernments should be interested in the academy and invited through diplomatic 
channels to designate appropriate officials of various branches of the govern- 
mental service to attend the academy. The institution would be unique in its 
summer sessions, unique in its small and changing faculty, and unique in its 
student body drawn from foreign countries and from official classes. The lec- 
tures, published as monographs, would enrich the literature of international law ; 
the law itself would be treated from various points of view and by competent 
teachers, of whom but one at a time would be selected from any country. 
The student body would be drawn from various countries and in the course of 
time would exercise influence in the home countries, so that the academy would 
be eminently helpful to establish a better understanding of international rights 
and duties, and to disseminate the principles of justice. The Carnegie Endow- 
ment has approved the academy in principle, and stands ready to grant financial 
assistance when the plans are sufficiently matured. The academy would, if 
organized, be a separate and independent institution, under the control of a 
specially appointed committee or curatorium composed in the first instance of 
past presidents of the Institute of International Law. Thus organized and 
operated, it would advance the work which the Carnegie Endowment is created 
to further, but it would not be a direct agency of the Endowment or under 
its control. 

The existing journals of international law tend to establish a better under- 
standing of international rights and duties, and an increase in their circulation 



APPENDIX VII 173 

will increase their influence, popularize international law, and show by concrete 
example how its principles determine questions of international rights. For 
this reason the Endowment, upon the recommendation of the Director, has 
granted subventions, either of money or subscriptions, as the journals preferred. 
This assistance will enable the journals to appear more regularly, guarantee their 
continued existence, enlarge and strengthen their contents, and enable their con- 
tributors to receive some compensation for the time and labor they have gener- 
ously given, without any reward other than that which comes from good deeds. 

It often happens that excellent contributions are made to international law 
in languages little read or understood beyond the country in which they are 
published, and it is believed that the cause of international justice would be 
advanced by the translation of such works into languages more widely used. 
Therefore the Director has proposed, and the consultative committee of the 
Institute has approved, the translation of works of this character into some one 
or more better known languages, so that the international lawyer who may not 
be a linguist and students and scholars in all parts of the world may have the 
advantage of reading and studying them. At the same time it would be highly 
useful to have original works prepared dealing with certain phases of inter- 
national law which deserve special treatment. This is a more delicate matter 
but it has received consideration. The Endowment does not contemplate going 
into the publishing business, but feels that it may materially aid authors to 
produce treatises or monographs of the kind specified, and thus render no incon- 
siderable service to the cause of international law and international justice. 

Periodicals and treatises of international law appeal to the reader, but the 
hearer should not be overlooked. Therefore the Director has proposed that dis- 
tinguished foreign publicists be invited to the United States to deliver courses of 
lectures on certain phases of international law in universities and colleges of the 
United States. In this way it is believed that the foreign points of view will 
be made very clear and that, if successfully carried out, teachers of international 
law will be brought into personal relations, and by the exchange of views a better 
understanding of international rights and duties created. 

A fundamental purpose of the Division is to promote the general acceptance 
of peaceable methods of settling international disputes, and it is believed that the 
best way to show what can be done in the future is to make clear what has been 
done in the past. Therefore the Division is now engaged in collecting for publi- 
cation all known general and special treaties of arbitration. This is a long and 
difficult task, and it has been thought advisable to begin with the modern period, 
that is to say, with the Jay Treaty of 1794 between Great Britain and the United 
States. This part of the work is nearing completion, after which the earlier 
treaties will be prepared for publication. This collection will enable publicists 
to see to what extent nations have been willing to bind themselves to arbitra- 
tion, and the various forms of existing treaties will be placed at their disposal. 
For like reason, all known instances of arbitration are to be collected and pub- 



174 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

lished in the form of judicial reports, and the series will be continued indefi- 
nitely. The well-known authority on international law and arbitration, Pro- 
fessor John Bassett Moore, of Columbia University, has undertaken this monu- 
mental work and is actively engaged upon it. 

The existence of the Permanent Court of Arbitration at The Hague, the 
adoption of a prize court convention, although the court itself is not yet estab- 
lished, and the approval by the Second Hague Peace Conference of a truly 
permanent court of arbitral justice composed of judges, lead to the conclusion 
that differences between nations will be more frequently submitted to arbitra- 
tion, preferably judicial decision, in the future than has been the case in the 
past. It seems therefore desirable that we know from concrete instances the 
questions involving international law which have been submitted to and decided 
by courts of justice. This becomes especially important, if judicial decision is 
to supplement arbitration in some cases and to supersede it in others; for until 
the nations have confidence in judicial decision and its possibilities, they will 
hesitate to have recourse to it. The Director has therefore proposed that the 
decisions of English and American courts of justice, in so far as they concern 
international law, be collected and edited, as are the law reports of Great Britain 
and the United States. The decisions will not only be valuable in themselves, — 
for the judgments of Stowell, Marshall and Story are classics of interna- 
tional law, — but will show the careful and cautious manner in which interna- 
tional law has been interpreted, applied and developed by courts of justice, and 
will furnish safe precedents for international courts to follow. The decisions 
of continental courts should likewise be collected and published; but it has 
seemed best to make a beginning with English and American decisions. The 
Director has recommended, and the Endowment has approved, the project for 
the collection and publication of present and future decisions of national courts 
turning on points of international law ; but this recommendation is in the nature 
of a proposal, as it is believed that the experience gained in the collection and 
publication of English and American decisions will render the larger project 
easier to realize. 

As in the case of periodicals, books and treatises dealing with certain phases 
of international law, it is the intention of the Endowment to encourage the 
preparation and distribution of various works dealing with the pacific settlement 
of international disputes. By way of example, the Endowment has subscribed 
for a considerable number of copies of the Recueil des Arbitrages Interna- 
tionaux of Messrs. de Lapradelle and Politis, and has made arrangements to 
place them in libraries and institutions of foreign countries, so that they may 
be brought to the notice and attention of the public that should be interested in 
publications of this kind. 

From this account of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace it is 
clear that it is taking its mission seriously ; that it regards itself as a scientific 



APPENDIX VII 175 

institution of research rather than a peace society in the technical sense of the 
word; and that by the investigation of the causes and effects of war and the 
publication and wide distribution of these investigations, and by the material 
encouragement which it extends to institutions, agencies and workers in the same 
field, it may safely be counted upon to render conspicuous service in the great 
cause for which it was created. 



2. Associations for International Conciliation 

A distinguished French publicist said some time ago in the course of a con- 
versation that he was opposed to the establishment of new Societies, that we had 
so many that it was almost impossible to name them, much less to take part in 
their proceedings, that he belonged to so many that he hardly had time to devote 
to any of them. This was perhaps the language of exaggeration, and yet there is 
much truth in it. It would seem a better and wiser course to strengthen existing 
societies than to create new ones for slightly different or allied purposes. This is 
pre-eminently the point of view of the Carnegie Endowment which makes a point 
of aiding existing societies instead of creating new agencies. 

There are many Peace Societies which do much good, and it cannot be doubted 
that the foundation of others in quarters where such Societies do not exist would 
tend to strengthen the sentiment in favor of peaceful settlement, where it exists, 
and create it where it does not exist. But I should like to call your attention to 
societies of a different kind — broader and yet narrower in their scope than the 
Peace Societies ; broader in the sense that they aim to take in all persons believ- 
ing in peaceful settlement, narrower in that they do not propose ordinarily 
specific methods of advancing the cause of international peace. They seek to 
promote good understanding in the belief that good understanding is of itself 
the high road to international peace ; although engaged in the work of propaganda, 
their methods are conciliatory, not aggressive, and they are not inaptly called by 
their founder, Societies for International Conciliation. 

But why, you may ask, start a new Society when I have already indicated 
in my opening sentences a certain hesitation on the subject? The reason is that 
a Society for International Conciliation is a Society of a different kind from the 
Peace Society properly so-called, and that the formation of National Societies of 
International Conciliation would not duplicate existing Associations nor enter 
into competition with them. Again the truth is that there are many people who 
believe in cultivating a friendly understanding between nations, and who are 
ardent partisans of the peaceful settlement of international disputes, but who, 
nevertheless, hesitate to ally themselves with Peace Societies properly so-called; 
and it is interesting and instructive to know the reasons why highly intelligent 
persons in favor of peaceful settlement feel unwilling to enroll themselves as 
members of Peace Societies. 

There seems to be an impression in the popular mind, doubtless erroneous, 
that Peace Societies stand for peace at any price ; that they are not patriotic, or 
that they are inconsistent with a sound and robust patriotism; that their projects 
for bringing about international peace, although many and varied, are fanciful 



APPENDIX VII 177 

and impracticable, and divorced alike from reason and experience, so that their 
remedies, which taken together make up pacifism, are regarded as Utopian. 

Now I would not have you think I share these views or that in quoting this 
criticism, I concur in it. It is a fact, however, that very many estimable 
people in my own country and in foreign countries hesitate to connect themselves 
with Peace Societies, because, by so doing, they feel, at least they express them- 
selves as feeling, that they are committed to the various projects of the Peace 
Societies, and that, by allying themselves with them, they subject themselves to 
the criticism to which the pacifists are exposed. The feeling, it seems, is some- 
what general that Peace Societies are hortatory, not constructive, and that they 
make their appeal to human emotion; that their members are generally, though 
not exclusively, recruited from emotional elements ; that such societies strengthen 
the belief, it may be, of those who are already converted, but that they do not 
make an appeal to the strong, hard-headed men of affairs, who, after all, do the 
world's business. 

On the other hand, it appears, that very many of those who, for one reason 
or another, hesitate to ally themselves with Peace Societies, technically so-called, 
seem to be not only willing, but, in many cases, anxious to join societies of a larger 
and broader nature, which aim to promote good understanding between nations, 
international conciliation and peaceful settlement of disputes. 

It has been said that, between the spirit of pacifism and the spirit of peaceful 
settlement, which may be contrasted in French by the two phrases "Vesprit 
pacifiste" and "Vesprit pacifique", there is the difference between Utopia and 
reality, and that the partisans of pacifism, instead of serving the cause of peace, 
are, in reality, an obstacle to its realization and retard its progress. 

Let me relate a few concrete instances which may tend to support the present 
distinction. A distinguished Japanese publicist well and honorably known by his 
activity in the Peace movement, says that "Peace" or "Peace Society" is the one 
word or expression which must not be used in Japan, because the single word, 
or the phrase of which it is a part, conveys a false notion to many of his country- 
men, who, nevertheless, are heartily in favor of peaceful settlement, international 
good-will and conciliation. 

A distinguished English philanthropist, who has given considerable sums of 
money to the Peace movement, and who believes in the movement, and in the 
possibility of its realization, has asked if it is really necessary to mention the 
word "Peace" in connection with the movement, stating that in his experience the 
word conveyed an unfavorable impression. 

Another illustration shows the possibilities of a broader movement in a 
country in which Peace Societies, at least at present, do not thrive. Within the 
past year, a Society for International Conciliation has been started in Frankfort, 
Germany, and has enrolled in its membership many of the most distinguished 
names in the scientific, literary, industrial and academic world, including pro- 
fessors and teachers of international law. These gentlemen are strongly in favor 



178 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

of peaceful settlement, recommend conciliatory attitudes on international ques- 
tions, and labor in their respective spheres to promote good understanding between 
and among nations. Yet they are unwilling to join Peace Societies. 

It is not, however, for us to criticize. It is better for us to recognize the 
fact — and it is a fact — that many estimable people find it possible to work through 
Peace Societies, whereas just as estimable people find it impossible or undesirable 
to work in or through Peace Societies. It seems the part of wisdom to recognize 
these different classes of people and to start organizations which will serve as 
a rallying point for believers in international good-will and conciliation, who 
otherwise might take no part in the movement which is bringing nations closer 
together and which have for their fundamental principle to clear up misunder- 
standings and, by friendliness and good-will, to advance the cause of peace. 

The first Society of International Conciliation was started by the Baron 
d'Estournelles de Constant in Paris, and it is not only the parent but the model 
of the branches which have been organized in other countries. Baron d'Estour- 
nelles, it need hardly be said, is strongly in favor of peace, and yet he is 
a loyal, broadminded, patriotic citizen of France. He recognizes a two-fold form 
of patriotism : the patriotism which serves the country on the battlefield in case of 
need, and the patriotism which keeps nations from going to war when war is not 
forced upon them. "True patriotism", he says, "consists in properly serving one's 
country. It is not enough to be ever ready to defend it ; it is necessary as well to 
steer it out of complications, to spare it needless burdens, and to promote, through 
peace, its energies, resources, and trade. Our two-fold program has in view 
to stimulate home activity under the safeguard of good foreign relations". 

In the constitution of the original Society of International Conciliation, the 
object is thus stated: — "The Association, bearing the name 'Conciliation Inter- 
nationale', aims to develop national prosperity under the auspices of good inter- 
national relations, and to organize these good relations upon a permanent and 
enduring basis". Among the principal agencies, by means of which the Society 
proposes to realize its object are the following: — Education of public opinion; 
development of arbitration ; correction of misleading news ; an international maga- 
zine ; publications ; lectures ; congresses ; conferences ; exhibitions ; cultivation of 
foreign languages; exchange of international visits between scientific, artistic, 
professional, and workmen's associations and other agencies of a like kind. The 
Association founded by Baron d'Estournelles de Constant for the stated purposes 
has been very successful, and numbers among its members many of the most dis- 
tinguished citizens of France and of foreign countries. A small pamphlet, aiming 
to promote good understanding, and dealing with timely questions as they arise, 
is issued at irregular intervals. 

An American branch of the International Conciliation has been founded in the 
United States by Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, President of Columbia University. 
The aims and purposes of the branch are practically identical with those of the 
parent Society of Paris. In the matter of the bulletin or pamphlet which appears 



APPENDIX VII 179 

monthly, Dr. Butler has been able to obtain some of the best known and most 
highly appreciated writers, not only in the United States but in foreign countries, 
and these pamphlets, distributed gratuitously to leaders of opinion and persons 
interested in conciliation, are highly appreciated, as instructive as they are useful, 
and have done very much by their timeliness, the excellence of their style, and 
their pleasing effect to foster friendly relations and to remove misunderstandings. 
Dr. Butler has made it his aim to send the publications only to people who are 
interested in the movement or who, if interested, would contribute to its advance- 
ment ; he has conferred with his friends and from them obtained lists of people 
interested, and these in turn have supplied other names, so that to-day he has a 
mailing list of more than 78,000 names of responsible people in the United States 
of America and Canada to each one of whom a monthly pamphlet is sent. 

Recently — indeed, last year — a German Society was formed at Frankfort 
under the charge of the distinguished lawyer, Dr. Nippold, whose book on the de- 
velopment of procedure in international conflicts is a masterpiece, and is likely to 
become a classic. More recently still — indeed, in the present year — an English 
branch has been started under the presidency of Sir Vezey Strong, formerly Lord 
Mayor of London. A Canadian society is in the process of formation, and I 
should be very happy, indeed, if through my personal endeavors, branch societies 
should be formed in the countries which I have the honor of visiting in South 
America. 

It may probably be asked : What is the relation between the original Society 
and the branches ? And, in reply, I beg to quote the language of Dr. Butler, who 
is President of the American Branch, of whose Executive Committee I am happy 
to be a member: "While," he says, "the Paris society is the parent branch, there 
are no legal relations between it and the various other branches. All work together 
in friendly co-operation and sympathy, and each provides the others with materials 
and suggestions for publication and propaganda". And in speaking of what he 
hopes to be the result of my mission, he says : "We should want the branches in 
Latin American countries, if organized, to stand in precisely the same relation to 
the Paris Society that the other branches now do : in other words, we use the 
same motto, the same imprint, and we look to the Paris Society as the parent 
founder." 

From this very brief and inadequate account it is to be seen that while the 
societies co-operate and work in harmony, and regard themselves as affiliated 
with the parent Society in Paris, each branch is in reality a separate and inde- 
pendent society, and conducts its operations in such a way as best to appeal to the 
public which it seeks to interest and to influence. The most important officer of 
the Society is the Secretary, who practically conducts the Society under the con- 
trol of the Executive Committee. 

We cannot, however earnestly we may try, greatly advance the cause of inter- 
national peace at any time, but we cannot hope to accomplish anything by folding 
our hands and dreaming of a better and happier state of affairs. We must do the 



180 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

work we find at hand in the hope that every effort counts, although we may not 
ourselves see the result. International peace will come, for it is the wish of the 
enlightened in all countries ; but it will come slowly, as we have to overcome a 
habit of mind, a method of procedure deeply embedded in our history. We have 
the consolation of knowing that what comes slowly endures, and the conservatism 
which makes it difficult to change will, when we have accomplished our purpose, 
secure and maintain the results of our labors. One cannot work in vain in a good 
cause, and nothing can assuredly be nobler than to remove misunderstandings, to 
establish relations of mutual confidence, and prepare the way for a brighter and 
happier future. 



3. The Proposed Court of International Justice 

We are so accustomed to look upon international law as a universal system 
of law, accepted by each and every member of the Society of Nations and 
applied by all in their foreign relations, that we would be shocked by the 
statement that, however universal it may be in theory, it is far from universal 
or uniform in its practical application. If a conflict of a purely legal nature 
arises between any two nations, we find an appeal made to the law of nations 
which either does, or is supposed to apply to and to be decisive of the con- 
troversy. One nation lays down a principle as admitted law; the other denies 
the existence of the principle, or questions its applicability to the dispute, or, 
admitting the principle and its applicability, interprets it as self-interest suggests 
or dictates. Few principles are so clear as not to admit of different interpre- 
tations, and the facts may be and often are presented in such a way as to 
withdraw them from the category of cases to which an admitted principle 
ordinarily applies or should be made to apply. Take, for instance, without 
dwelling upon it or seeking to determine which view is right or wrong, the 
doctrine of the "favored-nations-clause," the existence of which is universally 
admitted, but which is interpreted one way by many nations and another way 
by the United States ; or the doctrine of blockade, which is admitted, but which 
is interpreted and applied in one way by the nations of Europe, and another 
way by Great Britain and the United States. It is admitted that the favored 
nation clause exists, just as that a law of blockade exists; but the content of 
the law or its interpretation differs. The practice of nations varies to-day just 
as it has varied in the past, and uniformity in theory is in reality diversity in 
fact. To be convinced of the extent of the variation that exists both as to 
the content and form of the law, and its interpretations and application, we 
need only to consult authoritative treatises on international law written by 
equally skilled and conscientious authors of different nationalities. When the 
authorities agree, we may look upon the principle as established; when they 
differ, who shall decide ? In the Society of Nations all are equals, and there 
is no superior. If an International Court of Justice existed, as courts of last 
resort exist within the nations, the question could be settled by judicial decision; 
but no such court exists, and special tribunals of The Hague or mixed Com- 
missions only bind the nations which are parties to them, not the nations at 
large, which are unaffected by the decision. Each nation is thus thrown upon 
itself, and judges according to self-interest or the passions of the moment; 
and a failure to accept the contention of one, for both contentions cannot be 
accepted, may lead to a rupture of friendly relations and plunge the nations 



182 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

into a war which seems to be justified at the moment, but which is condemned 
by the bar of history, which is the final judge of nations, be they large or be 
they small. 

The Peace Palace at The Hague, which was opened on August 28 last 
with imposing ceremonies, is the permanent home of the Court at The Hague, 
and is a visible and eloquent evidence of the fact that the legal disputes of 
individuals should be settled by that due process of law which exists in every 
country that makes a pretence to civilization. And yet, however firmly we may 
cling to the illusion that a court exists, and however much we may speak of a 
permanent court at The Hague, we know, or at least should know that no 
permanent court exists, except in name; that there is only a panel or list of 
judges from which a special or temporary tribunal can be formed for the trial 
of a case which comes into being for the case, and goes out of existence with 
its decision; that the decision only binds the litigating nations which were a 
party to the controversy and its settlement ; that it is not a precedent except as 
between the nations ; that it does not bind a subsequent and special tribunal of the 
same or of different arbiters ; that the decision is often a compromise of a 
conflict which diplomacy has failed to settle, and that as a compromise or as a 
decision between two nations, it cannot develop international law in that careful 
and conscious, impartial and passionless, systematic and scientific method in 
which national jurisprudence is developed. 

To those who have made a careful study of the process by which law 
and order have been developed within national lines, it is evident that law and 
order between nations will be developed by the play and interplay of the same 
forces at work upon a larger scale and in a larger field; for the nations of the 
world are but the people of the world arranged in more or less artificial groups ; 
and that the experience and practice of each must produce, in the course of 
time, approximately like results. International peace is thus seen to be con- 
ditional upon the growth of law between peoples, its interpretation and its 
application by apt agencies between nations as between individuals, with such 
modifications as differences of conditions suggest or require. Let us take a 
single and simple illustration. As there is no superior in a society of equals 
it is difficult to see how an international court can be armed with the power of 
execution, or how nations will allow any nation or any combination of nations 
to execute a judgment when the use of force in the past has been so productive 
of evil and can so easily give rise on the part of the nation or the group to 
claim and exercise a right which may be destructive of the equality and inde- 
pendence of nations, without which international law, as the law of equal and 
independent nations, is impossible, if indeed, it be conceivable. Fortunately, 
international decisions have been observed without exception, as the submission 
to arbitration involves compliance with the decision and the good faith of the 
nation suggests compliance, even if the self-interest of the moment or amour- 



APPENDIX VII 183 

propre suggested non-compliance. We do not need to trouble ourselves with a 
difficulty in theory which does not present itself in practice, or question the 
possibility and efficiency of an international court simply because it lacks a sup- 
posed essential of a national court of justice, which history shows is a growth 
and a matter of convenience, not an essential prerequisite of judicial procedure, 
or its necessary or inevitable consequence. 

It might have been said in 1794 when the Jay treaty was negotiated between 
Great Britain and the United States, that the settlement of international disputes 
by means of Mixed Commissions was impracticable, if not impossible ; but the 
successful decision of important and perplexing questions between the two 
countries, by means of the Mixed Commission organized under Article 7 of that 
Treaty, showed beyond peradventure the possibility and feasibility of such a 
method. It might have been said that the mixed commissions or temporary 
tribunals were only fitted to determine minor or unimportant questions, or that 
important questions would not be submitted to arbitration unless Great Britain 
and the United States had submitted to the Geneva Tribunal the so-called 
Alabama Claims, which at one time aroused the passions of the two countries and 
threatened to provoke war. 

And finally, it might have been maintained with some show of reason that 
questions could not be arbitrated if the law were doubtful or non-existent, unless 
the Treaty of Washington, of 1871, had not shown how comparatively easy it 
was to lay down principles of law, the so-called three rules, for the settlement 
of claims, if only the nations really wanted to settle their disputes by an appeal 
to reason. For it is and always has been true, as Secretary Root said, on laying 
the corner-stone of the Pan-American building at Washington — an earlier and 
not less imposing Temple of Peace — "the matters in dispute between the nations 
are nothing: the spirit which deals with them is everything." 

When, therefore, the First Peace Conference met in 1899 in The Hague — ■ 
the birthplace of Grotius, the first systematic expounder, if not the founder, of 
International Law — nations had the experience of a century in the settlement of 
controversies, often of a perplexing, sometimes of an acute nature, and it is not 
unnatural that they should commend arbitration of questions "d'ordre juridique 
et en premier lieu dans les questions d 'interpretation ou d'application des 
Conventions Internationales comme le moyen le plus efficace et en meme temps le 
plus equitable de regler les litiges qui n'ont pas ete resolus par les voies diplo- 
matiques." 

It was also natural and highly beneficial that the Conference should draft a 
code of arbitral procedure based on the practice and experience of the century, 
especially as the Institute of International Law had, as far back as 1874, drafted 
such a code of procedure which many consider as superior to the code of the 
Conference based upon it. 

But the Conference did more than this : it created machinery consisting of 
a panel or list of judges from which a temporary tribunal could be formed for 



184 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

the trial of a case. It did not make a small and select list of persons who would 
form a court, which the parties in litigation agreed in advance to accept. If it 
had done this, it would have created a court, not merely the machinery for the 
creation of a temporary tribunal. 

What it actually did will be seen from the following quotations from the 
"Convention pour le reglement pacifique des conflits inter nationaux :" 

Article; 23 

Within the three months following its ratification of the present Act, each 
signatory Power shall select four persons at the most, of known competency in 
questions of international law, of the highest moral reputation, and disposed to 
accept the duties of arbitrators. 

The persons thus selected shall be inscribed, as members of the Court, in a 
list which shall be notified by the Bureau to all the signatory Powers. 

Any alteration in the list of arbitrators is brought by the Bureau to the 
knowledge of the signatory Powers. 

Two or more Powers may agree on the selection in common of one or more 
members. 

The same person can be selected by different Powers. 

1899 

The members of the Court are appointed for a term of six years. Their 
appointments can be renewed. 

In case of the death or retirement of a member of the Court, his place shall 
be filled in accordance with the method of his appointment. 

This supplied the nations with a panel or list of possible arbiters. The 
next quotation shows the method by which the temporary tribunal for the trial 
of the case was to be formed : 

Article 24 

When the signatory Powers desire to have recourse to the Permanent Court 
for the settlement of a difference that has arisen between them, the arbitrators 
called upon to form the competent tribunal to decide this difference must be 
chosen from the general list of members of the Court. 

Failing the direct agreement of the parties on the composition of the arbitra- 
tion tribunal, the following course shall be pursued : 

Each party appoints two arbitrators, and these together choose an umpire. 

If the votes are equal, the choice of the umpire is intrusted to a third Power, 
selected by the parties by common accord. 

1899 

If an agreement is not arrived at on this subject, each party selects a different 
Power, and the choice of the umpire is made in concert by the Powers thus 
selected. 

The tribunal being thus composed, the parties notify to the Bureau their 
determination to have recourse to the Court and the names of the arbitrators. 

The tribunal of arbitration assembles on the date fixed by the parties. 



APPENDIX VII 185 

Finally, an administrative council consisting of the diplomatic agents at 
The Hague was formed to organize an international bureau to act as a greffe 
for the Court and to supervise its operations. 

We have here machinery for the creation of a temporary tribunal; we do 
not have a court in the proper sense of the word, much less a permanent court, 
although, with pardonable exaggeration, the Conference called the machinery 
such. In so doing it familiarized the public with the name and the ideal of a 
permanent court but made it difficult to create a truly permanent institution, for 
we are so much the slaves of words that we have almost persuaded ourselves, even 
the wisest among us, that a permanent court exists, so that, when we advocate 
the establishment of a truly permanent tribunal, with a definite and permanent 
corps of judges, we are met either with indifference or with the question: Why 
create another permanent court when one exists already? 

At the Second Hague Conference to which, fortunately, Latin America was 
invited and attended — due to the statesmanship and insistence of Senator Root, 
for how can a Conference be truly international and legislate ad referendum for 
all the nations when all the nations are not represented? — an attempt was made 
to constitute alongside of the so-called permanent court, a truly permanent tri- 
bunal, composed of judges acting under a sense of judicial responsibility, to use 
the happy phraseology of Mr. Root who, as Secretary of State, instructed the 
American Delegation to present and to urge upon the Conference the creation 
of a permanent international court in the strict sense of the word. 

The necessity of such a tribunal appealed to the judgment of many members 
of the Conference, and Monsieur Bourgeois pointed out in a masterly and con- 
vincing manner how the so-called permanent court could properly and advan- 
tageously be used for questions of a political nature, composed, as it would be, of 
arbiters chosen for the special case, in whose wisdom the parties in dispute had 
peculiar confidence, — whereas a truly permanent court in the judicial sense of 
the word could be formed for the trial of cases of a legal nature. The purpose 
was not to supersede the so-called permanent court, but to erect a truly permanent 
tribunal alongside of it, thus endowing the nations with two agencies of peace, 
and leaving them free to use one or the other as they might prefer, or as the 
nature of the case might suggest. 

After much discussion and debate, turning largely on the method of selecting 
the judges, a draft convention was adopted consisting of 35 articles dealing with 
the organization, the competence and procedure of the Court of Arbitral Justice, 
as the new institution was to be called. Owing to the inability to hit upon a gen- 
erally acceptable method of selecting judges, due no doubt to lack of time and 
the difficulty of the subject, the convention was adopted ; but the definite establish- 
ment of the court was referred to the nations, which, it was hoped, would be 
able to reach an agreement upon this necessary detail through diplomatic channels, 
as appears from the language of the resolution or voeu. It is thus evident that 



186 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

great progress was made towards the creation of a truly permanent court similar 
in its general nature to national courts of justice. 

The project has been approved by publicists of all countries, and at the 
session of the Institute of International Law held at Christiania in 1912, the 
proposition was unanimously approved by that body, and the establishment of the 
court recommended after prolonged and profound discussion. The subject will 
doubtless appear in the programme of the Third Conference, and it is hoped and 
believed that the court so long and so earnestly desired will take its place in the 
Peace Palace as the Court of the Nations. 

I do not offer suggestions as to the composition of the court, or as to the 
method of selecting the judges. I merely call your attention to the fact that 
the project stands approved by the Conference of the nations, by the most 
accredited publicists, by the Institute of International Law and by public opinion 
irrespective of nationality, and I ask you to give attention to the problem of 
selecting the judges, and to call the attention of Governments to it, for it must 
be solved, and it cannot be solved without the most careful thought and con- 
sideration of the best minds of the world. In the final solution of the problem, 
Latin America has a right to be heard, and it is the duty of our continent, com- 
posed of twenty-one republics, almost a half of the nations invited to and par- 
ticipating in the Conference to express itself clearly and unmistakably not in the 
interest of any one nation, nor of any one continent, but in the interest of the 
world. I like the fine and impressive phrase of the enlightened President of 
Argentine : "L'Amerique Latine" — I would rather phrase it — "L'Amerique toute 
entiere — pour l'humanite." 

Even though fearing to prolong this article beyond its proper bounds, I 
should like to make certain observations to show that, if history is read aright, 
the creation of a Court of International Justice is inevitable. The partisans of 
arbitration in place of judicial proceedings in the strict and technical sense of 
the word, seem to regard arbitration as the culmination of a long and tedious 
development and to believe that no further advance should be attempted, when in 
reality arbitration is only a step, an important step, it is true, in the transition 
from the period when complainants knew only self redress to the period of 
judicial proceedings. The reader should not be surprised at our failure to note 
the historical relation between arbitration and judicial proceedings, since the 
jurisconsults of the Roman Empire themselves regarded arbitration not as the 
source of their judicial institutions but as a modification of those institutions. 
Nevertheless, modern jurists have shown that among the early inhabitants of the 
European continent those who were dissatisfied resorted to self redress, from 
which sprung the custom of submitting controversies to a third party for deci- 
sion, and this method became general, the parties choosing by common accord the 
person who should act as judge or arbiter. Students of Roman Law have shown 
that the same system prevailed in Rome, and that, by means of a long and slow 
development, the settlement of disputes by arbitration gave rise to judicial pro- 



APPENDIX VII 187 

ceedings and culminated in the establishment of a permanent judicature. In this 
way the parties to a controversy agreed to submit it to arbitration; they also 
agreed on the designation of a judge who was not a public official but a private 
individual and whose award was not an act of state but merely the opinion or 
sentence of a judge or arbiter, enforceable by the parties who had agreed in 
advance to abide by it. In process of time a panel or list of judges was drawn 
up, from which panel or list, called the "Album Judicum," the parties should 
choose the judge or arbiter for each case as it arose, until finally in the reign of 
Diocletian, the magistrate was substituted for the private judge or arbiter, whose 
decision became an act of state and was enforced as such. The analogy between 
the development of that system of jurisprudence which either governs or influ- 
ences the larger part of civilized nations and the development which is taking 
place between nations, is almost too obvious for comment. Nations in dispute 
have redressed and unfortunately, even at the present day, do redress their real 
or supposed wrongs by force of arms. A sentiment has been developed which 
condemns unlimited or unrestricted self redress, so that nations frequently 
agree by treaty or convention, which is nothing more or less than a contract, 
to submit controversies, especially if they are of a legal nature, to judges of 
their own choice. In 1899 the First Hague Conference followed, unconsciously 
it would seem, the precedent of Roman Law by creating a panel or list of 
judges — the modern "Album Judicum" — from which the parties in dispute should 
select the judges or arbiters of the individual case; and at the Second Hague 
Conference an attempt was made, as I have already said, to take the last and 
final step in this unconscious development by creating a truly permanent court. 
It is thus seen that arbitration is not an end in itself, but a means to an end, and 
that historically and logically it developed a judiciary and judicial procedure. 

Did time permit I might show that machinery for temporary tribunals or 
commissions between nations has proved unsatisfactory either in the long or the 
short run and that such machinery has been replaced by permanent judicial tri- 
bunals. Thus the three Cantons which formed the nucleus of the Swiss Con- 
federation agreed in 1291 to submit their disputes to the arbitration of self 
appointed arbiters who possessed the confidence of the community. In the next 
century the Cantons agreed to submit their disputes to arbiters of their choice 
and adopted from time to time various methods of selecting the judges to form 
the temporary tribunals. In 1848, the system of arbitration by temporary tri- 
bunals was replaced by a permanent Federal Tribunal. 

A distinguished Swiss publicist, M. Dubs, points out the advantages of this 
permanent tribunal over the system which he aptly calls "Tribunaux de hasard." 

Among other things he says : 

"On institue le juge pour toute une serie de cas, sans egard a une cause 
speciale; ceux qui le nomment sont tout a fait impartiaux; ils peuvent peser 



188 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

avec soin ses qualites morales et ses capacites techniques ; on introduit un ordre 
fixe dans la procedure, une tradition dans le jugement au fond, et la clarte dans 
l'execution." 

Let me also cite the example of the United States. By the Articles of the 
Constitution of 1778, the States of the Union provided for the settlement of 
disputes of all kinds that might arise between them, by the appointment of tem- 
porary commissions. As a matter of fact, certain disputes were submitted to 
tribunals thus organized but the procedure was unsatisfactory. The Supreme 
Court of the United States, created by the Constitution of 1787, was therefore 
invested with the power to examine and to decide disputes between the States, 
and this system has been so satisfactory that we are at a loss to understand the 
objections which are made to the settlement of disputes between nations by 
judicial tribunals composed of judges acting under a sense of judicial 
responsibility. 

Lest it be said that the formation of a permanent Tribunal is only possible 
in a confederation such as Switzerland and in a Federal State such as the United 
States, I hasten to call your attention to the fact that the establishment of an 
International Court of Justice in no wise depends upon a federation of states. 
It only requires a public union for a judicial purpose. Of public unions, there 
are many examples, the most striking of which is perhaps the Postal Union to 
which all nations and self-governing Colonies are parties, with a bureau in case 
of need to pass upon disputes which may arise between or among the parties of 
the Union. It is thus clear that history points to the development of arbitration 
within national lines into a judicial procedure; that the experience of nations 
which have had temporary tribunals has led them to discard this machinery for 
the more satisfactory, more impartial, less expensive and more expeditious 
method of settling disputes of a legal nature which may arise between their 
Cantons or States, by a permanent Tribunal whose decision binds every Canton 
and State. The various public unions for a particular purpose, of which there 
are some fifty or more, show that a union of this kind is compatible with the 
independent existence of nations. 

If history is with us, the future is assured. We can safely follow the experi- 
ence of nations, for in this instance we are not taking "a leap in the dark," but we 
are acting consciously with full knowledge of the difficulties of the old system, 
the advantages of the new, and with the experience of the past and present as 
a guide. 



4. The Proposed Academy of International Law at The Hague 

At the Second Hague Peace Conference to which every American State was 
invited and in which every American State, with two exceptions, participated, a 
proposal was made by Mr. Sturdsa, then the Prime Minister of Roumania, to 
establish an Academy of International Law at The Hague which would, as its 
distinguished proposer said: "in a methodical way, maintain science on a level 
with the principles enunciated by the Conference, and practice on a level with the 
progress inaugurated". To effect this noble and beneficent purpose, Mr. Sturdsa 
proposed that the members of the Academy be chosen from among the most emi- 
nent scholars, university professors, and jurists of all countries, men whose 
ability is recognized in the various branches of international law, private inter- 
national law, the law of war, comparative commercial law, commercial systems 
and economic relations, colonial systems and the history of international law. 

The Academy was to be international in the further sense that the instruc- 
tion offered was to be given, without discrimination, in German, English, French 
and Italian, for three or four months of each year, preferably during May, June 
and July. The student body was to be made up of diplomats, army officers and 
persons serving in the higher administrative departments of the State, and 
scholars to be selected by each State, party to the creation of the Academy. The 
expenses were to be borne by such nations, and the Academy was to be under 
the control and the supervision of the permanent administrative Council of the 
Hague, composed, as is well known, of the diplomatic representatives of the 
different countries accredited to The Hague. 

This proposal of Mr. Sturdsa was contained in a letter to the President of the 
Conference, who read both the letter and the proposed constitution of the 
Academy appended to the letter. He gave his hearty approval to the project and 
expressed the hope that the suggestions would inspire some generous benefactor 
with the desire to follow the example of Mr. Carnegie and to immortalize his 
name by connecting it with an establishment which will do great service to the 
cause of peace and ensure justice by contributing to the spread of its principles 
and to the instruction of worthy laborers in that field. 

No action was taken by the Conference on Mr. Sturdsa's project, but the 
letter and the proposed constitution of the Academy were embodied in the records 
of the Conference and are published in its official proceedings. The idea, how- 
ever, has not been lost sight of, and a Dutch Committee, under the presidency of 
the late Mr. Asser, was formed in order to interest the Carnegie Endowment and 
if possible to obtain from its funds the money necessary to support the Academy. 
The Endowment has approved the idea in principle and has expressed itself as 
willing to furnish the means necessary for its installation in the Palace of Peace, 



190 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

in which quarters are to be provided for it, as well as for the expenses necessarily 
required for its successful operation, provided it should appear, — 

( i ) That there was a general desire among the nations for its establishment, 
and 

(2) That the nations should evidence their interest in its creation by desig- 
nating one or more of its officials to attend and profit by the course of instruction. 

The reason for this hesitation on the part of the Endowment is obvious, for 
we should strengthen existing institutions rather than create new ones, unless 
their need or their usefulness be clearly demonstrated. 

These views were made known to Mr. Asser, who communicated with the 
leading publicists of Europe, from whose replies it appeared that there was a 
general — indeed, one might almost say, a well-nigh unanimous and universal — 
desire for the creation of the Academy. The Dutch Minister of Foreign Affairs 
sounded the nations through diplomatic channels as to their willingness to partici- 
pate in the Academy in the way suggested by the Endowment, viz. : by the designa- 
tion of students to follow its courses, and, although replies have not been received 
from all countries, as diplomacy moves somewhat slowly and cautiously, it appears 
that the projected Academy will not be without support of the kind desired from 
a goodly number of nations. It should be mentioned in this connection that the 
matter of the Academy has twice been submitted to the International Law Asso- 
ciation and approved by its members and that, at a recent meeting of the Institute 
of International Law held at Oxford in August of the present year, that distin- 
guished body expressed itself unequivocally and overwhelmingly, — indeed, with 
practical unanimity — in favor of the establishment of the proposed Institution. 
It may be said, therefore, that at least one of the two difficulties standing in the 
way of its creation has been overcome, and if our friends in South America 
could be brought to approve the idea, and their Governments to designate one or 
more qualified persons to attend its courses, the Academy would cease to be merely 
a project and would open its door to competent students from all countries. 

I am specially instructed to lay this matter before you, in the hope that it 
will meet with the approval of Latin American publicists, and that the Govern- 
ments of the American Republics may be willing to participate to the desired 
extent of designating competent persons to attend the courses of the Academy. 
We believe that they would gladly designate such persons if the matter were 
properly brought to their attention and if it were made to appear — which is the 
fact — that the establishment of the Academy depends in no small measure upon 
their cooperation. I may further say, in accordance with the instructions I have 
received, that if the executive powers of the Latin American States would express 
their willingness to comply with the request, either made or to be made through 
diplomatic channels by the Dutch Minister of Foreign Affairs, it is believed that 
the last difficulty standing in the way of the Academy would be overcome. 

Let me briefly outline the plan of the proposed Academy. It may be said that 
it is still Mr. Sturdsa's plan with some important modifications and additions. 



APPENDIX VII 191 

The Academy is to be primarily an Academy of International Law and of con- 
nected or related subjects. It is to meet for three months in the year, preferably 
from July to October, that is to say, during the vacations of the Universities and 
schools of political science. Systematic courses of instruction are to be given, as 
Mr. Sturdsa proposed, in Spanish as well as in German, English, French and 
Italian. The Academy, however, is not to be under the control or to depend upon 
the support of the nations, although it is hoped that the nations will, as suggested 
by Mr. Sturdsa, designate appropriate persons to follow its courses of instruction. 
The Academy is, with the express permission of the Committee in charge, to be 
installed in the Palace of Peace which was recently opened, and is to be adminis- 
tered in its material aspects by the Committee of the Palace of Peace. Its 
curriculum is to be determined by a body called the Curatorium, to be composed, 
in the first instance, of past presidents of the Institute of International Law repre- 
senting different countries, so that the international aspect will be as controlling 
as it is apparent. The sums necessary for the support of the Academy are to be 
furnished by the Carnegie Endowment and to be administered by a special Finance 
Committee with its seat at the Hague. It has been thought best to place the 
Academy under private control, and not to request the Governments to furnish 
any part of the money needed, although it is hoped that they will indicate their 
interest in it by designating students to follow the courses. 

Without going into further details of this kind, which although important 
are not of general interest, let me briefly state the special object of the Academy, 
which, in the language of the Dutch Committee, is to "promote the study of 
public and private international law and political science, including besides the 
law of nations, international, civil and penal law and political science in connec- 
tion with international law." 

The means of attaining this object are, — 

(i) Lectures on special subjects by the most competent professors of the 
science in question, who shall belong to different nationalities. 

(2) Systematic instruction to be given in the whole or a special part of one 
of the sciences by the most competent professors, who shall, likewise, belong to 
different nationalities. 

(3) Advanced instruction to be given by lecturers and professors according 
to the seminar method which has produced such remarkable results in Germany 
and wherever this method has been tried, and, finally, the publication of the 
courses given by distinguished lecturers. 

If we analyze the means thus briefly mentioned, we shall see that lectures on 
special and timely subjects are to be delivered by lecturers of great attainments, 
who are not merely theoretically qualified but who have had the advantage of 
practical experience in dealing with the subjects on which they are to speak. 
Thus, as a single instance, I may state that the distinguished French publicist and 
arbiter, Monsieur Louis Renault, who has represented his country with marked 



192 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

distinction in all the recent international conferences, including two at The Hague, 
and who is the favorite arbiter of disputes between members of the family of 
nations, has agreed to deliver, should the Academy be established, a course of 
thirty lectures on arbitration and arbitral procedure. These lectures would be 
delivered in French and when published would be widely distributed. They would 
be placed in public libraries, in University libraries, and would be exposed for 
sale at moderate prices so that all interested in the subject might procure the 
printed volume. It is expected that four or five lecturers from different countries 
would deliver their courses on important and timely subjects of a theoretical and 
practical nature during each session of the Academy. 

You can, of course, be sure that the distinguished publicists of Latin America 
would be called upon to deliver lectures in Spanish on the various problems of 
international relations. Systematic instruction will be given by professors of 
different nationalities and of known competence, and, as it would be either im- 
possible or impracticable to treat the whole of the subject during a single session, 
without danger of superficial treatment, it is proposed to divide the subjects into 
their component parts and to treat each part separately, if separate treatment be 
possible or desirable. 

We can easily see the advantage to students of the different view points of 
the various professors, as the courses would not merely be courses in international 
law but, as one may say, courses in comparative international law, for, unfor- 
tunately, international law is colored by national feeling, just as a stream bears 
traces of the soil over which it flows. And not only would this be an advantage 
for students; it would, it is believed, be an even greater advantage to the pro- 
fessors themselves who, by daily contact and the exchange of thought, would be 
forced to take note of the opinions of their colleagues of different nationalities 
and thus be led to internationalize international law. 

Finally, it is easy to see the great benefit which not merely advanced students 
would derive from studying under the distinguished lecturers and professors, but 
lecturers and professors alike would profit from the interchange of thought which 
would necessarily take place in such intimate and such small courses, because the 
number of advanced students in the seminar would be small in comparison with 
the numbers attending the lectures and the systematic instruction. 

It is not difficult to create the Academy, to invite lecturers and to secure 
the services of eminent teachers for a summer term. It may, however, be diffi- 
cult to find a student body and the Endowment is not willing to have the distin- 
guished specialists lecture to empty benches. Again the Endowment is desirous 
that the student body shall be of such a kind and of such attainments and be 
drawn from many different countries so that the influence of the Academy will 
be felt upon specialists in international law, whether they become teachers, practi- 
tioners or diplomats. It is for this reason, among others, that the co-operation of 
foreign Governments is considered essential, for, if each country represented at 
The Hague Conference would designate but a single student each year, the student 



APPENDIX VII 193 

body, however small, would be of the kind to profit by the instruction and, per- 
haps, to influence beneficially the foreign relations of their respective Govern- 
ments. 

Let us now consider in what respects the Academy would differ from existing 
Academies : 

(i) It would be installed in the Peace Palace at The Hague and students 
could not fail to be impressed by the aims and purposes of the Peace Palace. 

(2) The lecturers would be selected from the world at large, and the courses 
could be delivered in any one of the five languages. The publication of the 
lectures would, it is believed, enrich international law with a series of monographs, 
so that in the course of a few years students in all parts of the world would have 
the advantage of the matured views and conceptions of distinguished practitioners 
and theorists, which would not be the case if the Academy did not exist. 

(3) The small faculty would be unique in the sense that it would be com- 
posed of professors drawn from different countries, lecturing to students repre- 
senting the nations of the world which recognize and apply international law in 
their foreign relations. 

(4) The seminars would be unique in the sense that instead of being national, 
as is now the case, they would be international and directed by experts of different 
nationalities. 

There is so much that could be said for the Academy, there is so little that 
could be urged against its institution, that its promoters feel it should be estab- 
lished without further delay. It does not compete with any existing institutions 
either in character, in quality, or in the time of its sessions. It offers instruction 
equally unique, and not elsewhere to be had. There appears to remain but a 
single obstacle to its realization. If the Latin American countries would consent 
to designate one or more competent persons from each of the American Republics 
to follow the lectures and the courses of the Academy, the Endowment would 
feel justified in taking the final steps necessary for its organization. I dare not 
overstep the limits of propriety in urging your Governments to participate in the 
labors of the Academy, but I can assure you that, with your co-operation, the 
Academy will become a reality instead of being as it has been for years a 
dream, a hope, the aspiration of the publicists of many and distant countries. 



5. National Committees for the Third Hague Peace Conference 

The Latin American diplomats and delegates who played such an important 
part in the Second Hague Peace Conference do not need to be advised of the 
necessity of preparing, well in advance of the Third Conference, the various 
plans and projects which it may be the desire or intention of their respective 
Governments to propose: Indeed, it is common knowledge that the labor of 
preparation had not been done, or at least not done in a thoroughly satisfactory 
manner, by all of the Governments represented at the Second Conference. Many 
of the projects were, it is believed, drafted in the Hague, without consultation 
with the home Governments, and delays occurred in order that the Governments 
might receive the projects which their delegates proposed to present, and furnish 
the delegates with the necessary instructions. It is believed that the Conference 
would not have remained so long in session if the necessary preparation had been 
done before the delegates arrived at the Hague, and that the tension observable 
at times, especially in the last weeks of the Conference, would have been avoided. 

The Conference, itself, was convinced that, if there was to be a Third Con- 
ference, its programme should be drawn sufficiently in advance of the probable 
meeting, and communicated to the Powers, so that they might have the projects 
which they felt inclined to present prepared before the opening of the Conference 
at the Hague. The result of this general feeling was the adoption of the follow- 
ing resolution: 

The Conference recommends to the Powers the calling of a Third 
Peace Conference which should take place within a period of time similar 
to that which has elapsed since the former Conference, at a date to be 
fixed by common accord among the Powers, who are accordingly urged 
to prepare for this Third Conference in ample time to allow of their 
deliberations being carried on with the necessary sanction and despatch. 

To attain this end, the Conference is of the opinion that it would 
be advisable that, about two years before the probable date of the meeting, 
a Preparatory Committee should be appointed to collect the various pro- 
posals to be submitted to the Conference; to determine the matters sus- 
ceptible of an international agreement; and to prepare a programme 
sufficiently in advance to permit the careful consideration of all these 
matters by the interested nations. This Committee would likewise be called 
upon to propose a method of organization and procedure for the Con- 
ference itself. 

The Conference thus recommended the calling of a Third Conference, and, 
as all the Powers agreed to the resolution, it is evident that a Third Conference 
is to be expected. 



APPENDIX VII 195 

Dr. Andrew D. White records in his interesting Autobiography a conversa- 
tion with Baron de Staal, President of the First Conference, in which he 
stated that a Second Conference was likely to meet in the ensuing year. It did 
not, and eight years elapsed between the First and the Second Conferences. 
Without fixing a precise date, it is agreed that a Third Conference should meet 
approximately eight years after the adjournment of the Second, that is to say, 
in 19 1 5, approximately. The precise date of the meeting is, according to the 
resolution, to be fixed by common accord among the Powers, and, in order that 
the Powers might have ample time for preparation, it was proposed that some 
two years before the probable date of reunion a Preparatory Committee should 
be appointed to determine the matters susceptible of an International agreement 
and to prepare a programme sufficiently in advance to have it properly considered 
by the Powers. 

If, therefore, the recommendation of the Conference is to be carried into 
effect, it is evident that steps should be taken during the present year to form 
this Preparatory Committee. As far as is known, the Governments have not 
decided that the Third Conference shall meet in 191 5 or that it shall meet at any 
specified date, but it is fair to presume that, if the meeting does not take place 
in 191 5, it will not be postponed to a much later date, as public opinion will, no 
doubt, be as insistent as it was before the meeting of the Second Conference. 
But, it is evident that the Preparatory Committee has a very difficult task, and 
that it needs all the light it can receive from the four quarters of the world. 

Now it stands to reason that a very serious responsibility rests upon each of 
the Governments invited to the Second Conference, which will, doubtless, be 
invited to the Third Conference because, not merely the success of the Con- 
ference itself, but the form and character of the programme depend upon the 
cooperation of the Governments. There are twenty-one American Republics; 
there are twenty which we in our country ordinarily speak of as the Latin 
American Republics, that is to say, Latin America forms almost one-half of the 
nations invited or actually participating in the Conference, and, as each nation 
has a vote, it can be seen that Latin America by the mere force of numbers, not 
to speak of its intellectual greatness, can go far to determine the nature and 
content of the programme. This, therefore, taxes the American representatives 
with a grave responsibility, for right and duty are correlative terms. 

Supposing that the Conference is to take place approximately in 19 15 or 
1916, and that a Preparatory Committee of the Powers will be appointed some 
two years in advance of the meeting of the Conference, it would seem to be 
clear, without argument, that the Governments invited to the Second Conference 
should take steps to formulate their views and conceptions so that they may be 
ready to have them presented to the Preparatory Committee immediately upon its 
constitution. How can the preparation for the Third Conference best be made? 
Many European Governments have appointed small National Committees to con- 
sider the questions which their respective Governments would like to have included 



196 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

in the programme, as well as to formulate and express views upon the other 
questions contained in the resolution. Mr. Root, in his instructions to me, has 
suggested that every American country appoint a National Committee for the 
consideration of possible contributions to the programme of the next Hague 
Conference, and that arrangement be made for the intercommunication of such 
Committees among all American countries, and I am directed to make this sug- 
gestion in the hope that it may commend itself to the wisdom and discretion of 
the various countries which I have the honor to visit. It is not meant that the 
American countries should unite upon a common programme and that it should 
be presented to the International Committee as the views of the Western Hemi- 
sphere; but it is felt to-day, as was formerly and as ever will be the case, that 
in a multitude of counsellors there is wisdom. 

I pass to the question of the appointment of a Committee which may be 
called an International Preparatory Committee to distinguish it from the like 
Committees of the various States. Its composition is a matter of very great 
importance upon which the voice of America should be heard. While it is, of 
course, true that the International Committee will make its report to the nations 
at large and that the Governments will in last resort accept or reject the pro- 
gramme, nevertheless the recommendation of this Committee will in all 
probability be adopted, so that the programme of the Third Conference will 
not really be drafted by the Powers in consultation but by the Members of the 
Preparatory Committee. How is this International Committee to be formed? 
Is it to be composed of the large Powers, and of some small Powers? If so, 
who is to choose the Powers? This is a very difficult matter and one which 
gives ground for serious thought and reflection. It is well known that President 
Roosevelt took the initiative in bringing about the meeting of the Second Con- 
ference. It is a fact, however, that the programme was drawn up by Russia 
after consultation with various Powers, which it took care to consult; but it 
would seem more respectful to the participating Powers, as well as in the 
interest of the programme itself, that all should be asked to contribute their 
suggestions as to the formation of the programme — not merely asked to ratify 
a "fait accompli". I cannot escape the feeling that the practice of the American 
Republics could be of great service to the States at large. I refer to the Pan- 
American Union of which every American State is a member, and to its Govern- 
ing Board, composed of the Diplomatic Representatives of each of the Latin 
American Republics under the Presidency of the Secretary of State of the 
United States. It is the custom of the Board to refer important matters which 
are up for discussion to small committees for study and report; the small 
committee has no power of its own; it merely lays before the Board the results 
of its labors, and, in appropriate cases, with a recommendation. The Administra- 
tive Council of the Permanent Court of The Hague is composed of the diplomatic 
agents of the various countries represented at The Hague under the Presidency 
of the Dutch Minister of Foreign Affairs. Now, it has occurred to not a few 



APPENDIX VII 197 

of us that, as the programme of organization of the Third Conference is a 
matter of interest to all nations, just as the programme of the Pan American 
Conference is primarily of interest to each and every one of the American 
Republics, the Administrative Council, composed, as it is, of the representatives 
of the Powers, might be, by agreement of the Powers, invested with the duties 
and the functions of the International Preparatory Committee : in other words, 
that it be the International Committee and that it be authorized to appoint a 
small committee to be called Executive Committee — a comite d'examen or 
cotnite d 'etudes, which small committee should take up and consider the various 
matters mentioned in the resolution, and report its conclusions or recommenda- 
tions to the Administrative Council, just as a Special Committee of the Board 
reports to the Governing Board. In this way a small working committee could 
be formed without difficulty, because such committees were frequently appointed 
at the Second Hague Conference, without any friction whatever. 

The Members of the Special Committee would undoubtedly confer with 
their Home Governments, so that the projects reported to the Administrative 
Council would have already had the approval of their Governments; and the 
Members of the Council, not Members of the Special Committee, would un- 
doubtedly know what was taking place in the Special Committee, or, at any 
rate, the reports of the Special Committee might be submitted to their respective 
Governments for their advice. 

It is believed that Members of the Council would not need to wait any 
length of time for the reports or recommendations of the Special Committee, 
because the Diplomatic Corps resides at The Hague, its Members meet con- 
stantly and are on familiar and intimate terms. The Governments represented 
at The Hague would thus be kept in close and intimate touch with the pro- 
ceedings of the Committees. 

There is perhaps one objection to this plan because although forty- four 
States were represented at the Second Conference, only thirty-four are accredited 
at The Hague; but the reply to this objection is that the Powers not represented 
can, if they choose, appoint diplomatic agents, or the Powers not represented 
might have the reports made to them by the Dutch Minister of Foreign Affairs, 
as President of the Administrative Council, from time to time as they are 
received from the Preparatory Committee, and they could transmit to him 
their views. 

I do not consider it advisable to attempt an enumeration of the subjects 
to be included in the program, as that is a matter for the Foreign Office to 
determine. I would state, however, that, just as the Second Conference con- 
sidered as unfinished businesss the projects of the First Conference, which were 
rejected for the time being, the Third Conference will no doubt regard the 
voeux and recommendations of the Second Conference as unfinished business, 
and that, as the Second Conference revised the conventions of its predecessor 
in the light of experience and further reflection, it is to be presumed that the 



198 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Third Conference will subject the labors of its enlightened predecessor to ex- 
amination, criticism and amendment. I would state as likely to figure in the 
program : — 

(i) A General Treaty of Arbitration in which the Powers will agree either 
to arbitrate generally with the usual reservations, or to arbitrate specified lists 
of subjects to which the reservations would not apply. 

(2) The definitive establishment of the Court of Arbitral Justice decided 
upon by the Second Conference, by a method of composition which will be 
agreeable to the States generally. 

(3) The consideration of the Declaration of London regarding Prize Courts, 
because it is hardly to be expected that the thirty odd Powers not represented 
at London will be willing, by accepting the Declaration, to consider the ten 
Powers which actually framed the document as their representatives for this or 
for any other purpose. 

I beg to call your attention to the fact that the Institute of International 
Law appointed a special Committee to consider the questions to be discussed at 
the next Peace Conference, and agreed upon the following list : — 

I. Elaboration of regulations with reference to the laws and customs of mari- 
time warfare in the relations between belligerents. 

II. Creation of a Court of Arbitral Justice. 

III. General Treaty of Arbitration. 

IV. Elaboration of regulations concerning a permanent organization of the 
Peace Conference. 

V. Extension of the Convention of October 18, 1907, regarding the opening 
of hostilities, so as to cover in general all international agencies of coercion. 

VI. Determination of the maritime belt, and regulation of its sphere. 

VII. Effects of war upon the private rights of individual nationals of the 
belligerent States. 

VIII. Rules governing airships in time of war. 

IX. Rules governing lighthouses in time of war. 

X. Value of arbitral awards with regard to national jurisdictions and au- 
thorities. 

XL Diplomatic and Consular immunities. 

XII. Competence of the Courts with regard to foreign States. 

It is a matter of importance for the American Republics to make a study of 
the subjects to be included in the programme, and to formulate the projects to be 
presented and discussed in the Conference, since it is not enough that the States 
should merely attend the Conference, but that they should also take part in the 



APPENDIX VII 199 

deliberations. America should contribute to the result, and this can only be 
adequately accomplished if the programme has been carefully studied and the 
projects considered and drafted before the Conference meets. 

There is another viewpoint from which the subject should be considered, 
which would go a long way towards justifying the appointment of the National 
Committees, without reference to the influence of such Committees upon the 
labors of the International Preparatory Committee. The question of attitude is 
of fundamental importance in considering the subject of an international con- 
ference, for it is not to be presumed that national interests will play as great a 
role in an international conference as they would at home. A nation taking part 
in an international conference should, therefore, consider not merely in how far 
it can secure acceptance of its national views and of its special interests, but in 
how far it can, in the interest of the common good, yield its national views and 
special interests, or in how far it can consider a compromise where it is impossible 
wholly to yield. Considered solely in this light, it is believed that the national 
committees would render genuine service to their respective countries. 

Distinguished publicists have held that more real progress has been made in 
the development of international law since the meeting of the First Conference 
than in the interval between that date and the Congress of Westphalia. This 
statement may or may not be true, but it is believed that the meeting of that 
Conference and the meeting of the succeeding Conference was, and will be, more 
important than any convention negotiated, declaration adopted, resolutions agreed 
to, or recommendations which may have been made. The importance of the 
First Conference, leaving out its work, lay in the fact that twenty-six nations were 
willing to meet and to discuss questions of general, as distinct from special, 
interest. The importance of the Second Conference, to which, through the in- 
stance of Mr. Root, all the Latin-American nations were invited, lay in the fact 
that practically all the nations of the world went into the Conference at The 
Hague, and for four months their representatives were within four walls, engaged 
in the peaceable discussion of great and beneficent projects, many of which they 
were able to put in acceptable form, and the individual delegates were so im- 
pressed with the result of their meeting that they recommended unanimously a 
Third Conference. In the instructions to the American delegates of the Second 
Hague Conference, Secretary Root said: 

"The immediate results of such a conference must always be limited 
to a small part of the field which the more sanguine have hoped to see 
covered; but each successive conference will make the positions reached 
in the preceding conference its point of departure, and will bring to the 
consideration of further advances towards international agreement opinions 
affected by the acceptance and application of the previous agreements. 
Each conference will inevitably make further progress and, by successive 
steps, results may be accomplished which have formerly appeared im- 
possible. 



200 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

"You should keep always in mind the promotion of this continuous 
process through which the progressive development of international justice 
and peace may be carried on; and you should regard the work of the 
Second Conference, not merely with reference to the definite results to be 
reached in that Conference, but also with reference to the foundations 
which may be laid for further results in future conferences. It may well 
be that among the most valuable services rendered to civilization by this 
Second Conference will be found the progress made in matters upon which 
the delegates reach no definite agreement". 

And in commenting upon the results of the Second Conference, he said : 

"Let me go beyond the limits of the customary formal letter of trans- 
mittal and say that I think the work of the Second Hague Conference, 
which is mainly embodied in these Conventions, presents the greatest 
advance ever made at any single time toward the reasonable and peaceful 
regulation of international conduct, unless it be the advance made at the 
Hague Conference of 1899. 

"The most valuable result of the Conference of 1899 was that it 
made the work of the Conference of 1907 possible. The achievements 
of the Conference justify the belief that the world has entered upon an 
orderly process through which, step by step, in successive Conferences, 
each taking the work of its predecessor at its point of departure, there may 
be continual progress toward making the practise of civilized nations con- 
form to their peaceful professions". 



6. The American Institute of International Law and National Societies of 

International Law 

Ubi societas, ibi jus. Where there is a society of nations there is a law of 
nations. As the society grows or changes, the law is developed or modified to 
meet the new or different needs of the society. A nation cannot exist and fulfil 
its mission separate and apart from the society any more than man can live in 
isolation. This has been so in all ages of which history furnishes us a record, 
so evident, indeed, that Aristotle felt justified in saying that man was a political 
animal, for men tend to form a society, however large or small, and organize 
themselves on a large or small scale for a political purpose. The child is born 
into society, grows up and prospers in obedience to and under protection of law. 

As with man, so with the nation. It cannot exist of and for itself; it is a 
political unit, to cling to the Aristotelian phrase, a body politic, or a moral 
person, to use the language of the day. It is either a member of the society of 
nations which has naturally resulted from the mere existence of nations, the needs 
of mutual intercourse, and the necessity of a law to regulate and control. This 
intercourse, for where there is society there is and must be law, or the nation is 
admitted into membership of the society of nations, as is the case with every 
country of the American Continent, upon its application or its recognition as a 
member by the international society, in accordance with the law of nations, which 
is the law of the society ; and by such membership each and every nation acquires 
the rights which each nation possesses in an equal degree. Each nation is the 
equal in and under the law, and at one and the same time becomes subject to the 
duties imposed by the law ; for rights and duties are correlative terms. The 
right of one is the right of both ; the duty of each is to respect the rights of each 
and of all. It necessarily follows that if each nation is the equal of the other, 
each is independent of the other and of all, and legal equality and independence 
are inherent and fundamental rights of the nations without which they cannot 
exist, and that the respect of the equality and independence of each is equally 
inherent and fundamental. But independence does not and should not mean the 
right and the power to act without reference to the other members of the society ; 
for a failure to respect the rights of others is the violation of a duty ; if unchecked, 
it results in anarchy, which is incompatible not merely with the progress and 
well being of the members of the society but with the continued existence of the 
members. Such a state of things is impossible among men, however loosely 
united into a community ; it is equally impossible among nations, members of one 
and the same society recognizing and applying the principles of law which result 
from the very nature of things which have taken definite form and consistency 
through the customs and practice of nations, and through the tacit or express 



202 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

recognition of the rights and duties of nations considered as equal members of 
the International Society. We are far removed from the condition of things 
which Hobbes could define as a bellum omnium contra omnes, even although the 
law of nations is neither so developed nor so adequate as the internal or municipal 
law of each and every member of the society of nations. 

While we can accept the principle of equality without qualification, we must 
understand independence in the sense that a nation is not and cannot be free to 
act in violation of the rights of other nations, just as individual men and women 
renounce absolute and unrestrained freedom of action in order that their rights 
shall be observed and protected as well as the rights of the others. Independence 
thus shades necessarily, naturally and imperceptibly into interdependence, without 
however questioning the equality of each nation and its freedom from intervention 
on the part of others. The exercise of extreme rights is renounced not for the 
benefit of any one nation, not at the instance of any one nation, but for the common 
benefit and well-being of all states. 

Without attempting to prove the obvious, namely, that all states are equal, — 
Chief Justice Marshall said in a famous decision of the Supreme Court of the 
United States that Geneva and Russia have equal rights, — and that all states are 
and must be independent in the sense that no state possesses the right to control 
the destiny or to interfere with the action of any nation, however small its people 
or scant its population, the question naturally arises : What is this law of the 
society of nations which every nation acknowledges and applies or should apply, 
in its relations with other members of the Society of Nations ? Without attempt- 
ing to define this law — for the present purpose is to state its existence and the 
necessity of its existence — it may be said that the law referred to is International 
Law, which has come into being to meet the needs of nations and which is evi- 
denced by the custom and practice of nations during the past few centuries. Once 
the possession of the few — the canonists and philosophers, the jurists and the 
statesmen, it has become the possession of the many. It is no longer to be 
gathered exclusively from the usages and customs of nations, as found in the 
archives of foreign offices, but it exists in systematic form, in the works of 
Wheaton, to cite an authority of the United States, and in the elaborate and 
authoritative treatise of Calvo, to cite a leading treatise of a South American 
author. 

International law was the especial possession of the foreign office in the days 
of autocratic government in former times. When a special class or the chosen 
few governed the nation and directed its foreign relations responsible to an 
irresponsible ruler, it was perhaps not necessary that the law of nations, to use 
the older name, be studied and its principles mastered by the many. But a change 
has come over the world in the last hundred years and more. The irresponsible 
ruler of the past is the responsible sovereign or president of to-day, in the case 
of every empire,. kingdom or republic, the ruler, whether hereditary or elective, 
is responsible to the people, for whose benefit government is and must henceforth 



APPENDIX VII 203 

be administered. The people of each and every country have become masters of 
the situation, and we must, to use a familiar expression, educate our masters, 
not merely as to their rights, but as to their duties, as to which we all need 
enlightenment. To pass wisely upon the foreign policy of our government, and 
to see to it that it conducts its foreign relations in accordance with the principles 
of international law, as should be and will be increasingly the case, we must 
know the principles of law to be administered. The people at large possess the 
power and the duty to influence foreign relations ; and as the people in the end 
are responsible for the correct and enlightened conduct of foreign affairs, and 
as they suffer the consequences of the mistakes of government, it follows neces- 
sarily that they must fit themselves for the responsibility which they cannot avoid, 
by a broad and extended acquaintance with the principles of international law. 

It is not enough that the diplomats understand the system ; larger sections 
of the people must know, if they are to pass upon foreign questions, the prin- 
ciples by which they should be and by which they will be decided in the long run. 
It is not enough that international law be taught in the universities, for we must 
reach those larger bodies that do not attend universities, and which nevertheless 
possess the right and therefore the responsibility of suffrage. 

It cannot be expected that every voter will become an international lawyer, 
and it is not necessary that every voter should. It is, however, vital that large 
classes of the people should take an interest in the law which controls inter- 
national intercourse, and by which the rights and duties of nations are to be 
tested. It is only through a knowledge of international law that a just public 
opinion can be formed on questions of foreign policy; and as public opinion 
fashions foreign policy, it needs no argument that a knowledge of the principles 
of international law should be sufficiently disseminated, in order to form public 
opinion, on enlightened lines, in each and every nation belonging to the Society 
of Nations. 

The expression "Society of Nations" has been used as more accurate and 
significant than the Family of Nations; but in a large and generous sense, the 
idea of a family applies with peculiar force and suggestiveness to the twenty-one 
republics of the Western world, alike in their origin, having similar forms of 
government and identical in their hopes and aspirations. We must set our houses 
in order, we must solve our own problems, we must so regulate our foreign, 
I had almost said our own family, relations, if we expect to influence the nations 
of the older world, which, like the average man, are more influenced by practice 
than by precept. 

Confining ourselves to what may be called the American problem, how can 
we develop international law in such a way as to make it meet the growing needs 
of the twenty-one American Republics; how can we formulate the rules of law 
which are necessary to decide our problems ; how can we conduct our mutual 
relations in such a way as not to disturb the harmony that should exist among 
members of one and the same continent, and how can we bring a knowledge of 



204 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

these matters home to the classes that form public opinion in each and every 
one of the twenty-one American Republics? 

Profoundly grateful that the relations of the past redound to the credit of 
our common continent and that our present relations are harmonious, may we 
not hope that these good relations will not only be perpetuated but strengthened 
in the future, and that with each added year our relations shall become more 
intimate, more confidential, in a word more fraternal, as becomes the members 
of a great family sharing a common destiny in a common continent? 

The Pan-American Conferences may be trusted to continue ; the regular 
and periodic exchange of professors and students may be and we hope will be 
inaugurated ; the knowledge of the institutions and of the contributions of each 
nation to the common good may become general ; the visit of representative men 
may and will tend to create and promote social intercourse to substitute friend- 
ship and kindly sympathy for ill-feeling if it exists; and to usher in an era of 
good understanding; but the relations of nations, considered as such, depend 
upon an understanding and dissemination of just principles of law and their 
application to disputes which are bound to arise among members of one and the 
same family, and at times because they are members of the same family. 

How can this law be developed as it must be to meet the changing or growing 
needs of the American Republics, and to solve the problems common to America, 
or which are more prominent in America than elsewhere? How can these prin- 
ciples, when found and formulated, be best disseminated? These are questions 
which must be answered; and upon the correct answer depends in large part the 
future relations of the American nations. 

It needs no argument that a law to affect all must be made by all ; that is to 
say, it must be the result of cooperation. The law of nations, as Chief Justice 
Marshall once said in effect, is not the law of any one nation; it is not made by 
any one nation, it is not imposed by any one nation, it cannot be changed by any 
one nation. If it is to be made by the nations as a whole, how can the nations 
cooperate ? and to speak only of the American Republics, how can they cooperate 
in developing the law of nations, and how can this law be popularized in such a 
way as to affect or create public opinion in each of the American countries? 

The law may be codified where it exists, and created where it does not exist, 
by the action of governments, just as the American States have proposed to do, 
and have actually begun to do, in a meeting of American jurists held at Rio de 
Janeiro in June, 1912. But governments move slowly, and when they move too 
rapidly and in advance of public opinion, their work does not last. Is there not 
a place for private, that is to say, for scientific coooperation, among the publicists 
of America? A private body of Europe, the Institute of International Law, 
founded in 1873 on the suggestion of a distinguished North American, Francis 
Lieber, although he did not live to see it formed, and of which Institute the dis- 
tinguished South American, Calvo, was a founder and an ornament, has done 
more than any single agency to develop international law. Its drafts on various 



APPENDIX VII 205 

phases of international law, its resolutions, its statement of old as well as of new 
law, have been accepted by specialists ; and its various projects have been adopted 
by governments because of their value and practical worth. Slowly and tenta- 
tively, scientifically and unerringly, it has solved problem after problem, and 
produced model after model of correct codification. Much of its work has been 
adopted by The Hague Conferences, notably the code of arbitral procedure, the 
code of land warfare, the suggestion of a court of prize ; and it is not too much 
to say that it made possible the work of The Hague. It prepared the way and 
furnished model drafts which could be accepted with but slight modifications by 
the Conferences. The patient labor of an unofficial Society, composed of pub- 
licists representing science, not governments, furnished not merely the form but 
the substance for the official Conference. It is hardly open to question that an 
official codification of international law must be preceded by the careful, patient, 
inconspicuous labor and devotion of scientists, if the codification is to state just 
principles of law which the society of nations can adopt, instead of a compromise 
of conflicting interests and views of the governments, which through their official 
and instructed delegates, codify in whole or in part the law of nations. In any 
event scientific and unofficial actions should precede or accompany official 
codification. 

Is there not room for an American Institute of International Law, composed 
of an equal number of publicists from each of the American countries, which can 
represent the conscience of America as well as its ability, and which can do for 
our continent what the older Institute has done for the world in the last forty 
years? Could not this American Institute work in friendly cooperation with 
National Societies of International Law in every American capital, which would 
make known the deliberations of the American Institute and cooperate in its 
labors and discussions? Could not these National Societies bring together all 
persons interested in international law, create this interest where it does not 
exist, and form a center in each country for the study and popularization of 
international law? 

Two American publicists, the one of Chili, Mr. Alejandro Alvarez, the other 
of North America, Mr. James Brown Scott, thought so, and they have established 
the American Institute of International Law, after conference with and upon 
approval of leading publicists of the continent. The members of the older Insti- 
tute thought so, as is evidenced by their warm and unsparing praise of the 
proposal in formal opinions written for publication, which have been published 
in a brochure containing the constitution and by-laws of the new Institute, and 
the other documents relating to its formation. And such is the opinion of the 
distinguished North American statesman, Elihu Root, who has accepted the hon- 
orary presidency of the Institute, who appreciates and admires the peoples of 
Latin America because he has visited and knows them. 



206 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

Mr. Root was a party to the formation of the new Institute and has promised 
it his powerful aid, and as its honorary president, lends it the prestige of his 
name and reputation. 

In an address at the opening of the twentieth Peace Congress in The Hague 
during the month of August, the distinguished Dutch publicist, Professor de 
Louter, referred to the three hopeful and encouraging events of recent date, all 
of which are of American origin. The first was the codification of international 
law proposed by the Pan-American conferences and actually begun by the Con- 
gress of American Jurists which met in Rio de Janeiro, in June, 191 2 ; the second 
was the formation of the American Institute of International Law, proposed and 
founded by the happy cooperation of South and North American publicists ; the 
third was the creation and proposed activity of the Carnegie Endowment for 
International Peace, which I have the honour to represent. 

Let me quote what Professor de Louter, a foreign and therefore unprejudiced 
observer says of the American Institute : 

The second illustration is furnished by an essentially scientific Institute, 
whose moral influence and effect are not less important. The gradual coming 
together of North and South America has called into existence a new agency 
of progress. The projects for a Pan-American Union which have been 
discussed for a long time, but never practically realized, have at last led to 
a definite result within the peaceful field of scholarly pursuits, thanks to 
the talent and perseverance of two illustrious men from the two halves of 
the hemisphere. In the course of the past year Dr. James Brown Scott, the 
distinguished jurisconsult of the United States, and Mr. Alejandro Alvarez, 
formerly a professor and at present counselor to the Chilean Ministry of 
Foreign Affairs, who, in June, 1912, had brought to bear a salutary influence 
at Rio upon the plan of codification, have, after a personal meeting at Wash- 
ington, founded in the latter place in October, 1912, "The American Institute 
of International Law." This Institute has for its object: first, to contribute 
to the development of international law ; second, to crystallize the common 
.sentiment for international justice; third, to promote pacific settlement of all 
international disputes arising between the American countries. This lumin- 
ous plan was born of the conviction that it is better to foster ideas of right 
and justice through slow but constant infusion into the minds and hearts 
of the peoples, than through diplomatic negotiations not based upon a gen- 
eral, popular feeling. 

When it is understood that the pacifist movement is more general in 
America than in any other country, and rests either on a religious basis or 
upon a community of interests and of tendencies worthy of envy, we can 
best appreciate this new evidence of vigorous progress which has come to us 
from the other side of the ocean ; it puts new life into our hopes and gives 
fresh impetus to our efforts. 

Let me now dwell for a few moments on the question of National Societies, 
which are to be formed and affiliated with the Institute, whose members are to be 
chosen from the members of the National Societies, the members of which are of 
right Associates of the Institute and participate in its scientific labors by enrolling 



APPENDIX VII 207 

themselves as such and paying the moderate annual dues. The older Institute 
contemplated National Societies but none were formed until after the founding 
of the American Institute. In February of the present year the French Society of 
International Law was founded, due it is believed to the existence and successful 
career of the American Society of International Law, and to the plans for the 
American Institute. 

The purposes of the French society are, according to the first bulletin which 
it has issued : 

"(i) To develop the knowledge and study in France, of International Law; 
(2) to coordinate the efforts and unify the opinions of the French jurisconsults, 
and bring closer together, by a mutual exchange of ideas, all those who may be 
interested in International Law, public and private; (3) to give to public opinion 
a definite and clear idea of the work undertaken in the scientific domain by the 
Institute of International Law, and in practice by the Conferences on Private Inter- 
national Law and The Hague Peace Conferences, and to contribute, within the 
limit of its powers, to the progress of this work, in conformity with the traditions, 
sentiments and interest of France." 

I have preferred to state the aims and purposes of the French Society as 
Europe is supposed to have a greater influence upon us in America than American 
precedent. If a national society is needed in France and can perform useful work, 
it is fair to presume that such a National Society may be formed in each of the 
American Republics, and that it can justify its existence by useful and construc- 
tive work in the country of its origin. The French Society issues a modest bulletin 
distributed to its members to keep them in touch with the Society's work. This 
could be done by each American Society, and the interchange of the different 
bulletins would keep all of the National Societies informed of the work done by 
the others, as well as the members of the Society issuing the bulletin. A large and 
comprehensive Review of International Law would not need to be founded or 
supported by the American Institute, as the American Journal of International 
Law, now issued in a Spanish translation by the American Society, could be modi- 
fied so as to make it the organ of the Institute, without additional expense and with- 
out any cost to the Institute. It could be distributed to the members of the Institute 
and to the Members of the National Societies, so that the International Society 
would thus have an international journal, and each National Society a national 
bulletin. All workers in international law in all parts of America would thus know 
the work done by the International Society, as well as the work done by each 
national society ; all workers in the field of international relations could be brought 
into close and intimate relations and kept in touch by the journal and bulletins, 
and instead of isolated activity all would press forward together towards a common 
goal, and international law would be developed, expounded and popularized by 
the nations of a continent, instead of by the efforts of a few scattered and disin- 
terested souls, working perhaps in isolation and without encouragement, or at least 



208 MR. BACON'S VISIT TO SOUTH AMERICA 

without the encouragement which comes from conscious, well-directed and coop- 
erative effort. The law of a continent can only be made and developed by a con- 
tinent ; the international law of the Americas can only be made and developed 
by the Americans, acting in common accord and inspired by American ideals. 

I am specially instructed by Mr. Root, the friend of the Americans, the Presi- 
dent of the Endowment under whose auspices I have the honor to address you, 
and Honorary President of the American Institute of International Law, and 
President of the American Society of International Law, to urge you to cooperate 
with the founders the American Institute, so as to make it a powerful instrument 
in the development of international law, to urge you to form National Societies 
of International Law, affiliated with the American Institute for the popularization 
of international law, and the dissemination of its principles, so that the foreign 
relations of the Americas may be regulated by a law binding all because made, 
developed and accepted by all. 

Let me indicate in closing how the American Institute can help the Carnegie 
Endowment in its great and peaceful mission. The older institute was requested 
to act as adviser to the Endowment's Division of International Law, either as a 
body, or by a committee. It accepted the invitation and appointed a committee com- 
posed of the most experienced and illustrious of European publicists, so that the 
Division has the advantage of the best advice that Europe can furnish as to what 
it should undertake and as to the method of execution. The Consultative Com- 
mittee — as that body is called — meets at the request of the Director of the Division 
of International Law, and gives advice upon questions submitted and offers advice 
on its own initiative. As the Institute has performed, and performs, incalculable 
services to the cause of peace by the development of international law, the 
Endowment makes a generous subvention to the Institute which is employed in 
part in meeting the traveling expenses of the members of the Institute, which does 
not meet in any fixed place but holds its meetings from year to year in the dif- 
ferent countries of Europe, and also in part in paying the expenses of its Com- 
missions, and in the preparation and publication of its valuable reports. 

If the American Institute is firmly established with the national and affiliated 
Societies, cannot the American Institute be asked to act through a committee as 
advisor to the Endowment's Division of International Law on all problems of 
American nature and all undertakings affecting America ; and may not the Institute 
justify such financial support as may be needed to be expended in the same way 
as the subventions to the European Institute? 

I dare not prolong an address already too long, but I cannot conclude without 
a sincere and personal appeal, warm from the heart, to urge you to help the Ameri- 
can Institute to perform the mission for America and for the world, that the 
European Institute performs for Europe and the world, and to urge you to form 
the National Societies of International Law, affiliated with the American Institute, 
without which its great and beneficent work cannot be undertaken, or if under- 
taken, cannot be carried to a complete and gratifying success. 



PARA EL FOMENTO DE NUESTRAS BUENAS 

RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS 

LATINOAMERICANOS 

[FOR BETTER RELATIONS WITH OUR 
LATIN AMERICAN NEIGHBORS] 

VIAJE A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

[A JOURNEY TO SOUTH AMERICA] 

PARTE II 

ESPANOL, PORTUGUES Y PRANCES 

[Part II. Spanish, Portuguese and French] 



Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional 

DIVISION DE RELACIONES Y EDUCACION 
Segunda edicion de las Publicaciones Nums. 7 y 8 



PARA EL FOMENTO DE NUESTRAS BUENAS 

RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS 

LATINOAMERICANOS 

VIAJE A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 



POR 

ROBERT BACON 



WASHINGTON, D. C. 
1916 



Es propiedad de la 

Fttndaci6n Caenegie paea la Paz Internacional 

Queda hecho el dep6sito que marca la ley, 1916. 

Washington, D. C. 



Prefacio 

No poca parte de la obra de la Division de Relaciones y Educacion de la Fun- 
dacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional se realiza por medio de visitas inter- 
nacionales de hombres de representacion. La experiencia ya ha confirmado la 
suposicion razonable de que tales visitas son utiles, y en alto grado provechosas, 
para levantar el espiritu de amistad internacional y para desarrollar la buena 
inteligencia entre las naciones. La detenida lectura del informe de Mr. Robert 
Bacon sobre los detalles de su viaje a la America del Sur durante el verano y el 
otofio de 1 9 13 demuestra precisamente cuanto contribuyen a la paz y al buen or den 
del mundo tales visitas. La politica e ideales nacionales se exponen cuidadosa- 
mente y con simpatias, no solo a las personalidades directoras de los paises que 
se visitan, sino tambien a grandes auditorios representatives compuestos de pro- 
fesores, comerciantes y hombres piiblicos. La prensa periodistica se halla casi 
uniformemente interesada y se muestra propicia a prestar su ayuda en ocasiones de 
esta clase, y al visitante de distincion y dedicado al servicio publico en su pais de 
origen se le recibe cordial y calurosamente. 

Es en alto grado importante que se multipliquen tales visitas por hombres 
de representacion a las distintas Republicas americanas. Las barreras del idioma 
habran de romperse, a medida que el conocimiento de la lengua inglesa se haga 
mas extenso en los paises suramericanos, y a medida que se aprenda en los Estados 
Unidos a leer,, hablar y escribir el espafiol. Ya se estan estableciendo entre 
los pueblos de las distintas Republicas americanas vinculos de interes comun en 
las finanzas y en el comercio. Estos vinculos se veran seguidos y robustecidos por 
otros a su debido tiempo. Entonces se habran desarrollado una verdadera opinion 
publica y un verdadero punto de vista americanos, que seran comunes igualmente 
al pueblo de los Estados Unidos y a los de las demas Republicas del Sur. 

La primera edicion del Informe de Mr. Bacon se publico en dos tomos, uno 
de ellos en ingles y el otro en espafiol, portugues y frances. Habiendose agotado 
dicha primera edicion y continuando la demanda de esta publication, ahora se 
publica una segunda edicion, en la cual van combinadas las dos versiones en 
un solo tomo. 

Nicholas Murray Butxer, 

Director Accidental. 

10 de Abril de 1916. 



SUMARIO 

Pag. 

Prefacio por el Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler v 

Nota por Mr. Bacon x 

Introduction : 

Carta de instrucciones del Presidente Root i 

Editorial de la Revista Americana de Derecho International 5 

Informe preliminar de Mr. Bacon 10 

Para el Fomento de Nuestras Buenas Relaciones con los Pueblos Latino- 

americanos 13 

I. Observaciones preliminares 13 

II. El viaje a la America del Sur 23 

Brasil 25 

Rio de Janeiro 25 

Argentina 29 

Buenos Aires 29 

Uruguay 34 

Montevideo 34 

Chile 37 

Santiago de Chile 37 

Peru 42 

Lima . 42 

Panama 48 

Interviu inserta en el Evening Post de Neuva York 51 

Editorial de la Revista Americana de Derecho International 56 

Apendices : 

I. Paris 61 

Lunch dado por Mr. Gabriel Hanotaux 61 

II. Rio de Janeiro 63 

Instituto de la Historia del Brasil 63 

Discurso del Dr. de Oliveira Lima 63 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 64 

Recepcion en la Embajada Americana 65 

Discurso del Dr. de Oliveira Lima 65 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 66 

Recepcion en la Biblioteca Nacional 74 

Discurso del Senador Ruy Barbosa 74 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 91 

Carta del Sr. Helio Lobo 103 

III. Buenos Aires 105 

Banquete dado por el Dr. E. S. Zeballos 105 

Discurso del Dr. Zeballos 105 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 105 

Recepcion de la Facultad de Derecho 108 

Discurso del Dr. Luis M. Drago 108 

Discurso de Mr. Bacon 108 



su mario — continuation 

Pag. 

IV. Montevideo 120 

Lunch dado por el Sr. Nicolay Grevstad 120 

Discurso del Sr. Grevstad 120 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 120 

Recepcion en el Ateneo 121 

Discurso de Mr. Bacon 121 

Banquete dado por el Sr. Emilio Barbaroux, Ministro de 

Relaciones Exteriores 129 

Discurso del Sr. Barbaroux 129 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 130 

V. Santiago de Chile 131 

Recepcion en la Universidad de Chile 131 

Discurso del Dr. Domingo Amunategui Solar, Rector 

de la Universidad 131 

Discurso del Dr. Luis Barros Borgofio 131 

Discurso de Mr. Bacon 136 

Note Circular de la Sociedad Nacional de Derecho Internacional. 145 

VI. Lima 147 

Recepcion en la Universidad de San Marcos 147 

Discurso del Sr. Dr. Romero 147 

Discurso de Mr. Bacon 148 

Banquete dado por el Senor Tudela y Varela, Ministro de Rela- 
ciones Exteriores 158 

Discurso del Senor Tudela y Varela 158 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 158 

Recepcion en el Centro Universitario 159 

Discurso del Senor Luis G. Rivera 159 

Recepcion en el Colegio de Abogados 160 

Discurso del Dr. Manuel F. Bellido 160 

Discurso del Dr. Anibal Maurtua 161 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 163 

Recepcion de la Sociedad Geografica 168 

Discurso del Senor Jose Balta 168 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 169 

Banquete dado por la Facultad de la Universidad de San Marcos. 169 

Discurso del Dr. Romero 169 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 170 

Carta del Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle 171 

VII. Monografias Impresas y Distribuidas en la America Latina 173 

1. La Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional 173 

Division de Relaciones y Education 177 

Division de Economia Politica e Historia 179 

Division de Derecho Internacional 184 

2. Asociaciones para la Conciliation Internacional 191 

3. Propuesto Tribunal de Justicia Internacional. 195 

4. Propuesta Academia de Derecho Internacional de La Haya . . 203 

5. Comites Nacionales para la Tercera Conferencia de La Haya. 208 

6. El Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional y las Socie- 

dades Nacionales de Derecho Internacional 214 



PARA EL FOMENTO DE NUESTRAS BUENAS 

RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS 

LATINOAMERICANOS 



VIAJE A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 



Nota 

En esta relacion de mi visita a la America del Sur en el otono de 1913, 
como representante de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional, me- 
diante invitacion del Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, Director de la Division de 
Relaciones y Education, me ha parecido bien, en gracia de la ilacion, empezar con 
la carta de instrucciones que me dirigiera el Honorable Elihu Root, Presidente 
de la Fundacion, con un editorial tornado de la Revista Americana de Derecho In- 
ternacional, comentando sobre el objeto de la mision, y con mi breve carta dirigida 
a los Sindicos a mi retorno, informandoles de lo hecho. Luego siguen una 
relacion mas detallada de las visitas que hice a las distintas capitales, otro 
editorial tornado de la Revista Americana de Derecho Internacional, en donde 
se analizan los resultados de la mision, y en conclusion, una interviu en 
donde se relatan algunas impresiones de lo que vi y 01 durante el viaje. En los 
Apendices se encontraran reproducidos los discursos, cartas y proyectos o esbozos 
de discursos que fueron pronunciados o publicados como articulos en revistas 
suramericanas. 

Robert Bacon. 
Nueva York, Junio de 1914. 



introducciOn 



Carta de Instrucciones del Presidente Root 

Washington, D. C, 20 de julio de 1913. 

Honorabi^ Robert Bacon. 
Senor: 

Tengo el gusto de confirmar la designation que de usted ha hecho, por acuerdo 
oficial, la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz International, para que, en calidad de 
representante de la misma, visite usted la America del Sur cuando lo juzgue 
oportuno durante el afio en curso. El objeto de esta mision, con respecto a la 
cual ya se ha servido usted complacernos prometiendonos desempefiarla, es des- 
pertar el interes y simpatias de los directores de la opinion de la America del 
Sur en los distintos sentidos en que la Fundacion se propone fomentar la paz 
internacional, y por medio de las relaciones y explicaciones personales promover 
la colaboracion practica en esta obra en la America del Sur. Como ya usted 
sabe, debera hacer patente a nuestros amigos de la America del Sur que Mr. Car- 
negie ha puesto en manos de ciertas personas nombradas como fideicomisarios, la 
suma de diez millones de dolares, cuyas rentas deberan dedicarlas al fomento de 
la paz internacional. Despues de un detenido estudio de la forma en que deberian 
perseguir los fines para que ha sido establecida la Fundacion, los fideicomisarios o 
sindicos de la misma formularon la siguiente exposition de los objetos especificos 
a que habrian de dedicarse las rentas del capital asi consagrado. 

a) Promover y fomentar la investigation cientifica y el estudio de las 
causas de la guerra, asi como de los metodos practicos para impedirla y 
evitarla. 

b) Coadyuvar al desenvolvimiento del Derecho internacional, a un 
acuerdo universal sobre las reglas del mismo, y a la aceptacion de estas entre 
las naciones. 

c) Difundir information y educar la opinion publica acerca de las causas, 
naturaleza y efectos de la guerra, y de los medios encaminados a entorpecerla, 
estorbarla y evadirla. 

d) Establecer una mejor inteligencia de derechos y deberes interna- 
cionales y un sentido de justicia mas perfecto entre los habitantes de los 
paises civilizados. 



2 I,A VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

e) Fomentar sentimientos de amistad entre los habitantes de los distintos 
paises y acrecentar el conocimiento e inteligencia comun entre las naciones. 

f) Promover la aceptacion general de los medios pacificos en el arreglo 
de los conflictos internacionales. 

g) Mantener, fomentar y auxiliar aquellos establecimientos, organiza- 
ciones, sociedades y agendas que se estimen utiles o necesarias para la con- 
secucion de los fines de la Fundacion. 

Para realizar estos fines, la obra de la Fundacion ha sido organizada en tres 
divisiones a saber: i) la Division de Relaciones y Educacion, de la cual es Director 
Accidental el doctor Nicholas Murray Butler, Presidente de la Universidad de 
Columbia; 2) La Division de Economia e Historia, de la cual es Director el doctor 
John Bates Clark; 3) La Division de Derecho Internacional, de la cual es Director 
el Secretario de la Fundacion, doctor James Brown Scott. Los distintos temas 
antes enumerados han sido apropiadamente asignados a estas tres divisiones. 
Los metodos y detalles de la gestiones correspondientes a cada una de estas 
divisiones se hallaran indicados en una serie de monografias que iran ad juntas 
a la presente. En estas percibira usted dos cosas : Primera, que el proposito de 
los Sindicos no es el que esta Institution se transforme en misionero que predique 
el evangelio de la paz impartiendo sus propias ideas al mundo, sino mas bien el 
promover y fomentar en todos y cada uno de los paises del mundo la organizacion 
y actividad de las fuerzas nacionales en bien de la paz. No es tanto el afiadir 
una nueva organizacion para la paz a las que ya existen en el mundo sino 
constituir el medio de proporcionar renovado vigor a todas las iniciativas que 
realmente tiendan en sentido practico a prevenir la guerra y a asegurar mas la paz. 
Segunda, que a fin de coadyuvar a la obra de cada una de estas tres divisiones, se 
ha realizado una extensa y efectiva organizacion tanto en Europa como en 
America, la cual incluye un gran numero de los mas eminentes y altamente 
respetados estadistas, publicistas y directores del pensamiento moderno. 

El gran respeto y amistad que los Sindicos de la Fundacion tienen a los 
pueblos de la America Latina y hacia los muchos y distinguidos latinoamericanos 
con quienes muchos de los Sindicos sostienen las mas cordiales relaciones de 
amistad personal, nos llevan a desear que la obra de la Fundacion alcance la 
misma activa y util cooperation en la America del Sur que ya ha obtenido en 
Europa. A este proposito nos complaceria que hiciera usted a los sefiores 
con quienes se relacione en las capitales suramericanas una explication entera 
y perfecta de la historia, de los fines y de los metodos de la Fundacion. 

Observara usted que uno de los medios por los cuales la Division de Re- 
laciones y Educacion se propone fomentar la buena inteligencia nacional es una 
serie de visitas internacionales por hombres de representation. En su consecuen- 
cia, bajo los auspicios de la Division, directa o indirectamente, el Baron d'Es- 
tournelles de Constant, de Francia, la Baronesa von Suttner, de Austria, y el 
Profesor Nitobe, del Japon ya han visitado los Estados Unidos, y el Presidente 
Eliot, de la Universidad de Harvard ha visitado la India, la China y el Japon, 



CARTA DE INSTRUCCIONES 3 

y el Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie se encuentra en la actualidad en el Japon. 
La visita de usted a la America del Sur esta incluida en esta categoria, pero tiene 
un fin mas definido y especifico que ninguna de las demas visitas mencionadas 
o que se proyectan bajo el encabezamiento indicado, ya que no es meramente 
para robustecer la buena inteligencia por medio del trato personal entre un 
norteamericano de nota y suramericanos de representacion, sino que es tambien 
para presentar a los suramericanos de nota, personalmente, la obra y fines e 
ideales de la Fundacion, y para invitar a nuestros amigos de la America del 
Sur a que en union cordial y simpatica colaboren con nosotros en llevar a cabo 
la gran obra que nos esta encomendada. 

No es conveniente ni deseable el precisar demasiado antes de su visita el 
alcance y metodos de colaboracion que seran posibles con nuestros amigos sur- 
americanos, pero usted facilmente observara que en las monografias que le 
han sido entregadas se indican ciertos medios por los cuales puede obtenerse 
dicha colaboracion sin gran demora. Por ejemplo: a) la formation de socie- 
dades nacionales de Derecho internacional que habran de afiliarse al Instituto 
Americano de Derecho Internacional; b) la presentation a los distintos gobiernos 
de la oportunidad de participar en la proyectada Academia de Derecho Interna- 
cional de La Haya proveyendo a que cada gobierno envie un estudiante de 
representacion a la Academia, si fuere establecida. Notara usted que la orga- 
nization de tal Academia destinada a colocar a los estudiantes procedentes de todas 
partes del mundo bajo la guia de los directores del pensamiento en Derecho 
internacional todos los veranos depende en gran manera de la cuestion de si 
los gobiernos del mundo experimentan la necesidad de tal institution lo suficiente 
para que le presten su apoyo oficial enviando cada uno de ellos un estudiante en 
su representacion. c) El nombramiento de comites nacionales para el estudio 
de lo que haya de aportarse al programa de la proxima Conferencia de La Haya 
y hacer preparativos para la comunicacion mutua de tales comites entre todos los 
paises americanos. d) El establecimiento de sociedades nacionales para la 
conciliacion internacional que deberan afiliarse a la asociacion principal para la 
conciliacion internacional establecida en Paris, e) Convenir lo oportuno para el 
suministro sistematico de informes para los trabajos de la Division de Economia 
e Historia de acuerdo con el programa redactado en Berna por el Congreso de 
Economistas en el verano de 191 1. Observara usted que el Dr. Kinley, que 
fue nombrado miembro del Comite de Investigation, con referencia especial a la 
America del Sur, seguira a usted en una visita a la misma dentro de 
poco tiempo, e indicara especificamente lo que puede hacerse en apoyo de las 
investigaciones de esta Division. Las gestiones de usted a este respecto deberan 
encaminarse a preparar el camino para la reception del Dr. Kinley y facilitar la 
colaboracion en sus trabajos. 

Los Sindicos de la Fundacion saben perfectamente que el progreso en la 
obra que han emprendido ha de ser necesariamente paulatino y que sus resultados 
mas substanciales habran de recogerse en un futuro lejano. Estamos tratando 



4 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

con aptitudes e impulsos firmemente establecidos en la naturaleza humana por 
el desarrollo de miles de anos, y todo lo mas que una generacion puede esperar 
hacer es promover el cambio gradual en las normas de conducta. Todos los 
calculos que se hagan a proposito de dicha obra y de sus resultados han de basarse 
no en los terminos de la vida individual humana, sino en los terminos de la vida 
prolongada de las naciones. Inconspicuos como son los resultados inmediatos, 
no puede haber, sin embargo, un objeto mas noble para el esfuerzo humano que 
el de ejercer influencia en las tendencias de la raza, a fin de que esta avance, 
por mas paulatinamente que sea, hacia la civilizacion y humanidad, apartandose 
de la brutalidad sin sentido. Es para participar con nosotros en esta noble, 
aunque inconspicua obra que pedimos a usted invite a nuestros amigos de la 
America del Sur con las mas sinceras seguridades sin reservas de nuestra elevada 
consideration y calurosa estima. 
Quedo de usted, atento y s. s., 

Elihu Root, 

Presidente. 



Editorial de la Revista Americana de Derecho International, 

Juuo, 1913 

La Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional anuncia que el antiguo 
Secretario de Estado y ex-Embajador de los Estados Unidos en Francia, 
Honorable Robert Bacon, hara una visita bajo sus auspicios a la America del 
Sur durante el proximo otofio. El fin especifico de la visita de Mr. Bacon no 
se ha hecho publico todavia, pero el objeto general de la mision, segun se dice, 
es interesar a los hombres que dirigen la opinion en la America del Sur en los 
distintos medios elegidos por la Fundacion para fomentar la paz internacional, 
y por medio del contacto y explanaciones personales conseguir la cooperacion 
practica de la America del Sur en dicha obra. 

Los fines y propositos de la Fundacion Carnegie ya han sido varias veces 
comentados en las columnas de esta Revista. En el numero de enero de 191 1 
insertamos la carta de Mr. Carnegie que acompafiaba la escritura haciendo el 
traspaso de los bonos, en la cual Mr. Carnegie manifestaba sus razones para hacer 
su donacion y en el numero de abril de 191 1, asimismo se exponian la organizacion 
permanente efectuada por los sefiores Sindicos y los fines especificos a los cuales 
dedicarian los intereses producidos por dicha donacion. En el numero siguiente 
publicamos un discurso del Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, uno de los miembros 
de la Junta de Sindicos y del Comite Ejecutivo de la Fundacion, pronunciado en 
el momento de la apertura de la Conferencia del Lago Mohonk en 24 de mayo 
de 191 1, en el cual explico la division del trabajo de la Fundacion en tres departa- 
mentos generales, la Division de Relaciones y Educacion, Economia e Historia, 
y Derecho Internacional, y manifesto lo que los sefiores Sindicos esperaban llevar 
a cabo en cada una de dichas divisiones. 

Los Anuarios publicados por la Fundacion correspondientes a 191 1, 1912, 
suministran los detalles del trabajo que se realiza en cada una de estas divisiones 
y por ellos puede obtenerse alguna idea de lo que la Fundacion espera efectuar 
en Sur America como resultado de la visita de Mr. Bacon. 

En la Division de Relaciones y Educacion se han nombrado cuerpos de 
corresponsales y una Junta Consultiva para Europa y Asia compuesta de hombres 
prominentes y de influencia en los distintos paises. Hasta ahora no parece 
haberse dispuesto seme j ante organizacion para la America Latina, y la extension 
de la organizacion europea a esos paises muy bien podria decirse que es el objeto 
primordial de la visita de Mr. Bacon. Tambien se hace referencia en los Anuarios, 
a un intercambio educacional con la America Latina, incluyendo no solamente 
un canje de profesores sino tambien un cambio de estudiantes. Segun se desprende 
del ultimo Anuario, el intercambio educacional con el Japon ya se ha llevado 



6 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

a cabo con exito por la visita a los Estados Unidos durante 191 1 a 1912 del 
bien conocido educacionista japones, Dr. Inazo Nitobe, y la visita correspondiente 
al Japon durante el pasado afio del Dr. Hamilton W. Mabie ; pero no parece que 
hasta ahora haya sido posible el realizar un intercambio tal con la America 
Latina, aunque todos los afios se ha hecho provision para ello por los oficiales 
y Sindicos. Proyectose dar comienzo al intercambio con la America Latina 
durante el afio de 1912 y en su consecuencia se hizo lo oportuno para obtener la 
visita a los Estados Unidos del Dr. Luis M. Drago, ex-Ministro de Relaciones 
Exteriores de la Republica Argentina ; pero el estado de salud del Dr. Drago hizo 
que el proyecto no pudiera consumarse. Quizas la presencia de Mr. Bacon en la 
America del Sur se utilizara para combinar un programa definitivo para llevar 
a cabo estos propositos. 

Otro de los proyectos relacionados bajo esta Division es el de las visitas 
internacionales de hombres de representacion. Tales visitas ya han sido 
inauguradas con Asia por el Dr. Charles W. Eliot, y con Europa por la visita 
del Baron d'Estournelles de Constant y varios otros eminentes europeos a los 
Estados Unidos. El viaje de Mr. Bacon es evidentemente el primer paso en el 
susodicho intercambio de visitas con la America Latina. Esta Division parece 
estar tambien particularmente interesada en la extension de sucursales de la 
Asociacion para la Conciliacion Internacional, la cual tiene su oficina principal 
en Paris y una dependencia poderosa en la ciudad de Nueva York. A este 
proposito es interesante notar que si las recomendaciones del Director Accidental 
de la Division de Relaciones y Educacion son atendidas por los sefiores Sindicos 
es posible que la Fundacion se valga mas de esta forma de propaganda en el futuro, 
como un medio distinto al de las sociedades de la paz las cuales hasta ahora han 
sido generalmente los agentes de la propaganda popular en el movimiento en 
favor de la paz. El siguiente extracto del informe del Director Accidental del 
Comite Ejecutivo, de fecha 16 de noviembre de 1912, demuestra claramente la 
distincion que existe entre las dos formas de organizacion y los distintos campos 
de accion de cada una de ellas : 

El Director Accidental es decididamente de la opinion, formada como 
resultado de dos afios en el estudio de las condiciones que prevalecen tanto 
en los paises europeos como en los Estados Unidos, que el trabajo de 
propaganda en apoyo de los fines para los cuales la Fundacion ha sido esta- 
blecida, puede realizarse mas efectiva y economicamente no por medio de 
organizaciones para la paz solamente, sino por medio de organizaciones 
que tengan un alcance mas amplio y que abarquen mas en su radio de accion. 
Los que se hacen miembros de una sociedad cuyo nombre indica que se 
halla dedicada a la paz, ya estan convertidos. En todas las naciones del 
mundo existe un sinnumero de hombres y mujeres de recta razon y bien 
intencionados que, a la par que son completamente refractarios a la idea 
de afiliarse a ninguna sociedad para la paz, se hallan prestos y ansiosos a 
contribuir a la obra de promover una inteligencia internacional mejor, asi 
como relaciones internacionales mas estrechas, de las cuales la paz resultara 
como un producto accesorio. La funcion de las sociedades para la paz es 



REVISTA AMERICANA DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAL 7 

distintiva y muy importante. Dichas sociedades pueden muy bien formar 
un cuerpo compacto y efectivo de trabajadores por la causa de la paz y 
del arbitraje internacional, que constituya como si dijeramos la vanguardia 
del gran ejercito que se espera se podra reclutar y poner en activo servicio. 
En el estado presente de la opinion publica por todo el mundo, el uso mejor 
que la Fundacion Carnegie puede hacer de aquella parte de sus fondos que 
han de dedicarse al trabajo de la propaganda activa, es crear y auxiliar 
aquellas organizaciones que muestren deseos y capacidad para fomentar 
estrechas relaciones internacionales, difundir el conocimiento de los pueblos 
civilizados y multiplicar los lazos de amistad y concordia entre las grandes 
naciones de la tierra. Entre estas organizaciones se encontraran desde luego 
sociedades para la paz, pero no seria juicioso el confiarles todo el trabajo 
de la propaganda. 

Recientemente se han organizado sociedades para la conciliacion internacional 
en Alemania, Gran Bretana y Canada, y actualmente se estan dando los pasos 
oportunos para organizar una asociacion de esta clase en la Argentina. Es posible 
que Mr. Bacon en su proximo viaje tenga oportunidad de sugerir el establecimiento 
de tales organizaciones en los otros paises que visite. 

Quizas sea el trabajo mas importante y de mayor alcance de la Fundacion 
el que actualmente se lleva a cabo por la Division de Economia e Historia. Una 
relacion completa del trabajo de esta Division y del de la Conferencia de 
Economistas celebrada bajo sus auspicios en Berna en 191 1 con el proposito de 
trazar un plan de investigacion se hallara en las columnas editoriales de esta 
Revista en el numero correspondiente al mes de octubre de 191 1, pagina 1037. 
Tambien se hallara en dicha Revista todo el programa recomendado por la 
Conferencia. De los informes del Director de esta Division aparece que los 
miembros de la Conferencia de Berna se han constituido en un Comite de 
Investigacion permanente para intervenir en el trabajo actual de investigacion, 
el cual se confia a colaboradores que puedan dedicar una gran parte de su tiempo 
al trabajo y poner los resultados en forma apropiada para su publication. Un 
economista americano que se halla en gran manera familiarizado con las 
condiciones prevalecientes en la America del Sur y que ha obtenido grandes 
exitos en cuestiones de ciencias economicas, lo mismo en teoria que en la practica, 
o sea el Profesor David Kinley, de la Universidad de Illinois, ha entrado a 
formar parte como miembro del Comite de Investigacion y ha proyectado un 
curso de investigacion en la America del Sur. Mr. Bacon probablemente hallara 
la ocasion propicia para explicar el trabajo de esta Division e invitar a los 
economistas de la America del Sur a que coadyuven y cooperen en la obra de 
extender a estos paises los programas de estudios delineados por la Conferencia 
de Berna. 

La Revista ha tenido igualmente ocasion de comentar sobre la organization 
y proyectos de la Division de Derecho Internacional. En el numero de octubre 
de 1912, en uno de los comentarios editoriales, se explicaban las relaciones que 
se habian establecido entre el Instituto de Derecho Internacional y la Division de 



8 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Derecho Internacional de la Fundacion, y en virtud de las cuales el primero ha 
aceptado el titulo y desempefia las funciones de Consejero General de la Division. 
En el mismo numero aparece un comentario sobre la organizacion del Instituto 
Americano de Derecho Internacional y en un editorial del numero de enero del 
afio 1913 aparece un nuevo comentario y mayor informacion a proposito de este 
proyecto. El radio de utilidad del Instituto Europeo para la Fundacion parece 
estar limitado al Hemisferio Oriental, y si es la intencion de los sefiores sindicos 
lograr un cuerpo consultivo analogo para la America Latina, el Instituto Ameri- 
cano propuesto diriase que es un cuerpo admirablemente constituido para desem- 
pefiar estas funciones, y tiene la ventaja de encontrarse ya en existencia, y sin 
duda se hallara dispuesto a seguir el ejemplo de su distinguido prototipo europeo 
y a llegar a un acuerdo analogo con la Division de Derecho Internacional. 

A desemejanza del Instituto Europeo, uno de los rasgos caracteristicos del 
Instituto Americano es que requiere el establecimiento de sociedades nacionales 
de Derecho internacional. La visita de Mr. Bacon, por consiguiente, no solo 
podria utilizarse para acelerar la organizacion del Instituto en aquellos paises 
de la America del Sur en los cuales no se haya progresado tanto como en otros 
en esta organizacion, sino para sugerir igualmente lo oportuno y ayudar en la 
formacion de sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional que habran de 
afiliarse al Instituto de acuerdo con el plan ya delineado en los numeros anteriores 
de esta Revista anteriormente citados. 

Otro de los proyectos de la Division de Derecho Internacionel en que Mr. 
Bacon podria ser de gran utilidad es la propuesta Academia de Derecho Inter- 
nacional de La Haya. El objeto de esta Academia ha sido brevemente 
expuesto en un comentario que aparece en el numero de enero de 1912 de esta 
Revista, en la pagina 202. Del informe del Director de la Division de Derecho 
Internacional de fecha 26 de octubre de 19 12 se desprende que antes de 
comprometerse definitivamente a prestar su apoyo a dicha Academia, el Comite 
Ejecutivo de la Fundacion desea tener la seguridad de que la Academia se 
aprobara generalmente por los paises representados en la Segunda Conferencia 
de La Haya, y que, si se establece, estos paises prestaran su ayuda para lograr 
estudiantes que, despues de haber cursado todos las asignaturas prescritas 
por la Academia, vayan a ocupar en su pais aquellas posiciones en que hagan 
sentir su influencia en materias pertenecientes a relaciones internacionales. A 
continuation se explica luego que con esto se quiere significar estudiantes sacados 
de los distintos ramos del servicio gubernamental, tales como los servicios 
diplomatico y consular y los establecimientos militares, navales y civiles. Para 
que este proyecto pueda tener exito en su funcionamiento es desde luego necesario 
que se obtenga el beneplacito y cooperacion de los paises de la America del Sur, 
y la position ocupada por Mr. Bacon recientemente en el gobierno de los Estados 
Unidos hara sin duda que sea posible y propio que el indique este asunto a 
los altos funcionarios con quienes se relacione en los paises que ha de visitar y 
conseguir, quizas, su ofrecimiento de cooperacion. 



REVISTA AMERICANA DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAI, 9 

Mr. Bacon esta ahora en las Islas Filipinas, y los detalles del itinerario que ha 
de seguir en la America del Sur no han sido publicados. Esperase, no obstante, 
que regresara del Oriente por la via de Europa, saliendo de Lisboa alia para 
mediados de septiembre y regresara a Nueva York antes de Navidad. Visitara 
todos aquellos paises tanto del Este como del Oeste de la America del Sur segiin 
lo permita el tiempo limitado de que dispone. 

Mr. Bacon sera el primer estadista americano que visite la America del 
Sur desde la memorable visita del Senador Elihu Root cuando era Secretario de 
Estado de los Estados Unidos. El viaje de Mr. Root constituyo en si tal exito 
en los resultados alcanzados y en la amistad y buena voluntad que se sucedieron, 
que dificilmente puede esperarse que Mr. Bacon, viajando como viaja en su 
capacidad privada, obtenga tan marcados resultados. Si logra, sin embargo, 
aunque sea en escasa medida, despertar los sentimientos que se expresaron 
a Mr. Root por todas partes, y si difunde el evangelio de la buena 
voluntad y de la amistad, de la buena inteligencia y de la conciliacion, de la 
justicia y de la paz, lo cual parece ser el deseo y propositos de la Fundacion 
Carnegie en la America del Sur, como lo ha sido y es en la America del Norte, 
en Europa y en Asia, su mision habra resultado de un exito sin igual y los sefiores 
Sindicos de la Fundacion que le enviaron mereceran felicitaciones por haber asi 
extendido su radio de accion. 



Informe Prelitninar de Mr. Bacon 



A la Junta de Sindicos de la 

Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional, 

Senores : 

Tengo el honor de informaros que, con arreglo a la carta de instrucciones 
del Honorable Elihu Root, de fecha 20 de julio de 19 13, la cual me fue entregada 
en Paris el 14 de septiembre del mismo afio por el Dr. James Brown Scott, acabo 
de terminar una visita a la America del Sur emprendida como representante de la 
Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional. 

Despues de una semana en Paris empleada en la preparation del material 
con la generosa e invaluable asistencia del Dr. Scott y del sefior Alejandro 
Alvarez, me dirigi a Lisboa, saliendo de dicho puerto el 22 de septiembre con 
rumbo a Rio de Janeiro, acompafiado de mi esposa y de mi hija, del Magistrado 
Otto Schoenrich y de su senora y de Mr. William R. Hereford. 

En Sur America visite las capitales del Brasil, Argentina, Uruguay, Chile y 
Peru. La inaccesibilidad de las capitales de las demas republicas y la falta de 
empalmes satis factorios en las lineas de vapores y ferroviarias hizo imposible 
que pudiera extender este itinerario en el tiempo que tenia a mi disposition. 

La admiration y respeto universal que se siente en la America del Sur por 
el Presidente de la Fundacion, Mr. Root, el aprecio afectuoso de sus mutuos 
amigos en estos paises, me aseguraron, como portador de su carta de instrucciones, 
la mas cordial bienvenida. En todos los paises que visite los directores de la 
opinion atestiguaron en sus discursos publicos y en sus conversaciones personales 
la elevada estima en que se tiene al Presidente de vuestra Junta en la America del 
Sur, y expresaron el vehemente anhelo de colaborar con el y los demas Sindicos 
en la obra de la Fundacion. 

En los paises mencionados trate a hombres de representation, y por medio 
de discursos, entrevistas y relaciones personales, les hice ver la obra y propositos 
e ideales de la Fundacion. 

En Rio de Janeiro pronuncie discursos en la Biblioteca Publica, bajo los 
auspicios de la Academia Brasilena y en el Instituto de la Orden de Abogados, 
y en la Embajada americana; en Montevideo, en el Ateneo, bajo los auspicios de 
la Universidad ; en Buenos Aires, ante la Facultad de Derecho de la Universidad ; 
en Santiago, en la Universidad de Chile; en Lima en la Universidad de San 
Marcos, y ante el Colegio de Abogados. 



INFORMS PREIJMINAR DE MR. BACON 11 

Mas adelante os presentare, en el idioma en que fueron pronunciados, copia 
de los principales discursos y observaciones que hice en otros actos publicos, 
asi como tambien una coleccion de los principales articulos que aparecieron en la 
prensa. 

Segun vuestros deseos distribuimos entre los suramericanos de representacion 
los Anuarios de la Fundacion y folletos impresos, algunos de los cuales se 
destinaban a la publication en los periodicos y revistas locales. En un informe 
ulterior presentaremos copia de estos folletos, en los cuales se describian las 
gestiones en que la Fundacion se halla directa o indirectamente interesada. 

En todas partes se respondio con entusiasmo a la invitation que hicimos a 
nuestros amigos de la America del Sur para que colaborasen en union cordial 
y de simpatias con los Sindicos en las distintas empresas que la Fundacion trata 
de fomentar. 

El propuesto cambio de visitas de hombres de representacion recibio la mas 
profunda aprobacion y podria ponerse en ejecucion sin demora alguna. El 
cambio de profesores y estudiantes recibio tambien la mas cordial aprobacion. 
Ya parece llegada la hora de tratar de la cuestion del cambio de profesores, y 
estoy seguro que en cualquier momento que los Sindicos se encuentren dispuestos 
a hacer proposiciones defmitivas concernientes al cambio de estudiantes se 
recibira la entusiasta colaboracion de las cinco republicas que he visitado. 

Tuve la buena suerte de encontrarme en Lima mientras se hallaba en sesion 
el Congreso Medico Panamericano, y en la sesion de apertura de dicho cuerpo 
de hombres de ciencia tuve el placer de oir a uno de los oradores, al Dr. Cabred, 
referirse con reconocimiento a la obra de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz 
Internacional. Me causo profunda impresion el hecho de que estos hombres 
procedentes de las distintas Republicas americanas, reunidos con un proposito 
comun y humanitario, representaban bien el "animo internacional," y me tome 
la libertad de indicar al Presidente del Congreso, Dr. Odriozola, la posibilidad 
de elegir del Congreso representantes que desearan tal vez visitar los Estados 
Unidos en relation con el cambio de visitas propuesto por la Fundacion. 

El camino ya ha sido preparado para la formacion de sociedades nacionales 
para la conciliacion que habran de afiliarse a las asociaciones para la conciliation 
internacional de Paris y Nueva York. En Rio de Janeiro, el sefior Helio Lobo ; 
en Buenos Aires, el senor Benjamin Garcia Victorica; y en Lima al Dr. Juan 
Bautista de Lavalle, han aceptado el cargo de Secretarios Honorarios. 

Ya se han formado o se hallan en proceso de formacion en Rio de Janeiro, 
Buenos Aires, Montevideo, Santiago de Chile y Lima, sociedades de Derecho 
internacional que deberan afiliarse al Instituto Americano de Derecho Inter- 
nacional. 

Tuve el honor de ofrecer a los gobiernos de los paises que visite la 
oportunidad de participar en la proyectada Academia de Derecho Internacional 
de La Haya, y de llamarles la atencion hacia la necesidad de nombrar comites 
nacionales para el estudio de aquellas materias con que deseen contribuir al 



12 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

programa de la proxima Conferencia de La Haya, y de hacer los preparativos 
oportunos para la comunicacion mutua de tales comites entre todos los paises 
americanos. 

Los representantes de los distintos gobiernos con quienes tuve el gusto de 
hablar mostraron buenas disposiciones sin exception alguna. La proyectada 
Academia de Derecho Internacional de La Haya desperto inmediatamente su 
interes y simpatias. Manifestaron asimismo cnanto apreciaban la importancia 
de que pronto se nombrasen comites nacionales para que discutiesen las materias 
que habran de contribuirse al programa de la proxima Conferencia de La Haya. 

En todos los discursos principales que pronuncie no deje de aprovecharme 
de la oportunidad de describir la obra de la Division de Economia e 
Historia de la Fundacion, y solicitar para ella la asistencia de muestros amigos 
de la America del Sur en lo relativo al suministro sistematico de datos, de acuerdo 
con el programa sentado en Berna. Llame especialmente la atencion hacia la 
proxima visita a la America del Sur del Dr. Kinley como representante de la 
Division. 

En todas las capitales personas distinguidas me prestaron su simpatica, 
inagotable y valiosa cooperacion y asistencia. Estos sefiores me consagraron su 
tiempo e ideas con la mayor buena voluntad. Por sus esfuerzos tuve 
la oportunidad necesaria de hacer a los directores de la opinion de la America 
del Sur enteras y completas explicaciones acerca de la historia y propositos y 
metodos de la Fundacion. 

Por cortesia de los Ministros de Relaciones Exteriores en sus respectivos 
paises obtuve el privilegio de ser recibido en audiencia por el Presidente Hermes 
da Fonseca, del Brasil; el Presidente Batlle y Ordonez, del Uruguay; el Vice- 
presidente de la Plaza de la Nation Argentina, hallandose ausente de la capital 
a causa de enfermedad el Presidente Saenz Pefia ; el Presidente Barros Luco, de 
Chile, y el Presidente Billinghurst, del Peru. 

Debo hacer mention igualmente de la valiosa asistencia y cooperacion que 
me prestaran los representantes diplomaticos de nuestro pais. Mr. Edwin 
Morgan, Embajador nuestro en Rio de Janeiro, y el Secretario de la Embajada, 
Mr. Butler Wright ; Mr. Garrett, Ministro americano en Buenos Aires, y el 
Agregado Militar, Mayor Shipton ; Mr. Grevstad, Ministro americano en Monte- 
video ; Mr. Harvey, Encargado de Negocios en Santiago de Chile, y el Agregado 
Militar, Capitan Biscoe; Mr. Benton McMillin, Ministro americano en Lima, y 
Mr. Pennoyer, Secretario de Legation, todos personalmente dedicaron gran 
parte de su tiempo y atencion a facilitar el objeto de mi visita. No puedo menos 
que expresar mi gratitud por su hospitalidad y por sus consejos y asistencia. 

Mas adelante rendire un informe completo de mi visita a la America del Sur. 
Al presentar este breve sumario permitidme renovar las seguridades de mi mas 
elevado aprecio del honor que me confirieron los Sindicos al designarme como 
su representante para visitar la America del Sur. 

Robert Bacon. 

Diciembre 24, 1913. 



Para el Fomento de Nuestras Buenas Relaciones con los 
Pueblos Latinoamericanos 

INFORME FINAL DE MR. BACON 



I. Observaciones Preliminares 

En una carta dirigida a los Sindicos de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz 
Internacional manifeste brevemente los puntos principales de interes en mi 
viaje al Brasil, Argentina, Uruguay, Chile y Peru, emprendido como repre- 
sentante de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional, en virtud de una 
invitacion recibida, con fecha i°. de abril de 1913, del Dr. Nicholas Murray 
Butler, director de la Division de Relaciones y Educacion, y de una carta de 
instrucciones, de fecha 20 de julio de 1913, del Honorable Elihu Root, presidente 
de la Fundacion. 

En esta relacion mas detallada del viaje he tratado de exponer en forma 
narrativa lo hecho en cada ciudad, porque de ese modo, quizas, mejor que de 
ningun otro, sea posible dar una idea de la extremada bondad de la recepcion 
que por todas partes se me hizo, como representante de la Fundacion Carnegie 
para la Paz Internacional, y de la cordial simpatia e interes manifestados en todas 
partes en la obra y propositos de la Fundacion. La amistosa actitud de la prensa 
de todos los paises que visite, la extremada cortesia de los distintos gobiernos, 
la espontanea aprobacion de los directores de la opinion expresada en cartas y 
telegramas y manifestaciones personales, asi como la evidente cordialidad del 
pueblo, suministran prueba plena de que los Sindicos hallaran en la America 
del Sur valiosa y energica cooperacion en la noble tarea a que se han dedicado. 

Me refiero a muchas personas que me prestaron la mayor ayuda. La 
relacion no es de ninguna manera completa, pero en otro lugar he mencionado 
mas ampliamente los nombres de aquellas personas con caracter oficial o sin el a 
quienes estoy principalmente reconocido por su asistencia, consejos e information, 
tratando de expresar al mismo tiempo algo de mi profundo sentimiento de 
gratitud y obligation hacia ellos. 

Por su historia aun mas que por su naturaleza, los paises de los continentes 
de Norte y Sur America se hallan estrechamente unidos. 

En estos paises ha habido siempre desde la insurrection de las colonias 
suramericanas contra Espafia en los comienzos del ultimo siglo hombres 
prominentes en la direction de los asuntos publicos que han voceado la amistad 
de los Estados Unidos hacia las naciones que nos quedan al sur. Ya en 1816 



14 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

(en un discurso sobre el proyecto de ley conocido por el Lowndes Bill, destinado a 
aminorar las contribuciones directas impuestas durante la guerra de 1812), 
Henry Clay simbolizaba la posibilidad de que ayudaramos a las colonias 
hispanoamericanas en su lucha por la independencia. En 1818, en uno de sus 
mas brillantes discursos, abogando porque "nuestra neutralidad se ajuste de 
modo que sea lo mas ventajosa posible para las colonias insurreccionadas," y 
porque "los Estados Unidos enviaran un Ministro a las Trovincias Unidas del 
Rio de la Plata,' reconociendo asi esa colonia insurreccionada como un Estado 
independiente", Clay dibujo con poetica profesia las maravillosas tierras a que 
estamos unidos por el Istmo de Panama. 

La parte que tomara James G. Blaine en hacer mas estrechas las relaciones 
entre las Republicas americanas es bien conocida. En 1881 Blaine convoco la 
Conferencia Panamericana que, debido a las circunstancias, no se reunio sino 
hasta ocho afios mas tarde en que Blaine fue nuevamente Secretario de Estado. 
Al enviar su nota general de invitacion en 1881, Blaine obro por inspiration e 
inciativa del Presidente Garfield, que apreciaba profundamente la conveniencia 
de estrechar las relaciones entre las republicas de este continente y a cuya pericia 
como hombre de Estado bien puede atribuirse la primera de esas Conferencias 
Panamericanas que ahora se celebran regularmente. En 1881, el Presidente 
Garfield, actuando por medio de su Secretario de Estado, propuso una conferencia 
que tuviera por unico objeto la discusion de los medios de prevenir la guerra 
entre las naciones de America. La experiencia de Blaine como estadista previo 
los beneficios practicos de las relaciones comerciales reciprocas que debian unir 
mas intimamente a las naciones americanas ; y estos y otros puntos numerosos 
formaron el programa de la Primera Conferencia Panamericana que se celebrara 
en Washington en 1889. 

En nuestros propios dias, Elihu Root es el hombre de Estado que mas 
conspicuamente ha representado nuestra politica tradicional de union americana. 
Su amistad hacia las republicas hermanas se ha manifestado en repetidas 
declaraciones publicas que han delineado claramente la regla de conducta que 
debemos seguir en nuestras relaciones con las demas naciones de este continente. 
Su doctrina es la doctrina de la simpatia y de la buena inteligencia, de la 
bondadosa consideration y de la obligation honrosa; y cuando sus opiniones, 
que llevan en si refundidos el idealismo de Mr. Clay y el positivismo de Mr. Blaine, 
se hayan aceptado generalmente como la politica exterior de los Estados Unidos 
en este hemisferio, la cuestion de determinar la manera en que los Estados 
Unidos y las republicas hermanas de este continente hayan de entrar en relaciones 
mas intimas, habra encontrado una completa solution. 

Que como nation no hayamos procedido agresivamente con arreglo al 
consejo de estos directores dando a sus declaraciones solo un asentimiento tacito 
sin que las hayamos secundado por la action positiva, se debe en gran manera 
al hecho de que nuestro pais se ha encontrado profundamente ocupado en sus 
propios asuntos, en su propio desarrollo maravilloso y rapido y en sus propios 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 15 

problemas internos. El eminente Dr. Roque Saenz Pefia, en su vigoroso discurso 
pronunciado en Washington en 1889, siendo uno de los delegados a la Primera 
Conferencia Panamericana, francamente manifesto que se daba cuenta de este 
hecho. 

Decia el Dr. Saenz Pefia en aquella ocasion : 

La verdad es que nuestro conocimiento mutuo es limitado. Las repub- 
licas del Norte de este continente han vivido sin tener comunicacion con 
las del Sur ni con las naciones de la America Central. Abismadas, como 
han estado, al igual que las nuestras, en el desarrollo de sus instituciones, 
han dejado de cultivar con nosotros mas estrechas y mas intimas relaciones. 

Si bien confio en que esta verdadera explication de nuestras equivocaciones 
la acepten los estadistas de discernimiento de las republicas hermanas, no ha sido 
sino natural que el aparente, y a menudo efectivo abandono de nuestras oportu- 
nidades de cultivar una mejor inteligencia con nuestros vecinos, nuestra ignoran- 
cia de sus asuntos y nuestra aparente indiferencia nacional hacia el progreso de que 
disfrutan haya tendido a engendrar en ellos motivo de resentimiento, desconfianza 
y sospecha. La historica visita de Mr. Root a la America del Sur en 1906 ha con- 
tribuido mas que ningiin otro factor, a que se corrijan estas impresiones que se 
tenian de nosotros. Nuestro pueblo en general no tiene aun el mas ligero concepto 
del gran servicio que Mr. Root le ha prestado por su actitud de simpatia y por 
sus repetidas manifestaciones de politica nacional, pero este servicio se reconoce 
en todas partes de la America del Sur, en donde se le considera con el mas 
profundo afecto y respeto. 

El modo mas efectivo de cumplir con las instrucciones de Mr. Root me 
parecio que consistia en un cambio de ideas con los suramericanos de repre- 
sentation, en discursos bajo los auspicios de universidades y sociedades cienti- 
ficas y en articulos en periodicos y revistas. Bien puedo decir que se me ofre- 
cieron todas las oportunidades apetecibles para emplear estos distintos metodos. 
En todas las capitales que visite pronuncie discursos publicos, celebre numerosas 
conferencias con los principales ciudadanos y la prensa dio la mayor circulation 
posible a las descripciones de la obra de la Fundacion y de las gestiones en que 
esta se halla interesada. 

No creo que haya un terreno mas fertil para la obra de la Fundacion que 
la America del Sur, ni que exista un momento mas oportuno que el presente 
para cultivar las buenas relaciones entre este pais y las republicas del gran con- 
tinente situado al sur de nosotros. 

En la actualidad es un hecho generalmente reconocido que el pueblo de este 
pais se ha encontrado y todavia se encuentra en ignorancia de las verdaderas 
condiciones de estas grandes naciones latinoamericanas que avanzan por la senda 
del progreso tan rapidamente como lo que hayamos avanzado nosotros en cual- 
quier periodo de nuestra historia. Nosotros hemos descuidado las oportunidades 
que se nos han ofrecido no solamente de mejorar nuestras relaciones comerciales 
con nuestras republicas hermanas, sino, lo que es de importancia infmitamente 



16 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

mayor, las oportunidades de cultivar las relaciones intelectuales y los sentimien- 
tos de buena inteligencia amistosa que han de unirnos mas estrechamente en 
lo futuro. 

Hacese, pues, un deber de lo mas urgente salir de nuestra ignorancia y 
subsanar nuestros errores. De ningun modo mejor, creo yo, pueden obtenerse 
estos resultados que en la forma que los S'mdicos de la Fundacion han indicado 
y es motivo de profunda satisfaccion que nuestros amigos de la America del Sur 
hayan expresado hondas simpatias por los planes de la Fundacion y que hayan 
prometido su energica cooperacion. 

El plan de la Division de Relaciones y Educacion proveyendo a "la visita 
a los distintos paises de hombres de representation de otros paises al proposito 
de hacer mas conocido el espiritu, instituciones e ideales de las distintas nacio- 
nes," segun se delineara en la monografia que formaba parte de mis instruc- 
ciones generales, fue aceptado con aprobacion unanime por los hombres con 
quienes me relatione en la America del Sur. Tal cambio de visitas produciria 
provecho inmediato. Quizas por ningun otro metodo podrian obtenerse resultados 
que se hiciesen aparentes tan ligero, y aunque la obra de los Sindicos ha sido 
acertadamente basada en la consideration de un lejano futuro mas bien que en 
consideraciones de actualidad, debemos sin embargo tener presente el deseo 
publico de obtener una prueba tangible de progreso que sirva de incentivo e 
inspiration popular. Es altamente satisfactorio saber que ya se han dado algunos 
pasos para llevar a cabo el plan de que suramericanos distinguidos visiten los 
Estados Unidos, y es de esperarse que nada retarde en este hemisferio la obra 
que la Division ya ha emprendido con tanto exito en el Extremo Oriente. 

Con respecto a la selection de los suramericanos que hayan de venir a los 
Estados Unidos me ha parecido que seria conveniente que esto lo hicieran so- 
ciedades cientificas o docentes bajo cuyos auspicios podrian hacerse las visitas. 
En todas las grandes republicas hermanas del sur hay hombres en la vida pu- 
blica y privada perf ectamente competentes para desempenar esta mision ; hombres 
de brillantes aptitudes que hablan el ingles y que poseen excelente conocimiento 
de las condiciones que imperan en los Estados Unidos. Los que la Fundacion 
eligiera de este pais para visitar la America del Sur resultarian de utilidad limi- 
tada si no poseyeran el espanol o por lo menos el frances. En la Argentina y 
en Chile se habla mas ingles que en cualquiera otra parte del continente surame- 
ricano, pero aun en estos paises el conocimiento del idioma se halla circunscrito 
a un numero relativamente pequeno. El frances se habla entre las clases 
instruidas, pero aunque el conocimiento del frances es mucho mas comun entre 
ellos que entre nosotros el representante de la Fundacion que dependiese entera- 
mente del frances y del ingles a menudo experimentaria la necesidad del espanol. 

Las anteriores observaciones podrian tener aplicacion con mayor fuerza al 
proyectado cambio de profesores de universidades a menos que se deseara que, 
desde luego, el profesor que visitase las universidades suramericanas diese sus 
conferencias en ingles. 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 17 

Las escuelas y colegios del Brasil ; la Universidad de La Plata y la Univer- 
sidad de Buenos Aires en Argentina; la Universidad de Montevideo; la Uni- 
versidad de Chile en Santiago, y la antigua Universidad de San Marcos en 
Lima, son todos importantes asientos del saber que poseen facultades dis- 
tinguidisimas, y debiera instituirse tan pronto como sea posible un cambio regular 
de profesores con ellos. Seria oportuno quizas que los profesores que se envien 
de los Estados Unidos dividan su tiempo entre las principales universidades latino- 
americanas. Los profesores que se invitaran a este pais podrian ser uno pro- 
cedente de cada una de las republicas mencionadas, si ese numero no fuese dema- 
siado crecido teniendo en cuenta los fines de la Fundacion, y podrian tambien 
alternar en cinco de nuestras principales universidades, lo cual permitiria a cada 
profesor permanecer unas seis semanas en cada universidad, extendiendose las 
conferencias por consiguiente a todo el afio academico. 

El beneficio practico que han prestado los cambios de profesores de Harvard 
y Columbia con Francia y Alemania es indication bastante de los beneficios que 
habran de derivarse de tales cambios con la America del Sur. La condition de 
una nation puede juzgarse casi exactamente por las condiciones que existen en 
sus colegios tipicos. Cuando sabemos que es lo que se ensena a los jovenes de 
un pais y como se les ensena, y la actitud que ellos asumen hacia la adquisicion 
del saber, podemos formarnos un concepto del espiritu del pueblo no muy lejos 
de lo cierto. Los educacionistas suramericanos discutieron con gran interes 
el cambio de profesores propuesto por la Fundacion y le prestaran su apoyo de 
todo corazon. 

Con respecto al proyectado cambio de estudiantes entre las universidades 
de la America del Sur y nuestras propias universidades, halle que la idea es 
generalmente aprobada, pero se estima que los detalles del proyecto han de ser 
claramente presentados antes que desaparezcan todas las dudas acerca de su con- 
veniencia. Las universidades latinoamericanas son distintas a las nuestras en 
muchos particulares. Expresose la opinion de que muchos padres vacilarian en 
enviar a sus hijos a nuestras lejanas universidades en que a los estudiantes se 
les permiten mayores libertades de las que ellos estan acostumbrados a disfrutar 
en las universidades suramericanas. Temiase que en ausencia del dominio y 
vigilancia de la familia, los jovenes pudieran sucumbir a la tentacion. Desde 
luego que esto no es del todo distinto a los problemas con que los padres en 
los Estados Unidos tropiezan al enviar sus hijos fuera de la familia; pero la 
mayor distancia de que se trata en tales cambios hace aun mas dificil que los 
padres quieran desprenderse de sus hijos, particularmente si la separation ha 
de ser por un periodo considerable de tiempo. 

Pareceme que podria trazarse un plan por el cual tales estudiantes surame- 
ricanos recibieran mayor supervision personal; pero, mientras no se llegue a este 
plan, la proposition tendente a un cambio sistematico de estudiantes es seguro 
que habra de tropezar con grandes dificultades por parte de nuestros vecinos. 
Los jovenes, por su parte, estoy convencido que se hallan entusiasmados en favor 



18 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

de dicho cambio, y algunos me escribieron o me hablaron acerca de la posibilidad 
de estudiar en los Estados Unidos. El beneficio mutuo que los representantes 
derivarian es tan grande que debieran realizarse todos los esfuerzos posibles 
por trazar un metodo practico para llevar a cabo este proyecto. 

La Division de Relaciones y Educacion que tiene jurisdiction sobre el cam- 
bio de visitas de hombres de representation y sobre el cambio de profesores y 
estudiantes tiene tambien dentro de su competencia la formation de sociedades 
nacionales para la conciliacion internacional. Los directores del pensamiento 
en la America del Sur, segun mi entender, convienen en la obra beneficiosa que 
estas sociedades podrian realizar y desean con vehemencia que se organicen lo mas 
pronto posible en los paises que la forman. Hemos tenido la fortuna de obtener 
la aceptacion de hombres de titulos bastantes para actuar como secretarios hono- 
rarios de las sociedades nacionales para la conciliacion internacional en el Brasil, 
la Argentina y el Peru, y se espera que pronto se hallara un secretario para la 
de Chile. 

Seria conveniente imprimir en espafiol los folletos de la Sociedad para la 
Conciliacion Internacional, que se destinan a la distribution en la Argentina, 
Chile y el Peru, y que los que se destinan al Brasil sean impresos en portugues. 
De este modo obtendrian una circulation mas amplia y la obra de este modo se 
haria mas popular que si estuviesen impresos en frances o ingles. 

En todas las capitales que visite se reunieron comisiones sin caracter oficial 
como base para la organization de sociedades nacionales permanentes de Derecho 
internacional, que habran de afiliarse al Instituto Americano de Derecho Inter- 
nacional, fundado en 1912 y del cual Mr. Root es Presidente Honorario y 
el Dr. James Brown Scott Presidente efectivo. Eminentes publicistas prestaron su 
celoso apoyo a esta obra, aprobando unanimemente el plan y dedicando a la causa 
tal energia y entusiasmo que los Sindicos bien pueden esperar que se obtengan 
los me j ores resultados. Muy pronto se aprecio que un proyecto como este, 
esencialmente intelectual y cientifico, ha de servir de base duradera para la 
tarea ulterior de hacer entrar a las naciones en mas estrechas relaciones. Los 
derechos de los pueblos, no menos que los derechos de los individuos, han de 
apoyarse en la ley. 

En varias ocasiones hubo personas que, hablando en nombre de sociedades de 
abogados, respondieron expresando su incondicional aprobacion del plan de popu- 
larizar por medio de estas organizaciones internacionales los principios del Derecho 
internacional, a fin de que la opinion publica ilustrada exija el arreglo de las cues- 
tiones que se susciten entre las naciones por el recurso a los principios del derecho 
mas bien que por el recurso a la fuerza. La mutua comunicacion de tales organi- 
zaciones, por medio de su afiliacion al Instituto Americano, seria en si misma un 
factor poderoso para llegar a una mejor inteligencia mutua entre los distintos paises 
del uni verso. 

Tratadistas eminentes de Derecho internacional de las Republicas surameri- 
canas han hecho un prolongado y concienzudo estudio de la materia con referencia 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMLRICANOS 19 

particular a los asuntos americanos, siendo de lo mas valioso el apoyo que 
pueden prestar al Instituto Americano. La tarea ulterior para llegar a la organi- 
zation debe realizarse sin demora. Como dice Mr. Root en el parrafo final de 
su carta de instrucciones, los resultados que han de obtenerse no deben basarse 
en los terminos de la vida individual, sino en los de la vida prolongada de las 
naciones, y de esto se dan perf ecta cuenta nuestros amigos latinoamericanos ; pero 
debieramos aprovechar la oportunidad que nos presenta el entusiasmo actual para 
obtener los servicios de estos hombres distinguidos en favor de la causa por la 
cual el Instituto Americano aboga. Los Sindicos, creo yo, no podrian dedicar 
su actividad a una causa que estuviera destinada a producir resultados mas fruc- 
tiferos ni que apelara mas poderosamente a las principales lumbreras de las Re- 
publicas suramericanas. 

La proyectada Academia de Derecho Internacional de La Haya causo vivo 
interes. Creyose que tal Academia, en donde se reuniran los principales delegados 
de los distintos gobiernos del mundo para el estudio del Derecho internacional bajo 
la direction de profesores eminentes, ha de contribuir a una mayor uniformidad de 
opinion y a "normalizar", si se nos permite la frase, una ciencia que hasta ahora 
solo se ha cultivado de manera productiva de opiniones diversas. No se hizo ningun 
esfuerzo para obtener que gobierno alguno se comprometiera a la proposition; el 
tiempo no se considero oportuno todavia para ello. Mis instrucciones no tenian por 
objeto nada mas determinado que indicar la atencion de los distintos gobiernos 
hacia la oportunidad de participar en la proyectada Academia, pero estoy bien 
seguro, a juzgar por el interes general demostrado acerca de la materia y a juzgar 
por la aprobacion expresada por los Ministros de Relaciones Exteriores, que cuando 
la proyectada Academia adquiera forma definitiva, los gobiernos de las cinco 
Repiiblicas suramericanas que he visitado se aprovecharan seriamente de la opor- 
tunidad de participar en ella y que cada cual enviara a la misma uno o mas repre- 
sentantes debidamente delegados. 

En conversaciones sostenidas con los Ministros de Relaciones Exteriores de 
estos paises, de acuerdo con mis instrucciones, promovi la cuestion del pronto nom- 
bramiento de comites nacionales para que discutan el programa de la proxima Con- 
ferencia de La Haya asi como las ventajas que habran de derivarse de la comuni- 
cacion mutua de tales comites nacionales en America, a fin de que cuando se con- 
voque la proxima Conferencia de la Paz los delegados puedan concurrir a la misma 
con mejor preparation y mas unidos en sus opiniones acerca de los fines que hayan 
de realizarse que en la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz de La Haya. La indole de 
estas conversaciones privadas excluye la idea de darles apariencia publica, pero 
puedo decir que todos y cada uno de estos gobiernos aprecia la necesidad de que se 
proceda con prontitud. 

La obra de la Division de Economia e Historia de la Fundacion formo parte 
del discurso principal pronunciado en cada ciudad y desperto mucho interes. Los 
historiadores suramericanos, que pueden prestar valiosos servicios a la Division 
suministrandole datos a proposito de las causas y efectos de la multitud de guerras 



20 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

que han afligido a las republicas del sur, asi como con information historica a 
proposito de las relaciones entre las naciones latinoamericanas, oyeron con placer 
el anuncio de la proxima visita a la America del Sur del Dr. Kinley como repre- 
sentante de esta Division de la Fundacion. Los bien conocidos trabajos del Dr. 
Kinley, su amistad hacia la America Latina y la mision que lleva, tengo la certeza 
que han de aseguararle la mas cordial bienvenida y la valiosa asistencia de los 
economistas suramericanos. 

El hecho de que solo pudimos detenernos unos cuantos dias en cada pais haria 
presuntuoso que tratasemos de describir las relaciones sociales y politicas de las 
Republicas suramericanas. Cualquier opinion emitida a proposito de estos puntos 
se refiere a caracteristicas bien conocidas y a hechos que se hacen evidentes aun 
durante la mas corta permanencia en un pais. 

Al hablar de las Republicas de la America del Sur o al pensar en ellas nos 
hallamos excesivamente expuestos a caer en el error de considerarlas en con junto. 
Los diez Estados separados que las forman son tan distintos como los paises 
separados de Europa ; los pueblos que las constituyen se diferencian en la raza, en 
los habitos y en los ideales ; sus gobiernos, aunque retengan la misma forma basica, 
a menudo son realmente distintos. Jamas avanzaremos gran cosa en el sentido de 
mejorar nuestras relaciones con las Republicas latinoamericanas, ya sean relaciones 
intelectuales o ya xomerciales, mientras no nos hayamos familiarizado con las dis- 
tintas naciones y por medio del estudio o por el contacto efectivo no hayamos apren- 
dido a hacer las distinciones necesarias entre ellas. El verdadero conocimiento de 
nuestros vecinos no podremos obtenerlo sino por el conocimiento de la historia 
respectiva de cada una, de sus heroes, de las apopeyas de valor y perseverancia de 
cada republica, y de las razas de que han surgido, naturales del pais y europeas. 

Ya ha pasado el dia en que la mayoria de estos paises, construyendo laboriosa- 
mente una estructura gubernamental con tremendas dificultades, eran inestables y 
vacilantes y se hallaban expuestos a caer de un momento a otro. En la actualidad 
las mas importantes republicas se encuentran firmemente establecidas y no viven ya 
a la sombra de dictaduras ni de gobiernos inconstitucionales. Para usar de las 
palabras de Mr. Root, "ya han pasado de la condicion de militarismo, de la con- 
dition de revolution, a la condicion de industrialismo, a las sendas del comercio 
afortunado, y se estan haciendo grandes y poderosas naciones." Con este desarrollo 
ha venido el progreso material y la prosperidad, atrayendo la atencion del mundo 
hacia la America del Sur y asegurando su creciente grandeza en lo future 

Aunque el error surge de considerar a las naciones suramericanas en conjunto, 
hay ciertas caracteristicas que en mayor o menor grado son comunes a todos estos 
pueblos. Todos son hospitalarios, todos son corteses, todos son sensibles, todos 
son orgullosos y todos son intensamente patrioticos. El que vaya olvi- 
dandose de estas cosas es seguro que ha de producir mala impresion entre ellos. 
Los que pertenecemos a las regiones del norte tradicionalmente somos mas brus- 
cos, y la brusquedad es extrana y ofensiva para estos descendientes de las razas 
politicas de la Peninsula Iberica. Su sensibilidad los hace resentir la critica, aun- 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON I,OS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 21 

que aceptan de buena gana las indicaciones que les hace la amistad sincera ; pero 
la actitud de superioridad, que a menudo asumen las personas irreflexivas de 
otras naciones, no produce entre ellos otra cosa que sospecha, desconfianza y 
desprecio. 

Mucho se ha dicho de la rivalidad que existe entre las distintas republicas. Es 
solo natural que el rapido progreso realizado por naciones situadas tan cerca las 
unas de las otras produzca un espiritu de aguda competencia en su marcha hacia 
la meta comun de la grandeza. El mismo espiritu es evidente en casi todos los 
paises del mundo. Los sentimientos que existen entre las distintas naciones debieran 
ser respetados por todos los que tratan con ellos, porque unicamente en ese sentido 
es que puede evitarse el no ofender por medio de una aparente parcialidad ; pero yo 
me inclino a creer que la charla descuidada de los que ignoran los hechos y de los 
que escriben y piensan y observan tambien descuidadamente ha exagerado en gran 
manera la naturaleza de este espiritu de competencia. 

Sobre las grandes cuestiones concernientes al bienestar de todo el continente, 
sobre las materias relativas al adelanto de la humanidad en general y sobre los 
principios de derecho y de progreso, los pueblos de la America del Sur, o al menos 
aquellos con quienes estuve en contacto, bien puede decirse que estan unidos. Ellos 
creen en ideales elevados y en sus esfuerzos por alcanzar estos ideales demuestran 
una solidaridad que se levanta por encima de todo sentimiento de rivalidad personal. 

En todos los paises que visite encontre siempre sentimientos de la mas cordial 
amistad hacia los Estados Unidos. Las ocasionales manifestaciones publicas de 
los agitadores de la desconfianza suramericana acerca de nuestros verdaderos 
moviles carecen practicamente de importancia si se comparan con el vehemente 
anhelo de entablar relaciones de lo mas amistosas entre nuestros respectivos paises 
expresado por los verdaderos directores de la opinion en todas partes. 

Incumbe al pueblo de este pais, pues, conducirse hacia los pueblos latinoameri- 
canos con consideration y justicia de modo que no haya lugar a sospechas. Nuestra 
position geografica y nuestra asociacion historica han decretado que nuestros 
destinos no se separen. Tal ha sido la opinion de nuestros propios estadistas desde 
los tiempos de Monroe y tal fue la opinion de aquellos primitivos caudillos ilustres 
de la independencia suramericana. Yo creo que esta opinion la tienen tambien los 
caudillos suramericanos de hoy, no en el sentido de una alianza politica, y cierta- 
mente, en ningun sentido que entrafle la soberania de ningun Estado interesado, 
sino como cuestion de politica que se hace menester por nuestra mutua proximidad, 
nuestro aislamiento de otros continentes y nuestros ideales comunes de libertad. 
Todos, creo yo, debemos reconocer la fuerza del argumento en favor de nuestra 
independencia, pero cada una de las naciones americanas debiera tener cuidado de 
respetar escrupulosamente los derechos y sentimientos de las demas. 

En lo que ataiie a nuestra conducta no pdoemos hacer nada mejor que 
recordar e imitar los sentimientos de John Quincy Adams segun los manifestara en 
su mensaje especial a la Camara de Representantes, explicando el nombramiento 
de delegados a la Conf erencia celebrada en Panama : 



22 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

El principio fundamental y principalisimo en que hemos creido acertado 
y justo colocar la primera piedra de nuestras futuras relaciones con ellas 
(las Republicas americanas hermanas) ha sido el desinteres; el segundo ha 
sido la cordial buena voluntad hacia ellas; el tercero ha sido el reclamar 
justa e igual reciprocidad. 

Estos sentimientos que han constituido la "primera piedra de nuestras futuras 
relaciones," tienen tanta aplicacion hoy dia como en el momento en que fueron 
expresados, hace mas de ochenta afios. 



BUENAS REXACIONES CON U)S PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 23 

II. El Viaje 

De todos los cambios que estan rapidamente transformando las relaciones de 
la America del Sur con el resto del mundo, ninguno, quizas, sea tan aparente ni de 
interes tan inmediato para la America del Norte, como el mejoramiento de los 
medios de comunicacion entre los dos continentes. Los pueblos del Norte y del Sur 
no se ven ya forzados por consideraciones de comodidad o de rapidez a visitarse 
mutuamente por la via de Europa. 

En la actualidad magnificos vapores hacen regularmente la travesia entre los 
Estados Unidos y los puertos principales de la costa oriental de la America del Sur, 
o entre los puertos de este pais y el Istmo de Panama, en donde puede efectuarse 
el enlace con los vapores de varias lineas dedicadas al comercio de cabotaje en el 
lado del Pacifico. 

El viaje que hace algunos afios se miraba como azaroso y lleno de penalidades 
se ha hecho hoy dia un paseo agradable e interesante por mares singularmente 
libres de tormentas. 

Estas condiciones favorables, que son tan poco conocidas del publico en 
general, mejoran todos los afios, y con la apertura del Canal de Panama, este 
mejoramiento ha de continuar aumentando rapidamente. 

Que nosotros embarcaramos en Lisboa hacia Rio de Janeiro se debio a la 
circunstancia de que algunos habiamos regresado del Oriente y al hecho de que 
hubimos de celebrar una conferencia en Paris con el Dr. James Brown Scott, 
Secretario de la Fundacion. 

La semana en Paris la dedicamos a la preparation del material. Fue uni- 
camente debido a la diligencia y devotion del Dr. Scott, generosamente secundado 
por el Dr. Alejandro Alvarez, de Chile, Secretario General del Instituto Ameri- 
cano de Derecho Internacional, que se hizo posible preparar en el corto tiempo 
de que disponiamos los articulos e informaciones esenciales para la realization 
del viaje. 

Redactaronse proyectos de articulos en ingles y frances describiendo la 
formation, obra y propositos de la Fundacion Carnegie, asi como de algunas 
de las gestiones y movimientos en que esta se halla interesada, tales como el 
Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional, la Academia de Derecho Inter- 
nacional de La Haya, la Tercera Conferencia de La Haya y el Tribunal Per- 
manente de Arbitraje de La Haya. 

Debido a la bondad del Dr. Scott se nos suministraron muchos folletos 
destinados a nuestra propia information y a su distribution entre nuestros amigos 
de la America del Sur. Entre estos folletos se contaban los titulados : 

Institut Americain de Droit International; 

Projet de Statuts, for aid in the formation of national societies of Inter- 
national Law; 

La Transformation de l'Arbitrage en Sentence Judiciare, par James Brown 
Scott ; 



24 I,A VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Le Mouvement Pacifique, par James Brown Scott ; 

Discours d'Ouverture du XX Congres Universel de le Paix, par J. de 
Louter ; 

Del Baron d'Estournelles de Constant que se hallaba ausente de Paris, 
recibimos folletos descriptivos de la obra de la Asociacion para la Conciliation 
Internacional, junto con las replicas en bronce de la medalla de la Asociacion. 

M. Gabriel Hanotaux, ex-Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores de Francia y 
Presidente del Comite France-Amerique, retorno del campo a Paris a fin de 
prestar sus valiosos servicios, y fui su huesped en un lunch en el cual calurosa- 
mente me manifesto su deseo de que yo obtuviese exito en mi mision a la 
America del Sur. M. Hanotaux dejo nuevamente de manifiesto su cordial in- 
teres escribiendo varios articulos acerca del objeto de mi viaje, los cuales fueron 
publicados en el Figaro y en la Revue France-Amerique. 

De Paris fuimos a Lisboa, dejando este punto el 23 de septiembre de 1913, 
en el Vapor "Araguaya", de la Royal Mail Packet. Nuestra expedicion se com- 
ponia del Juez Otto Schoenrich, Presidente de la Comision Mixta de Reclama- 
ciones de Nicaragua, la sefiora Schoenrich, Mr. W. R. Hereford, mi esposa, 
mi hija y yo. 

Aunque el viaje a Rio de Janeiro toma quince dias, jamas se pierde de 
vista la tierra por mas de cinco dias consecutivamente. Las frecuentes escalas 
quitan al viaje toda posibilidad de monotonia. Entramos a Funchal, en la pin- 
toresca isla de Madera y a San Vicente, puerto principal de las islas de Cabo 
Verde, antes de llegar a la costa del Brasil. El primer puerto de la America 
del Sur en que tocamos fue Pernambuco o Recife, prospera ciudad comercial 
donde se estan llevando a cabo extensas mejoras a fin de que los buques de 
mayor calado puedan entrar a la bahia. El vapor anclo en la rada, desembar- 
cando los pasajeros por medio de un canasto suspendido de una grua y descar- 
gando por medio de lanchas, tarea que se hacia dificil por la rapida corriente y 
por la gran marejada que constantemente hay en este punto. 

La primera impresion que recibimos de la actividad del Brasil moderno fue 
en Bahia en donde los miembros de nuestra expedicion fuimos a tierra. En 
la ciudad, que es la tercera del Brasil en extension y el punto principal de trafico 
para el azucar y el algodon, hallamos todas las indicaciones de la energia que 
esta transformando estas capitales brasilenas en ciudades modernas. Estaban 
levantandose calles, derrumbandose casas vie j as, construyendose nuevos e impo- 
nentes edificios en lugar de estas, y extendiendose o mejorandose los lineas de tran- 
vias electricos. Aparentemente los gastos se consideraban muy poco en el deseo 
de realizar mejoras. Bahia constituye una revelacion para los viajeros de las 
regiones del Norte tan propensos a considerar a los pueblos de los tropicos como 
si careciesen de energias y como si estuviesen demasiado satisfechos con una 
vida comoda para hacer cambio alguno. 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON EOS PUEBLOS EATINOAMERICANOS 25 



En Rio de Janeiro 

Nuestra primera impresion en Rio de Janeiro fue de aquellas que se graban 
eternamente en la memoria. Diriase que no hay quien pueda llegar a aquel 
maravilloso puerto sin recibir impresiones que no han de borrarse jamas. Nos- 
otros tuvimos la buena suerte de pasar por la estrecha entrada precisamente 
despues de haberse puesto el sol y echar el ancla en aquella bahia circular en 
el momento en que brillaban miles de luces en la ciudad, delineando el amplio 
arco de la playa y extendiendose desde la linea de agua hasta las alturas detras 
de la ciudad. La luna llena nos revelo las elevadas montafias obscuras de for- 
mas caprichosas que nos rodeaban, con el Pan de Azucar, roca gigantesca que 
parece una cupula, adorada de todo "fluminense", levantandose repentinamente 
de las aguas profundas nada mas que a unos cuantos metros de distancia. 

A la mafiana siguiente temprano vino a bordo a recibirnos Mr. Butler 
Wright, Primer Secretario de la Embajada americana, y el sefior Helio Lobo, 
de la Cancilleria, que en nombre del Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores, Dr. 
Lauro Muller, nos dio la bienvenida oficial. Una hora mas tarde tuve el honor 
de ser recibido en audiencia por el Dr. Lauro Muller que demostro la mayor 
cordialidad en sus manifestaciones de interes por la Fundacion. Hacia muy 
poco que habia retornado de su visita oficial a los Estados Unidos y expreso su 
reconocimiento por la reception que se le habia acordado en ellos, exteriorizando 
su deseo de prestar su apoyo a cualquier empresa que tuviese por mira el fo- 
mento de relaciones amistosas entre nuestros respectivos paises. 

El Dr. Muller dio aun mayor prueba de su legitimo interes en el exito de 
mi mision delegando para que me ayudase al sefior de Oliveira Lima, de cuyos 
valiosos buenos oficios constantemente dependi durante mi permanencia en Rio 
de Janeiro. Hubiera sido dificil, si no imposible, haber encontrado a nadie con 
mejores titulos para ello que al sefior de Oliveira Lima. Su larga y distinguida 
carrera diplomatica en Europa lo han familiarizado con muchas de las materias 
en que la Fundacion se halla interesada, afiadiendo a esto un perfecto conoci- 
miento cientifico entre las relaciones del Brasil y los Estados Unidos. Su valioso 
estudio reciente sobre este punto es bien conocido de los que reciben los f olletos 
de la Asociacion para la Conciliation Internacional. Las muchas amistades que 
el sefior de Oliveira Lima posee en los Estados Unidos, sus conferencias que 
siempre se recuerdan en este pais y su dominio del ingles y del f ranees todo 
contribuia a ponerlo peculiarmente en condiciones de prestar los invaluables ser- 
vicios que prestara a la Fundacion de la mejor buena voluntad. 

El dia de nuestra llegada visitamos al sefior Ruy Barbosa, al Dr. Amaro 
Cavalcanti y a otros directores de la opinion publica en el Brasil. Es imposible 
exagerar el aliento que experimente con el interes que manifestaron estos sefiores 
que tan perfectamente representaban a los hombres de Estado del pais. En 
otro lugar he mencionado su valiosa asistencia y mas adelante tendre la opor- 
tunidad de referirme a ella con mas particularidad. 



26 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Durante mi permanencia en Rio de Janeiro fui huesped del Embajador 
americano, Mr. Edwin V. Morgan, el cual estuvo incansable en sus esfuerzos 
por proporcionarme la oportunidad de exponer los metodos y fines de la Fun- 
dacion. 

En la Embajada americana fue que pronuncie el primer discurso publico 
sobre el objeto de mi visita. El Embajador habia invitado a mas de cien per- 
sonas prominentes en la vida intelectual del Brasil. Poco antes de esta reunion 
me dio la bienvenida un comite del Instituto Historico del Brasil, del cual es 
dignisimo Presidente, el Conde de Affonso Celso, en nombre de dicho Instituto 
que es una de las mas antiguas sociedades cientificas de America. El senor de 
Oliveira Lima, que sirvio de interlocutor del comite, pronuncio un breve discurso 
en ingles ofreciendo el apoyo del Instituto a la causa de la amistad internacional. 

En la reunion mayor en que el senor de Oliveira Lima me presento con un 
discurso rebosando la mas cordial simpatia, fue un gran placer exponer los fines 
de los Sindicos a hombres cuya influencia era tan poderosa en los asuntos del 
Brasil, porque el auditorio se componia de verdaderas lumbreras de la Republica 
en muchos ramos del esfuerzo intelectual. 

El vivo interes que, desde el principio, se manifesto en favor de la Funda- 
cion quedo demostrado en la halaguefia solicitud del Ministro de Relaciones 
Exteriores y de otros que se hallaban presentes, de que yo pronunciase un dis- 
curso mas detallado sobre el mismo tema ante un auditorio mayor, y, a pesar de 
la brevedad de nuestra permanencia en Rio de Janeiro hicieron los preparativos 
necesarios para la celebracion de una reunion dos dias mas tarde en la Biblioteca 
Nacional; reunion que se celebro bajo los auspicios combinados de la Academia 
Brasilena y del Instituto de la Orden de Abogados. Fui presentado por el 
senor Ruy Barbosa. El prominente lugar que ocupa en el Brasil el senor Ruy 
Barbosa, los grandes servicios que prestara en la Segunda Conferencia de la 
Paz de la Haya y su reconocida autoridad, quizas, nos justificaran en consi- 
derate en esta ocasion como el vocero del pais En un discurso de brillantez 
y elocuencia excepcionales, en que hiciera un elevado elogio de Mr. Root y del 
Dr. Scott, manifesto el aprecio y profundas simpatias que le merecian la obra 
humanitaria a que se dedican los Sindicos de la Fundacion. Despues de su 
simpatica presentation fue realmente un privilegio para mi el exponer al distin- 
guido auditorio que llenaba la inmensa sala de la Biblioteca Publica, los ideales 
de la Fundacion y los metodos practicos por los cuales trata de alcanzar sus 
fines. 

En un te con que nos obsequiaran el Ministro argentino, Dr. Lucas Ayarragaray 
y su senora en la Legation de la Argentina y en otra tarde en que tomamos te con el 
senor Alfredo Irarrazabal, Ministro chileno, en el Pao d'Assucar, tuvimos el placer 
de conocer a los miembros del cuerpo diplomatico y a muchos residentes de Rio de 
Janeiro. Una noche cenamos con el senor de Figueiredo y su senora, y tuvimos una 
comida con Mr. F. Percival Farquhar, un lunch con el Consul General, Mr. Lay y 
su senora, y lunchs, comidas y baile en la Embajada; de suerte que a pesar de lo 



BUSNAS RIXACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 27 

corto de nuestra estadia, hicimos muchos agradables conocimientos y f recuentamos 
no poco el trato de la sociedad de la capital brasilena, llevandonos con nosotros la 
eterna impresion de su cultura y de su encanto. 

El dia antes de la reunion en la Biblioteca Publica, el Dr. Lauro Muller me 
obsequio con un lunch en el Palacio Itamaraty, que es en donde esta instalado el 
Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores ; palacio encantador y que posee una extra- 
ordinaria biblioteca. Al lunch asistieron varios convidados, principalmente diplo- 
matics y jurisconsultos brasilefios. 

Por la tarde tuve el honor de ser recibido en audiencia por el Presidente del 
Brasil, Marshal Hermes da Fonseca. 

Los intervalos entre estos actos, cuando no los dedicamos a la preparation de 
discursos, los consagramos a celebrar entrevistas con los sefiores Ruy Barbosa, 
Amaro Cavalcanti, Presidente del Tribunal Supremo, J. C. de Souza Bandeira, 
Oliveira Lima y otros, que con inagotable cortesia dedicaron su tiempo y 
energias a tratar de la formation de una sociedad nacional de Derecho interna- 
cional y que, a instancias del Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores, emprendieron su 
organizacion. 

En lo que se refiere a la sociedad para la conciliation, que habra de afiliarse 
a la sociedad principal establecida en Paris y a la sociedad de Nueva York, tuvimos 
la mayor fortuna en obtener el asentimiento del Dr. Helio Lobo, del Ministerio de 
Relaciones Exteriores, para que hiciera las veces de Secretario Honorario. Su 
aceptacion de este cargo fue inmediatamente telegrafiada al Director de la Division 
de Relaciones y Education, Dr. Butler, a fin de que pudiera darse comienzo sin 
demora a la organizacion de la sociedad local en Rio de Janeiro. 

Las disertaciones preparadas para su distribution y como base de interviews o 
de articulos en los periodicos y revistas y que hicimos imprimir en Rio de Janeiro 
en forma de folleto, fueron las siguientes : 

a) En f ranees, notas para un discurso sobre los fines de la Fundacion y 
de la mision. 

b) En espanol, notas para un discurso sobre los fines de la mision. 

c) En espanol, notas para un discurso sobre el Instituto Americano de 
Derecho International y Sociedades Nacionales de Derecho International. 

d) En espanol, notas para un discurso sobre la Asociacion para la Con- 
ciliacion International. 

e) En espanol, notas para un discurso sobre la proyectada Academia de 
Derecho International de La Haya. 

f) En espanol, notas para un discurso sobre los Comites Nacionales 
para la proxima Conferencia de La Haya. 

g) En espanol, notas para un discurso sobre la Division de Economia e 
Historia y la mision del Prof esor Kinley. 

h) En espanol, notas para un discurso sobre el proyectado Tribunal de 
Justicia International. 

i) En espanol, notas sobre la organizacion y fines de la Fundacion Car- 
negie para la Paz International. 



28 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Los periodicos de Rio de Janeiro, sin excepcion alguna, evidenciaron el mayor 
interes en el objeto de mi visita, e insertaban todos los dias prolongados articulos 
conteniendo grabados y conspicuos epigrafes que depertaban en nosotros reminis- 
cencias extraordinarias del espiritu de empresa e ingeniosidad de nuestros perio- 
dicos, con la diferencia, sin embargo, de que, segun me veo obligado a indicar en 
gracia de la informacion general, los periodicos de toda la America del Sur desplic- 
gan un cuidado y exactitud a que nosotros, desgraciadamente, no estamos acostum- 
brados, y tratan de interesar a sus lectores en las ideas de los hombres, mas bien que 
en sus personalidades. En los anexos hemos coleccionado copias de algunos de los 
principales articulos periodisticos relativos a nuestra visita al Brasil, Argentina, 
Uruguay, Chile y Peru. 

El dia que salimos de Rio de Janeiro tuve el placer de encontrarme de nuevo 
con el Dr. Rodriguez, distinguido director del Jornal do Commercio, que hasta 
aquella mafiana habia estado ausente de la capital. El Dr. Rodriguez se mostro de 
lo mas complaciente y me dijo que se proponia publicar en su periodico algunos 
articulos descriptivos de la obra de la Fundacion en la cual se hallaba muy interesado. 

Nuestra visita a Rio de Janeiro se limito a cuatro dias. Es, desde luego, 
improbable que en tan corto periodo pudieran formarse opiniones dignas de men- 
cionarse en lo que respecta al pueblo o a las condiciones politicas o economicas del 
pais ; pero las primeras impresiones del viajero generalmente poseen, por lo menos, 
el valor de una definicion precisa. 

En lo que se refiere a la belleza de la capital no podria desde luego existir dife- 
rencia de opinion alguna. Las maravillosas condiciones sanitarias de Rio de Janeiro 
son de lo mas extraordinario. Parece imposible que este lugar haya sido en otro 
tiempo un foco espantoso de infection y fiebres. Hoy dia la ciudad se mantiene 
escrupulosamente limpia ; las calles se hallan tan bien conservadas que es una rareza 
encontrar ninguna de ellas en malas condiciones. Las enfermedades epidemicas 
han desaparecido y el tanto por ciento de mortalidad es uno de los mas reducidos 
del mundo. Rio de Janeiro es tan saludable que la mayor parte de sus habitantes 
en la actualidad se quedan en la capital durante los meses calurosos de diciembre, 
enero y febrero, en vez de huir a las montanas segun acostumbraban hacerlo en 
otro tiempo. 

La impresion que recibimos y que en mi opinion ha de recibirse aiin durante 
la mas breve estadia fue la de una ciudad y pais y pueblo llenos de promesas para 
lo future La inmensidad del territorio y de su inestimable riqueza, sirven de 
estimulo a la imagination. 

El pueblo es energico y patriotico. Por naturaleza y tradition es hospitalario 
y cortes y da expresion libre a los sentimientos de amistad que abriga para con los 
Estados Unidos. Seguramente la hospitalidad que se nos demostro no podia haber 
sido mas cordial ni mas halagiiena. Al dejar a Rio de Janeiro no pudimos por 
menos que lamentar el tener que separarnos de aquellos a quienes en unos cuantos 
dias habiamos venido a considerar como amigos. 



BUENAS REEACIONES CON EOS PUEBEOS EATINOAMERICANOS 29 



En Argentina 

El viaje por mar de Rio de Janeiro a Buenos Aires dura cuatro dias. Hace 
poco que se abrio el ferrocarril del Sur, de suerte que ahora es posible ir por tierra 
hasta Montevideo. Nuestro Embajador, Mr. Morgan, acababa de hacer este viaje 
y se mostro entusiasmado acerca de los interesantes panoramas que se descubren 
desde las ventanillas del tren en la parte sur del Brasil, pero ya nosotros habiamos 
decidido ir a Buenos Aires por mar y no podiamos facilmente hacer el cambio. 

El viaje lo hicimos en uno de los nuevos vapores de la Royal Mail Steam 
Packet Company, el "Andes", vapor grande y bien equipado, del tipo que requiere 
el creciente trafico de carga y pasajeros entre Europa y Sur America. 

El vapor no entro al puerto de Montevideo sino que se detuvo en la rada abierta 
frente a la ciudad lo bastante para permitir el desembarco de pasajeros. Aunque 
ya eran las diez de la noche cuando el "Andes" atraco al muelle en Buenos Aires, 
hallamos que nos esperaban el Mayor Shipton, Agregado Militar de la Legation, 
un representante del Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores, sefior Barilari, el cual 
nos dio la bienvenida oficial, y varios de nuestros amigos de la Argentina. Los 
miembros de mi familia y yo fuimos llevados en coche a la casa de Mr. John Work 
Garrett, Ministro americano, con el cual estuvimos durante nuestra permanencia 
en Buenos Aires. Aun por la noche y a pesar de la lluvia que caia, el trayecto desde 
el rio hasta la morada del Ministro nos daba pruebas inequivocas de la gran exten- 
sion e importancia de la ciudad de cuyas maravillas habiamos oido hablar tanto. La 
comparacion que de ella se hace con Ps.ris no es un esfuerzo de la imagination ni 
una hiperbole del orgullo local. Esa comparacion surge tan naturalmente que se 
hace inevitable. Una y otra vez durante nuestra permanencia todos nos vimos 
poseidos de la ilusion de que realmente no nos encontrabamos en la Argentina 
sino en Paris. 

El dia siguiente a nuestra llegada lo empleamos en celebrar entrevistas con el 
Dr. Ernesto Bosch, Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores, el Dr. Luis M. Drago, el 
Dr. E. S. Zeballos y otros argentinos distinguidos, los cuales bondadosamente me 
ofrecieron sus consejos y prestaron su activo apoyo para llevar a cabo la obra de la 
Fundacion. Por la tarde visite al Dr. Bosch, el cual me presento al Dr. Victorino de 
la Plaza, Vicepresidente de la Republica, que por largo tiempo ha ocupado un lugar 
prominente en los asuntos de la Argentina. El Dr. de la Plaza habla el ingles per- 
fectamente y no pierde ocasion de expresar su amistad hacia los Estados Unidos. 
Todavia recuerda vividamente las dos visitas que ha varios afios hizo a este pais, y 
desde entonces, en sus estudios, ha seguido tan cuidadosamente nuestro progreso 
que se halla familiarizado con el desarrollo de nuestra republica. Es su deseo visitar 
nuevamente a los Estados Unidos, y del beneficio que nuestro pueblo derivaria de la 
presencia de un estadista tan representativo de su nation es aparante; pero sus 
deberes oficiales exigiran su presencia en la Argentina todavia por algunos afios, 
de suerte que la perspectiva de seme j ante visita es, desgraciadamente, bastante 
remota. 



30 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Mientras estuvimos en Buenos Aires, el Dr. Saenz Pefia, distinguido Presi- 
dente de la Nation Argentina, se vio detenido en su casa de campo a causa de 
enfermedad, de modo que no tuve el placer de renovar nuestro conocimiento iniciado 
en Paris. 

El dia de nuestra llegada por la tarde el Dr. Ernesto Bosch y senora, a quienes 
habiamos conocido en Francia cuando el Dr. Bosch era el Ministro de la Argentina 
en dicho punto, y que fueron sumamente bondadosos y hospitalarios para con 
nosotros durante nuestra permanencia en la Argentina, dieron una reception en 
honor de mi senora y de mi hija personalmente, en la cual tuvimos el placer de 
conocer a muchas personas prominentes en la esfera diplomatica y social de la 
capital. 

Por la noche cene con el Dr. E. S. Zeballos en su morada y en la mas distin- 
guida compafiia de los hombres publicos, diplomaticos, jurisconsultos y educacio- 
nistas, los cuales manifestaron un vivo interes en la obra y fines de la Fundacion. 
El Dr. Zeballos pronuncio un breve discurso al cual respond!, refiriendome a las 
declaraciones de Mr. Root durante su memorable visita como doctrina de simpa- 
tias y buena inteligencia, de bondadosa consideration y de obligation honrosa. La 
visita de Mr. Root en 1906, asi como sus manifestaciones publicas, continuan 
vividamente impresas en la memoria de los hombres principales de la Argentina 
en grado no menor que en el Brasil y a medida que prosegui en mi viaje encontre 
que en todas partes existian la misma simpatia hacia el y la misma confianza 
en la sinceridad y potencia de su amistad hacia nuestras hermanas las Republicas 
del Sur. 

Al dia siguiente fuimos obsequiados con un lunch en la Legacion alemana por 
nuestros antiguos amigos el Baron y la Baronesa von dem Bussche. 

Antes de abandonar a Rio de Janeiro fui invitado a pronunciar un discurso 
ante la Facultad de Derecho de la Universidad de Buenos Aires, efectuandose la 
reunion aquella misma tarde en uno de los salones de la Universidad. En ella el Dr. 
Drago me presento a un auditorio compuesto de varios cientos de personas, las 
cuales a pesar de la indole algo tecnica de la materia de que trataba, prestaron la 
mayor atencion a mis palabras. El discurso fue substancialmente una combination 
de los dos que ya habia pronunciado en Rio de Janeiro, porque pronto me di cuenta 
de que el publico preferia que se le hiciera una description general de la obra y fines 
de la Fundacion mas bien que oir un discurso que se limitara a tratar de cualquiera 
de las gestiones que alienta o apoya. 

Por la noche se celebro en la Cancilleria de la Legacion americana una reu- 
nion sin caracter oficial de los alumnos suramericanos y norteamericanos de las 
Universidades de los Estados Unidos, miembros del University Club de Buenos 
Aires, del cual era Presidente nuestro Ministro, Mr. Garrett. Pronunciaronse 
brindis en los que se hicieron manifestaciones de bienvenida y buena voluntad, 
en el mismo caracter general que animaba a la reunion, de la cual no se dejo 
otra constancia que la que quedaba en los recuerdos de aquellos que en esta 
tierra tan distante de las regiones del Norte se habian reunido fraternalmente 



BU3NAS RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATI NOAM ERICA NOS 31 

atraidos por el vinculo comun de un alma mater situada en una republica tan 
distante de las regiones del Sur. Esta reunion producia una agradable sensacion 
de optimismo y seguridad de la amistad futura de nuestros paises respectivos. 
Por lo regular nos hallamos inclinados a valorar muy poco la gran obra realizada 
por tales organizaciones sociales como el University Club de Buenos Aires. 
Ellas constituyen realmente factores importantes en las relaciones de los paises 
y es de esperarse que cuando se lleven a cabo los proyectados cambios de pro- 
fesores y estudiantes bajo los auspicios de la Fundacion se hara un esfuerzo 
por organizar sociedades analogas en aquellos puntos en que sea posible. 

Siempre conservare en la memoria la impresion de la visita que al siguiente 
dia hicimos a varias escuelas publicas. Mientras las senoras de nuestra expedi- 
tion con la sefiora Rodriguez Larreta, Presidenta de la admirable organization 
de beneficencia de Buenos Aires, que es una de las instituciones mas eficientes 
de su clase en el mundo, visitaban los hospitales y casas de beneficencia, descu- 
briendo algo de la generosidad y devotion de las senoras de Buenos Aires, Mr. 
Garrett y yo visitamos las escuelas publicas en union del senor Carlos Ibarguren, 
Ministro de Instruction Piiblica, y del Dr. Pedro Arata, Presidente del Consejo 
Nacional de Educacion. 

Las escuelas publicas de Buenos Aires son modelos de los cuales podria 
sentirse orgulloso cualquier pais. Ellas han despertado la admiracion de ob- 
servadores tan distinguidos como James Bryce y M. Clemenceau. Se ha dicho 
que la Argentina gasta mas dinero en la educacion de sus ninos que ningun 
otro pais del mundo con la exception de Australia, y facilmente puede creerse 
si sus escuelas por lo general poseen la excelencia de las que hemos tenido el placer 
de ver. Para el visitante de los Estados Unidos es motivo de orgullo recordar 
el hecho de que el gran Sarmiento, fundador del sistema educacional de la 
Argentina, fue intimo amigo personal de Horace Mann, y recibio su inspiration 
en gran manera de su amistad. 

El tiempo limitado de que disponiamos en Buenos Aires hacia imposible 
todo lo que se pareciese a un estudio de las condiciones educacionales de la 
Republica y las observaciones que yo pudiera hacer necesariamente no serian 
mas que la reflexion de opiniones de otros viajeros que las han expresado mejor, 
y de los historiadores del pais que han tratado de la materia de un modo com- 
pleto y autorizado, pero vimos lo bastante para llenarnos de admiracion. Halla- 
mos que el ingles se ensefia generalmente y nos causo una impresion indeleble 
oir el himno nacional de los Estados Unidos cantado en ingles por los ninos 
de las escuelas, y vernos saludados en nuestro propio idioma sin falta alguna 
por aquellas nifias y nifios que los demas habian elegido para que nos diesen la 
bienvenida. Nada, creo yo, podia habernos emocionado mas profundamente. 

El senor Ibarguren fue nuestro anfitrion mas tarde en el imponente Jockey- 
Club en un lunch en que conocimos a muchos hombres prominentes en los asuntos 
de la Republica. Por la tarde visitamos los salones del Congreso, edificio de 



32 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

marmol que acaba de terminarse y que, en su belleza arquitectonica presenta 
reminiscencias de nuestro Capitolio en Washington. 

Al senor Joaquin Anchorena, Intendente de Buenos Aires, estamos reco- 
nocidos por muchas atenciones, entre ellas un recorrido de la ciudad a la mafiana 
siguiente, en que tuvimos la oportunidad de ver algunas de las magnificas nuevas 
avenidas y parques de la capital. Inspeccionamos el extenso ferrocarril subterra- 
neo que acababa de terminarse y tambien fuimos con el senor Anchorena, que en 
gran manera merece credito por muchas de estas importantes obras publicas, a la 
estancia municipal modelo y en ella probamos por primera vez el mate, o te 
del Paraguay, que, aunque escasamente conocido en Europa y en los Estados 
Unidos, constituye un articulo del mayor consumo en algunas de las Republicas 
suramericanas, siendo asi que la Argentina solamente importo en 1909, 43,161 
toneladas de mate procedente del Brasil. 

Almorzamos con el Vicepresidente, Dr. de la Plaza, en su residencia, en 
donde habia reunido unos veinte hombres publicos, y en esta, como en otras 
ocasiones, hallamos gran interes en la obra de la Fundacion. El Dr. de la 
Plaza pronuncio un corto discurso, en el cual manifesto oficialmente este interes 
y apoyo, refiriendose particularmente a Mr. Root y empleando la frase en ingles 
que yo habia usado en la comida dada por el Dr. Zeballos al hablar de la doctrina 
de Root. Las manifestaciones del Vicepresidente fueron hechas sin que se 
tomara nota de ellas, y, desgraciadamente no pudimos obtener su transcripcion 
palabra por palabra. 

La tarde la dedicamos a hacer varias visitas sin caracter oficial y por la 
noche fuimos a la morada del Dr. Ezequiel Ramos Mejia, ex-miembro del 
Gabinete y uno de los hombres de mas importancia en la Argentina, el cual, 
en union de su amable esposa, nos obsequio con una recepcion. 

Al dia siguiente almorzamos en las carreras de caballos con el senor Jorge 
Mitre, propietario y director de La Nacion, que es uno de los grandes, activos e 
importantes diarios argentinos que forman la admiration del mundo perio- 
distico. Este dia era uno de esos importantes en el calendario de los deportes 
y el Vicepresidente y casi todos los demas funcionarios del Gobierno concurrieron 
a las carreras de caballos. El espectaculo nos hizo recordar uno de los grandes 
dias de Longchamps. Mas tarde, fuimos con el Dr. Bermejo, el Dr. Ibarguren y 
el Dr. Aldao, a un Congreso de Ninos, en donde cientos de niiios esplendidamentet 
adiestrados hicieron ejercicios gimnasticos. Por la noche tomamos el vapor 
"Eleo" con direction a Montevideo, habiendo venido a despedirnos al muelle el 
senor Barilari, del Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores, Mr. Garrett, el Mayor 
Shipton, el Teniente Whitlock y otros amigos. 

Ya hemos dicho lo bastante en este relato acerca de nuestra visita a Buenos 
Aires para indicar la extrema cordialidad con que fuimos recibidos. La impre- 
sion que nos causara en el Brasil la amistad del pueblo de Sur America hacia los 
Estados Unidos se vio confirmada y robustecida en la Argentina. A pesar del 
objeto extraoficial y del caracter privado de nuestra mision, los periodicos de- 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 33 

dicaron diariamente sendas columnas a describir todo lo que hicimos, reprodu- 
ciendo en su totalidad los discursos pronunciados y publicando varios articulos 
descriptivos del objeto y fines de la Fundacion. La indole algo cientifica de estos 
articuluos, la falta de todo lo que pudieramos llamar efectista en el tema mismo, 
nos induce a la creencia de que los periodicos meramente reflejaron el amistoso 
interes del publico en la obra que los Sindicos tratan de realizar. 

Este interes fue notable entre aquellos con quienes tuve la oportunidad de 
cambiar impresiones. Siempre encontramos cooperation inmediata entre los 
principales ciudadanos y un poderoso comite fue debidamente autorizado por el 
Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores al proposito de organizar una sociedad na- 
cional de Derecho internacional. Este grupo de hombres comprendia los que 
con sus consejos me habian estimulado tanto, a saber: el Dr. Antonio Bermejo, 
Presidente de la Corte Suprema, el Dr. Eduardo Bidau, de la Facultad de De- 
recho de la Universidad de Buenos Aires, el Dr. Eufemio Uballes, Rector de la 
Universidad de Buenos Aires, el Dr. Luis M. Drago, y el Dr. E. S. Zeballos. 

Discutiose la organizacion de una sociedad nacional para la conciliacion 
internacional y los senores con quienes hable estuvieron enteramente conformes 
con sus propositos. El Dr. Benjamin Garcia Victorica acepto el puesto de Se- 
cretario Honorario y fue puesto inmediatamente en relation con el Dr. Butler. 
La obra de la organizacion procedera rapidamente bajo la direction del Dr. 
Garcia Victorica y la asociacion principal para la conciliacion internacional es- 
tablecida en Paris, asi como la establecida en Nueva York, creo yo, hallaran 
un valioso auxiliar en la de Buenos Aires. 

Se ha dicho tanto del verdadero desarrollo maravilloso de la Republica 
Argentina que mi testimonio no puede anadir sino muy poco para que los Estados 
Unidos se den cuenta del rapido progreso de la Argentina y del importante 
lugar que ella ocupa entre las naciones. Su historia reciente ofrece muchos 
extraordinarios paralelos con la nuestra y no pocos de los problemas que se 
suscitan son los mismos con que hemos tenido que luchar nosotros o con que en 
la actualidad estamos luchando. Los inmensos recursos naturales de la Ar- 
gentina, que tiene un area de mas de un millon de millas cuadradas o alrededor 
de la tercera parte de los Estados Unidos propiamente dichos, la virilidad e in- 
dustria de su pueblo y la ilustracion, habilidad y patriotismo de sus hombres 
publicos no ofrecen duda alguna de la futura grandeza de la Republica. 

Todo indica inequivocamente el creciente comercio entre la Argentina y 
los Estados Unidos y, lo que es mas importante todavia, las intimas relaciones 
intelectuales. Es esencial que lleguemos a una mejor inteligencia, y es augurio 
feliz para lo futuro que al tratar de hacer esto, la Fundacion logre que sus 
planes sean aprobados y sostenidos por aquellos eminentes directores argen- 
tinos que en tan gran medida han contribuido al presente adelanto de su pais. 



34 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

En Uruguay 

El Rio de la Plata en Buenos Aires es realmente un brazo de mar, de suerte 
que Montevideo, aunque "al otro lado del rio", dista ciento diez millas de la 
ciudad Argentina y el viaje entre las dos capitales requiere unas diez horas. 

Aguardando la llegada del vapor nos encontramos con el sefior Fermin Car- 
los de Yerequi, del Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores del Uruguay, que nos 
dio la bienvenida oficial, y a nuestro Ministro Nicolay Grevstad, que, durante 
los dos dias que estuvimos en Uruguay fue de lo mas atento y servicial. Habiase 
formado un comite de reception compuesto del Dr. Pablo de Maria, Presidente 
de la Corte Suprema, el Dr. Claudio Williman, Rector de la Universidad de Mon- 
tevideo y ex Presidente del Uruguay, el Dr. Ildefonso Garcia Lagos, Presidente 
del Comite Central Uruguayo de la Asociacion Americana de la Paz, el Dr. Julio 
Bastos, Presidente del Ateneo y el Dr. Carlos M. Prando, y debido a sus buenos 
oficios y a los de Mr. Grevstad conoci a los hombres del Uruguay con quienes 
tanto deseaba relacionarme. 

Montevideo es una ciudad mucho mas pequena que Buenos Aires, alrededor 
de una tercera o cuarta parte en extension, pero posee toda la dignidad de una 
grande e importante capital, ademas del encanto individual que las ciudades 
pequenas a menudo retienen. Montevideo posee avenidas amplias, bien pavi- 
mentadas y bien alumbradas, con atractivos edificios y con muchos establecimien- 
tos interesantes. La ciudad esta bien equipada de tranvias electricos modernos. 
Las plazas y parques publicos de extremada belleza anaden al encanto del lugar 
que atrae a muchas personas de Buenos Aires durante los meses del estio. En 
los alrededores existen deliciosos resortes cerca del mar que se encuentran a 
poca distancia de la ciudad y ofrecen puntos agradables de recreo para los mon- 
tevideanos. Al oeste se halla el famoso Cerro, gran loma en forma de cono 
adorada de los habitantes de la ciudad, que a menudo van a ella para gozar 
de la vista que desde alii se obtiene del rio y del puerto con sus muelles y sus 
diques. En la bahia, ya excelente, aunque demasiado pequena para el comercio 
del puerto, se estan haciendo extensas mejoras. 

La primera mafiana la empleamos en hacer una visita al Ministro de Rela- 
ciones Exteriores, sefior Emilio Barbaroux, el cual me presento a varios emi- 
nentes educacionistas y publicistas con quienes discuti el objeto de mi visita, pi- 
diendoles su colaboracion, que de buena gana me facilitaron. 

Fuimos a un lunch dado por el Ministro americano, en el cual habia unos 
veinte distinguidos residentes de Montevideo. Mr. Grevstad pronuncio en espanol 
un corto discurso de bienvenida, al cual respondi. 

La tarde la pasamos en el Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores con el sefior 
Barbaroux y varios caballeros que el habia invitado para presentarme a ellos en 
dicho lugar. Tratamos de la cuestion de un comite para organizar una sociedad 
nacional de Derecho internacional. Todos los sefiores presentes se entregaron 
de la manera mas seria a la discusion y convinieron en prestar sus servicios 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 35 

en el comite que por el momento se constituyo sin caracter oficial que incluia al 
sefior Emilio Barbaroux, Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores; al Dr. Pablo de 
Maria, Presidente de la Corte Suprema; al Dr. Ildefonso Garcia Lagos, Presi- 
dente del Comite Central Uruguayo de la Asociacion de la Paz; al Dr. Juan 
Zorrilla de San Martin; al Dr. Jose Pedro Varela; al Dr. Jose Cremonessi; y 
al Dr. Daniel Garcia Acevedo. Este grupo se queria que formase la base para 
la organizacion de una sociedad permanente. 

Por la noche y ante un extenso y extremadamente simpatico auditorio 
reunido en el Ateneo, el Dr. Juan Zorilla de San Martin, orador de reputacion 
internacional, pronuncio un brillante discurso en el que expreso la aprobacion de 
los uruguayos de la obra de la Fundacion Carnegie y en el que hizo mas particular- 
mente una description laudatoria del Instituto Americano de Derecho Interna- 
cional. Es motivo de profunda pena que no haya exacta constancia del elocuente 
discurso del sefior San Martin por haber hablado sin llevar notas y sin que hubiese 
un taquigrafo presente, pero, en una carta que acabo de recibir de Mr. Grevstad, 
me es grato decir que me da seguridades de que el sefior San Martin, a mi 
ruego urgente, tratara de escribir un valioso estudio reproduciendo el discurso 
al extremo en que la memoria se lo permita. Despues de la simpatica intro- 
duction del sefior San Martin hice uso de la palabra por algun tiempo, expo- 
niendo en detalles los metodos y fines de la Fundacion segun los habia expuesto 
en Buenos Aires. 

Casi toda la mafiana siguiente la empleamos en el Ministerio de Relaciones 
Exteriores. El sefior Barbaroux demostro el mas constante interes en los 
numerosos puntos mencionados en mi carta de instrucciones sin que me sea 
posible expresar lo suficiente mi profundo agradecimiento hacia el. Nuestra 
permanencia en Montevideo se limito a unas cuantas horas. Desgraciadamente 
tenia que ser asi. Nosotros hubieramos querido estar mas tiempo, y el hecho 
de que hubieramos podido realizar lo que realizamos fue debido del todo a la 
ayuda del sefior Barbaroux y de sus amigos, a Mr. Grevstad y a los miembros 
del comite de reception. 

Por la tarde tuve el honor de ser presentado a Su Excelencia el Presi- 
dente, sefior Batlle y Ordonez, y me senti impresionado, en la audiencia necesaria- 
mente corta que me dispensara, por su entereza, por lo familiarizado que demostro 
hallarse con los temas que yo habia venido a tratar y por su simpatia hacia el 
objeto de mi visita. 

El Presidente Batlle vive a corta distancia de la ciudad y regresamos en 
coche de su hermosa quinta a la capital y al Prado, magnifico parque de 
Montevideo, en donde se daba un te en nuestro honor bajo los hospitalarios 
auspicios de los miembros de la colonia americana e inglesa de Monte- 
video. Del te fui a la morada del Dr. Ildefonso Garcia Lagos y siempre 
recordare la media hora de conversation encantadora que tuve con el. A pesar 
de la edad y de su ceguera, el Dr. Garcia Lagos, que, en 1899, fue delegado a 
la Primera Conferencia Panamericana celebrada en Washington, ha continuado 



36 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL vSUR 

interesandose en la amplia obra internacional y humanitaria en que por tan 
largo tiempo ha mantenido su puesto de avanzada. No se detuvo a considerar 
su conveniencia personal cuando el senor Barbaroux lo invito a reunirse con 
nosotros en el Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores, sino que abandono su casa 
para hallarse presente, ofreciendonos el beneficio de su experiencia y valiosos 
consejos. 

Aquella noche se nos dio un banquete en el Club Uruguay por el Ministro 
do Relaciones Exteriores, en donde conocimos a hombres y mujeres de promi- 
nentia en la vida de la capital. Oimos muchas expresiones de cordial simpatia 
hacia el objeto de nuestra visita y esto fue voceado oficialmente en un corto 
discurso pronunciado por el Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores. 

A fin de tener la oportunidad de conocer de este agradable modo a las 
personas con quienes deseabamos relacionarnos, el vapor que habia de llevarnos 
a Buenos Aires fue detenido en su salida por una hora o mas y ya era cerca de 
la media noche cuando abandonamos el Club Uruguay. El Ministro americano, 
los miembros del Comite de Reception y el sefior de Yerequi, del Ministerio de 
Relaciones Exteriores, nos acompafiaron al vapor para decirnos adios y aumentar 
por medio de esta ultima atencion el profundo sentimiento de gratitud que ya 
nos habia inspirado tan hospitalaria acogida. 

Nos parece poco menos que extraordinario que en los dos dias que estuvimos 
en el Uruguay hubieramos de recibir impresiones que se grabaran firmemente en 
nuestra memoria, pero no podemos olvidar la amistosa reception que se nos 
dispensara ni podemos expresar de modo apropiado nuestro agradecimiento por 
la cordialidad y hospitalidad que marcaron nuestra visita a Montevideo. Hubiera 
sido imposible que nuestros anfitriones hicieran mas de lo que hicieron para 
atestiguar su interes. 

El Uruguay ocupa un puesto tan honroso e importante entre las naciones 
de America que es particularmente satisfactorio saber que la Fundacion cuenta 
con la aprobacion y apoyo de sus principales ciudadanos pertenecientes a la 
vida publica y privada. Alguien ha descrito bien a Montevideo diciendo que 
es La Haya americana a causa de los muchos congresos y conferencias inter- 
nacionales que se celebran en el. Gran numero de estas reuniones tienen por 
mira el mejoramiento de las condiciones presentes de la humanidad. Todo lo 
que tiende a levantar la humanidad, todo lo que significa progreso en la marcha 
de la civilization, encuentra un apoyo cordial en el progresista Uruguay. Mas 
de un historiador ha indicado que la mayoria de los directores en el progreso del 
mundo procede de las naciones pequefias. El Uruguay, aunque la mas pequetia 
en extension de las republicas suramericanas ocupa un puesto de honor y con- 
secuencia que no depende de su tamafio sino de la inteligencia, del adelanto y 
del patriotismo de sus hijos. Aunque la mas pequena de las naciones del con- 
tinente del Sur, es tan grande como toda Nueva Inglaterra incluso el estado de 
New Jersey y segun alguien ha dicho, no tiene una sola hectarea de terrenos 
esteriles en toda su extension. Comercial y materialmente se desarrolla con 



BUENAS REEACIONES CON EOS PUEBLOS EATINOAMERICANOS 37 

rapidez, participando en la gran prosperidad y progreso que ha venido a estas 
Republicas del Sur en estos ultimos afios. Hay razon sobrada para creer, y es 
causa de congratularse, que la obra de cooperar con la Fundacion ya empezada 
en el Uruguay se continue con los mas satisfactorios resultados. 

En Chile 

Todavia nos quedaba a nuestro regreso a Buenos Aires un dia de completa 
ocupacion. Celebramos entrevistas con el Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores, sefior 
Bosch y otros que nos habian manifestado el mayor interes en los fines de la Funda- 
cion, hicimos una visita bajo la direction personal del Dr. Adolfo Mugica, Ministro 
de Agricultura, al Museo Agricola, en donde vimos muestras extraordinarias de 
algunas de esas cosas que han hecho a la Argentina una gran nation y, por la noche 
asistimos a una comida dada en la Legation. 

A la mafiana siguiente temprano emprendimos el viaje hacia el otro lado del 
continente, a cuyo efecto el Presidente habia puesto su coche particular a nuestra 
disposition, habiendo delegado el Gobierno al sefior Cortazar, del Servicio de Ferro- 
carriles, para que nos acompafiase. En la estacion habia muchos de nuestros 
amigos que habian venido a darnos la despedida. Mr. Garrett, el Mayor Shipton, 
el Agregado Militar, el sefior Bosch y senora, el sefior Green y sefiora, el Dr. 
Joaquin de Anchorena, el Dr. Larrain, el Ministro chileno, el sefior Barilari, 
del Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores, y otros mas que habian hecho mucho 
para que nuestra permanencia en Buenos Aires nos fuera tan agradable que 
se nos quedara grabada para siempre en la memoria. 

Durante todo el dia viajamos en linea recta hacia el oeste a traves de una pra- 
dera de maravillosa riqueza, en la cual pastaban inmensos hatos de ganado vacuno 
y caballar. Mares aparentemente ilimitados de trigo y alfalfa ondeaban a lo lejos 
en toda la extension que podia abarcar la vista. Nadie que haya realizado ese viaje 
a traves de las pampas necesita que se le haga ninguna explication ulterior de la 
prosperidad que tan rapidamente ha empujado a la Republica Argentina a un lugar 
principalisimo entre las naciones del mundo. 

Llegamos a Mendoza, ciudad situada en las faldas de los Andes, poco despues 
del amanecer, y alii pasamos a un tren especial de via estrecha que remonta entre un 
imponente panorama las montafias a una altura de cerca de 10,500 pies. Durante 
el ascenso descubrimos el Aconcagua, la montafia mas alta del hemisferio occidental. 
Cerca de la cresta se ha abierto un tiinel hacia la vertiente occidental, eliminandose 
asi el viaje a lomo de mula de hace unos cuantos afios. Mucho se ha escrito de las 
penalidades de este viaje por ferrocarril a traves de los Andes, pero ninguno de 
nosotros experimento ninguna incomodidad. El descenso por el lado chileno ofrece 
panoramas distintos de los que se descubren en la parte oriental de las Cordilleras. 
Las montafias son menos esteriles y por esa razon quizas son menos escabrosas, 
aunque el descenso es mas precipitado que el ascenso. Las gargantas y desfiladeros 
son mas estrechos y parecen mas profundos, y a medida que el tren da vueltas y 



38 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL. SUR 

mas vueltas en su descenso se descubren panoramas admirables de gran extension y 
que demuestran la gran fertilidad del pais. 

En los Andes cambiamos nuevamente al ferrocarril de via ancha y continua- 
mos nuestro viaje en un coche especial suministrado por el Gobierno chileno. Mr. 
Harvey, nuestro Encargado de Negocios en Chile se unio a nosotros poco despues. 
Llegamos a Santiago a eso de las diez y media de la noche ; pero a pesar de lo avan- 
zado de la hora, vinieron a saludarnos un gran numero de personas, incluso repre- 
sentantes del Gobierno y miembros del Comite de Recepcion. Despues de un 
agradable momento de saludos en el tren y en la estacion, fuimos llevados a nuestro 
hotel en los carruajes del Estado, que el Presidente de la Republica habia puesto a 
nuestra disposition. 

Los preparativos para nuestra recepcion en Santiago habian sido encomendados 
a un comite compuesto de los siguientes senores : Dr. Domingo Amunategui, Rector 
de la Universidad de Chile, Senador Joaquin Walker Martinez, Director de la 
Caja Hipotecaria, Dr. Luis Barros Borgono, Dr. Antonio Hunneus, ex Ministro 
de Relaciones Exteriores, senor Jorge Astaburuaga, y senor Julio Philippi. 

Los miembros de este comite estuvieron sumamente atentos durante los cuatro 
dias que permanecimos en Santiago, sin que perdieran la oportunidad de ensefiarnos 
los muchos puntos de interes de esta hermosa y pintoresca ciudad. Debido a ellos 
y a los esfuerzos del Encargado de Negocios de los Estados Unidos, Mr. Harvey, 
tuve el placer de conocer a los principales ciudadanos de Chile y cambiar impresiones 
con ellos acerca de la obra que la Fundacion deseaba realizar. 

La primera manana la dedicamos a un passeo en coche por la ciudad en com- 
pania de los miembros del comite. Santiago es una poblacion enteramente original. 
Posee todo el encanto de una antigua ciudad espafiola, pero sus progresistas e ilus- 
trados ciudadanos han agregado a este encanto de antigiiedad las comodidades y 
mejoras de las capitales modernas. Su situation es superba. Muy cerca de la ciudad 
se levantan elevadas montanas que la circundan a manera de marco de proporciones 
imponentes y de exquisito colorido. En la despejada atmosfera las montanas 
parecen hallarse sumamente cerca ; pero no producen sino una idea de protection 
sin ese opresivo sentimiento de restriction, de hallarse encerrado, que tan a menudo 
se experimenta en las ciudades construidas cerca de elevadas montanas. El visitante, 
quizas inconcientemente, tiene siempre presente aquel valle longitudinal de incom- 
parable riqueza y fertilidad en que se halla situado Santiago, que hace de esta parte 
de Chile una region que los viajeros experimentados consideran como uno de los 
puntos mas atractivos de la tierra. 

; Cuan grata impresion recibimos aquella manana de octubre al descubrir la 
capital chilena bafiada por el sol que brillaba desde un cielo azul y acariciada por 
una brisa vigorizante que venia de las montanas ! Dias como este, segun me han 
dicho, son comunes en Santiago, en donde rara vez el calor o el f rio se hacen des- 
agradables. Desde el historico Cerro de Santa Lucia contemplamos el panorama de 
la ciudad, metropolis de medio millon de habitantes, con calles anchas, edificios de 
arquitectura agradable y estatuas y monumentos dignos de una nation poderosa. 



BUENAS REXACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS I^ATINOAMERICANOS 39 

Por la tarde visite al Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores, senor Enrique 
Villegas, y debido a su cortesia tuve el honor de ser presentado al Presidente 
de Chile, senor Barros Luco, el cual demostro el mayor interes en el objeto de 
mi visita. 

Despues de la audiencia que me concediera el Presidente fuimos directa- 
mente a la Universidad de Chile, en donde, ante un gran numero de personas 
de representation y de muchos estudiantes de la Universidad, recibi un diploma 
por el cual se me conferia el titulo de miembro honorario de la Sociedad de De- 
recho y Ciencias Politicas, que es la forma que ellos tienen de conferir un 
titulo honorario. El Rector de la Universidad, Dr. Domingo Amunategui pro- 
nuncio un breve discurso de presentation, el cual fue seguido de un discurso 
de bienvenida pronunciado por el Dr. Luis Barros Borgono, Dean de la Facultad 
de Filosofia y Humanidades. En mi respuesta, segui estrechamente el derrotero 
del discurso pronunciado en Buenos Aires y Montevideo al describir la obra 
y fines de la Fundacion y el objeto de mi visita. 

Esta era la primera oportunidad que se me presentaba en la costa occidental 
de Sur America de presentar al publico la obra de la Fundacion y de solicitar 
su colaboracion, y estaba ansioso por comparar el interes del pueblo con el 
demostrado en las ciudades de la costa oriental. No me es posible manifestar 
la satisfaction, aliento e inspiration que sus manifestaciones de entusiasmo me 
proporcionaron, ya que inmediatamente quedo demostrado ante mis ojos que 
en Chile como en la Argentina, como en el Uruguay y como en el Brasil, los 
Sindicos encontraran decididos colaboradores. Jamas podre olvidar la escena en 
el momento en que abandonabamos el salon con los victoreos de los estudiantes, 
saludandonos y demostrando asi su aprobacion. Los estudiantes de las uni- 
versidades son muy parecidos en todo el mundo; si desaprueban, no es posible 
forzarles una buena opinion; si aprueban, no es posible refrenar la expresion 
de sus sentimientos. Fue para mi un gran placer que la obra de la Fundacion 
hubiese excitado su imagination y obtenido sus simpatias. Esto significa mucho 
para la causa en lo futuro, porque manana estos jovenes seran los directores a 
quienes la Fundacion habra de acudir en demanda de apoyo. 

A la manana siguiente dimos otro paseo por la ciudad con el senor Hunneus 
y otros miembros del comite; despues fuimos a un lunch en la Legation y mas 
tarde visitamos las carreras de caballo, en donde se habian reunido los elemen- 
tos oficiales y sociales de la capital. Muy pocos lugares habra en el mundo 
tan bonitos como la planicie cubierta de cesped del Hipodromo de Santiago con 
las montanas que se alzan un poco mas alia. En una reception celebrada mas 
tarde en la morada del Dr. Luis Barros Borgono, a la cual asistio el Presidente, 
tuvimos otra deliciosa oportunidad de conocer mejor a los que con su cordial 
hospitalidad nos habian hecho sentir que eramos bien recibidos. 

Por la noche fui a una comida de lo mas interesante dada por el Ministro 
de Hacienda, senor Alessandri, en el Club de la Union. 



40 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Al sefior Hunneus y esposa, cuya hospitalidad y multiples atenciones con- 
tribuyeron tanto a nuestra satisfaction, y el sefior Urrutia y su encantadora 
senora a quienes habia conocido en Washington, al sefior Astaburuaga y a otros 
reconocemos una deuda que jamas podremos satisfacer. Debido a ellos en gran 
manera conocimos, durante nuestra corta permanencia en Santiago muchos 
miembros de las antiguas familias que dan a la sociedad de la capital chilena 
la cultura cosmopolita que la hace tan notable en todo el mundo. Nada podia 
habernos proporcionado mas placer que conocer a sus amigos. En una comida 
y recepcion celeb rada en la residencia de la senora Edwards e hi jo, sefior Agus- 
tin Edwards, Ministro chileno cerca de la Corte de San Jaime, en una recepcion 
dada en nuestro honor por la senora Montt, viuda de un distinguido Presidente 
de Chile, y en las moradas de otras personas conocidas pudimos apreciar cuan 
profundamente deliciosa debe ser la vida en esta parte favorecida de America, 
donde, en un hermoso medio ambiente y en condiciones climatericas tan perfectas, 
quizas, como pueden encontrarse en cualquier parte, existe una civilizacion que 
reune el antiguo encanto de Castilla y el progreso y virilidad del Nuevo Mundo. 
Tampoco dejare de mencionar entre estas agradabilisimas memorias cuan parti- 
cularmente placentero me fue conocer a don Julio Foster, que durante la mayor 
parte de sus noventa afios, ha sido una figura prominente en la vida de Santiago. 

Los ultimos dos dias de nuestra permanencia en Santiago los dedicamos en 
gran manera a celebrar entrevistas con los sefiores Hunneus, Astaburuaga y 
otros miembros del comite y con los sefiores Philippi, don Ricardo Montaner 
Bello, el Dr. Amunategui y otros representantes de la Universidad, todos los 
cuales me habian ayudado tanto con sus consejos. 

Iniciose la formation de un comite para la organizacion de una sociedad na- 
cional de Derecho internacional. Fuimos particularmente afortunados en contar 
con la cooperation de prominentes chilenos cuyo apoyo no dejo lugar a dudas 
en lo que respecta al exito de la empresa, entre ellos al sefior Hunneus, ex 
Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores ; el Dr. Luis Barros Borgofio, Decano de la 
Facultad de Derecho de la Universidad de Chile; el Dr. Amunategui Solar, 
Rector de la Universidad de Chile ; el sefior Ricardo Montaner Bello. Despues de 
mi regreso a los Estados Unidos he tenido el placer de recibir una prueba de 
la actividad de estos eminentes sefiores en forma de una circular anunciando 
la permanente organizacion de la socieded nacional. 

Todas estas experiencias han sido altamente satisfactorias, puesto que todos 
aquellos con quienes tuve el gusto de cambiar impresiones se aprovecharon de 
todas las ocasiones que se presentaron para expresar su entera aprobacion del 
programa de la Fundacion, demostrando de modo practico sus buenas disposiciones 
a colaborar con los Sindicos. 

Entre tanto los funcionarios del Gobierno continuaron dispensandonos sus 
atenciones. Hicimos una interesante visita a la Escuela Militar, donde almorzamos 
con el Ministro -de la Guerra, sefior Jorge Matte Gomaz, y donde tuve oportunidad 
de conocer a los jefes del ejercito a quienes en tan gran manera se debe la eficacia 



BUENAS RiXACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 41 

del soldado chileno, que ha merecido los elogios de autoridades de muchos paises. 
Tuvimos la suerte de presenciar un magnifico ejercicio. A la noche siguiente 
tuvimos el placer de concurrir a una opipara comida dada por el Ministro de Rela- 
ciones Exteriores, sefior Enrique Villegas, y a la cual siguio un baile en el Club 
Hipico. 

Salimos de Santiago para Valparaiso por la mafiana temprano del 29 de 
octubre en un tren especial que el Gobierno habia puesto a nuestra disposicion. Mr. 
Harvey, el sefior Hunneus, el sefior Lynch, representante del Ministro de Rela- 
ciones Exteriores y otros, fueron a la estacion a despedirnos. 

Nosotros hubieramos querido detenernos por algiin tiempo en Valparaiso a 
fin de relacionarnos con algunos de sus principales cuidadanos, pero el tiempo limi- 
tado de que disponiamos para todo el viaje a Sur America nos lo hizo imposible. 
Sin embargo, tuve tiempo para visitar al Intendente Municipal que bondadosa- 
mente nos habia enviado una lancha para llevarnos al vapor. 

A la estacion vinieron a saludarnos el Capitan Johnson, Agregado Naval ameri- 
cano, y el Consul General, Winslow, y almorzamos con ellos en el Club Ingles, 
despues de ir a las alturas que dominan la ciudad. Es motivo de elogio para el 
pueblo de Valparaiso y del caracter chileno que su puerto principal, que fue casi 
destruido por un temblor de tierra en 1906, haya sido reconstruido tan rapidamente 
y mejor y mas hermoso que antes. 

Salimos de Valparaiso a las cuatro de la tarde en el Vapor "Oronsa" de la 
Pacific Steam Navigation Company, sintiendo abandonar aquellas playas que nos 
habian sido tan hospitalarias. 

La Republica de Chile se mantiene al paso con el progreso que han realizado 
las grandes repiiblicas de la costa oriental de Sur America. Ha luchado con 
dificultades considerablemente mayores que aquellas con que han tropezado las 
republicas del Este, porque su mayor proximidad a Europa les ha traido una 
solution mas rapida del gran problema suramericano de proveer comunicaciones 
ferroviarias maritimas y fluviales, de las cuales en gran manera ha de depender 
el progreso de toda nation. El trafico maritimo entre Chile y los paises de 
Europa ha necesitado el largo y arduo paso a traves del Estrecho de Magallanes 
o el dificil viaje alrededor del Cabo de Hornos. Las comunicaciones ferroviarias 
con el mundo exterior se han limitado hasta hace poco a la obtenida por el 
paso de los Andes a lomo de mulo, viaje imposible durante varios meses del afio. 
El tunel que une los extremos chileno y argentino del Ferrocarril Transandino, 
uniendo como une un gran sistema transcontinental solvio el problema agricola, 
y otros ferrocarriles transandinos que se hallan en estudio o en curso de con- 
struction acrecentaran mucho estas facilidades. El problema de las comunica- 
ciones maritimas quedara resuelto por el Canal de Panama. 

Una corta visita a Chile es suficiente para llevar al animo la creencia de 
que la prosperidad actual de que disfruta ha de aumentar rapidamente. Las 
condiciones naturales indican de modo convincente tal conclusion y los chilenos 
mismos constituyen un pueblo tan viril y tan determinado y unido en su amor 



42 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

a la patria y en el deseo de fomentar su desarrollo, que el futuro de Chile nos 
parece hermosisimo. Seguramente nosotros los de los Estados Unidos tenemos 
razon suficiente para esperar que asi sea. 

Desde el advenimiento de la Republica, la buena acogida extendida a los 
extranjeros ha estado en harmonia con la hospitalidad que ha hecho famosa a 
la raza espanola y esto ha producido un espiritu amplio y cosmopolita ; pero 
aunque los chilenos acogen buenamente a los extranjeros, no hay un pueblo 
mas sensible y mas orgulloso que el pueblo chileno. No son arrogantes, pero 
cifran un patriotico orgullo en la obra de sus hombres ilustres y en su consecuencia 
resienten rapidamente toda action o actitud que no este en harmonia con su 
elevado concepto de dignidad personal y nacional. 

En las mas intimas relaciones entre el pueblo de Chile y el pueblo de este 
pais, que es seguro ha de traer la apertura del Canal de Panama, sera bien que 
recordemos estas cosas a fin de que a causa de atolondramiento o ignorancia 
no vayamos a ofenderlos, sino que tratemos en todos sentidos de robustecer los 
actuales vinculos de amistad que nos unen a esta republica hermana. 

En Peru 

Desde Valparaiso hasta el Callao, desde el Callao hacia el norte hasta 
llegar al Rio Guayaquil, jamas se pierde de vista la tierra. El rumbo sigue la 
linea recta de la costa, generalmente tan cerca de ella que pueden verse las 
rompientes al pie de las aridas montanas. Las mas elevadas crestas hacia 
oriente roban a los vientos de su humedad antes de que lleguen al mar, de suerte 
que desde la cubierta del vapor, el viajero descubre una region tan desabrigada 
y a menudo tan extranamente fantastica en sus contornos como los panoramas 
que pintara Dore para ilustrar los versos del Dante. Leguas y mas leguas de 
terrenos desprovistos de toda vegetation se trasponen a medida que el vapor 
avanza ; pero a pesar de su aridez, la perspectiva se hace interesante por la 
intensidad del colorido. En la luz cambiante de la manana, del medio dia y de 
la tarde pueden verse desplegados en los picos y en los valles todos los colores 
del espectro, desde el rojo hasta el violeta, con la sorprendente exception del 
verde, cuya falta suple el agitado mar. Por mas de dos mil millas el vapor 
surca las aguas frente a estas montanas calidas y desiertas que solamente 
necesitan que las toque el agua para convertirse en jardines flotantes de 
exhuberancia tropical. 

Segun se nos dijo, las tormentas en esta costa son raras ; casi desconocidas, 
segun el Capitan del vapor : de suerte que los buques pueden con impunidad 
acercarse a la costa, puesto que hay profundidad a pocos pasos de la estrecha 
playa que generalmente se extiende como una cinta amarilla al pie de las 
montanas. La marejada es constante y a veces hace que el buque se balancee 
desagradablemente, en particular cuando se halla anclado ; pero por lo demas 
el viaje a lo largo de la costa occidental de Sur America se parece mas a un 



BU3NAS RELACIONES CON I,OS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 43 

paseo en yate que a la travesia oceanica a que estan acostumbrados los viajeros 
del Atlantico. La corriente Humbolt que corre desde el Antartico, no deja que 
el viaje hacia el ecuador se haga desagradablemente caluroso. 

Las aves marinas, los peces voladores, asi como los monstruosos habitantes 
del oceano, tales como puercos marinos y ballenas, nos acompafiaron durante el 
viaje en numero suficiente para distraer nuestra atencion del panorama de 
montanas rojizas al parecer sin fin. A veces veiamos en los aires miles de 
pajaros y pasabamos islas de guano literalmente cubiertas de ellos. 

El "Oronsa" hizo escala en seis puertos entre Valparaiso y el Callao, anclando 
en la rada abierta, porque practicamente no existen bahias, mientras echabamos 
a tierra o embarcabamos carga o pasajeros. 

El proximo punto de escala fue Coquimbo, pequefio pero importante puerto 
de embarque con buen anclaje, a un dia de Valparaiso. Al dia siguiente entramos 
a Antofagasta, que se halla situado en el Tropico de Capricornio y que constituye 
el puerto de entrada de Bolivia. Nosotros habiamos* sentido profundamente 
no haber tenido tiempo de ir a La Paz; pero la distancia a la capital boliviana 
desde el litoral, asi como la imposibilidad de hacer los enlaces satis factorios de 
vapores, hacian nuestra visita a La Paz imposible. Desde Antofagasta, enviamos 
un telegrama a nuestro Ministro en Bolivia, manifestandole cuanto sentiamos 
hallarnos en el puerto de La Paz sin poder emprender los dos dias de viaje a 
traves de las montanas hacia la Republica aislada cuyo brillante futuro ha de 
ser la esperanza y expectacion de todos los que se hallan familiarizados con las 
dificultades que ya ha logrado veneer en su rapido desarrollo reciente. 

En Antofagasta vino a bordo un representante del Intendente para darnos 
la bienvenida y recibimos tambien la visita del Agente consular de los Estados 
Unidos. Nuestro vapor se detuvo tambien en Iquique, Arica, Arequipa y Mo- 
llendo, y desde Arequipa enviamos un mensaje de saludo a los encargados del 
observatorio de la Universidad de Harvard en el Misti. 

El sol se ponia cuando llegamos al Callao el 3 de noviembre. El Callao posee 
una bahia excelente, la mayor y mejor de las que habiamos visto en la costa 
occidental, pero todavia los buques no atracan a los muelles. Una lancha vapora 
habia sido enviada por nosotros y nos dirigimos a tierra antes de que el "Oronsa" 
hubiera llegado a su punto regular de anclaje. En la confusion incidental que se 
siguio de esto dejamos de saludar a Mr. Pennoyer, nuestro Secretario de Lega- 
cion, al sefior German Cisneros y Raygada, del Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores, 
los cuales habian venido a darnos la bienvenida oficial, asi como a otros que no 
habian llegado a bordo antes de que nosotros hubieramos salido ; pero tuvimos el 
placer de verlos poco despues en el hotel en Lima y muchas otras veces en 
distintas ocasiones posteriores, pues fueron incansables en su constante y valiosa 
ayuda durante nuestra permanencia en el Peru. Aunque no vimos al sefior 
Cisneros ni a Mr. Pennoyer en el vapor, tuvimos el placer de conocer al Dr. 
Juan Bautista de Lavalle y otros miembros de un comite que nos saludo en nombre 
de la Facultad de San Marcos. Grande fue tambien nuestro placer en saludar 



44 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

nuevamente al sefior Felipe Pardo a quien yo habia conocido en Washington 
cuando el era Ministro peruano cerca del Gobierno de los Estados Unidos. 

Lima se halla a siete millas del Callao y fuimos a ella en uno de los tranvias 
electricos que hacen su itinerario a intervalos frecuentes entre dicho puerto y la 
capital. El tranvia habia sido colocado a nuestra disposition, lo cual constituia 
otra prueba de atencion por el Gobierno, cuya buena voluntad quedo constante- 
mente maninesta. El Presidente, sefior Billinghurst, puso su automovil a mis 
ordenes durante toda nuestra permanencia en Lima. 

Ya era de noche cuando llegamos a la capital, pero lo poco que vimos 
mientras nos dirigiamos al Hotel Maury desde la estacion nos produjo la mas 
agradable impresion y esta la vimos mas tarde confirmada y robustecida. La 
antigiiedad de Lima, el caracter individual y pintoresco que tan encantadora- 
mente ha conservado, el brillante y romantico papel que ha desempefiado en la 
historia, todo sirve para atraer al visitante; pero, en adicion, hay pruebas extra- 
ordinarias del espiritu moderno de progreso en que participa con las demas 
capitales suramericanas y que hacen esencial una visita a la capital peruana para 
todo aquel que procure obtener un extenso conocimiento de las condiciones 
actuales de nuestros vecinos del sur. Las anchas calles, las hermosas plazas, las 
vias comerciales concurridas, los atractivos distritos residenciales, todo atestigua la 
importancia comercial y social de la ciudad. 

El Peru tiene que luchar con grandes dificultades. Su distancia remota de 
Europa y de los Estados Unidos ha servido para aislarlo, pero eso ha pasado ya o 
esta rapidamente pasando. En la extension y variedad de sus recursos naturales 
pocas naciones del mundo pueden igualarlo y pronto llegara la hora en que estos 
recursos llevaran a su pueblo una nueva era de prosperidad mayor que cualquiera 
de las que haya disfrutado en lo pasado. Para aquel cuyo conocimiento de la 
Repiiblica se limite a una ligera visita y a mucha lectura este resultado pareceria 
inevitable. 

Al dia siguiente de nuestra llegada a Lima, por la manana, visite al Ministro 
americano, Mr. Benton McMillin, y por la tarde, al Ministro de Relaciones 
Exteriores, senor Tudela y Varela, y gracias a su cortesia fui presentado al 
Presidente, senor Billinghurst. La reception que me hizo el Presidente fue 
estremadamente cordial. Hablome en ingles perfectamente y demostrome poseer 
un profundo conocimiento de los asuntos de los Estados Unidos. Tanto en el 
objeto de mi visita como en la obra de la Fundacion manifesto el mas amistoso 
interes. 

Al regresar al hotel me encontre con que habian venido a visitarme varias 
personas, habiendo continuado las visitas despues de mi llegada. El Dr. Lizardo 
Alzamora, Rector de la Universidad de San Marcos y el Dr. Eleodoro Romero, 
Decano de la Facultad de Derecho, fueron de los primeros en prometer su ela- 
boration en los fines que la Fundacion se proponia al comisionarme para que 
visitara al Peru. 



BUENAS RE^ACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 45 

El dia siguiente lo dedique enteramente a hacer visitas. En todas partes 
halle el mayor interes y la calurosa hospitalidad de todos, el sincero deseo de ser 
de utilidad, llevo a nuestro animo inmediatamente la conviccion de que en el 
corazon al menos no eramos extrafios. Los hombres de mayor importancia me 
prestaron libremente sus invaluables consejos, dedicandome su tiempo con la 
mayor buena voluntad. Jamas podre hallarme lo suficientemente reconocido para 
con ellos. Si hubiera de mencionar simplemente los nombres de aquellos a 
quienes me siento obligado la lista llenaria varias paginas y aun en ese caso seria 
incompleta, pero en otra parte he tenido ocasion de expresar mi gratitud para 
aquellos cuyos servicios me sirvieron de tanta ayuda. 

Por la noche hicimos nuevos conocimientos y renovamos otros en una comida 
y recepcion que nos dieron el senor Felipe Pardo y sefiora a mi esposa y a mi. 

La tarde siguiente tuve la oportunidad de explicar ante un distinguido 
auditorio los metodos y propositos de la Fundacion. La Universidad de San 
Marcos me confirio el titulo de miembro honorario de la Facultad de Juris- 
prudencia y la ceremonia sirvio de ocasion para que el Dr. Eleodoro Romero, 
Decano de la Facultad, el cual me entrego el diploma y medalla de la corporation, 
pronunciara un discurso alusivo al acto. En mi respuesta describi en detalles, 
segun me lo solicitaron los miembros de la Facultad, la obra de la Fundacion, 
siguiendo el mismo derrotero de los discursos anteriores. 

No puedo abandonar este tema sin expresar el gran placer que experiments 
al recibir este honor y gozar del privilegio de pronunciar un discurso en el mas 
antiguo asiento de ilustracion del Continente americano. Es cosa que llena de 
orgullo y reverencia a todo americano el entrar al hermoso patio de la Universidad, 
subir la antigua escalera de piedra hasta las amplias galerias y visitar los grandes 
salones con los retratos de los rectores de la Universidad desde el tiempo de su 
fundacion en 1551, colgados de las paredes. Durante siglos de tension, a traves 
de guerras y revoluciones y de calamidades sin cuento, los serios catedraticos 
y estudiantes de San Marcos han mantenido viva la primera antorcha de 
ilustracion encendida en el Nuevo Mundo. 

De la Universidad fuimos a la Legation americana, en donde el Ministro y 
su sefiora nos obsequiaban con un delicioso "garden party". 

Al dia siguiente celebramos entrevistas con el Dr. Manuel M. Mensones, el 
Dr. Manzanilla, el Dr. Maurtua, el Dr. J. A. de Lavalle, de la Corte Suprema, 
y su hi jo, el Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle y otros, entremezcladas con visitas 
del senor Pardo, Profesor Wiesse, que fue a saludarnos al vapor, el Dr. Julio 
Tello, peruano que se graduo en Harvard en 1909 y que es actualmente curador 
del Museo Nacional, el senor Cisneros, Mr. Pennoyer y varios otros que se 
habian aprovechado de todas las oportunidades para prestarnos sus valiosos 
servicios. Tuve la mas agradable conversation con el Dr. Ramon Ribeyro, uno 
de los mas exquisitos estadistas del Peru, que ha sido por largo tiempo prominente 
en la vida intelectual de la Republica y que de buena gana me dejo disfrutar 
del beneficio de sus consejos y gran experiencia. 



46 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Por la tarde el Club Universidad dio una reception en mi honor en la 
cual se pronunciaron breves discursos por el Presidente, senor Luis G. Rivera y 
otros. Por la noche celebrose un gran banquete dado por el Ministro de 
Relaciones Exteriores y su esposa, senora de Tudela. El Ministro pronuncio 
un brindis alegorico, al cual respondi. 

A la manana siguiente hicimos una interesante visita al Senado por invitation 
del General Elespuru, Presidente del mismo. Por la tarde, el Colegio de 
Abogados me confirio el honor de hacerme miembro honorario, obsequiandome 
con una medalla. Fui presentado por el Decano interino, Dr. Manuel F. Bellido, 
y en respuesta hable sobre el tema del Instituto Americano de Derecho Inter- 
national y de las Sociedades Nacionales de Derecho International. El Dr. Anibal 
Maurtua me sucedio con un discurso, despues del cual pasamos a la "copa de 
champana," iniciandose luego un cambio de sentimientos amistosos. 

La Sociedad Georgrafica tambien me confirio el titulo de miembro honorario, 
habiendo pronunciado un corto discurso al entregarme el diploma el senor 
Jose Balta, Presidente de la Sociedad. 

Con extremo placer vuelvo mis recuerdos al banquete que diera en mi honor 
la Universidad de San Marcos en uno de los grandes salones de que ya he 
hablado. En lo que se refiere a demostraciones piiblicas, este banquete nos 
sirvio de despedida de la America del Sur; y seguramente no hubiera podido 
haberse imaginado una forma que dejara grabado en nuestra mente un recuerdo 
mas halagiieno. La cordialidad, el buen humor y la buena amistad de la ocasion 
todo contribuia a hacerla memorable. El Dr. Romero y el Dr. Javier Prado y 
Ugarteche, pronunciaron discursos amistosos a los cuales no pude responder sino 
con la mayor dificultad para expresar la gratitud que sentia. 

Los dos dias que precedieron a nuestra partida, en u de noviembre, los 
dedicamos a hacer visitas y a organizar la obra que habia de ejecutarse. Consti- 
tuyose un vigoroso comite como base para la organization permanente de una 
Sociedad Nacional de Derecho International. Sus miembros fueron los siguientes : 

Dr. Francisco Tudela y Varela, Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores; 
Dr. Lizardo Alzamora, Rector de la Universidad de San Marcos; 
Dr. Ramon Ribeyro ; 

Dr. Javier Prado y Ugarteche, Senador, miembro de la Facultad de la 
Universidad ; 

Dr. Eleodoro Romero, Decano de la Facultad de Derecho; 

Dr. Jose Matias Manzanilla, Miembro de la Facultad de la Universidad ; 

Dr. Adolf o Villagarcia; 

Dr. Antonio Miro Quesada, Director de "El Comercio ;" 

Dr. Alberto Ulloa, Director de "La Prensa;" 

Dr. Anibal Maurtua, Miembro de la Facultad de Derecho; 

Dr. Victor Andres Belaunde, Profesor de Derecho internacional ; 

Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle, Miembro de la Facultad de Derecho. 



BUENAS RElvACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 47 

Para el cargo de Secretario Honorario de la Sociedad Nacional para la 
Conciliation International tuvimos la fortuna de obtener la aceptacion del Dr. 
Juan Bautista de Lavalle, miembro de la Facultad de Derecho de la Universidad 
de San Marcos. 

Tuve el privilegio de concurrir el ultimo dia de nuestra permanencia en 
Lima a la sesion de apertura del Congreso Medico Latinoamericano y Pan- 
americano. Muchos de los delegados a este Congreso habian estado en Lima 
durante todo el periodo de nuestra visita, habiendo venido algunos del Sur con 
nosotros en el "Oronsa", y tuvimos muchas interesantes conversaciones con los 
doctores Odriozola, Presidente del Congreso, Domingo Cabred, de la Delegation 
argentina, Gregorio Amunategui Solar, de Chile, Nascimento Gurgel, y Placido 
Barbosa, del Brasil y otros. 

Hubiera sido dificil, si no imposible, hallar un grupo de hombres que 
representaran mas perfectamente el pensamiento y cultura latinoamericanos 
que este grupo de hombres de ciencia, que, de manera practica, dedicaban su 
vida a un fin humanitario y que por medio de reuniones internacionales, tales como 
esta, que, ante un auditorio distinguido, que incluia al Presidente Billinghurst, se 
habia reunido en Lima en 10 de noviembre, contribuian tan efectivamente a una 
mejor inteligencia entre las naciones. 

Tan profundamente me habia impresionado el hecho de que estos hombres 
eminentes en sus profesiones respectivas estaban realizando con su obra algunos 
de los fines para los cuales se habia establecido la Fundacion, que me tome la 
libertad de indicar a algunos de sus miembros la posibilidad de enviar delegados 
del Congreso para que visitaran los Estados Unidos bajo los auspicios de la 
Fundacion. Esta indication recibio inmediata aprobacion y es motivo de profundo 
placer para mi que los Sindicos hayan tambien resuelto favorablemente esta 
proposition. No es necesario insistir en la importancia de tales visitas ni en el 
gran beneficio que resultara de ellas. 

Nuestra visita a Lima habia sido de mayor duration que ninguna otra de 
las que hicimos a la America del Sur, y este hecho ofrecio a algunos de los 
miembros de nuestra expedition la oportunidad de hacer un recorrido de la 
ciudad. Un dia fue dedicado a una inspection de los promontorios levantados 
por los Incas cerca de la ciudad, excursion altamente interesante emprendida 
bajo la direction personal del Profesor Carlos Wiesse, que estuvo de lo mas 
atento. Otro dia hicimos una excursion por el Ferrocarril Central a las montafias 
por la via del Cerro de Pasco, y tuvimos la excelente oportunidad de inspeccionar 
este ejemplo verdaderamente maravilloso de ingenieria que surgiera hace medio 
siglo del cerebro de un ingeniero de los Estados Unidos, o sea Henry Meiggs. 

Los nueve dias que pasaramos en la capital peruana estan llenos de recuerdos 
de la cortesia de su pueblo encantador. Durante ese tiempo hicimos frecuentes 
visitas a las casas de los miembros de la antigua sociedad, la mas antigua, creo 
yo, del Continente americano en donde por primera vez se trasplantaron las tradi- 
ciones espanolas de hospitalidad al Nuevo Mundo. Al senor de Barreda y 



48 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

esposa, padres de la sefiora de don Felipe Pardo, la cual con su esposo hicieran 
tanto por nosotros mientras estuvimos en Lima, siempre nos sentiremos profunda- 
mente reconocidos. Tambien conservamos recuerdos de otras visitas deliciosas que 
jamas podremos olvidar; de una tarde en la historica Casa de Torre-Tagle, que 
es una de las mas delicadas muestras de la arquitectura espafiola en la America 
del Sur, en donde tomamos te con la familia Ortiz Zevallos ; de un te en la casa 
del Dr. Prado y Ugarteche; de un lunch con el sefior Alvarez Calderon de East 
y esposa, y de otras reuniones de confianza con relacionados peruanos a los 
cuales pronto consideramos como amigos. 

Cuando abandonamos a Lima con rumbo al Callao vinieron a despedirnos 
a la estacion gran numero de amigos. Entre ellos se hallaba el Ministro de 
Relaciones Exteriores, sefior Tudela y Varela, el Representante Militar del 
Presidente, el sefior Cisneros, Mr. y Mrs. McMillin, el sefior Felipe Pardo y esposa, 
el sefior Alvarez Calderon, el Dr. Alzamora, el Dr. Romero, el Dr. de Lavalle, el 
Profesor Carlos Wiesse, Mr. Pennoyer y otros muchos mas que habian hecho 
tanto porque nuestra visita nos resultase agradable. 

Dejamos al Peru con un sentimiento de profunda gratitud por todas las 
pruebas de verdadera amistad que nos habian sido dadas, y sintiendo vivamente 
que no pudieramos prolongar nuestra agradable visita. La cordialidad, la 
buena amistad que los paises que visitamos han expresado y demostrado por 
los Estados Unidos en ninguna parte fue tan marcada como en Lima, y los Sindicos 
de la Fundacion encontraran alii el mas efectivo apoyo. 

Con la creciente inmigracion que, segun parece, debiera naturalmente seguir 
a la apertura del Canal de Panama, el Peru ocupara un puesto mas importante 
en los asuntos americanos. Es en este mirar a lo futuro que uno encuentra 
el mayor aliento en la presente actitud fraternal de sus directores de la opinion 
publica. Nuestras relaciones han de hacerse diariamente mas frecuentes y con 
ellas se llegara a una realizacion mas clara de que aqui junto a nosotros, hacia 
el sur, se halla una nacion con ideales semej antes a los nuestros que, a pesar 
de los obstaculos, avanza firmemente en la senda del progreso, y que jamas 
desperdicia la oportunidad de manifestar su amistad hacia los Estados Unidos. 

En Panama 

El vapor peruano "Mantaro" en que hicimos el viaje hacia el norte era un 
buque comodo, escrupulosamente limpio. Hicimos escala en Salaverry, Pacas- 
mayo, Eten y Payta, habiendo visto de paso muchas pruebas del creciente 
desarrollo de los terrenos minerales y petroleros cerca de la costa. 

Llegamos a la Bahia de Panama, flanqueada de islas cubiertas de bosques, el 
18 de noviembre y continuamos a bordo hasta el dia siguiente en que expiraba 
el periodo de cuarentena. La vista de la ciudad de Panama necesariamente 
ha de provocar. emociones variadas en toda America. Cerca de aqui empezo, 
bajo el indomable Pizarro la conquista de los paises que acababamos de abandonar. 



BUENAS RELACIONES CON LOS PUEBLOS LATINOAMERICANOS 49 

A esta costa fue que vino el con Balboa en aquel primer viaje al Istmo y aqui 
fue donde volvio despues de su derrota, que lo determino aun mas a penetrar 
a las tierras desconocidas del sur, al misterioso "ultima Thule" de los aventureros 
exploradores. Y ahora la ciudad es la entrada del sur de ese "puente de agua" 
que ha sido construido por los heroes de hoy no menos indomables que Pizarro 
y su banda de conquistadores. Panama que en un tiempo sirvio de punto de 
partida a una expedicion que habia de trans formar un continente, es ahora la 
escena de lo que se ha llamado la ultima gran transformation de la tierra 
dejada a la mano del hombre. 

El Coronel Goethals habia enviado una lancha por nosotros con un 
ayudante el cual nos ofrecio nuestra primera vista del canal, llevandonos 
hasta las exclusas de Miraflores. Al retorno saltamos a tierra en Balboa y de 
alii fuimos en ferrocarril a Panama. Esta interesante excursion fue la causa 
de que no vieramos al Ministro americano, Mr. William Jennings Price, al 
Secretario de la Legation, Mr. Wicker, ni al senor Lefevre, Ministro de 
Relaciones Exteriores, y otros funcionarios del Gobierno panameiio, que habian 
ido al desembarcadero de Panama a darnos la bienvenida oficial. Mas tarde 
sin embargo, tuvimos el placer de verlos en el hotel, y al dia siguiente, en union 
de Mr. Price, hice una visita al senor Lefevre, a cuya cortesia debi el honor 
de tener una audiencia con el Presidente. Estuvimos en Panama solamente 
aquel dia y parte del siguiente. Aproveche la oportunidad, sin embargo, para 
hablar con hombres de representation y por ellos me entere de que la Republica 
de Panama ofrece una perspectiva excelente para algunas de las gestiones en 
que la Fundacion se halla interesada, pero que el momento actual se consideraba 
inapropiado para emprender la obra. La proxima apertura del Canal, el tiempo 
comparativamente reciente que hace desde el establecimiento de la Republica 
y las muchas cuestiones de organization y desarrollo interno, todo ocupa el 
interes publico, considerandose oportuno posporier la discusion de otras materias. 

El senor Lefevre y el senor Estripeant, ayudante de campo del Presidente, 
estuvieron de lo mas atento y no podria dar gracias bastantes a nuestro Ministro, 
Mr. Price, por su bondad. 

Despues de la ultima mafiana de recorrer la ciudad y de un lunch en la 
casa del Coronel Judson, el cual nos habia llevado en una excelente excursion a 
las exclusas de Gatun, salimos de Colon para Nueva Orleans el 20 de noviembre, 
llegando a dicho punto cinco dias mas tarde. 

Nosotros hubieramos deseado visitar a Venezuela, y nuestro itinerario habia 
incluido originalmente a Caracas, pero nos encontramos al llegar a Panama 
con que los enlaces de las compafiias de vapores con la Guayra no nos hubieran 
permitido hacer el viaje en el tiempo limitado de que disponiamos. 

Expresamos nuestra pena en una carta que dirigimos a nuestro Ministro 
americano en Caracas, tomandonos la libertad de enviarle copias de los folletos 
que habiamos repartido entre los suramericanos de representacion, con el 
proposito de que los distribuyera entre los hombres mas importantes de Venezuela. 



50 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Llegamos a Nueva York el dia de action de gracias (Thanksgiving day) 27 
de noviembre de 1913, justamente dos meses y cuatro dias desde nuestra salida 
de Lisboa. La mention que hacemos del tiempo empleado en nuestro largo viaje 
podra ayudar a destruir la impresion general que existe en los Estados Unidos de 
que una visita a la America del Sur requiere mas tiempo del que generalmente se 
necesita para hacer una excursion por Europa o un paseo de invierno por el 
Mediterraneo. Es dificil imaginar una excursion de diez semanas mas variadas 
y mas repletas de interes. Desde el punto de vista panoramico el viaje es de 
incomparable belleza, pero la idea que debe principalmente entusiasmar al viaiero 
es la perspectiva de observar nuevas razas y nuevos paises en las mas interesantes 
etapas de su evolution. Estas naciones se hallan destinadas a jugar un gran 
papel en lo futuro y no se necesita ningun esfuerzo de imagination para figurarse 
los vastos territorios desocupados del continente de Sur America como teatro 
de un nuevo impulso mundial. 

Es un deber que nos debemos a nosotros mismos, y que la Fundacion bien 
puede ayudar a nuestro pueblo a cumplir, el hacer estrechas relaciones con nues- 
tros amigos de la America del Sur. Casi seguramente, creo yo, la comunicacion 
entre nuestros paises respectivos crecera, y con este mejor conocimiento mutuo 
surgiran amistades mas profundas y mas perdurables. 

Robert Bacon. 
Marzo 15, 1914. 



Interviii Inserta en el "Evening Post, ' ' de Nueva York, 

13 DE DlCIEMBRE DE 1913 

Como representante de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz International, 
Robert Bacon, ex-Secretario de Estado y ex-Embajador a Francia, acaba de 
regresar de una gira por el Brasil, la Argentina, el Uruguay, Chile y el Peru. 
El viaje se efectuo a los fines relacionados con las distintas inciativas en que 
se halla interesada la Fundacion. Estas iniciativas incluyen la formation de 
sociedades de Derecho internacional que han de afiliarse al Instituto Americano 
de Derecho Internacional, fundado en 1912, y del cual es Presidente Honorario 
Elihu Root. La visita de Mr. Bacon tuvo por objeto tambien el organizar 
asociaciones para la conciliation y gestionar lo oportuno para el intercambio de 
visitas de hombres de representation entre este pais y la America del Sur, asi 
como el canje de profesores y estudiantes de universidades. Por estos medios la 
Fundacion espera establecer relaciones mas estrechas entre las naciones del 
Hemisferio Occidental. 

"Seria dificil exagerar," decia hoy Mr. Bacon, "las manifestaciones de 
amistad hacia los Estados Unidos exteriorizadas en todos y cada uno de esos 
paises. A pesar de las malas impresiones y malas inteligencias, causadas casi 
siempre por nuestra ignorancia de las verdaderas condiciones que imperan en la 
America del Sur, bien podemos decir que no poseemos amigos mas sinceros en 
ninguna parte del mundo que los que tenemos en estas republicas hermanas del 
mismo continente, los cuales aprovechan todas las oportunidades que se les 
ofrecen para demostrar el afecto que nos profesan." 

Mr. Bacon salio primeramente de esta ciudad con rumbo a Filipinas por la 
via de San Francisco y continuo su viaje hacia Oriente por el Japon, China y 
Siberia hasta Europa, saliendo de Lisboa para Rio de Janeiro el 23 de septiembre. 

Despues de visitar el Brasil, la Argentina, el Uruguay, Chile y el Peru, 
paso a Lima y Panama, regresando a Nueva York por la via de Nueva Orleans. 
En junto viajo unas 35,000 millas. Acompanaronle en su viaje alrededor del 
mundo su esposa y su hija. Otto Schoenrich, Presidente de la Comision Mixta 
de Reclamaciones de Nicaragua, y esposa, y W. R. Hereford se les agregaron 
en Paris para continuar en la gira suramericana. 

Al Traves de los Andes por Ferrocarril 

Al describir el objeto de su visita decia Mr. Bacon: 

"Fui a la America del Sur con instrucciones del Presidente de la Fundacion, 
el Senador Elihu Root, concernientes a ciertos fines determinados en relation con 



52 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

las iniciativas en que se halla interesada la Fundacion. De Rio de Janeiro fuimos 
luego a Buenos Aires, y cruzando el Rio de La Plata visitamos a Montevideo; 
despues volvimos a Buenos Aires y proseguimos nuestro viaje a Santiago de 
Chile por el maravilloso Ferrocarril Transandino, ferrocarril de via estrecha, 
que sube a una altura de 10,500 pies, pasando muy cerca de algunas de las mas 
elevadas montafias de este hemisferio. De Santiago fuimos por vapor al Callao, 
el puerto de Lima, y desde aqui en un comodo vapor peruano hasta Panama". 

He aqui la forma en que refirio Mr. Bacon la amistosa acogida que se le 
dispensara : 

"La visita que en 1906 hiciera a la America del Sur Mr. Root, cuando 
era Secretario de Estado, ha producido un efecto perdurable en el sentido de 
crear una mejor inteligencia entre las Republicas latinas y los Estados Unidos. 
Esa visita se recuerda vividamente, haciendose referencia a ella a menudo en 
los discursos y escritos de los distinguidisimos representantes de la opinion pu- 
blica en toda la America del Sur. A esta, quizas, mas que a ninguna otra cir- 
cunstancia debe atribuirse la presente actitud adoptada hacia nosotros ; porque 
Mr. Root, segun se recordara, por su doctrina de simpatia y buena inteligencia, 
de bondadosa consideracion y de honorable obligacion, pudo aminorar o destruir 
las sospechas y desconfianzas acerca de nuestros moviles que habian sido paulati- 
namente engendradas. 

"Es la creencia de Mr. Root y de los demas Sindicos de la Fundacion Car- 
negie que gran parte de las malas inteligencias entre las naciones proceden de 
falta de conocimiento mutuo, falta de conocimiento de condiciones y sentimientos. 
La Fundacion trata de destruir esta ignorancia por medios practicos. 

Objeto de la Visita 

"El objeto de mi visita a la America del Sur comprendia la formation de 
sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional ; la organization de asociaciones 
que habran de afiliarse a la Asociacion para la Conciliation Internacional esta- 
blecida en Paris, de la cual es Presidente y fundador el Baron d'Estournelles de 
Constant ; el hacer las gestiones oportunas para un cambio de visitas de hombres 
de representation de las Republicas latinas que vinieran -a los Estados Unidos y 
de este pais que fueran a la America del Sur, y para un cambio analogo entre los 
profesores y estudiantes de sus universidades y de las nuestras. 

"El Instituto de Derecho Internacional, fun dado en 1873, se halla compuesto 
de los mas eminentes jurisconsultos de Europa y America. El Instituto Ame- 
ricano fue fundado hace poco mas de un ano, teniendo al Senador Root como 
Presidente Honorario y al Dr. James Brown Scott como Presidente. Los fines 
y propositos de todos los institutos son en gran manera identicos ; pero, segun 
afirmaron sus fundadores en la exposition oficial de los fines y propositos del 
Instituto Americano, 'la parte que trata de la guerra es de importancia secunda- 
ria, puesto que los que lo proponen creen que los principios del Derecho inter- 



INTEJRVIEU INSERTA £N t,h EVENING POST DE NUEVA YORK 53 

nacional son generalmente aplicables y deben estudiarse y ser desarrollados de 
manera que mantengan el estado de paz, que tan afortunadamente existe entre 
las Republicas americanas.' 

'Tor la formacion de estas sociedades nacionales, se espera popularizar los 
principios de derecho que rigen las relaciones de las naciones, de suerte que, en 
el curso del tiempo, los gobiernos se vean obligados por la opinion popular a 
conducirse con todo el respeto debido a tales principios. 

"En virtud de las gestiones de la Fundacion en este sentido ya se han for- 
mado o estan en curso de formacion sociedades nacionales de Derecho interna- 
cional en Rio de Janeiro, Buenos Aires, Montevideo, Santiago de Chile y Lima. 
Estas sociedades habran de afiliarse al Instituto Americano y en su intercomu- 
nicacion por medio del Instituto ofreceran un nuevo y valioso medio para el 
cambio de ideas entre los directores de la opinion de la America del Norte y de 
la America del Sur. 

"Tambien tuve el honor de exponerles el proyecto e invitarles a que parti- 
ciparan en la propuesta Academia de Derecho Internacional de La Haya, y de 
indicar la necesidad de que se nombraran comites nacionales para la discusion 
de los proyectos que habran de aportarse al programa de la proxima Conferencia 
de la Paz de La Haya. Tambien expuse la obra de la Division de Economia 
Politica e Historia de la Fundacion. 

"En ningun sentido mejor, quizas, podria obtenerse una inteligencia mutua 
entre les Republicas de America que por medio de un cambio de visitas de hombres 
de representacion, y de un cambio de profesores y estudiantes universitarios. 

"En la vida cientifica y profesional actualmente se estan efectuando tales 
cambios internacionales. Constantemente se estan reuniendo congresos de hom- 
bres de representacion de todas partes del mundo y en ellos se obtienen beneficios 
inconmensurables en virtud del cambio de ideas, y en virtud de estos cambios, las 
naciones, por medio de sus hombres de representacion, se aproximan en una 
comunion reciproca mas estrecha, con el resultante mejoramiento de la buena 
inteligencia internacional. 

"Bajo los auspicios de la Division de Relaciones y Education de la Funda- 
cion, de la cual el Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler es Director, ya han visitado los 
Estados Unidos el Baron d'Estournelles de Constant, de Francia, la Baronesa 
von Suttner, de Austria, y el Profesor Nitobe, del Japon, y ha visitado la India, 
la China y el Japon el Presidente Eliot, de la Universidad de Harvard, y el Japon, 
el Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie. 

"Se espera que en no lejano dia suramericanos de representacion visiten a 
los Estados Unidos, y es el proposito de los Sindicos de la Fundacion continuar 
el cambio ya empezado de tales visitas. 

"Se espera, tambien, inaugurar un cambio de profesores entre las universi- 
dades suramericanas y las de este pais, y gestionar los detalles de un cambio 
que incluya a los estudiantes de las universidades". 



54 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Mr. Bacon hablo francamente de como era que la Fundacion Carnegie es- 
peraba realizar sus fines y de la ayuda que le prestaran los suramericanos de 
influencia. 

"Por medio de estas medidas practicas la Fundacion esta tratando de es- 
tablecer relaciones mas estrechas entre las naciones", dijo el. "No es de espe- 
rarse que los resultados obtenidos se hagan aparentes en seguida. El mismo 
hecho de que las gentes aguardan impacientemente pruebas visibles del progreso 
realizado ha sido en gran manera causa del pesimismo y escepticismo con que 
se tropieza al discutir estas materias. 

"Como ha dicho Mr. Root: 'Los Sindicos de la Fundacion saben perfecta- 
mente que el progreso en la obra que han emprendido ha de ser necesariamente 
paulatino y que sus resultados mas substanciales habran de recogerse en un 
futuro lejano. Estamos tratando con aptitudes e impulsos firmemente estable- 
cidos en la naturaleza humana por el desarrollo de miles de afios, y todo lo mas 
que una generation puede esperar hacer es promover el cambio gradual en las 
normas de conducta. Todos los calculos que se hagan a proposito de dicha obra 
y de sus resultados han de basarse no en los terminos de la vida individual hu- 
mana, sino en los terminos de la vida prolongada de las naciones. Inconspicuos 
como son los resultados inmediatos, no puede haber, sin embargo, un objeto mas 
noble para el esfuerzo humano que el ejercer influencia en las tendencias de la 
raza, a fin de que esta avance, por mas paulatinamente que sea, hacia la civiliza- 
tion y humanidad, apartandose de la brutalidad sin sentido". 

"Los hombres principales de la America del Sur se hallan bien avanzados 
en su entendimiento y apreciacion del bien que ha de seguirse de estos cambios 
internacionales. El rapido desarrollo material de sus maravillosos paises no ha 
embotado en lo mas minimo su elevado idealismo, sin que puedan encontrarse 
en ninguna parte hombres que se hallen mas dispuestos ni que sean mas aptos 
para trabajar unidos con un fin comun y humanitario. Todo lo que indique pro- 
greso social despierta inmediatamente sus simpatias". 

Mr. Bacon nos hizo entusiastas relatos de las condiciones de los paises que 
visitara, asi como de la impresion que le causaron sus inagotables recursos. 
El considera la immigration como factor principal en lo futuro. 

El Pais del Porvenir 

"Con respecto al desarrollo que observe, no puedo hacer ver de modo 
suficiente su signification a nuestro pais", nos dijo Mr. Bacon. "Algunas de 
estas republicas progresan tan rapidamente que cada ano sucesivo sefiala un 
nuevo cambio importante en ellas. El pueblo de estos paises se ha visto rodeado 
de obstaculos mayores que aquellos con que tropezaran nuestros antepasados, y 
que son muy poco comprendidos aqui entre nosotros ; pero, a pesar de esto, ellos se 
han ido abriendo camino hasta que la civilizacion de sus mayores centros puede 
compararse favorablemente con la mas antigua civilizacion de Europa. 



INTERVIEU INSERTA EN EL EVENING POST DE NUEVA YORK 55 

"A cualquiera que visite la America del Sur ha de ocurrirsele que este es 
el pais del porvenir. Los recursos naturales son tan vastos que bien puede de- 
cirse que son casi inagotables. Aunque se ha escrito y dicho tanto acerca de esta 
riqueza, nosotros no poseemos sino el mas vago concepto de ella, asi como del 
papel que ha de desempenar en la historia de la civilization en no lejano dia. 

"El pueblo procede de un tronco vigoroso. En este pais nuestro pueblo, 
a causa de su falta de conocimiento, se halla expuesto a clasificar la America 
Latina como un con junto; pero las diferencias raciales y de otra indole que 
existen entre los pueblos de estas distintas republicas son tan grandes como las 
que existen entre los pueblos de los distintos paises de Europa. 

"Y sin embargo, los paises de la America del Sur, aun los mas grandes, 
como el Brasil y la Argentina, se hallan escasamente poblados. La inmigracion 
se ha visto obstaculizada por la distancia y las dificultades del viaje, pero estas 
condiciones estan desapareciendo. Los nuevos medios de comunicacion estan 
conduciendo mas y mas inmigrantes a sus playas. Los alemanes, los ingleses, 
los franceses, los italianos y los japoneses se han dado pronto cuenta de las opor- 
tunidades que alii se les ofrecen." 

"Los viajeros que se propongan visitar la America del Sur", nos dijo Mr. 
Bacon, "encontraran facilidades ferroviarias y maritimas apropiadas". Segun 
el, "pueden obtenerse grandes y substanciales beneficios de las relaciones con 
los pueblos suramericanos acerca de los cuales muchos de los nuestros, desgracia- 
damente, se encuentran en profunda ignorancia. Los hombres y mujeres de 
representation de estos paises poseen todos el encanto y gracia y cultura intelec- 
tual que han hecho a las razas latinas famosas. Su entusiasta hospitalidad es 
proverbial. Por mi parte, jamas olvidare ni podre expresar apropiadamente mi 
reconocimiento por la bondadosa y cortes acogida que me dispensaron". 



Editorial de la Revista Americana de Derecho International, 

Enero, 19 14 

El otofio pasado el Hon. Robert Bacon, ex-Secretario de Estado y ex-Em- 
bajador a Francia, emprendio un viaje por la America del Sur con la mision 
de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional de "interesar y alcanzar 
las simpatias de los directores de la opinion en las principales Republicas latino- 
americanas, en las distintas empresas en bien de la paz internacional que la Fun- 
dacion desea promover ; y por medio de las relaciones y explicaciones personales, 
causar la cooperacion practica" en estos trabajos. Con la excepcion de la visita 
oficial de Mr. Root, como Secretario de Estado, en 1906, ningun viaje emprendido 
por un ciudadano de los Estados Unidos ha hecho tanto para estimular el de- 
sarrollo de cordiales y provechosas relaciones internacionales entre las Republicas 
del Norte y Sur America, como este viaje memorable de Mr. Bacon, quien ha 
visitado al Brasil, Argentina, Uruguay, Chile y Peru, habiendose visto imposi- 
bilitado, por dificultades en el arreglo de conexiones de vapores y ferrocarriles, 
de visitar los demas paises incluidos en su itinerario. En cada uno de los paises 
que Air. Bacon visitara fue recibido con la mayor cordialidad por el Gobierno 
y oficialmente f este j ado. Los representantes diplomaticos de los Estados Unidos 
se esforzaron en todo lo posible en hacer que su visita a las capitales de su iti- 
nerario diera resultados positivos; y ciudadanos prominentes, representantes de 
todos los elementos del mundo comercial, profesional y social se disputaron 
mutuamente el impartir a su mision la dignidad y significacion que su impor- 
tancia requiria. La Universidad de Santiago le confirio un titulo honorario 
como tambien lo hizo la Universidad de Lima, habiendo sido elegido socio ho- 
norario por varias sociedades cientificas y juridicas. Su mision fue recibida en 
todas partes con las mayores muestras de simpatia por la prensa periodica, la 
cual reprodujo fielmente todos sus discursos publicos. El exito de su mision 
se debio en gran manera a su facultad de poder dirigirse a sus oyentes en los 
idiomas espafiol, portugues y frances. 

Los mas importantes discursos de Mr. Bacon fueron pronunciados en Rio 
de Janeiro bajo los auspicios de la Academia Brasilefia e Instituto de la Orden 
de Abogados, asi como tambien en la Embajada de los Estados Unidos ; en Mon- 
tevideo, en el Ateneo, bajo los auspicios de la Universidad; en Buenos Aires, 
ante la Facultad de Derecho de la Universidad ; en Santiago, en la Universidad 
de Chile ; y en Lima, en la Universidad de San Marcos y ante el Colegio de 
Abogados. 

En todos y cada uno de estos discursos, asi como en las numerosas con- 
ferencias que celebrara con funcionarios publicos, educacionistas y ciudadanos 



EDITORIAL DE LA REVISTA AMERICANA DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAL 57 

distinguidos, Mr. Bacon llamo la atencion hacia ciertos planes especificos de la 
Fundacion, siendo uno de los mas importantes de estos la formacion de socie- 
dades nacionales afiliadas al Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional. En 
todos los paises visitados se nombraron comisiones para la organizacion de tales 
sociedades, y en algunos de ellos esta organizacion ya ha sido efectuada. Este 
aspecto de la obra de Mr. Bacon es de interes especial para los lectores de esta 
Revista ; y muy bien podemos predecir que como resultado de ella, esta promete- 
dora institution pronto se hara una realidad efectiva, estableciendo un nuevo 
punto de contacto y un nuevo lazo de simpatia entre los jurisconsultos y esta- 
distas de los hemisferios del Norte y del Sur. Las circunstancias politicas y 
situacion geografica han creado condiciones nuevas y especiales, haciendo posible 
una inteligencia que, no siendo incompatible o antagonica a los principios del 
Derecho internacional europeo, permite llegar a un acuerdo en materias sobre 
las cuales el resto del mundo todavia no ha podido convenir. Un distinguido 
catedratico de Derecho, de Padua, expuso el caso de una manera concisa y com- 
pleta al decir que "la cooperacion probable de dos institutos autonomos es pre- 
ferable a la colaboracion practicamente imposible de elementos seme j antes de la 
misma asociacion". 

Mr. Bacon indico la participation activa de los distintos gobiernos en la 
propuesta Academia de Derecho Internacional de La Haya, y podemos anticipar 
la aceptacion cordial por cada uno de ellos de la formal invitation que se les 
ha pasado a este fin. Su indication de que los Estados latinoamericanos nom- 
bren comisiones y traten de contribuir a la formacion del programa para la Ter- 
cera Conferencia de La Haya y la intercomunicacion de dichas comisiones entre 
todos los paises americanos, causo interes extraordinario, especialmente en el 
Brasil, donde se espera que inmediatamente se tomaran las medidas oportunas 
a este proposito. Mr. Bacon estuvo asimismo altamente afortunado al indicar 
que las ramas nacionales de la Sociedad para la Conciliacion Internacional se 
afilien a las de Paris y Nueva York. En cuatro de los paises visitados por Mr. 
Bacon, ya se han nombrado secretarios competentes y energicos los cuales tra- 
bajan con fervor en su organizacion. Aunque los suramericanos no son muy 
partidarios de las sociedades de la paz, del pacifismo ordinario, responden ra- 
pidamente, sin embargo, a los principios en que se basa la conciliacion, la cual 
busca el arreglo amistoso de los conflictos internacionales por medio del arbitraje 
y otros medios semej antes. 

Mr. Bacon trato ampliamente de los planes de la Fundacion para el cambio 
de visitas de hombres de representation entre los dos continentes, asi como tam- 
bien del cambio de profesores y alumnos propuesto. Cada uno de estos pro- 
yectos fue acogido con simpatia, y, segun Mr. Bacon, ya ha llegado la hora en 
que debe iniciarse el cambio de profesores. Una dificultad se presenta en el 
limitado numero de latinoamericanos que posean el ingles lo suficiente para 
expresarse en el, asi como, por otra parte, el numero igualmente reducido de 



58 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

norteamericanos que esten familiarizados con el espafiol. Esta dificultad para 
estrechar las relaciones entre los dos continentes comienza a hacersenos patenter 
es una gran mision de nuestras instituciones docentes superiores el tratar de 
vencerla gradualmente. 

Segun se ve, pues, la mision de Mr. Bacon a la America del Sur alcanzo 
el mayor exito en el sentido de que pronto ha de producir sus frutos. Para 
aquellos que le prestaron acogida se hizo perfectamente aparente que a el no 
le impulsaban motivos egoistas de ninguna clase, ni que buscaba concesiones, 
ni que solicitaba ventajas comerciales, sino que iba con una mision puramente 
altruista en la mas alta signification de la palabra. Llevaba un mensaje de 
amistad y de cooperation en su obra que no es en beneficio de un solo pais sino 
de todos los americanos y de todo el mundo. Mr. Bacon ha plantado las si- 
mientes de relaciones internacionales mas delicadas, y el resultado de su viaje 
escasamente podria dejar de establecer corrientes de simpatias intelectuales hacia 
una civilization mas elevada y mas noble. 



APENDICES 



APENDICE I 
Paris 



Lunch Dado por M. Gabriel Hanotaux, 

Paris, 19 de SeptiEmbre de 1913 

[De Le Figaro] 



Le bureau du comite France- Amerique a recu hier a dejeuner le president 
du comite France- Amerique de New-York, M. Robert Bacon, ancien ambassadeur 
des Etats-Unis a. Paris, ainsi que M. Dandurand, senateur, president du comite 
France-Amerique au Canada, et Mme. Dandurand. 

A ce dejeuner, assistaient notamment M. Gabriel Hanotaux, M. et Mme. 
Boutroux, M. Klexzkowski, ministre de France, etc. 

M. Robert Bacon passe par Paris, se rendant dans 1' Amerique du Sud, ou 
il doit remplir, comme on sait, une mission des Associations internationales 
americaines ayant a leur tete MM. Elihu Root, Butler, Scott, etc. 

M. Hanotaux a adresse a ces hotes les paroles suivantes: 

C'est une joie bien grande pour le comite France-Amerique de saluer en 
meme temps ici les deux presidents du comite de l'Amerique du Nord ; l'activite 
deployee aux Etats-Unis et au Canada par ces deux emanations du comite 
francais a donne, cette annee, des resultats considerables; nous ne pouvons 
qu'en reporter l'honneur aux deux presidents qui veulent bien nous honorer 
de leur presence. 

M. Robert Bacon, au nom des personnes les plus respectees de la grande 
Republique des Etats-Unis, se rend en Amerique du Sud pour y jeter les bases 
d'une oeuvre d'union autour du droit international qui est appelee au developpe- 
ment le plus fecond pour le bien de l'humanite. Cette mission a un caractere 
tout pratique; il s'agit d'y fonder des institutions durables ou s'elaboreront les 
principes d'une entente harmonieuse et reflechie entre les peuples. 

M. Robert Bacon a bien voulu se souvenir qu'il etait, recemment, encore, 
ambassadeur des Etats-Unis a Paris, et il lui a paru que les contacts intellectuels 
entre les republiques sud-americaines et la France etaient tels qu'il y avait tout 
avantage, pour le succes de son ceuvre, a toucher barre d'abord a Paris. 

La force de propagande de la langue et de la pensee franchises, me disait-il 
lui-meme, est telle que s'inspirer des fondations et des ceuvres franchises lui a 



62 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

paru un des premiers devoirs de sa mission. C'est pourquoi il est aujourd'hui 
parmi nous. Nous le remercions de cette confiance qui honore notre pays et 
qui, nous devons l'esperer, lui facilitera sa tache aupres de nos amis de l'Amerique 
du Sud. 

Confiee a l'eminent diplomate dont tout Paris apprecia la bonne grace, la 
vivacite intellectuelle et le devouement, et dont le comite France-Amerique a 
notamment eprouve la large liberalite, une si noble entreprise ne peut que reussir. 

Messieurs, je leve mon verre a nos deux chers collegues et presidents, et au 
succes du voyage de notre excellent et eminent ami M. Robert Bacon. 

M. Robert Bacon a repondu en ces termes : 

Mon cher President, 

Vous venez d'exprimer ma pensee et d'expliquer l'objet de ma mission 
dans des termes dont je ne puis que vous remercier du fond du cceur. Oui, 
je voulais prendre mes attaches avec la pensee franchise avant d'aborder la 
pensee sud-americaine. Vos eloges et vos encouragements se rapportent a ceux 
qui ont su preparer et definir ma mission; je n'oublierai jamais, au cours de 
mon voyage, cette heure en particulier et tant de bons moments qu'il m'a ete 
donne de passer a Paris. 

Je bois a la prosperite de l'ceuvre que vous avez fondee et qui a elle-meme 
une si grande portee internationale, a la prosperite du comite France-Amerique- 



APENDICE II 
Brasil 



Discurso del Dr. de Oliveira Lima, 

Pronunciado en Ingl£s Ante los Miembros del Instituto de la Historia del Brasil, 

En la Embajada Americana, 

Rio de Janeiro, 8 de Octubre de 19 13 

Bxcelencia: 

El presidente del Instituto de la Historia, Conde Affonso Celso, quien sucedio 
al Baron de Rio Branco en ese puesto, nombro en nuestra ultima reunion, una 
comision compuesta de diez miembros, para daros el saludo de bienvenida en 
este pais, en nombre de dicha asociacion, la mas antigua de las asociaciones in- 
telectuales del Brasil y quizas de la America del Sur. 

Nosotros nos vanagloriamos en verdad de nuestros tres cuartos de 
siglo de existencia, asi como de los invaluables servicios con que han contribuido 
diferentes generaciones de historiadores e indagadores de documentos, al estudio 
de nuestro pasado. El difunto Emperador del Brasil, Don Pedro II, cuya 
memoria es honrada en los Estados Unidos y venerada aqui, presidia nuestras 
reuniones y nos guiaba en nuestro trabajo. 

Ya veis, por la naturaleza de nuestros estudios, asi como por la influencia 
de las personalidades mencionadas, el Instituto de la Historia es una sociedad de 
paz, lo mismo que la que representais en nuestro continente. Vos sois paz en 
accion, paz en movimiento, paz que se basa en la conciencia de las responsabilidades 
nacionales y de los deberes y derechos internacionales. Nosotros somos paz en 
teoria, paz en sentimiento, y hasta paz en tradiciones, me atrevo a decir, porque 
las guerras en America, especialmente en la America independiente, han sido 
mas bien guerras por la libertad que guiadas por la ambicion. 

No asumo que han sido exclusivamente asi, porque cada porcion de la hu- 
manidad lleva consigo faltas y crimenes, y esta es la razon porque se ha traba- 
jado tanto por la difusion del respeto y amistad internacional ; pero el hecho es 
que nosotros hemos ganado nuestras libertades con nuestra voluntad y estamos 
luchando por conservarlas. El Brasil bajo el Imperio tuvo dos guerras con el 
extranjero, pero las dos fueron en contra de tiranias extranjeras, no en contra de 
pueblos o nacionalidades extranjeras. 

Bajo todos los puntos de vista, pues, vuestra mision despierta nuestras mas 
hondas simpatias y podeis estar seguro de que encontrareis en este pais el medio 
mas propicio. El trabajo de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional 



64 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

no es bien conocido aqui aun, pero pronto estaremos informados de lleno de 
sus propositus. La parte de la America Latina que constituimos, lucha por su 
desenvolvimiento sin herir las aspiraciones legitimas de los otros. 

Personalmente vuestro nombre nos es familiar como el de un embajador y 
Secretario de Estado que obtuvo exito brillante ; tambien como del amigo y cola- 
borador de Mr. Root, lo cual indica que ambos teneis una conception de la po- 
litica y de la diplomacia muy por encima de la vulgar. La politica no puede 
divorciarse del intelectualismo, la diplomacia no debe ser simple materialismo, 
sino una lucha por los nobles ideales de comprension juridica, de amistad in- 
ternacional, y de union moral. 

Encontrareis en todas partes la simpatia que merece vuestra personalidad 
y notareis que los Estados Unidos son sinceramente estimados en el Brasil. Con- 
fiamos en vuestros esfuerzos en pro de la conciliation international y estamos 
dispuestos a coadyuvar en ellos, asi como tambien admiramos y tratamos de seguir 
vuestras lecciones de incansable trabajo y perseverancia y de education civica. 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Excellence, Messieurs de Vlnstitut Historique: 

Je ne trouve pas de mots pour vous remercier du fond du coeur de votre 
charmant accueil et de vos si gracieuses paroles, dont je suis profondement 
touche. 

Venant de la part de la Fondation Carnegie pour la Paix Internationale, je 
vous apporte les salutations les plus affectueuses de son eminent President et 
votre ami devoue, l'Honorable Elihu Root, mon cher maitre, que j'aime et que 
vous, Messieurs, vous aussi aimez, j'en suis sur. C'est forcement rappele a mon 
attention que, depuis sa memorable visite en votre beau pays en 1906 et depuis 
la conference de La Haye de 1907, il y a eu lieu de grands changements, des 
progres merveilleux dans le developpement du Droit International — du Droit 
des Gens, dont les illustres publicistes de votre pays, les jurisconsultes de toute 
l'Amerique latine ont pris un role le plus important. 

Selon les paroles du Docteur de Louter de l'Universifee d'Utrecht, publiciste 
renomme des Pays Bas : "L'Amerique latine, qui par les talents et l'eloquence 
de ses delegues a quelque peu surpris la diplomatic europeenne lors de la seconde 
conference de la paix, a deploye depuis une activite et une fecondite qui sont 
en meme temps humiliantes et encouragantes pour leurs devanciers. Ceux qui 
s'attachent a une paix fondee sur le droit ne peuvent qu'applaudir aux travail- 
leurs vigoureux d'outre-mer, occupes a construire les fondements solides d'un 
edifice de droit au lieu des f antaisies ephemeres de bonnes intentions steriles !" 

Or, Monsieur Root, qui voudrait bien s'eloigner de la vie intense de la 
politique et consacrer la plupart de ses efforts a ce developpement, a cette cause, 
tient beaucoup a coeur l'avancement de quelques activites plus precisees de la 
Fondation. 



APENDICE II 65 

Je vous prie de preter a ces pro jets pratiques votre consideration serieuse, 
non seulement pour resserrer encore les liens d'amitie et de solidarite entre nos 
deux chers pays, mais pour l'humanite et pour avancer et promouvoir la liberte 
et la justice entre les nations du monde. 

Discurso del Dr. de Oliveira Lima, 

Pronunciado en la Recepcion dada en la Embajada Americana, 
Rio de Janeiro, 8 de Octubre de 1913 

"O Senhor Embaixador dos Estados Unidos da America confiou me o hon- 
rosissimo cargo de apresentar a esta reuniao de brasileiros eminentes pelo saber 
e pela posigao, o nosso illustre hospede Snr. Robert Bacon, antigo Secretado de 
Estado e antigo Embaixador de seu paiz em Franga, o qual esta presentemente 
dedicando o seu vigor, o seu talento e a sua experiencia a mais nobre das cruzadas, 
a cruzada da paz. 

Nao podieis comtudo esperar que um homem do seu traquejo, das suas 
habilitagoes e de sua envergadura mental se limitasse a meros devaneios utopicos, 
a um nephelibatismo pacifista. O SiTr. Bacon quer ver a paz triumphante mas 
trazida pela razao mais do que pelo sentimento, isto e, pela consciencia universal, 
pela divulgagao e respito dos principios de direito internacional. 

Elle vos explicara com a concisao, clareza e lucidez que costuma empregar 
nas suas producgoes politicas e sociaes os fitos tao variados quanto practicos da 
sua missao, uma missao interessantissima e de grande alcance, que a Fundagao 
Carnegie em prol da paz mundial entregou ao seu devotamento civico e a sua 
inteireza moral, certa de que em toda a America latina seria ouvida com de- 
ferencia e sympathia a palavra do amigo e collaborador Elihu Root, o estadista 
insigne que tao sinceras provas deu na sua gestao das relagoes exteriores da 
grande uniao, de seu respeito pelos direitos dos outros povos e pela personalidade 
juridica das outras nacionalidades, e cuja nobilissima ambigao e presentemente 
agrupar todo o novo mundo n'uma ampla, desafogada e imponente solidariedade 
de cultura. 



[Traduction del Portugues] 

El Senor Embajador de los Estados Unidos de America me confio el hon- 
rosisimo cargo de presentar a esta reunion de brasilenos, eminentes por su saber 
y por su posicion, a nuestro ilustre huesped, Senor Robert Bacon, antiguo Se- 
cretario de Estado y antiguo Embajador de su pais en Francia, el cual esta 
actualmente dedicando sus energias, su talento y su experiencia a la mas noble 
de las cruzadas, a la cruzada de la paz. 

No podeis, sin embargo, esperar que un hombre de su altura, de su habilidad 
y de su calibre mental se limite a meros suefios utopicos, a insulsas teorias paci- 
fistas. El Senor Bacon desea ver la paz triunfante, pero que esta venga traida 



66 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

por la razon mas que por el sentimiento, esto es, por medio de la conciencia 
universal, por la difusion de los principios del Derecho internacional y el res- 
peto a los mismos. 

El os explicara, con la concision, claridad y lucidez que usa siempre en sus 
trabajos politicos y sociales, los fines tan variados como practicos de su mision, 
una mision interesantisima y de gran alcance, que la Fundacion Carnegie para 
la Paz Mundial ha encomendado a su amor civico y a su entereza moral, con la 
certeza de que en toda la America Latina seria escuchada con deferencia y sim- 
patia la palabra del amigo y colaborador de Elihu Root, el estadista insigne, 
que tan sinceras pruebas dio cuando estaban a su cargo las relaciones exteriores 
de la gran Union, de su respeto a los derechos de los demas pueblos y a la per- 
sonalidad juridica de las otras naciones, y cuya nobilisima ambicion es, en la 
actualidad, agrupar a todo el Nuevo Mundo en una amplia, desahogada e impo- 
nente solidaridad de cultura. 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Tenho certeza, meus senhores, de que me desculpareis se em vez de fazer 
um discurso na minha propria lingua para corresponder as vossas benevolas 
saudaqoes de boas vindas, as quaes me tern commovido profundamente, vos 
diga algumas palavras de agradecimento na vossa bella lingua, com a convicgao 
de que, embora mal exprimidas, ellas veem do meu coracao. 

Sei ser uma ousadia falar-vos em portuguez, mas peco a vossa 
benevolencia por dous motivos. Em primeiro lugar devo referir-me a alta 
admiraeao que sempre senti pelas nobres tradiqoes portuguezas que recentemente 
tern sido avivada pela minha estada em Lisboa, d'onde acabo de chegar. L,a 
ao pe da estatua do grande Camoes, veio-me ao pensamento o insigne brasileiro, 
cujas eloquentes palavras e escriptos primeiro fizeram-me apreciar as bellezas 
dos "Lusiadas" e os incantos das "Rimas" ; refiro-me ao illustre e gentil Joaquim 
Nabuco, sabio, poeta e estadista, a quern cheguei a conhecer e querer durante 
uma admiragao intima de quatro annos em Washington e a quern me orgulhava 
de chamar meu amigo. 

Outro motivo que offerego para iniciar o emprego da vossa bella lingua, e 
que na vespera da minha partida dos Estados Unidos, no banquete onde tambem 
pude saudar o meu estimado amigo, o Sr. Embaixador Domicio da Gama, tive 
o grande prazer de achar-me sentado ao lado do vosso illustre Ministro das 
Relagoes Exteriores, o Exmo. Sr. Lauro Miiller o qual, com a gentileza e as 
maneiras incantadoras naturaes a sua raga e nacao, nos dirigiu a palavra em 
muito bom inglez. Os meus compatriotas nunca esquecerao o prazer que produziu 
a visita do Dr. Miiller e a insigne honra que nos fez o seu paiz quando o enviou 
para retribuir a visita do nosso querido Elihu Root. Para nos da Universidade 
de Harvard foi caso de gratidao especial que elle aceitasse o nosso diploma e 
assim chegasse a ser membro da nossa familia Harvardiana. 



APENDICE II 67 

Tenho a honra de ter sido enviado ao Brasil pela Fundagao para a Amizade 
Internacional, da qual o Sr. Root e cabeca e alma. A mensagem que 
trago delle e uma mensagem de boa vontade, a qual, segundo uma phrase do 
eminente publicista e jurisconsulto, o Exmo. Sr. Ruy Barbosa, tern verdadeira- 
mente "a sanccao da opiniao americana", mas especialmente e uma mensagem 
de affectuosa estima de Elihu Root para os seus bons amigos aqui. Esta 
missao me faz sentir mais orgulhoso que qualquer outra de que tenha sido incum- 
bido durante a minha vida. 

E como posso eu comecar a exprimir meus sentimentos a primeira vista de 
cidade admiravel, da cidade magica de Rio de Janeiro? Porque, apezar de tudo 
que se tenha dito e escripto de suas bellezas e grandezas incantadoras, estas 
excedem completamente aos meus mais extravagantes sonhos. E' incomparavel, e 
vos invejo o prazer e a inspiracao continua, a forga e corage que devem provocar 
tal meio. 

Uma vez mais, meus senhores, vos asseguro a minha profunda gratidao por 
vossa cordial recepgao e a excelsa honra que me tendes concedido. 



[Traduction del Portuguese 

Estoy seguro, sefiores, de que me disculpareis si en vez de hacer un discurso 
en mi propia lengua para corresponder a vuestros benevolos saludos de bien- 
venida, los cuales me han conmovido profundamente, os dirija algunas palabras 
de agradecimiento en vuestro bello idioma, con la seguridad de que, aunque no 
esten bien expresadas, vienen del corazon. 

Parece ser una osadia hablaros en portugues, pero solicito vuestra benevo- 
lencia por dos motivos. En primer lugar debo referirme a la alta admiracion 
que siempre senti por las nobles tradiciones portuguesas, que recientemente ha 
sido avivada por mi estancia en Lisboa de donde acabo de llegar. Alii, al pie 
de la estatua del gran Camoens, recorde al insigne brasilefio cuyas elocuentes 
palabras y escritos me hicieron por primera vez apreciar las bellezas de Las 
Lusiadas y los encantos de Las Rimas, me refiero al ilustre y amable amigo 
Joaquin Nabuco, sabio, poeta y estadista, a quien llegue a conocer y a querer 
durante una amistad intima de cuatro afios en Washington y a quien me enor- 
gullecia en llamar mi amigo. 

Otro motivo que ofrezco para emplear vuestra bella lengua, es que, la vispera 
de mi salida de los Estados Unidos, en el banquete donde tambien pude saludar 
a mi estimado amigo, el Embajador Domicio da Gama, tuve el gran placer de 
hallarme sentado al lado de vuestro ilustre ministro de relaciones exteriores, 
Su Excelencia Sr. Lauro Miiller, el cual, con la gentileza y las maneras encanta- 
doras naturales de su raza y nacion, nos dirigio la palabra en correcto ingles. 
Mis compatriotas nunca olvidaran el placer que les produjo la visita del Sr. 
Miiller y la insigne honra que nos confirio su pais cuando lo envio para devolver 
la visita de nuestro querido Elihu Root. Para nosotros, los de la Universidad de 



68 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Harvard, fue motivo de gratitud especial el que el aceptara nuestro diploma y 
asi llegara a ser miembro de nuestra familia Harvardiana. 

Tengo la honra de haber sido enviado al Brasil por la Fundacion para la 
Amistad Internacional, de la cual el Sr. Root es cabeza y alma. El mensaje que 
traigo es un mensaje de buena voluntad, el cual, segun una frase del eminente 
publicista y jurisconsulto, Sr. Ruy Barbosa, tiene verdaderamente la "sancion 
de la opinion americana", mas es especialmente un mensaje de afectuosa estima- 
tion de EHhu Root a sus amigos de aqui. Esta mision me hace sentir mas orgullo 
que cualquiera otra que me haya sido confiada durante mi vida. 

«jY como puedo comenzar a expresar mis sentimientos al ver por primera 
vez esta ciudad admirable, la ciudad magica de Rio de Janeiro? Porque a pesar 
de todo lo que se haya dicho o escrito de sus bellezas y sus grandezas encanta- 
doras, estas exceden completamente a mis mas extravagantes suefios. Es incom- 
parable, y yo os envidio el placer y la inspiration continua, la fuerza y el valor 
que debe provocar tal medio. 

Una vez mas, senores mios, os aseguro mi profunda gratitud por la cordial 
reception e insigne honra que me habeis concedido. 



[Discurso pronunciado en frances] 

C'est pour moi un tres grand plaisir de visiter, bien que pendant quelques 
jours, trop courts a. mon gre, quelques-uns des peuples et des pays de l'Amerique 
du Sud, car ce fut tou jours un de mes voeux les plus chers, que je n'ai pu 
realiser encore que partiellement, de voir de mes propres yeux vos admirables 
contrees, les merveilles de votre civilisation, de me rencontrer de nouveau avec 
des amis que j'ai connus et aimes dans d'autres parties du monde, d'y nouer de 
nouvelles amities qui ajouteront un nouveau charme a la vie et dont je garderai 
un souvenir que ni le temps, ni la distance, ne sauraient ni effacer, ni obscurcir. 
Je viens charge d'un message de bon vouloir de la part de votre ami devoue, 
votre grand admirateur, Monsieur Elihu Root. C'est a sa requete, devancee 
par mon prop re desir, que j'ai l'honneur de me presenter devant vous. Je 
voudrais pouvoir vous dire tout ce qu'il vous dirait lui-meme, s'il etait ici present, 
si, prenant la parole, il vous adressait le salut de sa vieille amitie; les expressions 
difrereront, peut-etre, mais l'esprit qui les animera, je vous prie de le croire, sera 
absolument le meme. 

La visite que vous venez de faire, Monsieur le Ministre, aux Etas-Unis 
portera une influence permanente pour le bien. Nous avons essaye de vous 
montrer les vrais sentiments de bienvenue qui se trouvaient dans nos coeurs. 
Nous avons beaucoup a apprendre de la courtoisie et de l'hospitalite pour les- 
quelles vous, les Bresiliens, vous vous trouvez si dignement renommes. Mais 
comme l'a bien dit le Senateur Root, les vrais sentiments de bienvenue qui 
existaient pour vous dans les coeurs du peuple des Etats-Unis valaient beaucoup 
mieux que toutes les manifestations que le Gouvernement des Etats-Unis aurait 
pu faire. 



APENDICE II - 69 

On a parle de ma mission (de la part de la Fondation) comme mission 
d'amitie et de bonne volonte. C'est bien vrai et j'en suis fier, mais n'est-ce pas 
vrai aussi, que, comme il existe deja des amities tres liees, Ton peut aller plus loin 
encore ? 

De ma part je voudrais qu'elle soit considered plutot comme mission de 
cooperation et de concours entre vieux amis, pour discuter, etudier, tracer des 
voies pratiques par lesquelles nous pourrons travailler ensemble et marcher en 
avant vers le progres, vers l'ideal de l'humanite, et tou jours vers plus de lumiere, 
pour le triomphe du Droit dans le monde, en substituant a l'appel a la force l'appel 
a la justice; enfin, vers une opinion internationale qui sera la vraie sanction du 
Droit International. 

Les peuples de nos deux Republiques sont idealistes. Tout recemment 
Monsieur Hanotaux, ancien Ministre des Affaires Etrangeres de France, a 
ecrit: "A la conference de la Have, ce sont les representants des republiques 
sud-americaines, et notamment du Bresil, qui ont expose les idees les plus hardies 
et les plus originales; ils ont ete positivement a la tete de la pensee humaine; et 
voila qui merite aussi quelque consideration." 

Les nobles paroles prononcees par Monsieur Root en 1906 au Congres 
Pan-Americain, representent aujourd'hui les sentiments, les ideals du peuple des 
Etats-Unis avec la meme verite, avec la meme force qui leur etaient vraies il y a 
sept ans ; car les Gouvernements peuvent changer, mais les sentiments du peuple 
restent toujours les memes. . J'aime toujours a penser a cette memorable 
declaration comme La Doctrine Root — si vous permettez — the doctrine of sym- 
pathy and understanding, of kindly consideration and honorable obligation — dont 
je me considerais si fier d'etre digne d'en parler comme humble apotre. 

J'aimerais que vous me consideriez comme inaugurant une serie de visites 
internationales qui se poursuivront, sans interruption et tourneront a notre mutuel 
avantage, en mettant en rapport les representants autorises de la societe et du 
monde intellectuel des contrees du Sud ainsi que de celles du Nord, et en vous 
invitant a cooperer a l'etablissement d'institutions internationales qui deviendront, 
nous l'esperons, des centres de bon vouloir, qui repandront et populariseront des 
principes justes et progressifs de droit international; dont peuvent dependre les 
bonnes relations internationales, et qui, par differentes voies, directement et 
indirectement, par un echange de pensees, un echange de vues et une heureuse 
combinaison d'efforts parviendront a fortifier les liens d'amitie qu'un passe com- 
mun, des institutions communes et un but commun provoquent et reclament. 

L'histoire et la nature ont fait naitre et grandir un profond sentiment de 
solidarite, non seulement entre les Etats de 1'Amerique latine, mais encore entre 
les Republiques du Sud et les Etats-Unis. II importe de maintenir et de fortifier 
cette solidarite, qui, en raison de sa double origine, unit indissolublement les 
nations du nouveau Continent, dans le passe, dans le present et dans l'avenir. 

II suffit de jeter les yeux sur l'histoire politique du Nouveau Monde pour 
voir l'interet constant qu'ont porte les Etats-Unis a la lutte entreprise 



70 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

par les Etats de l'Amerique latine afin de s'affranchir d'abord de la metropole 
et de defendre ensuite leur independance conquise contre toute tentative de 
conquete de la part des puissances europeennes. II suffit aussi de rappeler 
brievement qu'apres l'emancipation, les Etats-Unis ont fourni aux Etats latins 
les formes et les bases de leurs institutions politiques, notamment de leur regime 
republicain et democratique a une epoque ou precisement les vieilles institu- 
tions politiques de l'Europe etaient loin de repondre aux idees de liberte et 
aux conditions sociales des deux Ameriques. 

Tout ce passe de gloire dans l'histoire du Nouveau Monde doit fortifier 
de jour en jour les liens indestructibles de solidarite qui ont uni les nations 
americaines depuis leur naissance a la vie politique. 

La nature consolide encore l'oeuvre de l'histoire. La situation continentale 
des Etats du Nouveau Monde a fait naitre une serie de problemes communs 
a tous les Etats de ce Continent, creant de la sorte entre eux de nouveaux 
liens de solidarite. Grace aux progres de la civilisation et au perfectionnement 
des moyens de communication, on a compris, de nos jours, en Amerique, l'im- 
perieuse necessite de resoudre uniformement les problemes nes des situations 
et conditions speciales au Nouveau Continent. 

Devancant en quelque sorte l'Europe, dont les grandes puissances ne se 
rencontraient en conference qu'a la suite de guerres et pour determiner les 
conditions de la paix, tous les Etats de l'Amerique se sont reunis en des con- 
ferences pacifiques, afin de traiter les questions communes a tout leur continent; 
d'ou le nom et l'origine des conferences pan-americaines. Ces conferences ont 
ete des plus fructueuses — un certain nombre de problemes d'interet americain 
ont ete etudies; des conventions importantes ont ete signees en vue de developper 
la vie sociale et intellectuelle du Nouveau Monde. Enfin, les representants 
des divers Etats americains ont ainsi appris a se mieux connaitre et ils ont pu 
se rendre compte combien multiples et puissants sont les liens qui unissent 
tous les Etats americains. 

Les sentiments de solidarite et de fraternite qui groupent dans une com- 
munaute d'interets les Etats du Nouveau Monde doivent donner naissance a 
une ceuvre d'union et de concorde. La voie est deja ouverte; de nombreux 
et f ertiles resultats ont ete obtenus ; il importe done de parvenir et de realiser 
de plus en plus l'entente et l'harmonie. II faut surtout dissiper le malentendu 
du Sud a l'egard de la politique des Etats Unis. Comme l'a dit solennellement 
mon devancier, Monsieur Root, ce pays desire avant tout que la paix et la 
prosperite regnent dans l'Amerique latine afin de fortifier et de resserrer les 
liens d'amitie et de fraternite qui doivent unir tous les peuples americains. 

J'ai l'honneur de m'adresser a vous non pas simplement en mon nom 
personnel, mais. au nom de la Fondation Carnegie pour la paix internationale 
dont le Senateur Root est president, et de vous inviter au nom et de la part 



APENDICE II 71 

des administrateurs de la Fondation de lui preter votre concours par tous les 
moyens qui vous paraitront possibles et convenables. 

En d'autres termes, le desir de Monsieur Root est d'eveiller autant que 
possible l'interet et la sympathie des maitres de l'opinion dans 1'Amerique du 
Sud et de les gagner aux diverses enterprises que la Fondation cherche a favor- 
iser dans l'interet de meilleures relations internationales, de sorte qu'ils puissent 
preter d'une facon pratique leur concours a l'oeuvre poursuivie. Vous n'ignorez 
pas, sans doute, qu'il y a entre les mains des administrateurs de la Fondation 
une importante dotation dont les interets devront etre consacres a favoriser ces 
objets. Or, les administrateurs, apres avoir examine par quelles voies ils pour- 
raient atteindre le but en vue duquel la dotation avait ete constitute, ont for- 
mule une declaration d'objets speciaux auxquels seraient consacres les revenus, 
parmi lesquels sont: 

a) Encourager des recherches et des etudes scientifiques et approfondies 
sur les causes de la guerre et sur les moyens pratiques de la prevenir et de 
l'eviter. 

b) Aider au progres du droit international; amener une entente generale 
sur les principes de ce droit; travailler a les faire accepter par toutes les 
nations. 

c) Repandre tous renseignements et faire l'education de l'opinion pub- 
lique concernant les conditions, la nature et les effets de la guerre, et sur les 
moyens de la prevenir et de l'eviter. 

d) Etablir parmi les habitants des pays civilises une meilleure intelli- 
gence des droits et des devoirs internationaux, et un sentiment plus droit de 
la justice internationale. 

e) Cultiver les sentiments amicaux entre les habitants des differents 
pays et augmenter la connaissance et l'entente reciproques entre plusieurs 
nations. 

f) Encourager l'acceptation generale des moyens pacifiques pour le 
reglement des differends internationaux. 

g) Entretenir, encourager et aider les etablissements, les organisations, 
les associations et agences qui seront juges necessaires ou utiles a la pour- 
suite des desseins de la Fondation ou de certains uns d'entre eux. 

Pour remplir ces objets, le travail de la Fondation a ete reparti en trois 
divisions : 

i. La division des Rapports et d'Education, dont M. le Dr. Nicholas 
Murray Butler, president de l'Universite de Columbia, est le directeur. 

2. La division d'Economie Politique et d'Histoire, dont M. le Dr. John 
Bates Clark est le directeur. 

3. La division de Droit International, dont le Secretaire de la Fonda- 
tion, M. le Dr. James Brown Scott, est le directeur. 

Les divers objets mentionnes ci-dessus ont ete convenablement repartis 
entre ces trois divisions. 



72 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

II n'entre nullement dans la pensee des Administrateurs de la Fondation 
de l'organiser de telle faqon qu'elle vienne elle-meme comme un missionnaire 
cherchant a repandre l'evangile de la paix, ni meme qu'elle cherche a exprimer 
directement ses propres idees au monde; son action devra se borner a favoriser 
et a developper dans chaque contree et dans tous les pays l'organisation et la 
mise en activite des forces nationales favorables a la paix. Elle ne vise pas 
tant a a j outer une nouvelle organisation en faveur de la paix a celles qui 
peuvent deja exister dans le monde, qu'a apporter une nouvelle vigueur aux 
activites qui tendent d'une fagon pratique a rendre la paix plus sure. 

Pour aider ces trois divisions de la Fondation dans leur travail, une 
organisation importante et effective a ete constituee en Europe comme dans 
l'Amerique du Nord, organisation qui comprend un grand nombre d'hommes 
d'Etat eminents et grandement respectes, des publicistes et des savants. 

L'estime et l'amitie que les administrateurs de la Fondation nourrissent 
pour les peuples de l'Amerique latine et pour nombre d'Americains latins 
distingues, avec lesquels ils ont eu d'agreables relations d'amitie, les a conduit 
a souhaiter que l'oeuvre de la Fondation puisse trouver dans l'Amerique du 
Sud des collaborateurs aussi actifs et aussi utiles que ceux qu'elle a rencontres 
en Europe. 

Laissez-moi vous citer directement un passage des instructions que m'a 
donnees Monsieur Root, au lieu de les paraphraser comme j'ai fait a plusieurs 
reprises. "Vous remarquerez," dit-il, "qu'un des moyens par lesquels la Divi- 
sion des Rapports et d'Education se propose de favoriser la bonne entente 
entre les nations, consiste en une serie de visites d'hommes representatifs. En 
consequence, sous les auspices de la Division, directement ou indirectement, le 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant, de France, la Baronne von Suttner, d'Autriche, 
et le Professeur Nitobe, du Japon, ont deja visite les Etats-Unis; le President 
Eliot, de l'Universite Harvard, a visite l'lnde, la Chine et le Japon, et le 
Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie est maintenant au Japon. Votre visite dans 
l'Amerique du Sud rentre dans cette categorie, mais elle a, cependant, un 
interet plus determine et plus special que les voyages que je viens d'enumerer 
ou qui sont projetes pour l'objet que j'ai mentionne, car elle n'a pas simplement 
pour but de fortifier la bonne entente en etablissant des relations personnelles 
entre un homme de l'Amerique du Nord et des hommes distingues de l'Amerique 
du Sud, mais elle a encore pour but de porter a la connaissance des hommes 
marquants de l'Amerique du Sud les travaux, les vues et l'ideal de la Fondation, 
et d'inviter les amis que nous possedons dans le sud de l'Amerique a se joindre a 
nous avec cordialite et sympathie pour encourager la grande oeuvre a laquelle 
nous nous sommes consacres." 

Tel est l'esprit plein de bons sentiments, de douce sympathie qui a inspire 
ma mission; je. n'ai pas besoin de vous dire que c'est aussi l'esprit dans lequel 
je tache de la remplir. Les sujets que je suis charge de vous exposer en dehors 



APENDICE II 73 

des questions generates concernant l'objet, les vues de la Fondation et les voies 
et moyens par lesquels les Administrateurs s'efforcent de les atteindre et de 
les realiser sont: 

1. La constitution de Societes nationales de droit international, qui 
seront rattachees a l'lnstitut Americain de droit International. 

2. Faire entrevoir aux gouvernements des divers pays que j'ai l'honneur 
de visiter l'opportunite qu'il y aurait de participer a la creation projetee 
d'une Academie de Droit International a La Haye par l'envoi par chaque 
Gouvernement d'un ou de plusieurs representants a cette Academie, des 
qu'elle sera organisee. 

3. La nomination d'une commission nationale pour l'etude des questions 
a soumettre a la prochaine conference de La Haye, et pour prendre des 
mesures pour que toutes ces commissions en Amerique puissent communiquer 
entre elles. 

4. La constitution de Societes Nationales pour la Conciliation Interna- 
tionale qui se rattacheraient a l'Association de Conciliation Internationale 
seant a Paris, qui est la mere de ces associations. 

5. Prendre des dispositions pour que des donnees puissent etre fournies 
pour les travaux de la Division d'Economie Politique et d'Histoire, conf orme- 
ment au programme dresse a Berne par le Congres des Economistes pendant 
l'ete de 191 1 — et en ce qui concerne ce dernier sujet qu'il me soit permis de 
rappeler que M. le Dr. Kinley, qui a ete nomme membre de la Commission 
de Recherches pour s'occuper plus specialement de ce qui a trait a 1' Amerique 
du Sud, fera prochainement une visite dans ce pays, pour specifier ce qui 
peut etre fait pour aider les recherches de cette Division, il demandera 
l'avis et les conseils des hommes les plus importants de l'Amerique du Sud, 
et inyitera plus particulierement les economistes et les historiens de ces 
contrees a collaborer dans la mesure qui leur paraitra possible et convenable 
aux projets relatifs a l'Amerique du Sud autant qu'ils les trouveront propres 
a etre examines et etudies. 

Qu'il me soit permis de faire une derniere citation de Monsieur Root: 
"L'Administration de la Fondation se rend bien compte que les progres dans 
l'ceuvre qu'ils ont enterprise seront necessairement lents, et que les resultats les 
plus substantiels n'apparaitront que dans un avenir eloigne. Nous avons a 
compter avec des habitudes, des tendances profondement enracinees dans la 
nature humaine, car elles s'y sont developpees au cours de milliers d'annees ; tout 
ce que peut esperer faire une generation c'est d'amener graduellement quelque 
changement dans la maniere de vivre. Toute evaluation d'un pareil travail et de 
ses resultats ne saurait trouver sa mesure dans la vie ephemere des individus, 
mais dans la vie seculaire des nations. Mais quelque maigres que soient ses 
resultats immediats, il n'y a pas de plus noble objet pour l'activite humaine que 
d'exercer son influence sur les tendances de la race, de fagon qu'elle se meuve 
dans la direction de la civilisation et de l'humanite, et s'eloigne de la barbaric 
C'est pour les faire participer avec nous a cette noble tache que nous vous de- 
mandons d'inviter nos amis de l'Amerique du Sud avec l'assurance la plus sin- 
cere, et sans reserve, de notre haute consideration et de notre profond respect." 



74 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Le developpement scientifique du Droit International qui est tou jours un des 
interets les plus forts, auquel Monsieur Root a consacre une si grande partie de 
son genie, a montre un progres remarquable. La Deuxieme Conference de la 
Haye, comme on l'a dit, a marque un progres vers le juste et paisible reglement 
des relations internationales plus grand qu'on n'a jamais fait auparavant d'un 
seul pas, sauf peut-etre le progres fait a la Premiere Conference de la Haye. 

Les reves d'hier sont les realites d'aujourd'hui ; les reves d'aujourd'hui 
deviendront les realites de demain. Les reves de Rolin-Jaequemyns, Lieber, 
Calvo, Rio Branco, Nabuco et d'autres convaincus deviennent deja les faits 
d'aujourd'hui; l'esprit de leurs doctrines est devenu un principe de notre epoque. 

La Direction de la Eondation Carnegie croit que ce progres pourrait etre 
accelere par des voies pratiques, Elle a la conviction que les ideals des cory- 
phees de la pensee peuvent etre avances plus vite, de sorte que le monde puisse en 
ressentir les bienfaits par un concert d'efforts dans quelques activites pratiques 
bien precisees. C'est pourquoi je suis venu vous solliciter le precieux concours et 
la cooperation. 

Je vous remercie encore une fois de votre si bienveillant accueil. 

Discurso del Senador Ruy Barbosa, 

Pronunciado en la Recepcion en la Biblioteca Nacional, 
Rio de Janeiro, io de Octubre 1913 
Senhores: 

Nao e de vos apresentar um hospede illustre que me cabe agora a missao. 
Ao Sr. Robert Bacon bastaram estes quatro dias de estada entre nos, para que 
todos ja o conhecamos com alguma coisa da impressao de uma antiga amizade. 
No digno successor do Sr. EHhu Root se reflectia, desde o comeco, aos nossos 
olhos, a imagem, cara aos brasileiros, do seu mestre e antecessor na secretaria 
de Estado sob a administragao do eminente americano, cuja politica se fez sentir 
em beneficios a este continente e ao outro. Quantos, porem, delle se approxi- 
maram, tiveram, para logo, a sensagao de um merecimento alimentado pela sua 
propria luz, uma luz saudavel, communicativa e insinuante, que se diffunde, suave 
e tranquillamente, em intimidade, persuasao e sympathia entre os que se lhe 
acercam. 

Da primeira vez que o ouvimos, ante-hontem, na embaixada americana, 
acarinhados pela hospedagem de Mr. Morgan, fino diplomata a cujo incanto nao 
se resiste, surprehendeu-nos o recem-chegado com uma allocugao, cujo exordio, 
redigido em nosso idioma, lhe sahiu dos labios correcto e correntio, apenas com 
uns longes de accento estrangeiro, como se, na sua bocca, a palavra estivesse, ha 
muito, familiarisada com a nossa lingua. Com este primor de gentileza nos 
mostrava elle, sem esforco, por inspiragao da sua sinceridade, os milagres, de 
que e capaz a cortezia e a benevolencia, no espirito de um filho dessa raqa dos 
Estados Unidos, que no seu typo reune as virtudes, aptidoes, e talentos de todas 
as outras. 



APENDIC3 II 75 

Nao podiam, ja se ve, ter acertado melhor o tino e a mao dos que o elegeram, 
para nos vir trazer, da parte de Mr. Root, de Mr. Brown Scott e de todos os 
amigos da paz na America do Norte, essa mensagem, que o nosso coragao e a 
nossa cultura recebem com alvoroco. Por um e outro se ergue, neste momento, 
a minha voz, embora seja, de quantas neste auditorio se poderiam levantar, a 
menos autorisada para lhe responder. As circumstancias e que me confiam esta 
procuracao, incumbindo-me, como presidente da Academia Brasileira e membro 
do Instituto dos Advogados, a tarefa de corresponder, em nome dos que, nesta 
terra, leem e pensam, escrevem e falam, ao appello desta visita. 

Na conferencia que hoje ides escutar, nos vae dar o nosso generoso amigo, 
as primicias de um dos assumptos, que mais interesse entre nos despertam, occu- 
pando-se alguma coisa com os trabalhos preliminares a terceira conferencia da 
paz. A assemblea de escol aqui reunida neste centro de educagao publica, 
recolhera com anciedade os fructos da meditagao e da experiencia do orador 
quanto aos actos preparatories de um acontecimento, cuja espectativa afagamos 
como uma das melhores do nosso tempo. 

Nunca o sentimento brasileiro se apaixonou tanto por um caso internacional 
de caracter incruento, como por esse congresso, que, ha seis annos, juntou em 
Haya, na antiga Sala dos Cavalleiros, as delegacies de todos os povos cultos da 
terra, empenhados em reduzir o dominio da guerra na superficie do globo. Nao 
que nos desvanecesse a nossa modesta parte no espectaculo das luctas de uma 
arena, que tinha por amphitheatro o mundo. Mas porque a importancia, ate 
entao sem egual, da campanha ali travada pelo direito com as armas da razao, 
despertando em nossa consciencia fibras nao habituadas a vibrar, revelou, sob 
essa influencia nova, uma correspondencia, de que ainda nao se tinha a intuigao, 
entre os instinctos moraes da nossa nacionalidade, como de toda a parte san da 
America Latina, e o ideal que congregava no lar da velha Hollanda, como no 
coragao da justiga, a sombra das suas tradigoes de independencia e liberdade, o 
segundo concilio ecumenico da paz. 

Deixae passar esta cognominacao religiosa, que me acode a mente sem 
pretengao de atavios, como expressao natural da reverencia que nos inspira o 
objecto, quasi sagrado e divino, das aspiragoes, que tiveram forga, para enlagar 
num congresso, de todas as regioes do planeta, os mais distantes e esparsos mem- 
bros da familia humana. Nao era uma igreja, com titulos de universalidade 
mais ou menos justos, que ali celebrava os estados geraes da sua catholicidade, 
mas o consorcio de todas as igrejas, de todas as confissoes e de todos os credos no 
culto commum dessa forma suprema da caridade que se traduz na reducgao dos 
conflictos armados entre as nagoes. 

O espectaculo daquelles reis, que desciam dos seus thronos, para seguir o 
rastro de uma estrella em busca do bergo de Christo, vinha a renovar-se, com 
proporgoes de uma grandeza que excede a epopea, nesse movimento que ajuntava 
os senhores dos exercitos e os arbitros da guerra em torno da idea de humanisagao 
dos homens pelo amor uns dos outros, com que desde o Calvario o ceu nos estava 



76 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

sorrindo um futuro, alongado, ha vinte seculos, para distancias incalculaveis na 
extensao do tempo. O emblema christao, que encetara o seu apostolado atravez 
das batalhas nas insignias da Cruz Vermelha, abrindo, entre os fratricidios da 
guerra, uma zona de fraternidade, comecou a dominar um horizonte, de que ate 
ahi so haviam cogitado os sonhadores, no dia em que todas as divisoes de crengas 
e seitas cessaram, para deixar fundidas todas as ragas nessa communhao de um 
trabalho universal pela irmanagao dos povos. 

Quando esse pensamento encontrou o seu esboco inicial na conferencia de 
1899, cuja magnificencia a de 1907 veio duplicar, de um facto de tal relevancia 
nao deu conta a politica brasileira. Embora fosse o nosso governo (creio nao me 
enganar) o unico da America do Sul, contemplado nos convites, de que a chan- 
cellaria de S. Petersburgo teve a disposigao, nao acudiu o Brasil a esse chamado, 
que nos abria ensejo a uma precedencia tao lisonjeira. Mr. Andrew D. White 
allude, na sua Autobio graphia, ao espanto causado em Haya pela indifferenca 
dessa nossa attitude, imputando a negligencia do novo regimen esse erro, que ali 
se acreditava nao teria commettido o governo imperial. 

Nao podiamos reincidir no descuido em 1907, porque, estendendo-se a con- 
vocacao a todos os governos constituidos, nao nos seria licito abrir com a nossa 
ausencia excepcao singular ao concurso dos outros. Depois regia, entao, aqui, a 
pasta das relagoes exteriores um espirito vigilante sobre os interesses da nossa 
reputagao no estrangeiro e nutrido no conhecimento das grandes questoes inter- 
nacionaes. Mas o que, nessa phase da nossa historia, nos desaggrava da falta 
commettida oito annos antes, e o fervor, com que a opiniao publica, entre nos, 
acordou aos echos dos debates de Haya, com que se lhe penetrou do alcance, com 
que animou os seus representantes, na missao tao cheia de accidentes, espinhos e 
receios, que lhes coube. 

Nenhuma nagao acompanhou com mais assiduidade, mais emogao, nem ( 
mais enthusiasmo as peripecias do consesso, em cujas assentadas fraternisavam 
todas as civilisagoes do oriente e do occidente. Nenhuma se mostrou mais 
sensivel a. grandeza das controversias, que ali se agitavam. Nenhuma sympathisou 
mais intensamente com o trabalho, que ali se desenvolvia. Nenhuma sentiu de 
um modo mais vivo a sua solidariedade com a causa, que naquelle plenario sem 
exemplo se submettia a prova de um embate entre as tradigoes mais divergentes, 
os temperamentos mais contrarios e os interesses mais oppostos. 

Nao e por vaidade que rememoro as commogoes desses dias, a cuja tem- 
peratura nos aquecia o sangue nas veias a chamma de outra vida, mas, ao 
contrario, para accentuar a magia dessa corrente, que, atravessando o Atlantico, 
vinha, entre os povos de menos actividade e menos energia civica, osonar o 
ambiente, e revolver as multidoes estagnadas. Os scepticos suppoem condem- 
nadas as abstracgoes da idealidade essas influencias moraes, esquecendo que o 
fluido mais poderoso na ordem physica do globo parece habitar as nuvens; mas, 
quando baixa dessas alturas, dilacerando a atmosphera, nao ha obstaculos, que 



APENDICE II 77 

lhe resistam e as suas descargas penetram, em sideqoes fulgurantes, ate as 
entranhas da terra. 

Esse habito de calcular as colheitas da verdade e da justiga pelos resultados 
que se contam, pesam e medem, suscitou, entre os apreciadores ordinarios da 
conferencia de 1907, um coro de menospregos, irrisoes e epigrammas contra a 
sua obra, ingratamente julgada. Porque? Porque a segunda conferencia nada 
fez pelo desarmamento. Porque sobre grande numero dos seus desideranda 
se teve de limitar a confissoes de impotencia enunciadas sob a forma de votos, 
indicagoes e conselhos. 

Mas, ao menos em parte, a conferencia de 1907 realisou os desejos articulados 
pela sua predecessora. O projecto de organisacao da justiga arbitral nao se 
converteu em facto. Isso, porem, unicamente, porque os Estados mais fracos 
nao se lograram entender com as grandes potencias quanto ao systema de 
nomeagao dos membros dessa magistratura. Sera impossivel, de futuro, esse 
accordo? Nao o creio. O tempo nao conhece difficuldades, a que nao gaste 
as arestas, nao desate os nos, e nao resolva os enigmas. Grande verdade e a 
que animava a penna do meu nobre amigo, o Sr. Brown Scott, quando, no seu 
precioso livro sobre as conferencias de 1899 e 1907, escreveu: "A independencia 
dos Estados e proprio postulado, onde assenta o direito internacional. Mas a 
solidariedade nos interesses tem-se feito sentir de maneira tal, que as nagoes 
tern cedido, e hao-de, para o futuro, ceder alguma coisa do absolute na sua 
liberdade e independencia, do mesmo modo como da sua independencia e 
liberdade absoluta cede o individuo, em beneficio da sociedade, de que faz parte." 

Assim que se deslindar, porem, esse embarago, chegando-se a uma formula, 
cuja transacgao concilie os direitos de uns com as pretengoes dos outros, todo o 
demais terreno esta. vencido ; porquanto, salvo no tocante a esse requisito, a 
segunda conferencia deixou constituida e prestes a funccionar a instituigao con- 
cebida para exercer na sociedade universal das nag5es papel analogo ao so 
Supremo Tribunal Federal na uniao nacional dos Estados. 

Mas a segunda conferencia nao chegou somente a esse resultado. Baldaram- 
se as suas diligencias por concluir um tratado universal de arbitramento. Todas 
as nagoes, porem, ali firmaram o mais solemne dos actos, declarando-se unanimes 
em reconhecer o principio do arbitramento como obrigagdo, em reconhecer que 
certas differengas, e especialmente as relativas a intelligencia e applicagao das 
convengoes internacionaes, sao susceptiveis de obedecer a regra do arbitramento 
obrigatorio sem restricgao nenhuma. Ora nao ha quern nao sinta que na con- 
ferencia de 1899 teria sido impossivel obter das potencias reunidas em Haya o 
assentimento a formula dessas duas declaragoes, onde as soberanias renunciam em 
benefigio da justiga um territorio ja immenso. 

Oito annos bastaram, portanto, para se adeantar, no caminho da conciliagao 
dos Estados pelo direito, essa extensao incalculavel. So a forma diplomatica, em 
que se envolveu essa conquista, e que nao deixou sentir a revolugao, que ella 



78 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEE SUR 

exprimia nas leis do direito das gentes e no sentimento das mais poderosas nacional- 
idades. 

Os ironistas, que, ao encerrar-se o grandioso congresso, se diver- 
tiram em exercer sobre a insignificancia dos seus actos a causticidade do seu 
desdem, tiveram a capricho de orgar o que a segunda conferencia da paz custara 
aos differentes governos como a imprensa, em dinheiro de contado ; e a estimacao, 
mais ou menos arbitraria, a que se deram, computou a despeza total em quatro 
mil e quinhentos a nove mil contos, o que, no sentir de taes juizes, para tao magro 
proveito, estava longe de valer a pena. Mas um diplomata americano de notavel 
reputagao, que eu conheci em Haya, prestando relevantes servigos na legagao 
chineza, de que era membro, Mr. John Foster, nas suas Memorias, dadas a lume ha 
tres annos, liquidou essa futilidade, respondendo que, ainda admittida como mais 
ou menos exacta essa avaliagao, a quantia era apenas um tergo do em que importa 
um moderno encouragado. 

Oualquer potencia, entretanto, das menos folgadas nas suas finances, actual- 
mente se da, sem hesitar, ao luxo de triplicar, ou sextuplicar, esse desembolso, para 
ter de prevengao, embora nao esteja correndo riscos provaveis de guerra, uma 
ou duas dessas machinas, cujo poder hoje tao ameacado se acha pela multiplicacao 
dos inimigos submarinos e aereos, com que a sciencia apparelha o exterminio de 
esquadras e exercitos em massa. 

Veja-se agora o que realmente nos deixou em fructos de uso pratico e 
beneficio verificavel a ultima collaboragao das nagoes em Haya: a convengao de 
1 8 de Outubro sobre a liquidacao pacifica dos conflictos internacionaes ; o novo 
regimen estabelecido para as commissoes de inquerito ; a instituigao de um tribunal 
internacional de presas; a adopgao de novas leis sobre os costumes da guerra 
maritima e terrestre ; a proteccao do commercio neutro contra a guerra ; o estabele- 
cimento de uma corte permanente de arbitramento. Tudo isso em quatro mezes 
apenas de trabalhos, cuja complicagao e multiplicidade abrangiam todo o circuito 
das questoes internacionaes. 

Seria acaso razoavel exigir que fosse mais consideravel o seu activo, que 
ella houvesse descoberto o meio de compellir as potencias a recuarem na emulagao 
dos armamentos, militares, e definitivamente substituido a guerra pelo arbitra- 
mento? Ninguem de boa consciencia o dira. No julgar o valor de um remedio 
humano, temos de attender, nao so aos beneficios visiveis que opera, mas aos 
males possiveis, que evita. A primeira conferencia de paz nao impediu que a 
propria Russia, cuja iniciativa a convocara, se visse arrastada, em 1904 e 1905, a 
uma desastrosa lucta com o Japao. A segunda nao evitou a guerra da Italia com 
a Turquia, nem a da Turquia com a Grecia e os Estados Balkanicos. Mas, lado a 
lado com esse passivo, cujo desconto e sempre de esperar em todos os progressos 
da humanidade, seria necessario inscrevermos, para ser justos, o credito amplo, 
que lhe corresponde, em difnculdades oppostas as emergencias de guerra por essas 
relagoes de solidariedade moral e material, para cujo desenvolvimento as duas 



APENDICE II 79 

assembleas de 1899 e 1907 contribuiram mais que nenhuma outra influencia 
ate hoje registada na historia das nagoes. 

A este respeito, dizia o presidente da segunda conferencia da paz, encerrando- 
lhe os trabalhos, "esta conferencia realisou o maior progresso, que ate hoje viu o 
genero humano." O mesmo testemunho dava, pouco depois, com uma autori- 
dade que raras outras rivalisam, o Sr. Elihu Root, escrevendo : "A obra da segunda 
conferencia de Haya representa o maior avango, que nunca se consummou, de 
uma so vez, para a composicao razoavel e pacifica dos conflictos internacionaes, 
se do cote jo exceptuarmos o que se obtivera com a conferencia de 1899. A 
vantagem alcangada com as duas autorisa a convicgao de que o mundo enveredou 
por uma sequencia regular, atravez de cujo caminho, passo a passo, mediante 
successivas conferencias, cada uma das quaes tome como seu ponto de partida 
o em que rematou a obra da sua antecessora, progridamos continuamente no 
harmonizar as suas normas de paz com a pratica das nagoes civilisadas." 

Nao se atina como pudesse caber ainda nas imaginagoes mais exaltadas 
devaneio de que a Segunda Conferencia da Paz vingasse terminar as suas delibera- 
goes, promulgando o desarmamento geral e a extincgao da guerra. Foi, todavia, 
mais ou menos segundo esse criterio que aferiram as suas sentengas os menos 
presadores da benemerencia daquelle congresso de soberanias, esquecendo quao 
diverso e o de que ninguem se recusa a usar, quando se pronuncia sobre a utili- 
dade das assembleas legislativas. Em todos os paizes, anno apos anno, funccionam 
grandes corpos deliberantes, a que uma regra politica hoje universalisada com- 
mette a incumbencia de satisfazer, por meio de resolugoes imperativas, as 
necessidades publicas, e remediar os males geraes. Nao obstante, bem que essas 
autoridades collectivas tenham o exercicio das suas attribuigoes facilitado medi- 
ante o principio inconcusso, que termina as questoes pelo voto das maiorias, 
annualmente se renova a tarefa das legislaturas, sem que se deem jamais por 
curados os achaques sociaes, ou satisfeitas as exigencias do povo; e, comtudo, 
ninguem contesta a acgao legislativa a sua utilidade, ou a julga dispensavel no 
governo dos Estados. 

Com as assembleas constituintes succede, a tal respeito, o mesmo que com 
os parlamentos. Nenhuma descobriu ainda um systema, que resolvesse todos os 
problemas da ordem e da liberdade em cada nagao. So a intervallos de geragoes 
e geragoes, ou seculos e seculos, se consummam as grandes transformagoes na 
lei fundamental dos Estados. Segundo o livro de Ames, estampado em 1897, 
ate esse anno o numero de emendas alvitradas a constituigao dos Estados Unidos 
ja se elevava a mil setecentas e trinta e seis ; e, entretanto, so quinze emendas, 
ate hoje, soffreu aquella constituigao. No Brasil necessarios foram noventa e 
sete annos, para que se visse triumphar, em 1889, a republica, pela qual, ja em 
1792 conspiravam e perdiam a vida os inconfidentes de Minas. 

De modo que, ainda reduzida a vida interior dos Estados, a interferencia do 
legislador nao se opera senao tacteando, adiando, conciliando, incerta, frag- 
mentaria e lentissimamente. Como, pois, nos impacientarmos de que, em so oito 



80 LA VISITA DE) MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

annos, os que vao de 1899 a 1907, um conselho de nagoes independentes e 
soberanas immunes, pois, a regra parlamentar das maiorias, nao lograsse chegar 
a definitive) accordo sobre a maneira de acabar, na resolugao dos seus conflictos, 
com a lei da guerra, que, desde que os homens sao homens, e a lei das leis deste 
mundo ? 

No livro inestimavel do Sr. James Brown Scott, a que ja nos referimos, ha 
tres ou quatro paginas admiraveis, onde se mostra, com a clareza da evidencia, 
a semelhanca entre o processo organico de expansao observado no direito com- 
mum da Inglaterra e o que se verifica no direito commum das nacoes. Agora 
que, pela primeira vez, este se tenta codificar em normas escriptas, as tentativas 
de legislagao vao achar na consciencia dos povos grandes elementos juridicos, 
elaborados no processo de um longo desenvolvimento, com os quaes se pode 
contar, para langarmos as bases da futura justica internacional. Mas nem 
porque a esse termo nao se haja de chegar immediatamente, e ate elle tenhamos 
de andar ainda muito caminho, antes que a civilisagao acabe por se divorciar da 
guerra, nem por isso, o que para a limitagao desta ja se tern conseguido nestes 
quatorze annos, mediante as conferencias de Haya e os progressos do arbitra- 
ment©, deixa de ser um prodigio de rapidez e felicidade nos meios empregados 
e nas vantagens obtidas. 

Se, como disse, com o acerto do seu tino e a precisao da sua clareza, o Sr. 
Elihu Root, "o mais valioso resultado da conferencia de 1899 consiste em haver 
tornado possivel a obra da conferencia de 1907", similhantemente poderemos 
sustentar hoje que uma das mais estimaveis bencaos da conferencia de 1907 
esta em haver creado para o mundo contemporaneo, a necessidade, que se nao 
pode illudir mais, de utilisar o incentivo dos sentimentos de solidariedade 
internacional creados por esses dois actos, para, num terceiro impulso, honrar o 
testamento da ultima dessas duas assembleas, evocando-lhe a successora, cuja 
reuniao ella nos deixou recommendada. E, como a celeb racao da terceira con- 
ferencia demandaria, nos trabalhos preparatories, conforme as previsoes da 
segunda. uma antecipagao de dois annos, parece estar madura a occasiao, para 
que surja, acordando os descrentes ou esquecidos, a iniciativa dos competentes, 
abrindo a delicada phase dos estudos, que devem preceder o grande acontecimento. 

Ate onde me e dado julgar, esse appello nao encontraria entre nos senao 
applausos, e o mesmo lhe aconteceria, supponho eu, nos outros paizes de toda 
essa parte do nosso continente, a que o presidente Nelidow, recapitulando os 
trabalhos da conferencia, na sua allocuqao de encerramento, rendeu esta 
homenagem : "A associagao dos representantes da America Latina aos nossos 
trabalhos accrescentou, inquestionavelmente, elementos novos e de muita valia 
ao thesoiro da sciencia politica internacional, elementos cuja preqo, ate agora, 
nao conheciamos senao mui imperfeitamente." 

Ao governo dos Estados Unidos se deve, nao ha duvida nenhuma, sobre 
todos os outros, a convocacao da Segunda Conferencia da Paz. Foi o presi- 
dente Roosevelt, com o descortino do seu espirito e o seu genio de acgao, apoiados 



APENDICE II 81 

successivamente na intuicao liberal e na capacidade politica dos seus dois grandes 
secretarios de Estado, o Sr. John Hay, em 1904, e, especialmente, o Sr. Elihu Root, 
em 1905, o primeiro chefe de Estado, que acolheu sob o seu patrocinio essa idea, 
tornando-a, logo depois, exequivel com a intervengao dos seus bons officios, 
mediante os quaes, com o tratado de Portsmouth, se poz termo a guerra russo- 
japoneza. Nao foi senao por um rasgo de alto cavalheirismo, transparente no 
memorandum enderecado, em 12 de Outubro de 1905, pelo Sr. Elihu Root, ao 
embaixador russo, que o mediador laureado nesse triumpho humanitario cedeu 
ao chefe do imperio vencido na lucta, cujos desastres se acabavam de encerrar, 
essa iniciativa gloriosa. 

Hoje a f rente da administracao dos Estados Unidos se acha uma das enti- 
dades mais altamente representativas da cultura americana, da sua intelligencia, 
da sua democracia, do seu bem entendido liberalismo, da sua solidariedade com os 
interesses de todo o orbe civilisado. A opiniao brasileira ja se familiarisou com 
o nome do Sr. Woodrow Wilson, em quern, entre nos, os juristas e os homens 
de letras, ha muito, admiravam o historiador, o constitucionalista, o escriptor 
politico de raros dotes, cujos livros tanto nos tern illustrado. Nao precisamos de 
outras garantias, para acreditar que nas suas maos generosas e habeis reflorescera 
o precedente dessa tradigao, que tanto honra o collosso da America do Norte. 

Nao sei bem, senhores, se me estarei adeantando por um terreno vedado. 
Mas, como as minhas palavras sao destituidas tao absolutamente de qualquer 
missao ou expressao official quanto as do nosso eminente hospede, o Sr. Robert 
Bacon, animo-me a dizer o que sinto, com a franqueza que me e habitual, como 
simples cidadao brasileiro, membro da especie humana e amigo da philosophia, 
cujo gosto a vida politica ainda nao me fez perder. 

Nao e por livre alvedrio meu que me deixei errar tao longamente por essas 
paragens seductoras. Meu intento, quando acceitei o encargo de vos falar aqui 
hoje, era apenas render ao illustre emissario da civilisaQao americana o preito 
da nossa cortezia e amizade, abrindo-lhe com algumas palavras o ensejo de occupar 
elle so esta sessao. Mas um mandado, a que me nao podia furtar, obrigou-me 
a quebrar esse proposito de abstengao e brevidade. As reminiscencias de Haya, 
porem, me desviaram do rumo, que a principio cogitava de tracar ao meu dis- 
curso, distribuindo-o entre os differentes aspectos da embaixada moral, cuja boa 
nova nos vem trazer o Sr. Robert Bacon. De hontem quasi a noite ate esta 
manhan nao podia eu senao deixar correr a penna ao sabor da sua liberdade. 

Assim nao me sobrou largueza, para vos dizer o que vos devia sobre essa 
grande instituicao, de tao generosa universalidade, cujo programma, organisacao 
e trabalhos nos descreveu de um modo tao vivo, no discurso de outro dia, o 
illustre representante da Fundacao Carnegie. 

Graqas a essa creacjlo do eximio philanthropo, que votou a sua abengoada 
fortuna ao bem dos seus semelhantes, ja nao havera, entre as conferencias da 
paz, o vasio dessas intercadencias desoccupadas, em que se correria o risco de 
amortecer a chamma do fogo sagrado. Agora o estimulo e a direccao irradiam 



82 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

de um foco permanente, preenchendo os intervallos mediantes entre os succes- 
sivos synodos universaes da paz, com o trabalho continuo dos operarios da 
justiga, organisados numa associacao de intelligencias e vontades, cujos bracos 
dentro em pouco enlacarao o mundo civilisado. 

Enviado ao Brasil pela Fundagao Carnegie, "da qual o Sr. EHhu Root e a 
cabeca e alma", o Sr. Robert Bacon pode estar certo de que "a mensagem de boa 
vontade", cujo mandato em hora de bons auspicios o conduziu ao seio da familia 
brasileira, nos caiu no coracao como orvalhada na semente das ideas a espera da 
humidade e calor do ambiente para germinarem. 

Nao sei ate onde me sera licito, sem presumpgao, falar como o orgao dos 
meus conterraneos, dos que temos todos uma so patria, e nos embebemos desde 
o bergo nos mesmos ares. Mas, se ainda nao perdi, sem sentir, o contacto com 
a consciencia dos meus concidadaos, vos posso assegurar que estamos comvosco 
na communhao da paz internacional, e nos sentiremos venturosos, havendo 
occasiao de collaborarmos comvosco, na fila dos ultimos obreiros, pela causa a 
que vos consagrastes. 

Comegastes outro dia o vosso discurso, cheio de tantas bellezas espontaneas, 
falando-nos, com uma eloquencia rescendente a poesia, nas maravilhas do quadro, 
com que, ao aportardes aqui, vos enfeitigou a visao desta cidade, velando 
estrellada numa noite de azul, e abrindo o seu sorriso pela madrugada a flor das 
aguas verdes. Acreditastes que della se desprendera, para os que lhe habitam 
entre os jardins e as collinas, entre os ceus e as aguas, uma inspiragao continua, 
uma emanacao incessante de coragem e energia. 

Oxala que, neste Eden, possamos, pela condignidade e harmonia entre o 
homem e a natureza, evocar, acima da cidade terrestre, e vel-a espelhar-se nesta, 
a imagem da cidade ideal, a cidade do bem, a verdadeira cidade de Deus, aonde 
venham ter os sopros do Norte, carregados do pollen dessa liberdade, que, 
semeada, ha quasi trezentos annos, pelos exilados do Mayflower nas plagas da 
Nova Inglaterra, ainda nao cessou de medrar ali numa flora cada vez mais 
exuberante de instituigoes, homens, ideas, e saturados desse amor da justiga, 
que converte os Roots, os Bacons, os Scotts em apostolos e missionarios do 
evangelho da humanidade, mandando-os ensinar, dispersos, ao mundo, o verbo 
da paz. 



[Traduction del Portuguese 

Seiiores: 

No es la de presentaros a un ilustre huesped la mision que me cabe ahora. 
Al Sr. Bacon bastaran estos cuatro dias de permanencia entre nosotros para 
que todos ya le consideremos con algo de la impresion de una antigua amistad. 
En este digno sucesor del Sr. Root se reflejaba desde el principio, a nuestros 
ojos, la imagen, querida para los brasilefios, de su maestro y antecesor en la 
Secretaria de Estado bajo la administration del eminente americano, cuya politica 



APENDIC3 II 83 

se hizo sentir en beneficio de este continente y del otro. Cuantos se le acercaron, 
tuvieron en seguida la sensation del reconocimiento de un merito alimentado 
por su propia luz, una luz saludable, comunicativa e insinuante, que se difunde 
suave y tranquilamente en intimidad, persuasion y simpatia entre los que lo 
tratan. 

Desde la primera vez que lo oimos, antes de ayer, en la Embajada Ameri- 
cana, donde fuimos invitados por el Sr. Morgan, fino diplomatico cuyo encanto 
es irresistible, nos sorprendio el recien llegado con un discurso, cuyo exordio, 
pronunciado en nuestro idioma, le salio de los labios correcto y fluente, apenas 
con unas ligeras trazas de acento estranjero, como si, en su boca, la palabra 
estuviese hace tiempo familiarizada con nuestra lengua. Con este primor de 
gentileza nos demostraba el sin esfuerzo, por inspiration de su sinceridad, los 
milagros de que es capaz la cortesia y la benevolencia en la mente de un hi jo 
de esa raza de los Estados Unidos que en su tipo reune las virtudes, aptitudes 
y talento de todas las otras. 

No podian, ya se ve, haber acertado mejor los que lo eligieron para venir 
a traernos de parte de Mr. Root, de Mr. Brown Scott, y de todos los amigos 
de la paz en la America del Norte, ese mensaje que nuestro corazon y nuestra 
cultura reciben con alborozo. Por uno y otro se levanta en este momento mi 
voz, aunque sea la menos autorizada para responderle en este auditorio. Las 
circunstancias me confieren este privilegio, pues me incumbe, como Presidente 
de la Academia Brasilefia y miembro del Instituto de Abogados, la tarea de 
corresponded en nombre de los que en esta tierra leen y piensan, escriben y 
hablan, al llamamiento de esta visita. 

En la conferencia que vais a escuchar, nos va a definir nuestro generoso 
amigo las primicias de uno de los asuntos que mas interes despiertan entre nos- 
otros, ocupandose en parte de los trabajos de la Tercera Conferencia de la Paz. 
La asamblea de escogidos aqui reunida en este centro de education publica 
oira indudablemente con gran interes los resultados de los estudios y de la ex- 
periencia del orador en cuanto a los actos preparatorios de un acontecimiento, 
cuya realization nos enorgullecemos en considerar como uno de los mas notables 
hechos de nuestro tiempo. 

Nunca el sentimiento brasilefio se apasiono tanto por un caso international 
de caracter pacifico como por este congreso que hace seis afios reunio en La 
Haya, en la antigua Sala de los Caballeros, las delegaciones de todos los pueblos 
cultos de la tierra, deseosas de reducir el dominio de la guerra en la superficie 
del globo. No es que nosotros nos envanezcamos de nuestra modesta parte en 
el espectaculo de las luchas de una arena que tenia por anfiteatro el mundo 
entero; sino porque la importancia, hasta entonces sin igual, de la campana 
librada alii por el derecho con las armas de la razon, despertando en nuestra 
conciencia fibras no habituadas a vibrar, revelo, bajo esa influencia nueva, una 
unidad, de que todavia no se tenia idea, entre los instintos morales de nuestra 
nacionalidad, asi como tambien de toda la parte sana de la America Latina, y 



84 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

el ideal que congregaba en los lares de la vieja Holanda como en el corazon 
de la justicia a la sombra de sus tradiciones de independencia y libertad, el 
segundo concilio ecumenico de la paz. 

Permitidme usar este nombre religioso que me surge a los labios, sin pre- 
tension de atavios, como la expresion natural de la reverencia que nos inspira 
el asunto, casi sagrado y divino, de las aspiraciones que tuvieron la fuerza de 
reunir en un congreso, de todas las regiones del planeta, a los mas distantes y 
dispersos miembros de la familia humana. No era una iglesia, con titulos mas 
o menos justos de universalismo, que alii celebraba los estados generales de 
su catolicidad, sino mas bien el consorcio de todas las iglesias, de todas las con- 
fesiones, y de todos los credos, en un culto comun de esa forma suprema de 
caridad que se traduce en la reduction de los conflictos armados entre las nacio- 
nes. 

El espectaculo de aquellos reyes que descendieron de sus tronos para seguir 
el rastro de una estrella en busca de la cuna de Cristo, vino a repetirse, con 
proporciones de una grandeza que excede a la epopeya, en ese movimiento 
que unia a los jefes de los ejercitos y a los arbitros de la guerra alrededor de 
la idea de humanizar a los hombres por el amor de los unos a los otros, con 
que desde el Calvario el cielo nos sonreia un futuro, que hace veinte siglos es- 
peraba en las distancias incalculables del tiempo. El emblema cristiano que 
introdujo su apostolado en los campos de batalla como insignia de la cruz roja, 
abriendo, entre los fratricidios de la guerra, una zona de fraternidad, comenzo 
a dominar un horizonte en que hasta entonces solo habian pensado los sofiadores, 
el dia en que todas las divisiones de creencias y sectas cesaran para dejar unidas 
todas las razas en una comunion de trabajo universal para la fraternization 
de los pueblos. 

Cuando ese pensamiento tomo forma por primera vez en la Conferencia de 
1899, cuya magnificencia la de 1907 vino a duplicar, la politica brasilefia no se 
dio cuenta de un hecho de tal importancia. Aunque nuestro gobierno (creo no 
enganarme) fue el unico de Sur- America incluido en las invitaciones, de que 
la cancilleria de San Petersburgo tuvo la disposition, el Brasil no acudio a ese 
llamamiento que nos abria la oportunidad de una precedencia tan lisonjera. Mr. 
Andrew White alude, en su autobiografia, a la sorpresa causada en La Haya 
por la indiferencia de esa actitud nuestra, imputandose a la negligencia del nuevo 
regimen esa falta, que alii se creia no hubiera sido cometida por el gobierno 
imperial. 

No podiamos reincidir en el descuido en el 1907, porque, extendiendose la 
convocatoria a todos los gobiernos constituidos, no nos hubiera sido licito hacer 
con nuestra ausencia una exception especial en el concurso de los demas. Ade- 
mas, en aquel tiempo, nuestras relaciones exteriores estaban dirigidas por un 
espiritu vigilante sobre los intereses de nuestra reputation en el extranjero y 
el cual tenia un gran conocimiento de las importantes cuestiones internacionales. 
Mas lo que, en esa epoca de nuestra historia, aminora la falta cometida ocho 



APENDICE II 85 

afios antes, es el fervor con que la opinion publica entre nosotros, se desperto 
a los ecos de los debates de La Haya, con que se penetro del alcance de los 
mismos, con que animo a sus representantes en la mision tan llena de accidentes, 
tropiezos y recelos, que les fue encomendada. 

Ninguna nation siguio con mas asiduidad, con mas emotion, ni con mas 
entusiasmo, los incidentes de la conferencia, en cuyas sesiones fraternizaban 
todas las civilizaciones del oriente y del occidente. Ninguna se mostro mas sen- 
sible a la importancia de las controversias que alii se agitaban. Ninguna sim- 
patizo mas intensamente con el trabajo que alii se desenvolvia. Ninguna sintio 
de un modo mas vivo su solidariedad con la causa que en aquella gran asamblea 
se sometia a la prueba de una lucha entre las tradiciones mas divergentes, los 
temperamentos mas contrarios, y los intereses mas opuestos. 

No es por vanidad que recuerdo las conmociones de aquellos dias, cuando 
la llama de una nueva vida nos enardecia la sangre en las venas, sino al con- 
trario para acentuar la magica de esa corriente que, atravesando el Atlantico, 
vino, entre los pueblos de menos actividad y de menos energia civica, a vivificar 
el ambiente y a animar las multitudes aletargadas. Los escepticos suponen esas 
influencias morales condenadas a las abstracciones de la idealidad, olvidandose 
de que el fluido mas poderoso en el orden fisico del globo parece habitar en 
las nubes, mas cuando baja de esas alturas, cortando la atmosfera, no hay obs- 
taculo que le resista y sus descargas penetran, con llamas fulgurantes, hasta las 
entranas de la tierra. 

Ese habito de calcular los frutos de la verdad y de la justicia por los re- 
sultados que se puedan contar, pesar y medir, suscito, entre los comentadores 
ordinarios de la Conferencia de 1907, un coro de menosprecios, irrisiones y epi- 
gramas contra la obra, ingratamente juzgada. iPor que? Porque la Segunda 
Conferencia no hizo nada por el desarme. Porque sobre gran numero de sus 
desideranda tuvo que limitarse a confesiones de impotencia enunciadas en la 
forma de votos, indicaciones y consejos. 

Mas, por lo menos en parte, la Conferencia de 1907 realizo los deseos ex- 
presados por su predecesora. El proyecto de organization de la justicia arbitral 
no se convirtio en hecho; debido a que los Estados mas debiles no lograron 
entenderse con las grandes potencias en cuanto al metodo de nombramiento de 
los miembros de esa magistratura. «jSera tal acuerdo imposible en el porvenir? 
No lo creo. El tiempo no conoce dificultad cuyas moleculas no desgaste, cuyos 
nudos no desate, y cuyos enigmas no resuelva. Es una gran verdad la que 
animaba la pluma de mi noble amigo, el Sr. Brown Scott, cuando, en su precioso 
libro sobre las Conferencias de 1899 y 1907, escribia: "La independencia del 
Estado es el principio fundamental del Derecho internacional : pero la solidaridad 
de intereses se ha hecho sentir de manera tal que las naciones han cedido, y en 
el porvenir tendran que ceder, algo de su libertad e independencia absoluta, del 
mismo modo que el ciudadano cede su libertad absoluta en beneficio de la sociedad 
de que forma parte". 



86 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Sin embargo, una vez que se venza esta dificultad y se llegue a una formula 
cuya transaccion concilie los derechos de los unos con las pretensiones de los 
otros, todo el terreno esta allanado; porque, salvo lo tocante a ese requisito, la 
Conferencia dejo constituida y lista para funcionar la institucion concebida para 
jugar en la sociedad universal de las naciones un papel analogo al del unico 
Supremo Tribunal Federal en la union nacional de los Estados. 

Pero la Segunda Conferencia no llego solamente a ese resultado. Se frus- 
traron sus esfuerzos por llevar a cabo un tratado universal de arbitraje. Sin 
embargo, todas las naciones firmaron alii el mas solemne de los actos, declaran- 
dose unanimes en reconocer el principio de arbitraje como obligation, en aceptar 
que ciertas diferencias, y especialmente las relativas a la interpretation y apli- 
cacion de las convenciones internacionales, son susceptibles a la regla de arbitraje 
obligatorio sin restriction alguna. Ahora no hay nadie que no este convencido 
de que en la Conferencia de 1899 hubiera sido imposible obtener de las potencias 
reunidas en La Haya el asentimiento a la formula de esas dos declaraciones, en 
las cuales las soberanias renuncian en beneficio de la justicia un terreno inmenso. 

Ocho anos bastaron, por lo tanto, para avanzar esa distancia incalculable 
en el camino de la conciliation de los Estados por el derecho. Solo la forma 
diplomatica en que se envolvio esa conquista, es lo que no dejo sentir la revolution 
que esta significaba en las leyes del Derecho de gentes y en el modo de pensar 
de las mas poderosas nacionalidades. 

Los criticos que al cerrarse el grandioso congreso, se divirtieron en emplear 
la causticidad de su desden contra la insignificancia de los actos del mismo, tu- 
vieron el capricho de calcular cuanto la Segunda Conferencia costo a los dife- 
rentes gobiernos y a la prensa, en dinero de contado ; y el calculo, mas o menos 
arbitrario, que hicieron, estimo el gasto total en cuatro mil quinientos a nueve 
mil contos, lo que, en la opinion de esos jueces, para tan poco provecho, estaba 
lejos de valer la pena. Mas un diplomatico americano de notable reputation, 
que yo conoci en La Haya prestando relevantes servicios en la legation china 
de que era miembro, Mr. John Foster, en sus Memorias, dadas a luz hace tres 
afios, echo aba jo esa futileza, contestando que, aun admitiendo como mas o menos 
exacta esa valoracion, la cantidad era apenas un tercio de lo que importa un mo- 
demo acorazado. 

Entretanto cualquiera potencia, de las mas limitadas en su hacienda, se 
entrega actualmente, sin titubeo, al lujo de triplicar o sextuplicar ese desembolso, 
para tener como medida preventiva, aunque no este-'corriendo riesgos probables 
de guerra, una o dos de esas maquinas, cuyo poder se halla hoy tan amenazado 
por la multiplication de los enemigos submarinos y aereos, que la ciencia crea 
para el exterminio de escuadras y ejercitos en masa. 

Vease ahora lo que realmente nos dejo en resultados practicos y beneficios 
evidentes la ultima colaboracion de las naciones en La Haya: la convention de 
18 de octubre sobre el arreglo pacifico de los conflictos internacionales ; el nuevo 
reglamento establecido para las comisiones de investigation; la institucion de 



APENDICE II 87 

un tribunal international de presas; la adoption de nuevas leyes sobre las cos- 
tumbres de la guerra maritima y terrestre; la protection del comercio neutral 
contra la guerra; el establecimiento de una corte permanente de arbitraje. Todo 
eso en apenas cuatro meses de trabajos, cuya complication y multiplicidad abar- 
caban todo el circuito de las cuestiones internacionales. 

iSem acaso razonable exigir que fuese mas considerable su actividad, que 
descubriera ella el medio de obligar a las potencias a cesar en la competencia 
de aumentar sus aprestos militares, dejando definitivamente sustituida la guerra 
por el arbitraje? Nadie que hable de buena fe lo dira. Al juzgar el valor de 
un remedio humano, tenemos que considerar, no solo los beneficios visibles que 
opera, sino los males posibles que evita. La Primera Conferencia de la Paz no 
impidio que la propia Rusia cuya iniciativa la convoco, se viese arrastrada, en 
1904 y 1905, a una desastrosa lucha con el Japon. La Segunda, no evito la gue- 
rra de Italia con Turquia, ni la de Turquia con Grecia y los Estados balkanes. 
Mas al lado de ese pasivo, cuyo descuento siempre es de esperarse en todos los 
progresos de la humanidad, debemos inscribir, para ser justos, el credito amplio 
que le corresponde en dificultades libradas de las emergencias de la guerra por 
esas relaciones de solidaridad moral y material, para cuyo desarrollo las dos 
asambleas de 1899 y 1907 contribuyeron mas que ninguna otra influencia re- 
gistrada hasta hoy en la historia de las naciones. 

Sobre esto dijo el presidente de la Segunda Conferencia, al terminarse los 
trabajos, "esta Conferencia realizo el mayor progreso que hasta hoy ha visto 
el genero humano". El mismo testimonio daba poco despues, con una autoridad 
en que raros le rivalizan. el Sr. Elihu Root, al escribir : "La obra de la Segunda 
Conferencia de La Haya representa el mayor avance que jamas se ha hecho 
de una sola vez, para la reglamentacion razonable y pacifica de la conducta in- 
ternational, a no ser que sea el avance obtenido en la Conferencia de La Haya 
de 1899. Los resultados alcanzados en las dos Conferencias justifican la creencia 
de que el mundo ha entrado en un proceso ordenado, por medio del cual, paso 
a paso, en sucesivas conferencias, de las que cada una utilice el trabajo de su 
predecesora como punto de partida, pueda haber un continuo progreso hacia 
lograr que la practica de las naciones civilizadas se con forme con sus manifes- 
taciones pacificas". 

No se comprende como podia caber aun en las imaginaciones mas exaltadas 
la ilusion de que la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz debia terminar sus delibera- 
ciones promulgando el desarme general y la extincion de la guerra. Fue mas o 
menos segun ese criterio que hicieron sus juicios los menospreciadores del valor 
de aquel congreso de soberanias, olvidando cuan diferente es la opinion publica 
cuando se trata de la utilidad de las asambleas legislativas. En todos los paises, 
ano tras afio, funcionan grandes cuerpos deliberantes, a los cuales una regla 
politica que hoy es universal confia el deber de satisfacer, por medio de resolu- 
ciones imperativas las necesidades publicas y de remediar los males generales. 
No obstante, aunque esas autoridades colectivas tengan el ejercicio de sus atri- 



88 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

buciones facilitado por el principio bien sentado de terminar las cuestiones me- 
diante el voto de las mayorias, anualmente se renueva la tarea de las legislaturas, 
sin que jamas se den por curados los males sociales o satisfechas las exigencias 
del pueblo ; y, sin embargo, nadie pone en duda la utilidad de la -accion legislativa 
o la juzga innecesaria en el gobierno de los Estados. 

Con las asambleas constituyentes sucede lo mismo que con los parlamentos. 
Todavia nadie ha descubierto un sistema que resuelva todos los problemas del 
orden y de la libertad en cada nation. Solo a intervalos de generaciones y 
generaciones, o de siglos y siglos, se llevan a cabo las grandes transformaciones 
en la ley fundamental de los Estados. Segun el libro de Ames, publicado en 
1897, hasta aquel afio el numero de enmiendas propuestas a la constitucion de 
los Estados Unidos ya se elevaba a mil setecientas treinta y seis ; y, sin embargo, 
hasta hoy solo quince enmiendas se han hecho en dicha constitucion. En el 
Brasil fueron necesarios noventa y siete afios para que se viese triunfar, en 1889, 
le republica, por la cual ya en 1792 conspiraban y perdian la vida los desafectos 
de Minas. 

De modo que, aun con referenda a la vida interior de los Estados, la accion 
del legislador no se efectua sino probando, posponiendo, conciliando, dudosa, 
partial y lentisimamente. iComo, pues, impacientarnos de que, en solo ocho 
aiios, de 1899 a I 9°7> un consejo de naciones independientes y soberanas, inmu- 
nes, por lo tanto, a la regla de las mayorias, no haya logrado llegar a un acuerdo 
definitivo sobre la manera de acabar, en la resolution de sus conflictos, con la 
ley de la guerra, la cual, desde que los hombres son hombres, es la ley de las 
leyes en este mundo ? 

En el valiosisimo libro del Sr. James Brown Scott, a que ya nos referimos, 
hay tres o cuatro paginas admirables, donde se demuestra con la claridad de la 
evidencia, la semejanza entre el proceso organico de expansion observado en el 
derecho comun de Inglaterra y el que se verifica en el derecho comun de las 
naciones. Ahora que, por primera vez, se trata de codificar este derecho, las 
tentativas de legislation hallaran en la conciencia de los pueblos, grandes prin- 
cipios juridicos, elaborados durante un largo desarrollo, con los cuales se puede 
contar para que sirvan de base a la futura justicia internacional. Pero aunque 
no se ha de llegar a ese fin inmediatamente, y todavia tengamos que caminar 
hacia el mucha distancia antes de que la civilization llegue a divorciarse de la 
guerra, a pesar de todo, lo que ya se ha conseguido para la limitation de la guerra, 
en los ultimos catorce afios, mediante las Conferencias de L,a Haya y los progre- 
sos del arbitraje, no deja de ser un prodigio de rapidez y de exito en los medios 
empleados y en las ventajas obtenidas. 

Si, como dijo, con su palabra atinada y su claro juicio el Sr. Root, "el re- 
sultado mas valioso de la Conferencia de 1899 consiste en haber hecho posible 
la obra de la Conferencia de 1907", del mismo modo podemos sostener hoy que 
uno de los beneficios mas estimables de la Conferencia de 1907 consiste en haber 
creado para el mundo contemporaneo la necesidad, a la cual es imposible sus- 



APENDICE II 89 

traerse, de utilizar el incentivo de los sentimientos de solidaridad internacional 
creados por esos dos actos, para honrar, con un nuevo impulso, el testamento 
de la ultima de esas dos asambleas, convocando una tercera conferencia cuya 
reunion ella recomendo. Y como la celebracion de la tercera conferencia re- 
quiere, segun los acuerdos de la segunda, que los trabajos preparatories empiezen 
con una anticipation de dos anos, parece llegada la ocasion, para que surja, des- 
pertando a los descreidos u olvidados, la iniciativa de los competentes, abriendo 
la delicada fase de los estudios que deben preceder al gran acontecimiento. 

Hasta donde me es dado juzgar, ese llamamiento no encontraria entre noso- 
tros sino aplausos, y lo mismo sucederia, supongo yo, en los otros paises de 
toda esa parte de nuestro continente a que el presidente Nelidow, recapitulando 
los trabajos de la Conferencia en su discurso de clausura, rindio este homenaje: 
"La asociacion de los representantes' de la America Latina a nuestros trabajos 
agrego, indudablemente, elementos nuevos y de gran valia al tesoro de la ciencia 
politica internacional, elementos cuyo valor hasta ahora, no conociamos sino muy 
imper f ectamente". 

Al Gobierno de los Estados Unidos se debe, no hay duda alguna, sobre 
todos los demas, la convocatoria de la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz. El Pre- 
sidente Roosevelt, con la claridad de su espiritu y su genio de action, apoyado 
sucesivamente en la intuition liberal y en la capacidad politica de sus dos grandes 
secretarios de Estado, del Sr. John Hay, en 1904, y especialmente del Sr. Elihu 
Root, en 1905, fue el primer jefe de estado que acojio bajo su patrocinio esa 
idea, de acuerdo con la cual presto luego sus buenos oficios que tuvieron por re- 
sultado la termination de la guerra ruso-japonesa, por medio del tratado de 
Portsmouth. No fue sino por un rasgo de alta caballerosidad, segun aparece 
claramente del memorandum dirigido en 12 de octubre de 1905 por el Sr. Elihu 
Root al embajador ruso, que el mediador laureado en ese triunfo humanitario 
cedio esa iniciativa gloriosa al jefe del imperio vencido en la lucha cuyos desas- 
tres acababan de terminarse. 

Hoy se halla al frente de la administration de los Estados Unidos una de 
las entidades mas altamente representativas de la cultura americana, de su in- 
teligencia, de su democracia, de su bien entendido liberalismo, de su solidaridad 
con los intereses de todo el mundo civilizado. La opinion brasilena ya esta fa- 
miliarisada con el nombre del Sr. Woodrow Wilson, en quien desde hace tiempo 
nuestros juristas y hombres de letras han admirado al historiador, al constitu- 
cionalista, al escritor politico de raras dotes, cuyos libros tanto nos han ilustrado. 
No necesitamos otras garantias para creer que en sus manos generosas y habiles 
reflorecera el precedente de esa tradition que tanto honra al coloso de la America 
del Norte. 

No se, seflores, si estoy internandome en un terreno vedado. Mas como 
mis palabras estan tan destituidas de cualquier caracter o expresion oficial como 
las de nuestro eminente huesped, el Sr. Robert Bacon, me atrevo a decir lo que 
siento, con la franqueza que me es habitual, como simple ciudadano brasileno, 



90 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SQR 

miembro de la especie humana y amigo de la filosofia, a la cual la vida politica 
aiin no me ha hecho perder el amor. 

No es por mi libre albedrio que me he dejado llevar tan lejos por esos 
parajes seductores. Mi intention, cuando acepte el encargo de hablaros aqui 
hoy, era apenas rendir al ilustre emisario de la civilization americana el ho- 
menaje de nuestra cordialidad y amistad, presentandole, con algunas palabras, la 
oportunidad de ocupar el solo esta sesion. Mas un mandato, al cual no pude 
sustraerme, me obligo a desistir de ese proposito de abstention y de brevedad. 
Las reminiscencias de la Haya, sin embargo, me desviaron del rumbo que al 
principio pensaba dar a mi discurso, distribuyendolo entre los diferentes aspectos 
de la embajada moral, que viene a traernos el Sr. Robert Bacon. Desde anoche 
hasta esta mafiana tuve que dejar correr la pluma libremente. 

Asi es que no me sobro tiempo para deciros lo que debia sobre esa gran 
institution, de tan generosa universalidad, cuyo programa, organization y tra- 
bajos nos describio de un modo tan vivo, en su discurso del otro dia, el ilustre 
representante de la Fundacion Carnegie. 

Gracias a esa creation del eximio filantropo, que dedico su gran fortuna al 
bien de sus semej antes, ya no habra, entre las Conferencias de la Paz, el vacio 
de esas intermitencias desocupadas, en que se correria el riesgo de apagar la 
llama del fuego sagrado. Ahora el estimulo y la direction irradian de un foco 
permanente, llenando lcs intervalos entre los sucesivos congresos de la paz, con 
el trabajo continuo de los operarios de la justicia, organizados en una asociacion 
de inteligencias y de voluntades, cuyos brazos dentro de poco enlazaran al mundo 
civilizado. 

Enviado al Brasil por la Fundacion Carnegie, "de la cual el Sr. Elihu Root 
es cabeza y alma", el Sr. Robert Bacon puede estar seguro de que "el mensaje 
de buena voluntad", cuyo cometido en buena hora le condujo al seno de la fa- 
milia brasilefia, nos cayo en el corazon como rocio en las simientes de las ideas, 
que esperan la humedad y el calor del ambiente para germinar. 

No se hasta donde me sera licito hablar sin presuncion como el organo de 
mis coterraneos, de los que tenemos una sola patria y respiramos desde la cuna 
los mismos aires. Mas si aun no he perdido, sin saberlo, el contacto con la opi- 
nion de mis conciudadanos, os puedo asegurar que estamos con vos en la comu- 
nion de la paz internacional, y nos sentiremos venturosos teniendo ocasion de 
colaborar con vos, en la fila de los ultimos trabaj adores, por la causa a que os 
habeis consagrado. 

Comenzasteis el otro dia vuestro discurso, lleno de tantas bellezas espon- 
taneas, hablandonos, con una elocuencia que trascendia a poesia, de las mara- 
villas del cuadro con que al llegar aqui os hechizo la vision de esta ciudad, 
velando estrellada en una noche de azul, y abriendo su sonrisa por la madrugada 
a la flor de las aguas verdes. Creeis que de ella se desprendera, para los que 
la habitan entre los jardines y las colinas, entre los cielos y las aguas, una ins- 
piration continua, una emanation incesante de valor y de energia. 



APENDICE II 91 

Ojala que, en este Eden, podamos, por la simpatia y harmonia entre el 
hombre y la naturaleza, evocar, sobre la ciudad terrestre, que se extienda en 
esta, la imagen de la ciudad ideal, la ciudad del bien, la verdadera ciudad de 
Dios, adonde lleguen los soplos del Norte, cargados del polen de esa libertad 
que, sembrada hace casi trescientos afios por los desterrados del Mayflower en 
las playas de Nueva Inglaterra, aun no ha cesado de desarrollarse alii como 
una flor cada vez mas exhuberante, de instituciones, hombres, ideas, saturados 
de ese amor a la justicia, que convierte a los Root, los Bacon, los Scott, en 
apostoles y misioneros del evangelio de la humanidad, mandandoles a ensefiar 
al mundo, dispersos, la palabra de la paz. 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Monseigneur, Excellences, Mesdames, Messieurs: 

Je ne puis vous dire combien je suis sensible au grand honneur qui m'est 
fait aujourd'hui par l'Academie Bresilienne et l'lnstitut de l'Ordre des Avocats. 
Je vous prie de croire que je suis profondement touche de cette nouvelle marque 
de courtoisie que vous m'avez montree en me conviant a assister a cette reunion 
sous les auspices de vos si celebres sommites intellectuelles. 

Je vous remercie du fond du coeur de vos trop aimables paroles adressees 
a mon humble personne et si peu meritees. Je voudrais bien pouvoir vous 
exprimer, Excellence, ma gratitude pour les sentiments d'amitie que vous venez 
d'exprimer au sujet de mon pays, et de mes amis. 

J'ai tache avant hier de vous montrer en quelques paroles un peu de l'esprit, 
de l'inspiration, de l'espoir avec lesquels Monsieur Root m'a donne la permis- 
sion de venir vous parler en son nom des oeuvres, des convictions, des esperances, 
qui pour lui sont, je vous assure, les plus cheres, les plus intimes. Une certaine 
hesitation, une crainte meme, de ne pas etre digne de sa confiance a donne 
lieu a une grande joie de reconnaissance pour la si douce sympathie, la gra- 
cieuse bienveillance de votre accueil et de la bonte de votre reponse qui m'ont 
touche si profondement, et qui me resteront tou jours comme les plus precieux 
souvenirs. Je n'oublierai jamais votre charmante hospitalite. 

Je regrette que je me trouve aujourd'hui oblige de me borner aux details 
sees et peu interessants a ce moment ou, sous le charme, sous l'inspiration de 
vos si nobles paroles je voudrais parler et encore parler de nos ideals, de nos 
esperances. Car je suis fier de partager votre optimisme, cher maitre, et j'ai 
l'intime conviction que, malgre des nuages accumules par la defiance et le scep- 
ticisme, nous sommes a la veille d'un grand mouvement de progres dans revo- 
lution du liberalisme du monde, et que de loin nous pouvons voir poindre l'aurore 
d'un jour plus pur. 

Les principes, la philosophic de la vie du siecle passe ne nous suffiront 
plus. II nous faudra de nouvelles lois de l'economie politique, de nouveaux 
principes du droit international. 



92 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

Les Messieurs a qui j'ai eu l'honneur de m'adresser, il y a deux jours, m'ont 
fait l'honneur de me demander de leur donner de plus amples details sur cer- 
tains pro jets de la Fondation. 

Pour remplir les objets de la Fondation, son travail a ete reparti en trois 
divisions : 

La Division des Rapports et d'Education. 

La Division d'Economie politique et d'Histoire. 

La Division de Droit International. 

En ce qui concerne la Division des Rapports et d'Education, il etait evident 
que les operations de cette Division s'appliqueraient necessairement aux pays 
etrangers et qu'il etait essentiel pour la reussite de la tache que celle-ci fut faite 
dans les pays etrangers par des agents locaux plutot que par des sections de 
la Fondation. Comme il fut impossible de fixer longtemps a l'avance ce qui 
devait etre entrepris et comment les methodes devraient etre appliquees, sans 
le conseil des chefs competents et experimented de l'idee dans les divers pays, 
Monsieur le Docteur Butler, le Directeur de la Division, a constitue un Comite 
Consultatif d'hommes d'etat et de publicistes europeens et un corps de correspond- 
ants sur l'avis et le concours sympathique desquels il peut tou jours se reposer. 

De ce grand Comite Consultatif, compose d'environ quarante membres, un 
petit comite executif a ete forme (tous les deux etant sous la presidence du 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant) et un Bureau europeen a ete etabli a Paris. 

Nous nous sommes demandes s'il serait agreable aux coryphees de la pensee 
dans l'Amerique latine de creer une organisation quelque peu similaire au Comite 
Consultatif General, qui est deja forme en Europe, et de cooperer a la realisa- 
tion et a l'execution par leurs partisans dans le pays des pro jets et entreprises 
qu'ils estiment opportuns ou utiles dans leurs divers pays. 

La Division a adopte la regie de n'entreprendre aucune operation dans un 
pays europeen quelconque sans consulter le Comite Consultatif et sans l'appro- 
bation des membres du Comite representant le pays respectif. 

Quelques mots suffiront pour les objets que la Division s'est propose. En 
premiere ligne, en vue d'eduquer l'opinion publique, la Division a pris des 
mesures pour augmenter le texte et pour developper la circulation d'une liste 
choisie de periodiques europeens, devoues aux idees de paix internationale, pour 
entretenir des sentiments amicaux entre les peuples et developper leurs relations 
et leur entente entre eux. 

La Division des Rapports et d'Education a inaugure des visites et un echange 
educateur avec le Japon et le Directeur de la Division espere faire des arrange- 
ments pour arriver a un echange educateur entre les Etats-Unis et l'Amerique 
latine; et cet echange comprenda aussi bien des professeurs que des etudiants. 
J'ai l'honneur d'inaugurer la premiere des series de visites internationales avec 
nos Republique's Soeurs et j 'espere etre a meme d'obtenir des conseils et des 
renseignements des maitres de la pensee dans l'Amerique du Sud qui nous per- 



APENDICE II 93 

mettront de commencer dans un prochain avenir 1'echange reciproque de pro- 
fesseurs et d'etudiants avec l'Amerique latine. 

Je suis charge de suggerer que 1'echange commence par l'envoi annuel de 
deux eminents savants ou publicistes de l'Amerique du Sud aux Etats-Unis; et 
de deux Americains du Nord, a l'Amerique du Sud. Chacun de ces messieurs 
consacrerait son temps a deux institutions etablies dans le continent qu'il visit- 
erait. Je desirerais beaucoup connaitre votre opinion au sujet du choix des pro- 
fesseurs et aussi du choix des institutions auxquelles ils devront s'adresser. 

La Fondation se chargera des depenses causees par 1'echange de visites des 
professeurs. 

II est inutile d'insister sur la sagesse et l'opportunite de ces projets, car c'est 
une verite que bien des malentendus qui existent entre les nations sont le resultat 
de l'ignorance des conditions locales, des traditions et des idees. Les relations 
personnelles prouvent qu'au fond tous les hommes sont absolument les memes et 
que le contact personnel, la discussion et 1'echange d'idees posent les bases indis- 
pensables pour l'amitie et la bonne entente. 

Une des activites auxquelles la Division des Rapports et d'Education attache 
une grande importance est celle qui se refere a l'etablissement d'associations pour 
la Conciliation dans le monde entier. 

L'experience a demontre que bien du monde veritablement interesse a favor- 
iser une bonne entente avec les pays etrangers hesitent neamoins pour une foule 
de raisons, de s'allier a des societes pour la paix. Les Associations pour la Conci- 
liation Internationale font appel a cette categorie du public et c'est la tache de la 
Fondation Carnegie pour la Paix Internationale de soutenir ces associations par 
l'intermediaire de la Division des Rapports et d'Education, partout ou elles exis- 
tent et de contribuer, autant que cela paraitrait opportun, a leur creation la ou 
elles n'existeraient pas. 

II y a quelques annees 1' Association-Mere a ete constitute a Paris par Mon- 
sieur le Baron d'Estournelles de Constant. La section aux Etats-Unis, dont M. 
le Dr. Butler est le President, fut creee en 1906. Les Associations allemandes et 
anglaises ont ete organisees en 191 2 et je suis charge par mes instructions a 
faire appel au concours des parties interessees dans les pays que j'ai l'honneur de 
visiter d'organiser des Societes filiales de La Conciliation Internationale en rap- 
port avec la Societe-Mere a Paris. Ces Associations, bien que locales par leur 
origine, ont neanmoins une mission internationale et cherchent a creer par leurs 
reunions et les brochures utiles qu'elles publient regulierement, des sentiments 
amicaux envers les peuples des pays etrangers. 

Permettez-moi d'exposer les buts et objets des Societes pour la Conciliation 
Internationale dans la langue du fondateur de la Societe-Mere a Paris. Dans 
une note que Monsieur le Baron d'Estournelles de Constant a eu l'amabilite 
de preparer sur ce sujet, il dit: 

"La Conciliation n'est pas une organisation sentimentale, humanitaire; 

elle est un progres pratique, patriotique, poursuivi dans l'interet national de 



94 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

chaque pays, particulierement des pays jeunes qui ont besoin de consacrer 
toutes leurs forces et leurs ressources a leur developpement. Elle a pour but 
d'assurer au monde des affaires, du travail, a l'agriculteur, a l'industriel, au 
commer<;ant, comme a l'artiste et au savant, la securite du lendemain, la 
possibility de concevoir et d'entreprendre des oeuvres d'avenir. 

La Conciliation est le complement moderne indispensable del l'effort 
economique de tout pays civilise. Developper la prosperite nationale a la 
faveur des bonnes relations internationales, voila tout notre effort resume 
par notre motto : pro patria per orbis concordiam. 

Les guerres de conquete ne paient plus : elles n'engendrent que des 
haines, des represailles, les charges d'une paix armee chaque jour plus 
ecrasantes ; et ces charges sont devenues un des arguments les plus puissants, 
dans les masses, en faveur du socialisme et de la revolution. 

Seules les guerres d'independance sont respectables, mais nul ne menace 
l'independance des Etats americains. lis seront plus forts en s'entendant 
tous qu'en s'armant les uns contre les autres. 

L'arbitrage, au contraire, depuis les experiences de l'Alabama, de Hull, 
de Casablanca, des pecheries de Behring et de Terre Neuve, etc., etc., a fait 
ses preuves. 

Organisez l'arbitrage plutot que la guerre, mais preferez toujours la 
conciliation a l'arbitrage. 

Telle est notre conception, notre regie de vie. 

Je la resume ainsi : 

La guerre plutot que la servitude. 

L'arbitrage plutot que la guerre. 

La conciliation plutot que l'arbitrage. 

L'arbitrage repare, la conciliation previent. La conciliation substitue 
l'esprit de, cooperation feconde a la routine sterile des antagonismes. 

Comment organiser la conciliation? 

Peu a peu. Maternellement ; par le concours du petit nombre des 
hommes qui connaissent le monde et la vie, anciens diplomates, anciens 
Ministres, anciens industriels, savants, artistes, philanthropes, hommes de 
bonne volonte eprouves. 

Une elite de ces hommes exceptionnels existe plus ou moins nombreuse 
dans chaque pays : rechercher cette elite, lui expliquer le bienf ait, la necessite 
de la Conciliation et, cela fait, mettre en relations personnelles cette elite 
avec les elites des autres pays. Toutes ces elites rapprochees se chargeront 
de faire l'education des masses. 

Nos moyens d'action sont : 

i. Des visites, des relations et des correspondances personnelles 
d'homme a homme, de peuple a peuple, de parlement a parlement, de 
corporation a corporation. 

Ces moyens ont fait leurs preuves ; nous avons contribue a rapprocher 
ainsi des adversaires soi-disant irreconciliables. 

2. Des publications, des conferences. Nous publions des Bulletins, 
nous recommandons ou nous suggerons des ouvrages ; nous voyageons et 
nous echangeons nos experiences, nos idees ; nous les repandons sans compter, 
en depit des obstacles et des circonstances adverses. Nous faisons tout pour 
dissiper les preventions, les prejuges, l'ignorance, et pour y substituer peu 
a peu, (avec les memes avantages que dans le commerce) la confiance. le 
credit et finalement l'amitie internationale." 



APENDIC3 II 95 

Pour faire ressortir par une seule phrase la difference qu'il y a entre des 
Societes Pacifistes et des Societes de Conciliation, on peut dire que les societes 
pacifistes sont composees de "pacifistes," quelle que soit la signification qu'on 
puisse attacher a ce mot, tandis que les Societes de Conciliation Internationale 
sont composees de "pacifiques," ce qui est une formule beaucoup plus large et 
apparemment plus acceptable. 

Je serais vraiment tres heureux si j 'arrivals a convaincre quelques-uns de 
l'elite des divers pays que j'ai l'honneur de visiter, pour former des Societes Na- 
tionals de Conciliation Internationale, pour etre affiliees a la Societe-Mere. Toute- 
fois, il est bien entendu que ce rapport est moral, non legal et chaque Societe est 
independante. Et je suis heureux de vous informer que dans ces cas, comme dans 
d'autres, la Fondation est disposee a se charger des depenses encourues par 
l'organisation de ces Societes et a fournir les ressources necessaires pour s'as- 
surer les services de Secretaires capables, de l'energie, du devouement, de la 
perseverance et de l'intelligence desquels depend l'utilite de ces Societes. 

Je m'occuperai maintenant du travail de la seconde Division, la Division 
d'Economie Politique et d'Histoire. 

La tache de cette Division est la suivante: "Encourager des recherches et 
des etudes scientifiques et approfondies sur les causes de la guerre et sur les 
moyens pratiques de la prevenir et de l'eviter" — c'est a dire, l'etude non seule- 
ment des causes apparentes, qui quelquefois ne sont que des pretextes au service 
de chefs et d'hommes d'etat ambitieux et sans scrupules, mais aussi l'etude des 
causes reelles, souvent cachees, et que Ton trouve dans l'antagonisme des races 
et dans les interets d'ordre economique. En outre, il faut aussi etudier les 
causes et les resultats economiques, non seulement en ce qui concerne les nations 
en guerre, mais encore en ce qui a rapport aux nations et aux peuples neutres. 

Les Trustees de la Fondation le considerent comme presque impossible de 
formuler eux-memes des plans de nature a pouvoir proceder a. une enquete 
scientifique. Une conference fut arrangee a Berne, en Suisse, en aout, 191 1, 
a laquelle des economistes et publicistes distingues de toute l'Europe furent 
invites a examiner les questions qui pourraient etre dument et pratiquement 
etudiees et d'elaborer un programme d'essai pour la Division. 

Dix-huit economistes et publicistes assisterent a la Conference et leur con- 
cours et leur avis furent considered si precieux, en effet, si indispensables pour le 
succes de la Division, qu'ils se sont constitues en un Comite Permanent de 
Recherches pour conseiller le Directeur et pour agir comme les agents de la 
Division en executant les pro jets proposes par la Conference et incorpores dans 
le programme elabore pour la discussion des questions concernant les causes et 
les effets economiques et historiques des guerres; les armements en temps de 
paix; les etablissements militaires et navals, la theorie, la pratique et l'histoire 
des armements modernes et finalement l'influence unificatrice de la vie interna- 
tionale. 



96 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Un grand nombre de sujets ont deja ete assignes a des specialistes choisis 
dans les pays auxquels leur tache s'applique; quelques-unes des etudes sont deja 
terminees et dans l'espace de quelques annees, la Fondation aura publie une serie 
de brochures remarquables, s'appliquant a toutes les phases du programme elabore, 
et qui seront, il y a lieu de l'esperer — pour parler le langage de Monsieur Root — 
"useful to mankind." 

Monsieur le Professeur Kinley, un vieux et sincere ami de l'Amerique latine 
et qui a represents les Etats-Unis au quatrieme congres pan-americain tenu a 
Buenos Ayres, a ete nomme membre du Comite de Recherches et il se consacrera 
plus specialement aux problemes dans lesquels l'Amerique latine est interessee et 
il visitera certainement dans le courant de l'annee prochaine l'Amerique latine 
pour conferer avec les leaders de l'opinion, en vue d'obtenir leur avis et si possible 
de s'assurer leur concours tant pour proposer que pour executer les pro jets qu'ils 
pourraient recommander. 

La troisieme Division de la Fondation est la Division de Droit International. 

Cette Division, de meme que les autres Divisions, a trouve necessaire de creer 
une organisation speciale et de s'assurer les services d'un corps d'avocats-conseils 
dans les conclusions juridiques et exactes desquels les Directeurs peuvent avoir 
toute confiance. 

L'lnstitut de Droit International se compose — il est a peine besoin de le dire — 
des plus eminents jurisconsultes de toutes les nations et la Fondation a demande a 
l'lnstitut d'agir, soit comme corps, soit par l'intermediaire d'un comite speciale- 
ment choisi dans ce but, comme conseiller pour la Division de Droit International. 
L'lnstitut a accepte cette charge, a choisi un comite de onze membres a sa reunion 
a Christiana, en 1912, lesquels ont exerce leurs fonctions pendant la presente 
annee comme conseillers pour le Directeur et le Comite, specialement connu 
comme Comite Consultatif pour la Fondation Carnegie, a elabore un Reglement, 
qui a ete accepte par l'lnstitut, au moyen duquel les rapports etablis entre l'lnstitut 
d'une part, par son Comite Consultatif et la Fondation d'autre part, par l'inter- 
mediaire de sa Division de Droit International, doivent etre permanents. 

Le Comite se compose de onze membres, dont le President et le Secretaire 
General de l'lnstitut font partie d'office; les autres membres sont elus pour 
occuper cette fonction pendant un nombre d'annees determine. II y a lieu de 
mentionner que les membres de ce Comite sont des hommes d'une grande expe- 
rience et d'une haute autorite dans toutes les questions en matiere de droit 
international : Messieurs Fusinato, d'ltalie ; Gram et Hagerup, de Norvege ; Holl- 
and, d'Angleterre ; Lammasch, d'Autriche ; Lardy, de Suisse ; Renault, de France ; 
Rolin, de Belgique et Vesnitch, de Serbie. L'importance de ce comite de juris- 
consultes et la valeur des consultations qu'ils peuvent rendre, sont inappreciables. 

En vue d'etablir une meilleure comprehension des droits et devoirs inter- 
nationaux, la Division donne une aide materielle aux journaux de Droit Inter- 
national, dans le but d'augmenter leur tirage et de developper leur influence 
parce que par ce moyen le droit international est popularise et que le public est 



APENDICE II 97 

eclaire par un exemple concret, comment les principes du droit international 
determinent les questions de droits internationaux. De la meme fa^on c'est 
l'intention de la Division, sur la recommandation du Comite Consultatif de 
l'lnstitut d'aider a la distribution d'importants ouvrages de droit international, 
et notamment de faire traduire dans des langues plus connues des ouvrages 
d'une tres grande importance et utilite, mais publies dans des langues moins lues 
ou moins comprises. 

Pour favoriser l'acceptation generate de methodes pacifiques pour le regle- 
ment de litiges internationaux la Division a en voie de preparation plusieurs 
ouvrages. Le premier est un recueil et une publication de tous les traites gener- 
aux et speciaux d'arbitrage et en ce qui concerne notamment les traites du 
dix-neuvieme siecle, la Fondation serait tres reconnaissant aux publicistes de 
l'Amerique latine s'ils voulaient bien fournir des informations sur certaines 
questions de cette nature qu'ils connaissent le mieux et qu'ils sont peut-etre les 
seuls a connaitre, et les Trustees de la Fondation apprecieraient comme une tres 
grande faveur de la part des Gouvernements de l'Amerique latine s'ils voulaient 
bien leur fournir des copies de ces traites, attendu qu'il est vraiment tres 
difficile de se procurer a toute epoque des textes absolument exacts et meritant 
toute confiance. 

Ce recueil permettra aux publicistes de voir jusqu'a quel point des nations 
ont ete disposees a se soumettre a l'arbitrage et les differentes formes de traites 
existants seront mis a leur disposition. Pour la meme raison tous les exemples 
connus d'arbitrages internationaux devront etre rassembles et publies sous forme 
de rapports juridiques et les series seront continuees indefiniment. C'est Mon- 
sieur le Professeur John Bassett Moore, cette haute autorite bien connue dans 
les questions de Droit International et d' Arbitrage, ancien Professeur a 
l'Universite de Columbia et actuellement conseiller au Department d'Etat des 
Etats-Unis, qui s'est charge de cette oeuvre monumentale et il s'en occupe 
activement. 

L'lnstitut de Droit International, qui joue maintenant le role de conseiller 
de la Division de Droit International est celui qui a ete cree en Europe en 1873 ; 
mais bien que cet Institut represente la "conscience juridique universelle," 
plusieurs jurisconsultes ont senti le besoin d'une institution qui devrait etre le 
representant de la conscience juridique de l'Amerique, etudier les problemes 
interessant particulierement le nouveau monde, et envisager au point de vue 
americain les questions generates du droit des gens. 

Comme vous savez si bien, un Institut Americain de Droit International a 
ete fonde en 1912 par Monsieur Alejandro Alvarez de Chili et Monsieur le 
Docteur James Brown Scott, le Directeur de la Division de Droit International 
de la Fondation. Cet Institut envisage la formation de Societes Nationales 
de Droit International dans chaque pays americain, pour etre affiliees avec lui et 
pour travailler en harmonie avec lui, pour etudier des problemes americains. 



98 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

L'Institut Americain de Droit International sera compose de cinq publicistes 
de chacune des Republiques americaines choisis parmi les membres des Societes 
Nationales et tout membre de la Societe Nationale, en vertu de cette qualite de 
membre, a le droit de se faire inscrire comme Membre Associe de l'lnstitut, et de 
participer a ses travaux en versant la modeste cotisation imposee a chaque 
membre de l'lnstitut. On espere et on estime que de cette facon la Societe 
Internationale sera maintenue en contact serre et intime avec les Societes Nationa- 
les, que le Journal Americain de Droit International sera modifie de fagon a 
devenir l'organe de l'lnstitut et des publicistes de l'Amerique, et que les Bulletins 
qu'il est question que chacune des societes locales emettra, tiendront l'lnstitut 
meme au courant des operations des Societes Nationales et que par la distribution 
des Bulletins entre les diverses societes, chacune se tiendra en contact avec les 
autres. 

II est superflu d'insister sur l'importance de l'lnstitut Americain et des 
Societes Nationales, parce que pour tous ceux qui croient que la paix internationale 
est seulement possible par le droit international et son application aux relations 
avec les nations etrangeres, il est evident que des agences creees pour developper 
et rendre ce systeme de droit adequat pour repondre aux besoins des nations et 
pour disseminer ses principes de telle fagon qu'une opinion publique eclairee puisse 
se former qui insistera sur l'application de ces principes aux relations entre les 
nations et au reglement de leurs conflits, rendront de grands et inestimables ser- 
vices, parce que l'avenir de la paix internationale sera enveloppe de droit interna- 
tional, de son developpement, de sa dissemination. 

En supposant que l'lnstitut Americain soit entierement etabli et qu'il justifie 
son existence et que les Societes Nationales de Droit International soient creees et 
y affiliees, nous ne pouvons faire autrement que nous demander, si l'lnstitut 
Americain ne serait pas dispose a entrer dans les memes rapports consultatifs 
avec la Fondation et sa Division de Droit International pour toutes les affaires 
concernant des questions et problemes americains, qui existent si heureusement 
avec l'ancien Institut. 

De crainte d'avoir l'air de vous exposer dans un langage exagere les buts et 
objets de l'lnstitut Americain de Droit International, dont Monsieur Elihu Root 
est le President d'Honneur, qu'il me soit permis de vous citer un passage d'un 
erudit hollandais, Professeur de Droit International, qu'on peut supposer traiter 
cette question avec plus de detachement. 

Apres avoir parle du grand exemple que l'Amerique a donne au monde en 
poursuivant la codification du droit international, il dit : 

"Le second exemple nous est fourni par un Institut essentiellement scien- 
tifique mais a peine inferieur en valeur morale. Les rapprochements graduels 
entre le Nord et el Sud ont cree un nouvel instrument de progres. Les pro jets 
d'une union pan-americaine, qui ont et longtemps lances sans jamais aboutir, ont 
enfin donne un- resultat sur le terrain paisible des etudes, grace au talent et a la 
perseverance de deux homines illustres des deux moities de l'hemisphere. Dans 



APENDICE II 99 

le cours de Tannee passee Monsieur James Brown Scott, le jurisconsulte renomme 
des Etats-Unis et Monsieur Alejandro Alvarez, ancien professeur et Conseiller 
au Ministere des Affaires Etrangeres du Chili, qui en Juin 1912 avait exerce une 
influence des plus salutaires a Rio sur le grand projet de codification, apres une 
rencontre personnelle a Washington, y ont fonde en Octobre 1912, l'lnstitut 
Americain de Droit International. Cet Institut a pour but: I. De contribuer au 
developpement du droit international; 2. De consolider le sentiment commun 
d'une justice internationale ; 3. De faire accepter partout Taction pacifique dans le 
reglement des contestations internationales entre les Etats americains. 

"Cette idee lumineuse naquit de la conviction qu'il vaut mieux propager les 
notions de droit et de justice par une infusion lente mais constante dans les 
tetes et dans les cceurs des peuples, que par des negociations diplomatiques, qui ne 
reposent pas sur un sentiment populaire general. 

"Si Ton prend en consideration que le mouvement pacifiste en Amerique est 
beaucoup plus universel qu'ailleurs, qu'il repose soit sur un fond religieux, soit 
sur une communaute d'interets et de tendances dignes d'envie, on saura 
apprecier cette preuve nouvelle d'un progres vigoureux qui nous est parvenue 
de l'autre cote de l'Ocean ; il ranime notre espoir et redouble nos efforts." 

Monsieur Root et ses collegues attachent la plus haute importance a l'eta- 
blissement et au fonctionnement heureux de l'lnstitut Americain de Droit Inter- 
national et de ses societes affiliees dans chacun des pays de l'Amerique. 

L,a Fondation paye actuellement une subvention au plus ancien Institut, 
fonde en Europe. Cette subvention est destinee a couvrir les frais de voyage 
des membres de l'lnstitut, les depenses faites par les commissions et la publi- 
cation de leurs travaux. Le nouvel Institut peut compter recevoir de la Fon- 
dation, aussitot que les societes nationales seront definitivement constitutes, son 
aide financiere, et qu'il sera mis sur un pied d'egalite avec l'ancien Institut. 

Le Journal Americain de Droit International, qui avec quelques legeres 
modifications pourrait devenir l'organe de l'lnstitut Americain, regoit deja une 
subvention annuelle de la Fondation. 

Une autre institution a laquelle la Division de Droit International s'inter- 
esse beaucoup et qu'elle subventionnerait et maintiendrait avec grand plaisir 
est TAcademie de Droit International que Ton propose d'etablir a la Haye. 

Une proposition a ete faite a la Seconde Conference de la Paix a la Haye 
en vue de creer une Academie de Droit International et elle a ete developpee 
par le President de la Conference. Aucune resolution n'a ete prise alors, mais 
Tidee s'est imposee elle-meme aux publicistes de toutes les nationalites. Un 
Comite de publicistes hollandais, sous la presidence de Monsieur Asser, dont 
nous deplorons tous le recent deces, a pris Tinitiative qu'une Academie soit 
creee et installee au Palais de la Paix a la Haye. 

Le Tribunal d' Arbitrage appliquerait le droit, qui aura ete systematiquement 
enseigne a TAcademie et le merveilleux Palais, qui vient d'etre officiellement 



100 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

inaugure au mois d'aout dernier, deviendrait en effet, un Temple de la Paix, un 
foyer du Droit International. 

La proposition de Monsieur Asser envisage pour les mois d'ete un enseigne- 
ment systematique de droit international et des matieres afferentes par une 
faculte specialement constituee et changeante, au point de vue des professeurs 
choisis parmi les publicistes de differents pays. Des cours seraient donnes et 
des conferences seraient faites sur des sujets importants et opportuns par des 
publicistes qui en plus d'un long entrainement theorique ont acquis une grande 
experience dans la pratique du droit international. Des seminars seraient crees 
sous la direction de professeurs reguliers pour l'etude detaillee et approfondie 
de certaines questions de droit international et de rapports internationaux. Les 
cours seraient accessibles aux etudiants de tous les pays qui possederaient les 
qualifications necessaires et qui seraient en mesure d'y assister et de profiter de 
l'enseignement, attendu qu'il sera donne pendant les vacances academiques. 

II est egalement propose que les Gouvernements s'interessent a l'Academie 
et qu'ils soient invites a designer par voie diplomatique des fonctionnaires 
appropries des divers departements ministeriels pour suivre les cours de 
l'Academie. 

L'institution serait unique par ses sessions d'ete, unique par sa petite faculte 
variable et unique par son corps d'etudiants accourus des divers pays etrangers, 
et des classes officielles. Les conferences publiees sous forme de brochures 
enrichiraient la litterature du droit international; le droit lui-meme serait traite 
de divers points de vue, et par des professeurs competents, dont un seulement 
serait choisi a la fois d'un pays. Le corps des etudiants serait recrute de divers 
pays et peu a peu ils exerceraient une influence dans leurs pays respectifs, de 
sorte que l'Academie aiderait eminemment a etablir une meilleure comprehension 
des droits et des devoirs internationaux et a disseminer les principes de justice. 

L'Academie, quand elle sera constituee, formera une institution distincte et 
inuipendante sous le controle d'un comite ou curatorium specialement nomme, 
compose en premiere ligne d'anciens Presidents de l'lnstitut de Droit Inter- 
national. Ainsi organisee et administree, elle favorisera le but pour lequel la 
Fondation a ete creee, mais elle ne sera pas une agence directe de la Fondation, 
ni sous son controle. 

II parait superflu d'exposer plus amplement les avantages d'une telle Academie 
qui, saluee par le President et les membres de la Conference, a ete approuvee 
par l'Association de Droit International, une corporation plus populaire que 
l'lnstitut de Droit International, par l'lnstitut de Droit International lui-meme, 
par un vote ecrasant, en effet, presque unanime, et qui a provoque les plus 
chaleureuses approbations de la part des hommes d'Etat, des publicistes et des 
professeurs de droit international dans tous les pays du monde. 

Monsieur Root m'a charge de vous soumettre le pro jet de cette Academie et 
de demander le concours de toutes les Republiques de l'Amerique latine, en vue 



APENDICE II 101 

de designer un ou plusieurs de leurs compatriotes pour assister aux conferences 
et aux cours d'instruction qui seront donnes a l'Academie quand elle sera etablie. 

Tout le monte se rappelle, Monsieur le President, la part si remarquable 
que vous avez prise a la Seconde Conference de la Haye, dont les superbes 
resultats interessent au plus haut degre la Division de Droit International, ainsi 
que tous les amis de la civilisation et de l'humanite. Votre splendide travail a 
passe dans l'histoire ; on ne l'oubliera jamais. Votre eloquence et vos triomphes a 
la Haye, Monsieur, ont attire l'attention du monde civilise. Ce ne sont pas 
seulement les deux Ameriques, nos vingt et une republiques sceurs, c'est le monde 
entier qui doit profiter, pour tou jours, de vos nobles efforts. 

La Division de Droit International, pour que les travaux de la troisieme 
Conference puissent etre prochainement prepares, desire appeler l'attention sur 
la formation des Comites Nationaux. 

C'est un fait generalement connu que la Deuxieme Conference de la Paix a 
la Haye en 1907 a propose la reunion de la troisieme Conference a une periode 
approximativement egale a celle qui s'est ecoulee entre la premiere et la seconde 
Conference, c'est-a-dire, apres huit ans, de sorte que si la proposition est mise a 
execution, nous pouvons nous attendre a ce que la troisieme Conference se tienne 
approximativement en 19 15. 

II a ete en outre stipule dans la proposition susmentionnee qu'environ 
deux ans avant la reunion probable de la Conference, un Comite preparatoire 
international serait constitue par un accord commun entre les Puissances, pour 
recueillir les propositions devant etre soumises a la Conference, et pour determiner 
quelles questions seraient mures pour etre incorporees dans un Traite Inter- 
national et pour preparer un programme qui devra etre soumis aux Gouverne- 
ments invites a participer a la Conference, suffisamment a temps avant la reunion 
pour leur permettre de l'examiner soigneusement et, finalement, de proposer un 
systeme d'organisation pour la procedure de la Conference meme. 

II est evident que les divers pays qui seront invites a la Haye, et tout pays 
americain avait ete invite a la Seconde et sera sans doute invite a la troisieme, 
devront examiner ces questions importantes avant la constitution du Comite 
Preparatoire International et il parait opportun, sinon necessaire, que chaque 
Gouvernement nomme un Comite pour examiner ces questions en detail, pour 
que les Gouvernements soient a meme de pouvoir faire leurs propositions en 
toute connaissance de cause. 

Comme les Republiques americaines le considereront comme un droit 
d'assister a la Conference il parait qu'il est de leur devoir de se preparer d'avance 
pour une active participation a ses operations. lis n'accompliront pas leur devoir 
integralement si leurs Delegues ecoutent tout bonnement les discussions et y 
prennent part a l'occasion. Les Etats americains devront faire davantage. lis 
devraient chercher a augmenter l'utilite de chaque conference successive, en y 
faisant des contributions importantes et cela peut uniquement etre fait, s'ils se 
preparent soigneusement a l'avance pour la reunion. 



102 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

On ne s'attend pas a ce que les Etats americains presentent a la Conference 
une serie de projets en commun ou qu'ils fassent des propositions en commun, mais 
si les divers Gouvernements se communiquaient leurs vues de fagon a arriver a 
un accord sur les questions qui a leur opinion devraient etre presentees et qui 
pourraient former l'objet de traites internationaux cela faciliterait considerable- 
ment les affaires. 

Nos Etats americains laisseraient s'echapper une occasion avantageuse, s'ils ne 
nommaient pas chacun, un Comite National pour etudier les questions qui 
seraient regulierement discutees par la Conference et ne preparaient pas des projets 
concernant ces questions, lesquels, s'ils ne sont pas adoptes par la Conference 
pourront au moins former une base a la discussion. 

Ces Comites Nationaux pourraient etre constitues le plus tot possible, afin 
d'eviter une perte de temps. Je ne puis assez chaudement recommander cette 
affaire a votre serieuse attention et a votre examen. 

L'eminent publiciste frangais, Monsieur le Professeur A. de Lapradelle, se 
refere dans les termes suivants a la cooperation apportee par les republiques 
americaines a la preparation des questions a discuter a la Haye: "La Seconde 
Conference de la Paix, en appelant a la Haye tous les Etats de l'Amerique, a 
permis de constater entre eux, sur certains points, quelques disaccords. lis n'ont 
pas tous la meme conception, ni du droit de la paix, ni du droit de la guerre. 
Mais comment persuader l'Europe de la justesse des vues americaines si l'Amerique 
n'en est pas deja prealablement convaincue? Et, d'autre part, de quelle autorite 
les propositions americaines ne seront-elles pas revetues quand elles emaneront 
non pas de tel ou tel Etat, mais de l'Amerique tout entiere, qui, les ayant etudiees 
dans l'lnstitut americain de droit international, les aura votees dans les Conferences 
pan-americaines ?" 

L'etude, le developpement et la vulgarisation du droit international meritent 
nos meilleurs efforts. Un des hommes d'Etat les plus distingues de l'Europe a 
tout recemment dit : "Ni l'abrogation pure et simple de la guerre, ni l'institution 
d'un Etat supranational, ni un changement de gouvernement ou d'organisation 
sociale, ne peuvent aplanir la voie de la paix et mettre un terme aux appetits 
guerriers. II n'y a qu'une route, penible si Ton veut, mais sure : c'est celle du 
droit; non pas d'un droit theorique et imaginaire, mais positif et reel. Une paix 
qui ne derive pas du droit, qui n'y trouve pas sa base et sa garantie est sans 
valeur: elle n'est pas digne de vos sympathies ni de vos efforts. Elle repose sur 
une base fragile et chancelante; elle depend d'eventualites precaires et risque a 
chaque instant de s'effondrer. Elle sacrifie ce qui est de premier ordre a un etat 
de fait qui n'a qu'une importance secondaire et qui n'a de valeur morale qu'en 
tant qu'il est le fruit d'un regne de droit". 

Monseigneur, Excellences, Mesdames, Messieurs : Avant de terminer, je 
veux vous exprimer une derniere fois mes remerciements les plus sinceres pour 
le grand honneur qui m'est fait par l'Academie Bresilienne et l'lnstitut de 
l'Ordre des Avocats, ainsi que ma profonde reconnaissance pour votre aimable 



APENDICE II 103 

et sympathique accueil. En quittant cette belle ville, qui, pour moi, sera tou jours 
une des merveilles du monde, avec plus de regret que je ne vous saurai dire, 
j'emporterai des sentiments — si vous me le permettez — des amities personnelles tres 
cheres, et je vous dis — pas adieu mais au revoir. 

Carta del Serlor Helio Lobo, 

En la que acepta el puesto de Secretario Honorario en el Brasie de la Sociedad 

Nacional para la Conciliacion Internacionai,, 

Rio de Janeiro, 9 de Octubre de 191 3 

Exmo. Sr. Embaixador Roberto Bacon. 

Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. 

Senhor: 

Serviu-se Vossa Excellencia de convidar-me hontem, na Embaixada Ameri- 
cana, em nome da "Carnegie Endowment for International Peace", de que 
e entre nos eminente representante em missao especial, para ser no Brasil o 
Secretario da "International Conciliation", a nobre associagao presidida em Paris 
pelo Barao Paulo d'Estournelles de Constant. 

Agradecendo entao, de viva voz, a insigne honraria, tive occasiao de dizer 
a Vossa Excellencia quanto ella me desvaneceu. Peco licenga para o repetir ainda 
aqui, muito sensivel a extrema bondade de Vossa Excellencia para commigo. 

Sera para mim motivo de especial satisfacgao tentar concorrer assim, com o 
meu pequeno contingente pessoal, para a realizacao de uma obra que ninguem 
mais do que Vossa Excellencia, senhor Embaixador, sabe, com o prestigio do 
vosso alto nome, aquilatar e engrandecer. 

Muito feliz me considerarei, portanto, se, procurando corresponder a prova 
de confianca em mim depositada, puder desempenhar-me das ordens com que 
Vossa Excellencia e a associagao ha jam por bem distinguir-me. 

Com os meus sentimentos de particular aprego e respeitosa consideragao, 
sou de Vossa Excellencia obediente servo — Heuo Lobo. 



[Traduction del Portuguese 

Exmo. Sr. Embajador Roberto Bacon, 

Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacionai. 

Sen or: 

Vuestra Excelencia se sirvio invitarme ayer, en la Embajada Americana, en 
nombre de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacionai, de la cual sois 
eminente representante en mision especial entre nosotros, para que yo sea en el 
Brasil el Secretario de la "Conciliation Internationale", la noble sociedad 
presidida en Paris por el Baron Pablo d'Estournelles de Constant. 



104 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Al daros las gracias entonces, de palabra, por la insigne honra, tuve ocasion 
de decir a Vuestra Excelencia, cuanto ella me impresiono. Permitidme repetirlas 
aqui, muy emocionado por la extrema bondad de Vuestra Excelencia para 
conmigo. 

Sera para mi motivo de especial satisfaction tratar de contribuir asi, con mi 
pequefio contingente personal, a la realization de una obra que nadie mejor 
que Vuestra Excelencia, Sefior Embajador, sabe, con el prestigo de su alto 
nombre, valorar y engrandecer. 

Muy feliz me considerare, por lo tanto, si, procurando corresponder a la 
prueba de confianza en mi depositada, pudiera desempefiar las ordenes con que 
Vuestra Excelencia y la Sociedad tengan por bien distinguirme. 

Con mis sentimientos de particular aprecio y respetuosa consideration, soy 
de Vuestra Excelencia obediente servidor, 

Helio Lobo. 



APENDICE III 



Argentina 

Discurso del Dr. E. S. Zeballos, 

Pronunciado en el Banquete dado por dicho Senor 
en honor de Mr. Bacon, 
Buenos Aires, 15 de Octubre de 19 13 
Senor es: 

El senor Bacon pertenece al grupo selecto de americanos, que preside el 
eminente Mr. Root, y que cultiva la diplomacia de la intelectualidad en America 
y en el Mundo. 

Ellos buscan en la reciproca estimacion de los hombres superiores del mundo 
la orientacion humana y americana hacia el respeto y la conciliation entre los 
pueblos. 

; Nobilisima mision ! \ Bienvenida sea con su ilustre exponente, entre nosotros, 
cuyo talento y cultura no olvidareis, sin duda ! 

i Sefiores : A los Estados Unidos de America, donde germina con grandes 
apoyos esta politica intelectual ! 

Al noble anciano Carnegie, que ensefia al mundo de como la fortuna privada, 
no debe concurrir solamente a mantener goces individuales, sino a servir al bienes- 
tar de los hombres. 

Al ilustre Root, que preside este luminoso movimiento. 

Al senor Bacon, espiritu gentil y cerebro robusto, que sin caracter oficial 
realiza en Sur America la mas noble y fecunda de las misiones de los Estados 
Unidos de America, con credenciales de humanidad y de ciencia. 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Senor es: 

Ante todo deseo me perdoneis mi osadia, al permitirme dirigiros la palabra en 
la sonora lengua castellana, que tan rica y armoniosa es, pero que yo lamento 
mucho no poseer. Vuestra bondad proverbial me asegura que cuento con vuestra 
benevolencia. 

Os doy las gracias mas cordiales, senor, por el honor que me habeis dis- 
pensado, proporcionandome el gran placer de conocer las personalidades mas 
distinguidas del mundo intelectual de Buenos Aires. Os agradezco las amables 
frases que habeis pronunciado en mi obsequio y las alabanzas que habeis hecho 
de mi pais. Os aseguro que vuestra fina cortesia me ha conmovido hondamente. 



106 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

Experimento una profunda emotion al saludaros, senores. La afectuosa 
acogida que me habeis dispensado, unida a la admiration que siento por esta 
bellisima tierra argentina, me hacen dificil expresar como quisiera los sentimientos 
que embargan mi alma, al llegar a este pais hospitalario. 

Los ojos del mundo civilizado, se dirigen hoy hacia la Republica Argentina. 
Maravilla su admirable progreso, y por doquiera, se oyen palabras entusiastas en 
su alabanza y predicciones del brillante porvenir que le espera. Estoy terminando 
un viaje alrededor del mundo, y he oido muchas veces hablar de los encantos de 
este privilegiado pais. La bellisima Sultana del Rio de la Plata, Buenos Aires, me 
ha producido una impresion que nunca olvidare. A mas de su hermosura de gran 
ciudad, de corte europeo, a mas del movimiento intenso de su puerto magnifico, de 
la animation bulliciosa de sus preciosas avenidas y de la atraccion especial de sus 
simpaticos habitantes, todo lo cual justifica lo que oi contar, mi mirada, queriendo 
penetrar el porvenir, contempla extasiada la imagen brillante del Paris americano, 
que por la energia de su pueblo llegara a alcanzar una position deslumbradora, que 
superara a los mas acariciados sueiios de la presente generation. 

Me siento muy f eliz, por haber podido venir aqui. He tenido siempre un vivo 
interes en la Republica Argentina, por sus luchas de independencia, por su 
desarrollo extraordinario, y por su porvenir esplendido. Me alegro de visitar la 
tierra natal del genial Sarmiento bien conocido en los Estados Unidos, donde 
concibio los planes educacionistas que tanto ha aprovechado su patria ; del valeroso 
Belgrano, insigne e intrepido caudillo ; y del austero patriota San Martin, cuyo 
preclaro talento militar y extraordinario desinteres lo asocian, en nuestra mente, 
con nuestro querido Washington. 

Viniendo de parte de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional, os 
traigo los mas afectuosos saludos de su eminente presidente y vuestro ferviente 
amigo, el honorable EHhu Root, mi estimado maestro, a quien quiero y a quien 
vosotros, senores, estoy seguro, tambien apreciais. 

Se ha hablado de mi mision, de parte de la Fundacion, como mision de amistad 
y de buena voluntad. Es verdad, y eso me enorgullece, pero i no es verdad 
tambien, que, existiendo ya lazos estrechos de amistad, se puede ir mas alia ? 

De mi parte, yo preferiria que fuese, ella, considerada como mision de co- 
operation y de concurso entre viejos amigos, para discutir, estudiar y trazar las 
vias practicas, por las cuales podamos trabajar juntos y marchar adelante hacia el 
progreso, hacia el ideal de la humanidad, siempre hacia mas luz, por el triunfo del 
derecho en el mundo, substituyendo el llamamiento a la fuerza por el llamamiento 
a la justicia ; hacia una opinion internacional que sera la verdadera sancion del 
Derecho internacional. 

Las nobles palabras pronunciadas por el senor Root, en el mil novecientos 
seis, en el Congreso Panamericano, representan hoy los sentimientos, los ideales del 
pueblo de los Estados Unidos con la misma verdad, con la misma fuerza, que 
tenian hace siete anos; los gobiernos pueden cambiar, pero los sentimientos del 
pueblo permanecen los mismos. Me gusta siempre considerar esta memorable 



APENDICE III 107 

declaration como la Doctrina Root : "the doctrine of sympathy and understanding, 
of kindly consideration and honorable obligation", y me sentiria orgulloso de ser 
digno de hablar de ella, como humilde apostol. 

Desde la visita del sefior Root a vuestro bello pais, en el mil novecientos seis, 
ha habido grandes cambios, un progreso maravilloso, en el desarrollo del Derecho 
internacional, del Derecho de gentes, en el cual desarrollo los ilustrados publicistas 
de vuestro pais y los jurisconsultos de toda la America Latina, han tornado una 
parte importantisima. 

El desarrollo cientifico del Derecho internacional, al cual el sefior Root ha 
consagrado su gran talento con tanto interes, demuestra un progreso notable. Se 
ha dicho que la Segunda Conferencia de La Haya ha marcado el adelanto mas 
trascendental que jamas se ha hecho de un golpe hacia el arreglo razonable y 
pacifico de la conducta internacional, a menos que sea el adelanto logrado en la 
Primera Conferencia de La Haya. 

Se ha dicho que los suefios y las Utopias de hoy son los hechos reales de 
manana. Los suefios de ayer son las realidades de hoy. Los suefios de Rolin- 
Jaequemyns, Lieber, Calvo, Alcorta y de otros convencidos, ya han llegado a ser 
las realidades del presente ; el espiritu de sus doctrinas ha llegado a ser un princi- 
pio en nuestra epoca. 

Es la creencia de los Sindicos de la Fundacion Carnegie que este adelanto se 
puede apresurar de una manera practica. Ellos estan convencidos de que los 
ideales de los directores del pensamiento pueden llegar a realizarse mas pronto y 
el mundo se beneficiaria mas eficazmente, por un esfuerzo unido en ciertas defmidas 
y practicas empresas. Esta es la razon por que he venido a pediros vuestra va- 
liosa ayuda y cooperation. 

El sefior Root, que quisiera ale j arse de la vida intensa de la politica y consa- 
grar la mayor parte de sus esfuerzos a esta causa, esta muy empenado en el 
desarrollo de algunos planes de la Fundacion, que son de mas precision, y en cuanto 
a ellos me ha encarecido solicitar especialmente vuestro concurso para : 

Hacer mas seguro y permanente el nuevo Instituto Americano de Derecho 
Internacional por medio de la creation en cada Estado de la America, de socie- 
dades nacionales de Derecho internacional, que pueden afiliarse al Instituto y asi 
llegar a ser una parte constitutiva del mismo. 

La creation de una Academia de Derecho International en La Haya, man- 
dan do cada gobierno uno o mas representantes a dicha Academia. 

La organization en cada pais de sucursales nacionales de la Asociacion para la 
Conciliation Internacional, radicada en Paris, de la cual es presidente el Baron 
d'Estournelles de Constant. 

La creation de nuevos vinculos intelectuales por medio del intercambio de 
profesores y de estudiantes entre las universidades de Sur America y las de los 
Estados Unidos, asi como tambien por medio de visitas de hombres eminentes. 

Pido perdon por haber ocupado vuestra atencion tanto tiempo. Espero en 
otra ocasion explicar mas detalladamente las ideas y los deseos del sefior Root, 



108 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

y os ruego que presteis a estos proyectos practicos vuestra seria consideration, 
no solamente para estrechar todavia mas los vinculos de amistad y de solidaridad 
entre nuestros propios queridos paises, no solamente para crear una union inte- 
lectual entre las republicas americanas, sino en bien de la humanidad y para 
adelantar y promover la libertad y la justicia entre las naciones del mundo. 

Discurso del Dr. Luis M. Drago, 

Al PresEntar a Mr. Bacon en la Recepcion de la Facultad de Derecho, 
Buenos Aires, 16 de Octubre de 19 13 

Tengo el honor, de dar la bienvenida en esta casa y de presentar ante 
el distinguido auditorio que aqui se ha congregado para escuchar su palabra, al 
sefior Roberto Bacon, uno de los mas altos representantes intelectuales de los 
Estados Unidos de America, que llega a Buenos Aires en una mision de 
confraternidad continental. 

Mr. Bacon, antiguo secretario de Estado de la Union Americana, y su 
embajador en Paris, es hoy sindico de la Universidad de Harvard, y a los 
prestigios de su claro talento, y a sus altos meritos personales, agrega, ahora las 
credenciales de enviado especial de la ya celebre "Dotation Carnegie", cons- 
tituida en los Estados Unidos para promover la paz y la fraternidad entre las 
naciones del mundo. Mr. Bacon, hombre de estado, eminente pensador y politico, 
universitario y educacionista de nota, reune en su persona todos los prestigios 
de la alta clase intelectual a que pertenece, y es ciertamente muy digno continuador 
de la obra de Mr. Root, aquel principe de los oradores y de los hombres de 
gobierno de este hemisferio, que tanto hizo en su viaje memorable para pro- 
mover la aproximacion de los pueblos de America, mostrandoles los vastos 
horizontes morales e intelectuales que pueden alcanzarse por el esfuerzo colectivo. 

Mr. Bacon que no ha temido afrontar las penalidades de un largo viaje 
para traer a las naciones suramericanas el mensaje fraternal de la "Institution 
Carnegie", es asi un abnegado apostol del vie jo ideal humanitario y de la 
politica de solidaridad, de justicia, de tolerancia respetuosa y de benevola simpatia 
en que siempre se ha inspirado la action exterior de la Republica Argentina. 

Me complazco en saludar a nuestro ilustre huesped en nombre de la Facultad 
de Derecho, rogandole quiera tener la bondad de hacer uso de la palabra. 

Discurso de Mr. Bacon 

Excellences, Mesdames, Messieurs: 

Je ne trouve pas de mots pour vous exprimer mes sentiments de haute 
appreciation du tres grand honneur qui m'est fait aujourd'hui par la Faculte de 
Droit. 

Je vous prie de croire que j'en suis tres sensible et que je suis profondement 
louche par cette marque de courtoisie que vous m'avez temoignee en me conviant 



APENDICE III 109 

a assister a cette reunion sous les auspices de l'elite de vos intellectuels pour 
vous adresser au sujet de ma mission. 

Je vous remercie, Monsieur, du fond du coeur de vos trop aimables paroles, 
si peu meritees. 

C'est pour moi un tres grand plaisir de visiter, bien que pendant quelques 
jours, trop courts a mon gre, quelques-uns des peuples et des pays de l'Amerique 
du Sud, car ce fut tou jours un de mes vceux les plus chers, que je n'ai pu 
realiser encore que partiellement de voir de mes propres yeux vos admirables 
contrees, les merveilles de votre civilisation, de me rencontrer de nouveau avec 
des amis que j'ai connus et aimes dans d'autres parties du monde, d'y nouer 
de nouvelles amities qui ajouteront un nouveau charme a la vie et dont je gar- 
derai un souvenir que ni le temps, ni la distance, ne sauraient ni effacer, ni 
obscurcir. Je viens charge d'un message de bon vouloir de la part de votre ami 
devoue votre grand admirateur, Monsieur Elihu Root. C'est a sa requete, 
devancee par mon propre desir, que j'ai l'honneur de me presenter devant vous. 
Je voudrais pouvoir vous dire tout ce qu'il vous dirait lui-meme, s'il etait ici 
present, si, prenant la parole, il vous adressait le salut de sa vieille amitie; les 
expressions differeront, peut-etre, mais l'esprit qui les animera, je vous prie de 
le croire, sera absolument le meme. 

J'aimerais que vous me consideriez comme inaugurant une serie de visites 
internationales qui se poursuivront sans interruption et meneront a notre 
mutuel avantage, en mettant en rapport les representants autorises de la societe 
et du monde intellectuel des contrees du Sud ainsi que de celles du Nord, et en 
vous invitant a cooperer a l'etablissement d'institutions internationales qui 
deviendront, nous l'esperons, des centres de bon vouloir, qui repandront et 
populariseront des principes justes et progressifs de droit international dont 
peuvent dependre les bonnes relations internationales; et qui, par differentes 
voies. directement et indirectement, par un echange de pensees, un echange de 
vues et une heureuse combinaison d'efforts parviendront a fortifier les liens 
d'amitie qu'un passe commun, des institutions communes et un but commun 
provoquent et reclament. 

L'histoire et la nature ont fait naitre et grandir un profond sentiment de 
solidarite, non seulement entre les Etats de l'Amerique latine, mais encore entre 
les Republiques du Sud et les Etats-Unis. II importe de maintenir et de fortifier 
cette solidarite qui, en raison de sa double origine, unit indissolublement les 
nations du nouveau Continent dans le passe, dans le present et dans l'avenir. 

II suffit de jeter les yeux sur l'histoire politique du Nouveau Monde pour 
voir l'interet constant qu'ont porte les Etats-Unis a la lutte entreprise par les 
Etats de l'Amerique latine afin de s'affranchir d'abord de la metropole et de 
defendre ensuite leur independance conquise contre toute tentative de conquete de 
la part des puissances europeennes. II suffit aussi de rappeler brievement qu'apres 
l'emancipation, les Etats-Unis ont fourni aux Etats latins les formes et les bases 
de leurs institutions politiques, notamment de leur regime republicain et demo- 



110 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

cratique a une epoque ou precisement les vieilles institutions politiques de 
l'Europe etaient loin de repondre aux idees de la liberte et aux conditions sociales 
des deux Ameriques. 

Tout ce passe de gloire dans l'histoire du Nouveau Monde, doit fortifier de 
jour en jour les liens indestructibles de solidarite qui ont uni les nations ameri- 
caines depuis leur naissance a la vie politique. 

La nature consolide encore l'oeuvre de l'histoire. La situation continental 
des Etats du Nouveau Monde a fait naitre une serie de problemes communs a 
tous les Etats de ce Continent, creant de la sorte entre eux de nouveaux liens de 
solidarite. Grace aux progres de la civilisation et au perfectionnement des 
moyens de communication, on a compris, de nos jours, en Amerique, l'imperieuse 
necessite de resoudre uniformement les problemes nes des situations et conditions 
speciales au Nouveau Continent. 

Devangant en quelque sorte l'Europe, dont les grandes puissances ne se 
rencontraient en conference qu'a la suite de guerres, pour determiner les condi- 
tions de la paix, tous les Etats de 1' Amerique se sont reunis en des conferences 
pacifiques, afin de traiter les questions communes a tout leur continent; d'ou le 
nom et l'origine des conferences pan-americaines. Ces conferences ont ete des 
plus fructueuses — un certain nombre de problemes d'interet americain ont ete 
etudies; des conventions importantes ont ete signees en vue de developper la vie 
sociale et intellectuelle du Nouveau Monde. Enfin, les representants des divers 
Etats Americains ont ainsi appris a se mieux connaitre et ils ont pu se rendre 
compte combien multiples et puissants sont les liens qui unissent tous les Etats 
Americains. 

Les sentiments de solidarite et de fraternite qui groupent dans une com- 
munaute d'interets les Etats du Nouveau Monde doivent donner naissance a une 
ceuvre d'union et de concorde. La voie est deja ouverte ; de nombreux et fertiles 
resultats ont ete obtenus ; il importe done de parvenir et de realiser de plus en 
plus l'entente et l'harmonie. II faut surtout dissiper le malentendu du Sud a 
l'egard de la politique des Etats-Unis. Comme l'a dit solennellement mon maitre, 
Monsieur Root, ce pays desire avant tout que la paix et la prosperite regnent dans 
l'Amerique latine afin de fortifier et de resserrer les liens d'amitie et de fraternite 
qui doivent unir tous les peuples americains. 

J'ai 1'honneur de m'adresser a vous, non pas simplement en mon nom per- 
sonnel, mais au nom de la Fondation Carnegie pour la paix internationale, dont le 
Senateur Root est president, et de vous inviter au nom et de la part des adminis- 
trateurs de la Fondation de leur preter votre concours par tous les moyens qui 
vous paraitront possibles et convenables. 

En d'autres termes, le desir de Monsieur Root est d'eveiller autant que pos- 
sible l'interet et la sympathie des maitres de l'opinion dans 1'Amerique du Sud 
et de les gagner aux diverses entreprises que la Fondation cherche a favoriser 
dans l'interet de meilleures relations internationales, de sorte qu'ils puissent 
preter d'une facon pratique leur concours a l'ceuvre poursuivie. 



APENDICE III 111 

L'estime et l'amitie que les administrateurs de la Fondation nourrissent pour 
les peuples de l'Amerique latine et pour nombre d'Americains latins distingues, 
avec lesquels ils ont eu d'agreables relations d'amitie, les ont conduit a souhaiter 
que l'oeuvre de la Fondation puisse trouver dans l'Amerique du Sud des collabo- 
rateurs aussi actifs et aussi utiles que ceux qu'elle a rencontres en Europe. 

Laissez-moi vous citer directement un passage des instructions que m'a 
donnees Monsieur Root, au lieu de les paraphraser comme j'ai fait a plusieurs 
reprises. "Vous remarquerez", dit-il, "qu'un des moyens par lesquels la Division 
des Rapports et d'Education se propose de favoriser la bonne entente entre les 
nations, consiste en une serie de visites d'hommes representatifs. En consequence, 
sous les auspices de la Division, directement ou indirectement, le Baron d'Estour- 
nelles de Constant, de France, la Baronne von Suttner, d'Autriche, et le Professeur 
Nitobe, du Japon, ont deja visite les Etats-Unis; le President Eliot, de l'Universite 
Harvard, a visite l'lnde, la Chine et le Japon, et le Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie 
est maintenant au Japon. Votre visite dans l'Amerique du Sud rentre dans cette 
categorie, mais elle a, cependant, un interet plus determine et plus special que les 
voyages que je viens d'enumerer ou qui sont projetes pour l'objet que j'ai men- 
tionne, car elle n'a pas simplement pour but de fortifier la bonne entente en eta- 
blissant des relations personnelles entre un homme de l'Amerique du Nord et des 
hommes distingues de l'Amerique du Sud, mais elle a encore pour but de porter a 
la connaissance des hommes representatifs de l'Amerique du Sud les travaux, les 
vues et l'ideal de la Fondation, et d'inviter les amis que nous possedons dans le 
sud de l'Amerique a se joindre a nous avec cordialite et sympathie pour encourager 
la grande ceuvre a laquelle nous nous sommes consacres." 

Tel est l'esprit plein de bons sentiments, de douce sympathie qui a inspire 
ma mission; je n'ai pas besoin de vous dire que c'est aussi l'esprit dans lequel je 
tache de la remplir. 

Je regrette que je me trouve aujourd'hui oblige de me borner aux details 
sees et peu interessants, a ce moment, ou, sous le charme, sous l'inspiration de la 
gracieuse bienveillance de votre accueil et de votre charmante hospitalite, je 
voudrais parler et encore parler de nos ideals, de nos esperances. Car je suis fier 
Monsieur, de partager votre optimisme, et j'ai l'intime conviction que, malgre les 
nuages accumules par la defiance et le scepticisme, nous sommes a la veille d'un 
grand mouvement de progres dans revolution du liberalisme du monde, et que 
de loin nous pouvons voir poindre l'aurore d'un jour plus pur. 

Les principes, la philosophic de la vie du siecle passe ne nous suffiront plus. 
II nous faudra de nouvelles lois de l'economie politique, de nouveaux principes 
du droit international. 

Vous m'avez fait l'honneur de me demander de vous donner de plus amples 
details sur certains projets de la Fondation.* 

*NoTa. — Esta parte del discurso, en la cual se describen tecnicamente la obra y fines de 
la Fundacion, necesariamente es analoga a los pronunciados en frances sobre el mismo tema 
en la Embajada americana y en La Biblioteca Nacional en Rio de Janeiro, siendo repetida 
en substancia en las Universidades de Santiago y de Lima. 



112 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

Le travail de la Fondation a ete reparti en trois Divisions. 

1. La division des Rapports et d'Education, dont M. le Dr. Nicholas Murray 
Butler, president de l'Universite de Columbia, est le directeur. 

2. La division d'Economie Politique et d'Histoire, dont M. le Dr. John 
Bates Clark est le directeur. 

3. La division de Droit International, dont le Secretaire de la Fondation, 
M. le Dr. James Brown Scott, est le directeur. 

En ce qui concerne la Division des Rapports et d'Education, il etait evident 
que les operations de cette Division s'appliqueraient necessairement aux pays 
etrangers, et qu'il etait essentiel pour la reussite de la tache, que celle-ci fut executee 
dans les pays etrangers par des agents locaux plutot que par des sections de la 
Fondation. Comme il fut impossible de fixer longtemps a l'avance ce qui devait 
etre entrepris, et comment les methodes devaient etre appliquees, sans le conseil 
des chefs competents et experimentes de l'idee dans les divers pays, Monsieur le 
Docteur Butler, le Directeur de la Division, a constitue un Comite Consultatif 
d'hommes d'Etat et de publicistes europeens et un corps de correspondants sur 
l'avis et le concours sympathique desquels il peut tou jours compter. 

Nous nous sommes demande s'il serait agreable aux coryphees de la pensee 
dans l'Amerique latine de creer une organisation quelque peu similaire au Comite 
Consultatif General qui est deja forme en Europe. 

La Division a inaugure des visites d'hommes eminents, et un echange educa- 
teur avec le Japon. J'espere etre a meme d'obtenir des conseils et des renseigne- 
ments dans l'Amerique du Sud qui nous permettront de commencer dans un 
avenir prochain l'echange reciproque de professeurs et d'etudiants avec l'Amerique 
latine. 

La Fondation voudrait bien que l'echange commencat de suite par l'envoi 
annuel de deux eminents savants, ou publicistes de l'Amerique du Sud aux Etats- 
Unis; et deux Americains du Nord, a l'Amerique du Sud. Chacun de ces Mes- 
sieurs consacrerait son temps a deux institutions etablies dans le continent qu'il 
visiterait. 

II est inutile d'insister sur la sagesse et l'opportunite de ces projets, car c'est 
une verite commune que bien des malentendus qui existent entre les nations sont 
le resultat de l'ignorance des conditions locales, des traditions et des idees. Les 
relations personnelles prouvent, qu'au fond tous les hommes sont absolument les 
memes, et que le contact personnel, la discussion, et l'echange d'idees posent les 
bases indispensables pour l'amitie et la bonne entente. 

Une des activites auxquelles cette Division attache une grande importance est 
celle qui concerne l'etablissement d'associations pour la Conciliation dans le monde 
entier. 

II y a quelques annees, l'Association Mere a ete constitute a Paris par Mon- 
sieur le Baron d'Estournelles de Constant. La section aux Etats-Unis dont 
M. le Dr. Butler est le President, fut creee en 1906. Les Associations allemandes 



APENDICE III 113 

et anglaises, ont ete organisees en 1912, et je suis charge par mes instructions de 
faire appel au concours des parties interessees dans les pays que j'ai l'honneur de 
visiter, d'organiser des Societes filiales de la Conciliation Internationale en rap- 
port avec la Societe-Mere a Paris. Ces Associations, bien que locales par 
leur origine, ont neanmoins une mission internationale, et cherchent a creer par 
leurs reunions, et les brochures utiles qu'elles publient regulierement, des senti- 
ments amicaux envers les peuples des pays etrangers. 

Permettez-moi d'exposer les buts et objets des Societes pour la Conciliation 
Internationale dans la langue du fondateur de la Societe-Mere a Paris. Dans 
une note que Monsieur le Baron d'Estournelles de Constant a eu l'amabilite de 
preparer sur ce sujet, il dit: 

La Conciliation n'est pas une organisation sentimentale, humanitaire; 
elle est un progres pratique, patriotique poursuivi dans l'interet national 
de chaque pays, particulierement des pays jeunes qui ont besoin de consacrer 
toutes leurs forces et leurs ressources a leur developpement. Elle a pour 
but d'assurer au monde des affaires, du travail, a l'agriculteur, a l'industriel, 
au commergant, comme a l'artiste et au savant, la securite du lendemain, la 
possibility de concevoir et d'entreprendre des oeuvres d'avenir. 

La Conciliation est le complement moderne indispensable de l'effort 
economique de tout pays civilise. Developper la prosperite nationale a 
la faveur des bonnes relations internationales, voila tout notre effort resume 
par notre motto : Pro patria per orbis concordiam. 

Les guerres de conquete ne paient plus : elles n'engendrent que des 
haines, des represailles, des charges d'une paix armee chaque jour plus 
ecrasantes ; et ces charges sont devenues un des arguments les plus puissants, 
dans les masses, en faveur du socialisme et de la Revolution. 

Seules les guerres d'independance sont respectables, mais nul ne menace 
l'independance des Etats Americains. lis seront plus forts en s'entendant 
tous qu'en s'armant les uns contre les autres. 

L'arbitrage, au contraire, depuis les experiences de l'Alabama, de Hull, 
de Casablanca, des pecheries de Behring et de Terre Neuve, etc., etc., a fait 
ses preuves. 

Organisez l'arbitrage plutot que la guerre, mais preferez tou jours la 
conciliation a l'arbitrage. 

Telle est notre conception, notre regie de vie. 

Je la resume ainsi: 

La guerre plutot que la servitude, 

L'arbitrage plutot que la guerre, 

La conciliation plutot que l'arbitrage. 

L'arbitrage repare, la conciliation previent. La conciliation substitue 
l'esprit de cooperation feconde a la routine sterile des antagonismes. 

La Fondation est disposee a se charger des depenses encourues pour 
l'organisation de ces Societes, et a fournir les ressources necessaires pour s'assurer 
les services de Secretaires capables d'energie, de devouement, de perseverance et 
d'intelligence desquels depend l'utilite de ces Societes. 

Je m'occuperai maintenant du travail de la Division d'Economie Politique 
et d'Histoire. 



114 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

La tache de cette Division est: "Encourager des recherches, et des etudes 
scientifiques, et approfondies, sur les causes de la guerre, et sur les moyens 
pratiques de la prevenir et de l'eviter." 

Une conference fut arrangee a Berne, en Suisse, en aout 191 1, a laquelle 
des economistes et des publicistes distingues de toute l'Europe furent invites a 
examiner les questions qui pourraient etre dument et pratiquement etudiees, et 
d'elaborer un programme d'essai pour la Division. 

Un grand nombre de sujets ont deja ete assignes a des specialistes choisis 
dans les pays auxquels leur tache s'applique ; quelques-unes des etudes sont deja 
terminees et dans l'espace de quelques annees, la Fondation aura publie une serie 
de brochures remarquables, s'appliquant a toutes les phases du programme elabore, 
et qui seront — pour parler le langage de Monsieur Root — "useful to mankind". 

Monsieur le Professeur Kinley, un vieux et sincere ami de l'Amerique latine, 
qui a represente les Etats-Unis au quatrieme congres Pan-Americain tenu a 
Buenos-Ayres, a ete nomme membre du Comite de Recherches, et il se consacrera 
plus specialement aux problemes dans lesquels l'Amerique latine est interessee. 
II visitera certainement dans le courant de l'annee prochaine l'Amerique latine 
pour conferer avec les maitres de l'opinion, en vue d'obtenir leur avis et si c'est 
possible de s'assurer leur concours pour proposer et pour executer les projets 
qu'ils pourraient recommander. 

La troisieme Division de la Fondation est la Division de Droit International. 

Cette Division, de meme que les autres Divisions, a trouve necessaire de creer 
une organisation speciale et de s'assurer les services d'un corps d'avocats- 
conseils dans les conclusions juridiques et exactes desquels les Directeurs peuvent 
avoir toute confiance. 

L'Institut de Droit International se compose — il est a peine besoin de le dire — 
des plus eminents jurisconsultes de toutes les nations et la Fondation a demande a 
l'lnstitut d'agir, soit comme corps, soit par l'intermediaire d'un comite speciale- 
ment choisi dans ce but, comme conseiller pour la Division de Droit International. 
L'Institut a accepte cette charge, a choisi un comite de onze membres a sa 
reunion de Christiana, en 191 2, lesquels ont exerce leurs fonctions pendant la 
presente annee comme conseillers pour le Directeur et le Comite, specialement 
connu comme Comite Consultatif pour la Fondation Carnegie, a elabore un 
Reglement, qui a ete accepte par l'lnstitut, au moyen duquel les rapports etablis 
entre l'lnstitut d'une part, par son Comite Consultatif et la Fondation d'autre part, 
par l'intermediaire de sa Division de Droit International, doivent etre permanents. 

Le Comite se compose de onze membres, dont le President et le Secretaire 
General de l'lnstitut font partie d'office ; les autres membres sont elus pour occuper 
cette fonction pendant un nombre d'annees determine. II y a lieu de mentionner 
que les membres de ce Comite sont des hommes d'une grande experience et d'une 
haute autoritedans toutes les questions en matiere de droit international: Mes- 
sieurs Fusinato, d'ltalie; Gram et Hagerup, de Norvege; Holland, d'Angleterre ; 



APENDICE III 115 

Lammasch, d'Autriche; Lardy, de Suisse; Renault, de France; Rolin, de Bel- 
gique et Vesnitch, de Serbie. 

La Division a en voie de preparation plusieurs ouvrages. Le premier est un 
recueil et une publication de tous les traites generaux et speciaux d'arbitrage et 
en ce qui concerne notamment les traites du dix-neuvieme siecle, la Fondation 
serait tres reconnaissante aux publicistes de l'Amerique latine s'ils voulaient bien 
fournir des informations sur certaines questions de cette nature qu'ils connaissent 
le mieux et qu'ils sont peut-etre les seuls a connaitre, et les Trustees de la Fonda- 
tion apprecieraient comme une tres grande faveur de la part des Gouvernements 
de l'Amerique latine s'ils voulaient bien leur fournir des copies de ces traites, 
attendu qu'il est vraiment tres difficile de se procurer a toute epoque des textes 
absolument exacts et meritant toute confiance. Tous les exemples connus 
d'arbitrages internationaux devront etre rassembles et publies sous forme de rap- 
ports juridiques et les series seront continuees indefiniment. C'est Monsieur le 
Professeur John Bassett Moore, cette haute autorite bien connue dans les ques- 
tions de Droit International et d' Arbitrage, ancien Professeur a l'Universite de 
Columbia et actuellement conseiller au Departement d'Etat des Etats-Unis, qui 
s'est charge de cette oeuvre monumentale et il s'en occupe activement. 

L'Institut de Droit International, qui joue maintenant le role de conseiller de 
la Division de Droit International est celui qui a ete cree en Europe en 1873 ; mais 
bien que cet Institut represente la "conscience juridique universelle", plusieurs 
jurisconsultes ont senti le besoin d'une institution qui devrait etre le representant 
de la conscience juridique de l'Amerique, etudier les problemes interessant par- 
ticulierement le nouveau monde, et envisager au point de vue americain les ques- 
tions generates du droit des gens. 

Comme vous le savez, un Institut Americain de Droit International a ete 
fonde en 1912 par Monsieur Alejandro Alvarez de Chili, et Monsieur le Docteur 
James Brown Scott, le Directeur de la Division de Droit International de la 
Fondation. Cet institut envisage la formation de Societes Nationales de Droit 
International dans chaque pays americain pour etre affiliees avec lui et pour 
travailler en harmonie avec lui, pour etudier des problemes americains, en vue de 
developper le droit international, de faire connaitre ses principes dans tous les 
pays et de contribuer aux relations pacifiques des pays, parce que ces relations, si 
une opinion publique eclairee les exige, seront basees sur les principes d'un 
systeme equitable et hautement developpe de droit international. 

L'Institut Americain de Droit International sera compose de cinq publicistes 
de chacune des Republiques americaines choisis par les membres fondateurs de 
l'lnstitut parmi les membres des Societes Nationales et tout membre de la Societe 
Nationale, en vertu de cette qualite de membre, a le droit de se faire inscrire 
comme Membre Associe de l'lnstitut, et de participer a ses travaux. 

De crainte d'avoir l'air de vous exposer dans un langage exagere les buts et 
objets de l'lnstitut Americain de Droit International, dont Monsieur Elihu Root 
est le President d'Honneur, qu'il me soit permis de vous citer un passage d'un 



116 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL, SUR 

erudit hollandais, Professeur de Droit International, qu'on peut supposer traiter 
cette question avec plus de detachement. 

Apres avoir parle du grand exemple que l'Amerique a donne au monde en 
poursuivant la codification du droit international, il dit: 

Le second exemple nous est fourni par un Institut essentiellement 
scientifique mais a peine inferieur en valeur morale. Les rapprochements 
graduels entre le Nord et le Sud ont cree un nouvel instrument de progres. 
Les projets d'une union pan-americaine, qui ont ete longtemps lances sans 
jamais aboutir, ont enfin donne un resultat sur le terrain paisible des etudes, 
grace au talent et a la perseverance de deux hommes illustres des deux 
moities de l'hemisphere. Dans le cours de l'annee passee Monsieur James 
Brown Scott, le jurisconsulte renomme des Etats-Unis et Monsieur Alejandro 
Alvarez, ancien professeur et Conseiller au Ministere des Affaires Etrangeres 
du Chili, qui en Juin 1912 avait exerce une influence des plus salutaires a 
Rio sur le grand pro jet de condification, apres une rencontre personnelle 
a Washington, y ont fonde en Octobre 1912, l'lnstitut Americain de Droit 
International. Cet Institut a pour but: 1. de contribuer au developpement 
du droit international; 2. de consolider le sentiment commun d'une justice 
internationale ; 3. de faire accepter partout Taction pacifique dans le reglement 
des contestations internationales entre les Etats americains. 

Cette idee lumineuse naquit de la conviction qu'il vaut mieux propager 
les notions de droit et de justice par une infusion lente mais constante dans 
les tetes et dans les coeurs des peuples, que par des negotiations diplomatiques, 
qui ne reposent pas sur un sentiment populaire general. 

Si Ton prend en consideration que le mouvement pacifiste en Amerique 
est beaucoup plus universel qu'ailleurs, qu'il repose soit sur un fond religieux, 
soit sur une communaute d'interets et de tendances dignes d'envie, on saura 
apprecier cette preuve nouvelle d'un progres vigoureux qui nous est parvenue 
de 1 'autre cote de l'Ocean ; il ranime notre espoir et redouble nos efforts 
Monsieur Root et ses collegues attachent la plus haute importance a 
l'etablissement et au fonctionnement heureux de l'lnstitut Americain de Droit 
International et de ses societes affiliees dans chacun des pays de l'Amerique. 

La Fondation paye actuellement une subvention au plus ancien Institut, 
fonde en Europe. Cette subvention est destinee a couvrir les frais de voyage des 
membres de l'lnstitut, les depenses faites par les commissions et la publication 
de leurs travaux. Le nouvel Institut peut compter recevoir de la Fondation, 
aussitot que les societes nationales seront defmitivement constitutes, son aide 
financiere, et qu'il sera mis sur un pied d'egalite avec l'ancien Institut. 

Le Journal Americain de Droit International, qui, avec quelques legeres 
modifications pourrait devenir l'organe de l'lnstitut Americain, regoit deja une 
subvention annuelle de la Fondation. 

Une autre institution a laquelle la Division de Droit International s'interesse 
beaucoup et qu'elle subventionnerait et maintiendrait est l'Academie de Droit 
International que Ton propose d'etablir a la Have. 

Une proposition a ete faite a la Seconde Conference de la Paix a la Haye 
en vue de creer une Academie de Droit International et elle a ete developpee par 
le President de la Conference. Aucune resolution n'a ete prise alors, mais 



APENDICE III 117 

l'idee s'est imposee elle-meme aux piiblicistes de toutes les nationalites. Un 
Comite de publicistes hollandais, sous la presidence de Monsieur Asser, dont 
nous deplorons tous le recent deces, a pris l'initiative qu'une telle Academie soit 
creee et installee au Palais de la Paix a la Haye. 

Le Tribunal d'Arbitrage appliquerait le droit, qui aura ete systematiquement 
enseigne a 1' Academie et le merveilleux Palais, qui vient d'etre officiellement 
inaugure au mois d'aout dernier, deviendrait, en effet, un Temple de la Paix, un 
foyer du Droit International. 

La proposition de Monsieur Asser envisage pour les mois d'ete, un enseigne- 
ment systematique de droit international et des matieres afferentes par une 
faculte specialement constituee et changeante, au point de vue des professeurs 
choisis parmi les publicistes de differents pays. Des cours seraient donnes et 
des conferences seraient faites sur des sujets importants et opportuns par des 
publicistes qui, en plus d'un long entrainement theorique, ont acquis une grande 
experience dans la pratique du droit international. 

II est egalement propose que les Gouvernements s'interessent a l'Academie 
et qu'ils soient invites a designer par voie diplomatique des fonctionnaires 
appropries des divers departements ministeriels pour suivre les cours de 
l'Academie. 

L'Institution serait unique par ses sessions d'ete, unique par sa petite faculte 
variable et unique par son corps d'etudiants accourus des divers pays' etrangers et 
des classes officielles. Les conferences publiees sous forme de brochures en- 
richiraient la litterature du droit international ; le droit lui-meme serait traite de 
divers points de vue et par des professeurs competents, dont un seulement serait 
choisi a la fois d'un pays. Le corps des etudiants serait recrute de divers pays 
et peu a peu ils exerceraient une influence dans leurs pays respectifs, de sorte que 
l'Academie aiderait eminemment a etablir une meilleure comprehension des droits 
et des devoirs internationaux et a disseminer les principes de justice. 

L'Academie, quand elle sera constituee, formera une institution separee et 
independante sous le controle d'un comite ou curatorium specialement norame, 
compose en premiere ligne d'anciens Presidents de l'lnstitut de Droit Inter- 
national. Ainsi organisee et administree, elle favorisera le but pour lequel la 
Fondation a ete creee, mais elle ne sera pas une agence directe de la Fondation, 
ni sous son controle. 

Monsieur Root m'a charge de vous soumettre le projet de cette Academie et 
de demander le concours de toutes les Republiques de l'Amerique latine, en vue 
de designer un ou plusieurs de leurs compatriotes pour assister aux conferences 
et aux cours d'instruction qui seront donnes a l'Academie quand elle sera etablie. 

Une question sur laquelle je suis charge d'attirer votre attention, est la 
formation de Comites Nationaux, pour examiner les matieres qui pourraient 
dument figurer et faire partie du programme de la prochaine Conference de la 
Haye; lesquels Comites se mettront eux-memes en communication avec les 
Comites analogues formes dans tous les pays americains. 



118 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEE SUR 

C'est un fait generalement connu que la deuxieme Conference de la Paix a 
la Haye en 1907 a propose la reunion de la troisieme Conference a une periode 
approximativement egale a celle qui s'est ecoulee entre la premiere et la seconde 
Conference, c'est-a-dire, apres huit ans, de sorte que si la proposition est mise a 
execution, nous pouvons nous attendre a ce que la troisieme Conference se tienne 
approximativement en 191 5. 

II a ete en outre stipule dans la proposition susmentionnee qu'environ deux 
ans avant la reunion probable de la Conference, un Comite preparatoire inter- 
national serait constitue par un accord commun entre les Puissances. 

II est evident que les divers pays qui seront invites a la Haye, devront 
examiner ces questions importantes avant la constitution du Comite Preparatoire 
International et il parait opportun, sinon necessaire, que chaque Gouvernement 
nomme un Comite pour examiner ces questions en detail, pour que les Gou- 
vernements soient a meme de pouvoir faire leurs propositions en toute connais- 
sance de cause. 

Comme les Republiques americaines le considereront comme un droit d'assis- 
ter a la Conference, il est de leur devoir de se preparer d'avance pour une active 
participation a ses operations. lis devraient chercher a augmenter l'utilite de 
chaque conference successive, en y faisant des contributions importantes et cela 
peut uniquement etre fait, s'ils se preparent soigneusement a l'avance pour la 
reunion. 

On ne s'attend pas a ce que les Etats americains presentent a la Conference 
une serie de projets en commun ou qu'ils f assent des propositions en commun, 
mais si les divers Gouvernements se communiquaient leurs vues de fagon a 
arriver a un accord sur les questions qui a leur opinion devraient etre presentees 
et qui pourraient former l'objet de traites internationaux, cela faciliterait con- 
siderablement les affaires. 

L/eminent publiciste francais, le Professeur A. de Lapradelle, se refere dans 
les termes suivants a la cooperation apportee par les republiques americaines a 
la preparation des questions a discuter a la Haye : 

La seconde Conference de la Paix, en appelant a la Haye tous les 
Etats de l'Amerique, a permis de constater entre eux, sur certains points, 
quelques disaccords. lis n'ont pas tous la meme conception, ni du droit 
de la paix, ni du droit de la guerre. Mais comment persuader l'Europe de 
la justesse des vues americaines si l'Amerique n'en est pas deja prealable- 
ment convaincue? Et, d'autre part, de quelle autorite les propositions 
americaines ne seront-elles pas revetues quand elles emaneront non pas de 
tel ou tel Etat, mais de l'Amerique tout entiere, qui, les ayant etudiees dans 
l'lnstitut americain de droit international, les aura votees dans les Conferences 
pan-americaines ? 

Qu'il me soit permis de faire une derniere citation du Senateur Root: 

L' Administration de la Fondation se rend bien compte que les progres 
dans l'oeuvfe qu'ils ont entreprise seront necessairement lents et que les 
resultats les plus substantiels n'apparaitront que dans un avenir eloigne. Nous 



APENDICE III 119 

avons a compter avec des habitudes, des tendances profondement enracinees 
dans la nature humaine, car elles s'y sont developpees au cours de milliers 
d'annees ; tout ce que peut esperer faire une generation c'est d'amener grad- 
uellement quelque changement dans la maniere de vivre. Toute evaluation 
d'un pareil travail et de ses resultats ne saurait trouver sa mesure dans la vie 
ephemere des individus mais dans la vie seculaire des nations. Mais quelque 
maigres que soient ses resultats immediats, il n'y a pas de plus noble objet pour 
l'activite humaine que d'exercer son influence sur les tendances de la race, 
de facon qu'elle se meuve dans la direction de la civilisation et de l'humanite 
et s'eloigne de la barbaric C'est pour les faire participer avec nous a 
cette noble tache que nous vous demandons d'inviter nos amis de l'Amerique 
du Sud avec l'assurance la plus sincere et sans reserve de notre haute 
consideration et de notre profond respect. 

Excellences, Mesdames, Messieurs, avant de terminer, je tiens a vous expri- 
mer encore une fois mes remerciements les plus sinceres pour le grand honneur 
qui m'est fait par la Faculte de Droit, ainsi que ma prof onde reconnaissance pour 
votre aimable et sympathique accueil. 



APENDICE IV 
Uruguay 



Discurso del Ministro Americano, Hon. Nicolay Grevstad, 

Pronunciado en el Lunch Dado for dicho Senor a Mr. Bacon en el Club Uruguay, 

Montevideo, 20 de Octubre de 1913 

Excelencias, Senor as y Sefiores: 

i Demos la mas cordial bienvenida a nuestros distinguidos huespedes, heraldos 
de la paz y de la amistad fraternal! Ya sabemos todos que el senor Roberto 
Bacon viene como representante de la Donation Carnegie por la Paz Internacional. 
Sabemos tambien que nunca ha sido mas necesario que en el dia de hoy, para el 
mundo entero, el hacer la guerra de la razon contra la guerra de las armas. Es un 
signo sumamente propicio que un hombre tan distinguido como nuestro huesped 
se haya dedicado al trabajo internacional por la paz. L,e podemos decir que el 
Uruguay esta listo para oir su buen mensaje. Podemos asegurarle que el Uruguay, 
rico en su tierra inmejorable, en su pueblo fuerte, inteligente y progresista, en 
su honor comercial y financiero tan limpio como el mismo oro que por tantos 
afios ha formado la base de su sistema monetario, el Uruguay dara, con toda 
sinceridad, la enhorabuena al senor Bacon, a su digna esposa, a su sefiorita hija 
y a sus amigos. ; Los saludamos ! 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

"Os agradezco cordialmente, senor Ministro, vuestra bienvenida y la oportu- 
nidad que me habeis proporcionado de encontrar aqui a paisanos nuestros en 
union armoniosa con tan distinguido grupo de ciudadanos del Uruguay. Recibid, 
Excelencias, el testimonio de mi agradecimiento sincero por vuestro carifioso 
recibimiento y las finas atenciones que nos habeis prodigado a mi y a mi familia. 
En los Estados Unidos de Norte America, sabemos muy bien que es cierto todo 
lo que acaba de decir el senor Ministro en alabanza del Uruguay. Viniendo de 
parte de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional, os traigo los mas 
afectuosos saludos de su eminente presidente y vuestro cordial amigo, el Hon. 
Elihu Root, mi estimado maestro, a quien quiero y a quien vosotros, sefiores, 
estoy seguro, tambien apreciais. Se ha hablado de mi mision como mision de 
amistad y de buena voluntad. Es verdad y eso me enorgullece, pero existiendo 
ya lazos estrechos de amistad, se puede ir mas alia. De mi parte, yo preferiria 



APENDICB IV 121 

que fuese ella considerada como mision de cooperacion y de concurso entre 
viejos amigos, para trazar las vias practicas por las cuales podamos trabajar 
juntos, y marchar adelante hacia el progreso, hacia el ideal de la humanidad, 
siempre hacia mas luz, por el triunfo del derecho en el mundo, sustituyendo el 
llamamiento a la f uerza por el llamamiento a la justicia ; hacia una opinion inter- 
national que sera la verdadera sancion del Derecho international. Creemos que 
hay varias vias practicas en que puede lograrse tal cooperacion con poca demora, 
y las cuales espero explicar esta noche. Exponeros esos planes y solicitar en 
ellos vuestra valiosa ayuda: ese es el objeto de la mision que traigo. Me encanta 
ver en esta sala entrelazados los colores de nuestras banderas, las del Uruguay 
y de los Estados Unidos. Hago votos porque, asi como los pabellones, queden 
eternamente entrelazados, en amistad intima, los corazones de nuestros pueblos. 
Brindo, senores, por la Republica del Uruguay, por su continua amistad con 
nuestro pais, y por estas sefioras que nos han honrado con su presencia." 



Discurso de Mr. Bacon 

Pronunciado en la Recepcion dada En el Ateneo, 
Montevideo, 20 de Octubre de 1913 

Senoras, Senores: 

Dispensadme si me atrevo a dirigiros la palabra en vuestro bello idioma, cuya 
cadencia me encanta, pero el cual lamento no conocer. 

Me siento profundamente conmovido por la extraordinaria manifestation 
de cortesia que me habeis dado con invitarme a esta reunion, bajo los auspicios 
de vuestros prohombres en el mundo intelectual, en este templo de las ciencias y 
de las letras. 

No encuentro palabras para expresar mis sentimientos de alto aprecio por 
las elocuentes frases de vuestro insigne orador, sabio, poeta y estadista. 

En mi propio nombre, y en el del egregio caballero que me envia, el senador 
Elihu Root, os doy las mas expresivas gracias por vuestras amables palabras de 
bienvenida, por vuestra cordial recepcion, y por las bondadosas expresiones 
dedicadas a mi humilde persona tan poco merecidas. 

Es para mi un gran placer visitar, aunque sea por pocos dias, demasiado 
cortos para mi gusto, algunos de los pueblos y de los paises de la America del 
Sur ; porque siempre ha sido uno de mis mas vehementes deseos, que aun no he 
podido realizar mas que parcialmente, ver con mis propios ojos vuestros admir- 
ables paises, las maravillas de vuestra civilization, encontrarme de nuevo con 
amigos que he conocido y querido en otras partes del mundo, y de hacer aqui mas 
amistades, que agregaran un nuevo encanto a la vida y de las cuales guardare 
un recuerdo que no sera ni borrado ni oscurecido por el tiempo ni por la dis- 
tancia. Vengo encargado de un mensaje de buena voluntad de parte de vuestro 
amigo afectuoso, vuestro gran admirador, el Sr. Elihu Root. Es por su solicitud, 



122 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

a la cual se adelantaron mis propios deseos, que tengo el honor de presentarme 
ante vosotros. Quisiera deciros todo lo que el mismo os diria, si estuviera aqui 
presente, si, tomando la palabra, os dirigiera el saludo de su antigua amistad; 
las expresiones diferirian, quizas, pero el espiritu que las animaria, os aseguro, 
seria absolutamente el mismo. 

Quisiera que me considerarais como inaugurando una serie de visitas inter- 
nacionales que se seguiran, sin interruption y seran de mutua ventaja para noso- 
tros, poniendo en relaciones a los representantes autorizados de la sociedad y del 
mundo intelectual del sur con aquellos del norte. Os invito tambien a cooperar 
en el establecimiento de instituciones internacionales que esperamos lleguen a ser 
centros de buena voluntad, que desarrollaran y popularizaran principios justos y 
progresivos de Derecho internacional — de los cuales tiene que depender la paz 
internacional — y que, en distintas maneras, directa e indirectamente, por un inter- 
cambio de pensamientos y de ideas y por una combination feliz de esfuerzos, 
tendran por resultado el fortalecer los lazos de amistad que indican y requieren 
un pasado comun, instituciones comunes y un fin comiin. 

La historia y la naturaleza han hecho nacer y crecer un sentimiento profundo 
de solidaridad, no solamente entre los Estados de la America Latina, sino tambien 
entre las Republicas del Sur y los Estados Unidos. Es necesario mantener y 
fortalecer esta solidaridad, la cual, atendiendo a su doble origen, une indisoluble- 
mente las naciones del Nuevo Continente, en el pasado, en el presente y en el 
porvenir. 

Es suficiente contemplar la historia politica del Nuevo Mundo para ver el 
interes constante que se han tornado los Estados Unidos en la lucha emprendida 
por los Estados de la America Latina, primero para desligarse de la metropoli, y 
luego para defender la independencia conquistada contra toda tentativa de con- 
quista de parte de las potencias europeas. Es suficiente tambien recordar que 
despues de la emancipation, los Estados Unidos han proporcionado a los Estados 
latinos las formas y las bases de sus instituciones politicas, notablemente de su 
regimen republicano y democratic©, en una epoca cuando las vie j as instituciones 
de Europa estaban lejos de responder a las ideas de la libertad y a las condiciones 
sociales de las dos Americas. 

Todo este pasado de gloria en la historia del Nuevo Mundo debe fortalecer 
de dia en dia los vinculos indestructibles de solidaridad que han unido las naciones 
americanas desde su nacimiento a la vida politica. 

La naturaleza consolida todavia mas la obra de la historia. La situation 
continental de los Estados del Nuevo Mundo ha hecho nacer una serie de pro- 
blemas comunes a todos los Estados de este continente, creando asi entre ellos 
nuevos vinculos de solidaridad. Gracias al progreso de la civilization y al per- 
feccionamiento de los medios de comunicacion, se ha comprendido, en nuestros 
dias, la imperiosa necesidad de resolver con uniformidad los problemas nacidos 
de las situaciones y condiciones especiales del Nuevo Continente. 



APENDICE IV 123 

Adelantandose de algiin modo a Europa, donde las grandes potencias no 
se reunian sino despues de guerras y para determinar las condiciones de la paz, 
todos los Estados de la America se han reunido en conferencias paciflcas para 
tratar cuestiones comunes a todo su continente ; de donde viene el nombre y el 
origen de las Conferencias Panamericanas. Estas conferencias han sido fructuo- 
sisimas: se han estudiado un numero determinado de problemas de interes ame- 
ricano y se han firmado convenciones importantes con el objeto de desarrollar 
la vida social e intelectual del Nuevo Mundo. Ademas, los representantes de 
los diversos Estados americanos han llegado asi a conocerse mejor y han podido 
darse cuenta de la multiplicidad e importancia de los vinculos que unen a todos 
los Estados americanos. 

Los sentimientos de solidaridad y de fraternidad que agrupan en una union 
de intereses los Estados del Nuevo Mundo, deben producir una obra de union 
y de concordia. Ya se ha abierto camino, se han obtenido numerosos y fertiles 
resultados ; es necesario, pues, seguir adelante y realizar mas y mas la buena 
inteligencia y la harmonia. Es preciso, sobre todo, disipar el concepto erroneo 
que parece existir todavia en algunas partes del Sur respecto a la politica de los 
Estados Unidos. Como lo declaro solemnemente mi ilustre maestro el sefior 
Root nuestro pais desea ante todo, que la paz y la prosperidad reinen en la Ame- 
rica Latina, a fin de fortalecer y estrechar los vinculos de amistad y de fraterni- 
dad que deben unir a todos los pueblos americanos. 

Tengo el honor de dirigirme a vosotros no meramente en mi propio nombre, 
sino en representacion de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional, de 
la cual es presidente el Sr. Root, y de invitaros en su nombre y en el de los 
Sindicos de la Fundacion, a cooperar con esta por todos los medios que creais 
posibles y convenientes. 

En otras palabras, el deseo del Sr. Root es el de conseguir en cuanto sea 
posible el interes y la simpatia de los directores de la opinion en Sur America, 
en las diversas empresas para el mejoramiento de las relaciones internacionales 
que la Fundacion trata de promover, de modo que puedan prestar su concurso 
en forma practica, en la obra emprendida. 

La estimation y la amistad que los Sindicos de la Fundacion abrigan por los 
pueblos de la America Latina y por numerosos distinguidos latinoamericanos, 
con los cuales llevan relaciones agradables de amistad personal, les hacen desear 
que el trabajo de la Fundacion pueda recibir la misma cooperacion activa y util 
en Sur America que ya ha obtenido en Europa. 

Me permitire explicar brevemente el trabajo de la Fundacion, y referirme 
a algunos proyectos practicos en los cuales el sefior Root y sus asociados so- 
licitan especialmente vuestra cooperacion. 

Lamento encontrarme obligado a limitarme a los detalles escuetos y poco 
interesantes en este momento en que, bajo el encanto, bajo la inspiration de la 
amable benevolencia de vuestra acogida y de vuestra deliciosa hospitalidad, en 
este ambiente de libertad, consagrada por tantas luchas, por tantos heroes, querria 



124 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

hablar y volver a hablar de nuestros ideales, de nuestras esperanzas de las 
visiones sonadas por vuestro Artigas y nuestro Washington. Porque me siento 
orgulloso, sefior, de compartir vuestro optimismo, y estoy intimamente convencido 
de que, a pesar de las nubes acumuladas por la desconfianza y el escepticismo, 
estamos en visperas de un gran movimiento progresivo en la evolucion del 
liberalismo del mundo, y que ya podemos ver apuntar la aurora de un dia mas 
puro. 

Los principios, la filosofia de la vida del siglo pasado no nos bastaran ya. 
Necesitaremos nuevas leyes de economia politica, nuevos principios de Derecho 
internacional. 

El trabajo de la Fundacion se encuentra repartido en tres divisiones :* 

La Division de Relaciones y Educacion. 

La Division de Economia Politica e Historia. 

La Division de Derecho Internacional. 

Para ayudar a la primera Division, el director de la misma, doctor Butler, 
formo un Comite Consultivo de hombres de estado y publicistas europeos, y un 
cuerpo de corresponsales. 

Nos hemos preguntado si seria grato a los "leaders" del pensamiento en 
la America Latina crear un organismo algo parecido al Comite Consultivo general 
que ya se ha formado en Europa. 

La Division ha inauguardo las visitas de hombres eminentes, y un inter- 
cambio de profesores con el Japon. Espero, por mi parte, obtener en la Ame- 
rica del Sur opiniones y datos que nos permitan empezar, proximamente, el 
intercambio de profesores y estudiantes con la America Latina. 

Bien quisiera la Fundacion que el intercambio empezase inmediatamente 
con el envio anual de dos sabios eminentes, o publicistas de la America del Sur 
a los Estados Unidos, y dos americanos del norte a la America del Sur. Cada 
uno de estos sefiores dedicaria su tiempo a dos instituciones establecidas en el 
continente que visitara. 

Una de las tareas a que esta Division da mucha importancia es la relativa 
al establecimiento de asociaciones para la conciliacion internacional en el mundo 
entero. 

Place algunos anos, la asociacion madre fue formada en Paris por el sefior 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant. Existen ramales en los Estados Unidos, Ale- 
mania e Inglaterra, y se estan formando otras. 

Mis instrucciones me encargan apelar al concurso de las personas inte- 
resadas en los paises que tengo el honor de visitar, de organizar ramales de la 
Conciliacion Internacional, en relacion con la sociedad madre en Paris. Esas 
asociaciones, aunque locales, tienen, sin embargo, una mision internacional, y 
se proponen crear, mediante sus reuniones y los utiles folletos que regularmente 
publican, sentimientos amistosos hacia los pueblos de los paises extrangeros. 

*Nota. — Vease la nota en la pagina in. 



APENDICE IV 125 

"La Asociacion para la Conciliacion Internacional," dice el Baron l'Estour- 
nelles de Constant, "no es una asociacion sentimental, humanitaria ; significa un 
progreso real, perseguido en el interes nacional de cada pais, particularmente de los 
paises jovenes que tienen necesidad de consagrar todas sus fuerzas y sus recursos 
a su desarrollo. 

La Conciliacion es el indispensable complemento moderno del esfuerzo 
economico de todo pais civilizado. \ Desarrollar la prosperidad nacional al am- 
paro de las buenas relaciones internacionales ; ese es nuestro empefio, resumido 
en nuestra divisa : Pro patria per orbis concordiam. 

Organizad el arbitraje de preferencia a la guerra; pero preferid siempre 
la conciliacion al arbitraje. Tal es nuestra conception, nuestra norma de vida. 

La guerra antes que la servidumbre. 

El arbitraje antes que la guerra. 

La conciliacion antes que el arbitraje. 

El arbitraje repara; la conciliacion evita. 

La conciliacion reemplaza la esteril ruina de los antagonismos con el 
fecundo espiritu de la cooperation." 

La Fundacion esta dispuesta a tomar a su cargo los gastos originados por 
la organization de esas sociedades. 

Me ocupare ahora en la labor de la Division de Economia Politica y de 
Historia. 

La tarea de esta Division es : "Alentar investigaciones y estudios cientificos 
y profundos sobre las causas de la guerra, y sobre los medios practicos de pre- 
venirla y evitarla." 

Hace dos anos se organizo en Berna, Suiza, una Conferencia a la cual se 
invito a economistas y publicistas distinguidos de toda Europa, para que exami- 
naran las cuestiones susceptibles de ser debida y practicamente estudiadas, y 
elaborar un programa de ensayo para la Division. 

Ya se ha asignado un gran numero de temas a especialistas elegidos en los 
paises a los cuales se contrae su tarea; algunos estudios estan ya terminados y 
dentro de algunos anos la Fundacion habra publicado una serie de folletos no- 
tables sobre todas las fases del programa y que seran en el lenguaje del sefior 
Root "useful to mankind." 

El sefior professor Kinley, un viejo y sincero amigo de la America Latina, 
que represento a los Estados Unidos en el Cuarto Congreso Panamericano en 
Buenos Aires, ha sido nombrado miembro de la Comision de Investigaciones y 
se consagrara mas especialmente a los problemas que interesan a la America 
Latina. Ha resuelto visitar la America Latina el afio proximo para cambiar ideas 
con los directores de la opinion, a fin de conocer su juicio y si es posible ase- 
gurarse su concurso para proponer y ejecutar los proyectos que pudieran re- 
comendarle. 

La tercera Division es la de Derecho Internacional. 

Esta Division, como las otras, ha considerado necesario crear una organi- 
zacion especial y asegurar los servicios de un cuerpo de abogados consejeros. 



126 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

El Instituto de Derecho International se compone — apenas hay necesidad 
de decirlo — de los mas eminentes jurisconsultos de todas las naciones, y la 
Fundacion ha pedido al Instituto, que asuma el caracter de consejero de la Di- 
vision de Derecho International. 

El Instituto acepto el cargo y eligo una comision que ha ejercido sus fun- 
ciones como consejera del director. 

La Division prepara varias obras. La primera es una coleccion, destinada 
a la publication de todos los tratados generales y especiales de arbitraje, y en 
lo que se refiere particularmente al siglo diecinueve, la Fundacion quedara muy 
agradecida a los publicistas de la America Latina que quieran enviarle noticias 
sobre ciertas cuestiones que conocen y que acaso son los unicos en reconocer, 
y los directores de la Fundacion apreciaran como un senalado favor, de parte 
de los gobiernos de la America Latina, si estos consienten en darles copias de 
esos tratados, siendo en verdad dificil procurarse textos autenticos y fidedignos. 
Todos los ejemplos conocidos de arbitraje internacional seran coleccionados y 
publicados con una noticia critica. 

El Instituto de Derecho Internacional que desempena ahora el papel de 
consejero de la Division Internacional fue creado en Europa en mil ochocientos- 
setentitres, y aunque este Instituto representa la "conciencia juridica interna- 
cional" varios jurisconsultos han sentido la necesidad de una institution que 
fuera la representante de la conciencia juridica de America, y que estudiara los 
problemas que mas particularmente interesan al Nuevo Mundo, y encarara, desde 
un punto de vista americano, las cuestiones generales del Derecho de gentes. 

Como sabeis, el doctor Alejandro Alvarez, de Chile, y el Dr. James Brown 
Scott, director de la Division de Derecho Internacional de la Fundacion, estable- 
cieron hace un afio un Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional. Este Ins- 
tituto se propone formar sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional en 
los paises panamericanos, afiliados a el y que trabajen por estudiar los pro- 
blemas americanos, hacer conocer sus principios, y contribuir a las relaciones 
pacificas de los paises. 

Por temor de pareceros exagerado cuando os hablo de los fines y pro- 
positos del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional cuyo presidente honora- 
rio es el Sr. Elihu Root, seame permitido citaros un pasaje de un erudito ho- 
landes, profesor de Derecho internacional, a quien se puede suponer que trata 
esta cuestion con desinteres. 

Despues de haber hablado del gran ejemplo que ha dado la America al 
mundo, procurando la codification del Derecho internacional, dice : 

"Un Instituto esencialmente cientifico, mas apenas inferior en valor moral, 
nos proporciona el segundo ejemplo. Este Instituto tiene por fin: Primero, 
contribuir al desarrollo del Derecho internacional; segundo, consolidar el senti- 
miento comun de una justicia internacional; tercero, hacer aceptar en todas 
partes la action pacifica en el arreglo de las controversias internacionales entre 
los Estados Americanos. Esta idea luminosa nacio de la conviction de que vale 



APENDIC3 IV 127 

mas propagar las nociones del derecho y de la justicia por medio de una in- 
fusion lenta pero constante en los cerebros y los corazones de los pueblos que 
por medio de negociaciones diplomaticas que no descansan sobre un sentimiento 
popular general. 

"Si se tiene en cuenta que el movimiento pacifista es mas universal en Ame- 
rica que en otras partes, que descansa, ya sobre un fondo religioso, ya sobre 
una comunion de intereses o de tendencias laudables, se podra apreciar este 
nuevo indicio de un progreso vigoroso que nos llega de allende el oceano, y 
que reanima nuestras esperanzas y redobla nuestros esfuerzos." 

El Sr. Root y sus colegas dan la mayor importancia a la fundacion y el buen 
funcionamiento del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional y de sus so- 
ciedades afiliadas en todos los paises de America. 

La Fundacion pasa actualmente al Instituto antiguo, fundado en Europa, 
un subsidio destinado a cubrir los gastos de viaje de sus miembros, los gastos 
de las comisiones y la publicacion de sus trabajos. El nuevo Instituto puede 
contar con que recibira de la Fundacion, en cuanto se hayan constituido de- 
finitivamente las sociedades nacionales, una ayuda pecuniaria, y que estara en 
un pie de igualdad con el antiguo Instituto. La Revista Americana de Derecho 
Internacional que con algunas ligeras modificaciones podria convertirse en 
organo del Instituto Americano, recibe ya un subsidio anual de la Fundacion. 

Otra institucion por la cual la Division de Derecho Internacional se inte- 
resa mucho y a la cual subvencionaria y mantendria es la Academia de Derecho 
Internacional que se proyecta establecer en La Haya. 

En la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz, en La Haya, se presento una mocion, 
a fin de crear esa Academia. No se tomo entonces ningun acuerdo, pero la 
idea se ha impuesto por los publicistas de todos los paises. Un comite de pub- 
licistas holandeses, presidido por el Sr. Asser, cuyo reciente fallecimiento la- 
mentamos, tomo la iniciativa de crear y de instalar esa Academia en el Palacio 
de la Paz, de La Haya. 

La proposition del sefior Asser tiene en vista la ensenanza sistematica, del 
Derecho internacional y de las materias correlativas por medio de una Facultad 
constituida al efecto y cuyos profesores, elegidos entre los publicistas de dife- 
rentes paises, se turnarian. Se darian cursos y conferencias sobre asuntos im- 
portantes y oportunos por publicistas que, aparte de un amplio conocimiento 
teorico, hayan adquirido una larga experiencia en la practica del Derecho 
internacional. 

Propuso tambien el sefior Asser interesar a los gobiernos, invitandolos a 
designar, funciortarios competentes de los diversos departamentos ministeriales 
que seguirian los cursos. 

La institucion seria unica por su pequena facultad variable, unica por su 
cuerpo de estudiantes procedentes de todos los paises, unica por sus clases especiales. 

La Academia favoreceria los propositos de la Fundacion, pero no sera una 
agencia directa ni estara bajo su control. 



128 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

El Sr. Root me ha encargado que os presente el proyecto de esta Academia 
y que solicite el concurso de todas las naciones latinoamericanas, a fin de de- 
signar uno o varios de los ciudadanos que asistan a las conferencias y a los 
cursos que se daran en la Academia. 

Una cuestion sobre la cual debo llamaros la atencion es la formacion de 
comisiones nacionales para considerar los asuntos que podrian formar parte 
del programa de la proxima Conferencia de La Haya, comisiones que se pondran 
en comunicacion con las que se formen en todos los paises americanos. 

Es generalmente conocido el hecho de que la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz 
reunida en La Haya propuso que la tercera se reuniera ocho anos mas tarde, 
lapso igual al que medio entre la primera y la segunda, de suerte que si se 
cumple esta proposition, la proxima Conferencia se reunira en mil novecientos 
quince. Estipulose ademas que uno o dos anos antes de esa reunion probable 
se constituiria un comite preparatorio mediante un acuerdo comun de las po- 
tencias. 

Es evidente que los diversos paises invitados deberan examinar esas cues- 
tiones importantes antes de la constitution del comite preparatorio y parece 
oportuno, si no necesario, que cada gobierno nombre un comite para examinar 
esas cuestiones en detalle, a fin de poder presentar sus proposiciones con todo 
conocimiento de causa. 

No es de creerse que los Estados americanos presenten a la Conferencia 
una serie de proyectos o de proposiciones en comun, pero si los gobiernos se 
comunicaran sus propositos de modo de llegar a un acuerdo sobre las cuestiones 
que a su juicio debian ser planteadas y que podrian ser objeto de tratados in- 
ternacionales, ello facilitaria considerablemente los debates. 

Son por lo tanto cinco los proyectos praticos en los cuales solicitamos 
vuestro concurso: 

El establecimiento en cada pais de una sociedad nacional de Derecho in- 
ternacional, afiliada al Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional ; 

El establecimiento en cada pais de una sociedad nacional de conciliacion 
internacional, afiliada a la Asociacion para la Conciliacion Internacional de Paris ; 

El nombramiento de comites nacionales para estudiar asuntos que puedan 
discutirse en la proxima Conferencia de La Haya y la intercomunicacion de 
tales comites entre todos los paises americanos ; 

El intercambio de profesores y de estudiantes entre las universidades norte- 
americanas y las suramericanas, y visitas de hombres prominentes; 

La participation de los gobiernos americanos en la proyectada Academia 
de Derecho Internacional en La Haya, enviando cada gobierno uno o mas 
estudiantes representativos para asistir a los cursos. 

Para tefminar seame permitido citar un parrafo de las instrucciones que 
me ha dado el sefior Elihu Root : — 



APENDICE IV 129 

"Los Sindicos de la Fundacion comprenden bien que el progreso en la 
obra que han emprendido debe necesariamente ser lento y que sus resultados 
mas substanciales se obtendran en el lejano porvenir. Estamos tratando con 
aptitudes e impulsos firmemente establecidos en la naturaleza humana a traves 
del desarrollo de miles de anos, y lo mas que una generacion puede esperar 
es fomentar el cambio gradual en las normas de conducta. Cualquier calculo 
de tal obra y sus resultados debe hacerse no en terminos de la vida humana 
individual, sino en terminos de la vida larga de las naciones. Aunque los re- 
sultados inmediatos no sean conspicuos, no puede haber ningun objeto mas 
noble en el esfuerzo humano que el ejercicio de una influencia sobre las tendencias 
de la raza, de modo que se mueva, aunque sea muy lentamente, en la direccion 
de la civilizacion y la humanidad y en direccion opuesta a la brutalidad sin 
sentido. Es para participar con nosotros en esta obra noble aunque incon- 
spicua, que le rogamos invite a nuestros amigos en Sur America con las se- 
guridades mas sinceras y sin reservas de nuestra distinguida consideration y 
afectuosa estimation." 

Excelentisimos senores y senoras : Antes de terminar quiero daros una 
vez mas las gracias por el gran honor que me ha sido dispensado, y expresaros 
mi profunda gratitud por vuestra amable y simpatica acogida. 



Discurso del Sr. Barbaroux, Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores, 

PRONUNCIADO EN EL BANQUETE DADO POR DICHO SENOR, A Mr. BACON EN EL CLUB URUGUAY, 

Montevideo, 21 de Octubre de 1913 

Senor Bacon: 

En vuestra conferencia de anoche, habeis sintetizado los propositos de 
vuestra mision, diciendonos que donde surge una nation, surge un derecho, y 
que en todos los casos de desinteligencia entre las naciones, la conciliation debe 
colocarse antes que el arbitraje, y el arbitraje antes que la guerra. 

Por mas que la realidad de los hechos mantenga todavia en un piano de 
idealidad el pensamiento de suprimir las soluciones de violencia entre los pueblos, 
todo esfuerzo serio, realizado en ese sentido, debe merecer nuestra aprobacion 
y nuestra simpatia. 

Ellas os han sido otorgadas ya, en forma bien elocuente, por los hombres 
mas representativos de nuestro ambiente intelectual, y al ofreceros esta noche, 
en nombre del Gobierno, esta demostracion de amistosa despedida, yo hago votos 
muy sinceros, por que los propositos cuya propaganda os ha confiado, con todo 
acierto, el eminente senor Root, puedan obtener, en un futuro bien cercano, el 
exito que merece esa grande iniciativa de confraternidad internacional. 

Os ruego, senoras y senores, que me acompaneis en este voto, y en la expre- 
sion de nuestros me j ores deseos por la felicidad del senor Bacon, la de su 
distinguida familia y la de sus dignos acompanantes. 



130 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Excelencias, Senor as, Senor es, Senor Ministro: 

Os doy las mas expresivas gracias, por las amables frases que habeis 
pronunciado en mi obsequio, por vuestras bondadosas expresiones referentes 
a mi querida patria, y por esta hermosa fiesta. Tambien deseo reiterar mi 
profundo agradecimiento por la cordial recepcion que me habeis dispensado 
vos, senor Ministro, y vuestros conciudadanos, con la finura y generosa hospitali- 
dad proverbial de la hidalga raza castellana, que tan pura se ha conservado en 
la hermosa tierra uruguaya. 

Nosotros los americanos del norte nos sentimos orgullosos de nuestras pro- 
gresistas hermanas del Sur. Entre estas, se destaca a nuestros ojos, la noble 
y simpatica Republica del Uruguay, tanto por la cultura de su pueblo, la viri- 
lidad y energia de su raza, como por el progreso que ha alcanzado. Abrigamos 
los mas cordiales deseos por vuestra prosperidad. Muy contentos de que las 
relaciones del pasado den prestigio a nuestro continente y de que nuestras rela- 
ciones actuales sean armoniosas, alentamos la esperanza de que esta buena ami- 
stad no solo se perpetue, sino que se afiance y cobre fuerzas en el porvenir, y 
que cada afio que pase nuestras relaciones lleguen a ser mas intimas, mas estre- 
chas, y mas fraternales. 

Las nobles palabras que pronuncio el senor Root en el mil novecientos seis, 
en el Congreso Pan Americano, siguen representando hoy los sentimientos, los 
ideales, del pueblo de los Estados Unidos con la misma verdad, con la misma 
fuerza, que tenian hace siete anos. Me gusta considerar sus memorables de- 
claraciones como la doctrina Root — y me sentiria orgulloso de considerarme 
digno de hablar de ella, como humilde apostol. 

Es la creencia de los Sindicos de la Fundacion Carnegie que los ideales de 
los directores del pensamiento pueden realizarse mas pronto, y el mundo se 
beneficiaria mas eficazmente, por un esfuerzo unido en ciertas definidas y practi- 
cas empresas. 

Si os asociais con nosotros en esta obra de union intelectual y de concordia, 
si los paises latinos de America y los Estados Unidos se unen en un continuo 
esfuerzo en pro del mejoramiento de las relaciones entre las naciones, si todos 
los paises de nuestro hemisferio trabajan al unisono hacia un ideal comun, en- 
tonces se creara una poderosa fuerza por el bien, que no podra dejar de bene- 
ficiar tanto a nuestro continente como al mundo entero, y a la humanidad. 

Una vez mas, Excelencia, os doy las gracias de todo corazon. Aunque a 
pesar mio solo he podido permanecer aqui tan corto tiempo, el adelanto de 
vuestra pais y la cordialidad de vuestra bienvenida, me han hecho una im- 
presion que recordare siempre. Al dejar esta linda ciudad, os diria, si lo per- 
mitis, que llevo afectos personales, y desearia que mi despedida no fuera de 
"adios", sino de "hasta la vista". 

Brindo por el senor Presidente de la Republica Oriental del Uruguay. 



APENDICE V 
Chile 



Reception en la Universidad de Chile 

Discurso del Rector de la Universidad, Dr. Domingo Amunategui Solar, Pronunciado 

EN EL MOMEN'fO DE ENTREGAR UN TlTULO A Mr. BACON, 

Santiago, 25 de Octubre de 1913 

La Universidad de Chile se congratula en recibir al honorable senor Bacon, 
y se honra con acogerlo en su seno, en calidad de miembro honorario de la Fa- 
cultad de Leyes y Ciencias Politicas. 

Os entrego, respetado senor, este diploma, que, espero, ha de servirnos 
de lazo de amistad con la Universidad a que perteneceis; como serial de 
reconocimiento por vuestros meritos personales; y en homenaje a la Fundacion 
Carnegie, de que sois digno representante. 



Discurso del Dr. Luis Barros Borgono, Decano de la Facultad de Filosoffa y 
Humanidades, Universidad de Chile, 

Santiago, 25 de Octubre de 1913 

Senor as y Senor es: 

Cumplo el honroso encargo que me ha confiado el Consejo de Instruction 
Piiblica de dar, en nombre de la Universidad de Chile, la salutation de bien- 
venida al ilustre estadista americano Mr. Robert Bacon, ex-Secretario de Estado 
de la Gran Republica, Antiguo Embajador de su patria en Paris y miembro 
prominente de la Universidad de Harvard, noble emisario de la politica de con- 
ciliation international, apostol de la paz y poderoso propulsor de la felicidad y 
del bienestar de los pueblos. 

Estoy cierto de que sobre todas sus honrosas distinciones, que son muchas, 
y sobre todas las grandes funciones oficiales que ha ejercido, ninguna habra de 
ser mas preciada para el grande y vigoroso espiritu de Mr. Bacon, y ninguna 
ha de contribuir a dar mas pura aureola a su brillante personalidad como la 
que hoy desempefia en representation de la Institution llamada a esparcir mayores 
beneficios entre todos los pueblos cultos y que con legitima satisfaction puede 
exhibir la patria de Carnegie como la obra humana que en epoca alguna de la 
historia se haya concebido en mayor honra de la civilization. 



132 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

El ideal de una politica solidaria internacional sofiado por filosofos y poetas, 
recibe ya de los hombres de estado de las grandes naciones la mas hermosa con- 
sagracion. 

El pensamiento que por primera vez en 1814 esboza el espiritu religioso de 
los cuaqueros de America para la formacion de una Sociedad de la paz, encuentra 
ambiente propicio en aquel gran centro de ebullition de las ideas, como lo fue 
la Francia en 1848. 

En medio de aquel aliento romantico de regeneration universal, en medio 
de todos aquellos sistemas economicos y sociales que bullen sacudidos por un 
espiritu nuevo, con fe en los principios de solidaridad general, nos muestra Paris 
el primer Congreso de la Paz verdaderamente internacional. 

Es la epoca en que Cobden, el apostol de la libertad comercial, sacude con 
su poderosa intelectualidad todo el regimen economico de la Inglaterra, armoni- 
zando los intereses de su patria con los grandes intereses de la humanidad. 

Es la epoca en que el espiritu profetico de Victor Hugo sabe presentir una 
humanidad, regida unicamente por las leyes de la equidad y de la justicia. 

El poeta anuncia, como un ensueno, la obra a que Mr. Carnegie, este gran 
obrero de la humanidad, habra de consagrar en nuestros dias sus energias de 
titan. 

Dia vendra, decia Hugo, en una de sus mas hermosas alocuciones, en 
que no habra mas campos de batalla que los mercados abiertos al comercio, 
a las inteligencias y a las ideas. Dia vendra en que el venerable arbitraje de 
un gran Senado soberano sera para la Europa lo que el Parlamente es para 
Inglaterra, lo que la Dieta es para Alemania, lo que la Asamblea Legislativa 
es para Francia. 

La segunda mitad del siglo XIX esta marcada por las Ligas de la Paz, en 
Paris y en Ginebra, las que con su eficaz apostolado se han difundido en cen- 
tenares de agrupaciones, generales y locales, por la Oficina Internacional de 
Berna, por el Instituto de Derecho Internacional y por las numerosas agrupa- 
ciones pacifistas que, bajo las ensenas gloriosas de Lemonier, de Passy, de 
Simon y de Estournel de Constant, recorren hoy el mundo en triunfal ascension 
hacia la meta senalada a sus esfuerzos gigantescos. 

Las grandes capitales resuenan cada afio con las voces de los hombres mas 
representativos de las diversas naciones que van sentando grado por grado la 
obra de acercamiento, solido y efectivo, entre los pueblos. 

Reunidos por primera vez en Paris en 1889, bajo la presidencia de Jules 
Simon, tomaron parte en esa Conferencia miembros de los Parlamentos ingles, 
espanol, belga, aleman, frances, italiano, danes, griego y hungaro. 

No era aquello, como en los Congresos de la Paz, una reunion de hombres 
de elevado espiritu pacifista pero desprovistos de autoridad; era el cenaculo de 
hombres de gobierno, de parlamentarios en ejercicio que se congregaban solem- 
nemente y se comprometian a cooperar en sus respectivos Congresos a la realiza- 
tion del programa de paz y del arbitraje. 



APENDICE V 133 

De ano en afio esa Conferencia viene funcionando con exito estraordinario 
en Paris, en Londres, en Roma, en Berna, en La Haya, en Budapest, en Bruselas, 
en Milan, en Monaco y en Lucerna, y al terminor el siglo esa Union Interparla- 
mentaria contaba ya con mil quinientos miembros consagrados eficazmente al 
triunfo de la mas hermosa divisa bajo la cual pueden agruparse los hombres : 
justitia e pace, por la justicia y por la paz. 

La visita de los parlamentarios escandinavos a Francia y la de retorno de 
los politicos franceses, abre un periodo de positiva inteligencia entre los pueblos. 

Y esta labor recibe su mas benefica consagracion en la subsiguiente visita de 
los parlamentarios franceses a Londres y en la devolucion de ella por los politicos 
ingleses, acercamiento trascendental y que ha producido la entente cordial de 
esas grandes naciones, en la cual hoy reposa la paz del mundo. 

Fresca esta en America y entre nosotros ha marcado un momento de verda- 
dera orientation en la politica internacional de la Republica la visita de Mr. 
Root, que dejo abierto el surco y echada la semilla de donde ha jerminado lozana 
y vigorosa la mies que ha de alimentar la vida de reciproca inteligencia y de 
solidaridad internacional entre la Gran Republica del Norte y los diversos pue- 
blos de la America Latina. 

Pero, el esfuerzo culminante de los tiempos contemporaneos por la causa 
de la paz lo constituye la Conferencia de La Haya. 

El advenimiento de esa gran revolution pacifica ha dejado trazada al nuevo 
siglo la tarea fecunda de proveer a la conservation de la paz como el fin de la 
politica internacional de todas las naciones civilizadas. 

Para los pueblos americanos se desprenden de aquella augusta asamblea dos 
resultados morales de la mas trascendental importancia. 

Es el primero, la manifestation expresa del anhelo mundial de que la paz 
reine entre los pueblos civilizados. 

Y es el segundo, la posibilidad material y moral, siempre creciente, de acudir 
y utilizar en todo momento al arbitraje. 

Si no han podido suprimirse las guerras, en cambio se han disminuido sus 
probabilidades y, en parte, se han atenuado sus rigores. 

La obra realizada importa, ciertamente, grandes conquistas para el imperio 
del derecho, acredita que el amor a la justicia domina en el ambiente de las 
relaciones internacionales y justifica la confianza en la opinion de que ha pasado 
la era del capricho y de la violencia y de que las leyes, la equidad y los intereses 
de la humanidad y de la civilization aseguran cada dia mas su autoridad sobre la 
faz de la tierra. 

La Conferencia no pudo dar forma a la idea fundamental propuesta de limitar 
los armamentos ; pero, ha logrado realizar la constitution de un Tribunal Juridico 
de Arbitraje. 

Quedo creada la Institution: ella tiene hoy su Presidente, sus miembros, su 
palacio, su periodico y su presupuesto. 



134 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Esta corporation esta oficialmente reconocida como Tribunal por todos los 
Estados civilizados. 

El nuevo derecho queda solemnemente reconocido, y establecido y queda, 
igualmente, consagrada la sustitucion de los recursos de la fuerza por los pro- 
cedimientos juridicos. 

Ha correspondido a la munificencia de Mr. Carnegie dotar a ese Tribunal 
de un palacio digno de su alta mision. 

"Alii es donde ha de reunirse, ha dicho Mr. Carnegie, el conclave mas divino 
que en epoca alguna ha honrado a la humanidad". 

El templo, como lo designa su fundador, acaba de ser inaugurado solemne- 
mente. Esa ceremonia tuvo lugar el 28 de agosto de 19 13 ante la Reina, soberana 
de Holanda, todos los miembros de su gobierno y de los representantes de todas 
las potencias signatarias de la Conferencia de La Haya. 

Aquel acto augusto, unico en su clase, revistio caracteres especiales. Fue 
grave, austero, se hallo exento de todo aparato militar ; solo las campanas se 
encargaron de anunciar al mundo que el reloj del Palacio de la Paz habia 
comenzado a moverse en la esfera, que habra de marcar la hora de la paz eterna. 
Asi lo espreso el Ministro de Relaciones Esteriores de la Holanda, no sin el temor 
de que ese momento estuviese aun lejano. 

El otro discurso de esa memorable ceremonia fue pronunciado por Mr. Van 
Karnebeek, Presidente de la Fundacion Carnegie. 

La obra encargada al Congreso de La Haya, con ser como es, de tan alta 
signification, no alcanza, sin embargo, a llenar el programa de la Fundacion 
Carnegie, de mas vastas y variadas proyecciones. 

Como proposito cardinal, esa Institution se propone sostener organismos 
diversos dirigidos todos ellos a dar forma material al acercamiento entre los 
diversos paises, a hacer efectivo el conocimiento reciproco de los pueblos amigos 
y a multiplicar los vinculos amistosos y de concordia entre las grandes naciones 
del globo. 

Para estos fines, cuenta con Departamentos de education y de intercambio 
de producciones intelectuales, de profesores y de estudiantes ; tiene constituido 
un Departmento de estudios economicos e historicos, y sostiene, con solicito 
cuidado, su dependencia de Derecho international y la Academia especial de este 
ramo de los conocimientos humanos, establecida en La Haya bajo los auspicios 
de los paises signatarios de la Conferencia. 

Estos diversos puntos del hermoso y vasto programa de la Fundacion Car- 
negie son de la mayor importancia para todos los pueblos civilizados, y hasta 
hoy permanecen desconocidos y sin utilization alguna para los pueblos latinos de 
la America, a pesar de que estarian llamados a aprovecharse de sus beneficios. 

A hacer conocer y apreciar esa laudable obra y a mover la opinion de estos 
paises y la action de sus hombres publicos en favor de la noble cruzada, obedece 
la mision que hoy nos visita y que la sociedad chilena recibe con la complacencia 
de los mas faustos acontecimientos. 



APENDICS V 135 

Si algunos de los fines que persigue la Fundacion Carnegie requieren la 
simpatia y el apoyo de los gobiernos, son muchos los que demandan especial- 
mente la cooperation de los hombres de ciencia, de los profesores y especialistas 
en Derecho internacional, y de los catedraticos de historia y de ciencias economicas. 

Por ello nuestra Universidad ha asociado todo su personal docente a esta 
manifestation y la corporation esta cierta de que, una vez impuesto el profeso- 
rado de los objetivos inmediatos de la mision, habra de cooperar con interes a 
la consecution de los fines que son de su competencia. 

Y al hacerlo, corresponde dentro de su esfera a la politica internacional que 
ha sido tradicional en la Republica. 

Chile tiene la honra de figurar en cuarto lugar entre los paises que han acu- 
dido al arbitraje durante el siglo XIX. 

La estadistica anota, en primer lugar, a la Gran Bretana, con 86 pactos de 
arbitraje; en segundo lugar, a Estados Unidos, con 66; en tercer lugar a Francia, 
con 38 y, en seguida, a Chile, con 28 tratados de arbitraje. 

Pero, la obra mas adelantada en esta materia es la realizada por Chile y la 
Argentina, al ajustar el tratado de 28 de mayo de 1902 y establecer alii, con el 
arbitraje amplio, la limitation de sus armamentos, punto este ultimo que ha 
sido uno de los objetivos infructuosamente perseguidos hasta ahora por la Con- 
ferencia de La Haya. 

Y estas circunstancias no han pasado, por cierto, desapercibidas. 

En su celebre alocucion por el arbitraje, dirigida a los alumnos de la Uni- 
versidad de San Andres, Mr. Carnegie ha senalado este tratado como uno de los 
mas adelantados en la realization de los principios del programa que sustenta 
la Fundacion. 

"El paso mas grande dado en este sentido," dice Mr. Carnegie, "se manifiesta 
en los tratados que se han celebrado entre Dinamarca y Holanda, Chile y la 
Argentina, poniendose de acuerdo para someter al arbitraje todas las divergen- 
cias, sean cuales fueren, sin restriction alguna". 

Se ha sostenido que a la America correspondio en el siglo XIX la iniciativa 
del arbitraje y que los pueblos de este continente han mantenido y ensanchado la 
practica de aquel procedimiento juridico, sin embargo de no haber logrado 
todavia dar una formula general definitiva. 

I no es dificil comprobar que entre estos paises, ninguno antes que Chile y 
en mayor numero de veces, ha estipulado ese procedimiento pacifico para solu- 
cionar sus diferencias con las demas naciones. 

En uno de sus mas antiguos tratados, celebrado sesenta afios atras, declaro 
expresamente el Gobierno de Chile que consignaba "con placer la idea del arbi- 
traje, que ha considerado siempre como el unico medio justo, legal y logico 
de zanjar todas las dificultades internacionales." 

La mision de paz y de jurisdiction arbitral habra de encontrar por esto 
un terreno propicio en nuestro pais, el que, si en ocasiones se ha visto precisado 
a ocurrir a la dura necesidad de la guerra en defensa de lo que ha considerado 



136 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

sus derechos, solo ha sido despues de agotar todos los recursos de la conciliation 
y del arbitraje. 

La necesidad de un trabajo penoso que le ha correspondido a este pueblo 
por las condiciones especiales de su suelo, los habitos de orden y la practica de 
libres instituciones democraticas en que ha desarrollado su vida de nation, su 
organization social y la prosperidad de su agricultura y de su comercio, todo 
cuanto requiere la garantia benefica de la paz, ha llevado al pueblo de Chile a 
cif rar unicamente en ella su prosperidad, su desarrollo y su bienestar. 

El pais ha de ser por esto un entusiasta y activo cooperador de la obra de 
conciliation general y de politica solidaria que persigue la Fundacion Carnegie. 

Desde el Templo de la Paz surge la notion clara y triunfadora del nuevo 
derecho y los procedimientos juridicos habran de imponerse definitivamente a 
los recursos de la fuerza y de la violencia. 

La obra realizada permite confiar en el triunfo no lejano de esos principios 
de justicia y de paz universal. 

La palabra de Mr. Bacon, hoy nuestro ilustre huesped, doblemente autori- 
zada, de una parte, por sus conocimientos especiales, su reconocida versacion en 
todos los negocios publicos y su larga esperiencia, y de la otra, por la elevada y 
honrosa representation de que se halla investido, le permitira exhibir el cuadro 
de la hermosa y benefica tarea llevada a cabo hasta el presente y de sus anhelos 
y propositos para el futuro, colocandonos, de esta suerte, en condiciones de pre- 
parar los elementos que sera menester acopiar a fin de que la obra de la Fundacion 
Carnegie quede solidamente asentada en nuestro territorio. — 

Discurso de Mr. Bacon 

Excelencias, Senor Rector, Senor Decano, Senor as, Senor es: 

Dispensadme si me atrevo a dirigiros la palabra en vuestro bello idioma, 
cuya cadencia me encanta, pero el cual lamento no conocer. 

Me siento profundamente conmovido al hallarme en esta reunion, bajo 
los auspicios de vuestros prohombres en el mundo intelectual, en este templo de 
las ciencias y de las letras. 

Entre los muchos deberes que reclaman de mi, grata correspondencia desde 
el momento de mi llegada a esta hospitalaria y hermosa tierra, es uno de los 
mas elevados y mas atrayentes el agradecer a la Universidad del Estado el 
honor que me discierne al otorgarme el titulo de miembro de su Facultad de 
Leyes y Ciencias Politicas. 

Conozco las tradiciones realmente gloriosas que en el orden intelectual han 
hecho de la Universidad de Chile desde mediados del siglo pasado uno de los 
centros mas potentes de cultura en el continente suramericano. En este mo- 
mento solo citare a dos de entre los varios rectores ilustres que la opinion uni- 
versal ha inscrito en el registro de los sabios eminentes, a Bello, internacionalis- 
ta, codificador y literato, a Domeyko, naturalista. 



APENDIC3 V 137 

Aprecio, pues, en todo su valor la honra con que me distinguen la Uni- 
versidad de Chile y su digno Rector, y la agradecere mientras viva. 

En mi propio nombre y en el del egregio caballero que me envia, el Senador 
Elihu Root, os doy las mas expresivas gracias por vuestras palabras de bienve- 
nida, y por las bondadosas expresiones dedicadas a mi humilde persona y tan 
poco merecidas. 

Tambien deseo expresar aqui mi reconocimiento por la cordial recepcion 
que me ha sido dispensada en Chile, con la finura y generosa hospitalidad pro- 
verbial de la hidalga raza castellana. 

Mi visita por todos estos atractivos paises de Sur America ha sido gratisima. 
Han desfilado ante mis ojos asombrados los panoramas divinos de este porten- 
toso continente, valles fertiles, grandes rios, selvas pomposas, fantasticas Cor- 
dilleras, lagos serenos de aguas cristalinas, rapidos torrentes que van cantando 
el himno augusto de la libertad. Todo esto ha aumentado mi respeto y admira- 
cion por los pueblos nuevos, las nuevas razas, que marcaran nuevos horizontes 
al genero humano en el brillante porvenir de America. 

La impresion que recibi al entrar ayer en vuestro pais no se borrara jamas 
de mi memoria. El pueblo chileno debe sentir su corazon henchido del legitimo 
orgullo de ser dueno de tan magestuoso pais. La mara villa de vuestras mon- 
tanas, cuyos resplandores, perfumes y armonias son el alma de esta tierra, deja 
mudo de admiracion al que las contempla. El poeta Wordsworth ha dicho que 
la voz de la libertad se oye mejor en las montafias y en el mar. Es Chile, pues, 
la tierra donde puede oirse vibrar mas potente la hermosa voz de la libertad. 

Vengo encargado, sefiores, de un mensaje de buena voluntad de vuestro 
sincero amigo, el sefior Elihu Root. A petition suya, anticipada por mi propio 
deseo, tengo el honor de presentarme ante vosotros. Quisiera deciros todo lo 
que el mismo os diria si estuviere presente, si, tomando la palabra, os dirigiera 
el saludo de su antigua amistad. Las expresiones diferiran, quizas, pero el 
espiritu que las anima, os aseguro sera absolutamente el mismo. 

Os invito a cooperar en el establecimiento de instituciones internacionales 
que esperamos lleguen a ser centros de buena voluntad, que desarrollaran y 
popularizaran principios justos y progresivos de Derecho internacional que, en 
distintas maneras directa e indirectamente, por un intercambio de pensamientos 
e ideas y por una combination feliz de esfuerzos, tendran por resultado el forta- 
lecer los lazos de amistad que indican y requieren un pasado comun, instituciones 
comunes y un fin comun. 

La historia y la naturaleza han hecho nacer y crecer un sentimiento pro- 
fundo de solidaridad, no solamente entre los Estados de la America Latina, sino 
tambien entre las Republicas del Sur y los Estados Unidos. Es necesario man- 
tener y fortalecer esta solidaridad, la cual, atendiendo a su doble origen, une 
indisolublemente las naciones del Nuevo Continente, en el pasado, en el presente 
y en el porvenir. 

Es suficiente contemplar la historia politica del Nuevo Mundo para ver el 



138 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

interes constante que se han tornado los Estados Unidos en la lucha emprendida 
por los Estados de la America Latina, primero para desligarse de la metropoli, 
y luego para defender la independencia conquistada contra toda tentativa de 
conquista de parte de las potencias europeas. 

Es suficiente tambien recordar que despues de la emancipation, los Estados 
Unidos han proporcionado a los Estados latinos las formas y las bases de sus 
instituciones politicas, notablemente de su regimen republicano y democratico, 
en una epoca cuando las viejas instituciones de Europa estaban lejos de re- 
sponder a las ideas de la libertad y a las condiciones sociales de las dos Ame- 
ricas. 

Todo este pasado de gloria en la historia del Nuevo Mundo debe fortalecer 
de dia en dia los vinculos indestructibles de solidaridad que han unido las na- 
ciones americanas desde su nacimiento a la vida politica. 

La naturaleza consolida mas todavia la obra de la historia. La situation 
continental de los Estados del Nuevo Mundo ha hecho nacer una serie de pro- 
blemas comunes a todos los Estados de este continente, creando asi entre ellos 
nuevos vinculos de solidaridad. Gracias al progreso de la civilization y al 
perfeccionamiento de los medios de comunicacion, se ha comprendido, en nues- 
tros dias, la imperiosa necesidad de resolver con uniformidad los problemas 
nacidos de las situaciones y condiciones especiales del Nuevo Continente. 

Adelantandose de algun modo a Europa, donde las grandes potencias no 
se reunian sino despues de guerras y para determinar las condiciones de la paz, 
todos los Estados de la America se han reunido en conferencias pacificas para 
tratar cuestiones comunes a todo su continente; de donde viene el nombre y 
el origen de las Conferencias Panamericanas. Estas conferencias han sido 
f ructuosisimas : se han estudiado un numero determinado de problemas de in- 
teres americano y se han firmado convenciones importantes con el objeto de 
desarrollar la vida social e intelectual del Nuevo Mundo. Ademas, los repre- 
sentantes de los diversos Estados americanos han llegado asi a conocerse mejor 
y han podido darse cuenta de la multiplicidad e importancia de los vinculos que 
unen a todos los Estados americanos. 

Los sentimientos de solidaridad y fraternidad que agrupan en una union de 
intereses los Estados del Nuevo Mundo, deben producir una obra de union in- 
telectual y de concordia. Ya se ha abierto camino, se han obtenido numerosos 
y fertiles resultados; es necesario, pues, seguir adelante y realizar mas y mas la 
buena inteligencia y la armonia. Es preciso, sobre todo, disipar el concepto erroneo 
que parece existir todavia en algunas partes del Sur respecto a la politica de 
los Estados Unidos. Como lo declaro solemnemente mi ilustre maestro el seiior 
Root, -nuestro pais desea ante todo, que la paz y la prosperidad reinen en la 
America Latina, a fin de fortalecer y estrechar los vinculos de amistad y de 
fraternidad que deben unir a todos los pueblos americanos. 

Tengo el honor de dirigirme a vosotros no meramente en mi propio nombre, 
sino en representation de la Fundacion Carnegie, de la cual es Presidente el 






APENDICE V 139 

senor Root, y de invitaros en su nombre y en el de los Sindicos de la Fundacion, 
a cooperar con esta por todos los medios que creais posibles y convenientes. 

En otras palabras, el deseo del Sr. Root es el de conseguir en cuanto sea 
posible el interes y la simpatia de los directores de la opinion en Sur America, 
en las diversas empresas para el mejoramiento de las relaciones internacionales 
que la Fundacion trata de promover, de modo que puedan prestar su concurso 
en forma practica, en la obra emprendida. 

La estimacion y la amistad que los Sindicos de la Fundacion abrigan por 
los pueblos de la America Latina y por numerosos distinguidos latinoameri- 
canos, con los cuales llevan relaciones agradables de amistad personal, les hace 
desear que el trabajo de la Fundacion pueda recibir la misma cooperacion activa 
y util en Sur America que ya ha obtenido en Europa. 

Correspondiendo a la bondadosa invitacion del senor Decano, me permitire 
explicar brevemente el trabajo de la Fundacion, y referirme a algunos proyectos 
practicos en los cuales el senor Root y sus asociados solicitan especialmente 
vuestra cooperacion. 

Lamento encontrarme obligado a limitarme a los detalles escuetos y poco 
interesantes en este momento en que, bajo el encanto, bajo la inspiracion de 
vuestras hermosas palabras y de la amable benevolencia de vuestra acogida, en 
este ambiente de libertad, en esta tierra de heroes, querria hablar y volver a 
hablar de nuestros ideales, de nuestras esperanzas, de las visiones sofiadas por 
los proceres de nuestras patrias. 

Por que me siento orgulloso, senor, de compartir vuestro optimismo, y estoy 
intimamente convencido de que, a pesar de las nubes acumuladas por la des- 
confianza y el escepticismo, estamos en visperas de un gran movimiento pro- 
gresivo en la evolution del liberalismo del mundo, y que ya podemos ver despuntar 
la aurora de un dia mas puro. 

Los principios, la filosofia de la vida del siglo pasado no nos bastaran ya. 
Necesitaremos nuevas leyes de economia politica, nuevos principios de Derecho 
international.* 

El trabajo de la Fundacion se encuentra repartido en tres divisiones : 

La Division de Relaciones y Education. 

La Division de Economia Politica e Historia. 

La Division de Derecho Internacional. 

Para ayudar a la primera Division, el director de la misma, doctor Butler, 
formo un Comite Consultivo de hombres de estado y publicistas europeos, y un 
cuerpo de corresponsales. 

Nos hemos preguntado si seria grato a los leaders del pensamiento en la 
America Latina crear un organismo algo parecido al Comite Consultivo general 
que ya se ha formado en Europa. 

La Division ha inaugurado las vistas de hombres eminentes, y un inter- 
cambio de profesores con el Japon. Espero, por mi parte, obtener en la Ame- 

*Nota. — Vease la nota en la pagina in. 



140 IyA VISITA DE MR. BACON A L,A AMERICA DEL SUR 

rica del Sur opiniones y datos que nos permitan empezar, lo mas pronto posible 
el intercambio de profesores y estudiantes con la America Latina. 

Bien quisiera la Fundacion que el intercambio empezase inmediatamente 
con el envio anual de dos sabios eminentes, o publicistas de la America del Sur 
a los Estados Unidos, y dos americanos del Norte a la America del Sur. Cada 
uno de estos sefiores dedicaria su tiempo a dos instituciones establecidas en el 
continente que visitara. 

Una de las tareas a que esta Division da mucha importancia es la relativa 
al establecimiento de asociaciones para la conciliacion internacional en el mundo 
entero. 

Hace algunos anos, la asociacion madre fue formada en Paris por el sefior 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant. Existen ramales en los Estados Unidos, Ale- 
mania e Inglaterra, y se estan formando otras. 

Mis instrucciones me encargan apelar al concurso de las personas interesadas 
en los paises que tengo el honor de visitar, de organizar ramales de la Conciliacion 
Internacional, en relacion con la sociedad madre en Paris. Esas asociaciones, 
aunque locales, tienen, sin embargo, una mision internacional, y se proponen crear, 
mediante sus reuniones y los utiles folletos que regularmente publican, senti- 
mientos amistosos hacia los pueblos de los paises extranjeros. 

"La Asociacion para la Conciliacion Internacional," dice el Baron d'Estour- 
nelles de Constant, "no es una asociacion sentimental, humanitaria; significa 
un progreso real, perseguido en el interes nacional de cada pais, particularmente 
de los paises jovenes que tienen necesidad de consagrar todas sus fuerzas y sus 
recursos a su desarrollo. 

"La Conciliacion es el indispensable complemento moderno del esfuerzo 
economico de todo pais civilizado. j Desarrollar la prosperidad nacional al amparo 
de las buenas relaciones internacionales ; ese es nuestro empeno, resumido en 
nuestra divisa: Pro patria per orbis concordiam! 

"Organizad el arbitraje de preferencia a la guerra; pero preferid la con- 
ciliacion al arbitraje. Tal es nuestra concepcion, nuestra norma de vida. 

"La guerra antes que la servidumbre. 

"El arbitraje antes que la guerra. 

"La conciliacion antes que el arbitraje. 

"El arbitraje repara; la conciliacion evita. 

"La conciliacion reemplaza la esteril ruina de los antagonismos con el f ecundo 
espiritu de la cooperacion." 

La Fundacion esta dispuesta a tomar a su cargo los gastos originados por la 
organization de esas sociedades. 

Me ocupare ahora en la labor de la Division de Economia Politica y de 
Historia. 

La tarea de esta Division es : "Alentar investigaciones y estudios cientificos y 
profundos sobre las causas de la guerra, y sobre los medios practicos de prevenirla 
y evitarla." 



APENDIC3 V 141 

Hace dos aiios se organizo en Berna, Suiza, una Conferencia a la cual se 
invito a economistas y publicistas distinguidos de toda Europa, para que 
examinaran las cuestiones susceptibles de ser debida y practicamente estudiadas, 
y elaborar un programa de ensayo para la Division. 

Ya se ha asignado un gran numero de temas a especialistas elegidos en los 
paises a los cuales se contrae su tarea ; algunos estudios estan ya terminados y 
dentro de algunos anos la Fundacion habra publicado una serie de f olletos notables 
sobre todas las fases del programa y que seran en el lenguaje del sefior Root 
"useful to mankind". 

El sefior profesor Kinley, un viejo y sincero amigo de la America Latina, 
que represento a los Estados Unidos en el Cuarto Congreso Panamericano en 
Buenos Aires, ha sido nombrado miembro de la Comision de Investigaciones y 
se consagrara mas especialmente a los problemas que interesan a la America 
Latina. Ha resuelto visitar la America Latina el afio proximo para cambiar 
ideas con los directores de la opinion, a fin de conocer su juicio y si es posible 
asegurarse su concurso para proponer y ejecutar los proyectos que pudieran 
recomendarle. 

La tercera Division es la de Derecho Internacional. 

Esta Division, como las otras, ha considerado necesario crear una organiza- 
tion especial y asegurar los servicios de un cuerpo de abogados consejeros. 

El Instituto de Derecho Internacional se compone — apenas hay necesidad de 
decirlo — de los mas eminentes jurisconsultos de todas las naciones, y la Fundacion 
ha pedido al Instituto, que asuma el caracter de consejero de la Division de Derecho 
Internacional. 

El Instituto acepto el cargo y eligio una comision que ha ejercido sus 
funciones como consejera del director. 

La Division prepara varias obras. La primera es una coleccion, destinada 
a la publicidad de todos los tratados generales y especiales de arbitraje, y en lo 
que se refiere especialmente al siglo diecinueve, la Fundacion quedara muy 
agradecida a los publicistas de la America Latina que quieran enviarle noticias 
sobre ciertas cuestiones que conocen y que acaso son los unicos en conocer, y 
los directores de la Fundacion apreciaran como un sefialado favor, de parte de 
los gobiernos de la America Latina, si estos consienten en darles copias de esos 
tratados, siendo en verdad dificil procurarse textos autenticos y fidedignos. 
Todos los ejemplos conocidos de arbitraje internacional seran coleccionados y 
publicados con una noticia critica. 

El Instituto de Derecho Internacional que desempefia ahora el papel de 
consejero de la Division Internacional fue creado en Europa en mil ochocientos 
setentitres. Aunque este Instituto representa la "conciencia juridica internacional" 
varios jurisconsultos han sentido la necesidad de una institution que fuera la 
rapresentante de la conciencia juridica de America, y que estudiara los problemas 
que mas particularmente interesan al Nuevo Mundo, y encarara, desde un punto 
de vista americano, las cuestiones generales del Derecho de gentes. 



142 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Como sabeis, vuestro distinguido publicista e internacionalista, el doctor 
Alejandro Alvarez, y el Dr. James Brown Scott, director de la Division de Derecho 
Internacional de la Fundacion, establecieron hace ano un Instituto Americano 
de Derecho Internacional. Este Instituto se propone formar sociedades nacionales 
de Derecho internacional en los paises panamericanos, afiliados a el y que trabajen 
por estudiar los problemas americanos, hacer conocer sus principios y contribuir 
a las relaciones pacificas de los paises. 

Por temor de pareceros exagerado cuando os hablo de los fines y propositos 
del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional, cuyo presidente honorario es 
el Sr. Elihu Root, seame permitido citaros un pasaje de un erudito holandes, 
profesor de Derecho internacional, a quien se puede suponer que trata esta 
cuestion con desinteres. 

Despues de haber hablado del gran ejemplo que ha dado la America al mundo, 
procurando la codificacion del Derecho internacional, dice : 

"Un Instituto esencialmente cientifico, mas apenas inferior en valor moral, 
nos proporciona el segundo ejemplo. El acercamiento gradual entre el Norte y 
el Sur ha creado un nuevo instrumento de progreso. Los proyectos de una 
union panamericana, que han sido lanzados desde mucho tiempo, sin jamas 
tener efecto, han dado por fin un resultado en el terreno apacible de los estudios, 
gracias el talento y a la perseverancia de dos hombres ilustrados de las dos 
mitades del hemisferio. En el curso del ano pasado el sefior James Brown 
Scott, el renombrado jurisconsulto y pacifista de los Estados Unidos, y el Sr. 
Alejandro Alvarez, antiguo profesor y Consejero del Ministerio de Relaciones 
Exteriores de Chile, que en Junio de 1912 habia ejercido una influencia en alto 
grado saludable en Rio sobre el gran proyecto de la codificacion, despues de 
una entrevista personal en Washington, fundaron alii en Octubre de 1912 el 
"Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional." Este Instituto tiene por fin: 
Primero, contribuir al desarrollo del Derecho internacional; segundo, consolidar 
el sentimiento comun de una justicia internacional; tercero, hacer aceptar en 
todas partes la accion pacifica en el arreglo de las controversias internacionales 
entre los Estados americanos. Esta idea luminosa nacio de la conviccion de 
que vale mas propagar las nociones del derecho y de la justicia por medio de 
una infusion lenta pero constante en los cerebros y los corazones de los pueblos 
que por medio de negociaciones diplomaticas que no descansan sobre un senti- 
miento popular general." 

El Sr. Root y sus colegas dan la mayor importancia a la fundacion y el 
buen funcionamiento del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional y de sus 
sociedades afiliadas en todos los paises de America. 

La Fundacion pasa actualmente al Instituto antiguo, fundado en Europa, 
un subsidio destinado a cubrir los gastos de viaje de sus miembros, los gastos 
de las comisiones y la publicacion de sus trabajos. El nuevo Instituto puede 
contar con que recibira de la Fundacion, en cuanto se hayan constituido definitiva- 
mente las sociedades nacionales, una ayuda pecuniaria, y que estara en un pie 



APENDICE V 143 

de iguldad con el antiguo Institute La Revista Americana de Derecho Inter- 
nacional que con algunas ligeras modificaciones podria convertirse en organo del 
Institute Americano, recibe ya un subsidio anual de la Fundacion. 

Otra institucion por la cual la Division de Derecho Internacional se interesa 
mucho y a la cual subvencionaria y mantendria es la Academia de Derecho 
Internacional que se proyecta establecer en La Haya. 

En la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz, de la Haya, se presento una mocion, 
a fin de crear esa Academia. No se tomo entonces ningun acuerdo, pero la idea 
se ha impuesto por los publicistas de todos los paises. Un comite de publicistas 
holandeses, presidido por el senor Asser, cuyo reciente fallecimiento lamentamos, 
tomo la iniciativa de crear y de instalar esa Academia en el Palacio de la Paz, de 
La Haya. 

Las proposition del senor Asser tiene en vista la ensefianza sistematica del 
Derecho internacional y de las materias correlativas por medio de una facultad 
constituida al efecto y cuyos profesores, elegidos entre los publicistas de diferentes 
paises, se turnarian. Se darian cursos y conferencias sobre asuntos importantes 
y oportunos por publicistas que, aparte de un amplio conocimiento teorico, hayan 
adquirido una larga experiencia en la practica del Derecho internacional. 

Propuso tambien el senor Asser interesar a los gobiernos invitandolos a 
designar, funcionarios competentes de los diversos departamentos ministeriales que 
seguirian los cursos. a 

La institucion seria unica por su pequena facultad variable, unica por su 
cuerpo de estudiantes procedentes de todos los paises, unica por sus clases 
especiales. 

La Fundacion pagara los gastos de la Academia, pero esta no sera una 
agencia directa de la Fundacion ni estara bajo su control. 

El Sr. Root me ha encargado que os presente el proyecto de esta Academia 
y que solicite el concurso de todas las naciones latinoamericanas, a fin de que 
cada una designe a uno, o varios de sus ciudadanos para que asistan a las con- 
ferencias y a los cursos. 

Notareis que el Sr. Root y la Fundacion Carnegie estan empenados en el 
desarrollo cientifico del Derecho internacional, y mucho les gustaria ver establecido 
un tribunal de justicia internacional que no fuera temporal para casos aislados, 
sino permanente para todos los casos. Conoceis bien la maxima "inter arma 
silent leges", pero tambien es cierta la afirmacion contraria "inter leges silent 
arma". La historia nos demuestra que esto es una verdad con referenda a los 
individuos, pudiendose observar que tambien es aplicable a las naciones. 

Una cuestion sobre la cual debo llamaros la atencion es la formation de 
comisiones nacionales para considerar los asuntos que podrian formar parte del 
programa de la proxima Conferencia de La Haya, comisiones que se pondran en 
comunicacion con las que se formen en todos los paises americanos. 

Es generalmente conocido el hecho de que la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz 
reunida en La Haya propuso que la tercera se reuniera ocho afio mas tarde, lapso 



144 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

igual al que medio entre la primera y la segunda, de suerte que si se cumple esta 
proposicion, la proxima Conferencia se reunira en mil novecientos quince. Esti- 
pulose ademas que uno o dos afios antes de esa reunion probable, se constituiria 
un comite preparatorio mediante un acuerdo comun de las potencias. 

Es evidente que los diversos paises invitados deberan examinar esas cuestiones 
importantes antes de la constitution del comite preparatorio y parece oportuno, 
si no es necesario, que cada gobierno nombre un comite para examinar esas 
cuestiones en detalle, a fin de poder presentar sus proposiciones con todo conoci- 
miento de causa. 

Son por lo tanto cinco los proyectos practicos en los cuales solicitamos el 
concurso que vos, senor Decano, tan generosamente nos habeis of recido : 

El establecimiento en cada pais de una sociedad nacional de Derecho interna- 
cional, afiliada al Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional ; 

El establecimiento en cada pais de una sociedad nacional de conciliation 
internacional, afiliada a la Asociacion para la Conciliacion Internacional en Paris ; 

El nombramiento de comites nacionales para estudiar asuntos que puedan 
discutirse en la proxima Conferencia de La Haya y la intercomunicacion de tales 
comites entre todos los paises americanos ; 

El intercambio de profesores y de estudiantes entre las universidades norte- 
americanas y las suramericanas, y visitas de hombres prominentes; 

La participation de los gobiernos americanos en la proyectada Academia de 
Derecho Internacional de La Haya, enviando cada gobierno uno 6 mas estu- 
diantes representativos para asistir a los cursos. 

Para terminar seame permitido citar un parrafo de las instrucciones que me 
ha dado el Sr. Elihu Root: 

"Los Sindicos de la Fundacion comprenden bien que el progreso en la obra 
que han emprendido debe necesariamente ser lento y que sus resultados mas 
substanciales se obtendran en el lejano porvenir. Estamos tratando con aptitudes 
e impulsos firmemente establecidos en la naturaleza humana a traves del desarrollo 
de miles de afios, y lo mas que una generation puede esperar es fomentar el 
cambio gradual en las normas de conducta. Cualquier calculo de tal obra y sus 
resultados debe hacerse no en terminos de la vida humana individual, sino en 
terminos de la vida larga de las naciones. Aunque los resultados inmediatos no 
sean conspicuos, no puede haber ningun objeto mas noble en el esfuerzo humano 
que el ejercicio de una influencia sobre las tendencias de la raza, de modo que se 
mueva, aunque sea muy lentamente, en direccion de la civilization y de la 
humanidad y en direccion opuesta a la brutalidad sin sentido. Es para participar 
con nosotros en esta obra noble aunque inconspicua, que le rogamos invite a 
nuestros amigos en Sur America con las seguridades mas sinceras y sin reservas 
de nuestra distinguida consideration y afectuosa estimation." 

Excelentisimos senores : Antes de terminar quiero daros una vez mas las 
gracias por .el gran honor que me ha sido dispensado, y expresaros mi profunda 
gratitud por vuestra amable y simpatica acogida. 



apendice v 145 



Nota Circular. 



De la Sociedad Nacional de Derecho Internacional, 
Santiago de Chile, Enero de 1914 

Senor: 

Conocido de todo el mundo civilizado es el noble y eficaz impulse* que el 
senor Andrew Carnegie ha traido a la obra comun de la concordia universal. 

El estudio y di fusion del Derecho internacional, ha sido y es uno de los 
medios mas adecuados para el afianzamiento de los principios de conciliation, 
para el arreglo pacifico de los conflictos exteriores y para la seguridad creciente 
de la paz entre los pueblos que comparten la vida del derecho. 

Publicistas eminentes de todos los paises han acogido con entusiasmo la f unda- 
cion de un Instituto Americano, que se consagre al estudio del derecho inter- 
nacional, y de institutos nacionales, que colaboren con el desde cada pais en 
aquel proposito. 

En la reciente visita que por encargo de Mr. Elihu Root nos acaba de hacer 
Mr. Robert Bacon, nos invito para que fundaramos en Chile un Instituto filial 
del que se ha constituido en Washington, presidido por Mr. Root y cuyo secretario 
es nuestro distinguido compatriota don Alejandro Alvarez. 

El objeto primordial del Instituto Americano y de los institutos nacionales 
que lo integran es puramente cientifico. 

Toda idea politica o susceptible de influir directa o indirectamente en la 
vida politica queda excluida de sus deliberaciones. 

Las materias propias de su programa las discutira el Instituto solo bajo el 
punto de vista de la doctrina y de la aplicacion juridicas. 

Las Republicas Americanas, ligadas por tantos vinculos comunes y por su 
caracter democratico, encontraran, mas aun que otras naciones en el Instituto 
Americano de Derecho Internacional, un organo extra oficial para hacer valer en 
condiciones de perfecta igualdad sus ideas y para conocer las ideas dominantes 
en las demas Republicas, y allegaran asi una garantia moral para la normalidad 
de sus relaciones y se acercaran considerablemente, unas a otras, dentro de los 
principios de derecho y de justicia. 

Los paises americanos necesitan conocerse mejor; el cambio de ideas trae 
la union de los sentimientos, y el contacto de los hombres y de los principios de 
los diversos pueblos del Nuevo Mundo acortara muchas distancias. Los insti- 
tutos de Derecho internacional haran, en la vasta esfera del espiritu y del estudio, 
acaso no menos que cuanto hacen en los radios oficiales las Conferencias Pan- 
americanas. 

Los objetos del Instituto Nacional de Derecho Internacional, a cuya funda- 
cion tenemos el honor de invitar a usted, son los mismos objetos del Instituto 
Americano de Derecho Internacional, con las variantes inherentes a su naciona- 
lidad chilena. 



146 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

En consecuencia, el Instituto National de Derecho International se propone : 

i. Contribuir al desarrollo del Derecho international y hacer aceptar 
sus principios generates entre los pueblos, y especialmente entre las naciones 
del Continente Americano. 

2. Contribuir al estudio de los problemas del Derecho international, 
especialmente los de caracter americano, para resolverlos con arreglo a los 
principios generates ya aceptados y tomando en cuenta las doctrinas que 
Chile ha sostenido. 

3. Colaborar a la codification del Derecho internacional, en armonia 
con las tradiciones y doctrinas de la humanidad y de nuestra historia national. 

4. Difundir los medios pacificos de solucionar los conflictos interna- 
cionales. 

El Instituto constara de tres clases de socios : f undadores, seran los que 
acepten la presente invitation ; adherentes seran los que con posterioridad ad- 
hieran a ella; y titulares seran los que en numero no mayor de cinco, proponga 
el Instituto National al Instituto Americano para que f ormen parte de este. 

El Instituto se propone formular y discutir, en asambleas de todos sus socios, 
proposiciones, resoluciones y acuerdos relativos a todas o a cualesquiera de las 
materias que se comprenden entre sus objetos ya enunciados. 

Sus resoluciones seran trasmitidas al Instituto Americano, y este las tomara 
en consideration en las sesiones que debe celebrar a lo menos cada dos aiios, y 
a las cuales podran concurrir los miembros titulares de nuestro Instituto. 

Tendra el Instituto un Consejo Directivo encargado de su direction general 
y de la gestion de sus intereses. 

La cotizacion de los socios sera de veinticinco pesos al afio. 

Si usted creyera que estos propositus son dignos de su adhesion, le agra- 
deceriamos nos devolviera firmado el ad junto boletin. 

Ofrecemos a usted nuestras consideraciones muy distinguidas. 

Luis Barros Borgono, Domingo Amunatlgui S., 

Antonio Hunllus, Ricardo Montanlr Blllo. 



APENDICE VI 
Peru 



Discurso del Dr. Romero, 

Decano de la Facultad de Jurisprudence de la Universidad de San Marcos, 
Lima, 6 de Noviembre de 191 3 
Senores: 

La Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional que tiene por objeto la 
altisima mision de promo ver y fomentar esa idea, ha comisionado al Honorable 
senor Roberto Bacon, ex-Secretario de Estado, y ex-Embajador de los Estados 
Unidos en Francia, para que, como su Delegado, llene ese proposito de paz y 
de fraternidad. 

En 1910 Mr. Andrew Carnegie dono diez millones de dollars, para que 
los fideicomisarios que designaba los aplicasen al objeto de la Fundacion, que 
dichos senores han expresado ser: la investigacion cientifica y el estudio de 
las causas de la guerra, y los metodos practicos de impedirla o entorpecerla ; 
educar la opinion publica acerca de las causas, naturaleza y ef ectos de la guerra ; 
establecer una mejor inteligencia de derechos y deberes internacionales, y un 
sentido de justicia mas perfecto entre los habitantes de los paises civilizados; 
promover la aceptacion general de los medios pacificos en el arreglo de las 
disputas internacionales ; fomentar sentimientos de amistad entre los habitantes de 
los distintos paises, y acrecentar el conocimiento e inteligencia comun entre 
las naciones; ayudar al desenvolvimiento del Derecho internacional hacia un 
acuerdo universal sobre las reglas del mismo ; y fomentar aquellos establecimientos 
u organismos que sean necesarios o utiles para la consecution de los fines de la 
Fundacion. 

El gran filantropo Carnegie concibio esta hermosa idea, y al mismo tiempo 
establecio el medio de realizarla, donando una suma nunca oida y ni siquiera 
imaginada. Por este medio hacia practico aquel proposito generoso, y propendia, 
en la forma mas eficaz, a que se aminoraran las guerras o fueran menos grandes 
sus horrores. 

Es en realidad una idea altisima, que corresponde al genio americano, 
creador de tantas obras colosales, como son grandes su poder, sus riquezas, 
su extension territorial, y los hombres eminentes que en la ciencia, en las 
artes y en el gobierno han despertado la admiration del mundo. 

Si han sido los primeros en la paz, y tambien en la guerra, inician ahora, 
por la obra generosa de un multimillonario, el proposito de ser los primeros 



148 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

en los corazones de los que salven en todo el mundo de una de las mayores 
calamidades que tantas veces y tan cruelmente lo han asolado. 

Como ministro de esta mision de confraternidad y harmonia; como 
mensajero de este proposito cristiano y civilizador; y como adalid de esta idea, 
que tan hondamente afecta todos los corazones, viene hacia nosotros un gran 
estadista, un hombre eminente por su saber, una persona que, despues de tratarle 
unos pocos minutos, exhibe la poderosa luz de su inteligencia y la gran bondad de 
su corazon. 

Yo os lo presento, sefior Rector, y muy estimados compafieros. 

No es un extrafio para nosotros. Graduado en Harvard, es hoy uno de 
los sindicos, "Fellows" de esa universidad. No es, por consiguiente, por simple 
cortesia que se halla en este lugar. Lo ocupa por que es el que corresponde a 
su titulo academico, y tambien al rango de regir un poderoso centro de saber, 
mucho mas importante que el nuestro. 

Llevando fuera de su universidad su talento y su ciencia, no hace mucho 
dirigia con gran habilidad los negocios extranjeros de la mas grande de las 
Republicas; ayer era Embajador en una de las metropolis europeas: y ahora 
toma un corto descanso, como Embajador de la mas humana de las empresas 
de los hombres de buena voluntad, en la mas antigua de las universidades 
de este continente, en la vieja casa que fundara Carlos V en 155 1, la que 
hoy se regocija de tener, en su seno, aunque sea momentaneamente, a uno de 
los hijos predilectos de la mas poderosa de sus hermanas. 

Pero, ademas de esta satis faccion, quiere tener el honor de contarle entre 
sus miembros, y de que su palabra quede gravada en esta antigua sala, en 
donde aun se siente el eco de la palabra de los mas sabios de nuestros maestros, 
y de los mas esclarecidos de nuestros hombres publicos. 

El Sr. Bacon nos va a dispensar a todos el honor de expresarnos de viva 
voz el objeto de su mision, y asimismo expresar sus ideas sobre la materia 
interesante que va a tratar; y a la Facultad de Jurisprudencia el muy especial 
de incorporarse a ella como su miembro honorario. 

Ilustre sefior: sed el bienvenido en nuestra secular Universidad; y siendo 
como sois heraldo de la mas noble de las ideas de paz y de fraternidad, llevad 
a vuestro poderoso pais el mensaje de nuestra simpatia y el de nuestra admiration 
por la obra del gran Carnegie, que con tanto acierto realizan sus fideicomisarios, 
y de nuestra fe profunda en el exito de ella, por la labor inteligentisima de tan 
dignas personas, entre las cuales con Mr. Root y Mr. Brown Scott, sois ilustre 
propagandista. 

Discurso de Mr. Bacon 

Sefior Rector, Sefiores: 

Perdonadme, si en este recinto historico, ante tal con junto de hombres 
eminentes en las ciencias y en las letras, me atrevo a dirigiros la palabra en el 



APENDICE VI 149 

bello idioma castellano. Este idioma, tan dulce, fino, y sonoro, desearia conocerlo 
a f ondo, para poder expresaros mis sentimientos : la intensa emocion de simpatia 
que experimento al comparecer ante este ilustrado cuerpo intelectual, y mi pro- 
funda gratitud por la sefialada distincion que me ha hecho la Universidad de San 
Marcos, la mas antigua del Nuevo Mundo, al otorgarme el titulo de miembro de 
su Facultad de Jurisprudencia. 

Este gran honor que me disciernen la universidad y su digno rector, lo 
aprecio, senores, con toda mi alma, en todo cuanto vale, y lo agradecere mientras 
viva. La justa fama de que ha gozado esta secular institution durante tantos 
afios en el campo de las ciencias y las letras es gloriosa, y yo me siento orgulloso 
de pertenecer a tan alto y distinguido centro de cultura. 

En mi propio nombre y en el del eminente caballero que me envia, el Senador 
Elihu Root, os doy las mas expresivas gracias, sefior, por vuestras carinosas 
f rases. Llename de regocijo ser recibido de tan bondadosa manera por los 
habitantes de la gentil Peru, donosa reina de los Andes, la patria de los Incas. 
Aquellos augustos emperadores representan el pomposo pasado, lleno de misterio 
y brillantez, y asimismo los vastos recursos de esta hermosa tierra y vuestra 
hidalga raza, presagian un porvenir no menos glorioso y brillante. 

En las altas cumbres, el condor, simbolo de la libertad, recrea su potente 
mirada en la contemplation de su patria libre y risuena, caminando hacia el ideal 
amado de los pueblos, la paz y la prosperidad. 

Al llegar a esta tierra luminosa me siento conmovido de admiration, feliz al 
aspirar el perfumado ambiente de vuestras montanas, al ver vuestros Andes 
magestuosos, cuyos magnificos nudos enlazan el cuerpo de la hermosa Peru. Es 
para mi un placer muy grande visitar, siquiera durante algunos dias, demasiado 
breves para mis deseos, este noble pais, cuya historia me ha encantado desde mi 
juventud. 

Vengo con un mensaje de buena voluntad de vuestro sincero amigo y 
admirador, el sefior Elihu Root. A petition suya, anticipada por mi propio 
deseo, tengo el honor de presentarme ante vosotros. Quisiera poder expresaros 
todo lo que el mismo os diria si estuviera presente, si, tomando la palabra, os 
dirigiera el saludo de su vieja amistad. Las expresiones serian quizas diferentes, 
pero el espiritu que las animaria, os ruego creerlo, seria absolutamente el mismo. 

En su nombre os invito a cooperar en el establecimiento de instituciones 
internacionales que seran, lo esperamos, centros de buena voluntad, que 
propagaran y popularizaran principios justos y progresistas de derecho inter- 
nacional, y que, en distintas maneras, directa e indirectamente, por un intercambio 
de pensamientos y de ideas y por una combination feliz de esfuerzos, llegaran 
a fortalecer los lazos de amistad que un pasado comun, instituciones comunes y 
propositos comunes indican y requieren. 

La historia y la naturaleza han hecho nacer y crecer un profundo senti- 
miento de solidaridad, no solo entre los Estados de la America Latina, sino tambien 
entre las Republicas del Sur y los Estados Unidos. Importa mantener y forti- 



150 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

ficar esa solidaridad, que en razon de su doble origen une indisolublemente a las 
naciones del Nuevo Continente, en el pasado, en el presente y en el porvenir. 

Basta echar un vistazo a la historia politica del Nuevo Mundo para ver 
el constante interes con que los Estados Unidos siguieron la lucha emprendida 
por los Estados de la America Latina, primero para desligarse de la metropoli, 
y despues para defender su independencia contra toda tentativa de conquista de 
parte de las potencias europeas. Basta tambien recordar que, despues de la 
emancipacion, los Estados Unidos proporcionaron a los Estados latinos las 
formas y las bases de sus instituciones politicas, en especial de su regimen 
republicano y democratico, en una epoca en que las vie j as instituciones de 
Europa estaban lejos de corresponder a las ideas de la libertad y a las condi- 
ciones sociales de las dos Americas. 

Todo ese pasado de gloria en la historia del Nuevo Mundo debe fortalecer 
de dia en dia los vinculos indestructibles de solidaridad que han unido a las 
naciones americanas desde su nacimiento a la vida politica. 

La naturaleza consolida todavia mas la obra de la historia. La situacion 
continental de los Estados del Nuevo Mundo ha hecho nacer una serie de problemas 
comunes a todos los Estados de este continente, creando asi entre ellos nuevos lazos 
de solidaridad. Gracias a los progresos de la civilization y al perfeccionamiento 
de los medios de comunicacion, se ha comprendido, en nuestros dias, la imperiosa 
necesidad de resolver uniformemente los problemas nacidos de la situacion y 
condiciones especiales del Nuevo Continente. 

Anticipandose en cierto modo a Europa, donde las grandes potencias no 
se reunian en conferencia sino despues de guerras y para determinar las condi- 
ciones de la paz, todos los Estados de la America se han reunido en conferencias 
pacificas a fin de tratar cuestiones comunes a todo su continente; de aqui el 
nombre y el origen de las Conferencias Panamericanas. 

Estas conferencias han sido f ructuosisimas : se han estudiado en ellas ciertos 
problemas de interes americano y se han firmado convenciones importantes en- 
caminadas a desarrollar la vida social e intelectual del Nuevo Mundo. Ademas, 
los representantes de los diversos Estados americanos han llegado asi a conocerse 
mejor y han podido darse cuenta de la multiplicidad e importancia de los vin- 
culos que unen a todos los Estados americanos. 

Los sentimientos de solidaridad y de confraternidad que agrupan en comuni- 
dad de intereses a los Estados del Nuevo Mundo, deben producir una obra de 
union intelectual y de concordia. Ya se ha abierto camino, se han obtenido 
numerosos y f ertiles resultados ; importa, pues, seguir adelante y realizar mas y 
mas la buena inteligencia y la armonia. Es preciso, sobre todo, disipar el con- 
cepto erroneo que parece exister todavia en algunas partes del Sur respecto a la 
politica de los Estados Unidos. Recordareis las declaraciones solemnes de mi 
ilustre maestro, el Sefior Root, en la Tercera Conferencia Panamericana en Rio 
Janeiro : "Npsotros no deseamos mas victorias que las que proporciona la paz ; 
ni mas territorio que el nuestro ; ni mas soberania que la que ejercemos sobre noso- 



APENDIC3 VI 151 

tros mismos. Consideramos que la independencia y los derechos del mas pequeno 
y debil miembro de la familia de las naciones merecen tanto respeto como los 
del mas poderoso imperio, y creemos que la observancia de ese respeto es la 
mayor garantia del debil contra la opresion del fuerte. Nosotros no pretendemos 
tener, ni deseamos derechos, privilegios, o poderes, que no reconozcamos libre- 
mente a cada una de las Republicas Americanas. Deseamos aumentar nuestra pros- 
peridad, extender nuestro comercio, crecer en riqueza, en sabiduria, y en espiritu ; 
pero nuestra concepcion del verdadero metodo de conseguir todo esto, no es 
el de hundir a otros y sacar provecho de su ruina, sino ayudar a todos los amigos a 
alcanzar una prosperidad comun, un crecimiento comun, para que todos a la vez 
podamos llegar a ser mas grandes y mas fuertes." 

El Presidente Roosevelt, en su mensage al Congreso en diciembre de mil 
novecientos seis, dio su entusiasta aprobacion a estas palabras de su Secretario 
de Estado, y declaro que representaban correctamente los sentimientos del pueblo 
americano. Las mismas palabras siguen representando hoy los sentimientos, los 
ideales, del pueblo de los Estados Unidos con la misma verdad, con la misma 
fuerza, que tenian hace siete afios. Me gusta considerar esta memorable declara- 
tion como la Doctrina Root — a doctrine of sympathy and understanding, of 
kindly consideration and honorable obligation — y me sentiria orgulloso de con- 
siderarme digno de hablar de ella, como humilde apostol. Nuestro pais desea 
ante todo que la paz y la prosperidad reinen en la America Latina. 

Tengo el honor de dirigirme a vosotros no meramente en mi propio nombre, 
sino en representation de la Fundacion Carnegie, de la cual es cabeza y alma el 
sefior Root, e invitaros en su nombre y en el de los sindicos de la Fundacion, a 
cooperar con esta por todos los medios que creais convenientes. 

En otros terminos, es el deseo conseguir en cuanto sea posible el interes y 
la simpatia de los corifeos de la opinion en Sur America, en las diversas empresas 
para el mejoramiento de las relaciones internacionales que la Fundacion trata 
de promover, de modo que puedan prestar su concurso en forma practica, en la 
obra emprendida. 

La estimation y la amistad que los Sindicos abrigan por los pueblos de la 
America Latina y por numerosos distinguidos latinoamericanos, con los cuales 
llevan relaciones agradables de amistad personal, les hacen desear que el trabajo 
pueda recibir la misma cooperacion activa y util en Sur America que ya ha 
obtenido en Europa. 

Me permitire explicar brevemente el trabajo de la Fundacion, y referirme 
a algunos proyectos practicos en los cuales el sefior Root y sus asociados solicitan 
especialmente vuestra cooperacion. 

Lamento verme obligado a limitarme a los detalles escuetos y poco inter- 
esantes, en este momento en que, bajo la inspiration de vuestras elocuentes 
f rases y bajo el encanto de este ambiente intelectual, desearia ocuparme de nues- 
tros ideales, de nuestras esperanzas, de las visiones sofiadas por los prohombres 
de nuestras patrias. Porque me siento orgulloso, sefior, de compartir vuestra fe, 



152 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

y estoy intimamente convencido de que, a pesar de las nubes acumuladas por 
la desconfianza y el escepticismo, estamos en visperas de un movimiento pro- 
gresivo en la evolucion del Hberalismo del mundo, y que ya podemos ver despuntar 
la aurora de un dia mas puro. 

Los principios, la filosofia de la vida del siglo pasado no nos bastaran ya. 
Neeesitaremos nuevas leyes de economia politica, nuevos principios de Derecho 
internacional. 

El nombre de la institution que tengo el honor de representar, la Funda- 
cion para la Paz Internacional, a veces produce una impresion erronea en cuanto 
al objeto directo que tiene la Fundacion, como tambien en cuanto a los medios 
que utiliza para lograrlo. Mas bien podria designarse como Fundacion para la 
Amistad Internacional. Existiendo amistad y relaciones armoniosas entre las 
naciones, la paz es una consecuencia natural. Los fines especificos que persigue la 
Fundacion pueden por lo tanto resumirse asi : Fomentar el estrechamiento de las 
relaciones amistosas entre las naciones, y el desarrollo del Derecho internacional. 
Estos dos fines estan intimamente ligados; cada uno es causa y efecto del otro. 

Al trabajar en este sentido la Fundacion no se presenta como misionero de paz 
iii trata de predicar sus propias ideas ante el mundo, sino que desea alentar en cada 
pais las actividades nacionales que propendan hacia la consecution de la amistad 
internacional y al desarrollo del Derecho internacional. Los medios que emplea 
y propone, son medios practicos. 

Los prospositos y objetos caen naturalmente en tres grupos : uno que trata 
de la creation de la opinion publica en favor del arreglo pacifico de las diferencias 
internacionales ; otro, de la investigation y estudio de las causas de la guerra ; 
y el tercero, de los principios de derecho y de justicia que arreglarian o evitarian 
las controversias que han amargado las relaciones entre las naciones en el 
pasado. 

El trabajo esta, pues, repartido en tres divisiones:* 

La Division de Relaciones y Education. 

La Division de Economia Politica e Historia. 

La Division de Derecho Internacional. 

Para ayudar a la primera Division, el director de la misma, el doctor Butler, 
Presidente de la Universidad de Columbia, formo un Comite Consultivo de hom- 
bres de estado y publicistas europeos, y un cuerpo de corresponsales. Nos hemos 
preguntado si seria grato a los jefes del pensamiento en la America Latina crear 
un organismo algo parecido al Comite Consultivo general que se formo en Europa. 

La Division ha inaugurado las visitas de hombres eminentes, de Europa, Norte 
America y el Japon, y asimismo ha iniciado un intercambio de profesores con 
el Japon. Espero, por mi parte, obtener en la America del Sur opiniones y datos 
que nos permitan inaugurar cuanto antes, el intercambio de hombres representa- 
tives, y de profesores y estudiantes con la America Latina. 

*NoTA. — Vease la nota en la pagina ill. 



apendice vi 153 

El deseo seria que el intercambio comenzara inmediatamente con el envio 
anual de dos sabios eminentes, o dos conocidos publicistas de la America del 
Sur a los Estados Unidos, y de dos americanos del norte a la America del Sur. 
Cada uno de estos senores dedicaria su tiempo a dos instituciones establecidas 
en el continente que visitara. 

Una de las tareas a que esta Division da mucha importancia es la relativa 
al establecimiento de associaciones para la conciliacion internacional en el mundo 
entero. 

La primera asociacion de esta indole fue formada en Paris, hace algunos 
afios. Existen ramales en los Estados Unidos, Alemania e Inglaterra, y se estan 
formando otros. 

Las instrucciones que he recibido son de solicitar el concurso de las per- 
sonas interesadas en los paises que tengo el honor de visitar, para que organicen 
ramales de la Conciliacion Internacional, en relacion con la sociedad madre en 
Paris. Esas asociaciones, aunque locales, tienen, sin embargo, una mision inter- 
nacional, y se proponen crear, por medio de reuniones y de utiles folletos que 
regularmente publican, sentimientos amistosos hacia los pueblos de los paises 
extrangeros. 

"La Asociacion para la Conciliacion Internacional", dice el Baron d'Estour- 
nelles de Constant, "no es una asociacion sentimental, humanitaria; significa un 
progreso real, perseguido por el interes nacional de cada pais, particularmente 
de los paises jovenes que tienen necesidad de consagrar todas sus fuerzas y sus 
recursos a su desarrollo. 

"La Conciliacion es el indispensable complemento moderno del esfuerzo eco- 
nomico de todo pais civilizado. jDesarrollar la prosperidad nacional al amparo 
de las buenas relaciones internacionales ; ese es nuestro empeno, resumido en 
nuestra divisa: Pro patria per orbis concordiam! 

"Organizad el arbitraje de preferencia a la guerra; pero preferid siempre 
la conciliacion al arbitraje. Tal es nuestra concepcion, nuestra norma de vida. 

"La guerra antes que le servidumbre. 

"El arbitraje antes que la guerra. 

"La conciliacion antes que el arbitraje. 

"El arbitraje repara; la conciliacion evita. 

"La conciliacion reemplaza la esteril ruina de los antagonismos con el fecundo 
espiritu de la cooperation." 

La Fundacion esta. dispuesta a tomar a su cargo la organization de esas 
sociedades, y a suministrar los recursos necesarios para asegurarse los servicios 
de secretarios competentes, y cubrir los demas gastos. 

Me ocupare ahora de la labor de la Division de Economia Politica y de 
Historia. 

La tarea de esta Division es : "Alentar investigaciones y estudios cientificos 
y profundos sobre las causas de la guerra, y sobre los medios practicos de pre- 
venirla y evitarla." 



154 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Hace dos anos se organizo en Berna, Suiza, una Conferencia a la cual se 
invito a economistas y publicistas distinguidos de toda Europa, para que exa- 
minaran las cuestiones susceptibles de ser debida y practicamente estudiadas, y 
elaboraran un programa de ensayo para la Division. 

Ya se ha asignado un gran numero de temas a especialistas elegidos en los 
paises a los cuales se contrae su tarea; algunos estudios estan ya terminados y 
dentro de algunos afios la Fundacion habra publicado una serie de folletos no- 
tables sobre todas las fases del programa y que seran, para hacer uso de las 
palabras del sefior Root, "utiles a la humanidad." 

El profesor Kinley, un viejo y sincero amigo de la America Latina, que repre- 
sento a los Estados Unidos en el Cuarto Congreso Panamericano en Buenos Aires, 
ha sido nombrado miembro de la Comision de Investigaciones y se consagrara mas 
especialmente a los problemas que interesan a la America Latina. Ha resuelto 
visitar la America Latina el afio proximo para cambiar ideas con los directores 
de la opinion, a fin de conocer su juicio y si es posible aseguararse su concurso 
para proponer y ejecutar los proyectos que pudieran recomendarle. 

La tercera Division es la de Derecho Internacional. 

Esta Division, como las otras, ha considerado necesario crear una organiza- 
cion especial y asegurar el servicio de un cuerpo de abogados que puedan servir 
de asesores en su trabajo. 

El Instituto de Derecho Internacional se compone — apenas hay necesidad de 
decirlo — de los mas eminentes jurisconsultos de todas las naciones, y la Funda- 
cion pidio al Instituto que asumiera el caracter de consejero de la Division de 
Derecho Internacional. El instituto acepto el cargo y eligio una comision que 
ejerce las funciones de consejera del director. La comision se compone de hom- 
bres de autoridad reconocida en asuntos de Derecho internacional : son los senores 
Fusinato, de Italia ; Gram y Hagerup, de Noruega ; Holland, de Inglaterra ; Lam- 
masch, de Austria; Lardy, de Suiza; Renault, de Francia; Rolin, de Belgica; 
y Vesnich, de Servia. 

La Division prepara varias obras. La primera es una colleccion, destinada a 
la publicidad, de todos los tratados generales y especiales de arbitraje; y en lo 
que se refiere particularmente al siglo diecinueve, la Fundacion quedara muy 
agradecida a los publicistas de la America Latina que quieran enviarle datos sobre 
ciertas cuestiones que acaso son los unicos en conocer. Los Sindicos apreciaran, 
como un senalado favor, de parte de los gobiernos de la America Latina, si estos 
consienten en darles copias de sus tratados de arbitraje, siendo en verdad dificil 
procurarse textos autenticos y fidedignos. Todos los ejemplos conocidos de arbi- 
traje internacional seran coleccionados y publicados con notas criticas. El Pro- 
fesor John Bassett Moore, alta autoridad en las cuestiones de Derecho interna- 
cional y actualmente consejero del Ministerio de Estado de los Estados Unidos, 
se ha encargado de esta obra monumental. 

El Instituto de Derecho Internacional que desempena ahora el papel de con- 
sejero de la Division de Derecho Internacional fue creado en Europa en mil 
ochocientos setentitres. Aunque este Instituto representa la conciencia judidica 



APENDICE VI 155 

international, varios jurisconsultos han sentido la necesidad de una institution 
que fuera la representante de la conciencia juridica de America, y que estudiara 
los problemas que mas particularmente interesan al Nuevo Mundo y considerara 
desde un punto de vista americano, las cuestiones del Derecho de gentes. 

Como sabeis, se fundo, hace un afio, por estadistas y publicistas de las dis- 
tintas Republicas americanas, un Instituto Americano de Derecho International 
cuyo presidente honorario es el senor Elihu Root. Este Instituto se propone 
f ormar sociedades nacionales de Derecho international en los paises panameri- 
canos, afiliados a el y que trabajen por estudiar los problemas americanos, hacer 
conocer los principios del Derecho international, y contribuir a las relaciones 
pacificas de los distintos paises. 

Por temor de pareceros exagerado cuando os hablo de los fines y propositos 
del Instituto Americano de Derecho International seame permitido citaros un 
pasaje de un erudito holandes, profesor de Derecho internacional, de quien se 
puede suponer que trata esta cuestion con desinteres. 

Despues de haber hablado del gran ejemplo que ha dado la America al 
mundo, procurando la codification del Derecho internacional, dice : 

"Un Instituto esencialmente cientifico, mas apenas inferior en valor moral, 
nos proporciona el segundo ejemplo. . . Este Instituto tiene por fin; 
primero, contribuir al desarrollo del Derecho internacional; segundo, consolidar 
el sentimiento comun de una justicia internacional; tercero, hacer aceptar en 
todas partes la action pacifica en el arreglo de las controversias internacionales 
entre los Estados americanos. Esta idea luminosa nacio de la conviction que vale 
mas propagar las nociones del derecho y de la justicia por medio de una infusion 
lenta pero constante en los cerebros y los corazones de los pueblos que por medio 
de negociaciones diplomaticas que no descansan sobre un sentimiento popular 
general . . . Este nuevo indicio de un progreso vigoroso que nos llega de allen- 
de el oceano, reanima nuestras esperanzas y redobla nuestros esfuerzos." 

El senor Root y sus colegas dan la mayor importancia al establecimiento 
y al buen f uncionamiento del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional y de 
sus sociedades afiliadas en todos los paises de America. 

La Fundacion pasa actualmente al Instituto antiguo, fundado en Europa, 
un subsidio destinado a cubrir los gastos de viaje de sus miembros, los gastos de 
las comisiones, y la publication de sus trabajos. El nuevo Instituto puede contar 
con que recibira de la Fundacion, en cuanto se hayan constituido definitivamente 
las sociedades nacionales, una ayuda pecuniaria, y que estara en un pie de igualdad 
con el antiguo Instituto. La Revista Americana de Derecho Internacional, que 
se publica en ingles y en castellano, y que con algunas ligeras modificaciones 
podria convertirse en organo del Instituto Americano, recibe ya un subsidio anual 
de la Fundacion. 

Otra institution por la cual la Division de Derecho Internacional se interesa 
mucho y a la cual subvencionaria y mantendria, es la Academia de Derecho Inter- 
nacional que se proyecta establecer en La Haya. 



156 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

En la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz, de La Haya, se presento una mocion, 
a fin de crear esa Academia. No se tomo entonces ningun acuerdo, pero la idea 
se ha impuesto por los publicistas de todos los paises. El Gobierno de Holanda 
se ha interesado especialmente, y un comite de publicistas holandeses, presidido 
por el sehor Asser, tomo la iniciativa de crear y de instalar esa Academia en el 
Palacio de la Paz, de La Haya. Este hermoso edificio seria asi no solo el sitio 
de reunion de las conferencias internacionales y el hogar de tribunales interna- 
cionales, sino un centro, una fuerza viva, para propagar constantemente los 
principios del Derecho internacional entre los paises del mundo. 

El proyecto se ocupa de la ensehanza sistematica, durante algunos meses del 
ano, del Derecho internacional y de las materias correlativas, por medio de una 
fucultad constituida al efecto y cuyos profesores, eligidos entre los mas eminentes 
publicistas de diferentes paises, se turnarian. Se darian cursos y conferencias 
en frances, espahol, ingles, aleman e italiano, sobre asuntos importantes y opor- 
tunos por publicistas que, aparte de un amplio conocimiento teorico, hayan ad- 
quirido una larga experiencia en la practica del Derecho internacional. 

Se propuso tambien interesar a los gobiernos, invitandolos a designar fun- 
cionarios competentes de los diversos departamentos ministeriales que seguirian 
los cursos. 

La institution seria unica por sus breves cursos, unica por su pequeha facul- 
tad variable, unica por su cuerpo de estudiantes procedentes de todos los paises, 
unica por sus clases especiales. 

La Fundacion pagara todos los gastos, pidiendose solamente a los gobiernos 
que designen personas que asistan a los cursos; pero la Academia no sera una 
agencia directa de la Fundacion ni estara bajo su control. 

Tengo el encargo de presentaros el proyecto de esta Academia y de solicitar 
el concurso de todas las naciones latinoamericanas, a fin de que cada una designe 
a uno o varios de sus ciudadanos para que asistan a las conferencias y a los 
cursos. 

Notareis que el senor Root y la Fundacion Carnegie estan empenados en 
el desarrollo cientifico del Derecho internacional, y mucho les gustaria ver esta- 
blecido un Tribunal de Justicia Internacional que no fuera temporal para casos 
aislados, sino permanente para todos los casos. Conoceis bien la maxima "inter 
arma silent leges," pero tambien es cierta la afirmacion contraria "inter leges 
silent arma." La historia nos demuestra que esto es una verdad con referenda 
a los individuos, pudiendose observar que tambien es aplicable a las naciones. 

Otra cuestion sobre la cual debo llamaros la atencion es la formacion de 
comisiones nacionales para considerar los asuntos que podrian constituir parte 
del programa de la proxima Conferencia de La Haya, comisiones que se pondran 
en comunicacion con las que se formen en todos los paises americanos. 

Es generalmente conocido el hecho de que la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz 
reunida en La Haya propuso que la tercera se reuniera ocho afios mas tarde. 
lapso igual al que medio entre la primera y la segunda ; de suerte que si se cumple 



APENDIC3 VI 157 

esta proposition, la proxima Conferencia se reunira en mil novecientos quince. 
Estipulose ademas que uno o dos anos antes de esa reunion probable, se consti- 
tuiria un comite preparatorio mediante un acuerdo comun de las potencias. 

Es evidente que los diversos paises invitados deberan examinar las cuestiones 
importantes antes de la constitution del comite preparatorio, y parece oportuno, 
si no necesario, que cada gobierno nombre un comite para examinar esas cues- 
tiones en detalle, a fin de poder presentar sus proposiciones con todo conoci- 
miento de causa. 

Son por lo tanto cinco los proyectos practicos en los cuales solicitamos vuestro 
concurso : 

El establecimiento en cada pais de una sociedad nacional de Derecho inter- 
national, afiliada al Instituto Americano de Derecho International ; 

El establecimiento en cada pais de una sociedad nacional de conciliation 
internacional, afiliada a la Asociacion en Paris; 

El nombramiento de comites nacionales para estudiar asuntos que puedan 
discutirse en la proxima Conferencia de La Haya, y la intercomunicacion de 
tales comites entre todos los paises americanos; 

El intercambio de profesores y de estudiantes entre las universidades norte- 
americanas y las suramericanas, y visitas de hombres prominentes ; 

La participation de los gobiernos americanos en la proyectada Academia de 
Derecho Internacional en La Haya, enviando cada gobierno uno o mas estudiantes 
representatives para asistir a los cursos. 

Para terminar seame permitido citar un parrafo de las instrucciones que 
me ha dado el senior Elihu Root : 

"Los Sindicos de la Fundacion comprenden bien que el progreso en la obra 
que han emprendido debe necesariamente ser lento y que sus resultados mas 
substanciales se obtendran en el lejano porvenir. Estamos tratando con aptitudes 
e impulsos firmemente establecidos en la naturaleza humana a traves del desarrollo 
de miles de anos, y lo mas que una generation puede esperar es fomentar el 
cambio gradual en las normas de conducta. Cualquier calculo de tal obra y 
sus resultados debe hacerse no en terminos de la vida humana individual, sino 
en terminos de la vida larga de las naciones. Aunque los resultados inmediatos 
no sean conspicuos, no puede haber ningun objeto mas noble en el esfuerzo 
humano que el ejercicio de una influencia sobre las tendencias de la raza, de 
modo que se mueva, aunque sea muy lentamente, en direction de la civilization 
y la humanidad y en direction opuesta a la brutalidad sin sentido. Es para par- 
ticipar con nosotros en esta obra noble aunque inconspicua, que le rogamos invite 
a nuestros amigos en Sur America con las seguridades mas sinceras y sin reservas 
de nuestra distinguida consideration y afectuosa estimation." 

Excelentisimos senores: Antes de terminar quiero daros una vez mas las 
gracias por el insigne honor que me ha sido dispensado, y expresaros mi profunda 
gratitud por vuestra amable y simpatica acogida. 



158 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Discurso del Sr. Tudela y Varela, Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores, 

Pronunciado en el Banquets dado por dicho Senor a Mr. Bacon 
Lima, 7 de Noviembre de 1913 

Senor Bacon: 

Con intensa satisfaction os ofrezco este banquete en nombre del Gobierno 
del Peru, que atribuye a vuestra visita todo el alto significado que ella tiene. 

Diplomatico experto, actuando como Secretario de Estado en Washington 
y como Embajador en Europa; universitario eminente, en el Consejo Directivo 
de Harvard ; propagandista del derecho como delegado de la Fundacion Carnegie ; 
os presentais encarnando la mas acentuada y sobresaliente cultura. 

El exito de vuestra mision civilizadora y humanitaria, habra, sin duda, de 
corresponder a tan valiosos titulos, ya por el inmenso prestigio que ellos mismos 
envuelven, ya por el ambiente propicio que circunda a esta tierra de America para 
alentar todo esfuerzo generoso y noble. 

Podeis estar cierto, senor Bacon, de que, especialmente en nuestro pais, en- 
cuentran los ideales del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional la mas 
entusiasta acogida. El Peru tiene a honra haberlos proclamado, en todo mo- 
menta, al traves de su historia, y espera que algun dia prevaleceran con verdadera 
encada, venciendo los inevitables tropiezos que la imperfection humana opuso 
siempre al imperio absoluto del derecho. 

Acompahadme a brindar, sefioras y sefiores, por la ventura personal de 
nuestro ilustre huesped, por su distinguida familia y por su patria grandiosa. 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Senor as, Senor es, Senor Ministro: 

Os agradezco de todo corazon, las amables palabras que habeis pronunciado 
en mi obsequio, vuestras bondadosas expresiones referentes a mi patria, y esta 
hermosa fiesta con que me habeis honrado en nombre de vuestro gobierno. Tam- 
bien deseo reiterar mi prof undo reconocimiento por la cordial reception que me 
habeis dispensado vos, senor, y vuestros conciudadanos, con la finura y generosa 
hospitalidad que son privilegio de la caballerosa raza castellana. 

La simpatia que habeis expresado por la mision que llevo a cabo y vuestra 
cordial promesa de apoyo me llenan de gratitud, de alegria, y de alientos para 
el porvenir. Os aseguro que vuestra amistad, vuestra simpatia, y vuestro apoyo, 
para nosotros, "valen un Peru." 

Nosotros los americanos del norte nos sentimos orgullosos de nuestras pro- 
gresistas hermanas del sur. Entre estas, se destaca a nuestros ojos, la noble y 
simpatica Republica del Peru, tanto por la cultura de su pueblo, la virilidad de 
su raza, la pureza de su idioma, el progreso de su civilization actual, como por 
su asombrosa historia y los misterios de sus civilizaciones pasadas. 



APENDICE VI 159 

Bien sabemos que este pais es, en el lenguaje del poeta, "cofre de los tesoros 
primordiales, joyero mineral del regio orbe." Los Andes y el Pacifico lo encier- 
ran en amoroso lazo, y el valeroso, noble, y emprendedor caracter peruano debe 
derivar su hidalguia del imponente mar y de las majestuosas montafias que cir- 
cundan esta tierra. 

Una vez inaugurado el Canal de Panama, se abrira para el Peru una nueva 
pagina en su historia. Por ese portentoso canal, obra maestra de ingenieria moder- 
na, vendran, cual desbandada tropa, las naves del comercio a invadir los puertos 
del Peru, vendra la inmigracion; y las razas europeas ayudaran al bello pais 
peruano al desenvolvimiento y adelanto de su agricultura, industria y comercio, 
y al desarrollo de sus grandes recursos. 

Nosotros abrigamos los mas cordiales deseos por vuestra prosperidad. Esta- 
mos contentos de que las relaciones del pasado den prestigio a nuestro continente ; 
estamos orgullosos de la amistad tradicional entre el Peru y los Estados Unidos ; 
y alentamos la esperanza de que esta buena amistad no solo se perpetue, sino que 
se afiance y cobre fuerzas en el porvenir, y que cada ano que pase nuestras rela- 
ciones lleguen a ser mas intimas, mas estrechas, y mas fraternales. Asi es de 
esperarse de los miembros de una gran familia, que habitan el mismo continente, 
que tienen el mismo ideal, y a quienes les espera el mismo destino. 

Esperamos que la hermosa tierra de los Incas siga por la senda emprendida, 
del progreso y bienestar, para su f elicidad en el porvenir, cada vez de mas risuefio 
aspecto. 

Brindo, sefiores, por la Republica Peruana, por nuestro ilustre anfitrion, y 
por las distinguidas damas que adornan esta fiesta. 

Discurso del Sr. Luis G. Rivera, 

Pronunciado en la Recepcion dada en el Centro Universitario, 
Lima, 7 de Novibmbre de 1913 

Senor Bacon: 

Es altamente honroso para el Centro, institution representativa de la juventud 
universitaria, abrir sus puertas para recibirlo en la modesta casa de los estudiantes. 
La juventud, que conoce perfectamente vuestra obra, que ha seguido cons- 
tantemente vuestros pasos, y que admira la pujanza y grandeza de vuestro pueblo, 
quiere que, antes que abandoneis esta capital, dejeis en la sencilla casa, habitada 
por jovenes que profesan el mismo culto que vos, una carinosa huella, una 
palabra sincera de aliento y de estimulo para la juventud peruana, que ama 
intensamente la verdad, respeta la justicia y anhela fervorosamente que el bien 
supremo de la paz reine por encima de mezquinos intereses y efimeras divisiones. 

Senor Bacon : Cuando torneis a vuestra ilustre Universidad, sed portador de 
nuestro mas af ectuoso saludo a vuestros discipulos ; decidles que aqui en la tierra 
de los Incas tienen muchos camaradas y amigos que tienen los mismos ideales y 
sienten los mismos entusiasmos : y vos, egregio maestro, contad para vuestra tarea 



160 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

con nuestro decidido concurso, teniendo presente, en todo momento, que la 
juventud peruana hace suya vuestra noble mision y sostendra siempre con fe la 
bandera de la paz, blanca como las mas altas cumbres de los Andes. 



Discurso del Dr. Manuel F. Bellido, 

Pronunciado en la Recepcion en ee Colegio de Abogados, 
Lima, 8 de Noviembre de 1913 

Seiiores: 

Tiene hoy el Colegio de Abogados de Lima el honor de incorporar como su 
miembro honorario al ilustre seiior Roberto Bacon quien llega a nosotros precedido 
de la justa fama de sus personales merecimientos. Ella os lo ha hecho conocer y 
sabeis que el hoy sindico de la Universidad de Harvard, ha sido Subsecretario 
de Estado, Jefe de Cancilleria y Embajador de su pais en Francia; y que viene 
desempefiando importantisima mision en servicio de la mas noble de las causas: 
la de la paz entre las naciones civilizadas. 

Este bello ideal que concibiera el gran filantropo Mr. Andrew Carnegie lo 
indujo a entregar, como donativo destinado a procurar los medios de alcanzarlo, 
la suma de diez millones de dolares. Podra o no conseguirse en un futuro mas 
o menos remoto la realization de tan magno proposito, pero Mr. Carnegie ya ha 
conquistado el homenaje de todos los hombres de buena voluntad. 

Eos fideicomisarios encargados de la administration del cuantioso donativo, 
constituidos en asociacion, han fijado como fines de ella los siguientes: 

a) Promover y fomentar la investigation cientifica y el estudio de las 
causas de la guerra, asi como metodos practicos para impedirla y evitarla; 

b) Ayudar al desenvolvimiento del Derecho internacional hacia un 
acuerdo universal sobre las reglas del mismo y para la aceptacion de estas 
entre las naciones ; 

c) Difundir information y educar la opinion publica acerca de las 
causas, naturaleza y efectos de la guerra y medios encaminados a entor- 
pecerla, estorbarla y evadirla; 

d) Establecer una mejor inteligencia de derechos y deberes interna- 
cionales y un sentido de justicia mas perfecto entre los habitantes de los 
paises civilizados; 

e) Fomentar sentimientos de amistad entre los habitantes de los distintos 
paises y acrecentar el conocimiento e inteligencia comun entre las naciones ; 

f) Promover la aceptacion general de los medios pacificos en el arreglo 
de las disputas internacionales ; 

g) Mantener, fomentar y auxiliar aquellos establecimientos, organiza- 
ciones, sociedades y agencias que se estimen utiles o necesarios para la 
consecusion de los fines de la Fundacion. 

El ilustre sefior Bacon viene comisionado por la Fundacion Carnegie a servir 
tan bello programa. 



APENDICE VI 161 

Son muchos los que creen una Utopia conseguir la abolicion de las guerras 
entre las naciones civilizadas, pero aun para aquellos los fines de la institucion 
han de merecer no solo simpatia sino proposito de cooperation ; pues, como decia 
ayer en la Universidad de San Marcos el Senor Bacon, bien podiamos designar 
a la Fundacion Carnegie: Fundacion para la Amistad Internacional. Coadyu- 
vemos todos a esa amistad que la paz sera su consecuencia necesaria. 

Y si esa consecuencia es solo una Utopia, tengamosla siempre como ideal de 
la humanidad, que nos sirva de aliento en el peregrinaje, y conservemos la fe 
en la eficacia de nuestra labor en pro de su realization. Si, por el contrario, la 
paz entre las naciones civilizadas ha de llegar a ser una hermosa realidad, no 
nos detengamos en averiguar la fecha del triunfo, el sera obra no de individuos 
sino de naciones ; no la veran los hombres de la actual generation, pero disfrutaran 
de ella sus descendientes. Y esto no debe desalentarnos ; trabajemos como el 
sembrador de robles, no para nosotros sino para los que han de venir despues; 
pongamos nuestro contingente en provecho de la humanidad futura. 

Ilustre Senor Bacon : entre los objetivos de la mision que venis desempenando, 
figura el de "ayudar al desenvolvimiento del Derecho internacional hacia un 
acuerdo universal sobre las reglas del mismo y para la aceptacion de estas entre 
las naciones". Los miembros de este Colegio, por razon de profesion, estan 
obligados a ocuparse de este desenvolvimiento de una de las ramas de la ciencia 
del derecho, y espero que le prestaran la debida atencion. 

A vos, senor, que os ocupais de este punto intimamente relacionado con 
nuestra profesion, os hemos conferido el titulo de miembro honorario de este 
Colegio y el haberlo vos aceptado es considerado por nosotros como un honor que 
se nos hace. Asi figurara vuestro nombre al lado de otros tambien muy ilustres, 
como el del eminente senor Elihu Root que constituyen honroso timbre para 
esta corporation. 

Ilustre Senor Bacon : quedais incorporado al Ilustre Colegio de Abogados de 
Lima. 

Discurso del Dr. Anibal Maurtua 

Senor es: 

El ilustre Colegio de Abogados de Lima acaba de realizar un acto meritorio 
y justiciero, incorporando como miembro honorario al senor Roberto Bacon, 
notable estadista norteamericano que nos ha proporcionado el honor y el placer 
de su visita en el desempeno de la mision que le ha confiado la Fundacion Carnegie 
para la Paz Internacional. 

Antes de ayer, en el notable discurso que pronuncio en la Universidad Mayor 
de San Marcos, con motivo de ser incorporado como doctor honorario de la 
Facultad de Jurisprudencia, el senor Bacon ha expuesto ampliamente los fines 
y propositos de las mencionada institucion. La fundacion Carnegie no es una 
asociacion de simple propaganda pacifista, sino una institucion cientifica que, 



162 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

como la expreso el senor Elihu Root, en la primera reunion de los Sindicos, el 14 
de diciembre de 1910, tratara de obtener una perception mas profunda de las en- 
fermedades sociales de la humanidad, "una de las cuales es la guerra". Entra 
en sus propositos, principalmente, investigar las causas de la guerra, asi como 
sus efectos sobre los neutrales y beligerantes, con el fin de estar siempre en situa- 
tion de recomendar los medios que deben adoptarse para evitarla en cuanto sea 
posible. La Fundacion Carnegie, en una palabra, es una institucion altamente 
civilizadora y recomendable al respeto universal. 

Senor Bacon : podeis llevar al fundador y a los Sindicos de la Fundacion las 
seguridades de que aqui, en el Peru, secundaremos con todo empefio los propositos 
humanitarios de esa institucion. Nos imponen ese deber no solamente los altos 
fines de armonia y confraternidad humanas que ella persigue, sino el desarrollo 
incalculable que alcanzaran nuestras relaciones con los Estados Unidos de Ame- 
rica, Europa y Asia una vez que en 1915 el Istmo de Panama sea entregado al 
trafico mundial. 

Senores : no debemos olvidar la influencia que dos grandes acontecimientos 
americanos han ejercido en la vida social, economica y politica de los demas 
pueblos de la tierra. El descubrimiento del Nuevo Mundo vario las corrientes 
del comercio y del poder politico de Europa, Africa y Asia. Se traslado del 
Oriente al Occidente. La independencia de la America, igualmente, ejercio en 
los destinos de la humanidad influencias notables. La America independiente 
establecio la tolerancia religiosa, que el Mundo antiguo esta ejercitando actual- 
mente en bien de la conciencia humana. La America libre, asimismo, creo institu- 
ciones democraticas que en el dia estan tomando carta de naturaleza en las viejas 
monarquias. La America, una vez que conquisto su libertad politica, asimilo 
al immigrante y constituyo las subrazas del yankee en el Norte y el criollo en Sur 
America, otorgandoles la mayor amplitud de derechos civiles y politicos de que 
carecen algunas razas humanas. En la America es donde todos los hombres de 
trabajo, sin distinciones ni privilegios, han aprendido a formar cuantiosas fortunas 
que han abierto el espiritu de sus poseedores a obras tan humanas como la realizada 
por Mr. Andrew Carnegie, filantropo y millonario escoses, establecido desde 
1848 en la America del Norte. Ha sido este continente, por ultimo, donde se ha 
proclamado y ejercitado con mas eficacia el principio del arbitraje como medio 
de evitar la guerra entre las naciones. 

La apertura del Canal de Panama, que constituira el tercer acontecimiento 
americano, va a ejercer, indudablemente, mayor influencia en el desarollo de las 
relaciones comerciales y politicas de Europa y Asia. 

En las relaciones de ambas Americas, particularmente, ejercera action eficaz 
respecto a la educacion, al sentimiento de continentalidad y a la conciencia poli- 
tica de la America Latina. En la America del Norte la educacion es por completo 
popular. La instruction y educacion han logrado un desarrollo notable, elevando 
el nivel moral e intelectual de las masas que trabajan y producen. Alia la educa- 
cion es mas eficaz para la vida del hombre. En Sur America, en algunos con- 



APENDICE VI 163 

ceptos, nuestra mentalidad todavia es europea, lo que no es provechoso para el 
bienestar del pueblo. 

El espiritu panamericano tampoco esta arreglado en todas estas nacionali- 
dades, no obstante la doctrina Monroe y la hegemonia de Norte America han 
facilitado el desarrollo de estas nacionalidades. 

Nuestras aspiraciones y pensamientos, por ultimo, no son esencialmente 
americanistas, ni tenemos idea del rol que desempefiamos en el equilibrio uni- 
versal. 

Y bien, la Fundacion Carnegie, con su amplisimo programa educacional, eco- 
nomico y politico, adelantandose a los acontecimientos del porvenir nos presenta 
el cuadro integral del panamericanismo en sus lineas generales. Para la orienta- 
cion futura de estos pueblos y para el equilibrio politico de Europa y America 
tiene dos meritos recomendables : La consagracion de la independencia nacional 
para cada uno de los Estados que vienen desarrollandose en el continente; y el 
progreso del comercio y el intercambio intelectual, resortes que en el futuro im- 
pediran la guerra entre las naciones, como lo deseamos todos los americanos de 
buena voluntad. 



Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Senores: Los agasajos que he recibido de la muy culta sociedad limefia, 
unidos a los que me han sido tributados por el Gobierno y distinguidas 
corporaciones en vuestro mundo intelectual, embargan mi alma de sincero e intenso 
r econocimiento . 

El hecho de que la simpatia que os han inspirado mi mision y mi Universidad, 
ha sido motivo de que el ilustre cuerpo de abogados me otorgue el muy honroso 
titulo de miembro honorario del Colegio de Abogados, me colma de satisfaccion. 
Esta insigne distincion que se me hace es para mi de gran valia. Me siento 
muy honrado, sefiores abogados limefios, de llamarme vuestro compafiero. 

Antes de ayer expuse brevemente los motivos principales que me han 
traido a este pais. De acuerdo con la bondadosa invitation que se me ha 
hecho, hablare ahora mas extensamente de uno de ellos, quizas el que con 
mas eficacia ha de ayudar a la obra de la union intelectual panamericana ; me 
refiero al afianzamiento del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional, y 
a la formation de sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional. 

"Ubi societas, ibi jus." Donde hay una sociedad de naciones, existe una 
ley de naciones. A medida que crece o cambia la sociedad, se desarrolla o 
modifica la ley para adaptarla a las nuevas condiciones. Una nation no puede 
existir y llenar su mision separada y aparte de la sociedad, como tampoco el 
hombre puede vivir aislado. Eso siempre ha sido asi, y es tan evidente que 
Aristoteles dijo que el hombre es un animal politico, porque los hombres tienden 
a formar una sociedad, grande o pequefia, y organizarse en grande o pequena 
escala para un fin politico. 



164 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

Como con el hombre, asi con la nacion. No puede existir para si; es una 
unidad politica, un cuerpo politico, una persona moral. Es miembro de la 
sociedad de las naciones que ha resultado de la mera existencia de las naciones 
y las necesidades de relaciones mutuas, o fue admitida a la sociedad al ser 
reconocida como miembro por las demas, y asi han entrado todos los paises del 
Continente Americano. Al llegar a ser miembro cada nacion adquiere los mismos 
derechos que poseen las demas y en igual grado. Cada nacion es igual bajo las 
reglas que rigen la sociedad, y al mismo tiempo se sujeta a las obligaciones que 
imponen dichas reglas, porque derechos y obligaciones son terminos correla- 
tivos. El derecho de una es el derecho de todas ; la obligation de cada una 
es respetar los derechos de las demas. La independencia no significa el derecho 
de actuar sin referenda a los demas miembros de la sociedad; porque el dejar 
de respetar los derechos de los demas es la infraction de un deber; su resul- 
tado seria la anarquia, la cual es incompatible lo mismo con el bienestar de los 
miembros de la sociedad como con su progreso y su mera exitencia. Tal estado 
de cosas es imposible entre los hombres y es igualmente imposible entre las 
naciones. Aunque el Derecho internacional no esta tan desarrollado ni es tan 
adecuado como las leyes internas de cada miembro de la sociedad de las naciones, 
estamos lejos del estado de las cosas que el filosofo Hobbes definio como un 
"helium omnium contra omnes". 

Aunque podemos aceptar el principio de igualdad sin restricciones, debemos 
considerar la independencia en el sentido de que una nacion no puede actuar 
con infraccion de los derechos de otras naciones, tal como los individuos renun- 
cian a su libertad absoluta de action para que sus derechos sean observados 
y protegidos como los de los demas. 

La independencia natural e imperceptiblemente llega a ser interdependencia, 
aunque sin poner en duda la igualdad de las naciones y su derecho de quedar 
libres de intervention por parte de las otras. 

iCual es, entonces, esta ley de la sociedad de las naciones que todas las 
naciones reconocen y aplican o deben aplicar en sus relaciones con las demas 
naciones? Sin tratar de definirla — para mi proposito actual es suficiente referirme 
a su existencia y a la necesidad de su existencia — puede decirse que la referida 
ley es el Derecho internacional, que ha nacido para llenar las necesidades de las 
naciones. Una vez solo en posesion de pocos — los filosofos, los juristas y los 
estadistas — ya pertenece a todos. Ya no es preciso buscarlo exclusivamente en 
las practicas de las naciones segun los archivos de los ministerios de relaciones 
exteriores, sino que se encuentra en forma sistematica, en los libros del norte- 
americano Wheaton, en el tratado magistral del suramericano Calvo, y en las 
obras de muchos otros distinguidos autores. 

En tiempos pasados, cuando unos pocos hombres gobernaban la nacion y 
dirigian sus relaciones exteriores, no era tan necesario que el Derecho de las 
naciones fuera estudiado y conocido por el pueblo. Pero en los ultimos cien 
afios se ha efectuado un cambio en el mundo. En imperio, reino o republica los 



APENDIC3 VI 165 

jefes son responsables ante el pueblo, para cuyo beneficio tiene que administrarse 
el gobierno. El pueblo de cada pais ha llegado a ser dueno de la situacion, 
y es preciso instruir a nuestros duenos, no solamente en cuanto a sus derechos, 
sobre los cuales ya tienen algun conocimiento, sino tambien en cuanto a sus 
obligaciones, sobre las cuales todos necesitamos ser ensenados. El pueblo posee 
el poder y el deber de ejercer influencia en las relaciones exteriores, y como el 
pueblo al fin y al cabo es responsable del mane jo correcto de las relaciones 
exteriores y tiene que sufirir los errores de su gobierno, resulta necesariamente 
que debe preparase para su responsabilidad por medio de un conocimiento amplio 
de los principios del Derecho internacional. 

No quiero decir que cada votante sea un licenciado en Derecho internacional, 
ni es preciso que sea asi. Es muy importante, sin embargo, que grandes grupos 
del pueblo tomen interes en el derecho que rige las relaciones internacionales y 
por medio del cual se determinan los derechos y las obligaciones de las naciones. 
Solo por medio de un conocimiento del Derecho internacional puede formarse 
una buena opinion publica sobre cuestiones de politica extranjera; y como la 
opinion publica determina la politica extranjera, es evidente que ei conocimiento 
de los principios del Derecho internacional debe estar diseminado suficientemente 
para formar una opinion publica, sobre bases justas, en cada una'de las naciones 
que pertenecen a la sociedad de las naciones. 

He usado la frase "sociedad de las naciones" como mas exacta y significativa 
que la de "familia de las naciones", pero en un sentido mas amplio la idea de una 
familia es de especial aplicacion a las veintiuna republicas del Nuevo Mundo, con 
igual origen, con formas parecidas de gobierno, y con identicas esperanzas y 
aspiraciones. L,imitandonos al problema americano, <;c6mo podremos desarrollar 
el Derecho internacional de modo que responda a las necesidades crecientes de 
las veintiuna republicas americanas, como podremos formular las reglas de derecho 
que son necesarias para decidir nuestros problemas, como podremos dirigir 
nuestras relaciones mutuas de modo que no se turbe la harmonia que debe existir 
entre los paises del mismo continente, y como podremos esparcir el conocimiento de 
estos asuntos entre las clases que forman la opinion publica en cada una de las 
republicas ? 

Es de esperarse que las Conferencias Panamericanas continuen, que se 
inaugure el intercambio regular de profesores y de estudiantes, que se conozcan 
generalmente las instituciones de cada pais y las contribunciones de cada una al 
bien comun, y que las visitas de hombres representatives creen relaciones sociales, 
amistad y simpatia; pero las relaciones de las naciones dependen del conoci- 
miento y de la diseminacion de justos principios de derecho y de su aplicacion 
a las disputas que no pueden dejar de surgir entre los miembros de la misma 
familia. 

I Como puede desarrollarse este derecho, y una vez f ormulados los principios, 
cual es el mejor metodo de diseminarlos ? De la contestacion de esta pregunta 
dependen en gran medida las futuras relaciones entre los paises americanos. 



166 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Esta demas argumentar que una ley, para af ectar a todos, tiene que ser hecha 
por todos, es decir, tiene que ser el resultado de la cooperacion. El Derecho inter- 
nacional no es el derecho de ninguna nacion determinada, no se hace por ninguna 
nacion determinada, no se impone por ninguna nacion determinada, no puede ser 
cambiado por ninguna nacion determinada. El derecho puede ser codificado 
donde existe, y creado, donde no existe, por la action de los gobiernos, tal como 
tratan de hacerlo los Estados de America, habiendose empezado ya el trabajo en 
una sesion de juristas americanos celebrada en Rio de Janeiro en junio del afio 
pasado. Pero los gobiernos se mueven despacio, y cuando se mueven con 
demasiada rapidez y adelantandose a la opinion publica, su obra no es de dura- 
tion, i No seria conveniente una cooperacion particular, es decir, cientifica, entre 
los publicistas de America? 

Una sociedad particular en Europa, el Instituto de Derecho Internacional. 
fundado en el 1873 P or indicaciones de un distinguido norteamericano, Francis 
Lieber, y del cual el distinguido suramericano, Calvo, fue uno de los fundadores, 
ha hecho mas que cualquiera otra fuerza aislada para desarrollar el Derecho 
internacional. Sus proyectos sobre varias fases de Derecho internacional, sus 
acuerdos, sus declaraciones de derecho antiguo y nuevo, han sido aceptadas por 
los especialistas, y sus proposiciones han sido aceptadas por los gobiernos por su 
valor practice Paulatina y cuidadosamente, cientificamente y sin errar, ha re- 
suelto problema tras problema y producido un modelo de correcta codifica- 
tion tras otro. Una gran parte de sus trabajos fue adoptada por las Conferencias 
de La Haya, especialmente el codigo de procedimiento arbitral, el codigo de guerra 
por tierra, sus indicaciones sobre un tribunal de presas maritimas, y hasta podria 
decirse que hizo posible el trabajo de La Haya. Preparo el camino y suministro 
proyectos que podian ser aceptados con pocas modificaciones por las Conferencias. 
La labor paciente de una sociedad no oficial, compuesta de publicistas que repre- 
sentan la ciencia y no a los gobiernos, suministro forma y sustancia a la conferen- 
cia oficial. No puede ponerse en duda que a una codificacion oficial del Derecho 
internacional debe preceder el interes y la labor cuidadosa, paciente e inconspicua 
de hombres cientificos, si la codificacion ha de comprender justos principios de 
derecho que pueda adoptar la sociedad de las naciones, en vez de transacciones 
sobre intereses opuestos de los gobiernos. 

iNo creeis que hay sitio para un Instituto Americano de Derecho Interna- 
cional, compuesto de un numero igual de publicistas de cada uno de los paises 
americanos, que podria hacer por nuestro continente lo que el Instituto mas 
antiguo ha hecho por el mundo en los ultimos cuarenta afios? £No podria tal 
Instituto trabajar en harmonia con sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional 
en cada capital americana? <;No podrian estas sociedades nacionales unir a todas 
las personas que esten interesadas en el Derecho internacional, crear tal interes 
donde no existe, y formar un centro en cada pais para el estudio y la populariza- 
tion del Derecho internacional? 



APENDICE VI 167 

Dos publicistas americanos, creyeron asi, y, despues de conferenciar con otros 
distinguidos publicistas del continente y recibir su aprobacion, establecieron provi- 
sionalmente el Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional. Los miembros 
del antiguo Instituto son de esta opinion, segun se desprende de su alabanza entu- 
siasta del proyecto. Y asi lo cree el distinguido estadista norteamericano, Elihu 
Root, que ha aceptado la presidencia honoraria del Instituto. 

En un discurso pronunciado al abrirse el Vigesimo Congreso de la Paz en 
La Haya en el mes de agosto del corriente afio, el eminente publicista holandes, 
Profesor de Louter, hizo referencia a tres asuntos alentadores de fecha reciente, 
los tres de origen americano. El primero fue la codificacion del Derecho interna- 
cional propuesto por las Conferencias Panamericanas y empezada por el Congreso 
de Juristas Americanos que se reunio en Rio de Janeiro en junio de 1912 ; el 
segundo fue la formacion del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional, 
fundado por la feliz cooperacion de publicistas de la America del Norte y de la del 
Sur; el tercero fue la creacion y el proyectado trabajo de la Fundacion Carnegie 
para la Paz Internacional. 

Hare ahora una breve referencia a las sociedades nacionales que deben 
f ormarse y afiliarse al Instituto, cuyos miembros seran escogidos de los miembros 
de las sociedades nacionales. Al fundarse el Instituto europeo se pensaba en 
sociedades nacionales, pero de hecho no se formaron ningunas hasta despues de 
fundarse el Instituto Americano. En febrero del afio en curso, se fundo la Socie- 
dad Francesa de Derecho Internacional. Si en Francia una sociedad nacional es 
necesaria y puede hacer trabajos utiles, es justo suponer que tambien puede 
formarse una sociedad nacional en cada una de las Republicas americanas y que 
podra hacer trabajos utiles e importantes. La socieded francesa publica un bole- 
tin modesto, y lo mismo podria hacer cada sociedad americana. El intercambio 
de boletines informaria a todas las sociedades nacionales sobre el trabajo de las 
demas. El Instituto Americano no tendria que fundar ninguna nueva revista de 
derecho, porque la Revista Americana de Derecho Internacional, publicada ahora 
por la sociedad norteamericana con una traduccion espanola, podria modificarse 
para hacerla el organo del Instituto sin gastos para este. Seria repartida entre 
los miembros del Instituto y los de las sociedades nacionales. Asi la sociedad 
internacional tendria una revista internacional y cada sociedad nacional un bole- 
tin nacional. Por medio de estas publicaciones todos los trabaj adores en el campo 
de asuntos internacionales quedarian en relaciones estrechas e intimas. En vez 
de trabajar aisladamente, todos seguirian unidos para un fin comun, y el Derecho 
internacional seria desarrollado y popularizado por las naciones de un continente. 

Para terminar permitaseme indicar como es que el Instituto Americano podria 
ayudar a la Fundacion Carnegie en su mision. Al Instituto antiguo se pidio que 
actuara como consejero de la Division de Derecho Internacional de la Funda- 
cion. Este acepto la invitacion y nombro un comite formado por los publicistas 
mas eminentes europeos, y asi la Division tiene la mejor ayuda que puede 
obtenerse en Europa en cuanto a la clase y a los metodos de sus trabajos. En vista 



168 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

de los servicios inapreciables que rinde dicho Instituto, la Fundacion le hace una 
subvencion, la cual se emplea en pagar los gastos de viaje de los miembros del 
Instituto, que se reune en distintos paises todos los afios, en pagar los gastos 
de sus comisiones, y en la preparacion y publication de sus valiosos informes. 

Si el Instituto Americano se establece firmemente, con las sociedades 
nacionales y afiliadas, ino podria esperarse que se pidiera al Instituto Americano 
que aconseje a la Division de Derecho Internacional de la Fundacion en cuanto 
a todos los problemas de naturaleza americana, y no justificaria el Instituto, 
el que se le preste la ayuda monetaria que fuera necesaria y que seria empleada 
del mismo modo que la subvencion que se hace al Instituto Europeo? 

El Senor Root, Presidente Honorario del Instituto Americano de Derecho 
Internacional, y Presidente efectivo de la Sociedad Norteamericana de Derecho 
Internacional, me ha encargado solicitar encarecidamente que presteis vuestra 
valiosa cooperation al Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional, para hacerlo 
un instrumento poderoso en el desarrollo del derecho, desempenando para 
America y para el mundo la misma mision que desempena el Instituto antiguo 
para Europa y para el mundo, y solicitar asimismo que formeis una sociedad 
nacional de Derecho internacional, afiliada al Instituto Americano. 

Si os asociais con nosotros en esta obra de union intelectual, si los paises 
latinos de la America y los Estados Unidos se unen en un continuo esfuerzo en 
pro del mejoramiento de las relaciones entre las naciones, si todos los paises de 
nuestro hemisferio trabajan al unisono hacia un ideal comun, entonces se creara 
una poderosa fuerza por el bien, que no podra dejar de beneficiar tanto a nuestro 
continente, como al mundo entero y a la humanidad. 

Al concluir, deseo manifestaros mis mas leales y sinceros sentimientos del 
alto concepto que me merece este ilustre Colegio de Abogados, digno representante 
del foro peruano, y mis esperanzas de que la justicia y el derecho se impongan 
siempre, para garantia de vuestros conciudadanos. 

Discurso del Sr. Jose Balta, 

Pronunciado en la Recepcion dada en la Sociedad Geografica, 
Lima, 8 de Noviembre de 1913 

Honorable Senor Bacon: 

Es muy satisfactorio para mi, poner en vuestras manos el diploma de 
miembro honorario de la Sociedad Geografica. 

El lema de la institution que representais viene bien a toda asociacion de 
hombres de estudio, que, sin olvidar su patria, trabajan en beneficio de la 
humanidad, y, es especialmente apropiado a las sociedades geograficas, para las 
cuales la Tierra no es sino un organismo en evolution constante a travez de los 
tiempos, y la especie humana un conjunto de seres identicos, sin que hasten a 
formar con ellos grupos esencialmente diferentes, ni mucho menos hostiles, el 
color de la piel, ni la forma de las facciones. 



APENDICE VI 169 

Dentro del concepto de patria cabe en el terreno cientifico la supresion de 
las fronteras y de todo prejuicio racial, y, por consiguiente, sincera amistad entre 
las naciones. 

Sed, pues, bienvenido a nuestra modesta institucion, que ojala pudiera 
ostentar la divisa de la Smithsonian, esa otra hermosa creacion norteamericana : 
"The increase and diffusion of knowledge among men", junto con las palabras 
que sintetizan el programa de la Fundacion Carnegie : pro patria per orbis 
concordiam. 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Permitidme, sefiores, expresaros mi agradecimiento sincero por vuestras 
cordiales palabras respecto a mi mision y a mi persona, y por la especial distincion 
con que me habeis honrado al otorgarme el titulo de miembro honorario de 
vuestra sociedad. Me siento profundamente conmovido por esta manifestacion 
de amistad, la cual, os aseguro, aprecio altamente. 

Los fines de vuestra sociedad son especialmente atrayentes para mi. La 
investigacion de problemas y misterios geograficos no es solamente un estudio 
fascinador e invaluable en si ; la dif usion de conocimientos geograficos ha unido a 
los pueblos en relaciones mas intimas y ha contribuido al desarrollo y esparcimiento 
de la civilizacion, y por consiguiente, de la amistad internacional y de un 
sentimiento internacional. 

Es conveniente, es necesario, que las naciones trabajen juntas para ayudar 
al adelanto de la civilizacion. Ninguna nacion, mas que cualquier hombre, puede 
vivir por si sola, y la cooperacion de las naciones es tan esencial para el progreso 
del mundo como lo es la cooperacion de individuos para el adelantamiento de la 
sociedad. 

Geograficamente, la America es una unidad; industrialmente, sus miembros 
vienen en contacto mas y mas intimo ; e intelectualmente, cada uno debe contribuir 
al conocimiento y al adelanto de todos. 

Os reitero, sefiores, las gracias por vuestra afectuosa acogida y por el honor 
que me habeis conferido. 

Discurso del Dr. Romero, 

Pronunciado en el Banquets dado por la Facultad de la Universidad de San Marcos, 

Lima, 9 de Noviembre be 1913 

Senores: 

Yo no traigo preparado el discurso que deberia corresponder al merito del 
persona je a quien agasajamos, y a la gran importancia de la mision que le ha 
sido confiada; y no lo prepare porque, con la opinion de mis compafieros de 
Facultad, juzgue que no cabia discurso cuando se trataba de uno de los nuestros. 
Asi es, en efecto, senores, nosotros hoy festejamos con esta comida que el Sr. 



170 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Bacon nos haya honrado incorporandose a nuestra Facultad como miembro 
honorario de ella : celebramos lo que para nosotros es de gran valia. 

Desde muy antiguo se han celebrado con banquetes los faustos acontecimientos 
y los motivos de gran solemnidad. Se ha querido con ellos procurar momentos 
de mas intimidad, de realizar materialmente lo que ya existia por la comunion 
que simboliza la fraternidad de las almas, que tienen los mismos ideales, y que 
aspiran a identicos resultados en lo que para ellas es grande o benefico. 

Nosotros celebramos con esta comida el alto honor que nos ha dispensado 
el Sr. Bacon ; queremos expresar con ella nuestra complacencia por su incorpora- 
cion a nuestra Facultad; y juntos en la misma mesa, sin formulas de la extricta 
cortesia que nos vedaria salir de los limites por ella fijados, decirle cuanto le esti- 
mamos, cuanto nos alegra que el miembro distinguidisimo de una gran Universi- 
dad de America haya querido visitar nuestro pais, y nos haya obsequiado, en 
brillantes palabras, la exposicion de los fines que persigue en su muy alta mision. 

Si no cabia pues pronunciar discursos por que uno de los nuestros se encu- 
entra en la mesa de su propia casa ; si su llegada no sugiere sino entusiasta acogida 
y esa alegria se traduce unicamente con manifestaciones de sincero afecto, solo 
debemos exteriorizar este, y por ello me limito a rogaros, estimados companeros, 
que me acompaneis a brindar por la salud del Sr. Bacon ; por la de su muy esti- 
mable familia, y por que lleve consigo la mas grande satisfaccion por el completo 
exito que ha alcanzado en la realizacion de los fines de esa benefica institution 
que, independientemente de sus indiscutibles meritos, nos ha proporcionado el 
honor y la muy grande satisfaccion de tener al Sr. Bacon entre nosotros. 

Respuesta de Mr. Bacon 

Senor Rector, Senores: 

Una vez mas me complazco en expresaros mi agradecimiento sincero y el 
gran aprecio que siento, senor Rector y distinguidos miembros de la Facultad 
Universitaria, por los honores y distinciones con que me habeis colmado. 

Os aseguro, senores, que estoy hondamente impresionado por la fina cortesia 
y carifiosa hospitalidad que me habeis demostrado y por vuestros espontaneos y 
generosos ofrecimientos de ayuda en un trabajo de union intelectual. El 
recuerdo de vuestro afecto contribuira a que sea mas deliciosa, mas agradable, 
la impresion que ha hecho en mi, vuestro admirable pais, vuestra historica capital, 
y vuestro extremadamente simpatico pueblo. 

Algunas veces se cree que es un sofiador aquel que habla de la amistad 
internacional, del sentimiento que gobierna todo lo demas en el mundo. Pero no 
es un suefio decir que el mundo, a traves de las edades, va adelantando de lo 
material a lo espiritual, a lo moral, a la vida intelectual. No podemos ver esto 
en un dia, como no podemos ver el movimiento de la marea. Vemos las olas, 
pero la marea se mueve imperceptiblemente. El progreso, el continuo e 
irresistible progreso de la civilization, sigue siempre adelante. 



APENDICE VI 171 

Los medios de comunicacion estan facilitando no solo el comercio y la 
industria, sino que estan actualmente acercando las varias nacionalidades en union 
social e intelectual. Los viajes, el intercambio personal, y un conocimiento de los 
diferentes paises y de sus instituciones, propenden a remover las causas de 
sospecha que desgraciadamente existen entre las naciones y los pueblos que no 
llegan a tener relaciones estrechas. Las conferencias internacionales ayudan 
grandemente al acercamiento de los pueblos. La influencia de las conferencias 
panamericanas y de las latinoamericanas ha sido notable. Es motivo de gran 
satis faccion ver congresos como el Congreso Medico que acaba de reunirse en 
esta ciudad, compuesto de medicos distinguidos de toda la America. Tales con- 
gresos no solo tienen resultados valiosisimos para la ciencia; sus efectos para 
estrechar los vinculos entre los paises no son menos importantes. La profesion 
medica en la America Latina merece los mas calurosos aplausos y f elicitaciones ; 
sus miembros, reunidos en congresos internacionales, han contribuido de una 
manera brillantisima al bienestar del mundo, y al desarrollo de sentimientos de 
amistad y de fraternidad entre las naciones. Por medio de vos, senor Rector, 
quisiera expresar mis cordiales saludos y buenos deseos al senior Decano de la 
Facultad de Medicina y a los sefiores miembros del Congreso Medico. 

Nuevamente, senor, os doy las gracias por vuestra hospilidad. Aunque mi 
permanencia en la hermosa tierra peruana ha sido corta, no por eso olvidare 
la halagadora impresion que senti desde el primer momento de llegar a ella. La 
grandiosa historia del Peru habia cautivado mi interes; la afectuosa cordialidad 
y el afable caracter de los peruanos atrajeron mis simpatias; y despues, al ver 
el gran progreso que se nota aqui, tanto en el orden intelectual como en el 
material, a mi interes y mi simpatia se ha unido mi admiracion. Al dejar esta 
encantadora ciudad de los Reyes, llevo conmigo afectos personales, verdaderas 
amistades para el porvenir, y no quiero decir a mis amigos peruanos "adios", sino 
"hasta otra vista". 

Brindo, sefiores, por la Universidad de San Marcos, por su digno Rector, y 
por su ilustre Facultad. 

Carta del Dr. Juan Bautista de Lavalle, 

En la que Acepta la Seceetaria de la Sociedad de la Conciliacion Internacional 

del Peru, 
Lima, 8 de Noviembre de 1913 

Al Honorable; Senor Don Roberto Bacon, 

Muy estimado Senor: 

Es para mi muy grato el aceptar el nombramiento con que ha querido 
honrarme designandome como Secretario de la Asociacion para la Conciliacion 
Internacional que deja establecida en el Peru, dando realidad a su nobilisima 
mision, y destinada a relacionar sus labores con la asociacion, fundada en Wash- 



172 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL, SUR 

ington por el eminente Presidente de la Universidad de Columbia, Dr. Dn. Nicholas 
Murray Butler y con la institucion originaria creada en Paris por el Baron 
d'Estournelles de Constant, asi como con las recientes fundaciones establecidas 
en las naciones latinoamericanas que viene recorriendo en su apostolica gira. 

A ningun espiritu culto pueden ser indiferentes la simpatica divisa, el 
generoso programa, la elevada mision de la Asociacion para la Conciliacion 
Internacional, trazada de tan magistral manera por el Baron d'Estournelles de 
Constant, por el ilustre Elihu Root y por Ud. mismo : "El verdadero patriotismo 
consiste en servir a la patria. No es suficiente estar siempre listo a defenderla : 
precisa evitarle dificultades y peligros inutiles, y desarrollar, por medio de la 
paz, sus fuerzas, sus recur sos y su comercio." "El objeto de la Conciliacion 
Internacional es desarrollar la prosperidad nacional bajo los auspicios de buenas 
relaciones internacionales y organizar estas buenas relaciones sobre una base 
permanente y durable". "Debemos hacer el trabajo que encontremos a la mano, 
con la esperanza de que cada esfuerzo tendra un resultado, aunque nosotros no 
lo veamos." 

Cumpleme asimismo agradecer el precioso obsequio de la insignia de la 
institucion, la bellisima alegoria que grabara Eugene Carriere y que ostenta el 
tan sugestivo lema : Pro Patria per Orbis Concordiam. 

Con los sentimientos de mi mas alta considercion quedo como su obsecuente 
servidor. 

Juan Bautista de L,avall,e. 



APENDICE VII 
Monografias Impresas y Distribuidas en la America Latina 



i. La Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Internacional 

El 14 de diciembre de 1910, el Sr. Andrew Carnegie puso en manos de 
veinte y ocho Sindicos la suma de diez millones de dolares, de los cuales la 
renta anual de $500,000 habia de administrarse "para el fin de activar la 
abolicion de la guerra internacional", la que declaro ser "la mancha mas sucia 
en nuestra civilization". "Una nation", declaro ademas en la carta con la cual 
acompafio su donacion, "es criminal si rehusare someter un asunto al arbitraje 
y forzare su adversario a recurrir a un tribunal que no sabe nada respecto de 
un juicio recto". 

En su primera reunion despues de haber recibido la donacion, los Sindicos 
eligieron Presidente al Sr. Elihu Root, Vicepresidente al Sr. Joseph H. Choate, 
y Secretario al Sr. James Brown Scott. Subsiguientemente el Sr. Charlemagne 
Tower fue elegido Tesorero. 

Con su acostumbrado juicio, el Sr. Carnegie dejo en manos de los Sindicos 
sin restriction alguna el poder de crear la organizacon y establecer las agendas 
que habian de Uevar a cabo los fines fundamentals para el cual se habia estab- 
lecido la Fundacion. En este sentido decia en la carta a la cual acompanaba 
la donacion : "No es posible establecer juiciosamente las reglas que han de 
gobernar una action futura. Es posible que hayan de probarse muchas, y 
teniendo, como la tengo, plena confianza en mis Sindicos, a ellos les dejo la 
mayor discretion en cuanto a las medidas y la politica que han de adoptar de 
tiempo en tiempo, asertando solamente que el unico fin que han de tener en 
mira incesantemente hasta que se llegue a el es la abolicion pronta de la guerra 
internacional entre las llamadas naciones civilizadas." 

Los Sindicos resolvieron que la institution deberia llamarse la Fundacion 
Carnegie para la Paz Internacional, y se nombro una comision especial encargada 
de formular los fines y propositos de la Fundacion. Esto constituyo una tarea 
ardua, debido a que las opiniones del Sr. Carnegie habian sido expresadas en 
terminos generales. Despues de mucha deliberation y pensamiento, los Sindicos, 
en marzo 9 de 191 1, adoptaron la siguiente resolution: 

Que los objetos de la corporation seran fomentar la causa de la paz entre 
las naciones, activar la abolicion de la guerra internacional, y fomentar y 
promover el arreglo pacifico de las diferencies internacionales, y en especial 



174 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

a) Fomentar una investigation completa y cientifica y un estudio de las 
causas de la guerra y de los medios practicos para prevenirla y evitarla. 

b) Coadyuvar en el desarrollo del Derecho international, y un arreglo 
general con relacion a las reglas respectivas, y su aceptacion entre las naciones. 

c) Difundir informaciones, y educar la opinion publica con respecto 
a las causas, naturaleza y efectos de la guerra, y los medios para prevenirla 
y evitarla. 

d) Establecer una mejor inteligencia respecto de los derechos y obliga- 
ciones internacionales y un sentimiento mas perfecto de la justicia inter- 
national entre los habitantes de los paises civilizados. 

e) Cultivar sentimientos de amistad entre los habitantes de los diferentes 
paises, y aumentar el conocimiento y entendimiento entre si de las varias 
naciones. 

f) Fomentar la aceptacion general de medios pacificos en el arreglo de 
las diferencias internacionales. 

g) Mantener, fomentar, y extender auxilio a las instituciones, organiza- 
tions, asociaciones y agendas que se consideren necesarias o de utilidad 
en el complimiento de los fines de la corporation o de cualesquiera de ellas. 

Hasta que el Congreso de los Estados Unidos incorpore la Fundacion, los 
Sindicos administran los negocios relacionados con ella como una sociedad sin 
carta del Congreso. Se establecio la oficina principal de la Fundacion en la 
Ciudad de Washington, y se tomaron pasos para establecer oficinas en otros 
puntos. Una Comision Ejecutiva, compuesta de siete miembros, con inclusion 
del Presidente y del Secretario, fue nombrada para dirigir e inspeccionar los 
negocios y asuntos relacionados con la Fundacion, con sujecion a la aprobacion 
de los Sindicos. El Secretario fue nombrado el Oficial Jefe de Administration 
de la Fundacion y, con sujecion a la autoridad de la Junta y la Comision 
Ejecutiva, se le dio el cargo inmediato de la administration de sus asuntos 
y de los trabajos que emprendiere o que se llevaren a cabo con fondos pre- 
tenecientes a la misma. Los estatutos prescriben que ha de ser vocal de la 
Junta de Sindicos y permanecer en su cargo a voluntad de ella. 

Eos funcionarios elegidos en su primera reunion en 14 de diciembre de 1910, 
fueron formalmente reelegidos en 9 de marzo de 191 1, y en la reunion que tuvo 
lugar en esta fecha se formularon los fines y propositos de la Fundacion y se 
adoptaron una serie de estatutos. 

La relacion de los fines y propositos de que se acaba de hacer mention 
muestra que la Fundacion es en primer lugar una institution cientifica y que 
investigara cuidadosamente el origen y las causas de la guerra, asi como sus efectos 
economicos sobre los neutrales y beligerantes, con el fin de estar en condiciones 
de poder recomendar los medios que deben adoptarse para la remocion 
hasta donde fuera posible de las causas de la guerra. Medios juiciosos pueden 
adoptarse solo con conocimiento completo y despues de un estudio minucioso 
de los probiemas, un examen cuidadoso de las dificultades que han de vencerse, 
los metodos que han de emplearse, y los cuales deben necesariamente cambiar 



APENDIC3 VII 175 

con el cambio de las condiciones, y sobre todo, por medio del ejercicio de un 
juicio sano e ilustrado con respecto a lo que es razonablemente posible, en vista 
de la experiencia de la historia y un conocimiento a fondo acerca de las 
condiciones que existen actualmente en los paises que forman la sociedad de 
las naciones. El hecho de que la Fundacion seria principalmente una institution 
para investigaciones cientificas lo expreso de una manera evidente en su discurso 
el Sr. Presidente Root en la primera reunion de los Sindicos que tuvo lugar 
el 14 de diciembre de 1910: 

Creo que el campo de observation general sobre el asunto de la guerra 
y de la paz, la exposition general de la injusticia de la guerra, y la con- 
veniencia de la paz, ya ha sido bien cubierto. Me parece que esta Fundacion 
sera de poca utilidad a menos que hiciere algo mas que esto. Debemos 
hacer lo que hacen los hombres de ciencia, debemos tratar de obtener una 
percepcion mas profunda de las enfermedades de las cuales la guerra es 
un sintoma que el que se puede obtener por medio de un estudio incidental 
y ocasional. Esa percepcion mas profunda puede obtenerse salo por medio 
de un estudio e investigacion larga y exacta y constante. 

Los fines y objetos de la Fundacion tal como han sido formulados por los 
Sindicos caen naturalmente en tres grupos: uno que trata de la creation de 
la opinion publica en favor del arreglo pacifico de las diferencias internacionales ; 
otro de la investigacion y estudio de las causas de la guerra; y el tereero, de 
los principios del derecho y la justicia, los cuales, si fueren aceptados y aplicados 
por las naciones en sus relaciones reciprocas, les permitira arreglar muchas, 
si no todas, las controversias que han, o provocado la guerra o amargado 
las relaciones exteriores en el pasado, Por lo tanto establecio la Comision 
Ejecutiva tres divisiones, a saber : la primera, que ha de conocerse con el nombre 
de la Division de Relaciones Reciprocas y Education, cuyos principales objetos 
son 1) difundir informaciones, y educar la opinion publica en cuanto a las 
causas, la naturaleza y los efectos de la guerra, y los medios para evitarla y 
prevenirla; 2) cultivar las relaciones amistosas entre los habitantes de los 
distintos paises, y aumentar el conocimiento y entendimiento reciproco entre las 
varias naciones; 3) mantener, fomentar, y ayudar las instituciones, organi- 
zaciones, sociedades, y agendas que se considerasen necesarias o utiles en la 
realization de los objetos de la asociacion, o de cualesquiera de ellos ; la segunda, 
que ha de denominarse la Division de Economia Politica e Historia, para 
fomentar la investigacion y el estudio completo y cientifico de las causas de 
la guerra y de los medios practicos que deben adoptarse para prevenirla y evi- 
tarla ; la tercera, que ha de denominarse la Division de Derecho Internacional, 
con el fin de 1) coadyuvar en el desarrollo del Derecho internacional, y un 
arreglo general en cuanto a sus reglas, y su aceptacion por las naciones; 2) 
establecer un entendimiento mejor de los derechos y obligaciones internacionales 
y un sentimiento mas perfecto de la justicia internacional entre los habitantes 
de las naciones civilizadas; 3) fomentar la aceptacion general de los medios 
pacificos en el arreglo de las controversias internacionales. 



176 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

El doctor Nicholas Murray Butler, Presidente de la Universidad de 
Columbia, fue nombrado Director Interino de la Division de Relaciones Reci- 
procas y Education; el Dr. John Bates Clark, Profesor de Economia Politica 
en la Universidad de Columbia, fue nombrado Director de la Division de 
Economia Politica e Historia; y el Secretario de la Fundacion, el Sr. James 
Brown Scott, fue nombrado Director de la Division de Derecho Internacional. 

Habiendose asi establecido los objetos de la Fundacion y creado la organi- 
zation para llevarlos a cabo, la Comision Ejecutiva fijo su atencion en los 
metodos que habian de adoptarse por la Fundacion y por cada una de las 
Divisiones con el fin de fomentar el proposito para el cual se habia creado la 
Fundacion. Era la opinion general, que los metodos que habian de adoptarse con- 
stituian un asunto de la mayor importancia, porque es harto conocido que metodos 
erroneos no solo puedan arriesgar sino aun desvirtuar un ideal. El exito en esta, 
como en otras empresas de importancia, depende del ajuste adecuado de los medios 
por los cuales ha de obtenerse el objeto apetecido. Despues de un estudio 
cuidadoso del campo de los esfuerzos anteriores y las agencias que existen 
en todas partes del mundo en pro del interes de la paz internacional, la Comision 
Ejecutiva formulo las siguientes conclusiones, que fueron aprobadas por los 
Sindicos en su reunion anual del 14 diciembre de 191 1: 

1. Que no seria conveniente que la Fundacion entrare en competencia 
con las agencias existentes o tratare de suplantarlas por su propia action 
directa o por medio de las constitution de nuevas organizations que cubrieran 
el mismo campo, sino mas bien, 

a) proporcionar mayor fuerza y actividad a las organizaciones y agencias 
existentes que se encontraren capaces de hacer una buena obra; 

b) producir una organization mejor consiguiendo la union en las rela- 
ciones sistematicas de las organizaciones esparcidas y eliminar la duplication 
de los esfuerzos y el conflicto de intereses ; y, 

c) hacer que se establezcan nuevas organizaciones solo en aquellos puntos 
del campo que todavia no han sido cubiertos eficazmente. 

Para proseguir una obra de esta indole con exito se necesita la coopera- 
tion voluntaria de un gran numero de personas incitadas por su interes en 
pro de la causa de la paz. No puede comprarse tal cooperation con dinero, 
y no puede regularse por medio del dinero. Puede ayudarse mucho y 
hacerla mas eficaz por medio del empleo juicioso del rinero. No seria posible 
duplicar el personal que se consagra actualmente al trabajo de la paz en 
muchas direcciones. La actividad continuada de los trabaj adores depende 
de la continuation de su interes, y este se encuentra en gran parte con- 
sagrado a las organizaciones que han edificado, frecuentemente a costa de 
mucho trabajo y sacrificios. Tratar de sustituir por ellas organizaciones 
nuevas y distintas constituiria un enorme desgaste de energia. 

2. Que gran parte de la obra de la Fundacion debe proseguirse en paises 
que no sean los Estados Unidos. Existen muchos paises en que el problema 
que presenta la proposition de substituir la paz en lugar de la guerra como 
la condition normal de la humanidad, es mucho mas complicada y dificil 
que entre nosotros, y hay muchos paises en los cuales las ideas que nosotros 



APENDICE VII 177 

hemos llegado a considerar como fundamentales e indisputables han pro- 
gresado poco. Cualquier adelanto real hacia un estado de paz estable en 
el mundo debe ser un adelanto general. El obstaculo principal contra una 
agresion belica se encuentra en la opinion general adversa de la humanidad 
y la renuencia de las naciones de atraerse la censura del mundo civilizado 
por una conducta que, en su opinion, es vergonzosa. 

Nuestra obra, para hacerla de la mayor eficacia, debe llevarse a cabo 
en muchos paises distintos. 

3. Que al llevar nuestra obra a cabo en otros paises, y especialmente 
en los paises de Europa respecto de los cuales los asuntos de paz y guerra 
son mucho mas apremiantes y dificiles que entre nosotros, es de vital 
importancia que no nos presentemos como misioneros americanos tratando 
de ensenar a los pueblos de otros paises como deben dirigir sus negocios, 
sino mas bien que ayudemos a los ciudadamos de tales paises que esten 
interesados en nuestra obra que propende a fomentar la paz, a realizar dicha 
obra entre sus propios compatriotas, y que la primera conclusion formulada 
mas arriba es aplicable a toda obra de esta indole. 

4. Que la direction en que la obra en pro de la paz general debe llevarse 
especialmente, es aquella en que el sentimiento en favor de la paz se encuentra 
en contacto inmediato con las dificultades y exigencias de asuntos inter- 
nacionales practicos. La conciliation de los dos requiere un conocimiento 
del lado practico, no tanto de determinadas dificultades internacionales, como 
de las fuerzas fundamentales que mueven a las naciones, el desarrollo de sus 
metodos y motivos de action, y el desarrollo historico de sus relaciones. 
Para progresar en este sentido es necesario alistar los servicios de personas 
que sean capaces de realizar estudios completos y cientificos, y formular 
conclusiones defmitivas, ciertas, y autorizadas que puedan formar la base 
de educacion y de argumentos que atraigan a los hombres de negocios 
practicos. 

Es conveniente describir ligeramente el progreso que ha obtenido cada una 
de las Divisiones en su obra de llevar a cabo los objetos fundamentales para 
los cuales fue constituida la Fundacion. 

La Division de Relaciones y Educacion 

El Dr. Butler establecio su oficina principal en la Ciudad de Nueva York, 
con el fin de poder estar en contacto intimo con los trabajos de la Division y 
dirigir sus actividades personalmente. 

En vista del hecho de que gran parte de los trabajos de la Division tendrian 
necesariamente que afectar a los paises extranjeros y siendo esencial a su exito 
que la obra en los paises extranjeros se realizase por medio de agendas locales, 
y no por sucursales de la Fundacion, el Dr. Butler constituyo un Consejo Con- 
sultivo compuesto de estadistas representatives y publicistas europeos y un cuerpo 
de corresponsales, a fin de que pudiera informarse exactamente de las condiciones 
locales, y asegurar que no se emprendiera ningun proyecto en cualquier pais 
europeo de una indole que pudiera encontrarse en conflicto con las instituciones, 
tradiciones e ideales nacionales. Se formo una Comision Ejecutiva compuesta 



178 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

de los vocales princlpales de este Consejo, y se establecio una oficina en Paris 
para llevar a cabo los proyectos propuestos por el Consejo y su Comision Ejecutiva 
y aprobados por la Fundacion. El Dr. Butler ha tenido la suerte de obtener 
los servicios del Baron d'Estournelles de Constant como presidente del Consejo 
Consultivo y de la Comision Ejecutiva, y del Sr. Prudhommeaux, el ilustrado 
Redactor de La Paix par le Droit, como Secretario General de la oficina europea 
en Paris. 

Con el fin de difundir informaciones y educar la opinion publica con 
respecto a las causas, la naturaleza y los efectos de la guerra, la Fundacion, 
a propuesta del Dr. Butler, ha adoptado medios para aumentar el contenido 
de una lista escogida de periodicos europeos consagrados al movimiento en 
pro de la paz, a fin de que puedan llegar a un circulo mas grande de lectores 
y crear una opinion publica que favoreza el movimiento en pro de la paz. 

Con el fin de cultivar sentimientos de amistad entre los habitantes de los 
distintos paises y aumentar su mutuo conocimiento y entendimiento, la Fun- 
dacion ha aprobado las tres proposiciones del Dr. Butler que siguen: i) Un 
cambio educacional con la America Latina; 2) un cambio educacional con el 
Japon; 3) visitas internacionales de hombres representatives. Es innecesario 
discurrir sobre lo juicioso y oportuno de estos proyectos, porque es harto 
conocido que mucha de la mala inteligencia que existe entre las naciones se 
debe al desconocimiento de las condiciones, tradiciones e ideales locales. El 
trato personal revela que en el fondo todos los hombres son extrafiamente seme- 
j antes y el trato, la discusion y el cambio de opiniones personalmente establecen 
la base de la amistad y la buena inteligencia. 

El cambio educacional con la America Latina no se ha realizado aun, aunque 
se ha progresado hacia el. 

Un educador distinguido japones, el Dr. Nitobe, paso varios meses en los 
Estados Unidos como representante del Japon, y el distinguido autor americano, 
Dr. Hamilton Wright Mabie se encuentra actualmente en el Japon. 

En 19 12, la Fundacion dio la bienvenida a su llegada en los Estados Unidos, 
a tres extranjeros distinguidos, a saber, el Baron d'Estournelles de Constant, 
el Conde Apponyi, y el Sr. Christian L,. Lange, y hace poco que la Baronesa von 
Suttner dejo las playas norteamericanas. El distinguido educador americano, 
Dr. Charles W. Eliot, presidente emeritus de la Universidad de Harvard, visito 
muchos paises durante el ano pasado, especialmente la China y el Japon, en 
representacion de la Fundacion. 

Pasando ahora a las agencias "que se considerasen necesarias o utiles en 
la realizacion de los fines" de la Fundacion, a propuesta del Dr. Butler, recibieron 
las sociedades que siguen ayuda pecuniaria para permitirles llevar a cabo la 
obra que han emprendido y aumentar la esf era de su influencia : 1 ) L/Ofiice 
Central des Associations Internationales, organizada por el distinguido publicista 
belga, el Senador La Fontaine, y situada en Bruselas ; 2) el Bureau Inter- 
national Permanent de la Paix, en Berna, como el cuartel general reconocido 



APENDICE VII 179 

de las distintas sociedades de la paz; 3) la American Peace Society, reorganizada 
de manera que sea la representante eficaz de las sociedades de paz en America. 

Se ha creido que l'Ofnce Central tiene una naturaleza y esfera de caracter 
tan internacional que tiene derecho a recibir ayuda directa por parte de la 
Fundacion; que el Bureau Permanent de la Paix, debe fortalecerse a fin de 
poder realizar su obra mas eficazmente, y que, con el mismo objeto general, 
la American Peace Society, reorganizada y fortalecida, debe actuar no solo como 
el medio de comunicacion entre la Fundacion y las varias sociedades en los 
Estados Unidos, sino servir tambien de agente de la Fundacion en proporcionar 
ayuda a las sociedades locales. 

La Comision Ejecutiva, como resultado de la experiencia y las recomenda- 
ciones del Director Interino de la Division, ha establecido el principio general 
de que ha de extenderse auxilio a las agencias nacionales en el Hemisferio 
Oriental solo por recomendacion del Consejo Consultivo, de acuerdo con los 
representantes de cada pais determinado en el Consejo Consultivo. Prevalece 
la creencia de que este principio propende admirablemente a ayudar a los 
ciudadanos de los paises extranjeros para la realization de la obra en sus paises, 
y que contribuira a poner en contacto a los trabajadores en pro de la paz y 
hacer que el uno coopere con el otro y con los hombres de negocios practicos 
que forman o regulan la politica internacional. 

La experiencia ha demostrado que mucha gente genuinamente interesada 
en efectuar una buena inteligencia con los paises extranjeros, vacilan sin embargo 
por varias razones en afiliarse con sociedades de paz. Las asociaciones para la 
conciliation internacional revisten interes para personas de esta clase. En esta 
virtud la politica del Dr. Butler ha sido reforzarlas donde existen y crearlas 
donde no existen. La primera y principal asociacion fue establecida por el 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant en 1906. Una sucursal americana, de la cual 
el Dr. Butler es presidente, fue organizada en el mismo afio; en 1912 se establecio 
una asociacion alemana; en el mismo afio, otra inglesa, y estan progresando 
los arreglos para la constitution de sucursales en Sur America, en el Canada, 
y en otras partes del mundo. Estas asociaciones, aunque de origen local, tienen 
sin embargo una mision internacional y propenden a establecer por medio de 
sus reuniones, y los excelentes folletos que publican con regularidad, un senti- 
miento de amistad hacia los pueblos de los paises extranjeros. 

Se espera que la Division de Relaciones Reciprocas y Education popularizara 
los resultados cientificos de las otras Divisiones, y que a intervalos hara cir- 
culars, libros, articulos y conferencias, sea en el original o en forma de traduc- 
ciones. 

La Division de; Economia Politica e Historia 

Fue la creencia de los Sindicos que nada produciria mejores resultados 
que una investigation y estudio cuidadosos, considerados y cientificos de las 
causas y efectos economicos de la guerra; por la razon de que si conocieramos 



180 LA VISITA DS MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

los elementos que han entranado y producido la guerra, estariamos en una posicion 
de considerar los medios y metodos que contribuirian a la desaparicion de las 
causas y asi evitar el recurso a las armas. Se creyo que un estudio imparcial 
y cientifico de los efectos de la guerra en todas sus fases, no solamente sobre 
los actuales beligerantes, sino tambien sobre las naciones neutrales, proporcionaria 
datos que han faltado hasta ahora, y propenderia a inclinar a los hombres de 
negocios de responsabilidad en favor del arreglo pacifico de las controversias 
internacionales. En esta virtud se convoco una conferencia de economistas 
y publicistas distinguidos para reunirse en Berna, Suiza, en Agosto de 191 1, 
con el fin de considerar que asuntos pudieran estudiarse conveniente y ventajosa- 
mente, y redactar el programa de la Division de Economia Politica e Historia. 
Al extender la invitacion para esta conferencia, el Presidente de la Fundacion 
dijo que "es el deseo de los Sindicos utilizar la segunda Division para los fines 
de hacer una investigacion completa, sistematica y cientifica de los aspectos 
economicos e historicos de la guerra, confiando que las lecciones que han de 
derivarse de este estudio seran de utilidad para la humanidad. Creen que debe 
proseguirse un estudio de esta clase sobre base internacional mas amplia, y que 
su organizacion constituye un asunto propio para la sabiduria de los economistas 
mas habiles y eminentes de todas las naciones civilizadas." 

A la conferencia asistieron dieciocho especialistas prominentes, con inclu- 
sion del Director de la Division, y formularon un programa referente a 1) las 
causas y efectos economicos e historicos de la guerra; 2) armamentos en tiempo 
de paz, establecimientos militares y navales, la teoria practica e historia de 
armamentos modernos; 3) las influencias unificadoras de la vida internacional. 
Pareciendo conveniente asociar los miembros de la conferencia con la asignacion 
de los trabajos y su actual ejecucion, los asistentes a la conferencia fueron 
nombrados miembros de una comision permanente de investigacion, para actuar 
como agentes de la Fundacion en la eleccion de peritos habiles para emprender 
y completar la investigacion de los varios temas en los cuales se ha dividido el 
programa, intervenir en las investigaciones emprendidas y redactar sus resultados- 
Ya se ha asignado un gran numero de temas a especialistas, algunos de los 
estudios han sido completados, y en el curso de muy pocos afios la Fundacion 
habra publicado una serie de monografias notables que se ocupen de todas 
las fases del complicado programa, las que, en las palabras de su Presidente, 
"seran de utilidad a la humanidad." La oficina principal de la Division se 
encuentra interinamente en Nueva York, y los miembros de la comision de 
investigacion, ademas de actuar como agentes de la Fundacion para los fines 
expuestos, actuan colectiva e individualmente como consejeros del Director 
de la Division en el proseguimiento de los proyectos importantes que ha 
emprendido. 

El Profesor Kinley, que es miembro del Comite de Investigacion de la Sec- 
cion de Economia Politica e Historia de la Fundacion Carnegie, y que toma un 



APENDIC3 VII 181 

especial y vivo interes personal en la America Latina, debido no solamente al 
conocimiento que el tiene de su maravilloso progreso a pesar de adversas y perple- 
jas circunstancias, sino tambien a sus observaciones personales, pues fue Delegado 
de los Estados Unidos a la Cuarta Conferencia Panamericana, visitara Sur 
America dentro de poco tiempo. Su proposito sera conocer a los directores del 
pensamiento en los dominios de la Economia Politica e Historia, explicates el 
origen y propositus de la referida Seccion o Division, someter a su alta considera- 
tion los proyectos que esta Division desea emprender, y si es posible, conseguir la 
cooperacion de nuestros amigos de Sur America para llevar estos a cabo. Sin 
esta valiosa cooperacion el trabajo de la Division resultaria defectuoso e incom- 
plete y perderia generalmente en sus fines beneficos. Pido para el una buena 
acogida y la generosa y valiosisima cooperacion de los suramericanos. 

Con respecto a esta Division, mi modesta mision es preparar el camino del 
Sr. Kinley. Asi, pues, explicare en general el objeto y proposito de la Division 
de Economia Politica e Historia para que se pueda determinar de que manera y 
hasta que punto es posible ayudar al Prof esor Kinley — dejandole a el el privilegio 
de presentar en detalle los proyectos que la Division piensa emprender y de 
explicar la grande y generosa parte, que esperamos esten dispuestos a tomar los 
publicistas, economistas e historiadores latinoamericanos. Para indicar la natu- 
raleza de los trabajos de la Division, citare aqui algunas f rases que pronuncio el 
Sr. Root en la primera reunion de los Sindicos de la Fundacion Carnegie. 
"Creo", dijo, "que el campo de observaciones generales acerca del asunto de la 
guerra y de la paz — una exposition general de la injusticia de la guerra y de la 
conveniencia de la paz — ya se ha tratado bastante. Creo que esta Fundacion 
seria de poca utilidad si no hiciera algo mas que eso. Debemos hacer lo que hacen 
los hombres de ciencia. Debemos tratar de alcanzar un conocimiento mas pro- 
fundo de la causa de las enfermedades, de las cuales la guerra es un sintoma, de 
lo que puede obtenerse por una consideration superficial y ocasional. Este cono- 
cimiento mas profundo solo puede conseguirse por medio de largo, penoso y con- 
tinuo estudio e investigacion". 

Estas palabras sabias, basadas en la experiencia y la reflection, son de especial 
aplicacion a la obra senalada a la Division de Economia Politica e Historia, porque 
a ella se asigna el deber especifico de "fomentar una investigacion completa y 
cientifica y un estudio de las causas de la guerra y de los metodos practicos para 
prevenirla y evitarla". Es decir, el estudio no solo de las causas alegadas que no 
han sido mas que pretextos de gobernantes y estadistas ambiciosos y poco escrupu- 
losos, sino el estudio de las causas verdaderas, que a menudo estan escondidas y se 
encuentran en los antagonismos de los pueblos y en el deseo de conseguir ventajas 
economicas que no poseen y que codician. Pero este estudio, por interesante que 
sea, seria de poco valor, aun si pusiera en claro los verdaderos motivos. Es nece- 
sario tambien estudiar y dar a conocer las causas y los efectos economicos, no 
solo sobre las naciones beligerantes sino tambien sobre los pueblos y naciones 
neutrales, los efectos indirectos lo mismo que los directos, porque de otro modo 



182 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

no podemos pesar en la balanza la guerra y su costo, — estimado este en relation 
con la perdida de vidas, el desgaste de recursos y la perdida de oportunidades — y 
las ventajas de un desarrollo libre, pacifico, y normal. 

Expresado asi, el problema no pertenece a ningun pais determinado ni a nin- 
guna epoca determinada, y el Sr. Root tenia razon cuando decia que "los resulta- 
dos de tales estudios serian utiles" y que la investigacion "debia proseguirse sobre 
una base internacional muy amplia, y que su organizacion constituia un asunto 
apropiado para la sabiduria de los economistas mas habiles y eminentes de todas 
las naciones civilizadas". 

La Division de Economia Politica e Historia esta bajo la direction del Pro- 
fesor John Bates Clark, un economista distinguido de los Estados Unidos. Estando 
el en Europa, la Fundacion invito a unos cuantos distinguidos economistas, publi- 
cistas e historiadores, en su mayoria europeos, a reunirse en Berna para recomen- 
dar una organizacion para la Division y para trazar un plan general de trabajo 
que esta pudiera con mas provecho llevar a cabo. Los miembros de la Conferencia 
de Berna han sido organizados como Comite permanente, llamado Comite de 
Investigacion, el cual actuara como consejero responsable de la Division y como 
su agente para llevar a efecto su programa de trabajo en todas partes del mundo 
menos en Sur America. El Profesor David Kinley, el cual, como ya he dicho, es 
amigo y admirador de la America Latina, fue agregado al Comite, para que, por 
medio de conferencias y relaciones personales con los principales publicistas, 
economistas e historiadores de la America Latina, determinara que forma de 
organizacion seria la mejor para corresponder a los deseos y asegurarnos de la 
cooperation de nuestros amigos latinoamericanos, sin cuya simpatia y eficaz par- 
ticipation el trabajo de la Division no seria posible, en cuanto se relaciona con la 
America Latina. Puedo decir que la organizacion de un Comite de Investigacion 
para la America Latina, tal como el comite que resulto de la Conferencia de 
Berna, seria grata a la Fundacion y a la Division. 

Me referire muy brevemente al programa bosquejado por la Conferencia de 
Berna y que la Division, con la ayuda y el consejo constante del Comite de 
Investigacion, esta tratando de llevar a la practica por medio de investiga- 
ciones en distintos paises, seguidas por distinguidos investigadores y hombres 
eruditos. 

En la Conferencia de Berna de agosto de 191 1, los miembros se dividieron 
en tres secciones principales. La primera debia tratar de "las causas y efectos 
economicos e historicos de las guerras" ; la segunda de los "armamentos en tiempo 
de paz, establecimientos militares y navales, la teoria, practica e historia de los 
armamentos modernos" ; y la tercera de "las influencias unificadoras en la vida 
internacional". Necesitaria mas espacio del que tengo a mi disposition si solo 
quisiera enumerar las distintas investigaciones que fueron recomendadas en los 
informes de las tres secciones, y que actualmente constituyen el programa de la 
Division. Para no hablar demasiado en terminos generales, mencionare algunos 
de los epigrafes principales de cada informe. Al considerar las causas y efectos 



APENDICE VII 183 

economicos e historicos de las guerras, la comision recomendo las siguientes inves- 
tigaciones : 

i. La presentacion historica de las causas de la guerra en los tiempos modernos, 
trazando especialmente la influencia ejercida por los esfuerzos hechos para 
obtener mas poder politico, por el desarrollo de la idea nacional, por las aspira- 
ciones politicas de las razas y por los intereses economicos. 

2. Conflictos entre los intereses economicos durante la epoca actual. 

3. El movimiento antimilitarista, considerado en sus manifestaciones religio- 
sas y politicas. 

4. La posicion del trabajo organizado y los socialistas en los varios Estados 
sobre las cuestiones de la guerra y de los armamentos. 

5. Los efectos economicos del derecho de captura y su influencia sobre el 
desarrollo de las armadas. 

6. Emprestitos de guerra hechos por paises neutrales ; su alcance e influencia 
sobre las guerras recientes. 

7. Los efectos de la guerra, considerados en su aspecto economico. 

8. Perdida de la vida humana en la guerra y como resultado de la guerra; 
y su influencia sobre la poblacion. 

9. La influencia de la anexion sobre la vida economica del Estado anexante, 
y sobre el Estado cuyo territorio ha sido anexado. 

10. La exencion progresiva de las actividades comerciales e industriales de 
las perdidas e ingerencias por virtud de la guerra. 

Entre los temas que se refieren a los armamentos, pueden mencionarse los 
seguientes: 

1. Causas de los armamentos. 

2. La rivalidad y competencia en los armamentos. 

3. Historia moderna de los armamentos, con detalles especiales desde 1872. 

4. Presupuestos militares desde 1872. 

5. El gravamen de los armamentos durante epocas recientes. 

6. Los efectos de los preparativos para la guerra sobre la vida economica y 
social de una nacion. 

7. Los efectos economicos de retirar a los hombres jovenes de sus ocupa- 
ciones industriales. 

8. Emprestitos para armamentos. 

9. Las industrias de la guerra y un estudio de las municiones de guerra. 

Me temo que ni siquiera pueda tratar de mencionar los temas que deben 
investigarse en relation con las influencias unificadoras en la vida internacional, 
porque son tantos, tan variados, y sin embargo tan intimamente ligados. Baste 



184 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

decir que entre otros asuntos se estudiaran los efectos de la production, distribu- 
tion e intercambios internacionales, los medios de comunicacion y sus resultados 
en la vida, el pensamiento y el desarrollo de los pueblos y de las naciones. 

De estos temas muchos estan en estudio, y no pocos de los estudios estan 
listos para su publication. Dentro de pocos meses el publico selecto y bien infor- 
mado podra juzgar la Division, no solo por sus buenas intenciones, sino tambien 
por sus trabajos. 

No nos ocultamos el hecho de que en el presente el efecto de estos estudios 
e investigaciones sera pequefio en relation con el tiempo y los esfuerzos prodiga- 
dos a ellos y que el problema es enorme y nuestra senda tiene que trazarse como 
si fuera por medio de un desierto desconocido. Pero me permito citar las pala- 
bras del Profesor Clark, el Director de la Division: "Es a proposito decir que 
actualmente estamos tratando no con una pequefia cuestion de importancia para 
una parte del mundo, sino con una cuestion de vasta importancia para todo el 
mundo; y cualquier cosa que produzca algun efecto sobre el resultado es de la 
mayor trascendencia. Es una cosa mucho mas grande mover toda la tierra una 
fraction microscopica de una pulgada que llevar un buque lleno de tierra a traves 
del mar mas ancho. Seria extrano si, como resultado de lo que se inicia ahora, 
no resultare alguna desviacion perceptible en el movimiento de los asuntos huma- 
nos. Cualquier cambio que pueda tener lugar sera en direction de la paz." 

iCual sera el papel de la America Latina en estas investigaciones? No 
puedo creer que los publicistas, economistas e historiadores latinoamericanos 
mostraran menos entusiasmo, menos simpatia, o menos disposition de ayudar, 
que sus colegas en el viejo mundo al otro lado del mar. Me atrevo predecir que 
se echaran en la brecha con arrojo, si puedo usar una expresion militar al discutir 
los asuntos de la paz, o, para variar la frase, que seran companeros en el campo 
de los trabajos pacificos y participaran en las victorias, porque, segiin dijo un 
poeta ingles, "la paz tiene victorias no menos renombradas que las de la guerra". 

La Division de Derecho Internacional 

Los problemas a que hace frente esta Division son de la mayor importancia, 
porque a ella se refiere la obligation expresa de coadyuvar en el desarrollo del 
derecho internacional, de establecer una mejor inteligencia acerca de los derechos 
y obligaciones internacionales, y de fomentar la aceptacion general de medios 
pacificos en el arreglo de las controversias internacionales. Le parecio al Direc- 
tor y a la Comision Ejecutiva que no podia emplearse demasiado cuidado en 
la determination de los proyectos que habian de emprenderse y los metodos que 
habian de utilizarse. Si las relaciones entre las naciones han de considerarse 
de acuerdo con los principios del derecho, y si las controversias que puedan 
existir o surgir entre ellas han de decidirse de acuerdo con esos principios, es 
indispensable que el Derecho internacional se desarrolle como un sistema lenta 
y cautelosamerite por medio de la cooperacioon de publicistas en todas partes 



APENDICE VII 185 

del mundo, a fin de que las propuestas presentadas puedan representar una 
opinion internacional ilustrada, ser razonables en si, y tener atraccion 
para el juicio maduro no solo de los teoristas, sino tambien de los hombres de 
negocios practicos en cuyas manos se encuentra depositada la direccion de los 
asuntos extranjeros. En esta virtud, antes de proceder a la organizacion de 
la Division, el Director, con la aprobacion de la Comision Ejecutiva, se puso 
en correspondencia con profesores de Derecho internacional en todas partes del 
mundo, con miembros del Instituto de Derecho Internacional. con miembros 
del Tribunal Permanente de Arbitraje de La Haya, y con jurisconsultos elegidos 
que, aunque no caian dentro de ninguna de estas categorias, poseian sin embargo 
cualidades especiales debidas a sus estudios o experiencia que les permitia 
examinar y formar juicio sobre cuestiones de Derecho internacional delicadas 
y dificiles. 

Despues de un estudo cuidadoso de las contestaciones recibidas, la Fundacion 
resolvio, a propuesta del Director, suplicar que el Instituto de Derecho Inter- 
nacional actuare como consejero general de la Division, como un cuerpo o por 
conducto de un comite. Como resultado de las negociaciones emprendidas, el 
Instituto de Derecho Internacional en la sesion que celebro en Cristiania en 19 12, 
acepto el titulo y las funciones de consejero general de la Division, y eligio once 
miembros de su seno, con inclusion de su secretario general ex officio, para 
formar una Comision Consultiva del Instituto para la Division de Derecho Inter- 
nacional. Es de esperarse que este comite prestara el mayor servicio al Director 
por medio del examen de los distintos proyectos que el les sometera, y por la 
indication de proyectos que deben emprenderse y realizarse por la Division. No 
seria posible estimar excesivamente el valor de estas relaciones, porque los miem- 
bros del comite que gozan como deben gozar de la confianza del Instituto, no 
aprobaran ni presentaran proyectos a menos que sean razonables en si mismos, 
adaptados a fomentar el desarrollo del Derecho internacional, y de tal naturaleza 
que sean aceptables por las naciones. Tales relaciones representan una garantia 
de que la Fundacion por conducto de su Division de Derecho Internacional no 
emprendera proyectos que puedan considerarse utopicos. La aprobacion de la 
Comision Consultiva sera aceptada necesariamente como prueba de que los 
proyectos son dignos de estudio por publicistas y estadistas y posibles de realiza- 
tion. Es de esperarse que las relaciones seran ademas no menos agradables y 
valiosas para el Instituto, en vista de que permitiran la ejecucion de proyectos que 
el Instituto pueda considerar muy deseables, pero que no podian emprenderse por 
falta de recursos materiales. La resolution del Instituto de actuar como con- 
sejero completo la organizacion de la Division, del mismo modo en que el 
establecimiento de la Comision de Investigation organizo la Division de Economia 
Politica e Historia. 

El Instituto de Derecho Internacional que fue fundado en el afio de 1873, se 
ha mostrado ser la agencia inoficial mas poderosa que jamas ha sido creada para 
el desarrollo del Derecho internacional; y la Fundacion resolvio que no podia 



186 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

gastar mas juiciosamente una parte de sus rentas que por la concesion al mismo, 
de una subvention, en la creencia de que podria emplearse una parte de la suma 
ventajosamente, si asi lo deseare el Instituto, en sufragar los gastos de viaje de 
sus miembros, en permitir que sus informantes recibieran alguna remuneration 
por servicios que hasta ahora no han sido remunerados, en permitir la impresion 
de los informes mismos de tal modo que fuesen de mayor utilidad para maestros, 
estudiantes, las profesiones y el publico que lee, y en permitir la realization, bajo 
la inspiration del Instituto, de los proyectos que deseare emprender. La sub- 
vention se ha concedido, sin embargo, sin sujecion a condiciones, siendo asi que 
el Instituto es el mas competente para determinar el uso mas ventajoso a que 
se pudiera consagrar la subvention. 

Se espera que el Instituto Americano de Derecho International, fundado en 
Octubre de 1912, prestara servicios utiles en el desarrollo y la popularization del 
Derecho internacional en el Hemisferio Occidental, aunque no sean tan conspicuos 
como los que el Instituto de Derecho Internacional ha prestado al mundo en 
general. Siendo asi que la politica de la Fundacion es la de no crear agencias 
propias sino auxiliar a las instrumentalidades existentes, no se ha pedido ni 
recibido por el Sr. Alvarez o el Director de la Division, por cuya iniciativa se 
fundo el Instituto Americano, ningun auxilio financiero de ninguna indole. Se 
hace mention de dicho Instituto en esta connexion porque constituye una agencia 
tendente "a coadyuvar en el desarrollo del Derecho internacional", y por la razon 
adicional de que el Presidente de la Fundacion ha aceptado la presidencia 
honoraria del Instituto Americano, y el Director fue uno de sus fundadores. 

Hay muchos modos por medio de los cuales, puede establecerse un mejor 
entendimiento de los derechos y obligaciones internacionales, y un sentimiento 
mas perfecto de la justicia internacional entre los habitantes de los paises 
civilizados. ha. obra se ha comenzado, modesta y cautelosamente ; y 
solo es posible emprender en primera instancia los proyectos que caigan 
inequivocamente dentro de este requisito de la Division y que propendan 
directamente a la realization del fin inmediato. El Instituto de Derecho Inter- 
nacional trata de desarrollar el Derecho de gentes por medio de la discusion de 
cuestiones importantes y su relation en la forma de tratados o leyes. Que este es 
un metodo sumamente practico se demuestra por el hecho de que las opiniones 
y resoluciones del Instituto han atraido a los hombres de negocios y muchas de 
ellas ya se encuentran incorporadas firmemente en el derecho actual de las naciones. 
Parecio posible, sin embargo, estudiar los derechos y obligaciones de la naciones 
desde un punto de vista mas sistematico y teorico, y al mismo tiempo mas amplio. 

En la Segunda Conferencia de la Paz de la Haya presentose un proyecto 
para la creation de una Academia de Derecho Internacional, el cual recibio la 
aprobacion del Presidente de la Conferencia. No se adopto ninguna resolution 
sobre el, pero la idea ha sido acogida favorablemente por los publicistas de 
muchas naciones. Una comision de publicistas holandeses, bajo la presidencia del 
Sr. Asser, ha propuesto la creation de una Academia de esta clase y que se insta- 



APENDICE VII 187 

lase en el Palacio de la Paz en La Haya. El Tribunal Permanente de Arbitraje 
aplicaria el derecho que habia sido expuesto sistematicamente en la Academia, y 
el edifico magniflco vendria de hecho a ser un templo de la paz. La recomendacion 
del Sr. Asser propone una instruccion sistematica durante los meses del verano, 
en Derecho internacional y asuntos relacionados a el por una facultad especialmente 
constituida y sujeta a cambios, elegida de entre los publicistas de los diferentes 
paises Cursos formales de conferencias sobre asuntos importantes y oportunos 
serian dados por publicistas que, ademas de una instruccion teorica, hayan tenido 
larga experiencia en la practica del Derecho internacional. Bajo la direccion de 
los profesores regulares, creariamos grupos de estudiantes para el estudio detallado 
y completo de ciertas fases del Derecho internacional y relaciones internacionales. 
Los cursos serian abiertos a los estudiantes de cualquier pais que poseyeran las 
calificaciones necesarias, y que podrian asistir a las conferencias y sacar ventaja 
de la instruccion proporcionada, porque tendria lugar durante sus vacaciones 
academicas. Tambien se propone que los gobiernos se interesen en. la Academia y 
que se les invite por conductos diplomaticos a nombrar funcionarios idoneos de 
varios ramos del servicio gubernamental para asistir a la misma. La institu- 
cion seria unica en su cuerpo de estudiantes provenientes de los paises extranjeros 
y las clases oficiales. Las conferencias, publicadas en la forma de monografias, 
enriquecerian la literatura del Derecho internacional ; el derecho mismo se trataria 
desde varios puntos de vista y por maestros idoneos, de los cuales uno solo 
seria elegido de cualquier pais al mismo tiempo. El cuerpo de estudiantes pro- 
vendria de varios paises y en el transcurso del tiempo ejerceria su influencia en 
sus paises respectivos, de modo que la Academia coadyuvaria de una manera 
eminente al establecimiento de un mejor entendimiento de los derechos y obliga- 
ciones internacionales, y la propagation de los principios de la paz. La Fundacion 
Carnegie ha aprobado la Academia en principio, y esta dispuesta a conceder auxilio 
economico cuando los planes se hayan perfeccionado suficientemente. Si se 
llegare a organizar, la Academia seria una institution separada e independiente, 
bajo la direccion de una comision nombrada especialmente y compuesta en primer 
lugar de los ex-presidentes del Instituto de Derecho Internacional. Organizada 
y dirigida de este modo, adelantaria los trabajos para cuyo fomento ha sido 
creada la Fundacion Carnegie, pero no seria una agencia directa de la Fundacion 
ni estaria bajo su direccion. 

Las revistas existentes de Derecho internacional propenden a establecer un 
mejor entendimiento de los derechos y obligaciones internacionales, y el aumento 
de su circulation aumentara su influencia, popularizara el Derecho internacional, y 
demonstrara por medio de un ejemplo concreto el modo en que sus principios 
determinan las cuestiones que envuelven derechos internacionales. Por- esta 
razon la Fundacion, a propuesta de su Director, ha concedido subvenciones, en 
efectivo, o por medio de suscripciones, a election de las revistas. Esta ayuda 
permitira la publication de las revistas a intervalos mas regulares, asegurara su 
existencia continuada, aumentara y reforzara sus contenidos, y permitira que los 



188 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

contribuyentes a ellas reciban alguna remuneracion por el tiempo y trabajo que 
generosamente han consagrado sin otra compensation que la que proviene de 
hechos buenos. 

Ocurre con frecuencia que se hacen contribuciones excelentes referentes al 
Derecho internacional en idiomas que se leen o entienden poco fuera del pais en 
que se han publicado, y creese que se fomentaria la causa de la justicia inter- 
nacional por medio de la traduccion de obras de esta indole a los idiomas que 
se emplean mas generalmente. En esta virtud el Director ha propuesto, y la 
Comision Consultiva de la Fundacion ha aprobado, la traduccion de obras de 
esta indole a uno o mas de los idiomas mejor conocidos, de modo que el abogado 
internacional que no fuese un lingiiista y los estudiantes y literatos en todas 
partes del mundo puedan tener la ventaja de leer y estudiarlas. Al mismo 
tiempo seria muy util hacer preparar obras originales que traten de ciertas 
fases del Derecho internacional que fueren dignas de tratamiento especial. 
Esto constituye una cuestion mas delicada, pero ya se le ha consagrado estudio. 
No es la intention de la Fundacion ingerirse en asuntos editoriales, pero es de 
opinion que puede extender ayuda material a los autores en la production de 
tratados o monografias de la indole expresada, y asi prestar un servicio de no 
poca importancia a la causa del Derecho internacional y de la justicia internacional. 

Las revistas y tratados que se refieren al Derecho internacional atraen a los 
que leen, pero no debe olvidarse al publico oyente. Por lo tanto el Director ha 
propuesto que se invite a publicistas extranjeros distinguidos para que vengan 
a los Estados Unidos y den conferencias sobre ciertas fases del Derecho inter- 
nacional en las universidades y colegios de los Estados Unidos. Creese que 
de este modo los puntos de vista extranjeros podran exponerse de un modo 
muy claro y que, si se obtuviere exito, podra lograrse que los maestros o 
instructores de Derecho internacional se traten personalmente, y crearse por 
medio del cambio de opiniones un entendimiento mejor acerca de los deberes y 
obligaciones internacionales. 

Uno de los fines fundamentales de la Division es fomentar la aceptacion 
general de los medios pacificos para el arreglo de las controversias internacionales, 
y creese que el mejor modo de demostrar lo que se puede hacer en el futuro es 
hacer constar de una manera clara lo que se ha hecho en el pasado. En esta 
virtud la Division se ocupa actualmente en la recopilacion de todos los tratados 
generales y especiales de arbitraje que se conocen hasta ahora. Esto constituye 
una tarea larga y ardua, y se ha creido conveniente empezar con el periodo 
moderno, es decir, con el Tratado Jay de 1794 entre la Gran Bretafia y los 
Estados Unidos. Esta parte de la obra esta para completarse, y despues 
de ella se prepararan los tratados anteriores para su publication. Esta recopila- 
cion permitira a los publicistas ver hasta que punto las naciones han estado dis- 
puestas a comprometerse al arbitraje, y pondra a su disposition las distintas 
formas de los tratados existentes. Por la misma razon van a recopilarse y 
publicarse todos los casos de arbitraje conocidos en la forma de informes judiciales, 



APENDICE VII 189 

y se continuant la serie indefinidamente. El Profesor John Bassett Moore, de 
la Universidad de Columbia, que es una autoridad renombrada en asuntos de 
Derecho internacional y arbitraje, ha emprendido esta obra monumental y la 
esta prosiguiendo activamente. 

La existencia del Tribunal Permanente de Arbitraje de La Haya, la adopcion 
de una convention para el establecimiento de un tribunal de presas, aunque el 
tribunal mismo aun no haya sido establecido, y la aprobacion por la Segunda 
Conferencia de Paz de La Haya de un verdadero tribunal permanente de justicia 
arbitral compuesto de jueces, entranan la conclusion de que las controversias 
entre las naciones se someteran en lo futuro con mas frecuencia al arbitraje, o 
mejor a una decision judicial, de lo que ha sido el caso en el pasado. Por lo tanto 
parece conveniente que conozcamos por medio de casos determinados las cuestiones 
que envuelven el Derecho internacional que han sido presentadas a los tribunales 
de justicia y decididas por ellos. Esto reviste mayor importancia si las sentencias 
judiciales han de completar el arbitraje en algunos casos y reemplazarlo en 
otros; porque hasta tanto que las naciones tengan confianza en las sentencias 
judiciales y sus posibilidades, vacilaran en recurrir a. ellas. En esta virtud el 
Director ha propuesto que las sentencias de los tribunales de justicia ingleses y 
americanos, que se refieran al Derecho internacional, se recopilen y publiquen de 
la misma manera en que se recopilan y publican las sentencias de los tribunales 
de la Gran Bretana y de los Estados Unidos. Las sentencias seran no solo valiosas 
en si mismas, — porque las sentencias de Stowell, Marshall y Story constituyen 
los clasicos del Derecho internacional, — sino que mostraran el modo cuidadoso y 
cauteloso en que el Derecho internacional ha sido interpretado, aplicado y desarro- 
llado por los tribunales de justicia, y proporcionaran precedentes seguros que pue- 
den seguir los tribunales internacionales. Deben tambien recopilarse y publicarse las 
sentencias de los tribunales continentales ; pero ha parecido mejor empezar con las 
sentencias inglesas y americanas. El Director ha recomendado, y la Fundacion ha 
aprobado, el proyecto para la recopilacion y publication de las sentencias actuales 
y futuras de los tribunales nacionales que se refieran a asuntos de Derecho interna- 
cional; pero esta recomendacion es mas bien una propuesta, siendo asi que se 
cree que la experiencia adquirida en la recopilacion de las sentencias inglesas y 
americanas facilitara la realization del otro proyecto mayor. 

Como en el caso de las revistas, libros y tratados referentes a ciertas fases del 
Derecho internacional, la Fundacion tiene la intention de fomentar la redaction 
y distribution de varias obras que traten del arreglo pacifico de las controversias 
internacionales. Para citar un ejemplo, la Fundacion se ha suscrito por un gran 
numero de ejemplares al Recueil des Arbitrages Internationaux de los Sres. de 
Lapradelle y Politis, y adoptado las medidas para colocarlos en las bibliotecas e 
instituciones de los paises extranjeros, de modo que puedan llegar al conocimiento 
y atencion del publico que deba ser interesado en publicaciones de esta indole. 

Esta relation de la Fundacion Carnegie para la Paz Universal demuestra 
claramente que acepta su mision con seriedad; que se considera una institution 



190 LA VISITA Dt MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

de investigation mas bien que una sociedad de paz en el sentido tecnico de la 
palabra; y que por medio de la investigation de las causas y efectos de la guerra 
y la publicacion y distribution en todas partes de dichas investigaciones, y por 
medio del fomento material que extiende a las instituciones, agendas, y trabaja- 
dores en el mismo campo de action, puede esperarse con seguridad que prestara 
un servicio importante a la gran causa para la cual fue creada. 



APENDICE VII 191 

2. Asociaciones para la Conciliation Internacional 

Un distinguido publicista f ranees dijo hace poco que el estaba opuesto al 
establecimiento de sociedades nuevas, que ya habia tantas que era casi imposible 
nombrarlas y mucho menos tomar parte en ellas, y que el pertenecia a tantas que 
apenas, tenia tiempo para ninguna. Puede ser que exagerara, pero en lo que dijo 
habia algo de verdad. Parece ser mejor y mas prudente fortalacer las socie- 
dades existentes que crear nuevas para fines casi iguales. Tal es especialmente 
la opinion de la Fundacion Carnegie, la cual, en vez de crear nuevas instituciones, 
trata de ayudar a las existentes. 

Existen muchas sociedades de paz que hacen mucho bien, y no puede dudarse 
que la formation de otras en sitios donde las hay tenderia a aumentar el senti- 
miento a favor de arreglos pacificos, donde existe tal sentimiento, y crearlo, donde 
no existe. Pero yo quisiera llamar la atencion sobre sociedades de otra indole 
de caracter mas amplio y sin embargo mas restringido que el de las sociedades 
da la paz; mas amplio en el sentido de que tratan de atraer a todas las personas 
que favorecen los arreglos, pacificos; mas estrecho en el sentido de que general- 
mente no proponen metodos especificos para adelanter la causa de la paz interna- 
cional. Tratan de promover el buen entendimiento, en la creencia de que el 
buen entendimiento es en si mismo el camino hacia la paz internacional. Aunque 
hacen propaganda, sus metodos son conciliadores, no agresivos, y su fundador 
las llamo, no sin razon, sociedades para la conciliation internacional. 

Pero se preguntara icon que objeto fundar una sociedad nueva, cuando al 
principiar indique alguna vacilacion sobre el asunto ? La razon es que una Socie- 
dad para la Conciliation Internacional es una sociedad de indole distinta de la de 
las Sociedades de la Paz, propiamente dichas, y que la formation de sociedades 
nacionales de conciliation internacional no seria reproduction de ninguna socie- 
dad existente ni haria competencia a ninguna. Existe ademas la poderosa razon 
de que hay mucha gente en favor de la cultivation de una inteligencia amistosa 
entre las naciones y que son partidarios ardientes del arreglo pacifico de las con- 
troversias internacionales, pero que, sin embargo, vacilan en aliarse con las socie- 
dades de la paz propiamente dichas. Es interesante notar las razones por las 
cuales personas de un alto grado de inteligencia en favor de un arreglo pacifico 
se encuentran desinclinadas a matricularse como miembros de sociedades de la paz. 

Parece que hay una creencia en la mente popular, indudablemente erronea, de 
que las sociedades de la paz abogan por la paz a todo precio, que no son patrio- 
ticas o que son incompatibles con un patriotismo sano y vigoroso; que sus pro- 
yectos para conseguir la paz internacional, aunque numerosos y variados, son 
fantasticos e impracticables, y divorciados tanto de la razon como de la experi- 
encia, de modo que sus remedios, los cuales tornados en conyunto constituyen el 
pacifismo, se consideran utopicos. 

Ahora bien; al hablar asi no deseo crear la impresion de que participo de 
estas opiniones o que estoy de acuerdo con la critica que se hace de dichas socie- 



192 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

dades. Es un hecho, sin embargo, que muchisimas personas estimables vacilan 
en asociarse con las sociedades de la paz, porque temen que si lo hicieren asi, 
se encontrarian comprometidos respecto de los varios proyectos de las sociedades 
de la paz y se sujetarian tambien a la critica a que se hallan expuestos los paci- 
fistas. Existe une idea bastante esparcida de que las sociedades de la paz son 
exhortatorias y no constructivas ; que recurren al lado emocional de la naturaleza 
humana; que una gran parte de sus miembros, aunque no exclusivamente, se 
reclutan del elemento emocional; que las sociedades fortalecen, si es posible, a 
los que ya han sido convertidos, pero que no atraen a los hombres de negocios 
fuertes y perspicaces que despues de todo dirigen los asuntos del mundo. 

Por otra parte, aparece que muchisimos de aquellos que, sea por una u otra 
razon, vacilan en asociarse con las sociedades de la paz, estan no solo dispuestos, 
sino en muchos casos ansiosos de formar parte de sociedades de una naturaleza 
mas grande y amplia, que tratan de promover el buen entendimiento entre las 
naciones, la conciliacion internacional y el arreglo pacifico de las controversias. 

Hase dicho que entre el espiritu del pacifismo y el espiritu del arreglo paci- 
fico, que se contrastan admirablemente en el frances por las frases "l'esprit 
pacifiste" y "l'esprit pacifique", existe una diferencia entre la Utopia y la reali- 
dad, y que los partidarios precipitados del pacifismo en lugar de servir la causa 
de la paz constituyen de hecho un obstaculo a su realizacion y retardan su ade- 
lanto. 

Citare algunos ejemplos concretos en apoyo de la presente distincion. Un 
publicista distinguido japones, conocido muy bien y honorablemente por su 
actividad en el movimiento de la paz, dice que "la paz" o "la sociedad de la paz" 
es un termino o expresion que no debe emplearse en el Japon, porque la palabra 
por si sola, o la frase de que forma parte, comunica una idea especial a sus com- 
patriotas, los que, sin embargo, favorecen el arreglo pacifico, la buena voluntad 
internacional y la conciliacion. 

Un filantropo distinguido ingles, que ha contribuido fuertes sumas de dinero 
al movimiento de la paz y que tiene fe en el movimiento y en la posibilidad de su 
realizacion, pregunto si era verdaderamente necesario emplear la palabra "paz" 
en relacion con el movimiento, y dijo que en su experiencia la palabra comunicaba 
una impresion desfavorable. 

He aqui otro ejemplo que muestra las posibilidades del movimiento mas 
amplio en un pais en que las sociedades en pro de la paz no prosperan, por lo 
menos por ahora. Durante el ano pasado, se inicio en Francfort en Alemania 
una sociedad para la conciliacion internacional, e incluye en la lista de sus 
miembros muchos de los nombres mas distinguidos en el mundo cientifico, litera- 
rio, industrial y academico, con inclusion de profesores y maestros de Derecho 
internacional. Estos sefiores favorecen energicamente un arreglo pacifico, reco- 
miendan una actitud conciliadora en asuntos internacionales, y trabajan en sus 
respectivas es-feras en pro de una buena inteligencia entre las naciones. Pero al 
mismo tiempo se encuentran desinclinados a asociarse con sociedades de la paz. 



APENDICE VII 193 

Sin embargo, no nos toca criticar. Es mejor que nos demos cuenta de que 
muchas personas estimables que pueden trabajar por medio de sociedades no pueden 
o encuentran inconvenientes para trabajar en sociedades de paz o por su conducto. 
Parece juicioso reconocer estas distintas clases de personas e iniciar organiza- 
ciones que serviran como puntos de reunion para los que tienen fe en la buena 
voluntad y conciliation internacionales, que de otra manera es posible no tomarian 
parte alguna en el movimiento que esta uniendo las naciones mas y mas, y cuyo 
principio fundamental es disipar malas inteligencias y por medio de la amistad 
y buena voluntad adelantar la causa de la paz. 

La primera Sociedad para la Conciliacion Internacional fue iniciada por el 
Baron d'Estournelles de Constant en Paris, y es el modelo de las varias sucursales 
que se han organizado en otros paises. No es necesario advertir que el Baron 
d'Estournelles, aunque entusiasta por la paz, es un ciudadano leal, tolerante y 
patriota de Francia. El reconoce una doble forma de patriotismo ; el patriotismo 
que sirve al pais en el campo de batalla en el caso de necesidad, y el patriotismo 
que trata de evitar la guerra cuando esta no se impone. "El verdadero patrio- 
tismo", dice el, "consiste en servir bien a la patria. No es suficiente estar siempre 
listo a defenderla; es necesario tambien evitarle dificultades y cargos inutiles, y 
desarrollar, por medio de la paz, sus fuerzas, sus recursos y su comercio. Esti- 
mular su actividad interior bajo la proteccion de sus buenas relaciones exteriores, 
tal es nuestro doble programa." 

La constitution de la sociedad original para la conciliacion internacional 
expresa los objetos de la asociacion como sigue: "La Asociacion, que tiene el 
nombre "Conciliation Internationale" tiene por objeto el desarrollar la prosperi- 
dad nacional bajo los auspicios de buenas relaciones internacionales, y organizar 
estas buenas relaciones sobre una base permanente y durable". Entre los princi- 
pals medios de action con los cuales la sociedad se propone realizar su objeto 
se encuentran los siguientes : education de la opinion ; desarrollo del arbitraje ; 
rectification de informaciones erroneas ; una revista internacional ; publicaciones, 
conferencias, congresos, discursos, exposiciones ; difusion de idiomas extranjeros; 
intercambio de visitas entre asociaciones cientificas, profesionales y obreras; y 
otros medios parecidos. La asociacion fundada por el Baron d'Estournelles de 
Constant ha tenido mucho exito y cuenta entre sus socios muchos de los ciudadanos 
mas distinguidos de Francia y de otros paises. La sociedad publica un pequefio 
folleto que tiende a promover la buena inteligencia internacional y trata de 
asuntos del dia. 

Un ramal norteamericano de la Asociacion para la Conciliacion Internacional 
ha sido fundado en los Estados Unidos por el Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler, 
Presidente de la Universidad de Columbia. Los fines y objetos de esta sociedad 
son practicamente indenticos con los de la sociedad original de Paris. Publica 
un boletin mensual ; y para este el Dr. Butler ha conseguido articulos de algunos 
de los autores mas conocidos de los Estados Unidos y de otros paises, articulos 
que por su fondo instructivo y estilo agradable han hecho mucho para promover 



194 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

relaciones amistosas. Los folletos se reparten gratis a personas interesadas o 
cuyo interes ayudaria al movimiento, y se ha compilado una lista de mas de 
setenta y ocho mil nombres de personas prominentes y responsables en los Estados 
Unidos y el Canada, a las cuales se envia el folleto por correo todos los meses. 

El ano pasado se formo una sociedad alemana a cargo del letrado distinguido, 
Dr. Nippold, autor del excelente libro sobre el desarrollo del procedimiento en los 
conflictos internacionales. En el presente afio se empezo un ramal ingles bajo 
la presidencia de Sir Vezey Strong, ex-alcalde de Londres. Se esta formando 
una sociedad canadiense, y me alegraria mucho si se establecieran sociedades en 
los paises que tengo el honor de visitar en Sur America. 

Podria preguntarse : i cual es la relacion que existe entre la sociedad original 
y los ramales? Para contestar puedo citar las palabras del Dr. Butler, Presi- 
dente del ramal norteamericano de cuyo Comite Ejecutivo tengo el honor de ser 
miembro. Dice : "Aunque la sociedad de Paris es la sociedad principal, no existen 
relaciones formales entre ella y los ramales. Todas trabajan juntas en coopera- 
tion y simpatia amistosa, y cada una proporciona a las otras material e indicaciones 
para su publication y propaganda." Y al hablar de las sucursales que espera sean 
establecidas en los paises latinoamericanos, dice : "Deseariamos que las sucursales 
en los paises latinoamericanos, si se llegaren a organizar, mantuviesen la misma 
relacion con respecto a la sociedad de Paris que actualmente mantienen las demas. 
En otras palabras, nosotros empleamos la misma divisa, la misma serial y con- 
sideramos la sociedad de Paris la fundadora primitiva". 

De esta relacion muy breve e inadecuada se vera que mientras que las socie- 
dades cooperan y trabajan en harmonia, y se consideran afiliadas a lo sociedad 
primitiva en Paris, cada ramal es en realidad una sociedad separada e independi- 
ente y conduce sus operaciones del modo que la parezca mejor para atraer al 
publico que trata de interesar. El funcionario mas importante de la sociedad es 
el Secretario, el cual en la practica dirige la sociedad bajo la inspection del 
Comite Ejecutivo. 

Por fervorosos que sean nuestros esfuerzos, no podremos conseguir grandes 
adelantos en la causa de la paz internacional en breve tiempo, pero no conse- 
guiremos nada si nos cruzamos de brazos y nos ponemos a sonar en otro estado de 
cosas mejor y mas feliz que el actual. Tenemos que hacer el trabajo que encon- 
tramos a la mano, con la esperanza de que cada esfuerzo tendra su resultado, 
aunque nosotros no lo veamos. La paz internacional vendra, porque asi lo desean 
los hombres ilustrados de todos los paises ; pero vendra despacio, porque tenemos 
que veneer un impulso mental, un metodo de proceder profundamente arraigado 
en la historia. Tenemos el consuelo de saber que lo que viene despacio perdura, 
y que el conservatismo que hace el cambio dificil, asegurara y mantendra el re- 
sultado de nuestra labor, cuando hayamos conseguido nuestro proposito. Por una 
buena causa no se trabaja en vano, y seguramente no puede haber nada mas 
noble que disipar errores, establecer relaciones de confianza mutua, y preparar 
el camino hacia un porvenir brillante y feliz. 



APENDICE VII 195 

3. El Propuesto Tribunal de Justicia Internacional 

Estamos tan acostumbrados a considerar el Derecho internacional como un 
sistema universal de derecho, aceptado por todos y cada uno de los miembros de 
la sociedad de las naciones y aplicado por todas en sus relaciones exteriores, que 
nos chocaria la afirmacion de que, por universal que sea en teoria esta lejos de 
ser universal o uniforme en su aplicacion practica. Cuando surge un conflicto 
de naturaleza puramente legal entre dos naciones se evoca el Derecho de las 
naciones que es de aplicacion y es decisivo de la controversia, o se supone que lo 
sea. Una de las naciones presenta un principio como derecho reconocido; la otra 
niega la existencia del principio o pone en duda su aplicacion a la controversia, o 
admite el principio y que sea de aplicacion, pero lo interpreta segun su propio 
interes se lo indique. Hay pocos principios tan claros que no admitan interpreta- 
ciones diferentes, y pueden presentarse hechos y a menudo son presentados de tal 
modo que quedan retirados de la categoria de los casos en que un principio 
admitido generalmente se aplica o debe aplicarse. Tomese por ejemplo sin exten- 
derme sobre el asunto o tratar de determinar cual opinion es corecta, la doctrina 
de la clausula de la nacion mas favorecida, la existencia de la cual es admitida 
por todos pero la cual recibe una interpretacion por muchas naciones y otra por 
los Estados Unidos; o la doctrina del bloqueo que se interpreta y aplica de una 
manera por las naciones de Europa y de otra por la Gran Bretafia y los Estados 
Unidos. Queda admitido que existe la clausula de la nacion mas favorecida, tal 
como existe la ley del bloqueo, pero el contenido de la ley y su interpretacion son 
distintos. La practica de las naciones varia hoy tal como ha variado en el pasado, 
y la uniformidad en la teoria es en realidad una diversidad de hecho. Para con- 
vencerse del alcance de la variacion que existe lo mismo en cuanto al contenido 
y la forma de la ley, y su interpretacion y aplicacion, solo necesitamos consultar 
los tratados autoritativos del Derecho internacional escritos por autores 
igualmente eruditos y concienzudos de distintas nacionalidades. Cuando 
las autoridades estan contestes podemos considerar el principio estable- 
cido; cuando no estan conformes, en ese caso, iquien debe decidir? En la 
sociedad de las naciones todas son iguales y no hay ninguna superior. Si existiera 
un tribunal internacional de justicia tal como existen tribunales de ultima instan- 
cia dentro de las naciones, podria determinarse la cuestion por medio de fallo 
judicial; pero no existe tal tribunal, y tribunales especiales, ya sean tribunales 
especiales de la Haya o comisiones mixtas, solo obligan a las naciones que sean 
partes y no a las naciones en general, a las cuales la sentencia no afecta. Cada 
nacion asi depende de si misma y juzga de acuerdo con su interes propio a las 
pasiones del momento, y el dejar de aceptar la contention de una de las naciones, 
porque ambas contenciones no pueden aceptarse, puede conducir a la ruptura de 
relaciones amistosas y echar a las naciones a una guerra que parece justificada en 
el momento pero que es condenada por la historia, la cual es el juez de ultima 
instancia de las naciones, sean grandes o pequefias. 



196 LA VISITA DF, MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

El Palacio de la Paz en La Haya, que fue abierto el 28 de agosto con impo- 
nentes ceremonias, es el hogar permanente del Tribunal de La Haya, y es una 
prueba visible y elocuente del hecho de que las controversias legales de las naciones 
como las controversias legales de los individuos deben determinarse por aquel 
proceso de ley que existe en todos los paises que pretenden ser civilizados. Y sin 
embargo por mas firmemente que abrigemos la ilusion de que existe un tribunal y 
por mucho que hablemos de un tribunal permanente en La Haya, sabemos o 
por lo menos debemos saber que no existe ningun tribunal permanente excepto 
de nombre ; y que solo hay una lista de jueces de la cual puede f ormarse un tri- 
bunal especial o temporero para la vista de alguna causa, el cual tribunal empieza 
a existar para dicha causa y se disuelve con la sentencia; que la sentencia solo 
obliga a las naciones litigantes que fueron partes en la controversia y su arreglo ; 
que no sienta jurisprudencia excepto en cuanto a dichas naciones; que no obliga 
a ningun Tribunal consiguiente o especial ya se componga de los mismos o de 
distintos arbitros ; que la sentencia a menudo es la transaccion de un conflicto que 
la diplomacia no ha podido arreglar, y que como transaccion o como fallo entre 
dos naciones no puede desarrollar el Derecho internacional de aquella manera 
cuidadosa y concienzuda, imparcial y desapasionada, sistematica y cientifica con que 
se desarrolla la jurisprudencia nacional. 

Para aquellos que han hecho un estudio cuidadoso del metodo por el cual la 
ley y el orden son desarrollados dentro de los limites nacionales, es evidente que 
la ley y el orden entre las naciones se desarrollaran por medio de la accion de las 
mismas fuerzas en escala mayor y en un campo mayor, porque las naciones del 
mundo no son mas que los habitantes del mundo arreglados en grupos mas o 
menos artificiales ; y que la experiencia y la practica de cada una deben producir 
en el trascurso del tiempo resultados parecidos. La pas internacional depende asi 
evidentemente del crecimiento de la ley entre los pueblos, y de su interpretation y 
su aplicacion por agencias idoneas entre las naciones como entre los individuos, 
con tales modificaciones que las diferencias de las condiciones puedan sugerir o 
requerir. Tomenos un solo y sencillo ejemplo. No habiendo ningun superior en 
una sociedad de iguales, es dificil comprender como un tribunal internacional 
puede ser armado con el poder de ejecucion o como las naciones puedan permitir 
que cualquiera nacion o combination de naciones ejecuten el fallo cuando el uso de 
la fuerza en el pasado ha producido tantos males y tan facilmente pudiera inducir 
a la nacion o al grupo de naciones a reclamar o a ejercer un derecho que podria 
destruir la igualidad e independencia de otras naciones sin cuya igualidad e inde- 
pendencia el Derecho internacional es imposible e inconcebible. Afortunadamente 
las decisiones internacionales han sido observadas sin exception, porque la 
sumision a arbitraje envuelve el cumplimiento del fallo y la buena 
fe de la nacion indica tal cumplimiento aunque el interes del momento o el 
amor propio indiquen resistencia al cumplimiento. No necesitamos preocuparnos 
con una dificultad teorica que no se presenta en la practica o poner en duda la 
posibilidad y la eficiencia de un tribunal internacional solo porque le falta lo que 



APENDICE VII 197 

se supone sea un elemento esencial de un tribunal nacional de justicia, cuando 
el estudio demuestra que este es el resultado o desarrollo y una comodidad, pero 
no un requisite) esencial, del procedimiento judicial, o su consecuencia necesaria 
o inevitable. 

Hubiera podido decirse en el 1794 cuando se negocio el Tratado Jay entre la 
Gran B re tana y los Estados Unidos que el arreglo de controversias internacionales 
por medio de comisiones mixtas, era impracticable si no imposible, pero la decision 
de cuestiones importantes y perplejas entre los dos paises por medio de la comision 
mixta organizada de acuerdo con dicho tratado demostro mas alia de toda duda 
la posibilidad y la practicabilidad de tal metodo. Hubiera podido decirse que las 
comisiones mixtas o los tribunales temporales solo estaban capacitados para 
determinar cuestiones menores o sin importancia o que no se someteria ninguna 
cuestion importante al arbitraje, pero la Gran Bretafia y los Estados Unidos 
sometieron al Tribunal de Ginebra las reclamaciones sobre danos hechos por el 
crucero Alabama, que en una eposa agitaron las pasiones de los dos paises y 
amenazaron dar lugar a la guerra. 

Y tambien hubiera podido decirse con alguna razon que no podrian arbitrarse 
cuestiones cuando la ley es dudosa o no existe, pero el Tratado de Washington de 
1 87 1 demostro lo facil que es convenir en algunos principios de ley para el arreglo 
de las reclamaciones si las naciones realmente desean arreglar su controversia 
por un fallo dictado por la razon. Porque siempre ha sido verdad, segiin lo dijo el 
senor Root al poner la piedra fundamental del edificio panamericano en Wash- 
ington — un templo de paz anterior al Palacio de La Haya y no menos imponente — 
"los asuntos en controversia entre les naciones no son nada; el espiritu con que 
son tratados es todo." 

Por tanto, cuando la Primera Conferencia de la Paz se reunio en el 1899 en la 
Haya — el lugar de nacimiento de Grocio, el primer tratadista, si no el fundador, 
del Derecho internacional — las naciones habian tenido la experiencia de un siglo en 
el arreglo de controversias, a menudo de naturaleza perpleja y algunas veces 
aguda, y es natural que hubieran recomendado el arbitraje de las cuestiones "de 
orden juridico, y en primer lugar las cuestiones de interpretation o de aplicacion de 
las convenciones internacionales como el medio mas eficaz y al mismo tiempo mas 
equitativo de arreglar los litigios que no han sido resueltos por las vias diplo- 
maticas." 

Tambien fue natural y altamente beneficioso que la Conferencia redactara un 
codigo de procedimiento arbitral basado en la practica y la experiencia del siglo, 
especialmente cuando el Instituto de Derecho Internacional ya en 1874 habia 
redactado tal codigo que muchos consideran superior al codigo de la Conferencia. 

Pero la Conferencia hizo mas : creo un sistema consistente en una lista de 
jueces nombrados por las potencias de la cual pudiera formarse un tribunal tem- 
porero para la vista de una causa. No hizo una lista pequefia y selecta de personas 
que formarian un tribunal y que las partes en el litigio convenian anticipadamente 



198 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEE SUR 

en aceptar. Si hubiera hecho esto hubiera creado un tribunal y no solamente la 
organization para la creation de un tribunal temporero. 

Lo que efectivamente hizo se vera de las siguientes citaciones de la Conven- 
tion pour le Reglement pacifique des conflits internationaux. 

"Art. XXIII. Cada una de las potencias signatarias designara, dentro de los 
tres meses seguientes a la ratification por ella del presente acto, cuatro personas lo 
mas, de una competencia reconocida en las cuestiones de Derecho internacional 
que gozen de la mas alta consideration moral y esten dispuestas a aceptar las 
funciones de arbitros. 

Las personas asi designadas seran inscritas, como miembros de la Corte, en 
una lista que sera notificada a toda las potencias signatarias por medio de la oficina. 

Toda modification en la lista de los arbitros sera llevada, por medio de la 
oficina, al conocimiento de las potencias signatarias. 

Dos o varias potencias pueden entenderse en la designation comun de uno o 
varios miembros. 

La misma persona puede ser designada por diferentes potencias. Los 
miembros de la Corte son nombrados por un termino de seis afios. Su mandato 
puede ser renovado. 

En el caso del fallecimiento o de la retirada de algun miembro de la Corte, 
sera reemplazado de acuerdo con el modo fijado para su nombramiento." 

Este articulo suministro a las naciones una lista de arbitros posibles. Vease 
ahora el metodo por medio del cual debia formarse el tribunal para la vista de 
la causa: 

"Art. XXIV. Cuando las potencias signatarias quieran dirigirse a la Corte 
permanente para el arreglo de una diferencia surgida entre ellas los arbitros 
llamados a formar el tribunal competente para decidir sobre esta diferencia deben 
ser escogidos de la lista general de miembros de la Corte. 

A falta de la constitution del tribunal arbitral por el acuerdo de las partes, 
se procedera de la manera siguiente : 

Cada parte nombra dos arbitros y estos juntos escogen a un tercero en 
discordia. 

En caso de empate el nombramiento del tercero sera confiado a otra potencia 
designada de comun acuerdo por las partes. 

Si no se llegare a un acuerdo sobre esta materia, cada parte designara una 
potencia diferente y el nombramiento del tercero se hara de acuerdo por las 
potencias asi designadas. 

Habiendose asi f ormado el tribunal las partes notifican a la oficina su decision 
de dirigirse a la Corte y los nombres de los arbitros. 

El tribunal arbitral se reunira en la fecha fijada por las partes." 

Ademas, se formo un Consejo administrativo consistente de los agentes 
diplomaticos en La Haya para organizar una oficina internacional que actuara 
como alguacil de la Corte y que vigilara sus operaciones. 



APENDICE VII 199 

Tenemos aqui una maquinaria para la creation de un tribunal temporal; no 
tenemos una Corte en el sentido propio de la palabra, y mucho menos una Corte 
permanente, aunque con exageracion perdonable la Conferencia dio ese nombre 
a la maquinaria. Al hacerlo, familiarizo al publico con el nombre y el ideal de 
una Corte permanente, pero hizo dif icil crear una institution que fuera permanente 
en verdad, porque tanto somos esclavos de la palabra que casi nos hemos persuadido 
que existe una Corte permanente. Asi es que cuando abogamos por el estableci- 
miento de un tribunal permanente de verdad, con un cuerpo determinado y 
permanente de jueces, encontramos o la indiferencia o la pregunta: ipor que 
crear otro tribunal permanente cuando ya existe uno? 

En la Segunda Conferencia de La Haya — a la cual afortunadamente fue 
invitada y asistio la America Latina, debido a la habilidad y la insistencia del 
senor Root, porque una conferencia no puede ser verdaderamente internacional ni 
legislar para todas las naciones cuando todas no estan representadas — se hizo una 
tentativa de constituir al lado de la Corte permanente asi llamada, un tribunal en 
verdad permanente, compuesto de jueces que actuaran bajo el sentido de respon- 
sabilidad judicial, segun lo llamo el senor Root. — Este como secretario de Estado 
instruyo a la delegation norteamericana que presentara y solicitara en la Con- 
ferencia la creation de una Corte internacional permanente en el sentido estricto 
de la palabra. 

La necesidad de tal tribunal fue reconocida por muchos miembros de la 
Conferencia, y Monsieur Bourgeois demostro de un modo brillante y convincente 
como la Corte permanente asi llamada podria utilizarse propiamente y con ventaja 
para cuestiones de indole politica porque el tribunal estaria compuesto de arbitros 
escogidos para el caso especial por tener las partes confianza especial en su com- 
petencia, mientras que un tribunal permanente de veras en el sentido juridico de 
la palabra podria formarse para la vista de causas de naturaleza legal. El 
proposito no fue el de disolver la Corte permanente asi llamada sino de formar 
a su lado un tribunal permanente de verdad, dotando asi a las naciones de dos 
agencias de paz y dejandolas libres para usar una u otra segun prefiriesen o la 
naturaleza del caso pudiera sugerir. 

Despues de mucha discusion que se referia especialmente al metodo de escoger 
los jueces, se adopto el proyecto de una convention con referenda a lo organiza- 
tion, la competencia y el procedimiento del Tribunal de Justicia Arbitral, segun se 
llamo a la nueva institution. No pudiendose determinar un metodo generalmente 
aceptable de escoger a los jueces, debido sin duda a falta de tiempo y a la dificultad 
del asunto, se aprobo la convention, pero se dejo la institution definitiva del 
tribunal a las naciones, las cuales se esperaba llegarian a un acuerdo sobre este 
detalle necesario por la via diplomatica. De todos modos se dio un gran paso 
hacia la creation de un tribunal permanente de verdad y parecido a tribunales 
nacionales de justicia. 

El proyecto ha merecido la aprobacion de publicistas de todos los paises, y el 
Instituto de Derecho Internacional, en su sesion celebrada en Cristiania en 1912, 



200 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

lo adopto y recomendo la institution del tribunal despues de larga y profunda 
discusion. El asunto sin duda estara comprendido en el programa de la Tercera 
Conferencia de la Haya, y se espera que el tribunal tan deseado sera instalado en 
el Palacio de la Paz como tribunal de todas las naciones. 

No ofrezco ninguna proposition en cuanto a la composition del tribunal o en 
cuanto al metodo de escoger los jueces. Solo llamo la atencion sobre el hecho 
de que el proyecto queda aprobado por la Conferencia de las naciones, por los 
publicistas mas acreditados, por el Instituto de Derecho International, y por la 
opinion publica de todas las naciones; y pido que se piense en el problema de 
escoger .los jueces y que los gobiernos se fijen en el, porque tiene que ser 
solucionado y no puede ser solucionado sin el mas cuidadoso estudio y considera- 
tion de los me j ores pensadores del mundo. En la solution definitiva del 
problema la America Latina tiene el derecho de ser oida, y es el deber de nuestro 
continente con sus veintiuna naciones, casi la mitad de las naciones que participan 
en la Conferencia, expresarse clara y terminantemente no a favor de determinada 
nation, ni a favor de determinado continente, sino a favor de los intereses del 
mundo. Me gusta la frase bonita e imponente del ilustrado Presidente de la Argen- 
tina: La America Latina — mejor diria, la America entera — por la humanidad. 

Sin prolongar un articulo que ya es mas largo de lo que yo deseaba, quisiera 
hacer algunas indicaciones para demostrar que un Tribunal de Justicia Inter- 
national es inevitable, si se lee bien la historia. Los partidarios del arbitraje en 
vez de procedimientos judiciales en el sentido estricto y tecnico de la palabra, 
parecen considerar el arbitraje como la culmination de un desarrollo largo y 
penoso y creer que no debe irse mas alia, — cuando en realidad, el arbitraje no es 
mas que un paso, aunque un paso importante, en la transition del periodo en el 
cual los quejosos se hacen la justicia por si mismo, al periodo de los procedimientos 
judiciales. No debe causar sorpresa el que dejemos de notar la relation historica 
entre el arbitraje y los procedimientos judiciales, porque los mismos jurisconsultos 
del Imperio Romano consideraban el arbitraje, no como la fuente de sus insti- 
tuciones judiciales, sino como una modification de aquellas institutciones. Sin 
embargo, los juristas modernos han demostrado que entre los antepasados de las 
naciones europeas los descontentos se hacian la justicia por si mismos, que surgio 
la costumbre de someter la controversia a un tercero para dicidirla, y que este 
metodo se hizo general, escogiendo las partes por mutuo acuerdo a la persona 
que debia actuar de juez o arbitro. Los investigadores del Derecho romano han 
demostrado que occurio lo mismo en Roma y que por medio de un desarrollo 
largo y paulatino el arreglo de las disputas por arbitraje dio lugar a los pro- 
cedimientos judiciales y culmino en el establecimiento de una judicatura perma- 
nente. Asi las partes de la controversia convenian en someterla al arbitraje; 
tambien convenian en el nombramiento de un juez, el cual era un particular y no 
un funcionario publico, y cuyas sentencias no se consideraban un acto del Estado, 
sino la opinion o sentencia de un juez o arbitro, que seria ejecutada por las partes 
que con anterioridad habian convenido en aceptarla. En el curso del tiempo se 



APENDICE VII 201 

preparo una lista de jueces, llamada el "Album Judicum", de la cual las partes 
debian escoger los jueces para cada caso, hasta que por fin, en el reino de 
Diocleciano, el juez o arbitro particular fue sustituido por el magistrado, cuya 
sentencia se consideraba como un acto del Estado y era ejecutada como tal. La 
analogia entre el desarrollo de aquel sistema de jurisprudencia que rige o ejerce 
influencia sobre la mayor parte de las naciones civilizadas, y el desarrollo que 
actualmente se esta verificando entre las naciones, es tan obvia que casi no 
necesita comentarios. Las naciones que tienen disputas han tratado, y por des- 
gracia aun tratan, de hacerse justicia con las armas por agravios reales o supues- 
tos. Se ha desarrollado un sentimiento que condena tal conducta sin limites o 
restricciones, y por tanto las naciones a menudo convienen por medio de tratados 
o convenciones, que no son ni mas ni menos que contratos, en someter las con- 
troversias a jueces que ellas mismas escogen. En el afio 1899 la Primera Con- 
f erencia de La Haya siguio, al parecer inconcientemente, el precedente del Derecho 
romano y creo una lista de juces — el moderno Album Judicum — de la cual las 
partes debian escoger los jueces o arbitros al surgir un caso; y en la Segunda 
Conferencia de La Haya se trato, como ya he dicho, de dar el paso definitivo y 
final en este desarrollo inconsciente y crear un tribunal permanente de verdad. Es, 
pues evidente que el arbitraje no es un fin, sino un medio para llegar a un fin, y 
que historica y logicamente desarrolla una judicatura y procedimientos judiciales. 

Con facilidad, podria demostrar como el sistema de tribunales a 
comisiones temporales entre las naciones ha resultado poco satisfactorio en el 
trascurso del tiempo y que al fin se crearon tribunales judiciales permanentes. Asi 
los tres cantones que formaron el nucleo de la Confederacion Suiza convinieron en 
el 1 29 1 en someter sus disputas al arbitraje de personas que poseyeran la confianza 
de la communidad. En el siglo siguiente los cantones convinieron en someter 
sus controversias a arbitros que ellos mismos escogerian y mas adelante adoptaron 
varios metodos de escoger los jueces para estos tribunales temporales. En el 
1848 el sistema de arbitraje por tribunales temporales fue sustituido por un tri- 
bunal federal permanente. Un distinguido publicista suizo, M. Dubs, ha descrito 
las ventajas del sistema permanente sobre el sistema de lo que el muy bien llama 
"Tribunaux de hasard". Dice entre otras cosas: "Se nombra al juez para toda 
una serie de causas, sin referenda a ninguna causa especial; aquellos que lo 
nombran son completamente imparciales ; pueden pesar con cuidado sus cualidades 
morales y su competencia tecnica ; se introduce un orden fijo en el procedimiento, 
una tradition en las sentencias, y la claridad en su ejecucion." 

Tambien podria citarse el ejemplo de los Estados Unidos. En el primer 
Convenio de Confederacion de 1778, los Estados de la Union dispusieron que 
las disputas que surgieran entre ellos fueran determinadas por medio de comisiones 
temporales. Algunas controversias fueron juzgadas por esta clase de tribunales 
pero el resultado no fue satisfactorio. Por esta razon la Constitution de 1787 
confirio al Tribunal Supremo de los Estados Unidos la facultad de examinar 
y decidir las disputas entre los Estados, y este sistema ha dado resultados tan 



202 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

satisfactorios que no podemos comprender las objeciones que se hacen al arreglo 
de cuestiones entre las naciones por medio de tribunales judiciales formados por 
jueces que actuen con espiritu de responsabilidad judicial. 

Para que no se diga que la formacion de un tribunal permanente es posible 
solamente en una confederacion como Suiza y en un Estado federal como los 
Estados Unidos, me apresuro a llamar la atencion sobre el hecho de que el estableci- 
miento de un Tribunal de Justicia Internacional no depende de ningun modo de 
una federacion de Estados. Solo requiere una union publica para un fin judicial. 
Hay muchos ejemplos de uniones publicas, siendo la mejor conocida la Union 
Postal, a la cual pertenecen todas las naciones y colonias autonomas y que tiene un 
negociado que decide las disputas. Es claro, pues, que dentro de limites nacionales 
el arbitraje ha llegado a procedimientos judiciales y que las naciones que han 
tenido tribunales temporales los han sustituido con el sistema mas satisfactorio, 
mas imparcial, menos costoso y mas expedito, de decidir las disputas legales entre 
sus cantones o Estados, por medio de un tribunal permanente, cuya sentencia 
obliga a todos los cantones y Estados. Las cincuenta o mas uniones publicas para 
un fin especial demuestran que tal union es compatible con la existencia inde- 
pendiente de las naciones. 

Si la historia esta con nosotros, el porvenir esta. asegurado. Podemos seguir 
con confianza la experiencia de las naciones, porque en este caso no estamos 
andando a ciegas, sino con conocimiento de las dificultades del sistema antiguo, y 
de las ventajas del nuevo; y la experiencia del pasado y del presente nos sirve de 
guia. 



APENDICE VII 203 



4. La Propuesta Academia de Derecho Internacional de La Haya 

En la Segunda Conferencia de La Haya a la cual fueron invitados todos los 
Estados americanos, y en la cual participaron todos los referidos Estados, con 
dos excepciones, el sefior Sturdsa, entonces primer Ministro de Rumania, propuso 
que se estableciera en La Haya una Academia de Derecho Internacional la cual 
"de un modo metodico, mantendria la ciencia en el mismo nivel de los principios 
enunciados por la Conferencia, y la practica en el mismo nivel con el progreso 
que se haya inaugurado." Para efectuar este proposito noble y benefico, el seiior 
Sturdsa propuso que se escogieran los miembros de la Academia de entre los 
hombres eruditos, los profesores de universidades, y los jurisconsultos mas 
eminentes de todos los paises, hombres cuya competencia sea reconocida en los 
distintos ramos del Derecho internacional, el Derecho internacional privado, las 
leyes de la guerra, el derecho comercial comparativo, los sistemas comerciales y las 
relaciones economicas, los sistemas coloniales y la historia del Derecho inter- 
nacional. 

La Academia tambien debia ser internacional en el sentido de que se diera 
la instruccion indistintamente en aleman, ingles, frances e italiano durante tres o 
cuatro meses de cada ano, preferentemente durante mayo, junio y julio. El cuerpo 
de estudiantes debia componerse de diplomaticos, oficiales del ejercito y personas 
empleadas en los departamentos administrativos mas altos del Estado, y hombres 
eruditos que debian ser nombrados por cada Estado que tomara parte en la 
creacion de la Academia. Los gastos debian ser cubiertos por dichas naciones, y 
la Academia debia quedar bajo el control y la inspeccion del Consejo permanente 
administrativo de La Haya, el cual se compone, como es bien sabido, de los 
representantes diplomaticos de los distintos paises representados en La Haya. 

Esta proposicion del sefior Sturdsa se presento en una carta al Presidente de 
la Conferencia, el cual leyo la carta y el proyecto de la constitucion de la Academia 
que fue remitido con la carta. Dio su cordial aprobacion al proyecto y expreso 
el deseo de que la indicacion inspirara a algiin benefactor generoso la idea de 
seguir el ejemplo del seiior Carnegie y de inmortalizar su nombre, conectandolo 
con un establecimiento que seria de gran servicio a la causa de la Paz, y que 
aseguraria la justicia al contribuir a la diseminacion de sus principios y a la 
instruccion de dignos trabaj adores en ese campo. 

La Conferencia no dispuso nada en cuanto al proyecto del sefior Sturdsa, 
pero la carta y la propuesta constitucion formaron parte de los archivos de la 
Conferencia y se encuentran publicados en el informe oficial de sus trabajos. 
Sin embargo no se perdio de vista la idea, y se formo un Comite holandes bajo 
la presidencia del seiior Asser para interesar la Fundacion Carnegie y si posible, 
conseguir de sus fondos el dinero necesario para mantener la Academia. La 
Fundacion ha aprobado la idea en principio y se ha mostrado dispuesta a suminis- 
trar los medios necesarios para la instalacion de la Academia en el Palacio de la 



204 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

Paz, donde debe ser colocada, asi como tambien los gastos que fueren requeridos 
para su funcionamiento, en el caso de que resultara : 

i.) Que hay un deseo general entre las naciones de que se establezca esta 
Academia, y 

2.) que las naciones demostraran su interes, designando a uno o mas 
funcionarios para asistir a los cursos y aprovecharse de ellos. 

La razon de esta actitud de parte de la Fundacion es obvia, porque debemos 
fortalecer las instituciones existentes mejor que crear nuevas, a no ser que se 
demostrara claramente su utilidad y su necesidad. 

Estas ideas fueron comunicadas al sefior Asser. Este a su vez se puso en 
comunicacion con los primeros publicistas de Europa, y de las contestaciones 
que le dieron aparecio que hay un deseo muy general, casi puede decirse unanime 
y universal de que se cree la Academia. El Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores 
de Holanda hizo averiguaciones por medio de conductos diplomaticos sobre la 
disposicion de las naciones de participar en la Academia del modo sugerido por 
la Fundacion, es decir designando estudiantes para seguir sus cursos, y aunque 
no se ha recibido contestacion de todos los paises, porque la diplomacia se 
mueve algo despacio y cautelosamente, es evidente que la proyectada Academia 
no carecera del apoyo de un buen numero de naciones. Debe referirse aqui que 
el asunto de la Academia ha sido sometido dos veces a la Asociacion de Derecho 
Internacional y aprobado por sus miembros, y que, en una sesion reciente del 
Instituto de Derecho Internacional que se celebro en Oxford en el mes de agosto 
del presente afio, aquel importante cuerpo se expreso clara y casi unanimemente a 
favor del establecimiento de la Institution propuesta. Puede decirse, por lo tanto, 
que por lo menos una de las dos dificultades que obstruian el camino de su creacion 
ha sido removida, y si nuestros amigos de Sur America aprueban la idea y sus 
gobiernos designan una o mas personas idoneas para asistir a sus cursos, la Aca- 
demia dejara de ser proyecto y abrira sus puertas a estudiantes competentes de 
todos los paises. 

Tengo instrucciones especiales de presentarles este asunto, con la esperanza 
de que encuentre la aprobacion de los publicistas latinoamericanos y que los 
gobiernos de las republicas americanas esten dispuestos a participar en el sentido 
de designar a personas competentes que deban asistir a los cursos de la Academia. 
Creemos que gustosamente designarian a tales personas si el asunto les fuera 
presentado debidamente y comprendieran que el establecimiento de la Academia 
depende en gran medida de su cooperation. Puedo decir ademas, de acuerdo 
con las instrucciones que he recibido, que si los Poderes Ejecutivos de los Estados 
latinosamericanos expresaran su disposicion de cumplir" con la invitation que 
se hiciera por conductos diplomaticos por el Ministerio Holandes de Relaciones 
Exteriores, es. probable que se habra vencido la ultima dificultad para la creacion 
de la Academia. 



APENDIC3 VII 205 

Permitaseme bosquejar brevemente el plan de la Academia en proyecto. 
Puede decirse que es todavia el plan del senor Sturdsa con algunas modificaciones 
y adiciones importantes. La Academia debe ser en primer lugar una Academia 
de Derecho Internacional y de asuntos relacionados. Debe celebrar sesiones 
durante tres meses del ano, preferentemente desde julio hasta octubre, es decir, 
durante las vacaciones de las universidades y las escuelas de ciencias politicas. 
Se daran cursos de instruccion sistematicos en espafiol, asi como tambien en 
aleman ingles, f ranees e italiano. Sin embargo, la Academia no quedara bajo 
el control ni dependent del apoyo de las naciones, aunque se espera que las 
naciones, segun indico el senor Sturdsa, designaran personas idoneas para asistir 
a los cursos. La Academia sera instalada en el Palacio de la Paz que fue abierto 
recientemente y sera administrada en todos sus aspectos materiales por el comite 
encargado de dicho Palacio. Su curso de estudios sera determinado por un cuerpo 
llamado el Curatorium que se compondra, en primer lugar, de anteriores presi- 
dentes del Instituto de Derecho Internacional que representaran a distintos 
paises, y asi el aspecto internacional sera tan efectivo como aparente. Las canti- 
dades necesarias para el mantenimiento de la Academia seran suministradas por la 
Fundacion Carnegie y seran administradas por un comite especial de hacienda 
con asiento en La Haya. Se ha creido mejor colocar a la Academia bajo control 
particular, y no solicitar que los gobiernos suministren ninguna parte de los fondos 
requeridos, aunque se espera, segun ya he indicado, que demostraran su interes, 
designando estudiantes que deban seguir los cursos. 

Sin entrar mas en los detalles, los cuales, aunque importantes, no son de 
interes general, puedo decir en dos palabras, que el objeto especifico de la 
Academia es, segun dice el Comite holandes "promover el estudio del Derecho 
internacional publico y privado y de las ciencias politicas, incluyendo tambien el 
Derecho internacional civil y penal y las ciencias politicas en relacion con el 
Derecho internacional, etc." 

Los medios de conseguir este fin son : 

i. Conferencias sobre asuntos especiales por los profesores mas competentes 
de dichas ciencias proviniendo los profesores de distintas naciones. 

2. Instruccion sistematica sobre el todo o alguna parte especial de alguna 
de dichas ciencias por los profesores mas competentes, que tambien seran de 
diferentes paises. 

3. Instruccion superior que se dara por conferencistas y profesores de 
acuerdo con el metodo de seminario que ha producido resultados tan brillantes 
en Alemania y otros lugares donde se ha aplicado, y 

4. La publication de los cursos dados por conferencistas distinguidos. 

Si analizamos estos metodos veremos que discursos sobre asuntos especiales 
y del dia seran pronunciados por conferencistas de grandes alcanes que no solo 
saben la teoria sino que han tenido la ventaja de adquirir experiencia practica en 



206 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

los asuntos que deben tratar. Asi para dar un solo ejemplo puedo decir que el 
distinguido publicista y arbitro frances, Monsieur Louis Renault, que ha repre- 
sentado a su pais con especial habilidad en todas las recientes conferencias inter- 
nacionales, incluyendo dos en La Haya, y que es el arbitro preferido en las disputas 
entre miembros de la familia de las naciones, ha convenido en dar, en el caso de 
establecerse la Academia, un curso de treinta conferencias sobre arbitraje y 
procedimiento arbitral. Estas conferencias serian dadas en frances y una vez 
publicadas serian muy repartidas. Los folletos serian colocados en bibliotecas 
piiblicas y en bibliotecas de las universidades, y serian expuestos a la venta 
a precios modicos para que todos los interesados en el asunto pudieran conseguir 
el tomo impreso. Se espera que cuatro o cinco conferencistas de distintos paises 
darian cursos sobre asuntos importantes y del dia de naturaleza teorica durante 
cada sesion de la Academia. 

Por supuesto se solicitaria tambien a los distinguidos publicistas de la 
America Latina que pronuncien discursos en espafiol sobre los distintos problemas 
de las relaciones internacionales. Se dara instruccion sistematica por profesores 
de distintas nacionalidades y de reconocida competencia, y, en vista de que 
seria imposible o no seria practico tratar la totalidad de un asunto durante una 
sola sesion sin peligro de ensefianza superficial, se propone que los temas sean 
divididos en sus partes components y que cada parte sea tratada por separado, si 
esto es posible o conveniente. 

Facilmente podemos comprender las venta j as que tendrian para los estudiantes 
los distintos puntos de vista de los diferentes profesores. Los cursos serian no 
solo cursos de Derecho internacional, sino tambien, pudiera decirse, cursos de 
Derecho internacional comparado, porque desgraciadamente el Derecho inter- 
nacional esta afectado por sentimientos nacionales, tal como el rio lleva indicios 
del terreno que atraviesa. Y esto seria una venta j a no solo para los estudiantes, 
sino que es probable que seria una ventaja aun mayor para los mismos profesores, 
los cuales por el contacto diario y el intercambio de pensamientos estarian obligados 
a tomar nota de las opiniones de sus colegas de otras nacionalidades y asi se verian 
impulsados a internacionalizar el Derecho internacional. 

Ademas, es facil comprender el gran beneficio que derivarian los estudiantes 
menos avanzados del estudio bajo conferencistas y profesores tan distinguidos. 
Estos tambien sacarian provecho del intercambio del pensamiento que necesaria- 
mente ocurriria en los cursos intimos y pequefios, porque el numero de estudiantes 
adelantados en el seminario seria pequeno en comparacion con el numero que 
asistiria a las conferencias en general y a la instruccion sistematica. 

No es dificil crear la Academia, invitar conferencistas, y conseguir los 
servicios de profesores eminentes durante un termino del verano. Podria sin 
embargo ser dificil encontrar un cuerpo de estudiantes y la Fundacion no desea 
que los especialistas distinguidos den conferencias en aulas vacias. Tambien la 
Fundacion desea que el cuerpo estudiantil sea de tal clase y de tal nivel intelectual 
y provenga de tantos paises diferentes que la influencia de la Academia se haga 



APENDICE VII 207 

sentir entre los especialistas del Derecho internacional, que lleguen a ser pro 
fesores, diplomaticos, o sigan otras carreras. Esta es una de las razones porque 
se considera esencial la cooperation de los gobiernos extranjeros, porque si 
cada pais que estuvo representado en la Segunda Conferencia de La Haya designa 
aunque sea un solo estudiante en cada afio, el cuerpo estudiantil, por pequeno que 
sea, seria tal que aprovecharia la instruction y quizas influria beneficamente las 
relaciones extranjeras de los respectivos gobiernos. 

Vamos a considerar ahora de que modo la Academia se distinguiria de las 
academias existentes: 

1. Se instalaria en el Palacio de la Paz en La Haya y los estudiantes no 
podrian dejar de verse impresionados por los fines y propositus del Palacio de la 
Paz donde han de celebrarse las sesiones. 

2. Los conferencistas serian escogidos del mundo en general y los discursos 
serian pronunciados en cualquiera de cinco idiomas. La publication de los 
discursos enriqueceria el Derecho internacional con una serie de monografias y asi 
dentro de algunos anos los estudiantes en todas partes del mundo podrian 
aprovechar los conceptos e ideas maduras de hombres distinguidos practicos y 
teoricos, lo que no ocurriria si no existiera la Academia. 

3. El pequeno claustro seria unico en el sentido de que se compondria de 
profesores provenientes de distintos paises que darian conferencias ante estudiantes 
que representarian a las naciones del mundo que reconocen y aplican el Derecho 
internacional en sus relaciones exteriores. 

4. Los seminarios serian unicos en el sentido de que en vez de ser nacionales, 
como ocurre con los ahora existentes, serian internacionales y dirigidos por 
peritos de distintas nacionalidades. 

Hay tanto que podria decirse a favor de la Academia, y hay tan poco 
que podria objetarse a su institution, que sus promotores creen que debe ser 
establecida sin mas demora. No entraria en competencia con ninguna institu- 
tion existente, en caracter, en calidad, o en cuanto al tiempo de sus sesiones. 
Ofrece instruction igualmente unica y que no podria conseguirse en otra parte. 
Parece que queda un solo obstaculo para que sea realizada. Si los paises latino- 
americanos consintieran en designar a una o mas personas competentes de cada 
una de las republicas americanas para seguir las conferencias y los cursos de la 
Academia, la Fundacion se sentiria justificada en dar los ultimos pasos para su 
organization. No debo traspasar los limites de la conveniencia y pedir a vuestros 
gobiernos que participen en los trabajos de la Academia, pero puedo aseguraros 
que, con vuestra cooperation, la Academia llegara a ser una realidad, en vez de 
ser lo que ha sido durante muchos anos, un sueno, una esperanza, la aspiration de 
los publicistas de muchos y distantes paises. 



208 LA VISITA DL MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DLL SUR 

5. Comites Nacionales para la Tercera Conferencia de La Haya 

No es necesario llamar la atencion a los diplomaticos y delegados latino- 
americanos que tomaron una parte tan importante en la Segunda Conferencia 
de La Haya, sobre la necesidad de preparar bastante tiempo antes de la Tercera 
Conferencia los distintos pianos y proyectos que sus respectivos gobiernos piensen 
proponer. Es bien sabido que el trabajo de preparacion no se habia hecho de un 
modo satis factorio por todos los gobiernos que estuvieron representados en la 
Segunda Conferencia. Se cree que muchos proyectos fueron redactados en La 
Haya sin consultation con los gobiernos y que ocurrieron demoras para que estos 
pudieran recibir los proyectos que sus delegados deseaban presentar, y dar las 
instrucciones correspondientes. Es posible que la Conferencia no hubiera quedado 
en sesion durante tanto tiempo si se hubiera hecho la preparacion necesaria antes 
de la llegada de los delegados a La Haya, y que se hubiera evitado la tirantez 
que a veces se observaba, especialmente durante las ultimas semanas de la 
Conferencia. 

La Conferencia misma estuvo convencida de que, en el caso de celebrarse 
una tercera Conferencia, el programa debia redactarse con tiempo bastante antes 
de la fecha de la reunion y comunicarse a los Poderes, para que estos pudieran 
preparar los proyectos que quisieran presentar. El resultado de este sentimiento 
fue la aprobacion del siguiente acuerdo : 

"La Conferencia recomienda a los Poderes la reunion de una Tercera Con- 
ferencia de la Paz, que podria celebrarse dentro de un periodo analogo al transcu- 
rrido desde la Conferencia precedente, en una fecha que se fijara de comun 
acuerdo entre los Poderes, y se llama la atencion de los Poderes sobre la necesidad 
de preparar los trabajos de esta tercera Conferencia con bastante anticipation 
para que sus deliberaciones sigan con la autoridad y la rapidez indispensables. 

"Para conseguir este fin, la Conferencia cree que seria muy conveniente que 
como dos anos antes de la epoca probable de la reunion, un Comite Preparatorio 
reciba el encargo por parte de los gobiernos de la tarea de coleccionar las diferentes 
propuestas que han de someterse a la Conferencia, de averiguar cuales son los 
asuntos que estan listos para su inclusion en un reglamento internacional, y 
de preparar un programa que los gobiernos deben resolver en tiempo suficiente 
para permitir que se estudie cuidadosamente por los paises interesados. Este 
Comite tambien estaria encargado de proponer un modo de organization y pro- 
cedimiento para la Conferencia misma." 

La Conferencia por tanto recomendo que se convocara una tercera Con- 
ferencia, y como todos los Poderes estuvieron de acuerdo con el acuerdo es 
evidente que puede esperarse una tercera Conferencia. El Dr. Andrew D. White 
cita, en su interesante autobiografia, una conversation con Monsieur de Staal, 
Presidente de la Primera Conferencia, en la cual este dijo que era probable que 
en el seguiente afio se reuniera una segunda Conferencia. No hubo tal reunion, y 
trascurrieron ocho anos entre la primera y la segunda. Sin fijar epoca precisa, se 



APENDICE VII 209 

conviene que una tercera Conferencia debe reunirse aproximadamente ocho 
afios despues de la clausura de la segunda, es decir, alrededor del mil novecien- 
tos quince. La fecha precisa de la reunion debe fijarse por comun acuerdo entre 
los Poderes, y para que estos tengan tiempo suficiente para prepararse, se propuso 
que unos dos afios antes de la reunion se nombrara un Comite Preparatorio para 
averiguar cuales son los asuntos que pueden ser objeto de un convenio inter- 
nacional y para preparar un programa con bastante anticipacion para que sea 
estudiado cuidadosamente por los Poderes. 

Si han de llevarse a la practica las recomendaciones de la Conferencia, es 
evidente que deben darse pasos durante el afio actual para formar este Comite 
Preparatorio. En cuanto se sepa, los gobiernos no han resuelto que la Tercera 
Conferencia se reuna en mil novecientos quince, ni han convenido en ninguna 
otra fecha determinada, pero es de esperarse que, si la reunion no se convoca 
para el mil novecientos quince, se celebrara pronto despues de dicho afio, porque 
sin duda la opinion publica sera tan insistente como ocurrio antes de la reunion de 
la Segunda Conferencia. De todos modos, es evidente que el Comite Preparatorio 
tiene un encargo muy dificil y que necesita toda la luz que pueda recibir de 
todas partes del mundo. 

Ahora bien, es claro que una responsabilidad muy seria descansa sobre 
cada uno de los gobiernos que fueron invitados a la Segunda Conferencia y 
que sin duda seran invitados a la Tercera Conferencia, porque tanto el exito 
de la Conferencia como la forma y el caracter del programa dependen de la 
cooperacion de los gobiernos. Hay veintiuna Republicas americanas, y veinte 
de ellas son las que generalmente se llaman las Republicas latinoamericanas. 
Es decir, la America Latina constituye casi la mitad de las naciones invitadas 
o que realmente participan en la Conferencia, y como cada nation tiene un voto, 
salta a la vista que la America Latina por la mera fuerza de los numeros, y aparte 
de su importancia intelectual, puede hacer mucho para determinar la naturaleza 
y el contenido del programa. Este hecho impone una gran responsabilidad 
a los representantes americanos, porque el derecho y el deber son terminos cor- 
relativos. 

Suponiendo que la Conferencia se celebre en 1915 o 1916, y qu se 
forme un Comite Preparatorio de los Poderes unos dos afios antes de la fecha 
de la reunion, los gobiernos que fueron invitados a la Segunda Conferencia 
debieran dar pasos para formular sus ideas y tenerlas listas para ser presentadas 
al Comite Preparatorio en cuanto este sea constituido. <;Cual es la mejor manera 
de hacer preparaciones para la Tercera Conferencia ? Muchos gobiernos europeos 
han nombrado pequefios comites nacionales para considerar los asuntos que sus 
respectivos gobiernos quisieran ver incluidos en el programa, como tambien para 
formular y dar expresion a opiniones sobre los demas asuntos comprendidos en 
el acuerdo. El Sr. Elihu Root me ha encargado que haga la indication de 
que cada pais americano nombre un comite nacional para la consideration de 
posibles contribuciones al programa de la proxima Conferencia de La Haya, 



210 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

y que se trate tambien de que estos comites en toda la America se comuniquen 
entre si. Esta indication se hace en la esperanza de que la encuentren buena los 
distintos paises que tengo el honor de visitar. No quiere decir que los paises 
americanos deban ponerse de acuerdo sobre un programa comun y que este sea 
presentado al Comite Internacional como la opinion del Hemisferio Occidental; 
sino que creemos que hoy como siempre hay acierto en una multitud de consejos. 
Paso a la cuestion del nombramiento del Comite Preparatorio Internacional, 
porque es asunto de gran importancia en el cual debe oirse la voz de America. 
Si bien es verdad que el Comite Internacional presentara su informe a las 
naciones en general y que estas en ultima instancia aceptaran o rechazaran el 
programa, sin embargo es muy probable que la recomendacion de este Comite 
sea adoptada, de modo que el programa de la Tercera Conferencia en realidad 
no sera redactado por los Poderes en consulta, sino por los miembros del Comite 
Preparatorio. i Como se compondra este Comite Internacional ? £ Tendra repre- 
sentantes de los Poderes grandes y de algunos de los pequefios? En tal caso 
I quien escogera los Poderes ? Es este un asunto muy dif icil y que merece estudio 
serio. Bien se sabe que el Presidente Roosevelt tomo la iniciativa para llevar a 
cabo le runion de la Segunda Conferencia. Es un hecho, sin embargo, que el 
programa fue redactado por Rusia despues de consultar con varios Poderes que 
quiso consultar, pero pareceria mas respetuoso para los Poderes participantes, y 
mas importante para el mismo programa, que se solicitara a todos que contribuye- 
ran sus indicaciones sobre la formation del programa y no solo que ratifiquen un 
"fait accompli." Creo que la practica de las Republicas americanas podria servir de 
ejemplo a los paises en general. Me refiero a la Union Panamericana, a la cual 
pertenecen todos los Estados americanos, y a su Junta Gubernativa, que se corn- 
pone de los represtantes diplomaticos de todas las Republicas latinoamericanas 
bajo la presidencia del Secretario de Estado de los Estados Unidos. Es la practica 
de la Junta referir los asuntos importantes a pequefios comites para su estudio e 
informe ; el pequeno comite no tiene f acultades propias : solo somete a la Junta 
el resultado de sus trabajos y en su caso hace alguna recomendacion. Ahora bien, 
el Consejo Administrativo del Tribunal Permanente de La Haya se compone de 
los agentes diplomaticos de los distintos paises representados en La Haya, bajo 
la presidencia del Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores de Holanda. En vista de 
que el programa para la Tercera Conferencia interesa a todas las naciones tal 
como el programa de las Conferencias Panamericanas interesa a todas las Repu- 
blicas americanas, podria muy bien, por convenio entre los Poderes, dotarse a dicho 
Consejo Administrativo, compuesto de los representantes de los Poderes, de los 
deberes y funciones del Comite Preparatorio Internacional: en otras palabras, 
que dicho Consejo sea el Comite Internacional y que tenga f acultades para nombrar 
un pequeno comite que se podria llamar comite ejecutivo — un comite de examen 
o de estudio, que considerara los asuntos mencionados en el acuerdo y presentara 
sus informes-y recomendaciones al Consejo Administrativo. Un comite pequeno 
podria formarse sin dificultad, porque tales comites se nombraron a menudo 



APENDICE VII 211 

durante la Segunda Conferencia de La Haya sin que resultara ninguna tirantez. 
Los miembros de tal comite indudablemente consultarian con sus gobiernos y asi 
los proyectos informados ya tendrian el apoyo de algunos paises, y los demas 
miembros del Consejo probablemente estarian al tanto de los trabajos del sub- 
comite, o, en todo caso, podrian someter los informes del comite a sus respectivos 
gobiernos y pedir instrucciones. Es probable que pudieran celebrarse reuniones 
frequentes del Consejo para oir informes del comite, porque el cuerpo diplomatico 
reside en La Haya y sus miembros se encuentran constantemente y sostienen rela- 
ciones amistosas. Asi los gobiernos representados en La Haya quedarian siempre 
al tanto de los trabajos de los comites. 

Pudiera quizas haber una objecion a este plan, porque aunque cuarenticuatro 
Estados estuvieron representados en la Segunda Conferencia, solo treinticuatro 
tienen representantes diplomaticos en La Haya. A esta objecion podria con- 
testarse que los paises sin representation podrian nombrar agentes diplomaticos, 
o podrian recibir los informes del comite, del Ministro de Relaciones Exteriores 
de Holanda, como Presidente del Consejo Administrative, y trasmitirle sus 
opiniones. 

No lo considero conveniente tratar de enumerar los asuntos que han de 
incluirse en el programa, porque sobre eso tendran que decidir los Ministerios de 
Relaciones Exteriores. Puedo advertir sin embargo, que la Segunda Conferencia 
considero como trabajos no concluidos los proyectos de la Primera, y que sin 
duda, la Tercera Conferencia considerara como trabajos no concluidos los acuer- 
dos provisionales y recomendaciones de la Segunda. Ademas, la Segunda Con- 
ferencia reviso las convenciones de su predecesora a la luz de la experiencia y 
reflexion mas madura, y es de presumirse que la Tercera Conferencia sometera 
los trabajos de su ilustrada predecesora a examen, critica y modification. Es muy 
probable que se incluyan en el programa: 

i. Un tratado general de arbitraje en que los Poderes convengan en el arbi- 
traje generalmente, con las reservas acostumbradas, o en arbitrar listas de asuntos 
determinados a los que no se apliquen las reservas. 

2. El establecimiento definitivo de un Tribunal de Justicia Arbitral, escogien- 
dose un metodo de componerlo que sea agradable a todos los Estados. 

3. La consideration de la Declaration de Londres sobre tribunales de presa, 
porque apenas puede esperarse que los treinta y pico de Poderes no representados 
en Londres estaran dispuestos, por medio de la aceptacion de la Declaracidn, a 
considerar los diez Poderes que redactaron el documento como sus representantes 
para este o cualquier otro objeto. 

Tambien me permito llamar vuestra atencion sobre el hecho de que el Instituto 
de Derecho Internacional nombro un comite especial para considerar los asuntos 
que convendria discutir en la proxima Conferencia de la Paz y adopto la siguiente 
lista : 



212 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

1. Elaboration de los reglamentos referentes a las leyes y costumbres de la 
guerra maritima en las relaciones entre beligerantes. 

2. Creation de un Tribunal de Justicia Arbitral. 

3. Un tratado general de arbitraje. 

4. Elaboration de los reglamentos referentes a una organization permanente 
de la Conferencia de la Paz. 

5. Extension de la Convention de 18 de octubre de 1907, sobre apertura de 
hostilidades, para que cubra todas las agendas internacionales de coercion en 
general. 

6. Determination de la faja maritima y reglamentacion de su esfera. 

7. Los efectos de la guerra sobre los derechos privados de individuos na- 
tionals de los Estados beligerantes. 

8. Reglamentos referentes a barcos aereos en tiempo de guerra. 

9. Reglamentos referentes a faros en tiempo de guerra. 

10. El valor de laudos arbitrales con relation a las jurisdicciones y autori- 
dades nacionales. 

11. Inmunidades diplomaticas y consulares. 

12. Competencia de los tribunals con referencia a Estados extrangeros. 

Es muy importante que las Republicas americanas estudien los asuntos que 
han de incluirse en el programa y formulen proyectos para su presentation y 
discusion en la Conferencia, porque no es suficiente que las republicas tan solo 
sean invitadas a la Conferencia y participen en ella. America debe contribuir al 
resultado y solo puede hacerlo en debida forma si se ha estudiado bien el pro- 
grama y los proyectos han sido considerados y redactados con anticipation a la 
reunion de la Conferencia. 

Pero existe otro punto de vista desde el cual debe estudiarse el asunto y que 
justificaria en alto grado los nombramientos de comites nacionales sin referencia a 
la influencia de tales comites sobre los trabajos del Comite Preparatorio. La cues- 
tion de actitud es de importancia fundamental al considerar la conferencia interna- 
tional, porque no es de presumirse que los intereses nacionales revestan la misma 
importancia en una conferencia international que tienen en el pais respectivo. 
Por lo tanto, una nation que participe en una conferencia international debe con- 
siderar, no solo hasta que punto puede conseguir la aceptacion de sus opiniones 
nacionales, sino hasta que punto le es posible, en interes del bien comun, sacrificar 
sus opiniones nacionales e intereses particulares, o hasta que punto puede aceptar 
una transaction cuando sea absolutamente imposible ceder. Considerado sola- 
mente desde este punto de vista, creese que los comites nacionales prestarian un 
servicio real a sus respectivos paises. 

Ha sido la opinion de distinguidos publicistas que se ha hecho mas progreso 
efectivo en el desarrollo del Derecho internacional desde la reunion de la Primera 
Conferencia que en el intervalo entre dicha fecha y el Congreso de Westphalia. 



APENDICE VII 213 

Esto puede o no ser verdad, pero creese que la reunion de dicha Conferencia y 
la reunion de conferencias posteriores, fue y sera de mayor importancia que 
cualesquiera convenciones celebradas, declaraciones adoptadas, resoluciones con- 
venidas o recomendaciones hechas en cualquiera epoca. La importancia de la 
Primera Conferencia, aparte de su trabajo, consiste en el hecho de que veintiseis 
naciones estaban dispuestas a reunirse y discutir cuestiones de interes general, 
diferenciado de los intereses particulares. La importancia que revistio la Segunda 
Conferencia, a la cual, debido a la insistencia del Sr. Root, fueron invitados todos 
los paises latinoamericanos, fue que practicamente todas las naciones del mundo 
se reunieron en conferencia en La Haya y por cuatro meses sus representantes se 
encontraron dentro de cuatro muros, ocupados en las discusiones pacificas referen- 
tes a proyectos grandes y benevolos, muchos de los cuales lograron presentar en 
una forma aceptable, y los delegados individuales se vieron tan impresionados por 
el resultado de su reunion que recomendaron la celebracion de una tercera Confe- 
fencia por unanimidad. En sus instrucciones a los delegados norteamericanos 
de la Segunda Conferencia de La Haya, el Secretario Root decia : 

Los resultados inmediatos de una conferencia de esta indole deben 
siempre limitarse a una pequefia parte del campo que los mas confiados 
esperaban ver cubierto; pero cada conferencia posterior tomara como su 
punto de partida las posiciones a que llego la conferencia anterior, y traera 
al estudio de adelantos nuevos hacia acuerdos internacionales opiniones 
influenciadas por la aceptacion de los acuerdos anteriores. Cada conferencia 
debe inevitablemente adelantar y, por pasos sucesivos, podran obtenerse 
resultados que antes habian parecido imposibles. 

Debeis siempre acordaros del fomento de este procedimiento continuo 
por medio del cual podra adelantarse el desarrollo progresivo de la justicia 
y de la paz internacionales ; y debeis considerar la obra de la Segunda Con- 
ferencia no solo con referencia a los resultados definitivos que han de 
obtenerse de dicha Conferencia, sino tambien con referencia a los cimientos 
que se coloquen para resultados adicionales en conferencias futuras. Es 
posible que entre los servicios mas valiosos prestados a la civilization por 
esta Segunda Conferencia encontrarase el progreso obtenido en los asuntos 
sobre los cuales los delegados no puedan convenir definitivamente. 

Y comentando sobre el resultado de la Segunda Conferencia, decia : 

Permitaseme ir mas alia de los limites de una carta formal de trans- 
mision acostumbrada y decir que es mi opinion que la obra de la Segunda 
Conferencia de La Haya, comprendida especialmente en estas convenciones, 
presenta el mayor adelanto que jamas se ha hecho de un golpe hacia el 
arreglo razonable y pacifico de la conducta international, a menos que sea 
el adelanto logrado en la Conferencia de La Haya de 1899. 

El resultado mas valioso de la Conferencia de 1899 consistio en que 
hizo posible la obra de la Conferencia de 1907. Los resultados obtenidos por 
las Conferencias justifican la creencia de que el mundo ha iniciado un pro- 
cedimiento ordenado por el cual, paso a paso, en conferencias posteriores, 
cada una de ellas emprendiendo la obra de su predecesora como punto de 
partida, pueda haber un progreso constante hacia el fin de conseguir que la 
practica de las naciones civilizadas se conforme con sus profesiones pacificas. 



214 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 



6. El Instituto Americano de Derecho International y las Sociedades 
Nacionales de Derecho International 

Ubi societas, ibi jus. Donde hay una sociedad de naciones, existe el Derecho 
internacional. A medida que crece o cambia la Sociedad, ese derecho se desarrolla 
o modifica para adaptarse a las nuevas y distintas condiciones de la Sociedad. 
Una nation no puede existir y llenar su mision separadamente y aparte de la 
sociedad, como tampoco el hombre puede vivir aislado. Eso siempre ha sido 
asi en todas las epocas que se registran en la historia, y es esto tan evidente que 
Aristoteles dijo que el hombre es un animal politico, porque los hombres tienden 
a formar una sociedad, ya sea grande o pequeha, y a organizarse en grande o 
pequeha escala para un fin politico. El niho nace en la sociedad, crece y prospera 
en la obediencia y bajo la protection de la ley. 

Asi como sucede respecto del hombre, asi sucede respecto de la Nation. 
No puede existir para si y por si sola ; es una unidad politica, si hemos de seguir 
la frase aristotelica un cuerpo politico, o una persona moral, si hemos de emplear 
el lenguaje de nuestros dias. Es miembro de la sociedad de las naciones que ha 
resultado naturalmente de la mera existencia de tales naciones y de las necesidades 
de sus relaciones mutuas, y de una ley que regule y gobierne tales relaciones, 
porque dondequiera que hay una sociedad hay y debe haber una ley, o la nation 
fue admitida como miembro de la sociedad de las naciones, y asi ha sucedido con 
todos los paises del Continente americano, al ser reconocidos o al solicitar ser 
miembros de la sociedad internacional de acuerdo con el Derecho internacional, 
que es la ley de la sociedad de las naciones. Al llegar a ser miembro de esa 
sociedad, cada nation adquiere en igual grado los mismos derechos que poseen las 
demas. Cada nation es igual de acuerdo con la ley y el derecho, y al mismo tiempo 
queda sujeta a las obligaciones que impone la ley, porque los derechos y los deberes 
son terminos correlativos. El derecho de una de ellas es el derecho de las demas ; 
el deber de cada una es respetar los derchos de todas. Por lo tanto es necesario 
deducir que si una nation es igual a cada una de las demas, cada una es indepen- 
diente de las otras y de todas ellas, y la igualdad e independencia legales son 
derechos inherentes y fundamentals de las naciones, sin los cuales no pueden 
existir, y el respeto a la igualdad e independencia de cada una es tambien inherente 
y fundamental. Pero la independencia no significa ni puede significar el 
derecho y la facultad de obrar sin referenda a los demas miembros de la 
sociedad ; porque el dejar de respetar los derechos de los demas es la infraction 
de un deber; y si esto no se impidiese daria por resultado la anarquia, la cual 
es incompatible no solo con el progreso y bienestar de los miembros de la 
sociedad, sino tambien con la existencia real y permanente de sus miembros. 
Tal estado de cosas es imposible entre los hombres, por mas flojos que sean los 
lazos de union que los agrupe en una comunidad; es igualmente imposible 
entre las naciones. Estas son miembros de la misma sociedad, reconocen y 
aplican los principios del derecho, que proviene de la naturaleza de - las cosas 



APENDICE VII 215 

que han tornado forma definida, debido a las costumbres y practica de las 
naciones y por medio del reconocimiento tacito o expreso de los derechos y 
deberes de las naciones, consideradas como miembros iguales de la sociedad 
internacional. Estamos muy distantes del estado o condition que Hobbes definiera 
como un helium omnium contra omnes, aunque el Derecho internacional no se 
ha desarrollado a tal grado ni es tan adecuado como las leyes internas o 
municipales de todos y cada uno de los miembros de la sociedad de las naciones. 

Aunque podemos aceptar el principio de igualdad sin restricciones, debemos 
considerar la independencia en el sentido de que una nacion no puede ni debe 
obrar libremente infringiendo los derechos de las demas naciones, tal como los 
hombres individualmente renuncian a su libertad absoluta de action, para que 
sus derechos, asi como los de los demas, sean observados y protegidos. La 
independencia natural imperceptiblemente llega a ser interdependencia, aunque 
sin poner en duda la igualdad de cada nacion y su derecho a hallarse libre de 
ingerencia por parte de las demas. 

El ejercicio de derechos extremos no se anuncia en beneficio de ninguna 
nacion, ni a instancia de nacion alguna, sino en beneficio comun y bienestar de 
todos los Estados. 

Sin tratar de probar lo que es obvio, es decir, que todos Estados son iguales, 
— el Presidente del Tribunal Supremo de los Estados Unidos, John Marshall, en 
un famoso fallo de dicho tribunal dijo que Ginebra y Rusia tenian derechos 
iguales — y que todos los Estados son y deben ser independientes en el sentido 
de que ningun Estado posee al derecho de dirigir los destinos de ninguna nacion 
ni obstaculizar sus actos, por mas pequefia que sea dicha nacion o por mas 
reducida que sea su poblacion, naturalmente surge la siguiente cuestion : 

iCual es esta ley de la sociedad de las naciones que todas ellas reconocen 
o deben aplicar en sus relaciones con los demas miembros de esa sociedad de 
las naciones? Sin tratar de defmirla — pues mi actual proposito es referirme 
a su existencia y a la necesidad de tal existencia, — puede decirse que la referida 
ley es el Derecho internacional, que ha nacido para llenar las necesidades de las 
naciones. Anteriormente lo poseian unos cuantos — los canonistas y los filosofos, 
los juristas y los estadistas, — pero ahora ya pertenece a muchos. Ya no se 
tiene que buscar exclusivamente entre los usos y costumbres de las naciones 
y en los archivos de los departamentos de Relaciones Exteriores ; en la actualidad 
existe en forma sistematica, en las obras de Wheaton, si hemos de hacer referencia 
a una autoridad de los Estados Unidos, y en el tratado magistral y completo 
de Calvo, si es que hemos de citar un tratado autorizado de un autor suramericano, 
y en las obras de muchos otros distinguidos escritores. 

El Derecho internacional era de la competencia especial de los departamentos 
de Relaciones Exteriores en tiempos pasados y en las epocas de gobiernos auto- 
craticos o de los pocos escogidos que gobernaban la nacion y dirigian esas 
relaciones exteriores, siendo responsables a un gobernante irresponsable, y por 
eso quizas no era tan necesario que se estudiase el Derecho de gentes, para 



216 LA V1SITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

hacer uso del termino antiguo, ni que sus principios fueran bien conocidos por 
la mayoria. Pero en los ultimos cien afios se ha efectuado un cambio en 
el mundo. El gobernante irresponsable del pasado es el soberano o presidente 
responsable de la actualidad. Hoy dia en cada imperio, reino o republica, el 
gobernante, ya sea hereditario, ya electivo, es responsable al pueblo, en cuyo 
beneficio siempre ha de administrarse el gobierno. El pueblo de cada pals 
ha llegado a ser dueno de la situation, y para hacer uso de una expresion familiar 
es preciso instruir a nuestros superiores, no solamente en cuanto a sus derechos, 
acerca de los cuales ya tienen bastante conocimiento, sino respecto de sus obliga- 
ciones, sobre las cuales todos necesitamos ser instruidos. Para determinar 
debidamente la politica exterior de nuestro gobierno y para comprender que 
dirige sus relaciones exteriores de acuerdo con los principios del Derecho inter- 
nacional, como debe ser y seguira siendo cada dia mas y mas, debemos conocer 
los principios de ese derecho que tienen que ser aplicados. El pueblo posee 
la facultad y tiene al deber de ejercer influencia en las relaciones exteriores, 
y como el pueblo al fin y al cabo es responsable del mane jo exacto e ilustrado 
de las relaciones exteriores y tiene que sufrir los errores de su gobierno, resulta 
necesaria y fatalmente que debe prepararse en debida forma para su respon- 
sabilidad, que no puede eludir, por medio de un conocimiento amplio e ilustrado 
de los principios del Derecho internacional. 

No es suficiente que los diplomaticos comprendan el sistema ; es indispensable 
que la gran mayoria conozca, caso de que tenga que resolver las cuestiones 
internacionales, los principios en virtud de los cuales pueden ser resueltas en 
su debida oportunidad. No es suficiente que se ensefie el Derecho internacional 
en las universidades, porque debe hacerse conocer a muchos mas que no van a 
las universidades, y que a pesar de eso poseen el derecho y por lo tanto la respon- 
sabilidad del sufragio. 

No debe esperarse que cada votante sea un licenciado en Derecho inter- 
nacional, ni es preciso que lo sea. Es sumamente importante, sin embargo, que 
grandes grupos del pueblo tomen interes en la ley que rige las relaciones inter- 
nacionales, y por medio de la cual se determinan los derechos y obligaciones de 
las naciones. Solo por medio de un conocimiento del Derecho internacional puede 
formarse una opinion publica adecuada sobre cuestiones de politica exterior, y 
como la opinion publica determina toda politica extranjera, es evidente que 
el conocimiento de los principios del Derecho internacional debe hallarse 
diseminado lo suficientemente para que forme una opinion publica, sobre bases 
ilustradas, en todas y cada una de las naciones que pertenecen a la sociedad de 
tales naciones. 

He usado la frase sociedad de las naciones como mas exacta y significativa 
que la de la familia de las naciones, pero en un sentido mas amplio la idea 
de una familia es de especial y recta aplicacion a las veintiuna Republicas del 
Nuevo Mundo, con igual origen, con sistemas parecidos de gobierno y con 
identicas esperanzas y aspiraciones. Debemos poner nuestra casa en orden, 



APENDICE VII 217 

debemos resolver nuestros propios problemas, debemos regular nuestras rela- 
ciones exteriores — ya casi iba a decir nuestras propias relaciones de familia — si 
queremos influenciar a las naciones del Vie jo Mundo, que, como el termino medio 
de los hombres, se ven mas influenciadas por la practica que por el precepto. 

Limitandonos al que puede llamarse problema americano, icomo podremos 
desarrollar el Derecho internacional de modo que responda a las necesidades 
crecientes de las veintiuna Republicas americanas; como podremos formular 
las reglas de derecho necasarias para decidir nuestros problemas ; como podremos 
conducir nuestras relaciones mutuas de modo que no perjudiquen ni turben la 
harmonia que debe existir entre los paises del mismo continente, y como podremos 
esparcir el conocimiento de estos asuntos entre las clases que forman la opinion 
publica en cada una de la veintiuna Republicas americanas? 

Debemos demostrar nuestro profundo agradecimiento porque las relaciones 
del pasado hayan sido favorables a nuestro continente y que nuestras relaciones 
actuales se encuentren en perfecta harmonia; por lo tanto debemos esperar que 
esas buenas relaciones no solamente subsistan siempre, sino que con el tiempo 
se vayan fortaleciendo y que anualmente nuestras relaciones sean mas intimas, 
mas cordiales, en fin, mas fraternales, como corresponde a los miembros de una 
gran familia que tiene un destino comun en el mismo continente. 

Es de esperarse que las Conferencias Panamericanas continuen, que se 
inaugure el intercambio de profesores y de estudiantes periodicamente y sin inter- 
ruption, que se conozcan generalmente las instituciones de cada pais y lo 
que cada uno contribuye al bien comun, y que las visitas de hombres de repre- 
sentation lleguen a establecer relaciones sociales, para que la amistad y la simpatia 
suplanten a la animosidad, si es que esta existe, y para que se inicie una era de 
buena inteligencia ; pero las relaciones de las naciones, consideradas como tales, 
dependen del conocimiento y de la diseminacion de justos principios de derecho 
y de su aplicacion a las disputas que no pueden dejar de surgir entre los miembros 
de la misma familia, y algunas veces precisamente porque son miembros de la 
misma familia. 

iComo puede desarrollarse este derecho segun debe serlo para responder 
a las variantes o crecientes necesidades de las Republicas americanas, y resolver 
los problemas comunes a America, o que son mas prominentes en America que 
en ninguna otra parte? iComo pueden diseminarse estos principios, una vez 
que hayan sido formulados? De las respuestas a estas preguntas dependen en 
gran medida las futuras relaciones entre los paises americanos. 

Esta por demas decir que una ley para afectar a todos, tiene que ser hecha 
por todos, es decir, tiene que ser el resultado de la cooperation de todos. El 
Derecho internacional, segun dijo una vez el Presidente del Tribunal Supremo, 
Marshall, en efecto, no es el derecho de ninguna nation sola ; no lo hace ninguna 
nation sola, no lo impone ninguna nation sola y no puede ser cambiado por 
ninguna nation sola. Si tiene que ser formulado por todas las naciones en 
conjunto, <:c6mo han de colaborar las naciones a ese fin? Y si nos referimos 



218 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

solamente a las Republicas americanas, <;c6mo han de colaborar ellas en el 
desarrollo del Derecho internacional y como ha de popularizarse ese derecho de 
modo que afecte o establezca la opinion publica en cada uno de los paises 
americanos ? 

El derecho puede ser codificado en donde existe, y puede ser creado en 
donde no existe, por la accion de los gobiernos, tal como tratan de hacerlo 
las Republicas americanas, habiendose empezado ya el trabajo correspondiente 
en una reunion de juristas americanos celebrada en Rio de Janeiro en Junio de 
1912. Pero los gobiernos se mueven despacio, y cuando se mueven con demasiada 
rapidez y adelantandose a la opinion publica, su obra no es duradera. «;No 
seria conveniente una cooperation particular, es decir, cientifica entre los pub- 
licists de America? 

Un cuerpo, particular en Europa, el Instituto de Derecho Internacional, 
fundado en 1873 por indicaciones de un distinguido norteamericano, Francis 
Lieber, aunque no vivio para verlo ya establecido, y del cual el distinguido 
suramericano, Calvo, fue uno de sus fundadores y mas distinguidos socios, ha 
hecho mas que cualquiera otra fuerza aislada para desarrollar el Derecho inter- 
nacional. Sus proyectos sobre varias fases del Derecho internacional, sus 
acuerdos, sus declaraciones del derecho antiguo y del moderno, han sido aceptados 
por los especialistas y sus distintas proposciones han sido aceptadas por los 
gobiernos en virtud de su valor practico. Paulatina y cuidadosamente, cientifica- 
mente y sin errar, ha resuelto problema tras problema y producido modelo 
tras modelo de correcta codificacion. Una gran parte de sus trabajos fue 
adoptada por las Conferencias de La Haya, especialmente el codigo de pro- 
cedimiento arbitral, el codigo de guerra terrestre, sus indicaciones sobre un 
tribunal de presas maritimas, y hasta podria decirse que hizo posible el trabajo 
de La Haya. Preparo el camino y suministro proyectos que pudieron ser 
aceptados con pocas y ligeras modificaciones por las Conferencias. La labor 
cuidadosa de una sociedad sin caracter oficial, compuesta de publicistas que 
representan la ciencia y no los gobiernos, suministro no solamente la forma 
sino aun la sustancia a la Conferencia oficial. No puede ponerse en duda que 
a una codificacion oficial del Derecho internacional debe preceder el interes 
y la labor cuidadosa, paciente e inconspicua de hombres de ciencia, si la codifica- 
cion ha de comprender justos principios del derecho que puedan ser adoptados 
por la sociedad de las naciones en lugar de transacciones sobre intereses opuestos 
e ideas de los gobiernos, que, por medio de delegados oficiales con instrucciones, 
codifican en todo o en parte el Derecho internacional. En todo caso, la accion 
cientifica y sin caracter oficial debe preceder o acompanar a la codificacion oficial. 

iNo creeis que seria oportuno y adecuado el establecimiento de un Instituto 
Americano de Derecho Internacional, compuesto de un numero igual de pub- 
licistas de cada uno de los paises americanos, el cual representara la conciencia 
al igual que la habilidad de America, y el cual podria hacer respecto de nuestro 
continente lo que el Instituto mas antiguo ha hecho por el mundo en los ultimos 



APENDICE VII 219 

cuarenta anos? 4 No podria tal Instituto Americano trabajar en harmonia 
intima con sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional establecidas en las 
capitales americanas que dieran a conocer las deliberaciones del Instituto Ameri- 
cano y cooperaran en sus labores y discusiones? 4N0 podrian estas sociedades 
nacionales atraer y unir a todas las personas interesadas en el Derecho inter- 
nacional, crear tal interes donde no existe y formar un centro en cada pais 
para el estudio de ese Derecho internacional y para hacerlo popular? 

Asi lo creyeron dos publicistas americanos, el uno chileno, doctor Alejandro 
Alvarez y el otro norteamericano, doctor James Brown Scott, quienes despues 
de conferenciar con otros distinguidos publicistas del continente y recibir su 
aprobacion, establecieron el Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional. Asi 
lo creyeron los miembros del Instituto antiguo, segun queda demostrado por 
su caluroso y entusiasta elogio de la proposicion, hecha en declaraciones formales 
por escrito, dadas a la publicidad en un folleto que contiene los Estatutos y 
Reglamento del nuevo Instituto y los demas documentos relatives a su forma- 
tion. Y asi lo cree el distinguido estadista norteamericano, Elihu Root, que ha 
aceptado la presidencia honoraria del Instituto. 

Mr. Root tomo parte en la organization del nuevo Instituto y ha prometido 
prestarle su poderosa protection y apoyo y como presidente honorario que es 
de el le da el prestigio de su nombre y reputation. 

En un discurso pronunciado al abrirse el Vigesimo Congreso de la Paz en 
La Haya durante el mes de agosto, el eminente publicista holandes, Profesor 
de Louter, hizo referencia a tres acontecimientos alentadores e importantes de 
fecha reciente, siendo los tres de origen americano. El primero fue la codifica- 
tion del Derecho internacional propuesta por las Conferencias Panamericanas e 
iniciada por el Congreso de Juristas Americanos que se reunio en Rio de Janeiro 
en junio de 1912; el segundo fue el establecimiento y utilidad en perspectiva 
del Instituto Americano de Derecho Internacional, propuesto y llevado a efecto 
por la feliz colaboracion de publicistas de la America del Norte y de la del Sur; 
el tercero fue la creation y la proyectada obra de la Fundacion Carnegie para la 
Paz Internacional. 

Permitaseme repetir lo que ha dicho sob re el Instituto Americano el Profesor 
de Louter, observador extranjero y por lo tanto enteramente desapasionado : 

Un instituto esencialmente cientifico, mas apenas inferior en valor 
moral, nos proporciona el segundo ejemplo. El acercamiento gradual entre 
el Norte y el Sur han creado un nuevo instrumento de progreso. Los 
proyectos de una union panamericana, que han sido lanzados desde mucho 
tiempo sin jamas tener efecto, han dado por fin un resultado en el terreno 
apacible de los estudios, gracias al talento y a la perseverancia de dos 
hombres ilustrados de las dos mitades del hemisferio. En el curso del afio 
pasado el senor James Brown Scott, el renombrado jurisconsulto y pacifista 
de los Estados Unidos, y el senor Alejandro Alvarez, antiguo profesor 
y consejero del Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores en Chile, que en junio 
de 1912 habia ejercido una influencia en alto grado saludable en Rio sobre 



220 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

el gran proyecto de la codificacion, despues de una entrevista personal en 
Washington, fundaron alii en Octubre de 1913 el "Institute Americano de 
Derecho Internacional". Este Instituto tiene por fin : Primero, contribuir 
al desarrollo del Derecho internacional ; segundo, consolidar el sentimiento 
comum de una justicia internacional; tercero, hacer aceptar en todas partes 
la accion pacifica en el arreglo de las controversias internacionales entre los 
Estados americanos. Esta idea luminosa nacio de la conviccion de que vale 
mas propagar las nociones del derecho y de la justicia por medio de una 
infusion lenta pero constante en los cerebros y los corazones de los pueblos 
que por medio de negociaciones diplomaticas que no descansan sobre un 
sentimiento popular general. 

Si se toma en consideration que el movimiento pacifista en America es 
mucho mas universal que en otras partes y que descansa sea sobre un fondo 
religioso, sea sobre una comunidad de intereses y de tendencias digna de 
envidia, se sabra apreciar esta nueva prueba de un progreso vigoroso que nos 
ha llegado del otro lado del mar; ella reanima nuestra esperanza y redobla 
nuestros esfuerzos. 

Hagamos ahora una breve referencia a las sociedades nacionales que deben 
formarse y afiliarse al Instituto, cuyos miembros seran escogidos de entre los 
miembros de las sociedades nacionales, cuyos miembros son de pleno derecho 
asociados del Instituto y participan en sus labores cientificas al inscribirse como 
tales y pagar la moderada cuota anual correspondiente. Al fundarse el antiguo 
Instituto se pensaba en las sociedades nacionales, pero de hecho no se formo 
ninguna hasta que se hubo establecido el Instituto Americano. En febrero del 
aiio en curso se fundo la Sociedad Francesa de Derecho Internacional, debido 
segun se cree, a la existencia y magnificos resultados de la Sociedad Americana 
de Derecho Internacional, y a las disposiciones del Instituto Americano. 

Los fines de la Sociedad Francesa, seguh el primer Boletin que ha publicado, 
son los siguientes : 

i°. Desarrollar el conocimiento y el estudio, en Francia, del Derecho 
internacional; 2°. coordinar los esfuerzos y aunar las opiniones de los juris- 
consultos franceses, aproximando, en un mutuo cambio de ideas, a todos 
aquellos que se interesen en el Derecho internacional, publico y privado; 
3 . dar a la opinion piiblica una idea precisa y neta de la obra emprendida 
en el dominio cientifico por el Instituto de Derecho Internacional, en el 
dominio practico por las Conferencias de Derecho internacional privado y 
las Conferencias de la Paz de La Haya, y coadyuvar, con todas sus fuerzas, 
al progreso de esta obra, en conformidad con las tradiciones, sentimientos e 
intereses de Francia. 

He preferido exponer los fines de la Sociedad Francesa ya que la influencia 
de Europa suponese tener mayor fuerza entre nosotros en America que los prece- 
dentes americanos. Si una sociedad nacional es necesaria y puede realizar 
trabajos utiles en Francia, es justo suponer que tambien podria formarse una 
sociedad nacional en cada una de las Republicas americanas, y que su existencia 
estaria plenamente justificada por los trabajos utiles e importantes que podria 
llevar a efecto. La sociedad francesa publica un boletin modesto, que se distribuye 



APENDICE VII 221 

a los socios para mantenerlos imformados de los trabajos de la Sociedad y en 
contacto con ella y lo mismo podria hacer cada sociedad americana, y el 
intercambio de los boletines daria a conocer a todas las sociedades nacionales 
los trabajos realizados por las demas, asi como por los miembros de la Sociedad 
que publica el boletin. El Instituto Americano no tendria que fundar ni sostener 
una nueva revista voluminosa y extensa, por que la Revista Americana de Derecho 
Internacional, publicada actualmente por la sociedad norteamericana en espanol 
y en ingles, podria modificarse de tal manera que llegara a ser el organo del Insti- 
tuto sin gastos para este. Seria repartida entre los miembros del Instituto y los 
de las sociedades nacionales, y asi la Sociedad Internacional tendria una revista 
internacional y cada sociedad nacional un boletin nacional. De esta manera todos 
los que trabajan en el campo de las relaciones internacionales en toda la America 
conocerian los trabajos realizados por la Sociedad internacional, asi como de los 
llevados a efecto por cada sociedad nacional y quedarian en contacto intimo y 
estrecho por medio de la revista y de los boletines. En vez de trabajar aislada- 
mente, todos seguiriari unidos con un fin comun, y el Derecho internacional se 
desarrollaria y se haria popular por todas las naciones de un continente, en vez de 
serlo por los esfuerzos de unos cuantos espiritus desinteresados que trabajen quizas 
aislados y sin estimulo, o al menos sin el estimulo que procede del esfuerzo con- 
sciente, bien dirigido y cooperative El derecho de un continente solo puede 
formarse y desarrollarse por el mismo continente ; el Derecho internacional de 
America solo puede formarse y desarrollarse por los americanos, actuando de 
comun acuerdo e inspirados por ideales americanos. 

El senor Root, amigo de las Americas, Presidente Honorario del Instituto 
Americano de Derecho Internacional y Presidente de la Sociedad Americana de 
Derecho Internacional, me dio instrucciones especiales de que solicitara vivamente 
vuestra cooperation con los fundadores del Instituto Americano a fin de que 
este pueda convertirse en poderoso auxiliar para el desarrollo del Derecho inter- 
nacional ; que os pida que formeis sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional, 
afiliadas al Instituto Americano para hacer mas popular el Derecho internacional 
y diseminar sus principios, a fin de que las relaciones exteriores de las Americas 
puedan regirse por una ley que seria obligatoria para todas porque habria sido 
hecha, desarrollada y aceptada por todas. 

Para terminar permitidme indicar como es que el Instituto Americano podria 
ayudar a la Fundacion Carnegie en su gran mision pacifica. Al Instituto antiguo 
se le pidio que actuara como consejero de la Division de Derecho Internacional 
de la Fundacion. Dicho Instituto acepto la invitation y nombro un comite 
compuesto de los publicistas europeos mas eminentes e ilustrados, y asi la Division 
tiene la ventaja de contar con la mejor ayuda que puede obtenerse de Europa 
en cuanto a la clase y metodo de sus labores. El Comite Consultivo, que asi es 
como se llama este cuerpo, se reune mediante solicitud del Director de la Divi- 
sion de Derecho Internacional, y da su dictamen sobre las cuestiones que le son 
presentadas, o bien emite su juicio y da consejos de su propia iniciativa. En vista 



222 LA VISITA DE MR. BACON A LA AMERICA DEL SUR 

de los servicios inapreciables que presta dicho Institute* a la causa de la paz por 
medio del desarrollo del Derecho internacional, la Fundacion le hace una sub- 
vention generosa, que se emplea en parte en pagar los gastos de viaje de los 
miembros del Instituto, el cual no se reune en ningun lugar determinado sino 
que verifica sus sesiones anuales en distintos paises europeos, y tambien en parte 
para pagar los gastos de sus comisiones, y la preparation y publication de sus 
valiosos informes. 

Si el Instituto Americano se establece firmemente, con las sociedades nacio- 
nales afiliadas, «;no podria solicitarse de el que aconsejara a la Division de Derecho 
Internacional de la Fundacion en cuanto a todos los problemas de indole ameri- 
cana y a las empreses que se refieran a la America, y no podria el Instituto justi- 
ficar asi el apoyo monetario que fuera necesario en el mismo sentido que la sub- 
vention que se hace al Instituto Europeo? 

No me atrevo a prolongar demasiado este discurso, ya demasiado extenso; 
pero no puedo terminar sin encareceros sincera y personalmente y de todo corazon 
que trateis de ayudar al Instituto Americano para que desempefie la misma mision 
con respecto a la America y al mundo entero que el Instituto Europeo desempena 
con respecto a todos los paises, y para instaros encarecidamente que organiceis 
sociedades nacionales de Derecho internacional, afiliadas al Instituto Americano, 
sin las cuales este no podria iniciar sus beneficas e importantes labores, o si las 
iniciara, no podria terminarlas y llevarlas a cabo con completo y satisfactorio 
exito. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



015 812 594 8 






I 



